4700L Service Manual

H515/H551
SERVICE MANUAL
RICOH GROUP COMPANIES
PN: RCFM4700L
H515/H551
SERVICE MANUAL
H515
H551
SERVICE MANUAL
PN:RCFM4700L
It is the reader's responsibility when discussing the information contained within this
document to maintain a level of confidentiality that is in the best interest of Ricoh
Corporation and its member companies.
NO PART OF THIS DOCUMENT MAY BE REPRODUCED IN ANY
FASHION AND DISTRIBUTED WITHOUT THE PRIOR
PERMISSION OF RICOH CORPORATION.
All product names, domain names or product illustrations, including desktop images,
used in this document are trademarks, registered trademarks or the property of their
respective companies.
They are used throughout this book in an informational or editorial fashion only and for
the benefit of such companies. No such use, or the use of any trade name, or web
site is intended to convey endorsement or other affiliation with Ricoh products.
2000 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved.
WARNING
The Service Manual contains information
regarding service techniques, procedures,
processes and spare parts of office equipment
distributed by Ricoh Corporation. Users of this
manual should be either service trained or
certified by successfully completing a Ricoh
Technical Training Program.
Untrained and uncertified users utilizing
information contained in this service manual to
repair or modify Ricoh equipment risk personal
injury, damage to property. or loss of warranty
protection.
Ricoh Corporation
LEGEND
PRODUCT
CODE
COMPANY
RICOH
SAVIN
H515
GESTETNER
9768
FAX4700L
3960
H551
9878
FAX4800L
3695
DOCUMENTATION HISTORY
REV. NO.
DATE
COMMENTS
12/95
Original Printing
2/98
H551 (FAX4800L) Addition
7/98
Reprint
9/98
H132 Internet Fax Addition
Rev. 3/98
Table of Contents
OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION
1.1. SPECIFICATIONS
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.2. FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2.1. Features List . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2.2. Capabilities of Programmable Items . . . . .
1.2.3. Possible Combinations of Optional Equipment
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
1-2
1-2
1-6
1-7
1.3. COMPONENT LAYOUT . .

1.3.1. Mechanical Components
1.3.2. Electrical Components .
1. PCBs . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
1-8
1-8
1-9
1-10
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
2. Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
3. Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
4. Interlock Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
5. Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
6. Optional Equipment
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
1.4. OVERALL MACHINE CONTROL
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
1.5. VIDEO DATA PATH . . . . . . . . . . .

1.5.1. Transmission (PSTN) . . . . . . . .
1.5.2. Reception (PSTN) . . . . . . . . . .
1.5.3. Transmission (ISDN) . . . . . . . . .
1.5.4. Reception (ISDN) . . . . . . . . . .
1.5.5. Copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.5.6. Printing from the Optional Printer Interface
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
1-15
1-15
1-16
1-17
1-18
1-19
1-20
1.6. POWER DISTRIBUTION . . . . . . .

1.6.1. Distribution Diagram . . . . . . .
1.6.2. Memory Back-up Circuit . . . . .
1. SRAM/Real Time Clock (RTC) Backup
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
1-21
1-21
1-23
1-23
2. DRAM Backup
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS

2.1. SCANNER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.1.1. Mechanisms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
1. Document Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2. Pick-up and Separation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
3. Drive Mechanism
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
4. Stamping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2.1.2. Image Scanning
H515/H551
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
i
SM
Rev. 3/98
1. Sub Scan Resolution Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

2. Partial Image Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
3. Scanning Double-sided Documents . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
2.1.3. Video Processing . . . . . . . . .

2.1.4. Shading Correction and A/D Conversion
2.1.5. Process without Halftone . . . . . .
1. Background Detection . . . . . . . .
2. MTF . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
2-10
2-11
2-11
2-11
2-11
3. Thresholding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
4. Erasure of irregular dots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
5. OR processing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
2.1.6. Process with Halftone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12

1. Gamma correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
2. MTF
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
3. Halftone process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12

2.1.7. Data Switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
2.1.8. Inch-mm Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
2.2. PRINTING . . . . . . . .
2.2.1. Printing Process - Overview
2.2.2. OPC Drum . . . . . .
2.2.3. Charge . . . . . . . .
2.2.4. Laser Exposure . . . . .
1. Overview . . . . . . . .
2. Block Diagram
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
2-14
2-14
2-15
2-15
2-17
2-17
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
3. Error Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18

4. Print Density Adjustment
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
5. Toner Saving Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19

2.2.5. Toner Supply
2.2.6. Development
2.2.7. Paper Feed
1. Overview . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
2-20
2-23
2-28
2-28
2. Paper Lift Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29

3. Paper Size and Paper End Detection . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
4. Pick-up and Separation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
5. Drive Mechanism
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
2.2.8. Registration . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.9. Transfer and Separation . . . . . .
2.2.10. Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.11. Fusing . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.12. Page Separation and Data Reduction
SM
ii
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
2-35
2-37
2-40
2-41
2-45
H515/H551
Rev. 3/98
2.2.13. Resolution Unit Selection for Printing

. . . . . . . . . 2-47
2.2.14. Paper Size Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
2.3. SYSTEM FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
2.3.1. Energy Saver Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
1. Entering an Energy Saver Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
2. Going into Level 2 Mode from Level 1 Mode . . . . . . . . 2-51
3. Receiving a Fax Message in Energy Saver Mode . . . . . . 2-53
4. Sending a Fax Message or Copying in Energy Saver Mode . . 2-55
2.3.2. Automatic Service Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57
1. Service Call Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57
2. Excessive Jam Alarms
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58
3. Periodic Service Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59

4. PM Call
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60
5. Effective Term of Service Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60

2.3.3. Parallel Memory Transmission
2.3.4. Transfer Broadcasting . . .
2.3.5. Fax On Demand . . . . .
2.3.6. Hard Disk Filing System . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
2-61
2-63
2-66
2-68
2.4. PCBs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-69

2.4.1. MFCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-69
1. SCP (System Control Peripheral) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-69
2. LPC (Laser Printer Controller)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-69
3. Modem (Rockwell R144EFXL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-69

4. VPP4F (Video Processing Peripheral 4F) . . . . . . . . . 2-70
5. ROM
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70
6. DRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70
7. SRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70
8. Video SRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70
9. Voice A/D converter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70
10. Oscillators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70

11. IC Card Slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70
12. Jumpers, Switches, and Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70
2.4.2. MFDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72
1. Energy Saver CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72
2. FPD (Facsimile Power Driver)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72
3. EXIO1, EXIO2 (External I/O) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73

4. Analog circuit with HIC (Hybrid IC) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73
5. DTMF Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73
H515/H551
iii
SM
Rev. 3/98
6. DC/DC Converters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73

7. DRAM Backup
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73
8. Interlock Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73

9. Fuse and Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73
2.4.3. PSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74
2.4.4. NCU (USA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74
1. Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74
INSTALLATION
3.1. INSTALLING THE MACHINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.2. INITIAL PROGRAMMING
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.3. INSTALLING OPTIONAL UNITS . . . . . . .

3.3.1. Feature Expander Type 140 (80MB Hard Disk)
3.3.2. ISDN G4 Interface . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.3. Fax on Demand . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.4. Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.5. Printer Interface . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.6. Function Upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
3-2
3-2
3-5
3-6
3-9
3-10
3-12
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
4-1
4-1
4-2
4-4
4-4
4-4
4-5
4-5
4-6
4-7
4-7
4-8
4-8
4-9
4-10
4-10
4-11
4-11
SERVICE TABLES AND PROCEDURES

4.1. SERVICE LEVEL FUNCTIONS . . . . . . .
4.1.1. Bit Switch Programming (Function 01) . . .
4.1.2. Group 3 System Parameter List (Function 02)
4.1.3. Error Code Display (Function 03) . . . . .
4.1.4. Service Monitor Report (Function 04) . . .
4.1.5. Group 3 Protocol Dump (Function 05) . . .
4.1.6. RAM Display/Rewrite (Function 06) . . . .
4.1.7. RAM Dump (Function 06) . . . . . . . .
4.1.8. Counter Display/Rewrite (Function 07) . . .
4.1.9. Modem Test (Function 08) . . . . . . .
4.1.10. DTMF Tone Test (Function 08) . . . . .
4.1.11. NCU Parameters (Function 08) . . . . .
4.1.12. Modem Detection Test (Function 08) . . .
4.1.13. Ringer Test (Function 08) . . . . . . .
4.1.14. Operation Panel Test (Function 09) . . .
4.1.15. Xenon Lamp Test (Function 10) . . . . .
4.1.16. ADF Test (Function 10) . . . . . . . .
4.1.17. Printer Test Patterns (Function 11) . . . .
SM
iv
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
H515/H551
4.1.18. Scanner and Printer Mechanism Test Free Run (Function 11) . . . . . .
4.1.19. RAM Tests (Function 12) . . . . .
4.1.20. Software Download (Function 12) . .
4.1.21. Software Upload (Function 12) . . .
4.1.22. SRAM Data Download (Function 12) .
4.1.23. Saving Data Programmed in IC Cards
1. When downloading/uploading software .
Rev. 3/98
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
4-12
4-12
4-13
4-15
4-17
4-18
4-18
2. When replacing the MFCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19

3. When replacing the MFDU or other components . . . . . . 4-20
4.1.24. Service Station Fax Number (Function 13)
4.1.25. Serial Number (Function 14) . . . . . .
4.1.26. Hard Disk Initialization (Function 16) . . .
4.1.27. Hard Disk Formatting (Function 16) . . .
4.1.28. Hard Disk Test (Function 16) . . . . . .
4.1.29. G4 Parameter Programming (Function 17)
4.2. BIT SWITCHES . . . . .
4.2.1. System Switches . . .
4.2.2. Scanner Switches
. .
4.2.3. Printer Switches . . .
4.2.4. Communication Switches
4.2.5. G3 Switches . . . . .
4.3. NCU PARAMETERS
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
4-20
4-21
4-21
4-22
4-22
4-23
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
4-24
4-24
4-36
4-38
4-41
4-49
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
4.4. DEDICATED TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . 4-78

4.4.1. Programming Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78
4.4.2. Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79
4.5. SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82
4.6. SPECIAL TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS . . . . . . . . . . . 4-96
4.7. PM TABLE
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-97
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

5.1. COVERS . . . . . . . . .
5.1.1. Document Table and Tray .
5.1.2. Rear Cover Assembly . .
5.1.3. Left Cover . . . . . . .
5.1.4. Right Cover . . . . . .
5.1.5. Operation Panel Assembly
5.1.6. Top Cover . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
5-1
5-1
5-2
5-2
5-3
5-3
5-4
5.2. ADF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

5.2.1. ADF Roller Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
H515/H551
SM
Rev. 3/98
5.2.2. Separation Rubber Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

5.2.3. Separation Pressure Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
5.2.4. ADF Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
5.3. SCANNER . . . .
5.3.1. Exposure Glass
5.3.2. R1/R2 Rollers .
5.3.3. Xenon Lamp . .
5.3.4. Tx Motor . . .
5.3.5. Mirrors . . . .
5.3.6. Stamper . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
5-8
5-8
5-8
5-9
5-10
5-10
5-11
5.4. LASER PRINTING COMPONENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12

5.4.1. Laser Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
5.4.2. Laser Diode Unit and Hexagonal Mirror Motor . . . . . . . 5-13
5.5. DEVELOPMENT . . . . . . . .
5.5.1. Development Unit . . . . . .
5.5.2. Transfer Roller . . . . . . .
5.5.3. Main Motor and Gears . . . .
5.5.4. Toner End Sensor . . . . . .
5.5.5. Replacing the Development Unit
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
5-14
5-14
5-15
5-15
5-16
5-17
5.6. FUSING . . . . . . . . . .
5.6.1. Thermistor . . . . . . . .
5.6.2. Fusing Unit . . . . . . .
5.6.3. Hot Roller Strippers . . . .
5.6.4. Fusing Lamp . . . . . . .
5.6.5. Hot Roller . . . . . . . .
5.6.6. Pressure Roller . . . . . .
5.6.7. Thermostat and Thermofuse
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
5-20
5-20
5-20
5-22
5-22
5-23
5-25
5-25
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
5.7. PAPER FEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.7.1. Paper Feed Motor and Clutch Box . . . . . . . .
5.7.2. Paper End Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.7.3. Paper Feed Rollers, Paper Size Sensor, By-pass Feed
Sensor, and Relay Connector . . . . . . . . . .
5.7.4. Registration Roller and Bypass Feed Sensor Actuator
. . . 5-27
. . . 5-28
5.8. PCBs . . . . . . . . .
5.8.1. PSU . . . . . . . .
5.8.2. NCU, MFDU, and MFCE
5.8.3. Power Pack . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . 5-26
. . . 5-26
. . . 5-26
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
5-29
5-29
5-30
5-31
5.9. OTHERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32

5.9.1. Ozone Filter and Fan Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
5.9.2. Speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
SM
vi
H515/H551
Rev. 3/98
5.10. 100 SHEET PAPER CASSETTE (OPTIONAL) .

5.10.1. Relay Connector and Gear Cover . . . .
5.10.2. Paper End Sensor and Drive Components
5.10.3. Paper Size Sensor . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
5-33
5-33
5-33
5-34
5.11. SBU ADJUSTMENT

5.11.1. Replacement .
5.11.2. Tools Required
5.11.3. Preparation . .
5.11.4. Adjustment . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
5-35
5-35
5-35
5-35
5-36
5.12. IMAGE ADJUSTMENT .

5.12.1. Overview . . . . .
5.12.2. Scanner Parameters
1. Contrast . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
5-40
5-40
5-41
5-41
2. Margins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
5.12.3. Printer Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42
1. Margins (Main Scan Direction) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42
2. Margins (Sub Scan Direction) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
6. TROUBLESHOOTING
6.1. COPY QUALITY TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . .
6.1.1. Blank Copies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1.2. Black Copies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1.3. Dirty Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1.4. Uneven Image Density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1.5. Vertical Black Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1.6. Horizontal Black Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1.7. Vertical White Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1.8. Horizontal White Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1.9. Black Dots/Spots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1.10. White Spots in Black Image Areas . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1.11. Faint Copies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1.12. Vertical Black Band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1.13. Unfused Copies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1.14. Ghost Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1.15. Toner on the Back of the Printer Paper . . . . . . . . .
6.1.16. Misaligned Output (Data shifted to the right or left) . . . .
6.1.17. Misaligned Output (Image shifted vertically)/Reduced Image
6-1
6-2
6-3
6-4
6-5
6-6
6-7
6-8
6-9
6-10
6-11
6-12
6-14
6-15
6-15
6-16
6-17
6-17
6.2. MECHANICAL PROBLEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18

6.2.1. ADF/Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
1. Non Feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
H515/H551
vii
SM
Rev. 3/98
2. Jam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
3. Skew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
4. Multi-feed
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
6.2.2. Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21

1. Non-feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
2. Paper Jam - Inside the Printer
3. Jam - Fusing Exit
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
4. Skew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
5. Multi-feed
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
6.3. SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
6.4. ERROR CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30

6.5. ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS . . . . . . . . . . 6-38
6.5.1. Defective Sensor Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38
6.5.2. Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39
ISDN TYPE 140

1. INSTALLATION
1.1. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE * . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.1.1. User Level Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.1.2. Service Level Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.2. SWITCH SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1.2.1. Internal Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1.2.2. Parameter Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
2. SERVICE TABLES AND PROCEDURES
2.1. SERVICE LEVEL FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.1.1. G4 Internal Switch Programming (Function 01) . . . . . . 2-1
2.1.2. G4 Parameter Switch Programming (Function 02) . . . . . 2-2
2.1.3. Storing the ISDN International Access Code (Function 03) . . 2-3
2.1.4. Storing the First G4 Subscriber Number (Function 04) . . . 2-3
2.1.5. Storing the Second G4 Subscriber Number (Function 05) . . 2-3
2.1.6. Storing the First ISDN G3 Subscriber Number (Function 06) . 2-4
2.1.7. Storing the Second ISDN G3 Subscriber Number (Function 07) 2-4
2.1.8. Storing the G4 Subaddress (Function 08) . . . . . . . . 2-4
2.1.9. Storing the ISDN G3 Subaddress (Function 09) . . . . . . 2-4
2.1.10. Printing a G4 Memory Dump (Function 10) . . . . . . . 2-5
2.1.11. Printing a G4 Protocol Dump List (Function 11) . . . . . . 2-5
2.1.12. Printing the G4 System Parameter List (Function 12) . . . 2-6
2.1.13. Modem/DTMF Tone Tests (Function 13) . . . . . . . . 2-6
SM
viii
H515/H551
Rev. 3/98
2.2. BIT SWITCHES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

2.2.1. G4 Internal Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
2.2.2. G4 Parameter Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
2.3. DEDICATED TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS *
. . . . . . . 2-20
3. TROUBLESHOOTING
3.1. ERROR CODES . . . . . . .
3.1.1. D-channel Layer Management
3.1.2. D-channel, Layer 1 . . . .
3.1.3. D-channel Link Layer . . .
3.1.4. D-channel Network Layer . .
3.1.5. B-channel Link Layer . . .
3.1.6. B-channel Network Layer . .
3.1.7. Transport Layer . . . . . .
3.1.8. Session Layer . . . . . .
3.1.9. Document Layer . . . . .
3.1.10. Presentation Layer . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
3-1
3-2
3-2
3-2
3-3
3-3
3-4
3-4
3-5
3-5
3-6
3.2. G4CCU STATUS CODES * . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.1. Layer 1 (Physical Layer) . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.2. Layer 2 (Link Layer) . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.3. Network Layer (Layer 3) . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.4. Transport Layer (Layer 4) . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.5. Session Layer, Session Control Layer (Layer 5) .
3.2.6. Session Layer, Document Control Layer (Layer 5)
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
3-7
3-7
3-7
3-8
3-8
3-8
3-8
3.3. LEDs * . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9

3.4. BACK-TO-BACK TEST *
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
A. D-Channel Layer 1 Dump List

A.1. How to Print the Dump List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
A.2. How to Read the Dump List . . .
A.2.1. Data Format . . . . . . . .
A.2.2. Reading the Sample Dump List
A.2.3. Layer 1 Status . . . . . . .
1. Activation Procedure from the TE
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
A-2
A-2
A-4
A-7
A-8
2. Activation Procedure from the NT . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8

3. Termination Procedure from the NT
. . . . . . . . . . . A-9
B. G4 Parameter Locations
B.1. Initial Programming Items Comparison List . . . . . . . . B-1
B.2. Switch Locations Comparison List . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
1. Communication Parameter Display . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
H515/H551
ix
SM
Rev. 3/98
2. Default Communication Mode
. . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
3. Network Used for G3 Transmission
. . . . . . . . . . . B-2
4. Network Used for G3 transmission in G4-to-G3 Fallback . . . B-2

5. Automatic G4-to-G3 Fallback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
6. Specified Two Step Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
7. Cable Equalizer for ISDN Transmission . . . . . . . . . . B-3
8. Cable Equalizer for ISDN Reception . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
C. Conditions for Receiving a Call
PRINTER INTERFACE TYPE 100

1. OVERALL INFORMATION
1.1. CONTROLLER SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.2. ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.3. BLOCK DIAGRAM AND DATA PATH . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

1.4. POWER DISTRIBUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
2. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS
2.1. CONTROLLER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.1.1. Bi-Centronics TM Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.1.2. LocalTalk Interface (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.2. PIF . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.1. Command and Status Signals
2.2.2. Key/Display Emulation . . .
2.2.3. Print Density Control . . . .
2.2.4. Printer Interface Reset . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
2-4
2-4
2-5
2-5
2-5
2.3. VIDEO INTERFACE . .

2.3.1. Overview . . . .
2.3.2. Main Scan Direction
2.3.3. Sub Scan Direction
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
2-6
2-6
2-6
2-7
3.1. PRINTER INTERFACE UNIT . . . . . . . . . . .

3.1.1. Models FAX2700L,FAX2400L,& FAX3700L
. . .
3.1.2. Model FAX4700L . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1.3. Operation Panel Decals . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
3-1
3-1
3-2
3-3
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
3. INSTALLATION
3.2. SIMM MEMORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

3.2.1. Type 100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3.2.2. SIMM Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
SM
H515/H551
Rev. 3/98
3.3. OTHER OPTIONS (User Installable Items) . . . . . . . . . 3-5

3.3.1. PostScript TM Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
3.3.2. LocalTalk TM Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
3.4. CONNECTING UP THE PRINTER INTERFACE UNIT . . . . . 3-6

3.4.1. Parallel Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
3.4.2. LocalTalk TM Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
3.5. TESTING THE CONNECTIONS . . . .
3.5.1. Printer Interface to Fax Connection .
3.5.2. DOS Based Computers . . . . .
1. Checking the Printer Cable Connection
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
3-6
3-6
3-7
3-7
2. Printer Driver for DOS Applications . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

3. Printer Driver for Microsoft Windows . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
3.5.3. Apple Macintosh TM Computers
. . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

4.1. USER LEVEL FUNCTIONS . .
4.1.1. Level 1 Menus . . . . . .
4.1.2. Level 2 Menus . . . . . .
4.1.3. Dump Mode . . . . . . .
4.1.4. Controller Reset and Initialize
4.1.5. Factory Reset . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
4-1
4-1
4-1
4-1
4-2
4-2
4.2. SERVICE LEVEL FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

4.2.1. Printer Interface Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4.2.2. Counter Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4.3. BIT SWITCHES
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
4.4. RAM ADDRESSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

5. TROUBLESHOOTING
5.1. HARDWARE ERRORS
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.2. SETUP MISTAKES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

5.3. PRINT QUALITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
6. PARTS CATALOG
6.1. TYPE 100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
H515/H551
xi
SM
Rev. 3/98

1.1. CONTROLLER SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.3. BLOCK DIAGRAM AND DATA PATH . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

1.4. POWER DISTRIBUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
2.1. CONTROLLER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.1.1. Bi-Centronics Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.1.2. LocalTalk Interface (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.2. PIF . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.2. Key/Display Emulation . . .
2.2.3. Print Density Control . . . .
2.2.4. Printer Interface Reset . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
2-4
2-4
2-5
2-5
2-5
2.3. VIDEO INTERFACE . .

2.3.1. Overview . . . .
2.3.4. LEDs . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
2-6
2-6
2-7
2-7
2-8
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
3. INSTALLATION
3.1. PRINTER INTERFACE UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.2. OPTIONS . . . . . . . . .
3.2.1. SIMM MEMORY . . . .
3.2.2. PostScript SIMM . . . .
3.2.3. LocalTalk / Serial Interface
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
3-3
3-3
3-3
3-4
3.3. CONNECTING UP THE PRINTER INTERFACE UNIT . . . . . 3-5

3.3.1. Parallel Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
3.3.2. LocalTalk Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
3.4. TESTING THE CONNECTIONS . . . .
3.4.1. Printer Interface to Fax Connection .
3.4.2. DOS Based Computers . . . . .
2. Printer Driver for DOS Applications
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
3-5
3-5
3-6
3-6
. . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
3. Printer Driver for Microsoft Windows . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

3.4.3. Apple Macintosh Computers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
SM
xii
H515/H551
Rev. 3/98
4.1. USER LEVEL FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

4.1.1. Controller Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.1.2. Controller Initialize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.2. SERVICE LEVEL FUNCTIONS
4.2.1. Dump Mode+ . . . . .
4.2.2. Factory Reset . . . . .
4.2.3. Printer Interface Reset . .
4.2.4. Counter Reset . . . . .
4.3. BIT SWITCHES
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
4-1
4-1
4-2
4-2
4-2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4.4. RAM ADDRESSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

5. TROUBLESHOOTING
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.2. SETUP MISTAKES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

5.3. PRINT QUALITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
6. PARTS CATALOG
6.1. TYPE 200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
PC FAX EXPANDER TYPE 140

1. INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2. FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1. PC-FAX EXPANDER TYPE 140 FUNCTIONS
1
2
. . . . . . . . 2
2.2. PC-FAX EXPANDER TYPE 140 FEATURES . . . . . . . . . 2

2.3. FAXING APPLICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
2.4. TWAIN CAPABILITY
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
3. QUICK LOOK AT THE PC-FAX EXPANDER TYPE 140

Comparison
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
3.1. BASIC TRANSMISSION PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Quick Dial, Speed Dial, and Group Dial Prefixes
3.2. BASIC RECEPTION
. . . . . . 3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
3.3. USING THE FAX MACHINES SCANNER . . . . . . . . . . 4

3.4. USING THE FAX MACHINES PRINTER
. . . . . . . . . . 4
4. PC-FAX EXPANDER TYPE 140 DESCRIPTION . . .

4.1. USER PARAMETER SWITCH 14
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
4.2. DIRECT TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

4.3. DIRECT RECEPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
4.4. MEMORY TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
H515/H551
xiii
SM
Rev. 3/98
SAF Memory Overflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Memory TX File Quick Delete (Fax Function 27)
. . . . . . 9
4.5. MEMORY RECEPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

SAF Memory Overflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
4.6. SCANNING (Fax Function 17) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Notes on Ricoh CFM TWAIN
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
The Scan Auto route Option
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
4.7. PRINTING
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
4.8. DUAL ACCESS OPERATION MATRIX . . . . . . . . . . . 14
5. SERVICE LEVEL FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . .
15
5.1. PC-FAX EXPANDER PROTOCOL DUMP

(Service Function 05)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
5.2. PC-FAX EXPANDER DIU HARDWARE

TESTS (Service Function 18)
DIU Internal Test
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
DIU External Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
6. PC-FAX EXPANDER REPORTS AND LISTS
. . . .
19
6.1. TRANSMISSION CONFIRMATION REPORT - TCR . . . . . . 19

6.2. MEMORY TRANSMISSION COMMUNICATION REPORTS . . . 20
Result Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Failure Report
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
6.3. USER PARAMETER LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

6.4. SYSTEM PARAMETER LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
7. INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8. INSTALLATION SUGGESTIONS . . . . . . . . .
8.1. COMMUNICATIONS
22
24
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
8.2. FAXING APPLICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
APPENDIX A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
APPENDIX B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
26
64
PAPER FEED UNIT TYPE 140F

1.1. SPECIFICATIONS
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.2. COMPONENT LAYOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

2.1. PAPER PATH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
SM
xiv
H515/H551
Rev. 3/98
2.2. PAPER SIZE DETECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

2.3. PAPER END DETECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.4. CASSETTE LOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

2.5. PAPER FEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
2.6. INTERFACE BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
3. INSTALLATION
3.1. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
4. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

4.1. COVERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
4.2. PCB AND PAPER FEED MOTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
4.3. PAPER FEED ROLLER ASSEMBLY/PAPER FEED CLUTCH . . 11
4.4. SENSORS
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
PAPER FEED UNIT TYPE 140S

1. OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION
1.1. SPECIFICATIONS
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.2. COMPONENT LAYOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

2.1. PAPER PATH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2.2. PAPER SIZE DETECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
2.3. PAPER END DETECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.4. CASSETTE LOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.5. JAM RELEASE
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
2.6. PAPER FEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

2.7. INTERFACE BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
3. INSTALLATION
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

4.1. COVERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
4.2. PCB AND PAPER FEED MOTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
4.3. PAPER FEED ROLLER ASSEMBLY AND PAPER FEED CLUTCH 12
4.4. SENSORS
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
4.5. OTHERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
H515/H551
xv
SM
Rev. 3/98
H551 SERVICE MANUAL

1. OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.1 SPECIFICATIONS
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.2 FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

1.2.1 Features List
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1.2.2 Capabilities of Programmable Items . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

1.2.3 Possible Combinations of Optional Equipment . . . . . . 1-8
1.3 Overall Machine Control
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS

2.1 SEP/SUB Coding
. . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.1.1 Selective Polling (SEP/PWD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

2.1.2 Sub-address (SUB/SID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.2 JBIG Compression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2.3 Memory Reception Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2.4 SG3-V.34 Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
INSTALLATION
3. INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.1 INSTALLING THE MACHINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.2 INITIAL PROGRAMMING
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.3 INSTALLING OPTIONAL Units .

3.3.1 Hard Disk Unit (80MB) . . .
3.3.2 ISDN G4 Interface . . . .
3.3.3 G3 Interface . . . . . . .
3.3.4 Fax On Demand . . . . .
3.3.5 Paper Feed Unit (Front Flow)
3.3.6 Paper Feed Unit (Side Flow)
3.3.7 Counter . . . . . . . . .
3.3.8 Printer Unit . . . . . . .
3.3.9 Data Protection . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
3-2
3-2
3-4
3-7
3-11
3-12
3-13
3-14
3-15
3-18
SERVICE TABLES AND PROCEDURES

4. SERVICE TABLES AND PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.A USER PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-A
4.1 SERVICE LEVEL FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
SM
xvi
H515/H551
4.1.1 Bit Switch Programming (Function 01) . . . . .

4.1.2 Group 3 System Parameter List (Function 02) . .
4.1.3 Error Code Display (Function 03) . . . . . . .
4.1.4 Service Monitor Report (Function 04) . . . . .
4.1.5 Group 3 Protocol Dump (Function 05) . . . . .
4.1.6 RAM Display/Rewrite (Function 06) . . . . . .
4.1.7 RAM Dump (Function 06) . . . . . . . . . .
4.1.8 Counter Display/Rewrite (Function 07) . . . . .
4.1.9 Modem Test (Function 08) . . . . . . . . .
4.1.10 DTMF Tone Test (Function 08) . . . . . . .
4.1.11 NCU Parameters (Function 08) . . . . . . .
4.1.12 Modem Detection Test (Function 08) . . . . .
4.1.13 Ringer Test (Function 08) . . . . . . . . .
4.1.14 Operation Panel Test (Function 09) . . . . .
4.1.15 Xenon Lamp Test (Function 10) . . . . . . .
4.1.16 ADF Test (Function 10) . . . . . . . . . .
4.1.17 Printer Test Patterns (Function 11) . . . . . .
4.1.18 Scanner and Printer Mechanism Test - Free
Run (Function 11) . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1.19 RAM Tests (Function 12) . . . . . . . . .
4.1.20 Software Download (Function 12) . . . . . .
4.1.21 Software Upload (Function 12) . . . . . . .
4.1.22 SRAM Data Download (Function 12) . . . . .
4.1.23 Modem Software Upload (function 12) . . . .
4.1.24 Optional G3 Board Software Download . . . .
4.1.25 Optional G3 Board Modem Software Download .
4.1.26 Saving Data Programmed in IC Cards . . . .
4.1.27 Service Station Fax Number (Function 13) . .
4.1.28 Serial Number (Function 14) . . . . . . . .
4.1.29 Hard Disk Initialization (Function 16) . . . . .
4.1.30 Hard Disk Formatting (Function 16) . . . . .
4.1.31 Hard Disk Test (Function 16) . . . . . . . .
4.1.32 G4 Parameter Programming (Function 17) . .
4.1.33 Printing Confidential Files . . . . . . . . .
4.2 BIT SWITCHES . . . . .
4.2.1 System Switches . . .
4.2.2 Scanner Switches . . .
4.2.3 Printer Switches . . .
4.2.4 Communication Switches
4.2.5 G3 Switches . . . . .
4.3 NCU PARAMETERS
H515/H551
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Rev. 3/98
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
4-1
4-2
4-4
4-4
4-4
4-5
4-5
4-6
4-7
4-7
4-8
4-8
4-9
4-9
4-10
4-10
4-11
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
4-11
4-12
4-13
4-15
4-17
4-19
4-21
4-23
4-25
4-27
4-27
4-28
4-29
4-29
4-30
4-31
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
4-31
4-31
4-45
4-47
4-50
4-58
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66
xvii
SM
Rev. 7/2000
4.4 DEDICATED TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS
. . . . . . 4-76
4.4.1 Programming Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-76
4.4.2 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-77
4.5 SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-80
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
5. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.1 SPECIAL TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.2 PM TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
TROUBLESHOOTING
6. TROUBLESHOOTING
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6.1 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

6.2 ERROR CODES
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6.4 ROM HISTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16

6.4.1 FIRMWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY . . . . . . . . .
6-16
PARTS CATALOG
6. PARTS CATALOG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
SM
xviii
H515/H551
Rev. 9/98
INTERNET FAX OPTION H132

. . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.1 SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1.2 FEATURES
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.3 NETWORKING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

1.3.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3
1.3.2 LAN FAX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-4
1.3.3 200-DPI PRINTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-5
1.3.4 200-DPI SCANNER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-6
1.3.5 AUTOROUTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-7
1.3.6 FORWARDING
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-8
1.3.7 INTERNET FAX (PAPER TO PAPER) . . . . . . . . . .
1-9
1.3.8 INTERNET FAX (PAPER TO PC)
. . . . . . . . . . .
1-10
1.3.9 TRANSFER REQUEST THROUGH THE INTERNET . . . .
1-11
DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS H132

. . . . . .
2-1
2.1 INTERNET MAIL COMMUNICATION . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

2.1.1 MAIL TRANSMISSION
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1
2.1.2 MAIL RECEPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-4
2.1.3 MAIL BROADCASTING

(E-MAIL AND G3 FAX ARE COMBINED)
. . . . . . . .
2-6
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-7
2.1.4 TRANSFER REQUEST
2.1.5 AUTOROUTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-14
2.2 LAN FAX TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16

2.3 IC FAX APPLICATION UTILITIES . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-18
2.3.1 IC FAX MONITOR
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-18
2.3.2 IC VIEWER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-18
2.4 IMAGE DATA PATH
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-19
2.4.1 TIFF-F FORMAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-19
2.4.2 DCX FORMAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-21
2.5 NIC BOARD
2-22
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INSTALLATION H132
3. INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1 INSTALLING THE NIC FAX BOARD
H515/H551
xix
3-1
. . . . . . . . . . 3-1
SM
3.1.1 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
Rev. 9/98
. . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1
3.2 INITIAL SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4
3.2.1 PROGRAMMING ITEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4
3.2.2 INITIAL PROGRAMMING
3-5
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3 INITIAL CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-12
3.3.1 CHECKING THE LEDS
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-12
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-12
3.3.3 LOOP BACK TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-13
3.3.2 LINK CHECK
SERVICE TABLES AND PROCEDURES H132

4. SERVICE TABLES AND PROCEDURES . . . . . .
4.1 SERVICE LEVEL FUNCTIONS
. . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.1.1 LAN BIT SWITCH PROGRAMMING (FUNCTION 20)

4.1.2 LINK CHECK (FUNCTION 20)
4-1
. . .
4-1
. . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2
4.1.3 LOOP BACK TEST (FUNCTION 20)
. . . . . . . . . .
4-3
4.1.4 LAN PARAMETERS (FUNCTION 20) . . . . . . . . . .
4-4
4.2 LAN SWITCHES
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
4.3 SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
TROUBLESHOOTING H132
5. TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1 ERROR CODES FOR LAN COMMUNICATION . . .
5.2 LAN TEST FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1
5-1
5-9
5.2.1 LINK CHECK
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-9
5.2.2 LOOP BACK
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-9
5.3 TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES . . . . . .
5-10
5.3.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-10
5.3.2 TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . .
5-11
5.4 SYMPTOMS FOR TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . .

5.4.1 INTERNET FAX
5-14
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-14
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-17
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-18

5.4.3 COM REDIRECTOR
APPENDIX A H132
1. LAN BASICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
6.1 LAN CONFIGURATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
6.1.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SM
xx
A-1
H515/H551
Rev. 9/98
6.1.2 BASIC TYPES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-1
6.1.3 AVOIDING DATA COLLISION . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-2
6.2 ETHERNET
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4
6.2.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-4
6.2.2 ETHERNET FRAME STRUCTURE . . . . . . . . . . .
A-4
6.2.3 MAC ADDRESSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-5
6.3 LAN HARDWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6

6.3.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-6
6.3.2 RELAY DEVICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-6
6.4 TYPES OF RELAY DEVICES AND GATEWAYS . . . . . . A-8

6.4.1 REPEATERS
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-8
6.4.2 BRIDGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-9
6.4.3 SWITCHES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-10
6.4.4 ROUTERS
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-11
6.4.5 GATEWAYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-12
6.5 NETWORK PROTOCOLS
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-13
6.5.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-13
6.5.2 DATA TRANSMISSION
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-13
6.5.3 NAME SERVICE PROTOCOL . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-14
6.5.4 ROUTING PROTOCOL
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-14
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-14
6.5.5 TRANSFER PROTOCOL
6.6 TCP/IP
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-16
6.6.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-16
6.6.2 COMMUNICATIONS WITH IP PROTOCOL
. . . . . . .
A-16
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-16
6.6.3 IP ADDRESS
6.6.4 IP ADDRESS FORMAT
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-16
6.6.5 SUBNET AND SUBNET MASKS . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-17
6.6.6 TCP AND UDP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-18
APPENDIX B H132
1. E-MAIL BASICS
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-1
7.1 PRINCIPLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1

7.1.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-1
7.1.2 SENDING AND RECEIVING
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-2
7.1.3 E-MAIL NETWORKS
7.2 INTERNET MAIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4

7.2.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H515/H551
xxi
B-4
SM
Rev. 9/98
7.2.2 CHARACTER CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-4
7.2.3 MESSAGE ADDRESS NOTATION . . . . . . . . . . .
B-4
7.2.4 DNS AND DOMAINS
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-5
7.2.5 TRANSFER OF INCOMING MAIL . . . . . . . . . . .
B-6
7.2.6 VERIFYING INCOMING MAIL . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-7
7.3 MESSAGE HEADERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-8
7.3.1 REQUESTS FOR COMMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-8
7.3.2 HEADER FORMAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-8
7.3.3 HEADER TYPES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-9
7.3.4 FIELDS FOR SENDING E-MAIL . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-10
7.3.5 ADDRESSEE FIELDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-10
7.3.6 DATE
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-11
7.3.7 MISCELLANEOUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-11
7.4 SMTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-12
7.4.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-12
7.4.2 SMTP COMMANDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-12
7.5 POP
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-13
7.5.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-13
7.5.2 POP SERVER CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . .
B-13
7.6 MIME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-14
7.6.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-14
7.6.2 MIME FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-14
7.6.3 MIME HEADER
B-14
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.6.4 DATA TYPES SUPPORTED WITH MIME
. . . . . . . .
B-15
7.6.5 MULTIPART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-15
7.6.6 BINARY DATA ENCODING . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-17
7.6.7 BASE 64 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-17
APPENDIX C
CONFIGURATION SHEET FOR H132-41 INTERNET FAX
. . . C-1
PARTS CATALOG
PARTS LIST (H132) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
SM
xxii
H515/H551
ISDN TYPE 140

H551 OVERALL INFORMATION
FAX OPTION H132 OVERALL INFORMATION
H515 DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS

H551 DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
FAX OPTION H132 DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
TAB
POSITION 2
H515 OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION
TAB
POSITION 1
Rev. 9/21/98
H551 INSTALLATION
FAX OPTION H132 INSTALLATION
H515 SERVICE TABLES AND PROCEDURES

PC FAX EXPANDER TYPE 140
H551 SERVICE TABLES
FAX OPTION H132 SERVICE TABLES
TAB
POSITION 4
TAB
POSITION 3
H515 INSTALLATION

H551 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
FAX OPTION H132 TROUBLESHOOTING
TAB
POSITION 5
H515 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
FAX OPTION H132 APPENDIX A
FAX OPTION H132 APPENDIX B

H551 PARTS CATALOG
H132 PARTS CATALOG

FAX OPTION H132 APPENDIX C
TAB
POSITION 7
H551 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
TAB
POSITION 8
TAB
POSITION 6
H515 TROUBLESHOOTING
Important Safety Notices

Laser Safety
WARNING FOR LASER UNIT

This machine contains a laser beam generator. Laser beams can cause
permanent eye damage. Do not open the laser unit or look along the laser beam
path while the main power is on.
H516c502.WMF
Lithium Batteries (Memory Back-up)

CAUTION
The danger of explosion exists if a battery of this type is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or an equivalent type recommended by the
manufacturer. Discard used batteries in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions.
OVERALL MACHINE
INFORMATION
OVERALL
MACHINE
INFORMATION

1.1. SPECIFICATIONS
Type
Desktop type transceiver
Memory Capacity
ECM: 128 kbytes
Circuit
PSTN, PABX, ISDN (optional)
SAF:
Standard: 1 Mbytes: 80 pages
With 2 Mbyte option: 240 pages
With 80 Mbyte HDD option: 1200 pages
With 80 Mbyte HDD plus Function Upgrade Card: 3000 pages
Measured using ITU-T #1 test document
(Slerexe letter)
Connection
Direct couple
Document Size
Length:
105 - 420 mm [4.1 - 16.5 ins]
Up to 1.2 m [47.2 ins], manually assisted
Up to 14 m [46 ft] after adjustment
Width:
148 - 304 mm [5.8 - 12.0 ins]
Thickness:
0.05 to 0.2 mm [2 to 8 mils]
(equivalent to 50 - 80 g/m2)
Compression
MH, MR, EFC, MMR, SSC (MMR only with
ECM and G4)
SAF storage for memory tx: MMR and raw
data
Document Feed
Automatic feed, face down
Protocol
Group 3 with ECM
Group 4 (ISDN G4 option required)
ADF Capacity
50 sheets (using Letter size 20 lb paper or
A4 size 70 g/m2 paper)
25 sheets (using Legal/Double Letter size
20 lb paper or B4/A3 size 70 g/m2 paper)
Modulation
V.33/V.17(TCM), V.29 (QAM), V.27ter
(PHM), V.21 (FM)
Scanning Method
Flat bed, with CCD
Data Rate (bps)

G3: 14400/12000/9600/7200/4800/2400,
Automatic fallback
G4 (option): 64 kbps/56 kbps
Scan Width
219.5 mm [8.64 ins] 1% (A4/Letter)
260.1 mm [10.2 ins] 1% (B4)
308.9 mm [12.2 ins] 1% (A3/Double Letter)
I/O Rate
With ECM: 0 ms/line
Without ECM: 2.5, 5, 10, 20, or 40 ms/line
Scan Resolutions
Main scan: 200 dpi
Sub scan:
Standard - 100 lpi
Detail - 200 lpi
Fine - 400 lpi
Transmission Time
G3: 6 seconds at 14400 bps; Measured with
G3 ECM using memory for an ITU-T #1 test
document (Slerexe letter) at standard resolution
G4 (option): 3 seconds at 64 kbps; Measured with an ITU-T #1 test document (Slerexe letter) at standard resolution
Printing System
Laser printing, plain paper, dry toner
SM
1-1
H515
Paper Size and Capacity

Standard Cassette: 250 sheets
USA: Letter, Legal
Europe: A4, A5 sideways
Asia: A4, A5 sideways, F/F4
100 Sheet Cassette (Optional): 100 sheets
USA: Letter, Legal
Asia: A4, A5 sideways, F, F4
Paper Feed Unit (Optional): 500 sheets
USA: Letter, Legal
Note: Up to two PFUs can be installed.
Maximum Printing Width
208 mm [8.1 ins]
1.2. FEATURES
1.2.1. Features List
KEY:
O = Used, X = Not Used,
A = With optional memory 2M/4M only
B = With optional memory 80M (HDD) only
C = With optional function upgrade card only
D = With optional Fax On Demand kit only
E = With optional 100 sheet cassette only
F = With optional paper feed unit only
G = With optional counter only
H = With optional handset only (US only)
I = With optional printer interface unit only
J = With optional G4 kit only
Print Resolutions
Fax and Copy Mode:
Main scan: 400 dpi
Sub scan: 400 dpi
Printer Mode: 300 x 300 dpi
Equipment
ADF
Book scan
Built-in handset
Bypass feed: 1 sheet
Cabinet
Counter
Cutter
Handset
Hard disk
Manual feed mechanism (ADF)
Marker (Stamp)
Monitor speaker
Optional cassette: 100 sheets
Optional Fax On Demand kit
Optional paper feed unit
(up to 2 units)
Optional printer interface
Power Supply
USA:
115 20 Vac, 60 1 Hz
Power Consumption (Base Machine Only)
Standby:
Minimum 2 W (see Note)
Normal 30 W
Transmitting: 60 W
Receiving: 220 W (Maximum: 900 W)
Copying: 330 W (Maximum: 950 W)
Note: 2W mode is not available if any of the
following options are installed.
- Printer interface unit
- G4
- RS232C interface
Operating Environment
Temperature: 17 - 28 C [63 - 82 F]
Humidity: 40 - 70 %Rh
Video Processing Features

Contrast
Halftone (Basic & Error Diffusion)
MTF
Reduction before tx (B4 -> A4)
Reduction before tx (A3 -> B4)
Reduction before tx (A3 -> A4)
Scanning Resolution - Standard
Scanning Resolution - Detail
Scanning Resolution - Fine
Dimensions (W x D x H)
475 x 520 x 260 mm [18.7 x 20.5 x 10.2 ins]
Excluding handset, trays, and optional units
Weight
Approx. 42 lbs
Excluding CTM, handset, trays, and optional
units
H515
1-2
O
X
X
O
X
G
X
H
B
X
O
O
E
D
F
I
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
SM
Communication Features User Selectable

Action as a transfer broadcaster
AI Redial (last ten numbers)
Answering machine interface
Authorized Reception
Auto-answer delay time
Auto dialing (pulse or DTMF)
Auto Document
Auto image density selection
Auto paper size selection
Automatic Voice Message
Batch Transmission (max 6 files)
Broadcasting
Chain Dialing
Communication Result Display
Confidential ID Override
Confidential Reception
Confidential Transmission
Direct Fax Number Entry
Economy Transmission
Fax on demand
Forwarding
Free Polling
Groups (9 groups)
Group Transfer Station
Hold
ID Transmission
Immediate Redialing
Immediate Transmission
Keystroke Programs
Length Reduction
Memory Transmission
Multi-step Transfer
Next Transfer Station
OMR
On Hook Dial
Ordering Toner
Page Count
Page separation mark

Parallel memory transmission
O
Personal Codes
O
Personal Codes with Conf. ID
A or B
Partial Image Area Scanning
C
Polling Reception
O
Polling Transmission
O
Polling tx file lifetime in the SAF
O
Quick Dial
O
(Standard: 64 stations)
Reception modes (Fax, Tel)
O
Remote control features
X
Remote Transfer
A or B
Restricted Access
O
Secured Polling
O
Secured Polling with Stored ID
O
Override
Secure Transmission
X
Send Later
O
Silent ringing detection
X
Speed Dial
O
Telephone Directory
O
Tonal Signal Transmission
O
Transfer Request
O
Transmission Deadline (TRD)
A
Turnaround Polling
X
Two-step Transfer
X
Two in one
O
Voice Request (immed. tx only)
X
A or B
O
X
O
X
O
O
X
X
X
A or B
O
O
X
O
A or B
O
O
A or B
D
A or B
O
O
A or B
X
O
O
O
O
X
O
A or B
X
O
O
X
O
O
Communication Features Service Selectable

AI Short Protocol
Auto-reduction override option
Busy tone detection
Cable Equalizer
PSTN
ISDN
Closed Network (tx and rx)
Continuous Polling Reception
Dedicated tx parameters
ECM
EFC
Inch-mm conversion before
transmission
Scanning Resolution - Superfine

Smoothing to 400 x 400 dpi when printing
SM
O
O
O
O
J
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
O
1-3
H515
OVERALL
MACHINE
INFORMATION
Communication Features - Auto

Automatic fallback
O
Automatic redialing
O
Confidential reception
A or B
Dual Access
O
Substitute reception
O
mm-inch conversion when printing

Page retransmission times
Protection against wrong conn.
Resolutions available for reception
200 x 100 dpi
200 x 200 dpi
200 x 400 dpi
400 x 400 dpi
Resoln stepdown override option
Short Preamble
Well log
Other User Features
Area code prefix
Automatic service call
Center mark
Checkered mark
Clearing a memory file
Clearing a polling file
Clock
Confidential ID
Copy editing (Erase Center/Margin)
Copy mode
Copy Mode Restriction
Counters
Daylight Saving Time
Destination Check
Direct entry of names
File Retention Time
File Retransmission
Function Programs
Hard Disk Filing System
ID Code
Label Insertion ("From xxx")
Language Selection
LCD contrast control
Memory Lock
Memory Lock ID
Modifying a memory file
Multi Sort Document Reception
Multicopy mode
Own telephone number
Energy Saver (Night Timer and
standby mode)
H515
Other User Features

Print density control
Printing a memory file
RDS on/off
Reception Mode Switching Timer
Reception time printing
Reduction/Enlargement
Remaining memory indicator
Remote ID
Reverse Order Printing

RTI, TTI, CSI
Secure ID
Service Report Transmission
Speaker volume control
Specified Cassette Selection
Substitute reception on/off
Telephone line type
Toner Saving Mode
TTI/CIL on/off
User Function Keys (5 keys)
User Parameters
Wild Cards
X
Service
O
O
O
O
O
A or B
X
O
A or B
O
D
O
X
O
O
O
O
O
X
A or B
O
Reports - User-initiated
Authorized Reception List
Charge Control Report
File List
Forwarding List
Group List
O
O
X
X
X
X
O
O
O
O
X
O
X
O
A , B,
or D
A or B
O
X
O
O
F
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Reports - Automatic
Communication Failure Report
Confidential File Report
Error Report
Fax On Demand Report
Memory Storage Report
Mode Change Report
Polling Clear Report
Polling Reserve Report
Polling Result Report
Power Failure Report
TCR (Journal)
Toner Cassette Order Form
Transfer Result Report
Transmission Result Report
O
O
O
X
O
A or B
O
X
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
B, C
O
B, C
O
O
O
Service
A or B
A or B
X
A or B
O
O
O
1-4
SM
B, C
O
O
O
B
O
O
X
O
O
Service Mode Features

Auto Paper Select test
Back-to-back test
Bit switch programming
Book mode test
Buzzer test
Cable equalizer
Comm. parameter display
Counter check
Country code
DTMF tone test
Echo countermeasure
Effective term of service calls
Error code display
Excessive jam alarm
File Transfer
Hard Disk Utilities (Format etc.)
LCD contrast adjustment
Line error mark
Memory file printout (all files)
Modem test
NCU parameters
Operation panel test
Periodic service call
PM Call
Printer mechanism test
Printer test patterns
Programmable attenuation
Protocol dump list
RAM display/rewrite
RAM dump
RAM test
Ringer test
Scanner lamp test
Scanner mechanism test
X
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
B
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
SM

Sensor initialization
Serial number
Service monitor report
Service station number
Software upload/download
SRAM data download
System parameter list
Technical data on the TCR
Thermal head parameters
Transmission Status Report
User data transfer
1-5
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
X
O
H515
OVERALL
MACHINE
INFORMATION
Hard Disk File List
Personal Code List
Program List
Quick Dial List
Specified Cassette Selection List
Speed Dial List
TCR
User Function List
User Parameter List
1.2.2. Capabilities of Programmable Items

The following table lists how the capacity of each programmable item
change after the optional function upgrade card is installed.
Standard
H515
1000
200
2000
3000
64
1000
30
200
100
1000
164
(programmed in 64
Quick Dial keys plus
100 Speed Dial
codes)
200
2000
164
(programmed in 64
100 Speed Dial
codes)
256
1000
30
50
50
1-6
200
200
500
1200
64
100
9
200
64
(programmed in 64
Quick Dial keys)
Maximum number of communication
records for the TCR (Journal) stored in the
memory
Maximum number of addresses specified
for features such as Authorized Reception
and Specified Cassette Selection
Maximum number of personal codes
1000
300
Maximum number of destinations per

program
Maximum number of destinations used for
all programs
Maximum number of Auto Documents
200
200
Maximum number of memory files plus

polling rx files
Maximum number of memory files
Maximum number of destinations per file
Maximum number of destinations overall
Maximum number of pages overall
Number of Quick Dials
Number of Speed Dials
Number of Groups
Maximum number of destinations per Group
Maximum number of destinations dialed
from the ten-key pad overall
Maximum number of programs
With function
upgrade card
64
(programmed in 64
Quick Dial keys)
Item
500
SM
The following table indicates which items of optional equipment can be or

cannot be installed at the same time.
indicates that the two items of optional equipment can be installed at the
same time.
X indicates that the two items of optional equipment cannot be installed at
the same time.
IC Cards
A
A: Feature Expander 2M/4M
B: Feature Expander 80M (HDD)
C: Function Upgrade Card
D: Fax On Demand (FOD) Card
E: Flash/SRAM Data Copy Tool
(Service Tool)
B
X
D
4
X
4
4
B
X
C
4
D
4
4
4
4
E
4
4
X
X
Other
A
A: Paper Feed Unit Type F
B: Paper Feed Unit Type S
C: 100 Sheet Cassette
D: Printer Interface
E: G4
SM
X
4
4
4
1-7
E
4
4
4
H515
OVERALL
MACHINE
INFORMATION
1.2.3. Possible Combinations of Optional Equipment
1.3. COMPONENT LAYOUT

1.3.1. Mechanical Components
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
H515V001.wmf
No.
Name
Laser Unit
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
H515
SBU
R2 Roller
R1 Roller
Document Feed Roller
Separation Pad
Pick-up Roller
CTM (Cleaning Toner
Magazine)
Hot Roller
Hot Roller Strippers
Paper Feed-out Rollers
Fusing Pressure Roller
OPC Drum
Transfer Roller
Registration Roller
Development Unit
Paper Feed Rollers
Cassette (Standard)
Description
Consists of the LDDR (Laser Diode Driver), focusing
lens, F Lenses, hexagonal mirror motor, and other laser
optic components.
Scans the original.
Feeds the document out of the ADF.
Feeds the document across the scanner.
Feeds the document into the scanner.
Allows only one page to the ADF.
Picks up pages of the document from the document table
one at a time.
Consists of the toner cartridge, cleaning unit, used toner
tank, charge corona unit, and quenching lamp.
Heat from this roller fuses the toner to the copy paper.
Takes the paper off the hot roller after fusing.
Feeds the paper out of the printer.
Applies pressure to the paper during the fusing process.
The latent image is written on to the surface of the
organic photoconductor drum.
Applies a charge to the paper to pull the toner off the
drum and onto the copy paper.
performs the registration process.
Consists of the development roller, toner application
roller, toner supply bar, and transfer roller.
Pick up the top sheet of paper from the stack in the
cassette and feeds it into the printer.
Holds up to 250 sheets of paper.
1-8
SM
11
10
OVERALL
MACHINE
INFORMATION
1.3.2. Electrical Components
5
4
3
12
2
1
13
14
24
23
22
15
21
16
17
18
H515V003.wmf
20
19
29
28
30
27
31
26
25
32
33
SM
1-9
H515V004.wmf
H515
1. PCBs
No.
Name
Description
27
MFDU (M-zone Facsimile

Driver Unit)
Contains the drivers for the motors, a dc-dc converter,

the energy saving mode CPU, and other drive
electronics.
Controls the machine. It contains the main CPU, flash
ROM, system RAM, etc.
Contains a relay and switches for interfacing the
machine to the network and the handset.
Controls the operation panel.
28
26
30
25
7
32
MFCE (M-zone Facsimile

Control Engine)
NCU (Network Control
Unit)
OPU (Operation Panel
Unit)
PSU (Power Supply Unit)
LDDR (Laser Diode
Driver)
Power Pack
SBU
29
Supplies power to the machine, and switches the

fusing lamp on/off.
Drives the laser diode.
Supplies the high voltages to the corona wire, transfer
roller, and development rollers.
The sensor on this board reads and converts the light
reflected from the document into an analog video
signal.
2. Motors
No.
1
23
21
4
31
33
H515
Name
Tx Motor
Main Motor
Paper Feed Motor
Hexagonal Mirror Motor
Ozone Fan Motor
Fusing Fan Motor
Description
Stepper motor, drives the scanner.
Brushless dc motor, drives the drum, fusing unit,
development unit, and CTM.
Stepper motor, drives the registration roller and the
paper feed mechanisms in the cassettes.
High-speed dc motor, drives the hexagonal mirror in
the laser printer optics.
Removes the ozone-laden air from the vicinity of the
drum, and filters out the ozone out of the machine.
Cools the interior of the machine.
1-10
SM
No.
5
9
10
6
3
17
24
16
19
18
Name
Document Sensor
B4-width Sensor
A3-width Sensor
Scan Line Sensor
Toner End Sensor
Paper Size Detector
Paper End Sensor
Registration Sensor
Fusing Exit Sensor
Fusing Exit Cover Switch
Bypass Feed Sensor
15
Description
Detects the presence of a document in the feeder.
Detects the presence of a B4 width document (256mm,
10.1").
Detects the presence of an A3 width document
(297mm, 11.7").
Detects when a page is approaching the auto shading
position.
Detects when the toner has run out.
Detects the paper size installed in the cassette. The
user must install the correct size actuator.
Detects when the paper cassette is empty.
Detects when paper has aproached the registration
roller.
Detects when the paper has been fed out of the printer.
Detects whether the fusing exit cover is open or closed.
Detects when a sheet of paper has been inserted into
the bypass feed slot. The registration roller will then
feed the paper a short distance into the machine to
prepare for printing.
4. Interlock Switches
No.
20
22
Name
Interlock Switches:
Fusing Unit Cover
Top/Front Cover.
Description
If the fusing unit cover is open, the +5VLD power
supply for the laser diode will be interrupted. If the top
and/or front covers are open, the interlock switch will
interrupt the +5VLD power supply for the laser diode
and the +24VD power supply for the power pack,
motors, and other components.
5. Others
No.
8
12
14
13
11
2
Name
Stamper Assy
Thermostat
Thermistor
Fusing Lamp
Monitor Speaker
Zener Diode
Description
Stamps a red circle on each page that has been
successfully fed through the scanner.
Interrupts the ac power to the fusing lamp if the
temperature of the thermostat surface exceeds 400C.
Monitors the temperature at the hot roller surface.
Heat from the lamp will heat the fuser roller to fuse the
toner to the paper.
Allows the user to listen to the condition of the
telephone line.
Ensures that the charge given to the drum by the
charge corona wire does not exceed -750 volts.
6. Optional Equipment
No.
40
SM
Name
Counter
Description
Counts the number of prints.
1-11
H515
OVERALL
MACHINE
INFORMATION
3. Sensors
39
40
42
38
41
43
37
36
44
35
45
34
46
47
H515V510.wmf
No.
Name
Printer Interface
37
IC Card (Upper Slot)

42
43
IC Card (Lower Slot)

100 Sheet Cassette
44
Paper Feed Units

34
35
36
H515
G4 Interface (CiG4)
Microphone jack for the
Fax On Demand kit
RS232C Interface Board
Description
Allows the machine to be connected to a computer as
a laser printer. The following components are part of
the printer interface unit. (Refer to the Printer
Interfaces service manual for details.)
38 - Controller Board
39 - Interface Board
An IC card inserted into this slot will increase the SAF
memory capacity. Either a 2 MB or 4 MB DRAM card,
or an 80 MB hard disk (41) can be installed.
Either a Function Upgrade Card or a Fax On Demand
Card can be installed.
Increases the paper capacity by 100 sheets.
The following components part of the 100 sheet
cassette.
45 - Paper Size Detector
46 - Paper End Sensor
47 - Paper Feed Clutch
The machine can have up to two paper feed units.
Each unit will increase the paper capacity of the
machine by 500 sheets.
This interfaces the machine with an ISDN network.
Allows the users to record their own voice messages
for Fax On Demand applications.
Allows the machine to be connected to a computer as
an external fax device.
This option may not be available in some countries.
1-12
SM
Function
Upgrade
Card
Feature
Expander
2M
Feature
Expander
4M
HDD
Interface
OVERALL
MACHINE
INFORMATION
Fax On
Demand
Card
80MB HDD
Bus Interface
IC Card
(Type A)
IC Card
(Type B)
Lower Slot
RS232C
Interface
Upper Slot
Parallel Interface
Serial Interface
CiG4-SV
G4 Interface
DRAM
(2MB)
MFCE
Flash ROM
(2MB)
SRAM
(128kB)
SCP
Voice
A/D
Converter
CG ROM
(512kB)
DATA/ADDRESS BUS
Video SRAM
(24kB)
VPP4F
LPC
R144EFXL
Modem
SBU
Microphone
(FOD)
MFDU
LDDR
Laser Synch.
Hybrid IC
Printer
Interface
EXIO1
EXIO2
NCU
DTMF
Receiver
Speaker
Power
Saver CPU
Sensors
DC/DC
Converter
PSU
Clutches
Hexagonal Mirror
Motor
Main Motor
MFPD
Scanner Motor
Paper Feed Motor
Mechanical
Counter
Power Pack
CTM
Fan Motors
Mechanical
Components
100 Sheet
Cassette
Operation
Panel
PFUs
H515V501.wmf
SM
1-13
H515
1.4. OVERALL MACHINE CONTROL

The MFCE (M-zone Facsimile Control Engine) contains most of the logical
components for overall system control, and direct interfaces to the IC cards,
an RS232C interface*, and a G4 interface (CiG4-SV). The MFDU (M-zone
Facsimile Drive Unit) contains the interfaces to the power supply, sensors,
drive components, and optional equipment.
* The RS232C interface may not be available in some countries.
There are two CPUs in the machine: the main CPU (SCP) on the MFCE
board and the energy saver CPU on the MFDU board. In energy saver
mode, the main CPU will be switched off and the energy saver CPU is used.
The 2 MB (16Mbit) flash ROM contains the system software, which can be
updated through either an IC card slot or from the remote control center
using RDS (Remote Diagnostic System).
The CGROM (Character Generation ROM) contains all the character fonts
used on the display and in reports.
The 2 MB DRAM is used for the SAF memory, ECM buffer memory, work
area, and page memory. The SAF memory can be extended by 2, 4, or 80
MB with the installation of either an IC memory card or a hard disk.
The 128 kB SRAM contains the user and system parameters. The capacity
can be increased by an additional 512 kB with the installation of the Function
Upgrade card. The SRAMs are battery backed-up.
The MFCE board has two IC card slots.
The upper IC card slot can have any of the following items installed:
Feature Expander Type 140 - 2M (2 MB DRAM)
Feature Expander Type 140 - 4M (4 MB DRAM)
Feature Expander Type 140 - 80M (Hard disk interface with 1 MB
DRAM and 32kB SRAM*)
The lower IC card slot can have any of the following items installed:
Fax On Demand Card (512 kB SRAM*)
Function Upgrade Card (256 kB Flash ROM and 512 kB SRAM*)
Flash/SRAM Data Copy Tool (Service Tool)
* The SRAMs in the IC cards are battery backed up, in case the machine is turned off or the
machine goes into the 2-watt energy saver mode (referred to as Level 2 energy saver mode
in section 2-3). However, the data in the SRAMs are not guaranteed if the card is disconnected from the machine. Whenever the Fax On Demand card or Function Upgrade Card is
removed for the use of the service tool, perform the instructions listed in section 4-1 to avoid
any data loss.
H515
1-14
SM
1.5. VIDEO DATA PATH
Scanner
VPP4F
SAF
Memory
Buffer
Memory
OVERALL
MACHINE
INFORMATION
1.5.1. Transmission (PSTN)
CiG4
CiG4-SV
MFCE
CODEC
Line Buffer
DCMMR
SCP
Printer
Interface
Printer
(LDDR)
DCR
LPC
FIFO
Pa ge
Memory
ECM
Memory
Modem
NCU
To
PSTN
VPP4F: Video Processing Peripheral 4F

LDDR: Laser H515V502.wmf
Diode Driver
MFCE: M-zone Facsimile Control Engine
SAF: Store & Forward
DCMMR: Data Compression Modified Modified Read
SCP: System Control Periheral
ECM: Error Correction Mode
DCR: Data Compression & Reconstruction
FIFO: First In First Out
LPC: Laser Printer Control
NCU: Network Control Unit
Immediate Transmission:
The scanned data is sent to the VPP4F, where the data will undergo the
analog/digital video processing, the data is then sent to the DCR block in the
SCP through the DCMMR for compression.
The compressed data will then be sent to either the FIFO memory or the
ECM memory, before it is sent to the telephone line through the modem.
Memory Transmission:
The processed video data from the VPP4F is sent to the DCMMR block in
the SCP, where the data is compressed into MMR format or kept as raw
data. The data is then stored in the SAF memory.
At the time for transmission, the DCMMR block will decompress the
data from the SAF memory, then the DCR block will compress the data again
for transmission. The compressed data will be passed to either the FIFO
memory or the ECM memory, then to the telephone line through the modem.
Parallel Memory Transmission:
This feature allows the machine to scan a document into the SAF memory
and to send the same document simultaneously.
The machine will store the processed video data in the SAF memory and will
send a copy of the data through the modem at the same time.
Refer to section 2.3.3 for more details about this feature.
SM
1-15
H515
1.5.2. Reception (PSTN)
Scanner
VPP4F
SAF
Memory
Buffer
Memory
CiG4
CiG4-SV
MFCE
CODEC
Line Buffer
DCMMR
SCP
Printer
Interface
Printer
(LDDR)
DCR
LPC
FIFO
Page
Memory
ECM
Memory
Modem
NCU
From
PSTN
H515V503.wmf
LDDR: Laser Diode Driver
Data from the line will pass through the NCU to the modem. After the modem
demodulates the data, it will pass through either the FIFO memory or the
ECM memory. The data is then sent to the DCR block of the SCP chip to be
decompressed.
At the same time, the demodulated data is also sent to the SAF memory as
a backup, in case of a mechanical failure during printing. (This is known as
substituted reception.)
The decompressed data will then be sent to the page memory for printing.
After a page of data has been stored in the page memory, the data is sent to
the LDDR through the LCP for printing.
H515
1-16
SM
Scanner
VPP4F
SAF
Memory
Buffer
Memory
CiG4
To
ISDN
CiG4-SV
MFCE
CODEC
Line Buffer
DCMMR
SCP
Printer
Interface
Printer
(LDDR)
DCR
LPC
FIFO
Modem
Page
Memory
ECM
Memory
NCU
G3
G4
H515V504.wmf
G4 Immediate Transmission:
The scanned data is sent to the VPP4F, where the data undergoes the
analog/digital video processing, and is there sent to the DCR block in the
SCP through the DCMMR for compression.
The DCR block will then compress the data into MMR format, and will be
sent to the CiG4-SV board for G4 transmission.
G4 Memory Transmission:
The video processed data from the VPP4F is sent to the DCMMR block in
the SCP, where the data is compressed into the MMR format or kept as raw
data, it will then be stored in the SAF memory.
At the time for transmission, the DCMMR block will decompress the
data from the SAF memory, then the DCR block will compress it again into
the MMR format. The MMR compressed data will then be sent to the
CiG4-SV board for transmission.
G3 Transmission over an ISDN:
The analog data is converted into PCM (Pulse Coded Modulation) format in
the codec, it is then sent over the ISDN.
Parallel Memory Transmission:
This feature allows the machine to scan a document into the SAF memory
and to transmit the same document simultaneously.
The machine will store the processed video data in the SAF memory and will
send a copy of the data through the CiG4 board.
Refer to section 2.3.3 for more details about this feature.
SM
1-17
H515
OVERALL
MACHINE
INFORMATION
1.5.3. Transmission (ISDN)
1.5.4. Reception (ISDN)
Scanner
VPP4F
SAF
Memory
Buffer
Memory
From
ISDN
CiG4
CiG4-SV
MFCE
CODEC
Line Buffer
DCMMR
SCP
Printer
Interface
Printer
(LDDR)
DCR
LPC
FIFO
Modem
Page
Memory
ECM
Memory
NCU
H515V505.wmf

G4 Reception:
Data from the ISDN line is first sent to the SAF memory. The data will then
be decompressed at the DCR block in the SCP, and will be sent to the page
memory.
G3 Reception from the ISDN:
Data from the ISDN line first will be sent to the modem through the codec,
where it is converted into an analog signal. After the modem demodulates
the data, the DCR block in the SCP will decompress the data from either the
FIFO or the ECM memory.
At the same time, a copy of the demodulated data is backed up in the SAF
memory, in case of mechanical problems during printing (this is known as
substitute reception).
The decompressed data is then passed to the page memory for printing.
H515
1-18
SM
Scanner
VPP4F
SAF
Memory
Buffer
Memory
CiG4
CiG4-SV
MFCE
CODEC
Line Buffer
DCMMR
SCP
Printer
Interface
Printer
(LDDR)
DCR
LPC
FIFO
Modem
Page
Memory
ECM
Memory
NCU
H515V506.wmf

Single copy
The scanned data is sent to the page memory after video processing in the
VPP4F. After a page of data has been stored in the page memory, the data is
sent to the LDDR through the LIF block.
Multi-page copy
The scanned data will be sent to the SAF memory after video processing
(VPP4F) and compression (DCMMR). After all the pages have been stored
in the SAF memory, the data is sent to the DCMMR block again for
decompression, then it is sent to the page memory for printing.
SM
1-19
H515
OVERALL
MACHINE
INFORMATION
1.5.5. Copying
1.5.6. Printing from the Optional Printer Interface
Scanner
VPP4F
SAF
Memory
Buffer
Memory
CiG4
CiG4-SV
MFCE
CODEC
Line Buffer
DCMMR
SCP
Printer
Interface
Printer
(LDDR)
DCR
LPC
FIFO
Modem
Page
Memory
ECM
Memory
NCU
H515V507.wmf
After a page of data has been stored in the printer interfaces page memory,
the data is sent to the LDDR through the LCP.
The page memory on the MFCE is not used when printing from the optional
printer interface.
H515
1-20
SM
1.6. POWER DISTRIBUTION
+5V
CiG4
+24V
-9V
Top/Front
Cover
Fusing Exit
Cover
+5V
+5VD
+5VBAT
+5VLD
Memory Card/
HDD Interface
100 Sheet
Cassette
+5V
(HDD I/F only)
+24VD
F1
FOD/
Function Up grade
Card
+5V
+5VD
+12VP
SCP
(CPU)
+24V
+12VP
-9V
Interlock
Switches
+5V
+12VP
MFCE
+24VM
+5V
+24VMON
RS232C
I/F
OVERALL
MACHINE
INFORMATION
1.6.1. Distribution Diagram
MFDU
+24VM
Optional
Equipment
+5V
AC LIne
AC Inlet
+24VM
+5V
PFU
PSU
F1
+24V
Main
Switch
F2
+5V
AC Switching + 2 4 V
Circuit
+12VP
DC/DC
+5V
+24VM
Polygonal Mirror Motor
Main Motor
Scanner Motor
Paper Feed Motor
Ozone Fan Motor
Power Pack
Clutches
-9V
DC/DC
+5VE
Power Saver
CPU
PFU
DC/DC
+5VE
+24VD
Lamp Stabilizer
Stamper
Quenching Lamp
Fusing Fan Motor
Mechanical Counter
Machanical Counter
+12.4V
DC/DC
Fusing Lamp
Control
+24VD
+24VM
+5V
+5V
WAKEUP
+24V
+5VE
+12.4V
+5V
+5VE
-9V
+5VLD
+5V
NCU
SBU
Operation
Panel
LDDR
Sensors
+24V
+5V
Printer
I/F
H515V508.wmf
The PSU supplies +24V dc power to the FDU, and supplies ac power to the
fusing lamp directly.
The FDU converts the +24V dc power supply to the following supplies.
SM
1-21
H515
Power Supply
+24V
+24VD
+24VM
+12.4V
+12VP
+5V
+5VE
+5VLD
+5VD
+5VBAT
-9V
H515
Description
Normally on when the main switch is on.
Supplies +24V to the fusing unit on/off switching circuit. It is interrupted
if the top/front cover interlock switch opens.
Supplies the motors and power pack. This is interrupted by the main
CPU while the machine is in energy saver mode. It is also interrupted if
the top/front cover interlock switch opens.
Supplies the SBU. It is interrupted when the +5V supply is shut down by
the energy saver CPU.
Supplied to the Flash ROMs on the MFCE and the optional IC cards,
and it is used only when rewriting the contents in the Flash ROM.
It is interrupted when the +5V supply is shut down by the energy saver
CPU.
Interrupted by the energy saver CPU when the machine is in Level 2
(2-watts) energy saver mode.
Used when the machine monitors activation signals from the NCU,
document feeder, or operation panel when the machine is in energy
saving mode.
Supplies the laser diode. It is interrupted if the fusing exit cover interlock
switch or the top/front cover interlock switch opens.
Supplies the DRAM and the optional SAF memory card on the MFCE to
back up the stored data for one hour, if the power is switched off (if data
is stored). A rechargeable battery on the MFDU is used to generate
+5VD while the machine is turned off.
Supplies the system RAM and the real time clock inside the SCP on the
MFCE while the machine is turned off. A lithium battery is used to
generate +5VBAT while the machine is turned off. See section 1.6.2 for
details.
Supplies the CiG4 board through the MFCE. It is interrupted when the
+5V supply is shut down by the energy saver CPU. See section 1.6.2
for details.
1-22
SM
MFDU
MFCE
+5VD
DRAM (SAF)
IC Memory Card
CN1-16
+5V
1VDET
1SAFFLG
CN1-13
+5V
[C]
OVERALL
MACHINE
INFORMATION
1.6.2. Memory Back-up Circuit
+5VE
SCP
CPU
5RTCCS
[B]
RTC
+5VBAT
SRAM
CN1-17
+5VE
+5V
Voltage
Detector
Q7/Q25
DC/DC
1VDET
SW2
1SAFFLG
BAT1 [A]
BAT1 [D]
H515V509.wmf
1. SRAM/Real Time Clock (RTC) Backup

+5VBAT supplies the SRAM, which contains system parameters and
programmed telephone numbers, and the real time clock (RTC) inside the
SCP.
While the machine is on, even in an energy saver mode, the +5VBAT supply
is generated from the +5VE signal [B].
While the machine is turned off, the lithium battery (BAT1 on the MFCE [A])
is used as the +5VBAT supply.
The signal 5RTCCS informs the main CPU whether the back-up power
(+5VBAT) is being supplied from the battery or from the +5V power supply. If
the power is coming from the battery, the main CPU is disabled.
SM
1-23
H515
2. DRAM Backup
While the machine is on, the +5VD supply, which generated from the +5V
signal, supplies the DRAM.
In energy saver mode level 2, the energy saver CPU will disable the +5V
supply if there is no data in the DRAM. However, if there is data in the
DRAM, the +5V supply will not be disabled, and +5VD will continue to supply
the DRAM. If the machine has a hard disk, the +5V supply will only be killed
if there are no received fax messages or fax messages for transmission on
the disk.
While the machine is turned off, the rechargeable battery ([D] BAT1 on the
MFDU) will supply the voltage to the SAF memory. It can back up the DRAM
for an hour.
The battery [D] will generate about 3 volts (max. 3.2 volts). The dc/dc
converter will pump up this voltage to 5 volts so it can be used for DRAM
backup. The CPU will monitor the voltage of the +5VD supply with the
1VDET signal. When the battery has run down to 4.4 volts, the CPU will stop
the dc/dc converter by dropping 1SAFFG to low, stopping the DRAM backup.
Note that recharging the battery [D] takes one or two days after it has been
discharged.
Cross-reference
Energy Saver Modes: Section 2.3.1
H515
1-24
SM
DETAILED SECTION
DESCRIPTIONS

2.1. SCANNER
2.1.1. Mechanisms
[A]
[B]
[C]
DETAILED
SECTION
DESCRIPTIONS
1. Document Detection
[D]
H515D002.wmf
H516D500.wmf
The machine will detect when a document has been placed in the ADF and
the documents width is monitored by the document sensor [A], the B4 width
sensor [B], and the A3 width sensor [C].
The sensors will determine the document width as shown in the table below.
Document
Size
A4/
Letter
B4
A3/
Double Letter
Document
Sensor
B4-width
Sensor
A3-width
Sensor
On
Off
Off
On
On
Off
On
On
On
Actual Document Width

Range
Less than 235 mm
(Less than 9.25")
235 mm to 268 mm
(9.25" to 10.55")
More than 268 mm
(More than 10.55")
The fold-down extension [D] is used to support longer documents.
SM
2-1
H515
2. Pick-up and Separation
[F]
[D]
[A]
[E]
[B]
[C]
H515D003.wmf
Plate [A] will align the leading edges of the pages of the document. When
the tx motor starts rotating, the mechanical clutch mechanism in the ADF
roller unit will lift up the pick-up roller [B] to feed the bottom sheet of the document. Then, the feed roller [C] will feed the sheet into the scanner. The
separation rubber plate [D] will prevent the feed roller from feeding more
than one sheet at a time.
Because the line speed of the R1 roller [E] is 3 times faster than the feed
and pick-up rollers, the release mechanism [F] will release the feed and pickup rollers from the motor drive. This will cause the rollers turn at the same
speed as the R1 roller, because they are still gripping the paper.
Cross reference
ADF mechanical clutch mechanism: Group 3 Facsimile Manual, page 2-2-8
After all the pages have been scanned, the tx motor [G] will reverse direction
to move the ADF roller unit [H] down into the standby position.
[G]
[H]
H515D005.wmf
H515
2-2
SM
3. Drive Mechanism
[D]
[E]
[A]
[C]
DETAILED
SECTION
DESCRIPTIONS
[B]
[F]
H515D004.wmf
The tx motor [A] drives the pick-up roller [B], feed roller [C], R1 roller [D], and
R2 roller [E] through the timing belt [F].
The scanning speed for each resolution mode is as follows.
Resolution
Standard - Storage to SAF (Memory Tx or Multi-copy
mode)
Standard - Immediate Tx or Single copy mode
Detail
Fine
Scan speed (/A4)

1.47 s
2.95 s
2.95 s
5.90 s
The maximum acceptable document width is 304 mm (12.0") wide.

The maximum acceptable document page length can be adjusted to 0.6 m
(23.6"), 1.2 m (47.2"), or 14 m (46 ft). The default setting is 1.2 m.
Cross reference
Maximum document length: Scanner Switch 00, bits 2 and 3.
SM
2-3
H515
Error Conditions
The machine detects a document jam if any of the following conditions occurs.
Jam Condition
Non-feed
Incorrect sensor
conditions
Maximum document
length exceeded
Error at power on
Error during feed-out
Cover open
Manual interruption
H515
Description
The scan line sensor did not turn on within 3
seconds of the start of pre-feeding.
The scan line sensor switches on while the
document sensor is off.
The scan line sensor did not turn off after the
maximum document length had been fed.
The machine detected a document at power up.
The machine detected a document placed in the
ADF while the machine was feeding out the final
page of the document, or while attempting to feed
a jammed document just after the machine was
switched on.
The ADF cover and/or printer cover was opened
while the machine was working.
The machine detected that the Stop key was
pressed during scanning.
2-4
Error
Code
1-00
1-01
1-10
1-17
No error
code
No error
code
SM
4. Stamping
MFDU
SCP
(CPU)
+24VD
DETAILED
SECTION
DESCRIPTIONS
MFCE
CN10-6
LPC
EXIO-1
24
CN10-5
[A]
Serial Interface
Bus Interface
H515D501.wmf
The original will stop at the stamping position after the page was transmitted
(immediate transmission) or scanned into memory (memory transmission)
was successfully or unsuccessflully.
If the Stamp LED is on, the CPU will drop the voltage at CN10-5 for 500 ms
to activate the stamper solenoid [A]. Then, the original is fed out of the scanner.
If the Stamp LED is off, the machine will feed out the original without stamping.
This feature can be switched on or off by the user.
SM
2-5
H515
2.1.2. Image Scanning *
[B]
[F]
[G]
[A]
[E]
[C]
[D]
H515D006.wmf
The scanner consists of a xenon lamp [A], exposure glass [B], mirrors ([C],
[D] and [E]), lens [F], and SBU [G].
The light reflected from the document is focused onto the CCD (Charge Coupled Device) on the SBU [G] through mirrors ([C], [D] and [E]) and lens [F].
1. Sub Scan Resolution Conversion
Standard: The machine will feed the document in 7.7 line/mm steps. In text
mode, it will scan in accordance with the setting of scanner bit switch 00 - bit
4. In halftone mode, it will skip every other line.
Immediate tx/ Copying

Scanning to memory
Scanner bit switch 00

Bit 4 = 0
Bit 4 = 1
Scan - 7.7 l/mm
Scan - 3.85 l/mm
Tx/Copy - 3.85 l/mm
Tx/Copy - 3.85 l/mm
(OR processed)
(Every other line is skipped)
OR processing is always
disabled.
Detail: The machine will feed and scan the document in 7.7 line/mm steps.
The scanned lines are transmitted without any conversion.
Fine: The machine will feed and scan the document in 15.4 line/mm steps.
The scanned lines are transmitted without any conversion. In memory transmission, if the other terminal cannot receive a message at Fine resolution,
alternate lines (even-numbered lines) are deleted before transmission.
H515
2-6
SM
2. Partial Image Scanning *
Scan Skip Length

(L1)
Scanning Area
DETAILED
SECTION
DESCRIPTIONS
Scan Skip Area
Scan Length
(L2)
Top Margin (2 mm)
Bottom Margin (2 mm)

H515D504.wmf
When partial image scanning is enabled, the machine will only scan the area
"L2 "after the machine skips the area "L1".
L1 - Scan skip length
L2 - Scan length
Error Condition (Error Code 1-00)
If the scan line sensor turns off before the machine starts scanning the
document (the document is too short), the machine will detect an error.
Note: This function cannot be used with copying, immediate transmission, or
scanning an OMR sheet.
Cross Reference
Partial image scanning on/off - User parameter 06, bit 5
Programming the scan skip length and scan length - User function 74
SM
2-7
H515
3. Scanning Double-sided Documents

When this feature is enabled, the machine will scan all of the odd-numbered
pages first, then will scan the even-numbered pages. (The user has 60 seconds to prepare the even-numbered pages after the odd-numbered pages
have been scanned.)
After all pages have been scanned, the machine will sort the scanned pages
into the correct sequence inside the SAF memory.
Original Document
1
Even-numbered Pages
1
Odd-numbered Pages
6
Sorting
x
y
1
H515D505.wmf
In the example, if the last page of the original is a blank page, the machine
will send 6 pages if the user scans the last page, or will send 5 pages if the
user does not scan the last page (the machine will warn the user that the
numbers of odd and even pages do not match in this case).
The transmitted page sequence will be correct in each case.
Original Document
1
Even-numbered Pages
1
Odd-numbered Pages
Blank
2
6
Sorting
x
y
1
6
Blank
H515D506.wmf
H515
2-8
SM
The error conditions are listed below.
60 seconds has passed after

scanning all of the odd-numbered
pages.
Numbers of odd and
even-numbered pages were
different.
The Stop key was pressed during
scanning.
Machines Action
Asks the user whether the
machine can send the scanned
pages, or erase them.
Erases all the scanned pages and
prints a File Reserve Report with
an error message.
Asks the user whether the
machine can send the scanned
pages, or erase them.
Stops scanning and returns to
standby mode.
Error Code
5-21
None
DETAILED
SECTION
DESCRIPTIONS
Condition
Memory overflows during
scanning.
None
None
Note: This function cannot be used with copying or immediate transmission.

Note
Scanning double-sided documents on/off can only be selected with a User Function Key.
SM
2-9
H515
2.1.3. Video Processing
SBU
MFDU
MFCE
+12.4V
CN71-2
Amp.
VIDEO
PH1B
CCD
Driver
RSB
SHB
VPP4F
CN71-7
Analog
Process
CN1-36
CN71-3
CN1-35
CN71-4
CN1-38
CN71-5
CN1-37
A/D
Conversion
Digital
Process
Video
SRAM
h515d502.wmf
CCD
A/D Conversion/
Shading Correction
No
Halftone ?
Yes
Background
Detection
Gamma Correction
MTF
MTF
Thresholding
Halftoning
Dither
or Error Diffusion
Erasure of Irregular
Dots
Halftone
Image
OR Processing
Image/Text
Separation
Text
Output
H515D503.wmf
H515
2-10
SM
2.1.4. Shading Correction and A/D Conversion

Before scanning a page, the machine will scan the shading plate and keep
the peak voltage for each pixel of the CCD. The VPP4F will first convert the
analog data into an 8-bit digital data. At the same time, the VPP4F performs
the shading correction using the peak voltage that was detected when scanning the shading plate.
DETAILED
SECTION
DESCRIPTIONS
Cross-reference
Group 3 Facsimile Manual, section 2-3
2.1.5. Process without Halftone

1. Background Detection
Each pixel is tested in relation to its neighbors to determine whether it

is background noise and should be deleted.
2. MTF
MTF (Modulation Transfer Function) can reproduce details such as thin

lines, points, and complex characters.
3. Thresholding
Each video data element is compared against the threshold level,

which depends on the contrast selected by the user. If an element is
lighter than the threshold level, it is compared to a white (0) , otherwise
it will become a black (1).
4. Erasure of irregular dots
After being converted to white or black by the above thresholding, if an

element is irregular as compared to the surrounding pixels, it is
outputed in the opposite color. The central pixel is compared with the
surrounding eight pixels to determine whether this process is
necessary. There are ten cases, as shown below, in which conversion
is done. This will result in a noise-free and clean image.
H515D647.wmf
5. OR processing
SM
2-11
H515
When the user selects Standard or Detail resolution, the VPP4F will
perform the OR processing to convert the scanned resolution into the
resolution required for transmission.
2.1.6. Process with Halftone

1. Gamma correction
Gamma correction corrects the response of the image sensor to the

various shades in the gray scale from black to white. Also, it converts
each pixel into a 6-bit data (64 levels) for the halftone process.
2. MTF
MTF (Modulation Transfer Function) can reproduce details such as thin

lines, points, and complex characters.
3. Halftone process
Each pixel is converted to six-bit data (0 - 63) using either the dither or
the error diffusion formula. At the same time, if the pixel is on a edge of
a image pattern, it is enhanced to provide a sharp outline.
Then, each pixel is thresholded with the corresponding threshold in a
dither matrix or error diffusion matrix.
2.1.7. Data Switching
When halftone is used and image/text separation is enabled, the VPP4F will
perform both the halftoning procedure and the image/text separation procedure to each pixel in parallel. At the end of these processes, the VPP4F will
choose the data from one of these processes.
Cross Reference
Scanner switches 00 to 08 for video processing parameters
H515
2-12
SM
2.1.8. Inch-mm Conversion

The machines scanner is designed in inch units, but can convert the
scanned data into mm-format, if the other terminal does not have an inchbased printer.
G3 Immediate Transmission
Rx terminals resolution
units
inch-mm
ON
conversion
OFF
Unknown
inch
mm
inch and mm
mm
inch
inch
inch
mm
inch
inch
inch
G3 Memory Transmission
If the message was scanned in inch resolution units.
units
inch-mm
ON
conversion
OFF
Unknown
inch
mm
inch and mm
mm
inch
inch
inch
mm
inch
inch
inch
If the message was scanned in mm resolution units.

(e.g., Messages for transfer and forwarding scanned by another terminal)
units
inch-mm
ON
conversion
OFF
SM
Unknown
inch
mm
inch and mm
mm
mm
inch
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
2-13
H515
DETAILED
SECTION
DESCRIPTIONS
The following tables show the actual transmitted data resolution units in various cases.
2.2. PRINTING
2.2.1. Printing Process - Overview
H515D550.wmf
This machine uses a "write to black" system, using negative toner.

The charge corona wire supplies the drum surface a negative charge
of about -750 V.
The exposed area (latent image) on the drum lowers the voltage to
about -100 V.
The development roller carries toner to the latent image on the drum
surface. The bias voltages during printing are as follows:
Toner application roller : -700 V
Development roller: -400 V
The transfer roller pulls the toner from the drum onto the paper.
A constant current of +4 A is applied. The antistatic brush is used to
help separate the paper from the drum.
The cleaning blade removes any toner remaining on the drum after the
image is transferred to the paper.
The quenching lamp reduces the negative charge on the drum to about
-50 V.
H515
2-14
SM
2.2.2. OPC Drum

[A]
[B]
[E]
[C]
H515D604.wmf
An organic photoconductor drum [A] is used in this machine. The diameter of

the drum is 30 mm. It is driven by the main motor [B] through a gear train.
The toner application roller [C], development roller [D], and transfer roller [E]
are also driven by the same gear train. The drum unit can be replaced by the
user.
2.2.3. Charge
[C]
[E]
[A]
[D]
[B]
H515D605.wmf
The CTM (Cleaning Toner Magazine) contains a charge corona unit. The
corona wire [A] generates negative ions when the power pack [B] applies a
constant current of -305 5 A (the voltage is about -5.3 kV). The grid plate
[C] ensures that the charge is uniformly spread out. The zener diode [D]
ensures that the charge on the drum does not exceed -750 50 V.
The charge corona unit contains a wire cleaner [E] for user maintenanace.
The ozone fan on the left hand side of the machine provides air flow to the
charge corona unit. The ozone filter (a paper filter coated with carbon)
decomposes the ozone that is generated around the drum by the corona
discharge.
H515
2-15
SM
DETAILED
SECTION
DESCRIPTIONS
[D]
Charger Leak Detection:

The machine detects a charger leak error when MFDU CN21-8 stays low for
3 seconds or more (6 seconds or more at power on) during either in standby
mode or while the corona wire is being charged. When this occurs, the
machine will warn the customer by lighting the Call Service indicator (error
code 9-17).
Charge Control
MFDU
Serial Interface
Bus Interface
+24VM
+24V
MFCE
+24VMON
CN21-1
Power
Pack
ON
CN21-3
Driver
(QA1)
SCP
(CPU)
EXIO-1
(IC3)
LPC
LEAK
EXIO-2
IC4
CN21-8
-698V
Drum
H515D510.wmf
In this machine, a higher corona wire current is used to counter black bands
on copies. The charge on the drum will exceed the zener diode voltage
because of this higher current.
The leak signal is sent if the power pack is on, and the drum is not being
properly charged.
H515
2-16
SM
2.2.4. Laser Exposure

1. Overview
[E]
[F]
DETAILED
SECTION
DESCRIPTIONS
[D]
[B]
[A]
[C]
H515D606.wmf
The components of the laser section are basically the same as those
described in section 4-3-3 in the Group 3 Facsimile manual. The drum [A] is
positioned in the same plane as the laser unit, so there is no need of a
second mirror to change the optical path.
POINTS TO NOTE:
The focusing lens [B] is a barrel toroidal lens.
The shield glass [C] is used to prevent toner and dust from entering the
laser optics area.
An optical fiber [D] passes the reflected laser beam to the laser sychronization detector circuit in the MFDU.
The speed of the hexagonal mirror motor [E] depends on the printing
resolution:
Mode
Fax - mm mode (16 x 15.4 dots/mm)
Copy and fax - inch mode (400 x 400 dots/inch)
Printer mode (300 dpi)
Speed
10436.45 rpm
10636.45 rpm
7977.8 rpm
The strength of the beam emitted from the LD unit [F] is 5 mW at a

wavelength of 780 nm.
The dimensions of the dot on the drum are 85 m by 85 m.
The charge on the exposed areas of the drum drops to about -100 V, while
on non-exposed areas it remains at about -750 V.
Cross reference
Group 3 Facsimile Manual: section 4-3-3
H515
2-17
SM
2. Block Diagram
MFDU
LDDR
SCP
(CPU)
LD Enable
1-2
Laser
Diode
Controller
26-6
1-39
26-4
1-40
26-2
1-41
DATA
1-4
Control
1-6
MFCE
Laser
Diode
Mirror Motor Lock
Hexagonal
Mirror
Motor
EXIO-2
(IC4)
15-4
Mirror Motor Enable
EXIO-1
(IC3)
15-3
Fiber
Optical Fibre
PD1
LPC
Laser
Synch.
Detector
1-42
Serial Interface
Bus Interface
H515D511.wmf
The LPC on the MFCE board monitors and controls the laser diode timing
(MFDU CN26-2) and transfers data for printing to the laser diode (MFDU
CN26-4).
Cross reference
Group 3 Facsimile Manual: page 4-3-13
3. Error Conditions
LD Failure:
The machine will detect a LD failure when the Laser Synchronization signal
is not detected within 10 ms of the LD ready signal. When this occurs, the
machine will warn the customer by displaying the Call Service indicator
(error code 9-20). Refer to section 6.3: Service call conditions.
Mirror Motor Failure:
The machine will detect a mirror motor error when MFDU CN15-4 does not
go low within 10 seconds of the hexagonal mirror motor being turned on.
The machine will also detect a mirror motor error when MFDU CN15-4 goes
back to a high for 3 seconds or more during mirror motor operation. When
either error occur, the machine will warn the customer by displaying the Call
Service indicator (error code 9-23). Refer to section 6.3: Service call
conditions.
H515
2-18
SM
4. Print Density Adjustment
Print Image Density (User parameter 12, Bits 3 and 4)

Normal
Lighten
Darken
80 %
40 %
160 %
80 %
40 %
160 %
100 %
40 %
160 %
20 %
20 %
100 %
Mode
Normal
Halftone
Normal
Halftone
Copy Mode
Fax Mode
To change the pulse width, (duration) the duty cycle of the laser pulse is
changed. For example, to make the print density 40% of normal, the laser is
only kept on for 40% of the normal duration for each pixel.
5. Toner Saving Mode
[E]
[D]
[G]
[F]
H515D649.wmf
Toner saving is done by reducing the number of dots actually printed, not by
varying the development bias. In toner saving mode, the image data is
filtered through the following four-line matrix.
1st
2nd
3rd
4th
line
line
line
line
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
(1: Actual data printed, black or white; 0: Always a white pixel)
H515
2-19
SM
DETAILED
SECTION
DESCRIPTIONS
The SCP chip controls the print image density by changing the laser pulse
width to adjust the width of the dots across the page. The beam strength is
not adjusted in this model. The following table shows the relationship
between the pulse width and the image density.
Note: Toner saving mode is only used when printing fax messages and
reports. (However, toner saving is disabled when receiving a halftone mode message in NSF/NSS mode.)
When toner saving mode is selected, the print image density is
automatically set to "Normal"; because in some cases, the image
may become invisible if the Lighter setting is used.
Cross Reference
Toner Saving Mode: User parameter 12, bit 2
Edge Enhancement
In toner saving mode, the machine will print a black pixel whenever the data
changes from white to black in the main scan direction, to ensure that the
edges on the image are printed more clearly.
2.2.5. Toner Supply
[A]
[B]
[C]
H515D617.wmf
This machine uses monocomponent toner, which is composed of resin and

ferrite. The toner mixing bar [A] stirs and carries the toner to the toner supply
roller [B]. The toner supply roller supplies the toner to the development unit.
The main motor [C] drives the toner supply mechanism through a gear train.
Toner is supplied to the development unit from the outer openings [D, E] in
the CTM. The spiral mechanism [F] on the toner supply bar distributes toner
through the development unit.
The openings in the central area of the CTM [G] allows the toner to circulate
upwards from the development unit. This circulation prevents an excessive
toner supply to the development unit and ensures that the toner remains
fresh. This helps to prevent blurred images.
H515
2-20
SM
Initial Toner Supply Mode

When the first CTM (Cleaning Toner Magazine) is installed in a new
machine, the machine will automatically supply toner to the development unit
for 90 seconds. This function will be automatically performed after a RAM
reset level 1 or 2 is performed.
DETAILED
SECTION
DESCRIPTIONS
The initial toner supply mode must be executed by a technician when the
development unit is replaced.
Cross Reference
Initial Toner Supply: RAM address 4805C8(H)
(See sections 4.5 and 5.5.5 for more details)
CTM (Cleaning Toner Magazine) Detection

At the following times, the machine will detect if a CTM is installed by
checking the power supply to the quenching lamp (this is part of the CTM).
At power-up.
When the machine comes back to normal mode from the Level 2
Power Saver Mode.
When the cover is opened and then closed.
The machine will disable all printing processes if a CTM is not installed.
[A]
H515D624.wmf
Toner End Detection

Toner near-end is detected by the toner end sensor [A], which is located
below the toner tank.
While the main motor is rotating, the machine will detect the toner end
condition by monitoring the output voltage from the toner end sensor . The
voltage from the sensor is close to 5 V when the toner tank is full and
becomes low when toner is almost empty.
H515
2-21
SM
MFDU
Toner Tank
MFCE
SCP
(CPU)
+5V
7-9
Toner End Sensor
EXIO-2
(IC4)
7-10
LPC
Serial Interface
Bus Interface
H515D512.wmf
Toner near-end condition: When the CPU detects a low output from the
toner end sensor for more than 30 seconds, the CPU will start to blink the
Add Toner indicator. This is the toner near-end condition.
Toner end condition: After the toner near-end condition is detected, the
machine can print 100 more sheets, then the CPU will disable all printing
operations. This is the toner end condition.
The machine will clear the toner near-end or toner end condition when the
power is switched off and back on, or when the cover is opened and closed,
and if the output from the toner end sensor goes back high again.
However, when the machine is turned off/on or when the cover is opened
and then closed, the machine requires about 30 seconds to check for a toner
near-end condition again. So, if the user prints something within this 30
seconds period without changing the CTM, the machine will allow the
printout to be made, but the print quality may be poor.
If the cover is opened and closed without installing a new toner supply, the
addional 100 sheet counter will not be reset. The counter will remain at its
previous count.
H515
2-22
SM
2.2.6. Development
[C]
DETAILED
SECTION
DESCRIPTIONS
[E]
[F]
[D]
H515D616.wmf
[B]
[A]
Overview
There are two rollers in the development unit: the Toner Application Roller [B]
and the Development Roller [D]. The transfer roller [F] is used to transfer
toner from the drum onto the paper.
The toner supply bar [A] stirs and carries the toner to the toner application
roller [B]. Toner is attracted to the toner application roller because it has a
magnetic layer. As the toner application roller turns past the toner metering
blade [C], only a thin coating of negatively charged toner particles stays
adhered. (Refer to section 4-4-2 of the Group 3 Facsimile manual.)
During printing, a bias voltage of -700 V is applied to the toner application
roller and another bias voltage of -400 V is applied to the development roller.
The toner is carried from the toner application roller to the development roller
[D] by the potential difference between these two rollers.
The exposed area (latent image) on the drum surface [E] is at -100 V. The
development roller applies toner to these exposed areas on the drum as the
drum turns past the development roller.
The development roller is made of a soft rubber to ensure that it does not
damage the surface of the drum. The development roller can be ordered as
a separate spare part because it always contacts the toner application roller.
The speed ratio between the drum, development roller, and the toner
application roller is about 1 : 1 : 3. The toner application roller rotates three
times faster than the development roller, so it deposits a layer of toner three
times as thick onto the development roller. This provides a clearer image.
Also, the toner application roller rotates in the opposite direction to the
development roller, which helps to keep the toner level constant on the
development roller.
H515
2-23
SM
Development Bias
[A]
[E]
[A]
[D]
[B]
[C]
H515D619.wmf
H515D618.wmf
The power pack [A] supplies the voltages to the toner application roller [B],
toner metering blade [C], and bias brush [D], and the development roller [E].
Bias Control (During Printing)
Print Data
White
Black
Toner
GND
Drum Exposed Area
- 100V
Development Roller
- 400V
Toner Application Roller
- 700V
- 750V
Drum Surface Voltage
H515D655.wmf
A charge of -700 40 V is applied to the toner application roller, and -400

10 V is applied to the development roller. Toner transfers from the toner
application roller to the development roller and on to the laser exposed areas
on the drum, based on the voltage differences between the rollers and the
drum, as shown below.
H515
2-24
SM
Bias Control (After Each Page)
Drum
- 750 V
- 400V
Development
Roller
DETAILED
SECTION
DESCRIPTIONS
After each page, the machine

removes toner from the
development roller and returns it to
the development unit. To do this,
-400V is applied to the
development roller, but no bias is
applied to the toner application
roller.
Toner does not transfer to the

development roller at A, but will
remain on the toner application
roller when the toner passes
between the two rollers.
- 400V
Toner
Application
Roller
The remaining toner on the

develpment roller does not transfer
to the drum at B, but transfers to
the toner application roller at C.
GND
In some cases, positively charged

toner may transfer to the drum in
this condition. So, a positive
current is applied to the transfer
roller after each page, so that the positively charged toner on the
drum does not transfer to the transfer roller. (not shown).
H515D651.wmf
Toner
GND
Development Roller
- 400V
Drum Surface Voltage
- 750 V
H515D656.wmf
H515
2-25
SM
Bias Control (Other)

At the start and the end of any print process (including the cleaning and
initial toner supply modes), -50 50 V is applied to the toner application
roller, and +250 15 V is applied to the development roller. This is to prevent
toner from transferring to the drum.
Toner
Development Roller
+250V
Drum Surface Volta ge
GND
- 50V
H515D650.wmf
Note that the voltage difference between the toner application and
development rollers is kept the same as in printing, at 300 V. This will keep
the same amount of toner on the development roller at all times during the
complete print run.
H515
2-26
SM
Bias Control Circuit

Serial Interface
Bus Interface
MFCE
MFDU
Toner Application
Roller
Development
Roller
Transfer
Roller
Power
Pack
Bias 1
Transfer 0
Transfer 1
SCP
(CPU)
21-6
21-7
21-4
Driver
QA1
EXIO-1
(IC3)
LPC
21-5
H515D513.wmf
The CPU controls the voltages to the toner application and development
rollers using the Bias 0 and Bias 1 signals as shown in the following table.
In
Out
H515
Bias 0
Bias 1
Toner Application
Roller
Development Roller
Low
Low
High
Low
Low
High
High
High
- 700 V
- 50 V
Off
Off
-400 V
+ 250 V
-400 V
Off
2-27
SM
DETAILED
SECTION
DESCRIPTIONS
Bias 0
2.2.7. Paper Feed

1. Overview
[F]
[E]
[B]
[A]
[C]
H515D514.wmf
[D]
The standard cassette [A] holds 250 sheets and the bypass feed slot [B]
feeds 1 sheet at a time. An optional 100 sheet cassette [C] and two types of
500 sheet optional paper feed units are also available.
This machine can have up to 2 optional 500 sheet paper feed units. Refer to
the separate paper feed unit service manuals for details on the optional
paper feed units.
The registration roller [D] will rotate counter-clockwise direction when the
standard cassette is used. The registration roller will rotate in the clockwise
direction when the bypass feed slot [B] or the 100 sheet cassette is used.
When a sheet of paper is placed in the bypass feed slot, the bypass feed
sensor [E] is turned on, and the machine will prefeed the paper into the
machine until the registration sensor [F] is turned on.
Note: The bypass feed slot can only be used for copying or for printing from
a PC (Personal Computer), when using the optional printer interface.
H515
2-28
SM
2. Paper Lift Mechanism

Standard and Optional 100 Sheet Cassette
[C]
[B]
DETAILED
SECTION
DESCRIPTIONS
[A]
[B]
[D]
H515D608.wmf
[D]
H515D609.wmf
When the cassette is installed after paper is loaded, the slide lock [A] is
pushed by the projection [B] and will become unlatched from the bottom
hook [C].
Once the slide lock is unlatched, the bottom plate is raised by the pressure
springs and the top sheet of the paper stack is pushed upward against the
corner separators [D]. This will ensure that the stack of paper is kept at the
correct height.
H515
2-29
SM
3. Paper Size and Paper End Detection

Standard Cassette/Optional Universal Cassette
The paper size detector [A] is located
at the front of the cassette. The
machine will determine the size of
the paper in the cassette by
monitoring the three microswitches in
the detector. The machine will inform
the customer with the Add Paper
indicator if the paper size cannot be
detected.
[B]
When the cassette runs out of paper,

the paper end sensor actuator [B] will
drop through a slot in the bottom
plate.
H515D610.wmf
[A]
Selectable cassette paper sizes:

USA model: Letter, Legal
Europe model: A4, A5 sideways
Asia model: A4, A5 sideways, F/F4
The following diagram shows the relationship between the activated
microswitches and the selected paper size.
Microswitch USA Model
000
-----
001
010
011
100
101
110
111
Legal
----Letter
-----------------
Europe
Model
-----
Asia
Model
-----
----------------------------F/F4
A4
A4
--------A5 sideways A5 sideways
Example: Letter size paper

Microswitches
: 0: High
: 1: Low
Note: "-----" indicates that the machine detects

that a cassette is not installed.
H515D658.wmf
H515
2-30
SM
Bypass Feed Slot

This machine cannot detect paper width when the bypass feed slot is used.
The maximum feed length for bypass feed is 600 mm.
The mimimum feedable paper width is 191 mm.
[A]
Optional 100 Sheet Cassette
DETAILED
SECTION
DESCRIPTIONS
The paper size detector [A] is located at

the left hand side of the 100 sheet
cassette. The microswitches operate in
the same manner as in the standard
cassette.
When the 100 sheet cassette runs out
of paper, the paper end sensor actuator
will [B] drop through a slot .
The microswitches in the cassette are
connected to the machine by connector
CN20, Located in the lower left corner
of the machine.
H515D611.wmf
[B]
Paper Size/Paper End Detection

Paper End
Paper End Sensor
Standard Cassette
MFDU
MFCE
20-5
SCP
(CPU)
25-3
Paper Size Detector
Standard Cassette
25-4
25-6
EXIO-2
(IC4)
7-1
Paper Size Detector 100
Sheet Cassette
LPC
7-2
7-4
Paper End Sensor

100 Sheet Cassette
Serial Interface
Bus Interface
7-1
Paper End
2nd Paper Feed Unit
1st Paper Feed Unit

H515D515.wmf
H515
2-31
SM
4. Pick-up and Separation

Standard and Optional 100 Sheet Cassettes
The pick-up and separation mechanism is a corner separator type. The
corner separators and the paper feed rollers allow only one sheet to feed at
a time.
Cross reference
Group 3 Facsimile Manual: section 4-5-4
The paper feed motor will start to rotate when the printer is ready for printing.
By-pass Feed Slot
There is no pick-up or separation system in the by-pass feed slot, because
only one sheet can be fed from this slot.
5. Drive Mechanism
Standard Cassette
[B]
[D]
[A]
[C]
H515D612.wmf
The paper feed motor [A] drives the pick-up and feed mechanism. When the
standard cassette is used, the paper feed motor will rotate in the clockwise
(CW) direction, driving the paper feed rollers [B] and the registration roller
[C], as shown in the diagram.
The clutch gear box assembly [D] will only allow the semi-circular paper feed
rollers to rotate once for each sheet of paper.
While the registration roller is rotating counter-clockwise (CCW), paper
cannot be fed into the machine from the optional 100 sheet cassette or
bypass feed slot. This means that if a sheet of paper is placed in the bypass
feed slot during printing from the standard cassette, this sheet will not be fed
into the machine.
H515
2-32
SM
Bypass Feed Slot

[C]
DETAILED
SECTION
DESCRIPTIONS
[B]
[A]
H515D613.wmf
When a sheet of paper is placed in the bypass feed slot, the bypass feed
sensor [A] is turned on. The machine will rotate the paper feed motor in the
counter- clockwise (CCW) direction to prefeed the paper until the registration
sensor is turned on, or for 1 second, whichever is first. (See section 2-2-8 for
a diagram of the registration sensor.)
When the paper feed motor rotates counter-clockwise, the projection [B] will
disengage the gear [C] inside the clutch gear box assembly as shown in the
diagram. This will prevent any drive from being transmitted to the paper feed
rollers for the standard cassette.
If a sheet of paper remains in the bypass feed slot for longer than the Auto
Reset Time (System Switch 0B), the machine will automatically feed it out.
The default time is three minutes. The machine cannot print incoming fax
messages while there is a sheet of paper in the bypass feed slot. Feeding
the page out after the Auto Reset time allows incoming faxes to be printed
even if someone had left paper in the by-pass feed slot.
Sheets of paper longer than 600 mm cannot be fed from the bypass feed
slot, or a paper jam will occur (error code 9-81).
Note: The bypass feed slot can be used only for copying and for printing
from a PC (Personal Computer) using the optional printer interface.
H515
2-33
SM
Optional 100 Sheet Cassette

[C]
[B]
[A]
[D]
H515D614.wmf
When the machine feeds a sheet of paper from the 100 sheet cassette, the
paper feed motor [A] rotate in the counter-clockwise (CCW) direction to drive
the paper feed rollers [B] and the registration roller [C] as shown in the
diagram.
The paper feed clutch [D] in the optional 100 sheet cassette ensures that the
semi-circular paper feed rollers rotate only once for each sheet of paper.
The bypass feed slot can be used with the optional 100 sheet cassette.
Paper Feed Priority
If there is an optional cassette and/or paper feed unit installed in the
machine, the priority for paper feed is decided in accordance with the
following rules.
The paper in the bypass feed slot has the first priority (for copying and
printing from a PC only).
If the machine has optional 500 sheet paper feed units and all the cassettes contain paper of the same size, the machine will use the lower
paper feed unit first, the upper paper feed unit second, the paper in the
optional 100 sheet cassette third, and the paper in the standard cassette last.
If the cassettes contain different sizes, the machine will select the paper size as explained in section 2-2-13.
H515
2-34
SM
2.2.8. Registration
DETAILED
SECTION
DESCRIPTIONS
[A]
[B]
H515D615.wmf
The registration sensor [A] is positioned above the registration roller [B].
When a cassette (Standard, Paper Feed Unit, or 100 Sheet Cassette) is
used, the machine will stop the paper feed motor for a few moments after the
registration sensor is initially turned on.
When the bypass feed slot is used, the machine will prefeed the paper into
the machine until the registration sensor is turned on (or for 1 second,
whichever comes first).
The paper feed motor start rotating immediately after laser scan starts.
When the leading edge of the paper touches the pressure rollers, the
momentum of the paper will correct any skew.
H515
2-35
SM
Jam Detection
When the
standard
cassette is used
When any of the
paper feed
stations or the
bypass feed slot
is used.
When the upper

paper feed unit is
used.
When the lower

paper feed unit is
used.
When the bypass

feed slot is used
When the 100

sheet cassette is
used.
H515
Condition
When the registration sensor is not turned on within
2.0 seconds of the paper jam timing signal.
When the paper feed-out sensor is not turned on
within 2.6 seconds after the paper feed motor starts to
feed paper for printing (not for prefeed).
When the registration sensor is not turned off within X
seconds after it turned on.
X seconds = (paper length / 67.546) + 3 seconds
(67.546 mm/ s : paper feed speed)
When the relay sensor in the upper paper feed unit is
not turned on within 2.0 seconds after the paper feed
clutch in the upper paper feed unit was switched on.
When the registration sensor in the fax machine is not
turned on within 2.0 seconds after the paper feed
motor started.
When the relay sensor in the lower paper feed unit is
clutch in the lower paper feed unit was switched on.
When the relay sensor in the upper paper feed unit is
motor in the lower paper feed unit started.
When the registration sensor is not turned on within 2
seconds after the paper feed motor starts rotating for
printing.
(This error is not generated during prefeed, to allow
the users to change their minds after putting paper in
this slot. When the bypass feed sensor is turned on,
the machine will prefeed the paper for up to 1 second
and will stop feeding even if the registration sensor is
not turned on. If the registration sensor did not turn on
during prefeed, the machine will check for the above
error when printing starts.)
When the bypass feed sensor is not turned off within
11.9 seconds after it is turned on.
Using the same formula as above (error code 9-08), it
works out that individual sheets cannot be longer than
about 60 cm.
When the registration sensor is not turned on within
2.0 seconds of the paper feed clutch turning on.
2-36
Error Code
9-07
9-08
9-08
9-50
9-51
9-52
9-53
9-80
9-81
9-82
SM
2.2.9. Transfer and Separation
DETAILED
SECTION
DESCRIPTIONS
[B]
[A]
H515D620.wmf
Instead of using a transfer corona wire, this machine uses a transfer roller,
which comes in contact with the drum surface of the drum.
A constant current of +4 0.2 A is applied to the transfer roller [A] from the
power pack [B]. The positively biased transfer roller pulls negatively charged
toner off the drum. The combination of the curvature of the drum and the
antistatic brush are used to cause the paper to drop away from the drum for
paper separation.
H515D653.wmf
Temperature and humidity have less effect on the supply of ions when the
transfer current is held constant. With a constant voltage, ions may dissipate
in some conditions.
H515
2-37
SM
Cleaning Mode
If the paper size is smaller than the printed image, or if a paper jam occurs
during printing, toner may be transferred onto the surface of the transfer
roller. To prevent this toner from transferring onto the back side of copies, the
transfer roller has to be cleaned before the next printing run.
While the machine is in the cleaning mode, the power pack will supply
-1000V 50 V to the transfer roller, and will charge the drum to -750 V. The
negatively charged toner on the transfer roller is then transferred back onto
the drum.
The machine will automatically perform the cleaning mode procedure in the
following conditions:
At power on (when the fusing temperature reaches half of the standby
temperature).
When the cover is opened and then closed during the printing process.
After a printer jam has been cleared.
After the bypass feed slot has been used (each page). This will only be
done if printer switch 00 bit 3 is set to 1.
The CPU controls the transfer roller voltage through the power pack using
the Transfer 0 and Transfer 1 signals as shown below (for a circuit diagram,
see Bias Control Circuit in section 2-2-6).
In
Out
H515
Transfer 0
Transfer 1
Transfer Roller
Low
Low
+ 4 A
High
Low
- 1000 V
2-38
Low
High
Off
High
High
Off
SM
DETAILED
SECTION
DESCRIPTIONS
Timing Chart: Cleaning Mode
Corona
H515D663.wmf
Before the cleaning mode starts, the main motor, charge corona, and
quenching lamp are turned on.
T1. Cleaning bias of -1000V is applied to the transfer roller.
T2. A positive constant current of + 4 0.2 A is applied to the transfer roller
to transfer back to the drum any toner which is positively charged by the
transfer roller.
H515
2-39
SM
2.2.10. Cleaning
[E]
[B]
[C]
[A]
[D]
H515D621.wmf
The cleaning unit and the used toner tank are contained in the CTM,
(Cleaning Toner Magazine).
The cleaning blade [A] removes any toner remaining on the drum after the
image is transferred to the paper. A magnetic roller [B] will transfer the used
toner into the used toner tank [D]. The mylar blade [C] will scrape the toner
off the magnetic roller and into the used toner tank [D].
When the CTM is removed from the machine, the cleaning roller cover [E] is
closed by a spring. This will prevent the removed toner from falling out of the
unit.
There is no used toner overflow detection mechanism because the used
toner tank is large enough for the lifetime of the installed CTM.
H515
2-40
SM
2.2.11. Fusing
Fusing Lamp Control
When the main switch is turned on, the machine will turn on the fusing lamp
to raise the fusing temperature to 80 C in about 4 seconds. For printing, the
machine raises the fusing temperature to 190 C.
DETAILED
SECTION
DESCRIPTIONS
When the Energy Saver Key is pressed or the energy saver timer expires,
the machine will go into a energy saver mode. In the Level 2 Energy Saver
Mode the fusing lamp is turned off. The user can select to keep the fusing
lamp off or at 80C during Energy Saver Mode Level 1.
Cross Reference:
Energy Saver Modes: Section 2-3
If the printing operation continues for more than 3 minutes, the machine
keeps the fusing temperature at 180C.
Points to Note:
Standby temperature: 80 C
Printing start temperature: 165 C
Printing temperature: 190 C
Thermistor maximum: 250 C (monitored by a comparator)
Thermostat maximum: 150 C (the temperature of the hot roller would
be about 400 C)
5 minutes (= Power saver timer)

3 minutes
Temperature
190C
180C
175C
165C = Print ready
Print Start
80C
or
Room Tem p
80C
Power ON
Ring
Detection
or
Copy Start
Room temp.
Fusing
ON
OFF
H515D654.wmf
H515
2-41
SM
Fusing Control
MFCE
Serial Interface
Bus Interface
SCP
(CPU)
CN1-22
CN1-24
LPC
Thermistor Output
CN1-27
CN1-23
1HTSAFE
ADCL
ADCH
CN1-26
VPP4F
(A/D Converter)
PSU
EXIO-1
(IC3)
CN12-1
CN12-2
MFDU
Fusing Lamp
Control
EXIO-2
(IC4)
Thermostat
Comparator
Thermofuse
Fusing Lamp
Thermistor
Initial Detection On/Off
H515D516.wmf
During normal operation, the CPU controls the fusing lamp based on input
from the thermistor using the above circuit.
When the machine is turned on, or when it comes back from the Level 2
Energy Saver Mode, it will determine if the thermistor circuit is intact by
temporarily closing the initial detect switch circuit on the MFDU. If the
thermistor is connected properly, the machine will begin its normal operation.
If it is not, an Auto Service Call (error code 9-22, sub-code 09) will be
generated.
As a backup safety measure, when the temperature of the hot roller reaches
about 400 C, the thermostat will open.
The machine will turn on the cooling fan when the fusing temperature
reaches 120 C. It is turned the cooling fan off when the fusing temperature
drops below 120 C.
H515
2-42
SM
Fusing Unit Drive
H515D622.wmf
[B]
The main motor [A] drives the fusing unit through a gear train. The paper
feed-out sensor [B] detects when the paper has been fed out of the unit.
Jam Detection - Paper Feed Out

The machine will detect a paper jam when the paper feed-out sensor is not
turned off within X seconds or more after it is turned on (Error Code 9-09).
X seconds = (paper length / 67.546) + 3 seconds
(67.546 mm/s is the paper feed speed)
H515
2-43
SM
DETAILED
SECTION
DESCRIPTIONS
[A]
Fusing Unit Service Call Conditions

Conditions
At power on
Standby mode
During
printing
After printing
At any time
H515
If there is any problem with the thermistor.

(This detection is also done when the machine comes
back to the normal mode from Energy Saver Mode
Level 2.)
If the fusing temperature stays below the standby
temperature for more than 18 seconds when fusing
lamp ON is selected in Energy Saver Mode Level 1.
If the fusing temperature takes more than 40 seconds to
reach 165C from the standby temperature.
If the fusing temperature stays above 190C for more
than 60 seconds.
If the fusing temperature stays below 140 C for more
than 1 seconds during printing.
If the fusing temperature takes more than 20 minutes to
go down to 100C when the machine goes into Energy
Saver Mode Level 1.
When fusing lamp OFF is selected for Energy Saver
Mode Level 1.
When fusing lamp ON is selected for Energy Saver
Mode Level 1.
If the fusing temperature reaches 250C.
2-44
Error Code
(9-22)
Sub-code 09
Sub-code 05
Sub-code 02
Sub-code 01
Sub-code 07
Sub-code 03
Sub-code 04
Sub-code 08
SM
2.2.12. Page Separation and Data Reduction

Incoming pages that are only slightly longer than the copy paper may be
reduced in the sub-scan direction. Whether or not this occurs, depends on
the settings of printer switches 04 and 05. (Refer to section 4.2.3)
If bit 0 of printer switch 03 is at 1 (Enabled), the data will be reduced in the

page memory to fit on the copy paper. However, data will only be reduced if
the length of the incoming page is between 5 mm shorter and the selected
maximum length. This maximum incoming page length that can be reduced
is depended on the copy paper size and on the reduction ratio that is stored
in printer switches 04 and 05.
Each paper size can be programmed with a separate reduction ratio. In each
of the two bit switches, there is one bit for each possible paper size. The
combination of the bit settings determines the ratio for that paper size.
Bit No.
Bit 7
Bit 6
Switch
No.
Not
used
Sw 04
Sw 05
Not
used
0: 4/3
0:
Bit 5
Bit 4
F, F4
Legal
1: 4/3
0:
Bit 3
A4
0: 8/7
1:
Bit 2
Bit 1
Not
used
Bit 0
A5
sideways
Letter
1: 12/11
1:
The following table shows the maximum incoming page length that can be
reduced for each copy paper size. All length are in millimeters. The factory
setting of the reduction ratio is 4/3.
Lines/mm mode
Copy Type
Printable
Page Length
Letter
Legal
279.2 mm
355.6 mm
Maximum reducible incoming page length.

Ratio = 4/3
Ratio = 8/7
Ratio= 12/11
365.2 mm
313.0 mm
298.7 mm
467.0 mm
400.3 mm
382.1 mm
Lines/inch mode
Paper Type
Printable
Page Length
Letter
Legal
279.4 mm
355.6 mm
H515
Maximum reducible incoming page length.

Ratio = 4/3
Ratio = 8/7
Ratio= 12/11
365.8 mm
313.4 mm
299.2 mm
467.4 mm
400.6 mm
382.3 mm
2-45
SM
DETAILED
SECTION
DESCRIPTIONS
Reduction Enabled
Incoming pages that are longer than the maximum length will not be
reduced, but will be printed on two pages and treated in accordance with the
setting of bit 1 of printer switch 00. If this bit is 1, the bottom few lines of the
page will be repeated onto the top of the second page.
Reduction Disabled
If bit 0 of printer switch 03 is at 0 (Disabled), the data will not be reduced.
However, if the incoming page is up to x mm longer than the copy paper, the
excess portion will not printed. The value of x can be from 0 to 15 mm. It is
determined by the setting of bits 4 to 7 of printer switch 03.
Hex value
0
0
Value of X
0
1
and so on until
15
Messages that are more than x mm longer than the copy paper will be
printed on two pages in accordance with the setting of bit 1 of printer switch
00 as explained earlier.
H515
2-46
SM
2.2.13. Resolution Unit Selection for Printing

The machine can use both inch and mm resolution units for printing. If the
resolution unit detection is enabled, the machine will choose the right
resolution unit for printing, as requested by the remote terminal, during the
exchange of protocol signals. (Refer to the table.)
Unknown
mm
inch
inch
inch
inch
mm
mm
inch
DETAILED
SECTION
DESCRIPTIONS
Tx terminals resolution unit

Resolution unit
ON
detection
OFF
Cross reference
Resolution unit detection on/off - Printer switch 00, bit 7
2.2.14. Paper Size Selection

If the machine has the optional 100 sheet cassette and/or an optional 500
sheet paper feed unit installed, the paper size to use is decided using the
following rules.
If all the cassettes contain paper of the same size, the machine will use
the paper in the lower paper feed unit first, the paper in the upper paper
feed unit second, the paper in the 100 sheet cassette third, and the paper in the standard cassette last.
If the received page has to be split up and printed on two pages, both
pages will be the same size.
If the cassettes contain different sizes, the paper size chosen for printing the received fax message is selected in accordance with the following table of priorities. The table assumes that reduction is enabled and
that the reduction ratio is 4/3.
Received Fax
Message Size
A5 Sideways
Letter
A4
F, F4
Legal
A5 sideways
1
5(SR)
5(SR)
5(SR)
5(SR)
Letter
2
1
4(R)
4(R)
4(R)
Selected Paper Size

A4
F, F4
3
4
2
3
1
2
3(R)
1
3(R)
2(R)
Legal
5
4
3
2
1
The paper size priority is graded from 1 to 5.

S: The data has to be separated and printed on more than one
page.
R: The data is reduced to fit on the printer paper.
Some of the reports can be printed on A5 paper without page
separation. However, if only A5 paper is in the cassettes, reports
that need larger paper sizes will require page separation.
H515
2-47
SM
2.3. SYSTEM FEATURES

2.3.1. Energy Saver Modes
WAKEUP
MFCE
+5VE
+24VM
COMMAND
Energy Saver
CPU
(IC1)
STATUS
ON/OFF
+24VMON
+24VM
PSU
EXIO--2
(IC4)
SCP
(Main CPU)
Motors,
Clutches
and
Power Pack
+5VE
MFDU
Document Sensor
RESET
LPC
Q6 and Q13
EXRING
Energy Saver Key
Top/Front Cover
Interlock Switch
24
+5V
Energy Saver
LED
+24VD
Q2, Q3 and Q14
+5VE
DC/DC
Converter
(+24/+5V)
+5V
HOOK0/1
Ring Detection
Circuit
5
+5VE
Current Sensor
(Europe/Asia)
NCU
Operation Panel
H515D520.wmf
The machine has three levels of energy saver mode as shown below.
Main CPU
Energy Saver CPU
Energy Saver LED
LCD/LED
+5V Power Supply
+24VM Power Supply
Fusing Lamp
+24VM Power Supply
Normal
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
Level 0
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
80 C or OFF
ON
Level 1
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
80 C or OFF
ON
Level 2
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
In energy saver mode levels 0 and 1, the main CPU monitors and controls
the system. The fusing lamp is either turned off or kept at the standby temperature, depending on the setting of User Parameter Switch 05, bits 6 and
7.
In energy saver mode level 2 (also known as the 2-watt energy saver mode),
the main CPU and dc power supplies are shut down. The energy saver CPU
monitors the energy saver key, incoming calls, and the document sensor.
When the energy saver CPU detects an activity at any one of the conditions,
it activates the +5V supply with the WAKEUP signal to start up the main
CPU and other power supplies (+5VLD, +12.4V, +12VP, and -9V).
The following sections will explain how the machine uses these three
modes. Note: Energy saver mode will not operate if a printer interface, a G4
interface, or an RS232C interface is installed.
H515
2-48
SM
1. Entering an Energy Saver Mode

The flow chart on the next page will explain how the machine goes into a energy saver mode, depending on parameter settings and other machine
conditions.
- Energy Saver Timer When the energy saver timer expires (default value - 5 minutes) since the
last time a condition #1 operation was detected (see the flow chart), the machine will automatically go into a Energy Saver Mode. See the points
marked 1 on the flow chart.
Cross Reference
Energy saver timer initial setting: System Switch 0B, bits 2 and 3
(1 minute, 3 minutes, 5 minutes, or Unlimited: Timer disabled)
- Energy Saver Key When the energy saver key is pressed, the machine will check if there are
any background operations in progress (these are the condition #2 operations on the flow chart). If there are none, the machine will automatically go
into a Energy Saver Mode. See point 2 on the flow chart.
Which Energy Saver Mode is Selected?
If User Switch 05, bit 6 is set to maintain the fusing lamp at the standby temperature during Energy Saver Mode, the machine will enter Energy Saver
Mode Level 1. See point 3 on the flow chart.
If User Switch 05, bit 6 is set to keep the fusing lamp off during Energy Saver
Mode, the machine checks for events listed on the flow chart as condition #3
events (see point 4 on the flow chart). If none exist, the machine will go to Energy Saver Level 2. If one or more condition exist, the machine will enter
Energy Saver Level 1 until all of the conditions are cleared. Then it will go to
the Energy Saver Level 2.
See the next flow chart for more details on how the machine changes from
Level 1 to Level 2.
Cross Reference
Fusing lamp control during Energy Saver Mode: User Switch 05, bit 6
(On at standby temperature, or Off)
Note
The "optional equipment" in condition #3 is either a Printer Interface, a G4 interface, or a
RS232C Interface.
SM
2-49
H515
DETAILED
SECTION
DESCRIPTIONS
Entering Energy Saver Mode from Standby
Standby Mode
System SW 0B
Bit 2,3
Unlimited
T=1, 3, or 5 minutes
Other
Key pressed
Original detected
Handset off-hook
Timer=T
Yes
Condition #1
No
If key was pressed

in the above
condition.
Energy Saver
Key ?
Energy Saver
Key ?
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Condition #2
Timer=0
OR
Machine is in operation.
Machine is in a service call
condition.
Machine is in a service
mode operation.
Yes
Yes
OR
No
Energy Saver Mode

Level 1
User SW 05
Bit 6
Standby Temperature
LCD=OFF
LED=OFF
Fusing=User Sw 05 Setting
Main CPU=ON
Energy Saver CPU=OFF
Fusing Lamp=OFF
Condition #3
No
Energy Saver Mode

Level 2
LCD=OFF
LED=OFF
Fusing=OFF
Main CPU=OFF
Energy Saver CPU=ON
Energy Saver Mode

Level 1
Yes
Mechanical Errors (Jam, Toner

end, Paper end, etc.)
Original detected
Communication Error
NCU Off Hook
Optional Equipment Installed
Memory 100%
Tx File/Polling Rx File Exists
Yes
No
Condition #4
Condition #3 all
cleared.
H515D626.wmf
H515
2-50
SM
2. Going into Level 2 Mode from Level 1 Mode
The machine will not go into Level 2 energy saver mode if any of the following conditions exists.
Either a tx/rx/polling file is stored in the memory.
SAF memory not empty
Mechanical error(s)
NCU off-hook
Optional equipment installed (a printer interface, a G4 interface, or an
RS232C interface)
If there is a tx file in the memory
The machine will stay in Energy Saver Mode Level 1 until the programmed
time to send the message. The machine will then enter Level 0 while the
message is being sent. See point 1 on the flow chart.
When the Energy Saver timer expires
When the energy saver timer expires after the machine entered Level 1 for
the first time (or, if a tx file was present, after the message was transmitted),
the machine will enter Level 2 if both of the following conditions are met:
User Switch 05, bit 6 specifies Fusing Lamp Off
No condition #1 restrictions exist.
See point 2 on the flow chart.
SM
2-51
H515
DETAILED
SECTION
DESCRIPTIONS
The flow chart on the next page shows in more detail how the machine goes
from Energy Saver Mode Level 1 to Level 2.
Energy Saver Mode

Level 1
LCD=OFF
LED=OFF
Fusing=User SW 05 Setting
Main CPU=ON
System SW 0B Bit 2,3
T=1, 3, or 5 minutes
Tx file in
memory ?
Timer=T
No
Yes
No
No
Tx time ?
Timer=0
Yes
Yes
User SW 05
Bit 6
Energy Saver Mode

Level 0
LCD=OFF
LED=OFF
Main CPU=ON
No
OR
Fusing Lamp=OFF
Condition #1
No
Message Transmission
Yes
Mechanical Errors
Original detected
Communication Error
NCU Off-Hook
Optional Equipment Installed
Memory 100%
Tx File/Polling Rx File Exists
Energy Saver Mode

Level 2
LCD=OFF
LED=OFF
Fusing=OFF
Main CPU=OFF
Energy Saver CPU=ON
H515D627.wmf
H515
2-52
SM
3. Receiving a Fax Message in Energy Saver Mode

The flow chart on the next page explains how the machine receives a fax
message while it is in a energy saver mode.
While the machine is in a Energy Saver mode, the energy saver CPU monitors ringing signals from the line. When the energy saver CPU has detected
two consecutive ringing signals, it activates the +5V supply to the main CPU
and will pass the ring detection process to the main CPU.
After the main CPU has detected a ringing signal, the machine will go to Energy Saver Mode Level 0 and receive the fax into memory. Level 0 mode
looks the same as the previous mode for users, but all of the system components are active in the background for receiving a fax message.
Printing
If either of the following conditions is not met (condition #1 on the flow chart),
the machine will print out the fax message and then return to the Energy
Saver Mode in the manner described in the previous two flow charts at this
section.
Energy Saver mode is activated during the Night Timer period
The machine is currently in the Night Timer period.
If both conditions are met, the machine will return to the Energy Saver Mode
as described at the previous two flow charts at this section. It will print the fax
message after the Night Timer expires.
Cross Reference
Night Timer On/Off: User Function 62
Programming the Night Timer period: User Function 72
SM
2-53
H515
DETAILED
SECTION
DESCRIPTIONS
Ring Detection
Energy Saver Mode

Level 2
Energy Saver Mode

Level 1
LCD=OFF
LED=OFF
Fusing=OFF
Main CPU=OFF
Energy Saver CPU=ON
LCD=OFF
LED=OFF
Main CPU=ON
No
Ring Detection
Yes
Energy Saver Mode

Level 0
LCD=OFF
LED=OFF
Fusing=OFF
Main CPU=ON
Memory Reception
Energy Saver Mode is enabled by

User Function 62, and the machine
is in a Night Timer period.
Condition #1
No
Fusing Heat-up
Message Printout
Yes
Energy Saving
Mode Program
H515D628.wmf
H515
2-54
SM
4. Sending a Fax Message or Copying in Energy Saver Mode

The flow chart on the next page explains how the machine wakes up from energy saver mode upon a manual operation, and how it will return back to a
energy saver mode.
While the machine is in a energy saver mode, either the energy saver CPU
(Level 2) or the main CPU (Level 1) monitors signals from the following (condition #1 on the flow chart).
Energy saver key
Document sensor
Off-hook detector on the NCU
When a signal from any one of the listed conditions have been detected, the
CPU will wake up all of the components and the machine will enter its normal operating mode, even during the Night Timer period.
After operations have been finished, the machine will return back to a energy
saver mode as explained in the previous sections.
SM
2-55
H515
DETAILED
SECTION
DESCRIPTIONS
Manual Wakeup Conditions
Energy Saver Mode

Level 2
Energy Saver Mode

Level 1
LCD=OFF
LED=OFF
Fusing=OFF
Main CPU=OFF
Energy Saver CPU=ON
LCD=OFF
LED=OFF
Main CPU=ON
No
Condition #1
Energy Saver key pressed
Document set in ADF
NCU off-hook
Yes
Normal Mode
LCD=ON
LED=ON
Fusing=ON
Main CPU=ON
Phone communication
Fax transmission
Making copies
etc.
No
Operation
Finished ?
Yes
Message received
in memory ?
Yes
Message Printout
No
Standby Mode
Energy Saving
M ode Pr ogr am
H515D629.wmf
H515
2-56
SM
2.3.2. Automatic Service Calls

1. Service Call Conditions
Service Call Conditions
9-17
9-20
9-22
9-23
9-24
None
None
Sub-code
(8003B5H)
11 or 12
21
01 to 09
31 or 32
41 or 42
None
None
None
None
None
None
Error Code
Charge corona unit failure

Laser diode failure
Fusing lamp failure
Hexagonal mirror motor failure
Main motor failure
Excessive jams in the ADF/scanner
Excessive jams in the printer
The PM counter has reached the threshold (60,000
prints)
The PM interval has expired
Cross reference
Service station number: Service Function 13
Troubleshooting: Chapter 6
SM
2-57
H515
DETAILED
SECTION
DESCRIPTIONS
The machine makes an automatic service call when any of the following conditions occurs.
2. Excessive Jam Alarms *

OR
JAM
CALL Threshold (=6)
6
5
4
3
2
Decrement
Reset to
zero
Decrement
1
0
16
24
32
40
48
56
64
72
NO-JAM1
DEC Threshold (=16)
16
12
8
16 pages fed without jam
4
0
16
24
32
40
48
56
64
72
NO-JAM2
CLR Threshold (=48)
48
32
16
16
24
32
40
48
56
64
72
H515D635.wmf
The excessive jam alarm will automatically notify the service station when
the machines scanner or printer has frequently jam problems.
Both types of jams (scanner & printer) has three counters allocated to each
called JAM, NO-JAM1, and NO-JAM2. Each of the counters have a set of
threshold values called CALL, DEC, and CLR respectively. (the values can
be adjusted.) The machine will use these counters to monitor both types of
jams as follows.
Each time a jam occurs: The JAM counter is increased by 1, and both the
NO-JAM1 and NO-JAM2 counters are set to zero. When the JAM counter
reaches CALL value (6 by default), the machine will send an Auto Service
Report with a System Parameter List to the programmed service station.
If a sheet of paper is fed without a jam occuring: Both the NO-JAM1 and
NO-JAM2 counters are incremented by 1. When the NO-JAM1 counter
reaches the DEC value (16 by default), the NO-JAM1 counter is set to zero,
and the JAM counter is decremented by 1. When the NO-JAM2 counter
reaches the CLR value (48 by default), both the NO-JAM2 and JAM counters are reset to zero.
The CALL, DEC, and CLR threshold values can be adjusted for each type of
jam by rewriting RAM data. The addresses of these thresholds are listed on
the following page. The listed default values above are examples only.
H515
2-58
SM
DEC (1 - 255; 0 = Disabled)

CALL (3 - 15; 0 = Disabled)
CLR
(Low)
(High)
Counters
JAM: Jam counter used to place a
service call
NO-JAM1: Counter used for JAM
counter decrement
NO-JAM2: Counter used for
clearing the JAM counter
Address (H)
ADF
Printer
48027E
480282
48027F
480283
480280
480284
480281
480285
Initial
Settings
Sys. Para.
List
10 (H)
06 (H)
30 (H)
00 (H)
X
Y
Address (H)
ADF
Printer
Sys. Para. List
480277
48027B
480276
48027A
480278 (Low)
480279 (High)
48027C (Low)
48027D (High)
DETAILED
SECTION
DESCRIPTIONS
Parameters
The System Parameter List shows a complete list of jam counters.

The system parameter list gives the current setting for the values of the DEC
and CALL thresholds and the JAM counter values are listed as X, Y, and Z respectively. (Refer to section 4.1.2, System Parameter List.
The Call Service indicator will not light for an excessive jam alarm and the
machine can be operated normally after the automatic service call has been
made. Also, the counters related to the jam location are automatically reset
to zero after the call. The alarm is then disabled until either bit 3 (ADF jams)
or bit 4 (printer jams) of address 4805B0(H) is reset to zero.
3. Periodic Service Call
The periodic service call will notify the condition of the machine to the programmed service station. If this feature is enabled, the call is made
periodically, at a time interval programmed in the following RAM addresses.
Parameters
Call interval: 01 through 15 month(s) (BCD)
00: Periodic Service Call Disabled
Date and time of the next call
Year: last two digits of the year (BCD)
Month: 01 through 12 (BCD)
Day: 01 through 31 (BCD)
Hour: 00 through 23 (BCD)
Address (H)
480379
48037A
48037B
48037C
48037D
To change the settings after programming, change the call interval. The machine will automatically change the remaining parameters by referring to the
interval and the current date and time.
The Call Service indicator will not light for a periodic service call and the machine can be operated normally after the service call had been sent.
SM
2-59
H515
4. PM (Periodic Maintenance) Call

If PM call featue is enabled, the machine will make an automatic service call
when the PM counter reaches the PM threshold.
Program the PM call interval at the following RAM addresses.
(Default setting: 60,000 sheets)
Address (H)
48021C
48021D
48021E
Bits 7 - 4
Tens
Thousands
Hundred thousands
Bits 3 - 0
Units
Hundreds
Ten thousands
Cross reference
PM call enable/disable: System switch 01, bit 0
The Call Service indicator will not light for a PM service call, and the machine can be operated normally after it has made the service call.
5. Effective Term of Service Calls
If a time limit for the effectiveness of service calls is programmed, the machine stops making automatic service calls after the time limit.
Program the time limit at the following addresses. This function is disabled
when all of these addresses are 00(H).
Year: last two digits of the year (BCD)

Month: 01 through 12 (BCD)
Day: 01 through 31 (BCD)
H515
2-60
Address (H)
480383
480384
480385
SM
2.3.3. Parallel Memory Transmission
The following table shows the differences between normal memory transmission and parallel memory transmission.
File Reserve Report

If the other terminal is busy
If transmission failed
If memory overflows during
scanning
If a document jam occurred

during scanning
How and when the scanned
message is erased from
memory
Memory threshold to start
scanning into memory
Meaning of the stamp mark
Batch numbering (P. x/x)
SM
Memory tx
Printed, if automatic report
printout is enabled.
Tries to resend the
message later.
Tries to resend the
remaining pages later.
Stops scanning and erases
all the scanned pages from
memory, if the user agrees
to erase them.
Stops scanning and deletes

all the scanned pages from
memory.
The complete message is
erased after all the pages
have been sent.
Depends on the setting of
communication switch 0D.
Default setting - 24kB
Successfully scanned.
Enabled
2-61
Parallel memory tx
Not printed.
Continues scanning the
document into memory, and
tries to resend it later.
Tries to resend the
remaining pages later.
Stops scanning and hangs
up the communication when
memory overflow is
detected. Then erases all
the scanned pages from
memory without notice.
Stops scanning and hangs
up the communication when
a document jam is detected.
Each page is erased after
the page has been
successfully sent.
Depends on the setting of
system switch 10.
Default setting - 512 kB
Successfully scanned.
Not available unless the
number of pages is
programmed manually.
H515
DETAILED
SECTION
DESCRIPTIONS
When using the memory transmission, normally the machine will start dialing after the document has been completely scanned. When using the
Parallel Memory Transmission, the machine will start to dial at the same time
the machine starts scanning. If the document has multiple pages, the machine will scan the pages into memory and at the same time will send them.
In the following cases, the machine will use normal memory transmission
even if parallel memory transmission is enabled.
Send later transmission
Broadcasting
Transmission of an Auto Document only
File re-transmission from the hard disk filing system
Double-sided document transmission
Partial image transmission (if parallel memory tx is enabled, partial image scanning cannot be used)
Transfer request transmission
If the other terminal is busy
If an external telephone connected to the machine is in use
When communication switch 0A, bit 0 is set to 0 (See section 4.2.4.)
When remaining memory space is less than the threshold (default =
512 kB)
Using G4 transmission, parallel memory transmission is normally disabled
because the transmission speed is much faster than the scanning speed.
Transmission using parallel memory transmission is about twice as long as
normal memory transmission (using an ITU-T #1 test chart).
However, if the document contains pages with complicated images or when
sending a photo document using halftone, using parallel memory transmission may be faster than normal memory transmission.
If the user commonly sends this type of fax message, enable parallel memory transmission for G4 transmission by changing system switch 11, bit 7 to
1.
Cross Reference
Parallel memory tx (G3) On/Off
- User parameter 07, bit 2
Parallel memory tx (G4) On/Off
- System switch 11, bit 7
Memory threshold for enabling parallel memory tx - System switch 10, bits 0 to 7
Point of resumption of memory transmission upon redialing
- Communication switch 0A, bit 0
H515
2-62
SM
2.3.4. Transfer Broadcasting
In a transfer broadcasting operation, the transfer requester informs its own

fax number to the transfer station. The transfer station uses that number to
identify the requesters fax number, which the transfer station must dial to
send the transfer result report back to the requester.
Transmission of the transfer result report and selection of the number to dial
depends on the following three settings.
Setting
Conditions required for transfer result
report transmission
Action when there is no fax number in the
programmed Quick/Speed dials which
matches the requesters own fax number
Number of digits compared to find the
requesters fax number from the
programmed Quick/Speed dials.
Switch
Communication switch 0B, bit 3
0: Always
1: If there is an error
Communication switch 0B, bit 5
0: Transfer cancelled
1: Transfer continued
Communication switch 0C, bits 0 to 4
(default setting = 5 digits)
The requesters fax number format is normally as follows.

[ International access code ] [ Country code ] [ Area code ] - [ Local tel. no.]
A Pause (-) must be programmed between area code and local tel. no.
Before the machine transfers the message, the machine compares the last
few digits of the requesters own fax number with all the programmed
Quick/Speed Dials as shown in the diagram on the next page, starting from
Quick Dial 01 to the end of the Speed Dial codes. (The default setting for the
number of digits compared is 5; see the above table.)
If the machine finds a number in which the compared digits match those of
the requesters own fax number, the machine will choose the number as the
destination for sending the report back. However, depending on the number
of digits compared, the machine may choose the wrong destination, as
shown in the example diagram on the next page.
Note that the machine does not compare the following:
Pause (-)
ISDN sub-address (/aaaa, aaaa is a sub-address number)
With a G4 transfer request, the G4 and G3 own fax numbers are informed
from the requester, then the machine compares the G4 number first, and the
G3 number second.
SM
2-63
H515
DETAILED
SECTION
DESCRIPTIONS
This machine will use a new algorithm to identify the requesters fax number
to send back the transfer result report, because the transfer result report
sometimes did not reach the requester with the algorithm used in previous
models.
Example
Requester's Own Fax No.
0111201-2223456
Q01
3456
S00
Q02
020-4773456
S01
1223456
5413654
Q03
020-4776666
S02
00-4126567878
0454771748
Q04
00-81454771748
S03
No. of digits to compare
Result
Q05
2223456
S04
0634558989
Q01
Q06
00-4961969063456
S05
07474125899
Q05
Q07
0569723456
S06
00-85226356541
Q05
Q08
201-2223456
S07
00-12012223456
Q05
Q09
00-31204564569
S08
02212301564
Q08
Q10
013453456
S09
6524555
Q08
10
Q08
Q64
0875558888
11
S07
12
No match
13
No match
S99
00-496158756452
S100
With
Function Upgrade Card
2223456
S999
0454771759
H515D521.wmf
In the above example:

If the requester is within the same area, Quick Dial 05 or Quick Dial 08
is the correct destination, depending on the required dialing method for
numbers in the same country or area. The machine will select Quick
Dial 05 if it compares from 5 to 7 digits, and will select Quick Dial 08 if it
compares from 8 to 10 digits.
Or, if the requester is in another country, Speed Dial 07 is the correct
destination. The machine will select this number if it compares 11 digits.
Any setting higher than this will result in no match, due to the different
international access codes at the start of the numbers.
If the machine compares less than 4 digits, it will select Quick Dial 01.
If the number of digits to compare is set to zero, the machine will send
the report to the first Quick or Speed Dial number which a fax number
has been programmed in.
Note that the result can be changed depending on the locations where the
candidates are programmed. For example, if 00-12012223456 is programmed in Quick Dial 01, the machine always selects this number for
sending back the report, even if the transfer request is from within the same
country.
So, when programming the machine to act as a Transfer Station, the best
combination of the communication switch 0C setting and the programmed location of the requesters fax number has to be considered carefully.
H515
2-64
SM
DETAILED
SECTION
DESCRIPTIONS
If the machine can not find the destination for the report, either:
The machine will stop the transfer operation and will print a report locally (if bit 5 of communication switch 0B is 0).
The machine will continue the transfer operation and will print a result
report locally after finishing all the transfer operations (if bit 5 of communication switch 0B is 1).
Cross Reference to other parameters
ID code programming
- User function 61
Use of economy transmission during a transfer operation to end receivers
- Communication switch 0B, bit 0
Use of economy transmission during a transfer operation to next transfer stations
Use of label insertion for the end receivers in a transfer operation
Printout of the message when acting as a transfer station
SM
2-65
H515
2.3.5. Fax On Demand

Fax On Demand is a polling application with pre-recorded voice assistance.
MFDU
DTMF
Receiver
MFCE
EXIO-2
(IC4)
LPC
SCP
NCU
Speaker
Microphone
HIC
Playback
Modem
Message Playback / Transmission
FOD Card
Voice A/D
Converter
Message Record
SRAM
(512kB)
Serial Interface
Bus Interface
H515D522.wmf
The machine can have up to 100 fax messages in the SAF memory for the
Fax On Demand application. Anyone who can access the machine can get
up to 5 fax messages in one polling operation using a DTMF tone sequence.
A password (Remote ID) can be used to secure the information from
unauthorized access.
The machine can have up to seven voice messages to instruct the caller
about the procedure (each message must be shorter than 30 seconds). The
voice messages are recorded using the microphone. The Voice A/D Converter on the MFCE will convert the messages into a digital format and store
them in the SRAM inside the Fax On Demand card. When playing back a
message or transmitting it to a caller, the Voice A/D Converter will convert
the digitized message back into an analog voice message and will send it to
the speaker or the NCU through the HIC on the MFDU.
The SRAM in the Fax On Demand card is backed up by a battery in the card
when the machine is turned off or when the machine is in the 2-watt (level 2)
energy saver mode.
Cross Reference
Fax On Demand On/Off - User parameter 07, bits 6 and 7
Storing Fax On Demand messages - User function 38
Voice message recording and playback - User function 75
Refer to the Operators Manual for more details.
H515
2-66
SM
Protocol Sequence
Rx
Dial
Tx
Rx
Dial
Ring Detection
Ring Detection
Message
"This is a fax service ... "
CNG
Message
"This is a fax service ... "
"1"
Box No.
Specified
"5"
No Box No.
Specified
"#"
Message
CNG
"#"
"#"
CNG/DTMF Detection
CNG/DTMF Detection
CNG
CED
NSF
DIS
Message
"Press Start ..."
CED
NSF
DIS
DIS or NSF
H515D523.wmf
After ringing detection, the machine will send a pre-recorded message, and
at the same time, will start to detect CNG signals or DTMF tones from the remote caller. The dedicated DTMF receiver on the MFDU is used to detect
both the CNG signals and DTMF tones.
If the machine detects CNG signals, the machine will go into the fax reception mode. If the machine detects the DTMF tone signals, the machine will
then send a voice prompt messages to instruct the caller what to do. After
the last message has been sent to the remote caller, the machine will go into
the fax transmission mode.
Sometimes the machine might not detect DTMF signals while the machine is transmitting a voice message. To avoid this, the messages
should instruct the caller to send DTMF signals after the message has
been finished.
While Fax On Demand is enabled, the machine will disable receiving Transfer Request using DTMF tones, because it may use the same key sequence.
SM
2-67
H515
DETAILED
SECTION
DESCRIPTIONS
Tx
2.3.6. Hard Disk Filing System

If the machine has the hard disk option and a function upgrade card, the
hard disk can be used as a kind of document filing system.
The feature can be implemented in either of two ways:
Enable for specified parties only
Enable for all parties except those specified
The machine will keep fax messages that have been sent to enabled parties
and fax messages received from those parties in the hard disk.
Each filed message is given a unique cabinet number. Using this number,
the messages can be printed or resent later. Refer to the Operators Manual
for more details.
For transmission, the machine can file fax messages that were sent using
normal memory transmission. Messages that were sent using the following
features cannot be filed in the hard disk.
Parallel memory transmission Immediate transmission
Auto document
Confidential transmission
Messages sent from polling standby
Note that the machine cannot file messages that were sent using parallel
memory transmission. So, parallel memory transmission should be disabled
when using this function.
For reception, the machine can file any fax messages that were received, except the following.
Messages with a confidential ID
Messages received while Memory Lock was enabled
Messages for Transfer
If the total amount of filed messages exceeds the threshold (40 MB is the default), if the total number of filed pages exceeds 3000, or if the number of
files exceeds 500, the machine will delete files, starting from the oldest one.
Also, if a message takes up more than the 95% of the threshold (40 MB x
95% = 38 MB at default), the machine will not file it.
Cross Reference
Hard disk filing system on/off - User function 62
Programming specified parties - User function 85
Usage of specified parties - User parameter 09, bits 2 and 3
Filed message retransmission on/off - System switch 13, bit 2
Threshold memory space for this function - System bit switch 13, bits 0 and 1
Printing filed messages - User function 58
Deleting filed messages - User function 24
H515
2-68
SM
2.4. PCBs
2.4.1. MFCE
Function
Upgrade
Card
Feature
Expander
2M
Feature
Expander
4M
HDD
Interface
80MB HDD
DETAILED
SECTION
DESCRIPTIONS
Fax On
Demand
Card
IC Card
(Type B)
Lower Slot Upper Slot
CiG4-SV
G4 Interface
Serial I/F
IC Card
(Type A)
RS232C
Interface
Parallel I/F
MFDU
DRAM
(2MB)
MFCE
Flash ROM
(2MB)
SRAM
(128kB)
SCP
Voice
A/D
Converter
CG ROM
(512kB)
DATA/ADDRESS BUS
Video SRAM
(24kB)
VPP4F
LPC
R144EFXL
Modem
H515D530.wmf
1. SCP (System Control Peripheral)
CPU
Data compression and reconstruction (DCR)
MMR + raw data compression for SAF storage (DCMMR)
DMA controller
Clock generation
Stepper motor control
DRAM backup control
Ringing signal/tone detection
Fusing lamp control
2. LPC (Laser Printer Controller)
Laser interface (LIF)

Voice A/D converter control
Serial interface to MFDU (EXIO and energy saver CPU)
Parallel interface to MFDU
3. Modem (Rockwell R144EFXL)
SM
V.21, V.27ter, V.29, V.17, and V.33 modems
2-69
H515
4. VPP4F (Video Processing Peripheral 4F)
Video signal and thermistor output A/D conversion

Digital video processing
5. ROM
2MB (16 Mbit) flash ROM for system software storage

512 kB (4 Mbit) mask ROM for LCD and report font storage (CGROM)
6. DRAM
2 MB DRAM shared between the Line Buffer (32 kB), ECM Buffer (128
kB), Page Memory (768 kB), and SAF memory (1 MB)
1 MB SAF memory, backed up by the battery on the MFDU
7. SRAM
128 kB SRAM for system and user parameter storage, backed up by

the battery on the MFCE
8. Video SRAM
8 kB SRAM for video processing
9. Voice A/D converter
Digital encoding of analog voice messages

Analog voice generation
10. Oscillators
42.20545 MHz oscillator for system clock generation

32.768 MHz oscillator for the real time clock. This is backed up by the
battery on the MFCE
38.00053 MHz oscillator for the VPP4F and R144EFXL modem
11. IC Card Slots
Upper slot for an optional Feature Expander (SAF memory)

Lower slot for an optional Function Upgrade Card or Fax On Demand
Card
12. Jumpers, Switches, and Test Points

Item
SW2
H515
Description
Switches the backup battery ON/OFF
2-70
SM
Item
DETAILED
SECTION
DESCRIPTIONS
CN6
Description
Test connector for scanner adjustment
Pin 1 - Data enable clock
Pin 2 - Analog video signal
Pin 3 - Line synchronization clock
Pin 4 - Ground
Refer to section 5.11 for how to adjust the scanner.
SM
2-71
H515
2.4.2. MFDU
MFCE
SBU
Microphone
(Fax on Demand)
MFDU
LDDR
Laser Synch.
Hybrid IC
Printer
Interface
DTMF
Receiver
EXIO1
EXIO2
NCU
Speaker
Energy
Saver CPU
Sensors
DC/DC
Converter
PSU
Clutches
Hexagonal Mirror
Motor
Main Motor
MFPD
Scanner Motor
Paper Feed Motor
Mechanical
Counter
Power Pack
CTM
Fan Motors
Mechanical
Components
100 Sheet
Cassette
Operation
Panel
PFUs
+24VD
Interlock Switches
+24VM
Parallel Interface
+24V
+5VLD
Serial Interface
+5V
H515D531.wmf
1. Energy Saver CPU
4 bit CPU for controlling the machine during energy saver mode.
2. FPD (Facsimile Power Driver)
H515
Stepper motor driver.
2-72
SM
3. EXIO1, EXIO2 (External I/O)
Serial interface to the MFCE, operation panel, FPD, DTMF receiver,

and optional paper feed units
Parallel interface to the motors, clutches, sensors, and other electrical
components
4. Analog circuit with HIC (Hybrid IC)
2-4 wire switching
Filters and amplifiers
Monitor speaker driver
DETAILED
SECTION
DESCRIPTIONS
5. DTMF Receiver
DTMF signal detection for Transfer Request using DTMF and Fax On
Demand operations
Serial interface to the EXIO
6. DC/DC Converters
+5V, +12.4V, +12V, and -9V generation
7. DRAM Backup
+5VD generation for DRAM (SAF memory) backup
8. Interlock Switches
The top/front cover interlock switch disables the power supply to the
drive components, the laser diode, and the power pack.
The fusing exit cover interlock switch disables the laser diode power
only.
9. Fuse and Test Points
Item
F1
TP1
TP3
TP2
TP4
TP5
TP6
TP7
SM
Description
250V/5A fuse for the +24VD power supply
-9V
COM1 ground
+5VE
+5VLD from both interlock switches
+24VD from the top/front cover interlock switch
Laser synchronization signal
+24V input from the PSU
2-73
H515
2.4.3. PSU
+24Vdc generation
F1
ACL
Main
Switch
F2
+24V
AC
Input
ACN
Surge
Protection
Surge
Protection
Switching
Circuit
PSU
Interlock
Switch
COM3
GND
+24VD
Fusing Lamp
Output
1HTORON
HTL
1HTON
Fusing
Control
HTN
H515D532.wmf
Fusing lamp ac power supply and control
2.4.4. NCU (USA)
JP5
TIP
OHDISW
RING
TRXD
24
V
Current
Sensor
JP6
OHDISW
NCU
Hook0
Hook1
T1
ExRing
R1
Ring Detect
24V
T1
Ext. Tel
DP/Off-Hook
Detection
R1
Relay
ExDI
H515D633.wmf
1. Jumpers
Item
JP5
JP6
H515
Description
These jumpers should be shorted when the machine is being tested in
back-to-back mode. Also set G3 switch 00 bit 7 to 1. (See section 4.2.5.)
Be sure to return these setting to default after testing is completed.
2-74
SM
INSTALLATION
3. INSTALLATION
3.1. INSTALLING THE MACHINE
Refer to the Operators manual for the installation environment and how to
install and set up the machine.
Items to Program (Service Level)

Country code (NCU parameter 00)
Country code (System switch 0F)
Protocol requirements (G3 switch 0B)
PABX access code (RAM address 4800BB)
PABX access method (RAM address 4800AD)
Machines serial number
Service stations fax number
PM call (System switch 01 - bit 0)
Periodic service call (RAM address 480379)
Function No.
Function 08
Function 01
Function 01
Function 06
Function 06
Function 14
Function 13
Function 01
Function 06
Items to Program (User Administrator Level)

Clock
Initial programming items (IDs)
On/off switches
Display/report language
Fusing power control during energy saver mode
(User parameter switch 05 - bit 6)
Function No.
Function 91
Function 61
Function 62
Function 93
SM
3-1
Function 63
H515
INSTALLATION
3.2. INITIAL PROGRAMMING
3.3. INSTALLING OPTIONAL UNITS
+CAUTION
Before installing optional units, perform the following:

1. Print out all messages stored in the memory.
2. Print out the lists of user-programmed items and the system
parameter list.
3. Turn off the main switch, and disconnect the power plug.
3.3.1. Feature Expander Type 140 (80MB Hard Disk)
Notes
Before installing the Hard Disk Unit, remove the optional Printer Interface Unit, if previously installed, Refer to service manual, section 3.3.5.
Printer Interface. On completion, re-install the printer interface unit.
After the hard disk unit is installed (steps 1 to 5 below) and the power
is initially turned on (step 6), the machine will give the appearance of
being dead. The display panel will remain completely blank, all LED indicators will be off and the machine will not accept key entries. This is
the correct condition for a newly installed hard disk unit.
[A]
Installation Procedure
1. Remove the rear cover [A] (4
screws), the left cover [B] (3
screws and the connector
cover), and the IC card slot
cover [C] as shown.
[B]
[C]
H515I501.wmf
2. Attach the bracket [D] to the

hard disk unit [E] (4 screws).
Hook the grounding plate [F]
onto the bracket [D] and secure
the hard disk unit as shown.
[D]
[F]
H515
3-2
[E]
H515I502.wmf
SM
3. Set the battery switch [G] on the hard disk interface card to the ON
position.
4. Connect the harness [J] to the
hard disk interface card (red wire
towards the connector end) and
the hard disk unit (red wire
towards the top of the unit).
Insert the hard disk interface card
into the upper card slot.
[K]
[G]
[H]
H515I503.wmf
6. Turn on the power switch. The machine will appear to be dead.

The display panel will remain completely blank, all LED indicators Will
be off and the machine will not accept key entries. This is the correct
condition for a newly installed hard disk unit.
Wait a full minute to allow the machine to properly initialize the hard
disk. DO NOT turn the power off or depress a key.
7. A. If after the one minute delay, the display panel is properly lit, proceed
directly to step 9.
B. If after a full minute has passed and the display panel remains blank,
proceed to step 8.
8.
A. Turn the machine off and disconnect the hard disk connector, CN77
(Blue Connector) from the MFDU board and turn the machine back on
.
B. Enter the Service Level Functions and perform the Hard Drive.
Initialization Procedure (Function 16). Refer to the service manual,
section 4.1.26.
C. Turn the machine off and re-connect the hard disk connector, CN77
(Blue Connector).
D. Turn the machine on and proceed to step 9.
9. Enter the Service Level Functions and perform the Bit Switch
Programming Procedure (Function 01). Set the System Switch 05, bit 4
to a 1. Refer to the Service Manual, section 4.1.1.
10. Turn the Power switch off and after several seconds, turn the power
switch on.
Note: The hard disk was pre-formatted at the factory. It is not necessary to
perform Hard Disk Formatting Procedure (Function 16, section
4.1.27).
SM
3-3
H515
INSTALLATION
Note: The top four (4) pins (two per

row) on the hard disk unit are [J]
not used.
[I]
5. Connect the harness [K] (2 pins)
from the hard disk interface card
to the connector CN77 on the MFDU board.
11 Perform the following checks to ensure that the hard disk was properly
installed and initialized:
A. With the machine is the Standby Mode, ensure that the displayed
memory indicator on the Operation Panel is 100%.
B. Enter the Service Level Functions and print a copy of Group 3
System Parameter List (Function 02). Refer to the Service Manual,
section 4.1.2.
Ensure that HD (Hard Disk) is listed under PARAMETER (installed
options) and System Switch 05, bit 4 is set to a 1.
C. Print a RAM Dump (Function 06) of the address range of 700000(H)
to 7000FF(H). Refer to the Service Manual, section 4.1.7. Note
the title on the printout is Memory Dump not RAM Dump.
Ensure that the following address locations contains the values listed
below. If any of the listed address locations contain a different value,
perform the Hard Disk Formatting Procedure (Function 16). Refer to
the Service Manual, section 4.1.27
70001E(H) - 50(H)
700022(H) - 00(H)
70001F(H) - 00(H)
700023(H) - 50(H)
700020(H) - FF(H)
700024(H) - 00(H)
700021(H) - FF(H)
700025(H) - 80(H)
12. Re-install the rear cover and the left cover.

13. Re-install the Printer Interface Unit, if removed. Refer to the Service
Manual, section 3.3.5.
+CAUTION
The hard disk interface card contains a lithium battery. The danger of
explosion exists if a battery of this type is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or an equivalent type recommended by
the manufacturer. Discard used batteries in accordance with the
manufacturers instructions.
H515
3-4
SM
3.3.2. ISDN G4 Interface

Note: Before installing the ISDN G4 interface, remove the printer interface
unit, if precioulsy installed. Refer to the Service Manual section 3.3.5,
"Printer Interface"
[A]
[B]
2. Connect the ISDN board [D] to

the MFCE through the interface
connector [E] as shown.
[C]
H515I504.wmf
3. Secure the ISDN board [D] to the

machine with 2 screws and the
support holder [F] (1 screw).
[D]
4. Re-install the rear cover and the

left cover. Connect the phone
line cable.
[E]
[F]
H515I505.wmf
5. .Plug in the machine and turn on

the main switch.
6. Program the items required for
ISDN G4 communication with
user function 61 and service
function 17.
Refer to the ISDN Option Type
140 Service Manual for details.
H515I506.WMF
SM
3-5
H515
INSTALLATION

screws), and the left cover [B] (3
screws and the connector cover).
Then, remove the small cover [C]
from the rear cover as shown.
3.3.3. Fax on Demand

CAUTION: Before installing the Fax on Demand option, review all of
the precautions listed below.
1. The Fax on Demand card can only be inserted into the lower slot
because thepin configuration of the slots are not compatible.
The connector in the upper slot contains 68 pins and the pins are located
directly under each other. Example: o o o o o o o ------ o o o
o o o o o o o ------ o o o
The connector in the lower slot contains more pins (88 pins) and the pins
are adjacent to each other. Example: o o o o o o o ----- o o o
o o o o o o o ----- o o o
2. The data stored in the card is held by a Lithium battery. Install the battery
and turn the battery switch to the on position before inserting the card
into the machine.
3. After the option is installed, System Switch 16, bit 0 MUST be set to 1.
4. If System Switch 16, bit 0 is set to 0, each time that the card is removed and
re-installed in the machine, all of the stored data in the card will be erased.
When the card is re-installed, (power off - remove card - power on), then
power off - insert card - power on), the machine will perform a
initialization procedure which will erase all of the stored data in the card.
5. When System Switch 16, bit 0 is set to 1, during the procedure listed
above, the machine will not perform the initialization routine. The stored
data will not be erased.
6. If after the proper installation, the card is removed (power off - remove
card - power on), the machine will give the appearance of being dead.
The display panel will remain blank, all of the LED indicators will be off
and the machine will not accept key entries. This is the correct
condition of turning on the machine without the card installed.
With System 16, bit 0 set to "1", at power on, the machine will look for
the installed card in the lower slot. When the card is not found, the
machine will lock up (appear to be dead).
Turn the power off and re-insert the card. If the card is not available,
insert the Flash/SRAM Copy Tool.
H515
3-6
SM
7. The Fax on Demand card and the Function Upgrade card CANNOT be
used in the same machine. As illustrated on page 1-14 of the Service
Manual, both cards can only be inserted into the lower slot.
The problem occurs when the cards are interchanged in the same
machine. Each time that the opposite card is installed, the machine will
recognize that a different card was installed and will perform a
initialization procedure to erase the stored data in the card.
With System 16, bit 0 set to 1, at power on, the machine will
look for a card in the lower slot. The machine will find a card but
will recognize that it is not the original card. The machine will
perform an initialization procedure to erase all of the stored data
in the new card to allow the operator to load new data.
When the operator inserts the original Fax on Demand card into
the machine (power off - remove Function Upgrade card - insert
Fax on Demand card - power on). As indicated above, the machine will look for a card in the lower slot but again will recognize
that is a different card. Again, the machine will perform an initialization procedure to erase all of the stored data in the new card
to allow the operator to load new data.
At this moment, the operator had inadvertently erased all of the
stored data in both the Fax on Demand and the Function Upgrade cards.
8. During the servicing, the original card can be removed and the
Flash/SRAM Copy Tool can be inserted into the lower slot. The
machine will not perform the initialization procedure. When the original
Fax on Demand card is re- inserted, the stored data will not be erased.
SM
3-7
H515
INSTALLATION
Example: The Fax on Demand card initially installed and data is stored in
the card. The operator removes the Fax on Demand card and inserts a previously loaded the Function Upgrade card (power off remove Fax on Demand card - insert Function Upgrade card power on).
1. Turn the main switch off.
2 Remove the rear cover [A] (4 screws and the IC card slot cover [B].
3. Remove the NCU cover [C] (1 screw) and install the FAX on Demand
feature cover [C]. Connect the harness [D] to CN73 on the MFDU board
as shown.
[A]
3. Install the battery into the IC card

and turn the battery switch to the
on position.
4. Insert the IC card [E] into the
lower slot and re-install the rear
cover. Connect the microphone
socket [F] into the NCU cover as
shown.
5. Turn on the main switch.
6. Enter the Service Level Function
and perform the Bit Switch
Programming Procedure
(Function 01). Set the System
Bit Switch 16, bit 0 to a 1.
Refer to the Service Manual,
section 4.1.1.
[C]
[D]
[B]
H515I507.wmf
7. Perform the following checks to

ensure that the Fax on Demand
feature was properly installed
and initialized. Enter the Service
Level Functions and print a copy
of the Group 3 System
Parameter List (Function 02).
Refer to the Service Manual,
section 4.1.2.
[E]
[F]
H515I508.wmf
Ensure that FOD (Fax on Demand) is listed under PARAMETER

(installed options) and System Switch 16, bit 0 is set to a 1.
8. Refer the Operators Manual, page 226 for the programming procedures
for the Fax on Demand feature.
+CAUTION
The IC card contains a lithium battery.

The danger of explosion exists if a battery of this type is incorrectly
replaced. Replace only with the same or an equivalent type
recommended by the manufacturer. Discard used batteries in
accordance with the manufacturers instructions.
H515
3-8
SM
3.3.4. Counter
Note: Before installing the counter, remove the printer interface unit, if
previously installed. Refer to the
Service Manual, section 3.3.5. "Printer
Interface"
[B]
[A]
H515I509.wmf
[D]
2. Install the counter [C] as shown.
[C]
3. Connect the harness [D] to the

MFDU board, then re-install the
rear cover [A] (2 screws).
4. Plug in the machine and turn on

the main switch.
5. Make some copies and confirm

that the counter advances. If not,
check the harness connection
from the counter to the MFDU
board.
SM
H515I510.wmf
3-9
H515
INSTALLATION
1. Remove the rear cover [A]

(4 screws) and the small cover [B]
as shown.
3.3.5. Printer Interface

Note: Before installing the Printer Interface Unit, remove any other optional
units, if previously installed.
screws) and two small covers [B]
(1 screw) and [C] as shown.
[A]
2. Attach the ground wire [D] (1

screw) to the machine and
re-install the rear cover [A] (1
screw at the lower left corner).
[D]
[B]
H515I511.wmf
[C]
3. Install two brackets [E] (2

screws) and [F] (2 screws) bottom screw of bracket [F] also
secures the rear cover as shown.
[E]
[F]
H515I512.wmf
4. Remove brackets [G] and [H] as

shown and install the new
brackets included in the kit.
[G]
H515I513.wmf
[H]
H515
3-10
SM
5. Connect the harness [I] to the

MFDU board through the lower
window in the rear cover and
secure the ground wire [J] to the
printer interface unit [K]. Hook
the printer interface unit onto the
brackets [G] and [H].
[I]
[J]
H515I514.wmf
7. Connect a parallel printer cable from the printer interface unit to the PC.
8. Plug in the machine and turn on the main switch.
9. Confirm that the On Line indicator on the operation panel is lit. If not,
check the harness connection from the Printer Interface Unit to the
MFDU board.
10. Enter function 39 and print a
status sheet.
English
Reset
Initalize
Copy End
Continue
Feed
Reset
Initialize
Copy End
Continue
Feed
Level 1
Level 2
Exit
On Line
11. Apply decals 4 and 5 from the

decal sheet to the operation
panel as shown.
Reset
Initialize
Level 1
Continue
Copy End
Level 2
Exit
On Line
Feed
H515I515.wmf
Note: If installation of additional SIMM memory is desired, refer to the Printer

Interface Service Manual.
4
H515I516.wmf
SM
3-11
H515
INSTALLATION
[K]
6. Secure the unit [K] to the

machine (3 screws).
3.3.6. Function Upgrade

CAUTION: Before installing the Function Upgrade, review all of the
precautions listed below.
1. The Function Upgrade card can only be inserted into the lower IC card
slot because the pin configuration of the upper and lower slots are not
compatible.
The connector in the upper slot contains 68 pins and the pins are located
directly under each other. Example: o o o o o o o ------ o o o
o o o o o o o ------ o o o
The connector in the lower slot contains more pins (88 pins) and the pins
are adjacent to each other. Example: o o o o o o o ----- o o o
o o o o o o o ----- o o o
2. The data stored in the card is held by a Lithium battery. Install the
battery and turn the battery switch to the on position before inserting the
card into the machine.
3. After the option is installed, System Switch 16, bit 0 MUST be set to 1.
4. If System Switch 16, bit 0 is set to 0, each time that the card is removed and
re-installed in the machine, all of the stored data in the card will be erased.
When the card is re-installed, (power off - remove card - power on), then
(power off - insert card - power on), the machine will perform a
initialization procedure which will erase all of the stored data in the card.
5. When System Switch 16, bit 0 is set to 1, during the procedure listed
above, the machine will not perform the initialization routine. The stored
data will not be erased.
6. If after the proper installation, the card is removed (power off - remove
card - power on), the machine will give the appearance of being dead.
The display panel will remain blank, all of the LED indicators will be off
and the machine will not accept key entries. This is the correct
condition of turning on the machine without the card installed.
With System 16, bit 0 set to 1, at power on, the machine will look for
the installed card in the lower slot. When the card is not found, the
machine will lock up (appear to be dead).
Turn the power off and re-insert the card. If the card is not available,
insert the Flash/SRAM Copy Tool.
H515
3-12
SM
7. The Function Upgrade card and the Function Upgrade card CANNOT be
used in the same machine. As illustrated on page 1-14 of the Service
Manual, both cards can only be inserted into the lower slot.
The problem occurs when the cards are interchanged in the same
machine. Each time that the opposite card is installed, the machine will
recognize that a different card was installed and will perform a
initialization procedure to erase the stored data in the card.
With System 16, bit 0 set to 1, at power on, the machine will
look for a card in the lower slot. The machine will find a card but
will recognize that it is not the original card. The machine will perform an initialization procedure to erase all of the stored data in
the new card to allow the operator to load new data.
When the operator inserts the original Function Upgrade card

into the machine (power off - remove Fax on Demand card - insert Function Upgrade card - power on). As indicated above, the
machine will look a card in the lower slot but again will recognize
that is a different card. The machine will again perform an initialization procedure to erase all of the stored data in the new card
to allow the operator to load new data.
At this moment, the operator had inadvertently erased all of the
previously stored data in both the original Function Upgrade and
the Fax on Demand cards.
8. During the servicing, the original card can be removed and the
Flash/SRAM Copy Tool can be inserted into the lower slot. The machine
will not perform the initialization procedure. When the original Function
Upgrade card is re-inserted, the stored data will not be erased.
SM
3-13
H515
INSTALLATION
Example: The Function Upgrade card initially installed and data is stored in
The card. The operator removes the Function Upgrade card and
inserts a previously loaded the Fax on Demand card (power off remove Function Upgrade card - insert Fax on Demand card power on).
1. Turn the main switch off.
2. Remove the IC card slot cover.
3. Install the battery into the IC card and turn the battery switch to the on
position.
4. Insert the IC card [E] into the lower IC card slot.
5. Turn on the main switch.
6. Enter the Service Level Function and perform the Bit Switch
ProgrammingProcedure (Function 01). Set the System Bit Switch 16, bit
0 to a 1. Refer to the Service Manual, section 4.1.1.
7. Perform the following checks to ensure that the Function Upgrade
feature was properly installed and initialized. Enter the Service level
Functions and print a copy of the Group 3 System Parameter List
(Function 02). Refer to the Service Manual, section 4.1.2.
Ensure that Function Card listed under PARAMETER (installed
options) and System Switch 16, bit 0 is set to a 1.
8. Refer the Operators Manual, page 299 for the Function Upgrade
programming procedure.
H515
3-14
SM
SERVICE TABLES AND

PROCEDURES
SM
4-A
H515
SERVICE
TABLES &
PROCEDURES
H515
4-B
SM
SM
4-C
H515
SERVICE
TABLES &
PROCEDURES
H515
4-D
SM
SM
4-E
H515
SERVICE
TABLES &
PROCEDURES
H515
4-F
SM
SM
4-G
H515
SERVICE
TABLES &
PROCEDURES
H515
4-H
SM
SM
4-I
H515
SERVICE
TABLES &
PROCEDURES
4. SERVICE TABLES & PROCEDURES

4.1. SERVICE LEVEL FUNCTIONS *
In this section, frequently
symbols.
- Start key
- Function key
- Yes key
- Up arrow key
- Right arrow key
used keys are referred to with the following

- Stop key
- No key
- Down arrow key
- Left arrow key
4.1.1. Bit Switch Programming (Function 01)
1.
SERVICE SET
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE
then immediately
2.
NO: _ OR NO
02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR
BIT SWITCH
NO: _
0.SYSTEM 1.SCANNER 2.PRINTER
PLOTER
COMMUNICATE
3.G3
4.COMMUNICATION
3. To see the system bit switches:

To see the scanner switches:
To see the printer switches:
To see the G3 switches:
To see the communication switches:

Example: Press
SYSTEM SWITCH
DEFAULT : 00000000
SWITCH00: 00000000
4. Scroll through the bit switches.

Increment bit switch:
Decrement bit switch:
Example: Display bit switch 3: x 3
SYSTEM SWITCH
DEFAULT : 00000000
SWITCH03: 00000000
5. Adjust the bit switch.

Example: To change the value of bit 7,
press
SM
4-1
SYSTEM SWITCH
DEFAULT : 00000000
SWITCH03: 10000000
H515
SERVICE
TABLES &
PROCEDURES
Enables Bit Switch Programming, to change the settings of the units

electronic DIP switches. Bit switch functions are listed on section 4.2. current
and default settings are listed on the system parameter list. (section4.1.2.)
6. Either:
Adjust more bit switches - go to step 4.
Finish -
4.1.2. Group 3 System Parameter List (Function 02)

The printout provides the techician with a copy of the operator and service
programmed setting of the machine. The listing includes the IDs settings,
the counters, NCU parameters and the default and current setting of the BIT
Switches. Refer to the sample printout in section 4.8.1 and 4.8.2.
1.

then immediately
2.
SERVICE SET
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE

NO: _ OR NO
02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR
G3 SYSTEM PARAMETER LIST

PRESS
START
NO
3.
TO CANCEL
Refer to the following table for the meaning of each counter in the list.
Name
SCN
TX
PM
Meaning
Scanned page counter
Transmitted page counter
PM counter
Name
PRT
RX
PM Default
PCU
Printed page counter using

the current master drum
using the ADF
Paper feed counter
(Standard cassette)
Paper feed counter
(Second paper feed unit)
Paper feed counter
(By-pass feeder)
Paper jam counter (total)
Paper jam counter (Jams at
the registration area)
Paper jam counter
(First paper feed unit)
Paper jam counter
(100-sheet cassette)
Printed page counter from
the PC printer interface
Reserved for future use.
COPY
ADF
MAIN
Cassette
Cassette 3
BY-PASS
COPY JAM
PAPER JAM
CST 2 JAM
OPEN CST
JAM
PRN
PPC2
PPC4
H515
4-2
TONER
Cassette 2
OPEN
Cassette
DOC. JAM
EJECT JAM
MAIN CST
JAM
CST 3 JAM
Meaning
Printed page counter
Received page counter
Default setting for the PM
service call interval
Copied page counter
Printed page counter using
the current CTM
Paper feed counter
Paper feed counter
(100 sheet cassette)
Document jam counter
BY-PASS
JAM
PPC1
Fusing exit jam counter

Paper jam counter
(Standard cassette)
Paper jam counter
Paper jam counter
(By-pass feeder)
PPC3
SM
A sample system parameter list is given below.
SYSTEM PARAMETER LIST (Date and Time) *
* *
TTI
SERIAL NO. - Serial number programmed by function 14)

ROM VER.
[Version]
[Software release no.]
[Software release date]
ROM NO.
[Software part no.] [Check sum values (total) (boot) (main)]
R T I
T T I
C S I
CONFIDENTIAL ID
ID CODE
MEMORY LOCK ID
NUMBER
OWN NUMBER
OWN NUMBER(ISDN G4)
OWN NUMBER(ISDN G3)
SERVICE NUMBER
NCU PARAMETER
COUNTER
PRINTER INTERFACE
G4
Optional memory card or Hard Disk installed

Optional paper feed unit installed
Optional paper feed unit installed
Optional function upgrade card or Fax on demand kit
installed
- Optional printer interface installed
- Optional ISDN G4 kit installed
SERVICE
TABLES &
PROCEDURES
PARAMETER
SCAN THRESHOLD
2MB, 4MB or HD
CASSETTE 2
CASSETTE 3
FUNCTION CARD or FOD
SWITCH (UPPER:DEFAULT LOWER:CURRENT)

(SWUSR) - User Parameter Settings

(SWSYS) - System Bit Switch Settings
(SWSCN) - Scanner Bit Switch Settings
(SWPLT) - Printer Bit Switch Settings
(SWCOM) - Communication Bit Switch Settings
(SWG3)
- G3 Bit Switch Settings
H515M550.wmf
SM
4-3
H515
4.1.3. Error Code Display (Function 03)

This function will allow the technician to display and scroll through the error
codes, if any, that had occured in the machine. The displayed message will
also include the time and date that each error had occured.
1. ,
SERVICE SET
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE
then immediately

2.
ERROR CODE
CODE=0-14
NO: _ OR NO
02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR
JAN
3:15PM
3. Either:
Scroll through the error codes - or

Finish -
4.1.4. Service Monitor Report (Function 04)

This function will print a listing of the error codes, if any, that had occured in
the machine. As in the displayed listing, the Service Monitor Report will
include the time and date that each error had occurred.
1.
SERVICE SET
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE
then immediately
2.
NO: _ OR NO
02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR
SERVICE MONITOR REPORT

PRESS
START
NO
TO CANCEL
3.
4.1.5. Group 3 Protocol Dump (Function 05)
This function will print the contents of the protocol signals that were
exchanged during the last communication. Refer to the sample printout in
section 4.8.
1.
SERVICE SET
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE
then immediately
2.
NO: _ OR NO
02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR
G3 PROTOCOL DUMP LIST

PRESS
START
NO
TO CANCEL
3.
H515
4-4
SM
4.1.6. RAM Display/Rewrite (Function 06)

This function will allow the technician to display the RAM data in a selected
address location and if required, allow the data to be rewritten. The data is
displayed in hexadecimal format. The current value of each address is listed in
the RAM dump printout, refer to section 4.8.2. The function of each address is
described in sections 4-3 and 4-5.
1.
NO: _ OR NO
02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR
SERVICE SET
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE
then immediately
2.
RAM
3.
MEMORY R/W
4. Input the address that you wish to see.

Example: Address 480020
MEMORY R/W
5. If you wish to change the data, move the
MEMORY R/W
0.MEMORY R/W
NO: _
1.MEMORY DUMP
ADDRESS= 000000
ADDRESS= 480020
DATA=2E
DATA=00
cursor to the data field: press
Example: 80, press
DATA= 00
MEMORY R/W
ADDRESS= 480020
6. Type in the new data.
ADDRESS= 480020
SERVICE
TABLES &
PROCEDURES

DATA= 80
7. Either:
View the previous address - press .

View the next address - press .
Finish -
4.1.7. RAM Dump (Function 06)

This function will print a listing of the current information that is stored in the
selected address location. The function of each address is described in
sections 4-3 and 4-5. The current listing of each setting can be printed by
performing the RAM Dump Procedure. Refer to the sample printout in
section 4.8.2. Note that the title of the report is called Memory Dump, not
RAM Dump.
1.
SERVICE SET
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE
then immediately
NO: _ OR NO
02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR
2.
SM
4-5
H515
NO: _
RAM
0.MEMORY R/W
3.
1.MEMORY DUMP
MEMORY DUMP
ADD. 0000 00H - ADD.
FFH
4. Enter the first four digits of the start and

end addresses.
Example: Start at 480000, end at 4801FF.

MEMORY DUMP
ADD. 480000H - ADD. 4800FFH
5.
4.1.8. Counter Display/Rewrite (Function 07)

This function allows the technician to read and reset the counters. The
current totals of the counters are also listed on the system parameter list.
Refer to the sample printout. in section 4.8.1.
1.
SERVICE SET
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE
then immediately
2.
COUNTER R/W
NO: _ OR NO
02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR
NO: _
0.COUNTER
1.PM COUNTER
2.CTM COUNTER
3.PCU COUNTER
COUNTER
TX : 000000
RX : 000000
SCN: 000000
3. Either:
Check the transmitted, received,
scanned and printed page counters, and
the printer and scanner jam counters press
Check the PM counter - press
Check the CTM counter - press

Check the OPU counter - press
Example: Press
PRT: 000000
4. To change the contents of a counter,

input the new value, then press
.
5. To finish:
H515
4-6
SM
4.1.9. Modem Test (Function 08)

This test allows the technician to hear the audio tone of each of the modem
signals.
1.
SERVICE SET
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE
then immediately
2.
NO: _ OR NO
02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR
NO: _
NCU
0.MODEM
2.NCU PARA
3.
1.DTMF
3.RINGER
MODEM TEST
NO.01=V21
300BPS
PRESS "START"
4. Scroll through the available tests using
or .

SERVICE
TABLES &
PROCEDURES
5. To start a test:
6. To stop the test:

7. To finish:
4.1.10. DTMF Tone Test (Function 08)
This test allows the technician to hear the audio tone of each key of the ten key pad.
1.
SERVICE SET
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE
then immediately
2.
NO: _ OR NO
02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR
NO: _
NCU
0.MODEM
2.NCU PARA
3.
1.DTMF
3.RINGER
DTMF TEST
NO.01=TONE [0]
PRESS "START"
or .
5. To start a test:

7. To finish:
SM
4-7
H515
4.1.11. NCU Parameters (Function 08)

This controls the Network Control Unit (NCU) automatic dialing parameters
for such as the auto-answering frequencies, length of the pause and the
number of rings before the machine will answer an incoming call. The
current value of each address is listed on the system parameter list. Refer to
the sample printout in section 4.8.1.
1.
SERVICE SET
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE
then immediately
2.
NO: _ OR NO
02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR
NO: _
NCU
0.MODEM
2.NCU PARA
3.
1.DTMF
3.RINGER
NCU PARAMETER SET

C.C =019
PRESS "YES/NO"
4. Scroll through the parameters using
or . If you want to change a value,

enter the new value at the keypad,
then press .
5. To finish : .
Note: Parameter CC is the Country Code, Parameter 01 is the Tx level.
Refer to section 4.3 for full details on NCU parameters.
4.1.12. Modem Detection Test (Function 08)
This function is not available in U.S. models.
H515
4-8
SM
4.1.13. Ringer Test (Function 08)

This test will output the audio tone of the ring signal.
1.
SERVICE SET
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE
then immediately
2.
NO: _ OR NO
02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR
NO: _
NCU
0.MODEM
2.NCU PARA
3.
1.DTMF
3.RINGER
RINGER TEST
PRESS START
4. To start the test:

6. To stop :
SM
SERVICE
TABLES &
PROCEDURES
7. To finish:
4-9
H515
4.1.14. Operation Panel Test (Function 09)

The operation panel test will light all of the segments in the display panel and
all of the LED indicatiors.
1.
SERVICE SET
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE
then immediately
2.
NO: _ OR NO
02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR
LED.LCD
PRESS START
3. To start the test, press .

The screen should turn black.
4. To stop the test, press
5. To finish:
4.1.15. Xenon Lamp Test (Function 10)

This test will illuminate the xenon lamp in the scanning section.
1.
SERVICE SET
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE
then immediately
2.
SCANNER
3.
NO: _ OR NO
02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR
Xe LAMP
0.Xe LAMP
NO: _
1.ADF TEST
PRESS START
4. To start the test, press

6. To finish:
H515
4-10
SM
4.1.16. ADF Test (Function 10)

The machine will perform the service mode automatic document feed (ADF) test
procedure. The test consists of feeding the documents that were inserted into
the ADF without perfoming an actual FAX, or copy operation.
1.
SERVICE SET
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE
then immediately
2.
SCANNER
3.
NO: _ OR NO
02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR
ADF TEST
NO: _
0.Xe LAMP
1.ADF TEST
PRESS START
4. Place a document in the feeder,

then press
SERVICE
TABLES &
PROCEDURES
5. To stop the test, press .

6. Finish:
4.1.17. Printer Test Patterns (Function 11)
The service test will allow the technician to test the operation of the printer section
on the machine by printing the test patterns that are stored in the RAM section of
the machine. The machine will print one copy of each selected test pattern.
1.
SERVICE SET
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE
then immediately
2.
PRINTER
3.
NO: _ OR NO
02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR
PATTERN
NO: _
0.PATTERN
1.AGING TEST
ENTER CODE
CODE: _
NO
4. Press a key from to .
PATTERN
CODE: 0
TO CANCEL
SCROLL
VERTICAL
PRESS
START
5. Press .
A test pattern is printed.
6. To finish:
SM
4-11
H515
4.1.18. Scanner and Printer Mechanism Test - Free Run (Function 11)
The aging test will continuously cycle the machine. During the aging test, the
machine will light all of the operation panel indicators, the display panel, the
xenon lamp and the ADF unit will cycle. In addition, the machine will print a
thin diagonal line on each sheet of paper. To terminate the aging test,
depress the STOP key.
1.
SERVICE SET
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE
then immediately
2.
PRINTER
3.
NO: _ OR NO
02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR
MECH. TEST
NO: _
0.PATTERN
1.AGING TEST
PRESS START
4. To start the free run, press .

6. To finish:

4.1.19. RAM Tests (Function 12)

The RAM test will allow the technician to verify the operation of the SRAM
and DRAM.
1.
SERVICE SET
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE
then immediately
2.
NO: _ OR NO
02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR
NO: _
RAM TEST
0.SRAM
1.DRAM
2.COPY
3. Either:
Test the SRAM:
Test the DRAM:
Press
Press
If test is successful, the display shows "OK!!".

If test is unsuccessful, the display shows "ADDRESS=".
4. To finish:
H515
.
4-12
SM
4.1.20. Software Download (Function 12)

Instead of replacing EPROMs to update the machines software, use this
procedure to update the software in the machines Flash ROM.
This procedure copies software from an external medium to the Flash ROM
on the machines MFCE. The external medium for the new software can be
an MFCE or an EPROM board.
+CAUTION:
DO NOT PROCEED BEFORE READING!

If the machine has an optional Function Upgrade card or an optional
Fax On Demand card, follow the instructions in section 4.1.23.
Otherwise, the programmed data in the IC card may all be erased.
1. Turn the machine off.
2. Insert the Flash/SRAM Copy Tool [A] into the lower IC card slot [B], then
connect the MFCE [C] or EPROM board [D] with new software to the
opposite side of the tool.
The switch [E] on the tool [A] must be at the ON position.
SERVICE
TABLES &
PROCEDURES
Note:
The EPROM board uses four 4Mbit EPROMs. Each EPROM must meet the following
specifications.
[D]
[B]
[A]
[E] = ON
[C]
Size: 4 Mbits
Number of pins: 32
Socket 1: ROM0, D15 - D8
H515M551.wmf
Data width: 8 bits

Access speed: Faster than 150 ns
Socket 4, ROM1, D7 - D0
3. Turn on the machine.

Please read the note following step 11, if ROM upgrade includes rewriting
Boot Block.
SM
4-13
H515
4.
SERVICE SET
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE
then immediately
5.
NO: _ OR NO
02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR
NO: _
RAM TEST
0.SRAM
1.DRAM
2.COPY
6.
NO: _
COPY
0.ROM COPY
7.
1.RAM COPY
COPY
FLASH ROM
-> MACHINE
PRESS START
8.
If the software is successfully downloaded, the bottom line of the display
display shows "OK".
If the software download fails, the bottom line shows "NG".
9. To finish, press
.
10. Turn the machine off, disconnect the tool, then turn the machine back on.
11. Print out the system parameter list and check the ROM version on it.
Note: In rare cases, the boot block will have to be rewritten. In such cases,
you must do the following in addition to the above procedure.
After step 3, set bit 5 of system switch 02 to 1.
After step 11, reset bit 5 of system switch 02 to 0.
H515
4-14
SM
4.1.21. Software Upload (Function 12)

This procedure copies the software from the machines installed MFCE to an
external MFCE.
+CAUTION

connect the external MFCE [C] to the opposite side of the tool.
SERVICE
TABLES &
PROCEDURES
Note:
[D] = OFF
[B]
[A]
[C]
H515M552.wmf
The switch [D] on the tool must be at the OFF position.

3. Turn the machine on.
4.
SERVICE SET
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE
then immediately
5.
NO: _ OR NO
02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR
NO: _
RAM TEST
0.SRAM
1.DRAM
2.COPY
SM
4-15
H515
6.
NO: _
COPY
0.ROM COPY
7.
1.RAM COPY
COPY
MACHINE
-> FLASH ROM

PRESS START
8.
If the software is successfully uploaded, the bottom line of the display
shows "OK".
If the software upload fails, the bottom line shows "NG".
9. Finish :
10. Turn the machine off, disconnect the tool, then turn the machine on again.
H515
4-16
SM
Rev. 9/96
4.1.22. SRAM Data Download (Function 12)

This procedure copies all the data stored in the SRAM on an external MFCE
to the machines MFCE. Use this after replacing a damaged MFCE to save
any previous settings that were programmed in the damaged MFCE.
+CAUTION

NOTE: Prior to performing this function, program the same country code in
the Fax machine as the external FCE. If this cannot be done, conduct the download process twice.
SERVICE
TABLES &
PROCEDURES

connect the damaged MFCE [C] to the opposite side of the tool.
[D] = OFF
[B]
[A]
[C]
H515M552.wmf
Note: The switch [D] on the tool must be at the OFF position.
4.
SERVICE SET
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE
then immediately
SM
4-17
NO: _ OR NO
02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR
H515
5.
NO: _
RAM TEST
0.SRAM
1.DRAM
2.COPY
6.
NO: _
COPY
0.ROM COPY
7.
1.RAM COPY
COPY
MACHINE
-> RAM
PRESS START
8.
If the SRAM data is successfully downloaded, the bottom line of the
display shows "OK".
If the SRAM download fails, the bottom line of the display shows "NG".
9. Finish :
10. Turn the machine off, disconnect the tool, then turn the machine back on.
4.1.23. Saving Data Programmed in IC Cards
If the machine has an optional Function Upgrade Card or Fax On Demand
Card, the card must be removed from the IC card slot before performing any
of the following procedures:
Downloading/uploading software
Replacing the MFCE
Replacing the MFDU or other components
Also in this case, System Switch 16 - bit 0 should have been set to 1 as
explained in section 3.3.6, to prevent the data inside the IC card from being
accidentally initialized.
Perform the procedures as explained below, to prevent data from being
erased from the card.
Note: Refer to section 1.2.2 for the type of data that can be
programmed in the Function Upgrade Card. The data in the Fax
On Demand Card are voice messages.
The data in the SAF memory card or hard disk will be erased if
the card or the hard disk interface is removed from the machine.
1. When downloading/uploading software
1. Ensure that System Switch 16 - bit 0 is set to 1, and that the battery
switch on the IC card is at the ON position.
2. Turn the machine off, and remove the IC card.
3. Connect the data copy tool and ROM board or MFCE, and perform the
required procedure as explained in section 4.1.20 or 4.1.21.
H515
4-18
SM
4. After the downloading/uploading operation has been finished, turn off the
machine and disconnect the tool.
+CAUTION
If the machine is turned on without the card being put back in the
lower IC card slot, the machine recognizes that the card has been
removed and all the data programmed in the card will not be
accessable.
5. Re-insert the IC card, then turn the machine on.
6. Ensure that all the programmed data in the IC cards can still be used.
2. When replacing the MFCE
When replacing the a defective MFCE, the new MFCE installed in the
machine must have the same SRAM data as the defective MFCE had,
before the IC card is put back.
SERVICE
TABLES &
PROCEDURES
1. Ensure that System Switch 16 - bit 0 is set to 1, and that the battery
2. Turn off the machine, remove the IC card, and replace the MFCE.
Do not turn the machine on at this point.
3. Connect the data copy tool and the defective MFCE as explained in
section 4.1.22, then turn the machine on.
4. Copy the SRAM data from the defective MFCE outside to the new MFCE
inside, as explained in section 4.1.22.
5. After the SRAM data has been copied successfully, turn the machine on
and disconnect the tool.
6. Re-insert the IC card, and turn the machine on.
Note: If the machine is accidentally turned on without the IC card at
this point, go back to step 3 again.
7. Ensure that all the programmed data in the IC card can still be used.
SM
4-19
H515
3. When replacing the MFDU or other components

When the MFCE must be removed to access or remove other components
inside the machine, follow the procedure below.
1. Make sure that System Switch 16 - bit 0 is set to 1, and that the battery
2. Turn the machine off, remove the IC card, and replace the required
components inside the machine.
+CAUTION
If the machine is turned on without the card being put back in the
lower IC card slot, the machine recognizes that the card has been
removed and all the data programmed in the card will not be
accessable any more.
3. After replacement has been completed, re-install the MFCE and the IC
card, then turn the machine on.
4. Ensure that all the programmed data in the IC card can still be used.
4.1.24. Service Station Fax Number (Function 13)
1.
SERVICE SET
2.
S.S.NO.
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE
then immediately
NO: _ OR
NO
02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR
ENTER FAX NUMBER
<G3>
NO
TO CANCEL
3. Input the telephone number of the service station that will receive Auto Service
calls from this machine.
S.S.NO.
<G3>
YES
OR
CLR
. NO
212-555-1234
To use a G4 number, press the G4 key.

To erase the telephone number: press
4. If the display is correct:

Cross Reference
Using a User Function Key as ISDN Subaddress Input
- Function 36, Code No = 10
H515
4-20
SM
4.1.25. Serial Number (Function 14)

This function will allow the operator to record the serial number of the
machine into the RAM memory. The recorded serial number is used during
the feature of placing an auto service call. The entered serial number is listed
on the System Parameter List.
1.
SERVICE SET
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE
then immediately
2.
NO: _ OR NO
02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR
SERIAL NO.
_
3. Enter the machines serial number at the

keypad.
SERIAL NO.
To correct a mistake:
64997244292
This procedure may be performed when installing the optional hard disk.
(Refer to section 3.3.1.)
1.
SERVICE SET
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE
then immediately
2.
NO: _ OR NO
02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR
NO: _
HD
0.INITIAL
1.FORMAT
2.TEST
3.
FILE INITIAL
PRESS START
4.
If the initialization was completed without error, OK!! will be displayed.
If there was an error, NG!! will be displayed.
SM
4-21
H515
SERVICE
TABLES &
PROCEDURES
4.1.26. Hard Disk Initialization (Function 16)
4.1.27. Hard Disk Formatting (Function 16)

NOTE: This procedure is not necessary at hard disk installation. The disk
was pre-formated at the factory.
1.
SERVICE SET
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE
then immediately
2.
NO: _ OR NO
02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR
NO: _
HD
0.INITIAL
1.FORMAT
2.TEST
3.
HD FORMAT
PRESS START
4.
Formatting the hard disk takes more than 30 minutes.
If the format was completed without error, OK!! will be displayed.
4.1.28. Hard Disk Test (Function 16)
1.
SERVICE SET
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE
then immediately
2.
NO: _ OR NO
02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR
NO: _
HD
0.INITIAL
1.FORMAT
2.TEST
3.
HD TEST
PRESS START
4.
If the test was completed without error, OK!! will be displayed.
H515
4-22
SM
4.1.29. G4 Parameter Programming (Function 17)

1.
SERVICE SET
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE
G4
then immediately
2.
NO: _ OR NO
02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR
NO: _ OR
01G4_ISW
03ISDN_IP
NO
02G4_PSW
04G4_SN1
SERVICE
TABLES &
PROCEDURES
Refer to the service manual for the ISDN G4 option for further details of
the G4 parameter programming procedures.
SM
4-23
H515
4.2. BIT SWITCHES
+WARNING
Do not adjust a bit switch that is described as "Not used", as this may
cause the machine to malfunction or to operate in a manner that is
not accepted by local regulations. Such bits are for use only in other
areas, such as Japan.
Note: Default settings for bit switches are not listed in this manual. Refer to
the System Parameter List printed by the machine. (Refer to section
4.1.2 for the System Parameter List printout procedure).
4.2.1. System Switches
System Switch 00
No
FUNCTION
RAM Reset
Bit 1
0
0
1
1
Bit 0
0
1
0
1
Reset Level
No reset
Reset Level 2
Reset Level 3
Not used
COMMENTS
Reset Level 3: Erases all image data files stored in
the SAF memory and communciation files (e.g. polling
rx file). This setting is recommended for use when it is
necessary to clear the SAF.
Reset Level 2: In addition to those items erased by
Reset Level 3, the following items are erased: own
telephone number, bit switches, RTI/TTI/CSI, report
data, programmed telephone numbers (Quick/Speed/
Groups, service station, etc.), NCU parameters,
personal codes.
After erasing, the machine will automaticly change the
two bits 0 and 1 back to "0".
1
No reset: Normal operation
Cross reference
RAM Reset Level 1 (Factory reset):
Change the data in RAM address 480000(H) to FF(H),
then turn the machine off and on. In addition to those
items erased by Reset Level 2, the clock and
scan/print registration settings are erased.
Note
After a RAM reset level 1 or 2, initial toner supply will
automatically be cycled for 90 seconds.
H515
4-24
SM
System Switch 00
FUNCTION
Technical data printout on
TCR (Journal)
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
COMMENTS
1: Instead of the personal code, the following data are
listed on the TCR for each analog G3 communication.
e.g. V33 14 01 03 00 02
First set of numbers: Final modem type used
Second set of numbers: Final modem rate (for
example, 14 means 14.4 kbps)
Third and fourth numbers: Line quality data. Either a
measure of the error rate or the rx level is printed,
depending on the bit 3 setting below. (An M on the
report indicates that it is error rate, and an L indicates
Rx level.) The left hand figure is the low byte and the
right hand figure is the high byte (refer to the following
note for how to read the rx level). If it is a measure of
the error rate; a larger number means more errors.
Fifth set of numbers (rx mode only): Total number
of error lines that occurred during non-ECM reception.
Sixth set of numbers (rx mode only): Total number
of burst error lines that occurred during non-ECM
reception.
The fifth and sixth numbers are fixed at 00 for
transmission records and ECM reception records.
How to calculate the rx level listed on the TCR (Journal)

Example: V29 96 L 01 A0 00 00
The four-digit hexadeimal value (N) after L indicates the rx level.
The high byte is given first, followed by the low byte. Divide the decimal value of N by
-16 to get the rx level.
In the above example, the decimal value of N (= 01A0 [H]) is 416.
So, the actual rx level is 416/-16 = -26 dB
Line quality data output

method
0: Measure of error rate
(during image data
transmission only)
1: Rx level
This bit determines the data type to be printed on the

TCR (Journal) when the technical data printout is
enabled by bit 2 above.
Line error marks on

received pages
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
If this bit is 1, a mark will be printed on the left edge of

the page at any place where a line error occured in the
data. Such errors can be caused by a noisy line.
G3/G4 Communication
parameter display
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
This is a fault-finding aid. The LCD will show the key

parameters (see the next 2 pages). This is normally
disabled because it will cancel the CSI display for the
user.
Be sure to reset this bit to 0 after testing.
Protocol dump list output

after each communication
0: Off 1: On
This is only used for communication troubleshooting. It

will show the content of the transmitted facsimile
protocol signals. Always reset this bit to 0 after
finishing testing.
SM
4-25
H515
SERVICE
TABLES &
PROCEDURES
No
System Switch 00
No
FUNCTION
Amount of protocol dump

data in one protocol dump
list printout operation
0: Up to the limit of the
memory area for protocol
dumping
1: Last communication only
COMMENTS
Change this bit to 1 if you want to have a protocol
dump list of the last communication only.
G3 Communication Parameters
Mode
Modem rate
Resolution
Compression
mode
Communication
mode
Width and
reduction
I/O rate
H515
DCS: ITU-T standard

NSS: Non-standard G3
144: 14400 bps
120: 12000 bps
96: 9600 bps
72: 7200 bps
48: 4800 bps
24: 2400 bps
S: Standard (8 x 3.85 dots per mm)
D: Detail (8 x 7.7 dots per mm)
F: Fine (8 x 15.4 dots per mm)
21: Standard (200 x 100 dpi)
22: Detail (200 x 200 dpi)
MMR: MMR compression
MR: MR compression
MH: MH compression
ECM: With ECM
SSC: Using SSC
EFC: Using EFC
NML: With no ECM, SSC, or EFC
A4: A4 (8.3"), no reduction
B4: B4 (10.1"), no reduction (tx only)
A3: A3 (11.7"), no reduction (tx only)
0: 0 ms/line
25: 2.5 ms/line
5: 5 ms/line
10: 10 ms/line
20: 20 ms/line
40: 40 ms/line
4-26
SM
Resolution
Width and
reduction
Transfer
Confidential
Other
parameters

MR: MR compression
MH: MH compression
22: Detail (200 x 200 dpi)
24: Fine (200 x 400 dpi)
T: Transfer
- : Other
C: Confidential
- : Other
The following information is shown in 6-bit format. Bit 1 is the first bit
from the left, and bit 6 is at the right end.
Bit 1 - Smoothing
0: Enabled, 1: Disabled
(Smoothing is disabled in halftone mode.)
Bit 2 - CIL printing
Bit 3 - 1: Not used
Bit 4 - mm/inch conversion
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 5 - Engine type
0: mm, 1: inch
Bit 6 - Resolution unit
0: mm, 1: inch
System Switch 01
No
1-7
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
PM call
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
This bit switch will determine whether the machine will

send an Auto Service Call to the service station when
it is time for PM.
Cross reference
Auto service calls: Section 2.3.2
Not used
Do not change the settings.
System Switch 02
No
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
1: All messages in the memory (including confidential
rx messages) are sent to the fax number which is
programmed as the service station.
Always reset this bit to zero after transfer.
Cross reference
Service station number programming: Function 13
Programmed data transfer

(Back-to-back)
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Memory file transfer

0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Do the following steps to transfer the data.

1. Connect two machines of the same type back to
back and enable back-to-back communication on both
machines. (For this machine, set bit 7 of G3 bit switch
00 to 1.)
2. Set this switch (System Switch 02, bit 1) to 1 on the
receiving machine.
3. Insert a sheet of paper in the ADF, and press Start
on both machines. The data is transferred.
4. Disable back-to-back communication and return this
bit to 0 after finishing.
Not used
Do not change the setting.
SM
4-27
H515
SERVICE
TABLES &
PROCEDURES
Compression
mode
System Switch 02
No
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
Memory file printout

0: Disabled
1: Enabled
1: All SAF files, including confidential messages, can

be printed using Function 54 or 55.
Always reset this bit after printing the messages.
Not used
Software download area

0: All except the boot block
1: All areas, including the
boot block
0: This is the normal setting. For normal software

downloads, do not change this bit switch.
1: Set this bit to 1 only when you need to rewrite the
boot block in the Flash ROM using Function 12.
Cross reference
Software Download: Section 4.1.20
5
Keep this bit at 0 except for
the rare cases when the
Flash ROM boot block has
to be rewritten.
6
7
Memory read/write by RDS

Bit 7 6
Setting
0 0
Always disabled
0 1
User selectable
1 0
User selectable
1 1
Always enabled
(0,0): All RDS systems are always locked out.

(0,1), (1,0): Normally, RDS systems are locked out,
but the user can temporarily switch RDS on to allow
RDS operations to take place. RDS will automatically
be locked out again after a certain time, which is
stored in System Switch 03 (see below). Note that if
an RDS operation takes place, RDS will not switch off
until this time limit has expired.
(1,1): At any time, an RDS system can access the
machine.
System Switch 03
No
FUNCTION
Length of time that RDS is

temporarily switched on
when bits 6 and 7 of
System Switch 02 are set to
"User selectable"
to
7
COMMENTS
00 - 99 hours (BCD).
This data is only valid if bits 6 and 7 of System Switch
02 are set to "User selectable".
The default setting is 24 hours.
System Switch 04
No
0
1
2
FUNCTION
LCD contrast
Bit 2 1 0
0 0 0
0 0 1
1 1 0
1 1 1
Contrast
Brightest
Darkest
COMMENTS
Use these bit switches to adjust the contrast of the
LCD on the operation panel.
Dedicated transmission
parameter programming
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
This bit must be set to 1 before changing any

dedicated transmission parameters.
Inclusion of the Start key in

Keystroke Programs
0: Not needed
1: Needed
0: The user does not need to press the Start key when
operating a keystroke program.
H515
4-28
SM
System Switch 04
No
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
Master drum replacement

level
0: User
1: Service
0: The machine will ask the user to replace the drum

at 30,000 print intervals (default interval).
After the user replaces the drum, the machine will ask
the user if the drum has been replaced. If the user
answers yes, the machine will reset the OPC counter
to zero. The drum replacement interval is programmed
at addresses 480228 to 48022A(H). Refer to section
4.5 for more details.
1: The machine will not ask the user to replace the
drum.
G3 CSI/G4 Terminal ID
programming level
0: User level
1: Service level
1: The CSI and Terminal ID can only be programmed

using a service function.
The Terminal ID can only be programmed if a Group 4
option is installed.
Telephone line type

programming mode
0: User level
1: Service level
1: Telephone line type selection (tone dial or pulse

dial) can only be programmed using a service function.
SERVICE
TABLES &
PROCEDURES
SM
4-29
H515
System Switch 05
No
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
Not used
G4 Terminal ID length limit

0: No limit
1: Limited
1: The length of the terminal ID is limited to 7

characters.
Display of both RTI and CSI

on the LCD
1: An RTI will be displayed until phase B of the

protocol sequence, and a CSI will be displayed after
phase C.
Not used
Hard disk option

0: Not installed
1: Installed
Change this bit to 1 when installing the hard disk

option.
Not used
6
7
System Switch 06
No
0
1-6
7
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
Use of the Stop key during

memory transmission
1: Memory transmissions can be stopped by pressing

the Stop key. However, users might accidentally
cancel another persons memory transmission in
progress.
Not used
On-screen function list

If this feature is enabled, the most frequently used

function numbers will be displayed for quick reference
whenever the user presses the Function key.
System Switch 07
No
0
FUNCTION
Date of monthly Fax On
Demand report printout
to
7
COMMENTS
00 - 31 (BCD).
[00 (BCD) - 1st day of the month (default setting)]
[01 - 31 (BCD) - Programmed day of the month]
This setting is only valid if bit 1 of User Parameter 04
is set to "1" (monthly FOD report printout enabled).
System Switch 08
No
0
to
7
H515
FUNCTION
Time of monthly Fax On
Demand report printout
COMMENTS
00 (BCD) - 0 am (default setting)
01 (BCD) - 1 am
23 (BCD) - 11 pm
This setting is only valid if bit 1 of User Parameter 04
is set to "1" (monthly FOD report printout enabled).
4-30
SM
System Switch 09
No
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
If this feature is enabled, the top half of the first page
of confidential messages will be printed on
transmission result reports.
Inclusion of
communications on the
TCR when no image data
was exchanged.
0: Communications which reached phase C (message

tx/rx) of the T.30 protocol are listed on the TCR
(Journal).
1: Communications which reached phase A (call
setup) of T.30 protocol are listed on the TCR (Journal).
This will include telephone calls.
Automatic error report

printout
0: Error reports will not be printed.

1: Error reports will be printed automatically after each
failed communication.
Printing of the error code on

the error report
0: No 1: Yes
1: Error codes are printed on the error reports.
Listing of Confidential IDs

on the Personal Code List
1: Confidential IDs registered with Personal Codes by

the users will appear on the Personal Code List.
Power failure report

1: A power failure report will be automatically printed

after the power is switched on if a fax message
disappeared from the memory when the power was
turned last off.
Not used

This bit will determine which set of priorities the
machine will use when listing remote terminal names
on reports.
Priority given to various

types of remote terminal ID
when printing reports
0: RTI > CSI > Dial label >
Tel. number
1: Dial label > Tel. number
> RTI > CSI
SM
Dial Label: The name stored with the Quick/Speed

Dial number by the user.
4-31
H515
SERVICE
TABLES &
PROCEDURES
Addition of part of the

image data from
confidential transmissions
on the transmission result
report
Rev. 5/96
System Switch 0A
No
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
Not used.
Keep this bit at 0.
Default communication
mode
0: G3
1: G4
These bits determine the machines standby default

communication mode if a G4 option has been installed.
Not used
Continuous polling reception

This feature will allow a series of stations to be polled

in a continuous cycle.
Dialing on the ten-key pad

when the external
telephone is off-hook
0: Prevents dialing from the ten-key pad while the

external telephone is off-hook. Use this setting when
the external telephone is not by the machine or a
wireless telephone is connected as an external
telephone.
1: The user can dial on the machines ten-key pad
when the handset is off-hook.
On hook dial
0: On hook dial is disabled.
Line used for G3

transmission
0: PSTN 1: ISDN
If an ISDN kit has been installed, this bit will determine

whether G3 transmissions go out over the PSTN or
the ISDN.
This bit switch has no effect if Communication Switch
07 bit 0 is set to 0.
Line used when the

machine falls back to G3
from G4 if the other end is
not a G4 machine
0: PSTN 1: ISDN
System Switch 0B
No
0
1
2
3
4
to
7
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
Automatic reset timer

Bit 1 Bit 0 Timer setting
0
0
1 minute
0
1
3 minutes
1
0
5 minutes
1
1
No limit
(1, 1): Automatic reset is disabled.

(Other): The machine will return to the standby mode
when the timer expires after the last operation.
Energy Saver mode timer

Bit 3 Bit 2 Time Limit
0
0
1 minute
0
1
3 minutes
1
0
5 minutes
1
1
No limit
(1, 1): Automatic Energy Saver mode is disabled.

(Other): The machine will go into an Energy Saver
mode when the timer expires after the last operation.
Cross reference
Energy Saver modes: Section 2.3.1
Not used
System Switch 0C - Not used (Do not change the settings.)

System Switch 0D - Not used (Do not change the settings.)
System Switch 0E - Not used (Do not change the settings.)
H515
4-32
SM
System Switch 0F
No
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
Country code for functional settings

(Hex)
0
to
7
00: France
01: Germany
02: UK
03: Italy
04: Austria
05: Belgium
06: Denmark
07: Finland
08: Ireland
09: Norway
0A: Sweden
0B: Switz.
0C: Portugal
0D: Holland
0E: Spain
0F: Israel
10: Not used

11: USA
12: Asia
13: Japan
14: Hong Kong
15: South Africa
16: Australia
17: New Zealand
18: Singapore
19: Malaysia
1A: China
1B: Taiwan
20: Turkey
21: Greece
The country code will determine the factory

settings of bit switches and RAM
addresses. However, it has no effect on the
NCU parameter settings and
communication parameter RAM addresses.
Cross reference
NCU country code: Function 08, parameter
C.C.
No
FUNCTION
0
to
7
Threshold memory level for

parallel memory
transmission
SERVICE
TABLES &
PROCEDURES
System Switch 10
COMMENTS
Threshold mount = N * 64 kbytes + 256 kbytes
N can be between 00 - FF(H)
Default setting: 04(H) = 512 kbytes
System Switch 11
No
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
TTI printing position

0: Superimposed on the
page data
1: Printed before the data
leading edge
Change this bit to 1 if the TTI overprints information

that the customer considers to be important (G3
transmissions).
CIL printing position

leading edge
1: Superimposed on the
page data
Change this bit to 1 if the CIL overprints information

that the customer considers to be important (G4
transmissions).
Label Insertion position

0: Left end 1: Right end
Change this bit to 1 if the inserted label overprints

information that the customer considers to be
important.
Not used
Use of parallel memory

transmission with G4
transmission
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
This bit will determine whether parallel transmission

can be used with a G4 transmission.
Refer to section 2.3.3 for details.
2
3
to
6
SM
4-33
H515
System Switch 12
No
COMMENTS
TTI/CIL printing position in

the main scan direction
0
to
7
FUNCTION
08 to 92 (BCD) mm. Input even numbers only.

This setting will determine the print start position for
the TTI and CIL from the left edge of the paper. If the
TTI is moved too far to the right, it may interfere with
the file number which is on the top right of the page.
On an A4 page, if the CIL is moved over by more than
60 mm, it may overwrite the page number.
CIL: Command Information

Line (Group 4)
System Switch 13
No
0
1
2
3
to
7
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
Remaining memory
threshold for activating the
hard disk filing system
Bit 1 Bit 0 Threshold
0
0
25%
0
1
50% (default)
1
0
75%
1
1
Not used
If the remaining hard disk space is below the threshold

value, the hard disk filing system cannot be used.
Adjust the threshold value to meet the customers
requirements.
Document retransmission
from the hard disk filing
system
1: Enables retransmission of filed documents from the

hard disk.
Not used
Do not change the settings
System Switch 14
No
COMMENTS
Wait time between pages in

printer mode (with the
optional printer interface
unit)
0
to
7
FUNCTION
05 to 64 (H) (5 to 100s) - This setting will determine

the machines wait time between pages in printer
mode.
A longer setting will force the fax machine to wait until
the end of printer interface output before printing any
incoming fax message.
A shorter setting allows the fax machine to print
incoming fax messages while printing from a
computer. If the controller takes more than the
specfied time to process a page of data from the host
computer, the fax machine will release the printer
resources for fax output.
Default setting: 0A(H) = 10 s
System Switch 15 - Not used (do not change the settings)
H515
4-34
SM
System Switch 16
No
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
Function Upgrade Card or

Fax On Demand Card
0: Not installed
1: Installed
Change this bit to 1 after installing a Function Upgrade

Card or a Fax On Demand Card in the machines
lower IC card slot.
0: When either a Function Upgrade Card or a Fax On
Demand Card is installed in the machines lower IC
card slot before power-off, all the data in these cards
will be initialized if the machine does not detect the
card at the next power-on.
1: When either a Function Upgrade Card or a Fax On
Demand Card is installed in the machines lower IC
card slot before power-off, the machine will not start
up unless the machine detects the IC card or the data
copy tool at the next power-on. This will prevent the
data inside the card from being initialized while
replacing PCBs or downloading software.
Not used.
1
to
7

SERVICE
TABLES &
PROCEDURES

System Switch 1A - Not used (do not change the settings)
System Switch 1B - Not used (do not change the settings)
System Switch 1C - Not used (do not change the settings)
System Switch 1D - Not used (do not change the settings)
System Switch 1E - Not used (do not change the settings)
System Switch 1F - Not used (do not change the settings)
SM
4-35
H515
4.2.2. Scanner Switches

Scanner Switch 00
No
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
MTF
0: Disabled
Text/photo separation in
halftone mode
Normally keep this bit at 1 to get a good halftone

quality.
Maximum transmittable
document length
Bit 3
2
Setting
0
0
600 mm
0
1
1200 mm
1
0
14 m
1
1
Not used
If the user wants to send very long documents such as

well logs, select 14 m.
OR processing for
immediate tx and copying
(Standard resolution)
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0: The machine will scan the document in 3.85

line/mm steps, then transmits or makes copies.
1: The machine will scan the document in 7.7 line/mm
steps. Each pair of lines is OR processed before
transmission or making copies. Toner may be used up
earlier if OR processing is enabled.
OR processing for
immediate tx and copying
(Detail resolution)
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0: The machine scans the document in 7.7 line/mm

steps, then transmits or makes copies.
1: The machine scans the document in 15.4 line/mm
steps. Each pair of lines is OR processed before
transmission or making copies. Toner may be depleted
quicker if OR processing is enabled.
Not used
2
3
6
to
7
1: Enabled
Scanner Switch 01 - Not used (do not change the settings)

Scanner Switch 02
No
FUNCTION
0
to
7
Contrast threshold with

halftone disabled - Normal
setting
COMMENTS
The value can be between 00 to FF. For a darker
threshold, input a lower value.
Default setting - 0E(H)
Scanner Switch 03
No
FUNCTION
0
to
7

halftone disabled - Lighten
setting
COMMENTS
The value can be between 00 to 0F. For a darker
Default setting - 10(H)
Scanner Switch 04
No
FUNCTION
0
to
7

halftone disabled - Darken
setting
H515
COMMENTS
Default setting - 0C(H)
4-36
SM
Scanner Switch 05
No
0
to
7
FUNCTION
halftone enabled - Normal
setting
COMMENTS
Scanner Switch 06
No
0
to
7
FUNCTION
halftone enabled - Lighten
setting
COMMENTS
Default setting - 0D(H)
Scanner Switch 07
No
0
to
7
FUNCTION
halftone enabled - Darken
setting
COMMENTS
No
0
to
7
FUNCTION
Contrast threshold for text
areas when halftone is
enabled
COMMENTS
The value can be between 00 to 0F.
This setting is ignored if Scanner Switch 00 bit 1 is at
0.
Default setting - 08H

Scanner Switch 0A - Not used (do not change the settings)
Scanner Switch 0B - Not used (do not change the settings)
Scanner Switch 0C - Not used (do not change the settings)
Scanner Switch 0D - Not used (do not change the settings)
Scanner Switch 0E - Not used (do not change the settings)
Scanner Switch 0F - Not used (do not change the settings)
SM
4-37
H515
SERVICE
TABLES &
PROCEDURES
Scanner Switch 08
4.2.3. Printer Switches

Printer Switch 00
No
FUNCTION
COMMENTS

0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0: No marks are printed.

1: If a received page has to be printed on two sheets,
an "x" inside a small box is printed at the bottom right
hand corner of the first sheet, and a "2" inside a small
box is printed at the top right hand corner of the
second sheet. This will help the user to identify pages
that have been split up.
Repetition of data when the

received page is longer
than the printer paper
0: The next page continues from where the previous

page left off.
1: The final few mm of the data on of the previous
page are printed at the top of the next page.
See section 2.2.12 for details.
Not used
Cleaning mode after bypass

feed
0: Disabled
1: After each page is fed
from the bypass feed slot
0: Cleaning mode function is not performed if the

bypass feed is used.
1: Cleaning mode function is performed every time
after a sheet of paper is fed from the bypass feed slot.
Not used
mm-inch conversion when

printing
0: Printing is always done in inch format.

1: If the other end has scanned the document in mm
format, the machine will convert the data to inch
format before printing.
4
to
6
Printer Switch 01 - Not used (do not change the settings)

Printer Switch 03
No
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
Length reduction of
received data
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0: Incoming pages are printed without length

reduction.
Cross reference
Page separation threshold: Printer Sw. 03, bits 4 to 7.
1: Incoming pages are reduced in the length direction
when printing.
Cross reference
Reduction ratio: Printer Switches 04/05
Page separation and data reduction: section 2-2-12
Not used
1
2
3
H515
4-38
SM
Printer Switch 03
No
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
Page separation threshold (with reduction disabled in switch 03-0 above)
4
to
7
If the incoming page is up to x mm longer than the copy paper, the excess portion will
not be printed. If the incoming page is more than x mm longer than the copy paper,
the excess portion will be printed on the next page.
The value of x is determined by these four bits.
Hex value of bits 4 to 7
0
1
and so on until
F
x (mm)
0
1
15
Cross reference
Page separation and data reduction: section 2-2-12
Length reduction On/Off: Printer Switch 03, Bit 0
Printer Switches 04 and 05
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
Reduction ratios used for different paper sizes (with reduction enabled in switch 03-0
above)
If reduction is enabled, the data will be reduced in the length direction before printing.
These switches determine the maximum reduction ratio for each paper size.
Cross reference
Page separation and data reduction: section 2.2.12.
0
to
7
Switch 04/05
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
US
Not used
Not used
LT lengthwise
Not used
Not used
LG lengthwise
Not used
Not used
Europe
A5 sideways
Not used
Not used
A4 lengthwise
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Asia
A5 sideways
Not used
Not used
A4 lengthwise
F/F4 lengthwise
Not used
Not used
Not used
The available paper sizes depend on the machines country version.

Sw.04 0 4 1 4 0 8 1 12
Sw.05 : 0 = 3, 0 = 3, 1 = 7, 1 = 11

SM
4-39
H515
SERVICE
TABLES &
PROCEDURES
No

Printer Switch 0A - Not used (do not change the settings)
Printer Switch 0B - Not used (do not change the settings)
Printer Switch 0C - Not used (do not change the settings)
Printer Switch 0D - Not used (do not change the settings)
Printer Switch 0E - Not used (do not change the settings)
Printer Switch 0F - Not used (do not change the settings)
H515
4-40
SM
4.2.4. Communication Switches

Communication Switch 00
0
1
2
3
4
to
6
7
SM
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
Compression modes
available in receive mode
Bit 1
0
Modes
0
0
MH only
0
1
MH/MR
1
0
MH/MR/MMR
1
1
Not used
These bits determine the compression capabilities to

be declared in phase B (handshaking) of the T.30
protocol.
Compression modes
available in transmit mode
Bit 3
2
Modes
0
0
MH only
0
1
MH/MR
1
0
MH/MR/MMR
1
1
Not used
These bits determine the compression capabilities to

be used in the transmission and to be declared in
phase B (handshaking) of the T.30 protocol.
Cross reference
EFC compression during transmission:
Communication Switch 01, bit 1.
Not used
Closed network (reception)

0: Disabled
1: Enabled
1: Reception will not go ahead if the ID code of the

other terminal does not match the ID code of this
terminal. This function is only available in NSF/NSS
mode.
4-41
H515
SERVICE
TABLES &
PROCEDURES
No
No
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
ECM
0: Off 1: On
If this bit is 0, ECM is switched off for all

communications.
EFC during transmission

0: Off 1: On
If this bit is 0, EFC is switched off during transmission.
Wrong connection
prevention method
Bit 3 Bit 2
Setting
0
0
None
0
1
8 digit CSI
1
0
4 digit CSI
1
1
CSI/RTI
(0,1) - The machine will not transmit if the last 8 digits

of the received CSI do not match the last 8 digits of
the dialed telephone number. This does not work for
manual dialing.
(1,0) - The same as above, except that only the last 4
digits are compared.
(1,1) - The machine will not transmit if the other end
does not identify itself with an RTI or CSI.
(0,0) - Nothing is checked; transmission will always go
ahead.
Operator call if no response

is received in reply to
NSF/DIS
Set this bit to 1 if the user expects to receive phone

calls at the same number which the machine is
connected to.
Not used
Maximum printable page

length available
Bit 7 Bit 6
Setting
0
0
No limit
0
1
B4 and A4
1
0
A4
1
1
Not used
The setting determined by these bits is informed to the

transmitting terminal in the pre-message protocol
exchange (in the DIS/NSF frames).
2
3
6
7
H515
4-42
SM
No
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
If there are more consecutive error lines in the
received page than the threshold, the machine will
send a negative response.
The Low and High threshold values depend on the
sub-scan resolution, and are as follows.
Resolution
100 dpi
200 dpi
Low settings
3
6
High settings
6
12
Acceptable total error line

ratio
0: 5% 1: 10%
If the error line ratio of a page exceeds the acceptable

ratio, RTN will be sent to the other end.
0: Pages received with errors are not printed.
Treatment of pages
received with errors during
G3 reception
0: Deleted from memory
without printing
1: Printed
Hang-up decision when a
negative code (RTN or PIN)
is received during G3
immediate transmission
0: No hang-up, 1: Hang-up
0: The next page will be sent even if RTN or PIN is

received.
1: The machine will send DCN and hang up if it
receives RTN or PIN.
This bit is ignored for memory transmissions or if ECM

is being used.
4
to
7
Not used
No
FUNCTION
0
to
7
Maximum number of page

retransmissions in a G3
memory transmission
COMMENTS
00 - FF (Hex) times.
This setting is not used if ECM is switched on.
Communication Switch 04 - Not used (do not change the settings)

SM
4-43
H515
SERVICE
TABLES &
PROCEDURES
Burst error threshold

0: Low 1: High
No
FUNCTION
Dialing requirements:
Germany
Austria
Norway
Denmark
France
Switzerland
Not used
COMMENTS
These switches are automatically set to the settings
required by each country after a country code (System
Switch 0F) is programmed.
7
No
3
to
7
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
Fallback from G4 to G3 if
the other terminal is not a
G4 terminal
Also see System Switch 0A bit 7.

Refer to the ISDN G4 option service manual (G4
Internal Switches 17, 18, 1A, 1B, and 1C) for the CPS
code set (Cause Value set) to determine G4 to G3
fallback.
Not used
Use of date and time

provided from the network
for the CIL (ISDN Only)
0: The date and time programmed in the receiving

terminal is used in the CIL.
1: The date and time informed in the document layer
from the remote terminal (through the network) is used
in the CIL (Command information line).
Not used
Communication Switch 08 - Not used (do not change the settings.)

Communication Switch 0A
No
FUNCTION
Point of resumption of
memory transmission upon
redialing
0: From the error page
1: From page 1
H515
COMMENTS
0: The transmission begins from the page where
transmission failed the previous time.
1: Transmission begins from the first page.
4-44
SM
No
1
to
6
7
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
Not used
Emergency calls using 999

0: Enabled 1: Disabled
If this bit is at 1, the machine will not allow you to dial

999 at the auto-dialer. This is a PTT requirement in the
UK and some other countries.
Communication Switch 0B
No
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
Use of Economy
Transmission during a
Transfer operation to End
Receivers
Use of Economy
Transfer operation to the
Next Transfer Stations
Use of Label Insertion for

the End Receivers in a
Transfer operation
This bit will determine whether the machine will use

the Label Insertion feature when it is carrying out a
Transfer operation as a Transfer Station.
Conditions required for

transmission
0: Always transmitted
1: Only transmitted if there
was an error
0: When acting as a Transfer Station, the machine will

always send a Transfer Result Report back to the
Requesting Station after completing the Transfer
Request, even if there were no problems.
1: The machine will only send back a Transfer Result
Report if there were errors during communication
indicating that one or more of the End Receivers could
not be contacted.
Printout of the message

when acting as a Transfer
Station
When the machine is acting as a Transfer Station, this

bit will determine whether the machine prints the fax
message coming in from the Requesting Terminal.
Action when there is no fax

number in the programmed
Quick/Speed dials which
meets the requesting
terminals own fax number.
0: Transfer is Disabled
1: Transfer is Enabled
After the machine receives a transfer request, the

machine will compare the last N digits of the
requesting terminals own fax number with all the
Quick/Speed dials programmed in the machine. (N is
the number programmed in communication switch 0C.)
0: If there is no matching number programmed in the
machine, the machine will reject the transfer request.
1: Even if there is no matching number programmed in
the machine, the machine will accept the transfer
request. The result report will be printed at the transfer
terminal, but will not be sent back to the requesting
terminal.
Refer to section 2.3.4 for more details.
Not used
SM
4-45
H515
SERVICE
TABLES &
PROCEDURES
These bits determine whether the machine will use the

Economy Transmission feature when it is carrying out
a Transfer operation as a Transfer Station.
Communication Switch 0C
No
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
Number of digits compared

to find the requesters fax
number from the
programmed Quick/Speed
Dials when acting as a
Transfer Station
00 - 1F (0 to 31 digits)
machine will compare the "own telephone number"
sent from the Requesting Terminal with all
Quick/Speed Dials programmed in the machine,
starting from Quick Dial 01 to the end of the Speed
Dials.
This number determines how many digits from the end
of the telephone numbers the machine will compare.
If it is set to 00, the machine will send the report to the
first Quick/Speed Dial that the machine compared. If
Quick Dial 01 is programmed, the machine will send
the report to Quick 01. If Quick Dial 01 through 04 are
not programmed and Quick Dial 05 is programmed,
the machine will send the report to Quick 05.
Default setting - 05(H) = 5 digits
Refer to section 2.3.4 for more details.
Not used
0
to
4
5
to
7
Communication Switch 0D
No
0
to
7
FUNCTION
The amount of remaining
memory below which
ringing detection (and
therefore reception into
memory) is disabled
COMMENTS
00 to FF (Hex), unit = 2 kbytes
(e.g., 0C(H) = 24 kbytes)
One page is about 24 kbytes.
If this setting is kept at 0, the machine will detect
ringing signals and go into receive mode even if there
is no memory space left. This will result in
communication failure.
Communication Switch 0E
No
0
to
7
FUNCTION
Minimum interval between
automatic dialing attempts
COMMENTS
06 to FF (Hex), unit = 2 seconds
(e.g., 06(H) = 12 seconds)
This value is the minimum time that the machine will
wait before it dials the next destination.
Communication Switch 0F
No
FUNCTION
0
to
7
Minimum number of times

that a destination will dialed
when TRD is being used
COMMENTS
01 - FF (Hex) times
No
FUNCTION
0
to
7
Memory transmission:
Maximum number of dialing
attempts to the same
destination
H515
COMMENTS
01 - FF (Hex) times
4-46
SM
No
FUNCTION
0
to
7
Immediate transmission:
Maximum number of dialing
destination
COMMENTS
01 - FF (Hex) times
No
0
to
7
FUNCTION
Memory transmission:
Interval between dialing
destination
COMMENTS
00 - FF (Hex) minutes
0
to
7
FUNCTION
Immediate transmission:
Interval between dialing
destination
COMMENTS
No
1
to
5
6
7
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
Inch-to-mm conversion
during transmission
0: Transmitting is always done in inch format.

1: If the other end only has mm-based resolution for
printing, the machine will convert the scanned data to
mm-format before transmission.
Not used
Available unit of resolution

in which fax messages are
received
Bit 7 Bit 6
Unit
0
0
mm
0
1
inch
1
0
mm and inch
(default)
1
1
Not used
For the best performance, do not change the factory

settings.
No
0
to
7
SM
FUNCTION
Available resolution for
receiving fax messages
Bit 0 1: 200 x 100/8 x 3.85
Bit 1 1: 200 x 200/8 x 7.7
Other bits: Not used
COMMENTS
For the best performance, do not change the factory
settings.
4-47
H515
SERVICE
TABLES &
PROCEDURES
No

Communication Switch 1A - Not used (do not change the settings)
Communication Switch 1B - Not used (do not change the settings)
Communication Switch 1C - Not used (do not change the settings)
Communication Switch 1D - Not used (do not change the settings)
Communication Switch 1E - Not used (do not change the settings)
Communication Switch 1F - Not used (do not change the settings)
H515
4-48
SM
4.2.5. G3 Switches
G3 Switch 00
0
1
2
3
to
6
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
Monitor speaker during

communication (tx and rx)
Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting
0
0
Disabled
0
1
Up to Phase B
1
0
All the time
1
1
Not used
(0, 0): The monitor speaker is disabled all through the

communication.
(0, 1): The monitor speaker is on up to phase B in the
T.30 protocol.
(1, 0): Used for testing. The monitor speaker is on all
through the communication. Ensure that you reset
these bits after testing.
Monitor speaker during

memory transmission
1: The monitor speaker is enabled during memory

transmission.
Not used
Back to back test

0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Set this bit to 1 when you wish to do a back to back

test.
115 V model: Be sure to connect jumpers JP5 and
JP6 on the NCU before doing the test.
SERVICE
TABLES &
PROCEDURES
No
G3 Switch 01
No
0
to
3
4
5
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
Not used
DIS frame length

0: 6 bytes 1: 4 bytes
1: The 5th and 6th bytes in the DIS frame will not be
transmitted (set to 1 if there are communication
problems with PC-based faxes which cannot receive
the extended DIS frames).
Not used
6
7
SM
4-49
H515
G3 Switch 02
No
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
G3 protocol mode used

0: Standard and
non-standard
1: Standard only
Change this bit to 1 only when the other end can only
communicate with machines that send T.30-standard
frames only.
1: Disables NSF/NSS signals (these are used in
non-standard mode communication)
Not used
Use of modem rate history

for transmission using
Quick/Speed Dials
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0: Communications using Quick/Speed Dials will

alway start at the highest modem rate.
1: The machine will refer to the modem rate history for
communications with the same machine when
determining the most suitable rate for the current
communication.
AI short protocol
(transmission and reception)
Refer to Appendix B in the Group 3 Facsimile Manual

for details about AI Short Protocol.
Short preamble
Refer to Appendix B in the Group 3 Facsimile Manual

for details about Short Preamble.
1
to
4
G3 Switch 03
No
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
DIS detection number

(Echo countermeasure)
0: 1
1: 2
0: The machine will hang up if it receives the same

DIS frame twice.
1: Before sending DCS, the machine will wait for the
second DIS which can be caused by echo on the line.
Not used
ECM frame size

0: 256 bytes
1: 64 bytes
1: ECM reception is disabled, which enlarges the SAF

memory.
CTC transmission conditions When using ECM, the machine will choose a slower
0: Ricoh mode (PPR x 1)
modem rate after receiving PPR once (Ricoh mode) or
1: ITU-T mode (PPR x 4)
four times (ITU-T mode).
ITU-T: New acronym for the CCITT.
Modem rate used for the

next page after receiving a
0: No change 1: Fallback
1: The machines tx modem rate will fall back before

sending the next page if a negative code is received.
This bit is ignored if ECM is being used.
Not used
H515
4-50
SM
G3 Switch 04
FUNCTION
0
to
3
4
to
7
COMMENTS
Training error detection

threshold
0 - F (Hex); 0 - 15 bits
If the number of error bits in the received TCF is below
this threshold, the machine will inform the sender that
the training has succeeded.
Not used
G3 Switch 05
FUNCTION
4
to
5
6
to
7
SM
These bits set the initial starting modem

rate for transmission.
Initial modem type for 9.6 k or 7.2 kbps.

Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting
0
0
V.29
0
1
V.17
1
0
Not used
1
1
Not used
These bits set the initial modem type for 9.6

and 7.2 kbps, if the initial modem rate is set
at these speeds.
Not used
Use the dedicated transmission parameters

if you need to change this for specific
receivers.
4-51
H515
SERVICE
TABLES &
PROCEDURES
0
to
3
COMMENTS
Initial Tx modem rate

Bit 3 2 1 0 Setting (bps)
0 0 0 1 2.4 k
0 0 1 0 4.8 k
0 0 1 1 7.2 k
0 1 0 0 9.6 k
0 1 0 1 12 k
0 1 1 0 14.4 k
Other settings - Not used
G3 Switch 06
FUNCTION
0
to
3
4
to
7
COMMENTS
Initial Rx modem rate

Bit 3 2 1 0 Setting (bps)
0 0 0 1 2.4 k
0 0 1 0 4.8 k
0 0 1 1 7.2 k
0 1 0 0 9.6 k
0 1 0 1 12 k
0 1 1 0 14.4 k
The setting of these bits is used to inform

the transmitting terminal of the available
modem rate for the machine in receive
mode. Use a lower setting if high speeds
pose problems during reception.
Modem types available for reception

Bit 7 6 5 4 Setting
0 0 0 1 V.27ter
0 0 1 0 V.27ter, V.29
0 0 1 1 V.27ter, V.29, V.33
0 1 0 0 V.27ter, V.29, V.33, V.17
The setting of these bits is used to inform

the transmitting terminal of the available
modem type for the machine in receive
mode.
The machine will automatically will

determine whether to use TCM or not.
G3 Switch 07
FUNCTION
0
1
PSTN cable equalizer

(tx mode)
Bit 1 Bit 0
Setting
0
0
None
0
1
Low
1
0
Medium
1
1
High
COMMENTS
Use a higher setting if there is signal loss at higher
frequencies because of the length of wire between the
modem and the telephone exchange.
Use the dedicated transmission parameters for
specific receivers.
Also, try using the cable equalizer if one or more of
the following symptoms occurs.
Communication error
Modem rate fallback occurs frequently.
2
3

(rx mode)
Bit 3 Bit 2
Setting
0
0
None
0
1
Low
1
0
Medium
1
1
High

Also, try using the cable equalizer if one or more of
the following symptoms occurs.
Communication error with error codes such as
0-20, 0-23, etc.
4
to
7
Not used
G3 Switch 08 - Not used (do not change the settings)
H515
4-52
SM
G3 Switch 09
FUNCTION
0
1
ISDN cable equalizer

(tx mode)
Bit 1 Bit 0
Setting
0
0
None
0
1
Low
1
0
Medium
1
1
High
COMMENTS
specific receivers.
Also, try using the cable equalizer if one or more of the
following symptoms occurs.
Communication error
2
3

(rx mode)
Bit 3 Bit 2
Setting
0
0
None
0
1
Low
1
0
Medium
1
1
High

Also, try using the cable equalizer if one or more of the
following symptoms occurs.
0-20, 0-23, etc.
Not used

SERVICE
TABLES &
PROCEDURES
4
to
7
G3 Switch 0A
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
Maximum allowable carrier

drop during image data
reception
Bit 1 Bit 0 Value (ms)
0
0
200
0
1
400
1
0
800
1
1
Not used
These bits will set the acceptable modem carrier drop

time.
Try using a longer setting if error code 0-22 is frequent.
Not used
Maximum allowable frame

interval during image data
reception.
0: 5 s
1: 13 s
This bit will set the maximum intervals between each

EOL signal (end-of-line) or intervals between each
ECM frame from the other end.
Try using a longer setting if error code 0-21 is frequent.
Not used
Reconstruction time for the

first line in receive mode
0: 6 s 1: 12 s
When the sending terminal is controlled by a

computer, there may be a delay in receiving page data
after the local machine accepts set-up data and sends
CFR. This is outside the T.30 recommendation. But, if
this delay occurs, set this bit to 1 to give the sending
machine more time to send data.
Refer to error code 0-20.
0
1
2
3
ITU-T T.30 recommendation: The first line should

come within 5 s of CFR.
7
SM
Not used
4-53
H515
G3 Switch 0B
FUNCTION
0
Protocol requirements:
Europe
Spain
Germany
France
PTT requirements: Germany

PTT requirements: France

Not used
COMMENTS
The machine will not automatically reset these bits for
each country after a country code (System Switch 0F)
is programmed.
Change the required bits manually at installation.
7
G3 Switch 0C
FUNCTION
0
1
2
to
7
COMMENTS
Pulse dialing method

Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting
0
0
Normal (P=N)
0
1
Oslo (P=10 - N)
1
0
Sweden (N+1)
1
1
Not used
P = Number of pulses sent out, N = Number dialed.
Not used
G3 Switch 0D - Not used (do not change the settings)

G3 Switch 0E - Not used (do not change the settings)
G3 Switch 0F - Not used (do not change the settings)
H515
4-54
SM
4.3. NCU PARAMETERS

The following tables give the RAM addresses and units of calculation of the
parameters that the machine will use for ringing signal detection and
automatic dialing. The factory settings for each country are also given. Most
of these must be changed by RAM read/write (Function 06), but some can
be changed using NCU Parameter programming (Function 08); if Function
08 can be used, this will be indicated in the Remarks column. The RAM is
programmed in hex code unless (BCD) is included in the Unit column.
Function
Country code for NCU parameters
480400
480401
480402
480403
480404
480405
480406
480407
SM
Line current detection time

Line current wait time
Line current drop detect time
PSTN dial tone frequency upper
limit (high byte)
limit (low byte)
PSTN dial tone frequency lower
limit (high byte)
limit (low byte)
4-55
Unit
Remarks
Use the Hex value to program the
country code directly into this address,
or use the decimal value to program it
using Function 08 (parameter 00).
Country Decimal
Hex
France
00
00
Germany
01
01
UK
02
02
Italy
03
03
Austria
04
04
Belgium
05
05
Denmark
06
06
Finland
07
07
Ireland
08
08
Norway
09
09
Sweden
10
0A
Switzerland
11
0B
Portugal
12
0C
Spain
14
0E
Israel
15
0F
USA
17
11
Asia
18
12
Hong Kong
20
14
South Africa
21
15
Australia
22
16
New Zealand
23
17
Singapore
24
18
Malaysia
25
19
20 ms
Line current is not detected
if 480401 contains FF.
Hz (BCD)
If both addresses contain

FF(F), tone detection is
disabled.
Hz (BCD)

disabled.
H515
SERVICE
TABLES &
PROCEDURES
Address
Address
480408
480409
48040A
48040B
48040C
48040D
48040E
48040F
480410
480411
480412
480413
480414
480415
480416
480417
480418
480419
48041A
48041B
48041C
48041D
48041E
48041F
480420
480421
480422
480423
480424
H515
Function
PSTN dial tone detection time
PSTN dial tone reset time (LOW)
PSTN dial tone reset time (HIGH)
PSTN dial tone continuous tone
time
PSTN dial tone permissible drop
time
PSTN wait interval (LOW)
PSTN wait interval (HIGH)
PSTN ringback tone detection
time
PSTN ringback tone off detection
time
PSTN detection time for silent
period after ringback tone
detected (LOW)
detected (HIGH)
PSTN busy tone frequency upper
limit (high byte)
limit (low byte)
PSTN busy tone frequency lower
limit (high byte)
limit (low byte)
PABX dial tone frequency upper
limit (high byte)
limit (low byte)
PABX dial tone frequency lower
limit (high byte)
limit (low byte)
PABX dial tone detection time
PABX dial tone reset time (LOW)
PABX dial tone reset time (HIGH)
PABX dial tone continuous tone
time
PABX dial tone permissible drop
time
PABX wait interval (HIGH)
PABX wait interval (LOW)
PABX ringback tone detection time
PABX ringback tone off detection
time
PABX detection time for silent
detected (LOW)
4-56
Unit
20 ms
Remarks
If 480408 contains FF, the
machine will pause for the
pause time (address
48040D / 48040E).
See Note 2 (Italy). Refer to
page 4-63.
20 ms
Detection is disabled if this

contains FF.
20 ms
20 ms
20 ms
Hz (BCD)

disabled.
Hz (BCD)

disabled.
Hz (BCD)

disabled.
Hz (BCD)

disabled.
20 ms
If 48041B contains FF, the

pause time (480420 /
480421).
20 ms

contains FF.
20 ms
20 ms
SM
480425
480426
480427
480428
480429
48042A
48042B
48042C
48042D
48042E
48042F
480430
480431
480432
480433
480434
480435
480436
480437
SM
Function
Unit
Remarks
20 ms
detected (HIGH)
PABX busy tone frequency upper
Hz (BCD) If both addresses contain
limit (high byte)
disabled.
limit (low byte)
PABX busy tone frequency lower
limit (high byte)
disabled.
limit (low byte)
Busy tone ON time: range 1
20 ms
Busy tone OFF time: range 1
Busy tone continuous tone
detection time
Busy tone signal state time tolerance for all ranges, and number of cycles
required for detection (a setting of 4 cycles means that ON-OFF-ON or
OFF-ON-OFF must be detected twice).
Bits 7, 6, 5, 4 - number of cycles required for cadence detection
Bits 3 and 2 - Not used. Keep these bits at 0.
Bits 1 and 0 - Tolerance ()
Bit
1 0
0 0
75%
0 1
50%
1 0
25%
1 1
12.5%
International dial tone frequency
upper limit (high byte)
disabled.
upper limit (low byte)
lower limit (high byte)
disabled.
lower limit (low byte)
4-57
H515
SERVICE
TABLES &
PROCEDURES
Address
Address
480439
48043A
48043B
48043C
48043D
48043E
48043F
480440
480441
480442
480443
480444
480445
480446
480447
480448
480449
48044A
Unit
20 ms
Make time for pulse dialing
480438
Function
International dial tone detection
time
International dial tone reset time
(LOW)
(HIGH)
International dial tone continuous
tone time
International dial tone permissible
drop time
International dial wait interval
(HIGH)
(LOW)
Country dial tone upper frequency
limit (HIGH)
Country dial tone upper frequency
limit (LOW)
Country dial tone lower frequency
limit (HIGH)
limit (LOW)
Country dial tone detection time
Country dial tone reset time
(LOW)
(HIGH)
Country dial tone continuous tone
time
Country dial tone permissible
drop time
Country dial wait interval (LOW)
Country dial wait interval (HIGH)
Time between opening or closing
the DO relay and opening the
OHDI relay
Break time for pulse dialing
1 ms
Time between final OHDI relay

closure and DO relay opening or
closing
Minimum pause between dialed
digits (pulse dial mode)
1 ms
See Note 2 (Belgium).

Refer to page 4-63.
Hz (BCD)
20 ms

480449).
1 ms
See Notes 3 and 6. Refer

to page 4-63. Function 08
(parameter 11).
See Note 3. Refer to page
4-63. Function 08
(parameter 12).
4-63. Function 08
(parameter 13).
See Notes 6. Refer to page
4-63. Function 08
(parameter 14).
4-63. Function 08
(parameter 15).
Function 08 (parameter 16).
1 ms
48044C
48044E
48044F
480450
480451
H515
Time waited when a pause is

entered at the operation panel
DTMF tone on time
DTMF tone off time
20 ms
1 ms
4-58

disabled.
disabled.
48044B
48044D
Remarks
pause time (48043D /
48043E).

SM
480452
480453
480454
480455
480456
480457
480458
480459
48045A
48045B
48045C
Function
Tone attenuation level of DTMF
signals while dialing
Unit
-dBm x
0.5
Tone attenuation value difference

between high frequency tone and
low frequency tone in DTMF
signals
PSTN: DTMF tone attenuation
level after dialing
-Nx0.5
(dB)
ISDN: DTMF tone attenuation

level after dialing
Not used
Not used
Not used
Grounding time (ground start
mode)
Break time (flash start mode)
-dBm x
0.5
20 ms
1 ms
International dial access code

(High)
(Low)
PSTN access pause time
BCD
20 ms
48045D
48045E
48045F
480460
480461
480462
SM
-dBm x
0.5
Remarks
Function 08 (parameter
19). See Note 5. Refer to
page 4-63.
page 4-63.
section 4-63.
See Note 5. Refer to
section 4-63.
The Gs relay is closed for
this interval.
The OHDI relay is open for
this interval.
For a code of 100:
48045B - F1
48045C - 00
This time is waited for each
pause input after the PSTN
access code. Up to 7
pauses can be inputed. If
this address contains
FF[H], the pause time
stored in address 48044F is
used.
Bits 7 to 5 - Progress tone detection level

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 dBm
0 0 0 -25.0
0 0 1 -35.0
0 1 0 -30.0
1 0 0 -40.0
1 1 0 -49.0
Bits 4 and 3 - Not used
Bit 2 - International dial tone detection method
0: Detect by time parameters
1: Detect by cadence parameters (Belgium - See Note 3) Refer to page
4-63.
Bit 1 - Not used
Bit 0 - PSTN dial tone detection method
1: Detect by cadence parameters (Italy - See Note 3) Refer to page 4-63.
Bit 7 and 6 - Not used
Bit 5 1: Polarity detection enabled for rx (detection time = 500 ms)
Bit 4 1: Polarity detection enabled for tx (detection time = 500 ms)
Bits 3 to 0 - Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
4-59
H515
SERVICE
TABLES &
PROCEDURES
Address
Address
480463
480464
480465
480466
480467
to
480471
480472
480473
480474
480475
480476
480477
480478
480479
48047A
48047B
to
480480
480481
480482
480483
H515
Function
Unit
Not used
Not used
Intercity dial prefix (HIGH)
Intercity dial prefix (LOW)
BCD
BCD
Not used
Remarks
For a code of 0:
480465 - FF
480466 - F0
Acceptable ringing signal

frequency: range 1, upper limit
frequency: range 1, lower limit
Number of rings until a call is
detected
Minimum required length of the
first ring
1000/ N
(Hz).
Minimum required length of the

second and subsequent rings
Ringing signal detection reset
time (LOW)
Ringing signal detection reset
time (HIGH)
Not used

20 ms
20 ms

4-63. Function 09
(parameter 07).
20 ms
Interval between dialing the last

20 ms
digit and switching the Oh relay
over to the external telephone
when dialing from the operation
panel in handset mode.
Bits 0 and 1 - Handset off-hook detection time
Bit
1
0
Setting
0
0
200 ms
0
1
800 ms
Other
Not used

Factory setting: 500 ms
Bits 2 and 3 - Handset on-hook detection time

Bit
3
2
Setting
0
0
200 ms
0
1
800 ms
Other
Not used
Bit 4 - DTMF detection
0: Disabled
1: Enabled

If bit 4 is set to 0, Fax On
Demand and Transfer
operation using DTMF are
disabled.
4-60
SM
480484
480485
to
4804A0
4804A1
4804A2
4804A3
4804A4
4804A5
4804A6
4804A7
4804A8
4804A9
4804AA
4804AB
4804AC
4804AD
4804AE
SM
Function
Bits 7 to 5 - DTMF On detection time
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Setting
0 0 0 30 ms
0 0 1 40 ms
0 1 0 80 ms
0 1 1 140 ms
Bits 4 to 2 - DTMF Off detection time
0 0 0 30 ms
0 0 1 40 ms
0 1 0 80 ms
0 1 1 140 ms
Bits 1 and 0 - Not used.
Not used
Acceptable CED detection

frequency upper limit (high byte)
frequency upper limit (low byte)
frequency lower limit (high byte)
frequency lower limit (low byte)
CED detection time
Acceptable CNG detection
CNG detection time
Unit
Remarks
BCD (Hz)

disabled.
BCD (Hz)

disabled.
20 ms
20 ms
BCD (Hz)
BCD (Hz)

disabled.
disabled.
20 ms
20 ms
CNG on time
20 ms
CNG off time
20 ms
CNG On/Off time tolerance, and number of cycles required for detection (a
setting of 4 cycles means that ON-OFF-ON or OFF-ON-OFF must be
detected twice).
Bits 3 and 2 - Not used. Keep these bit at 0.
Bit
1 0
ON time tolerance
OFF time tolerance
0 0
150%
75%
0 1
100%
50%
1 0
50%
25%
1 1
25%
12.5%
Not used
4-61
H515
SERVICE
TABLES &
PROCEDURES
Address
Address
4804AF
4804B0
4804B1
4804B2
4804B3
4804B4
4804B5
4804B6
4804B7
4804B8
4804B9
Function
Acceptable AI short protocol tone
(800Hz) detection frequency
Detection time for 800 Hz AI short
protocol tone
PSTN: Tx level from the modem
PSTN: 1100 Hz tone transmission
level
PSTN: 2100 Hz tone transmission
level
PABX: Tx level from the modem
PABX: 1100 Hz tone transmission
level
PABX: 2100 Hz tone transmission
level
ISDN: Tx level from the modem
4804BA
4804BB
4804BC
ISDN: 1100 Hz tone transmission

level
ISDN: 2100 Hz tone transmission
level
Modem turn-on level (incoming
signal detection level)
Unit
Hz (BCD)
Hz(BCD)
20 ms
- dBm
- N 4804B4 - 0.5N 4804B5 (dB)
- N 4804B4 - 0.5N 4804B6 (dB)
- dBm
- N 4804B7 - 0.5N 4804B8 (dB)
- N 4804B7 - 0.5N 4804B9 (dB)
- dBm
The setting must be

between -12dBm and
-15dBm.
- N 4804BA - 0.5N 4804BB (dB)
- N 4804BA - 0.5N 4804BC (dB)

-37-0.5N
(dBm)
4804BD
4804BE
to
4804D9
4804DA
H515
Not used
T.30 T1 timer
Remarks
disabled.
disabled.
disabled.
disabled.
N must be between 0
(00(H)) to 31 (1F(H)).
Modem turn-off level is
automatically set at -3dBm
from the turn-on level.
1s
4-62
SM
Notes
1. If a setting is not required, store FF in the address.
2. Italy and Belgium only
RAM address 48045E: the lower four bits have the following meaning.
Bit 2 1: International dial tone cadence detection enabled (Belgium)
Bit 1 Not used
Bit 0 1: PSTN dial tone cadence detection enabled (Italy)
If bit 0 or bit 2 is set to 1, the functions of the following RAM addresses
are changed.
480408 (if bit 0 = 1) or 480438 (if bit 2 = 1): tolerance for on or off state
duration (%), and number of cycles required for detection, coded as in
address 480433.
48040B (if bit 0 = 1) or 48043B (if bit 2 = 1): on time, hex code (unit = 20
ms)
48040C (if bit 0 = 1) or 48043C(if bit 2 = 1): off time, hex code (unit = 20
ms)
SERVICE
TABLES &
PROCEDURES
3. Pulse dial parameters (addresses 48044A to 48044F) are the values for
10 pps. If 20 pps is used, the machine will automatically compensate.
4. The first ring may not be detected until 1 to 2.5 wavelengths after the
time specified by this parameter.
5. The calculated level must be between 0 and 10.
The attenuation levels calculated from RAM data are:
High frequency tone: - 0.5 x N480452/480454 dBm
Low frequency tone: - 0.5 x (N480452/480454 + N480453) dBm
Note: N480452, for example, means the value stored in address
480452(H)
6. 48044A: Europe - Between Ds opening and Di opening, France Between Ds closing and Di opening
48044D: Europe - Between Ds closing and Di closing, France - Between
Ds opening and Di closing
SM
4-63
H515
Default Settings
The factory settings are quoted either in hexadecimal code (the actual
contents of the RAM address) if there is a H after the value in the table, or in
decimal (converted from the actual hex contents of the RAM address) if
there is no H after the value.
Some RAMs must be stored using BCD; see the NCU Parameter definition
table for details.
Note that the default settings may change after each countrys PTT tests.
Address
France
Germany
UK
Italy
Austria
Belgium
Denmark
Finland
Ireland
Norway
Sweden
Switzerland
Portugal
Holland
Spain
Israel
USA
Asia
Hong Kong
South Africa
Australia
New Zealand
Singapore
Malaysia
H515
480401
480402
480403
480404
480405
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
04H
04H
FFH
04H
05H
05H
05H
05H
04H
05H
05H
06H
04H
05H
04H
04H
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
04H
FFH
FFH
FFH
80H
98H
FFH
71H
30H
20H
12H
36H
50H
12H
12H
08H
60H
63H
90H
98H
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
50H
FFH
FFH
FFH
4-64
SM
Address
France
Germany
UK
Italy
Austria
Belgium
Denmark
Finland
Ireland
Norway
Sweden
Switzerland
Portugal
Holland
Spain
Israel
USA
Asia
Hong Kong
South Africa
Australia
New Zealand
Singapore
Malaysia
SM
480406
480407
480408
480409
48040A
04H
03H
FFH
03H
03H
03H
03H
03H
02H
03H
03H
03H
02H
00H
03H
03H
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
01H
FFH
FFH
FFH
00H
70H
FFH
91H
70H
00H
40H
15H
00H
40H
40H
38H
90H
76H
10H
40H
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
30H
FFH
FFH
FFH
75
105
FFH
21H
40
30
65
205
105
55
40
40
105
55
75
105
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
150
FFH
FFH
FFH
F4H
E8H
FFH
21H
F4H
150
F4H
F4H
F4H
E8H
00H
21H
F4H
EEH
80H
E8H
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
2CH
FFH
FFH
FFH
01H
03H
FFH
02H
01H
00H
01H
01H
1
03H
01H
02H
01H
02H
02H
03H
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
01H
FFH
FFH
FFH
48040B
48040C
48040D
48040E
48040F
50
105
FFH
30
40
30
65
205
105
55
40
40
105
55
36
105
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
100
FFH
FFH
FFH
2
4
FFH
50
4
4
4
4
4
4
3
2
4
4
5
4
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
8
FFH
FFH
FFH
0
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
150
200
100
100
100
100
150
100
100
100
0
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
5
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
4-65
H515
SERVICE
TABLES &
PROCEDURES
Address
France
Germany
UK
Italy
Austria
Belgium
Denmark
Finland
Ireland
Norway
Sweden
Switzerland
Portugal
Holland
Spain
Israel
USA
Asia
Hong Kong
South Africa
Australia
New Zealand
Singapore
Malaysia
Address
France
Germany
UK
Italy
Austria
Belgium
Denmark
Finland
Ireland
Norway
Sweden
Switzerland
Portugal
Holland
Spain
Israel
USA
Asia
Hong Kong
South Africa
Australia
New Zealand
Singapore
Malaysia
Address
France
Germany
UK
Italy
Austria
Belgium
Denmark
Finland
Ireland
Norway
Sweden
Switzerland
Portugal
Holland
Spain
Israel
USA
Asia
Hong Kong
South Africa
Australia
New Zealand
Singapore
Malaysia
H515
480410
480411
480412
480413
480414
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
50
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
F4H
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
01H
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
04H
05H
04H
05H
05H
04H
04H
FFH
04H
05H
05H
06H
FFH
05H
04H
04H
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
04H
FFH
FFH
FFH
98H
10H
30H
29H
12H
71H
60H
FFH
30H
12H
12H
08H
FFH
63H
60H
98H
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
50H
FFH
FFH
FFH
480415
480416
480417
480418
480419
03H
03H
03H
03H
03H
04H
03H
FFH
03H
03H
03H
03H
FFH
03H
03H
03H
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
03H
FFH
FFH
FFH
96H
50H
60H
29H
80H
05H
90H
FFH
70H
40H
40H
38H
FFH
20H
80H
70H
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
90H
FFH
FFH
FFH
09H
FFH
FFH
05H
FFH
05H
05H
FFH
FFH
FFH
05H
06H
FFH
05H
FFH
05H
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
04H
FFH
FFH
FFH
00H
FFH
FFH
12H
FFH
20H
12H
FFH
FFH
FFH
12H
08H
FFH
63H
FFH
63H
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
50H
FFH
FFH
FFH
03H
FFH
FFH
03H
FFH
03H
03H
FFH
FFH
FFH
3
03H
FFH
00H
FFH
03H
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
03H
FFH
FFH
FFH
4-66
SM
Address
France
Germany
UK
Italy
Austria
Belgium
Denmark
Finland
Ireland
Norway
Sweden
Switzerland
Portugal
Holland
Spain
Israel
USA
Asia
Hong Kong
South Africa
Australia
New Zealand
Singapore
Malaysia
SM
48041A
48041B
48041C
48041D
48041E
00H
FFH
FFH
91H
FFH
00
40H
FFH
FFH
FFH
40H
38H
FFH
76H
FFH
70H
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
90H
FFH
FFH
FFH
100
FFH
FFH
100
FFH
30
65
FFH
FFH
FFH
40
40
FFH
55
FFH
105
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
150
FFH
FFH
FFH
58H
FFH
FFH
F9H
FFH
150
F4H
FFH
FFH
FFH
00
EFH
FFH
EEH
FFH
E8H
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
2CH
FFH
FFH
FFH
02H
FFH
FFH
01H
FFH
0
01H
FFH
FFH
FFH
01H
01H
FFH
02H
FFH
03H
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
01H
FFH
FFH
FFH
50
FFH
FFH
9
FFH
30
65
FFH
FFH
FFH
40
40
FFH
55
FFH
105
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
100
FFH
FFH
FFH
48041F
480420
480421
480422
480423
02H
FFH
FFH
4
FFH
4
4
FFH
FFH
FFH
3
4
FFH
4
FFH
4
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
1
FFH
FFH
FFH
00H
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
150
200
200
200
200
200
150
200
200
200
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
4-67
H515
SERVICE
TABLES &
PROCEDURES
Address
France
Germany
UK
Italy
Austria
Belgium
Denmark
Finland
Ireland
Norway
Sweden
Switzerland
Portugal
Holland
Spain
Israel
USA
Asia
Hong Kong
South Africa
Australia
New Zealand
Singapore
Malaysia
Address
France
Germany
UK
Italy
Austria
Belgium
Denmark
Finland
Ireland
Norway
Sweden
Switzerland
Portugal
Holland
Spain
Israel
USA
Asia
Hong Kong
South Africa
Australia
New Zealand
Singapore
Malaysia
Address
France
Germany
UK
Italy
Austria
Belgium
Denmark
Finland
Ireland
Norway
Sweden
Switzerland
Portugal
Holland
Spain
Israel
USA
Asia
Hong Kong
South Africa
Australia
New Zealand
Singapore
Malaysia
H515
480424
480425
480426
480427
480428
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
06H
05H
FFH
04H
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
06H
FFH
FFH
FFH
05H
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
04H
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
00
12H
FFH
60H
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
08H
FFH
FFH
FFH
63H
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
50H
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
01H
03H
FFH
03H
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
03H
FFH
FFH
FFH
03H
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
03H
FFH
FFH
FFH
480429
48042A
48042B
48042C
48042D
FFH
FFH
FFH
00H
80H
FFH
90H
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
38H
FFH
FFH
FFH
70H
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
90H
FFH
FFH
FFH
25
12
19
15
10
25
12
FFH
25
10
12
24
FFH
12
8
12
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
12
FFH
FFH
FFH
25
12
19
15
10
25
12
FFH
25
0
12
30
FFH
12
8
12
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
12
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
24
20
FFH
15
8
8
FFH
27
25
12
15
FFH
25
FFH
24
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
25
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
24
17
FFH
15
8
23
37
37
0
37
22
FFH
25
FFH
24
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
25
FFH
FFH
FFH
4-68
SM
Address
France
Germany
UK
Italy
Austria
Belgium
Denmark
Finland
Ireland
Norway
Sweden
Switzerland
Portugal
Holland
Spain
Israel
USA
Asia
Hong Kong
South Africa
Australia
New Zealand
Singapore
Malaysia
SM
48042E
48042F
480430
480431
480432
FFH
7
11
FFH
20
FFH
FFH
FFH
18
FFH
FFH
11
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
24
26
FFH
20
FFH
FFH
FFH
18
FFH
FFH
11
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
8
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
30
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
100
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
35
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
480433
480434
480435
480436
480437
42H
31H
42H
40H
41H
43H
42H
FFH
43H
40H
43H
51H
FFH
41H
41H
41H
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
41H
FFH
FFH
FFH
04H
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
11H
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
05H
06H
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
74H
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
60H
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
63H
20H
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
04H
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
11H
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
00H
05H
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
06H
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
10H
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
76H
80H
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
4-69
H515
SERVICE
TABLES &
PROCEDURES
Address
France
Germany
UK
Italy
Austria
Belgium
Denmark
Finland
Ireland
Norway
Sweden
Switzerland
Portugal
Holland
Spain
Israel
USA
Asia
Hong Kong
South Africa
Australia
New Zealand
Singapore
Malaysia
Address
France
Germany
UK
Italy
Austria
Belgium
Denmark
Finland
Ireland
Norway
Sweden
Switzerland
Portugal
Holland
Spain
Israel
USA
Asia
Hong Kong
South Africa
Australia
New Zealand
Singapore
Malaysia
Address
France
Germany
UK
Italy
Austria
Belgium
Denmark
Finland
Ireland
Norway
Sweden
Switzerland
Portugal
Holland
Spain
Israel
USA
Asia
Hong Kong
South Africa
Australia
New Zealand
Singapore
Malaysia
H515
480438
480439
48043A
48043B
48043C
75
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
41H
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
55
75
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
58H
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
E8H
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
EEH
80H
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
2
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
03H
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
02H
02H
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
75
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
17
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
55
36
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
2
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
33
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
4
5
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
48043D
48043E
48043F
480440
480441
0
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
150
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
0
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
0
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
05H
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
12H
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
03H
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
4-70
SM
Address
France
Germany
UK
Italy
Austria
Belgium
Denmark
Finland
Ireland
Norway
Sweden
Switzerland
Portugal
Holland
Spain
Israel
USA
Asia
Hong Kong
South Africa
Australia
New Zealand
Singapore
Malaysia
SM
480442
480443
480444
480445
480446
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
40H
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
40
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
00H
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
01H
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
40
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
480447
480448
480449
48044A
48044B
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
3
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
0
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
200
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
0
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
0
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
67
50
252
58
53
61
53
61
255
61
100
60
61
58
75
61
77
61
61
61
255
61
61
61
65
60
66
60
62
67
67
60
67
59
60
60
66
62
60
61
62
66
66
66
68
66
66
66
4-71
H515
SERVICE
TABLES &
PROCEDURES
Address
France
Germany
UK
Italy
Austria
Belgium
Denmark
Finland
Ireland
Norway
Sweden
Switzerland
Portugal
Holland
Spain
Israel
USA
Asia
Hong Kong
South Africa
Australia
New Zealand
Singapore
Malaysia
Address
France
Germany
UK
Italy
Austria
Belgium
Denmark
Finland
Ireland
Norway
Sweden
Switzerland
Portugal
Holland
Spain
Israel
USA
Asia
Hong Kong
South Africa
Australia
New Zealand
Singapore
Malaysia
Address
France
Germany
UK
Italy
Austria
Belgium
Denmark
Finland
Ireland
Norway
Sweden
Switzerland
Portugal
Holland
Spain
Israel
USA
Asia
Hong Kong
South Africa
Australia
New Zealand
Singapore
Malaysia
H515
48044C
48044D
48044E
48044F
480450
35
41
35
40
39
33
33
42
33
41
40
40
34
40
33
39
40
34
34
34
32
34
34
34
50
44
44
44
50
50
50
50
50
50
70
60
50
42
75
50
74
50
50
50
70
50
50
50
40
46
27
40
44
43
26
40
30
33
18
26
33
33
32
46
46
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
0
46
33
150
46
26
26
60
33
33
26
00H
33
33
100
101
101
101
101
101
101
101
101
101
70
90
100
70
80
70
90
70
70
70
70
70
70
70
70
90
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
480451
480452
480453
480454
480455
70
90
100
70
80
70
90
75
70
70
70
70
70
70
140
90
100
110
110
110
110
110
110
110
12
14
18
12
7
12
18
18
18
18
18
12
18
18
12
12
14
12
12
12
20
12
12
12
4
6
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
4-72
SM
Address
France
Germany
UK
Italy
Austria
Belgium
Denmark
Finland
Ireland
Norway
Sweden
Switzerland
Portugal
Holland
Spain
Israel
USA
Asia
Hong Kong
South Africa
Australia
New Zealand
Singapore
Malaysia
SM
480459
48045A
48045B
48045C
48045D
0
15
15
15
15
100
15
15
15
25
15
15
15
15
100
15
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
0
90
90
90
100
90
90
90
90
90
90
90
90
90
90
90
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
F0H
F9H
FFH
FFH
F0H
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
19H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
09H
90H
16H
00H
09H
00H
00H
00H
07H
00H
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
50
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
100
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
48045E
48045F
480465
480466
480472
80H
C0H
C0H
D1H
C0H
44H
40H
40H
80H
40H
40H
80H
40H
00
80H
C0H
C0H
C0H
C0H
C0H
C0H
C0H
C0H
C0H
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
16H
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
17
17
20
18
13
21
33
16
36
16
17
16
30
16
25
16
13
17
17
17
14
17
17
17
4-73
H515
SERVICE
TABLES &
PROCEDURES
Address
France
Germany
UK
Italy
Austria
Belgium
Denmark
Finland
Ireland
Norway
Sweden
Switzerland
Portugal
Holland
Spain
Israel
USA
Asia
Hong Kong
South Africa
Australia
New Zealand
Singapore
Malaysia
Address
France
Germany
UK
Italy
Austria
Belgium
Denmark
Finland
Ireland
Norway
Sweden
Switzerland
Portugal
Holland
Spain
Israel
USA
Asia
Hong Kong
South Africa
Australia
New Zealand
Singapore
Malaysia
Address
France
Germany
UK
Italy
Austria
Belgium
Denmark
Finland
Ireland
Norway
Sweden
Switzerland
Portugal
Holland
Spain
Israel
USA
Asia
Hong Kong
South Africa
Australia
New Zealand
Singapore
Malaysia
H515
480473
480474
480475
480476
480477
23
48
84
77
54
72
50
56
67
56
51
51
78
52
50
83
83
83
83
83
83
83
83
83
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
16
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
16
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
24
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
24
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
2
01H
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
1
1
3
1
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
3
3
1
1
15
10
10
10
9
5
10
25
10
10
5
1
10
15
10
5
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
480478
480479
48047A
480481
480482
5
10
10
10
10
10
10
25
10
10
5
1
10
15
10
5
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
04H
90H
90H
90H
90H
90H
90H
90H
90H
90H
90H
90H
90H
90H
2CH
90H
90H
90H
90H
90H
90H
90H
90H
90H
01H
01H
01H
01H
01H
01H
01H
01H
01H
01H
01H
01H
01H
01H
01H
01H
01H
01H
01H
01H
01H
01H
01H
01H
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
4-74
SM
Address
France
Germany
UK
Italy
Austria
Belgium
Denmark
Finland
Ireland
Norway
Sweden
Switzerland
Portugal
Holland
Spain
Israel
USA
Asia
Hong Kong
South Africa
Australia
New Zealand
Singapore
Malaysia
SM
480483
480484
4804A1
4804A2
4804A3
11H
11H
11H
11H
11H
11H
11H
11H
11H
11H
11H
11H
11H
11H
11H
11H
31H
11H
11H
11H
11H
11H
11H
11H
24H
24H
24H
24H
24H
24H
24H
24H
24H
24H
24H
24H
24H
24H
24H
24H
24H
24H
24H
24H
24H
24H
24H
24H
22H
22H
22H
22H
22H
22H
22H
22H
22H
22H
22H
22H
22H
22H
22H
22H
22H
22H
22H
22H
22H
22H
22H
22H
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
20H
20H
20H
20H
20H
20H
20H
20H
20H
20H
20H
20H
20H
20H
20H
20H
20H
20H
20H
20H
20H
20H
20H
20H
4804A4
4804A5
4804A6
4804A7
4804A8
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
30
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
12H
12H
12H
12H
12H
12H
12H
12H
12H
12H
12H
12H
12H
12H
12H
12H
12H
12H
12H
12H
12H
12H
12H
12H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
4-75
H515
SERVICE
TABLES &
PROCEDURES
Address
France
Germany
UK
Italy
Austria
Belgium
Denmark
Finland
Ireland
Norway
Sweden
Switzerland
Portugal
Holland
Spain
Israel
USA
Asia
Hong Kong
South Africa
Australia
New Zealand
Singapore
Malaysia
Address
France
Germany
UK
Italy
Austria
Belgium
Denmark
Finland
Ireland
Norway
Sweden
Switzerland
Portugal
Holland
Spain
Israel
USA
Asia
Hong Kong
South Africa
Australia
New Zealand
Singapore
Malaysia
Address
France
Germany
UK
Italy
Austria
Belgium
Denmark
Finland
Ireland
Norway
Sweden
Switzerland
Portugal
Holland
Spain
Israel
USA
Asia
Hong Kong
South Africa
Australia
New Zealand
Singapore
Malaysia
H515
4804A9
4804AA
4804AB
4804AC
4804AD
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
19H
19H
19H
19H
19H
19H
19H
19H
19H
19H
19H
19H
19H
19H
19H
19H
19H
19H
19H
19H
19H
19H
19H
19H
96H
96H
96H
96H
96H
96H
96H
96H
96H
96H
96H
96H
96H
96H
96H
96H
96H
96H
96H
96H
96H
96H
96H
96H
32H
32H
32H
32H
32H
32H
32H
32H
32H
32H
32H
32H
32H
32H
32H
32H
32H
32H
32H
32H
32H
32H
32H
32H
4804AF
4804B0
4804B1
4804B2
4804B3
08H
08H
08H
08H
08H
08H
08H
08H
08H
08H
08H
08H
08H
08H
08H
08H
08H
08H
08H
08H
08H
08H
08H
08H
80H
80H
80H
80H
80H
80H
80H
80H
80H
80H
80H
80H
80H
80H
80H
80H
80H
80H
80H
80H
80H
80H
80H
80H
07H
07H
07H
07H
07H
07H
07H
07H
07H
07H
07H
07H
07H
07H
07H
07H
07H
07H
07H
07H
07H
07H
07H
07H
20H
20H
20H
20H
20H
20H
20H
20H
20H
20H
20H
20H
20H
20H
20H
20H
20H
20H
20H
20H
20H
20H
20H
20H
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
4-76
SM
Address
France
Germany
UK
Italy
Austria
Belgium
Denmark
Finland
Ireland
Norway
Sweden
Switzerland
Portugal
Holland
Spain
Israel
USA
Asia
Hong Kong
South Africa
Australia
New Zealand
Singapore
Malaysia
SM
4804B4
4804B5
4804B6
4804B7
4804B8
10
6
8
6
6
6
10
10
10
9
10
5
6
7
10
6
9
6
6
6
11
8
6
6
0
3
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
02H
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
0
0
0
0
FEH
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
FFH
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
10
6
8
6
6
6
10
10
10
9
10
5
6
7
10
6
9
6
6
6
11
8
6
6
0
3
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
02H
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
0
0
0
4804B9
4804BA
4804BB
4804BC
4804BD
0
FEH
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
FFH
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0BH
18H
0BH
0BH
0BH
0BH
0BH
0BH
0BH
0BH
0BH
0BH
0BH
0BH
0BH
0BH
0DH
0DH
0BH
0BH
0BH
0BH
0BH
0BH
4-77
H515
SERVICE
TABLES &
PROCEDURES
Address
France
Germany
UK
Italy
Austria
Belgium
Denmark
Finland
Ireland
Norway
Sweden
Switzerland
Portugal
Holland
Spain
Israel
USA
Asia
Hong Kong
South Africa
Australia
New Zealand
Singapore
Malaysia
Address
4804DA
France
Germany
UK
Italy
Austria
Belgium
Denmark
Finland
Ireland
Norway
Sweden
Switzerland
Portugal
Holland
Spain
Israel
USA
Asia
Hong Kong
South Africa
Australia
New Zealand
Singapore
Malaysia
H515
53
53
53
53
59
59
53
53
53
53
53
92
53
53
80
59
53
47
53
53
53
53
53
53
4-78
SM
4.4. DEDICATED TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS

Each Quick Dial Key and Speed Dial Code has four bytes of programmable
parameters allocated to it. If transmissions to a particular machine often
experience problems, store that terminals fax number as a Quick Dial or
Speed Dial, and adjust the parameters allocated to that number.
The programming procedure will be explained first. Then, the four bytes will
be described.
4.4.1. Programming Procedure
1. Set bit 3 of System Bit Switch 04 to 1. Refer to secion 4.1.1.

2. Either use Function 31 (for a Quick Dial number) or Function 32 (for a
Speed Dial number)
Example: Change the Parameters in Quick Dial 10.
4. Press Quick Dial key 10.
Note: When selecting Speed Dial 10 with Function 32, press at

the ten key pad.
5. Press four times. (speed dial press five times)

6. The settings for byte 0 are now displayed. Press a number from 0 to 7
corresponding to the bit that you wish to change.
Example: Change bit 7 to 1: Press 7
7. To scroll through the parameter bytes, either:
Select the next byte:
or
Select the previous byte:

until the correct byte is displayed. Then go back to step 6.
8. After the setting is changed, press
9. To finish, press
.
.
10. After finishing, reset bit 3 of System Bit Switch 04 to 0.
SM
4-79
H515
SERVICE
TABLES &
PROCEDURES
3.
4.4.2. Parameters
The initial settings of the following parameters are all FF(H) - all the
parameters are disabled.
Switch 01
FUNCTION AND COMMENTS
CCITT T1 time (for PSTN G3 mode)
If the connection time to a particular terminal is longer than the NCU parameter setting ,
adjust this byte. The T1 time is the value stored in this byte (in hex code), multiplied by 1
second.
Range:
1 to 127 s (01h to 7Fh)
00h or FFh - The local NCU parameter factory setting is used.
Do not program a value between 80h and FEh.
Switch 02
FUNCTION
0
to
4
Tx level
Bit 4
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
5
to
7
3
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
2
0
0
0
0
1
:
:
1
1
Cable equalizer
Bit 7 6 5
0 0 0
0 0 1
0 1 0
0 1 1
1 1 1
COMMENTS
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
Setting
0
-1
-2
-3
-4
1
1
1
1
-15
Disabled
Setting
None
Low
Medium
High
Disabled
If communication with a particular remote

terminal often contains errors, the signal level
may be inappropriate. Adjust the Tx level for
communications with that terminal until the
results are better.
When disabled, NCU parameter 01 setting is
used.
Note: Do not use settings other than listed on
the left.
Use a higher setting if there is signal loss at
higher frequencies because of the length of
wire between the modem and the telephone
exchange when calling the number stored in
this Quick/Speed Dial.
Also, try using the cable equalizer if one or
more of the following symptoms occurs.
Communication error with error codes such
as 0-20, 0-23, etc.
Note: Do not use settings other than listed on

the left.
H515
4-80
SM
Switch 03
FUNCTION
COMMENTS

Bit 3 2 1 0
Setting (bps)
0 0 0 0
Not used
0 0 0 1
2,400
0 0 1 0
4,800
0 0 1 1
7,200
0
0 1 0 0
9,600
to
3
0 1 0 1
12,000
0 1 1 0
14,400
1
If training with a particular remote

terminal always takes too long, the
initial modem rate may be too high.
Reduce the initial Tx modem rate
using these bits.
Note: Do not use settings other than
listed on the left.
Disabled
Other settings:
Not used
4 Not used
to
7
Switch 04
COMMENTS
The machine will use inch-based resolutions
for scanning. If inch only is selected, the
printed copy may be slightly distorted at the
other end if that machine uses mm-based
resolutions.
DIS/NSF detection method

Bit 3 Bit 2
Setting
0
0
First DIS or NSF
0
1
Second DIS or NSF
1
0
Not used
1
1
Disabled
(0, 1): Use this setting if echoes on the line are

interfering with the set-up protocol at the start
of transmission. The machine will then wait for
the second DIS or NSF before sending DCS or
NSS.
Not used
Compression modes available in

transmit mode
0: MH only
1: All available compression modes
This bit will determine the capabilities that are

informed to the other terminal during
transmission.
ECM during transmission

Bit 7 Bit 6
Setting
0
0
Disabled
0
1
Enabled
1
0
Not used
1
1
Disabled
For example, if ECM is switched on but is not

wanted when sending to a particular terminal,
use the setting of (0, 0).
0
1
2
3
6
7
Switch 05 - Optional ISDN G4 kit required

FUNCTION
0
to
3
SM
Data rate
Bits 3
0
0
1
2
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
COMMENTS
When disabled, the setting of G4
parameter switch 2 (bits 0 and 1)
setting is used.
Setting
64 kbps
56 kbps
Disabled
4-81
H515
SERVICE
TABLES &
PROCEDURES
FUNCTION
Inch-mm conversion before tx
Bit 1 Bit 0
Setting
0
0
Inch-mm conversion
available
0
1
Inch only
1
0
Not used
1
1
Disabled

FUNCTION
4
to
7
COMMENTS
Not used

FUNCTION
0
to
3
4
to
7
Link Modules
Bits 3 2
0 0
0 0
1 1
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
COMMENTS
parameter switch 3 (bit 0) setting is
used.
Setting
Module 8
Module 128
Disabled
Not used

FUNCTION
0
to
3
Layer 3 protocol
Bits 3 2 1
0 0 0
0 0 0
1 1 1
0
0
1
1
Setting
ISO 8208
T.70 NULL
Disabled
4
to
7
Packet modules
Bits 3 2 1
0 0 0
0 0 0
1 1 1
0
0
1
1
COMMENTS
Setting
Module 9
Module 128
Disabled

used.

used.
Switch 08 - Not used
H515
4-82
SM
4.5. SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES
+CAUTION
Do not change the settings which are marked as Not used or Read
only.
344F28 to 346B47(H) - Dedicated tx parameters for Speed Dial #100 - #999, when a Function Upgrade Card is used.
As explained in section 4.4, each set of dedicated tx parameters consists of 8 bytes.
344F28 to 344F2F(H) - Dedicated tx parameters for Speed #100
344F30 to 344F37(H) - Dedicated tx parameters for Speed #101
344F38 to 344F3F(H) - Dedicated tx parameters for Speed #102
346B40 to 346B47(H) - Dedicated tx parameters for Speed #999

480000(H) - RAM Reset Level 1
Change the data at this address to FF(H), then switch the machine off and on to reset all the
system settings.
Caution: Before using this RAM, print the settings of all the system parameters (System Parameter List) and RAM settings (RAM dump list) for scanner/printer registration settings.
Note: Initial toner supply will be carried out automatically after the reset. This should take
about 90 seconds.
480001 to 480004(H) - ROM version (Read only)
480001(H) - Revision number (BCD)
480002(H) - Year (BCD)
480003(H) - Month (BCD)
480004(H) - Day (BCD)
480006 to 480015(H) - Machines serial number (16 digits - ASCII)
480018(H) - Total program checksum (low)
480019(H) - Total program checksum (high)
48001A(H) - Boot program checksum (low)
48001B(H) - Boot program checksum (high)
48001C(H) - Main program checksum (low)
48001D(H) - Main program checksum (high)
48001E(H) - RDS program update counter
480020 to 48003F(H) - System bit switches
480040 to 48004F(H) - Scanner bit switches
480050 to 48005F(H) - Printer bit switches
480060 to 48007F(H) - Communication bit switches
480080 to 48008F(H) - G3 bit switches
SM
4-83
H515
SERVICE
TABLES &
PROCEDURES
004003 to 00400B(H) - ROM part number and suffix (ASCII)

Example: The part number is H5157210A
004003(H) - 48(H)
004004(H) - 35(H)
004005(H) - 31(H)
004006(H) - 35(H)
004007(H) - 37(H)
004008(H) - 32(H)
004009(H) - 31(H)
00400A(H) - 30(H)
00400B(H) - 41(H)
4800A0(H) - User parameter switch 00

Bit 0: Stamp home position
Bits 1 and 2: Scanning contrast home position
Bit
2
1
Setting
0
0
Normal
0
1
Lighten
1
0
Darken
Bit 3: Do not adjust
Bits 4 and 5: Scanning resolution home position
Bit
5
4
Setting
0
0
Standard
0
1
Detail
1
0
Fine
Bit 6: Transmission mode home position
0: Memory tx, 1: Immediate tx
Bit 7: Halftone home position
Bits 0 to 6: Not used
Bit 7: Settings return to home position after transmission

Bit 0: Forwarding mark printing on forwarded messages
Bit 1: Center mark printing on received copies
Bit 2: Reception time printing
Bit 3: TSI included in transmitted messages
Bit 4: Checkered mark printing
Bit 5: CIL printing (G4)
Bit 6: TID printing (G4)
Bit 7: Not used
4800A3(H) - User parameter switch 03 (Automatic report printout)
Bit 0: Transmission result report (memory transmissions)
Bit 1: Not used
Bit 2: Memory storage report
Bit 3: Polling reserve report (polling reception)
Bit 4: Polling result report (polling reception)
Bit 5: Transmission result report (immediate transmissions)
Bit 6: Polling clear report
Bit 7: TCR (Journal)
4800A4(H) - User parameter switch 04 (Automatic report printout)
Bit 0: Automatic confidential reception report output
Bit 1: Fax On Demand report output
Bit 7: Inclusion of a sample image on reports
0: Off, 1: On
0: Off, 1: On
0: Off, 1: On
0: Off, 1: On
0: Off, 1: On
0: Off, 1: On
0: Off, 1: On
0: Off, 1: On
0: Off, 1: On
0: Off, 1: On

Bit 0: Substitute reception
0: Off, 1: On
Bit 1: Memory reception if no RTI or CSI received
0: Possible, 1: Impossible
Bits 2 and 3: Not used
Bits 4 and 5: Restricted Access
Bit
5
4
Setting
0
0
Disabled
0
1
Enabled at all times
1
0
Enabled during Night Timer periods only
1
1
Not used
Bit 6: Fusing lamp control during energy saver mode
0: Lamp off, 1: Standby temperature (80 C)
Bit 7: Not used
H515
4-84
SM

Bit 2: Parallel memory transmission
Bit 3: Reduction before transmission
Bits 6 and 7: Fax On Demand
Bit
7
6
Setting
0
0
Disabled
0
1
Enabled without password (Remote ID)
1
0
Enabled with password (Remote ID)
1
1
Not used
0: Off, 1: On
0: Off, 1: On
0: Off, 1: On
0: Off, 1: On
0: Off, 1: On
0: Off, 1: On

Bit 0 and 1: Multi-copy reception (optional memory card required)
Bit
1
0
Setting
X
0
Disabled
0
1
Faxes from senders whose RTIs/CSIs are specified for this feature are
multicopied.
1
1
Faxes from senders whose RTIs/CSIs are not specified for this feature
are multicopied.
Bits 2 and 3: Authorized reception
Bit
3
2
Setting
X
0
Disabled
0
1
Only faxes from senders whose RTIs/CSIs are specified for this feature
are accepted.
1
1
Only faxes from senders whose RTIs/CSIs are not specified for this
feature are accepted.
Bits 4 and 5: Specified cassette selection
Bit
5
4
Setting
X
0
Disabled
0
1
printed on paper from a specified cassette.
1
1
are printed on paper from a specified cassette.
Bits 6 and 7: Forwarding (optional memory card required)
Bit
1
0
Setting
X
0
Disabled
0
1
forwarded.
1
1
are forwarded.
SM
4-85
H515
SERVICE
TABLES &
PROCEDURES

Bit 0: TTI/CIL printing (CIL is used with ISDN option)
Bit 1: Not used
Bit 2: Closed network for transmission
Bit 3: Not used
Bit 4: Batch transmission (memory card required)
Bit 5: Partial image scanning during memory tx

Bits 0 and 1: Memory lock (optional memory card required)
Bit
1
0
Setting
X
0
Disabled
0
1
kept in the memory until a memory lock ID is entered.
1
1
are kept in the memory until a memory lock ID is entered.
Bits 2 and 3: Hard disk filing system
(optional hard disk and the function upgrade card required)
Bit
3
2
Setting
X
0
Disabled
0
1
Faxes from senders whose RTIs/CSIs are specified are for this feature
kept in the hard disk for filing.
1
1
are kept in the hard disk for filing.
4800AA(H) - User parameter switch 10
Bit 0: Reverse order printing
Bit 1: 2 into 1
Bit 7: Halftone type
0: Error diffusion, 1: Dither
4800AB(H) - User parameter switch 11

Bit 0: Transfer request using DTMF tone signals 0: Not accepted, 1: Accepted
Bit 1: Method of transmitting numbers after the "Tone" mark over an ISDN line
0: UUI, 1: Tone
Bit 6: Printout of messages received while acting as a forwarding station 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 7: Polling Standby duration
0: Once, 1: No limit
4800AC(H) - User parameter switch 12
Bit 2: Toner saving mode
Bits 3 and 4: Printout image density (Fax mode)
Bit
4
3
Setting
0
0
Normal
0
1
Lighten
1
0
Darken
1
1
Not used
Bit 7: Copy operation
0: Possible, 1: Prohibited
4800AD(H) - PSTN access method
Bits 0 and 1: PSTN access method from behind a PABX
Bit
1
0
Setting
0
0
PSTN
0
1
Loop start
1
0
Ground start
1
1
Flash start
4800B8(H) - User function 62 settings
Bits 0 and 1: File retention time
Bit
1
0
Setting
0
0
Disabled
0
1
24 hours
1
0
Disabled
1
1
72 hours
H515
4-86
SM
4800B9(H) - User function 62 settings

Bit 0: Night timer
Bit 4: RDS operation
0: Not acceptable
1: Acceptable for the limit specified by
system switch 03

Bit 7: Daylight saving time
4800BA(H) - User function 62 settings

Bit 0: Not used
Bit 1: Dialing type
0: Pulse dialing (10 pps), 1: Tone (DTMF) dialing
4800BB(H) - PSTN access number for loop start
Access number Hex value to program (BCD)
0
F0
0
00
F0
00
99
99
4800C0 to 4800CF(H) - G4 Parameter Switches

(Refer to the ISDN G4 option service manual for details.)
SERVICE
TABLES &
PROCEDURES
4800D0 to 4800EF(H) - G4 Internal Switches

4800F0 to 480103(H) - RTI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII) - See the following note.
480104 to 480117(H) - CSI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII)
480118 to 800137(H) - TTI (Max. 32 characters - ASCII) - See the following note.
480138(H) - Number of CSI characters (Hex)
Note: If the number of characters are less than the maximum (20 for RTI, 32 for TTI), add a
stop code (FF[H]) after the last character.
480139 to 480147(H) - Service stations fax number (Service function 13)
See 48018F(H) for the type of network used for this number.
480157 to 480165(H) - Own fax number (PSTN) (User function 61)
480166 to 480174(H) - Own fax number (ISDN G4) (User function 61)
480175 to 480183(H) - Own fax number (ISDN G3) (User function 61)
480184(H) - ID code (low - Hex)
480185(H) - ID code (high - Hex)
480186(H) - Confidential ID (low - BCD)
480187(H) - Confidential ID (high - BCD)
480188(H) - Memory lock ID (low - Hex)
480189(H) - Memory lock ID (high - Hex)
48018C(H) - Remote ID (low - BCD)
48018D(H) - Remote ID (high - BCD)
48018F(H) - Network type used for the service station number
00(H) - G3 (PSTN)
01(H) - G4 (ISDN)
SM
4-87
H515
480198 to 48019F(H) - Last power off time (Read only)

480198(H) - 01(H) - 24-hour clock, 00(H) - 12-hour clock (AM), 02(H) - 12-hour clock
(PM)
480199(H) - Year (BCD)
48019A(H) - Month (BCD)
48019B(H) - Day (BCD)
48019C(H) - Hour
48019D(H) - Minute
48019E(H) - Second
48019F(H) - 00: Monday, 01: Tuesday, 02: Wednesday, ....... , 06: Sunday
4801AC(H) - Optional equipment (Read only)
Bit 0: Memory card
Bit 1: Hard disk
Bit 2: Function upgrade card
Bit 3: Not used
Bit 4: 100 sheet cassette
Bit 5: 1st paper feed unit (type F)
Bit 6: 2nd paper feed unit (type F)
Bit 7: Not used
4801AD(H) - Optional equipment (Read only)
Bit 0: 1st paper feed unit (type S)
Bit 1: 2nd paper feed unit (type S)
Bit 2: Not used
Bit 3: Not used
Bit 4: Printer interface
Bit 5: Not used
Bit 6: G4
Bit 7: Fax On Demand
0: Not installed, 1: Installed



4801C0 to 4801C2(H) - Tx counter

Address
4801C0(H)
4801C1(H)
4801C2(H)
High
Tens digit
Thousands digit
Hundred thousands digit
Low
Unit digit
Hundrets digit
Ten thousands digit
Note: The following counters have the same data format as above.
4801C4 to 4801C6(H) - Rx counter
4801C8 to 4801CA(H) - Scan counter
4801CC to 4801CE(H) - Print counter
4801D0 to 4801D2(H) - Printer interface output counter
4801D4 to 4801D6(H) - ADF counter
4801D8 to 4801DA(H) - Paper feed counter (standard cassette)
4801DC to 4801DE(H) - Paper feed counter (1st optional paper feed unit)
4801E0 to 4801E2(H) - Paper feed counter (2nd optional paper feed unit)
4801E4 to 4801E6H) - Paper feed counter (optional 100 sheet cassette)
4801E8 to 4801EA(H) - Paper feed counter (bypass feed)
4801F0 to 4801F2(H) - Scanner total jam counter
4801F4 to 4801F6(H) - Printer total jam counter
4801F8 to 4801FA(H) - Paper jam counter (standard cassette)
4801FC to 4801FE(H) - Paper jam counter (1st optional paper feed unit)
H515
4-88
SM
480200 to 480202(H) - Paper jam counter (2nd optional paper feed unit)
480204 to 480206(H) - Paper jam counter (optional 100 sheet cassette)
480208 to 48020A(H) - Paper jam counter (bypass feed)
480210 to 480212(H) - Fusing exit jam counter
480214 to 480216(H) - Registration jam counter
480218 to 48021A(H) - PM counter
48021C to 48021E(H) - PM call interval (default 60,000)
480220 to 480222(H) - Copy counter
480224 to 480226(H) - OPC (master drum) counter
480228 to 48022A(H) - OPC (master drum) replacement interval (default: 30,000 prints)
If bit 5 of system bit switch 04 is 0, the machine will ask the user to replace the drum at this
interval.
48022C to 48022E(H) - CTM counter
480276 to 480285(H) - Excessive jam call parameters (Refer to section 2.3.2 for details.)
4802A2 to 4802AD(H) - G4 NSC code
4802AE to 4802C5(H) - G4 terminal ID (ASCII - Max. 24 characters)
SERVICE
TABLES &
PROCEDURES
4802C6 to 4802D9(H) - ISDN G3 CSI (ASCII - Max. 20 digits)

4802DA(H) - Number of digits programmed in the ISDN G3 CSI (Hex)
4802DB to 4802DE(H) - ISDN IP
4802DF to 4802E2(H) - ISDN G3 sub-address
4802E3 to 4802E6(H) - ISDN G4 sub-address
4802E7 to 4802EB(H) - CiG4 board ROM information
4802E7(H) - Suffix
4802E8(H) - Version (BCD)
4802E9(H) - Year (BCD)
4802EA(H) - Month (BCD)
4802EB(H) - Day (BCD)
480300(H) - Number of copies for multi-sort document reception (User function 83)
480301(H) - Daylight saving time settings (User function 62)
SM
4-89
H515
480302 to 48032B(H) - Night timer period (User function 72)

480302 to 480304(H) - Setting #1 for Monday
480305 to 480307(H) - Setting #2 for Monday
480308 to 48030A(H) - Setting #1 for Tuesday
48030B to 48030D(H) - Setting #2 for Tuesday
48030E to 480310(H) - Setting #1 for Wednesday
480311 to 480313(H) - Setting #2 for Wednesday
480314 to 480316(H) - Setting #1 for Thursday
480317 to 480319(H) - Setting #2 for Thursday
48031A to 48031C(H) - Setting #1 for Friday
48031D to 48031F(H) - Setting #2 for Friday
480320 to 480322(H) - Setting #1 for Saturday
480323 to 480325(H) - Setting #2 for Saturday
480326 to 480328(H) - Setting #1 for Sunday
480329 to 48032B(H) - Setting #2 for Sunday
Program format
First byte - Hour (BCD)
Second byte - Minute (BCD)
Third byte - 00(H): Timer start time, 01(H): Timer end time
480356(H) - Time for economy transmission (hour in 24h clock format - BCD)
480357(H) - Time for economy transmission (minute - BCD)
480358 to 48035C(H) - Last RDS operation (Read only)
480358(H) - 01(H): 24-hour clock, 00(H): 12-hour clock (AM), 02(H): 12-hour clock (PM)
480359(H) - Year (BCD)
48035A(H) - Month (BCD)
48035B(H) - Day (BCD)
48035C(H) - Hour
48035D(H) - Minute
48035E(H) - Second
48035F(H) - 00: Monday, 01: Tuesday, 02: Wednesday, ....... , 06: Sunday
480364 to 48036B(H) - Last Fax On Demand report printout (Read only)
480364(H) - 01(H): 24-hour clock, 00(H): 12-hour clock (AM), 02(H): 12-hour clock (PM)
480365(H) - Year (BCD)
480366(H) - Month (BCD)
480367(H) - Day (BCD)
480368(H) - Hour
480369(H) - Minute
48036A(H) - Second
48036B(H) - 00: Monday, 01: Tuesday, 02: Wednesday, ....... , 06: Sunday
48036E to 48036F(H) - Length (mm) of the non-scanning area from the leading edge for partial image scanning
48036E(H) - Low byte (BCD)
48036F(H) - High byte (BCD)
In the US, the user input value is in inch format. The machine will convert this into mm format and store the converted value here.
480370 to 480371(H) - Length (mm) of the scanning area for partial image scanning
480370(H) - Low byte (BCD)
480371(H) - High byte (BCD)
480372(H) - Transmission monitor volume
480373(H) - Reception monitor volume
480374(H) - On-hook monitor volume
480376(H) - Buzzer volume
480377(H) - Key acknowledgement tone volume
00 - 07(H)
00 - 07(H)
00 - 07(H)
00 - 07(H)
00 - 07(H)
480379 to 48037D(H) - Periodic service call parameters (Refer to section 2.3.2 for details)
H515
4-90
SM
480383 to 480385(H) - Effective term of automatic service calls (Refer to section 2.3.2 for details)
480400 to 4804DA(H) - NCU parameters (Refer to section 4.3 for details)
4804EA(H) - Print top margin (standard cassette)
4804EB(H) - Print top margin (1st optional paper feed unit)
4804EC(H) - Print top margin (2nd optional paper feed unit)
4804EF(H) - Print top margin (optional 100 sheet cassette)
4804F0(H) - Print top margin (bypass feeder)
Refer to section 5.12 for details about these parameters.
4804F5(H) - Print left margin (standard cassette)
4804F6(H) - Print left margin (1st optional paper feed unit)
4804F7(H) - Print top margin (2nd optional paper feed unit)
4804FA(H) - Print left margin (optional 100 sheet cassette)
4804FB(H) - Print left margin (bypass feeder)
4805AF(H) - Fusing unit failure details

01(H) - The fusing lamp temperature stayed above 175 C while printing.
02(H) - The fusing lamp temperature did not reach 150 C before starting printing.
03(H) - The fusing lamp temperature did not go down to 80 C while in standby mode (when
fusing lamp OFF was selected for energy saver mode)
fusing lamp Standby [80 C] was selected for energy saver mode)
05(H) - The fusing lamp temperature stayed below 80 C while in standby mode (when fusing lamp Standby [80 C] was selected for energy saver mode)
07(H) - The fusing lamp temperature came below 140 C during printing
08(H) - The fusing lamp temperature exceeded 250 C
09(H) - A fusing thermistor error was detected
When a service call was caused by a fusing unit failure (codes 01 - 09):
After fixing the problem, reset the data at this address to 00(H), then restart the machine to
clear the service call. (Refer to address 4805B1(H) for other hardware failures.)
4805B0(H) - Excessive jam alarm
Bit 3: Scanner excessive jam alarm
1: An alarm has occurred
Bit 4: Printer excessive jam alarm
Either or both of these bits will change to 1 when an excessive jam alarm occurs. Reset
each bit to 0 when you have solved the problem. The machine will not be able to detect excessive jams in future if you do not reset these bits.
SM
4-91
H515
SERVICE
TABLES &
PROCEDURES
480586(H) - Print bottom margin when bypass feeder is used.

4805B1(H) - Details of the service call (hardware error)

fusing lamp OFF was selected for energy saver mode)
fusing lamp Standby [80 C] was selected for energy saver mode)
05(H) - The fusing lamp temperature stayed below 80 C while in standby mode (when fusing lamp Standby [80 C] was selected for energy saver mode)
07(H) - The fusing lamp temperature came below 140 C while printing
11(H) - Charge leak current was detected while the charge corona unit was activated
12(H) - Charge leak current was detected while the charge corona unit was not activated
21(H) - The laser synchronization signal was not detected during printing
31(H) - Polygonal mirror motor startup error
32(H) - Polygonal mirror motor error during printing
41(H) - Main motor startup error
42(H) - Main motor error during printing
When a service call was caused by a fusing lamp failure (codes 01 - 09):
The same code is stored at address 4805AF(H).
After fixing the problem, reset the data at address 4805AF(H) to 00(H), then restart the machine to clear the service call.
When a service call was caused by another hardware failure (codes 11 - 42):
If the problem remains after restarting the machine (power off/on), fix the hardware problem.
The service call condition is cleared after power up.
4805C8(H) - Initial Toner Supply
Bit 3: Initial toner supply 0: Off, 1: On
Whenever the development unit is replaced, do the following procedure.
1. Ensure that the drum, CTM, and the new development unit are correctly installed.
2. Turn the machine on and change this bit to 1.
4. Turn the machine on. The machine starts filling up the empty development unit hopper
with new toner. (This bit is reset to zero automatically.)
5. Make test copies or test patterns to check the print quality.
4805E5(H) - Sensor status (standard cassette and internal printer mechanism)
Bit 0 to 3: Paper size sensor
(Note: Available paper sizes depend on the country for which the machine is designed.)
Bit 0 1
Bit 1 0
Cassette
Bit 2 = 0 : not installed

Bit 3 0
Bit 0 0
Bit 1 1
F F4
Bit 2 = 1 : lengthwise

Bit 3 0
0
1
A5
0 : sideways

0
1
1
Legal
1 : sideways

0
0
0
LT
1 : lengthwise

0
1
0
A4
1 : lengthwise

0
1
0 Cassette
0 : not installed

1
1
1
Cassette
1 : not installed

1
Bit 4: Paper end sensor

Bit 5: Registration sensor
Bit 6: Fusing exit sensor
Bit 7: Standard cassette availability
H515
1: Paper end
1: Paper present
1: Paper present
0: Available, 1: Not available
(1: Jam, paper end, etc.)
4-92
SM
4805E6(H) - Sensor status (1st Optional Paper Feed Unit)

Bit 0 1
Bit 1 0
Cassette

Bit 3 0
Bit 0 0
Bit 1 1
F F4

Bit 3 0
0
1
A5
0 : sideways

0
1
1
Legal
1 : sideways

0
0
0
LT
1 : lengthwise

0
1
0 Cassette
0 : not installed

1

Bit 5: Relay sensor
Bit 6: Not used
Bit 7:Cassette availability
1
0
A4
1 : lengthwise

0
1
1
Cassette
1 : not installed

1
1: Paper end
1: Paper present
4805E7(H) - Sensor status (2nd optional Paper Feed Unit)

Bit 0 0
Bit 1 1
F F4

Bit 3 0
0
1
A5
0 : sideways

0
1
1
Legal
1 : sideways

0
0
0
LT
1 : lengthwise

0
1
0 Cassette
0 : not installed

1

Bit 5: Relay sensor
Bit 6: Not used
Bit 7:Cassette availability
1
0
A4
1 : lengthwise

0
SERVICE
TABLES &
PROCEDURES
Bit 0 1
Bit 1 0
Cassette

Bit 3 0
1
1
Cassette
1 : not installed

1
1: Paper end
1: Paper present
4805EA(H) - Sensor status (optional 100 sheet cassette)

0
1
A5
0 : sideways

0
0
0
LT
1 : lengthwise

0
1
1
Legal
1 : sideways

0
1
0
Cassette
0 : not installed

1
Bit 0 1
Bit 1 0
Cassette

Bit 3 0
Bit 0 0
Bit 1 1
F F4

Bit 3 0

Bit 5: Not used
Bit 6: Not used
Bit 7: Cassette availability
SM
1
0
A4
1 : lengthwise

0
1
1
Cassette
1 : not installed

1
1: Paper end

4-93
H515
4805EB(H) - Sensor status (bypass feed)

Bit 0 to 3: Not used
Bit 4: Paper in the bypass feed slot
Bit 5: Bypass feed sensor
Bit 6: Not used
Bit 7: Bypass feed availability
1: Paper not present

1: Paper present
(1: Jam, no paper, etc.)
48061C(H) - Scanning top margin adjustment

480620(H) to 480624(H) - Scanning bottom margin adjustment
Refer to section 5.12 for details.
492716 to 492C35(H) - Dedicated tx parameters for Quick Dial 01 - 64 and Speed Dial #00 #99.
As explained in section 4.4, each set of dedicated tx parameters consists of 8 bytes.
492716 to 49271D(H) - Dedicated tx parameters for Quick 01
49271E to 492725(H) - Dedicated tx parameters for Quick 02
492726 to 49272D(H) - Dedicated tx parameters for Quick 03
49290E to 492915(H) - Dedicated tx parameters for Quick 64

492916 to 49291D(H) - Dedicated tx parameters for Speed #00
49291E to 492925H) - Dedicated tx parameters for Speed #01
492926 to 49292D(H) - Dedicated tx parameters for Speed #03
492C2E to 492C35(H) - Dedicated tx parameters for Speed #99

49A709(H) - Selection of the other cassette for printer interface output (User Function 62)
01(H) - 1st optional paper feed unit
02(H) - 2nd optional paper feed unit
03(H) - Optional 100 sheet cassette
Note: The standard cassette and the cassette selected using function 62 are used for printer
interface output.
49A79C to 49A91B(H) - Latest 64 error codes (Read only)
One error record consists of 6 bytes of data.
First error record start address - 49A79C(H)
Second error record start address - 49A7A2(H)
Third error record start address - 49A7A8(H)
:
:
:
64th error record start address - 49A916(H)
The format is as follows:
1st byte - Minute (BCD)
2nd byte - Hour (BCD)
3rd byte - Day (BCD)
4th byte - Month (BCD)
5th byte - Error code (low) [If the error code is 1-23, 23 is stored here.]
6th byte - Error code (high) [If the error code is 1-23, 01 is stored here.]
49D71C to 49DDFB(H) - Latest 20 error communication records (Read only)
One error communication record consists of 88 bytes. The format is as follows:
H515
4-94
SM
1st byte - Header

Bit 0: Communication result
0: OK, 1: NG
Bit 1: Document jam
1: Occurred
Bit 2: Power down
1: Occurred
Bit 3: Not used
Bit 4: Technical data printout instead of personal codes 0: No, 1: Yes
Bit 5: Type of technical data
0: Rx level, 1: Measure of error rate
Bit 6: Error report
0: Not printed, 1: Printed
Bit 7: Data validity
0: Not valid, 1: Valid
2nd byte - Not used
3rd to 6th bytes - Date and time when the communication started
3rd byte - Month (BCD)
4th byte - Day (BCD)
5th byte - Hour (BCD)
6th byte - Minute (BCD)
7th and 8th bytes - Communication time
7th byte - Minutes (BCD)
8th byte - Seconds (BCD)
9th and 10th byte - Number of pages transmitted or received
9th byte - Low byte (Hex)
10th byte - High byte (Hex)
SERVICE
TABLES &
PROCEDURES
11th and 12th bytes - Personal code or number of total/burst error lines
If bit 4 of the 1st byte is 0:
11th byte - Personal code (low - BCD)
12th byte - Personal code (high - BCD)
11th byte - Number of total error lines (Hex)
12th byte - Number of burst error lines (Hex)
13th byte - File number (low - Hex)
14th byte - File number (high - Hex)
15th and 16th bytes - Rx level or measure of error rate
15th byte - Rx level (low - Hex)
16th byte - Rx level (high - Hex)
15th byte - Measure of error rate (low - Hex)
16th byte - Measure of error rate (high - Hex)
17th byte - Final modem rate
Bits 0 to 2: Final modem speed
0
Bit 0 1
Bit 1 = 0 : 2.4k 1 : 4.8k

0
Bit 2 0

1
1 : 7.2k

0

Bit 3: Not used

Bits 4 to 6: Final modem type
Bit 4 1
0
Bit 5 = 0 : V.27ter 1 : V.29

Bit 6 0
0
0
0 : 9.6k

1

1
1 : V.33

0

1
0 : 12.0k

1

0 V.17
0 :
(Long
)
1

0
1 : 14.4k

1

1 V.17
0 :
(Short)
1

Bit 7: Not used

18th to 20th byte - Not used
21st to 44th byte - Remote terminals ID (RTI, TSI or CSI) (ASCII)
SM
4-95
H515
45th byte - Communication mode #1

Bits 0 - 1: Resolution used
Bit 0 = 1 : Standard 0 : Detail,
,
Bit 1 0
1
1 : Fine
1

Bit 2: Communication Protocol

Bit 3: ECM
Bits 4 to 7: Communication mode used
1
Bit 4 0
0
Bit 5 0
Bit 6 = 0 : Normal 0 : Confidential

0
Bit 7 0
Bit 4 0
Bit 5 0
Bit 6 = 1 : Forwarding

Bit 7 0
0: G3, 1: G4
0: Off, 1: On
0
1
1
1
0 : Polling 0 : Transfer

0
0
1
0 Automatic
1 : Service Call

0

Bit 0: Tx or Rx
Bit 1: Reduction in Tx
Bit 2: Batch transmission
Bit 3: Send later transmission
Bit 4: Transmission from
Bit 5: Not used
Bits 6 and 7: Network type used
Bit 6 = 1 : PSTN, 0 : ISDN
1
Bit 7 0

1 Transfer
1
1 : using
DTMFUUI
0
0
0
Fax
0 : On Demand

1
0: Tx, 1: Rx
0: Not reduced, 1: Reduced
0: Not used, 1: Used
0: ADF, 1: Memory
47th byte - Not used

48th byte - Number of errors duing communication (Hex)
49th to 52nd byte - 1st error code and page number where the error occurred
49th byte - Page number where the error occurred (low - Hex)
50th byte - Page number where the error occurred (high - Hex)
51th byte - Error code (low - BCD)
52st byte - Error code (high - BCD)
53th to 56th byte - 2nd error code and page number where the error occurred
57th to 60th byte - 3rd error code and page number where the error occurred
61st to 64th byte - 4th error code and page number where the error occurred
65th to 68th byte - 5th error code and page number where the error occurred
69th to 72nd byte - 6th error code and page number where the error occurred
73rd to 76th byte - 7th error code and page number where the error occurred
81st to 84th byte - 9th error code and page number where the error occurred
70001E to 700025(H) - Hard disk information
If the data in these addresses do not match the following values after installing an optional
hard disk, format the hard disk and check these addresses again.
70001E(H) - 50(H)
70001F(H) - 00(H)
700020(H) - FF(H)
700021(H) - FF(H)
700022(H) - 00(H)
700023(H) - 50(H)
700025(H) - 00(H)
700026(H) - 80(H)
H515
4-96
SM
4.6. SPECIAL TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS

Flash/SRAM data copy harness (P/N: H5159100)
EPROM board (universal EPROM PCB)
Scan line adjustment chart (P/N: H5159300)
200 dpi test chart (P/N: H0829020)
Test harness (P/N: H5159301)
SBU adjustment knobs (P/N: H0129300)
SERVICE
TABLES &
PROCEDURES
SM
4-97
H515
4.7. PM TABLE
Scanner
Item
Exposure Glass
R1 and R2 Rollers
White Shading Plate
Mirrors
ADF Roller Assy
Separation Pad
C: Clean, R: Replace
30K
60K
90K
C (user) C (user) C (user)
C
R (user) R (user) R (user)
R (user) R (user) R (user)
1 year
C (user)
C (user)
C (user)
C
C (user)
C (user)
Notes
Soft cloth and water
1 year
Notes

Printer
Item
Paper Feed Roller
Registration Roller
Thermistor
Hot Roller
Pressure Roller
(Fusing)
Cleaning Pad
Transfer Roller
Development Unit
Ozone Filter
30K
60K
C
C (user)
R
R
R
90K
C (user)
R
R (user)
Replaced when a new CTM is installed.
R
R
R
A cleaning pad is
enclosed in the CTM.
100 Sheet Cassette (Optional)

Item
Feed Roller
10K
30K
60K
1 year
C (user)
Notes
30K
C (user)
60K
C (user)
1 year
C (user)
C (user)
Notes
Paper Feed Unit (Optional)

Item
Relay Roller
Feed Roller
H515
10K
C (user)
4-98
SM
4.8. SYSTEM PRINTOUTS
SERVICE
TABLES &
PROCEDURES
4.8.1. System Parameter List (page 1 of 2)
SM
4-99
H515
System Parameter List (page 2 of 2)
H515
4-100
SM
SERVICE
TABLES &
PROCEDURES
4.8.2. Ram Dump
SM
4-101
H515
REPLACEMENT AND
ADJUSTMENT
5. REPLACEMENT & ADJUSTMENT

+WARNING
The machine contains a laser beam generator. Laser beams can
cause permanent eye damage. Do not open the laser unit or look
along the laser beam path while the main power is on.
+CAUTION
Before starting disassembly, be sure to print all message files in the
SAF memory. Then, turn off the main switch and disconnect the
power cord for safety.
Lithium Battery: The danger of explosion exists if a battery of this type
is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or an equivalent type
recommended by the manufacturer. Discard used batteries in accordance
with the manufacturers instructions.
5.1. COVERS
REPLACEMENT
& ADJUSTMENT
5.1.1. Document Table and Tray
[A]
[B]
H515R601.wmf
A: Document Table
B: Document Tray
SM
5-1
H515
5.1.2. Rear Cover Assembly
[A]
H515R008.wmf
A: Rear Cover (4 screws, 3 hooks)
5.1.3. Left Cover
[B]
[A]
H515R603.wmf
A: Cover (1 screw)
B: Left Cover (2 screws, 3 hooks, 1 connector)
H515
5-2
SM
5.1.4. Right Cover
[C]
[B]
[A]
H515R501.wmf
A: Small Cover A (1 screw)

B: Small Cover B (1 screw)
C: Right Cover (2 screws, 3 hooks)
5.1.5. Operation Panel Assembly
Note:
It is not necessary to remove the connectors.
During reassembly, ensure that the harness is replaced in the hooks [D]
as shown.
[C]
[A]
[B]
[D]
H515R009.wmf
B: Bracket (1 tapping screw)

A: Operation Panel Assembly (1 screw with grounding wire, 1 connector)
SM
5-3
H515
REPLACEMENT
& ADJUSTMENT
First, remove the operation panel from the assembly by pushing the operation panel release button [C], then remove the assembly.
5.1.6. Top Cover

Note for reassembly: Thread the ground wire through the recess [B], as
shown.
[A]
[B]
H515R010.wmf
A: Top Cover (1 tapping screw with grounding wire, 1 white clip)
H515
5-4
SM
5.2. ADF
5.2.1. ADF Roller Assembly
[A]
[B]
H515R609.wmf
A: ADF Roller Cover

B: ADF Roller Assembly
5.2.2. Separation Rubber Plate
REPLACEMENT
& ADJUSTMENT
[A]
H515R610.wmf
A: Separation Rubber Plate
SM
5-5
H515
5.2.3. Separation Pressure Adjustment

[A]
To match the paper type that the

user will be scanning, adjust the
position of lever [A] as shown in
the following table.
Paper
Thickness
Thin
Normal
Thick
Pressure
Low
Normal
High
2 1
Position
1
2
3
To correct document feed problems, adjust the position of lever

[A] as shown in the following table.
Problem
Multi-feed - Thin pages
Multi-feed - Thick pages
Jam
Non-feed
Position
1
3
1
3
H515R611.wmf
A: Separation Pressure Adjustment Lever
5.2.4. ADF Sensors
[A]
[B]
H515R504.wmf
A: Operation Panel (4 tapping screws, 5 connectors)

B: ADF Upper Unit
H515
5-6
SM
[F]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[G]
H515R508.wmf
REPLACEMENT
& ADJUSTMENT
C: Bracket (7 tapping screws, 1 grounding wire)

D: Document Width Sensor (B4)
E: Document Sensor
F: Scan Line Sensor
G: Document Width Sensor (A3)
SM
5-7
H515
5.3. SCANNER
5.3.1. Exposure Glass
[A]
H515R003.wmf
A: Exposure Glass (2 white clips)
5.3.2. R1/R2 Rollers
[C]
[A]
[B]
H515R016.wmf
Remove the scanner lower unit first.

B: Scanner Side Cover A (1 screw)
C: Scanner Side Cover B (1 screw)
A: Scanner Lower Unit (5 screws, 1 grounding wire, 3 connectors)
H515
5-8
SM
[B]
[A]
[C]
H515R503.wmf
C: Plate (2 screws)
A: R1 Roller (1 E-ring)
B: R2 Roller (1 E-ring)
Note: If the rollers are removed, the gears and the belt will come off easily.
REPLACEMENT
& ADJUSTMENT
5.3.3. Xenon Lamp
[C]
[B]
h505r506.wmf
B: Shading Plate (1 tapping screw)

C: Lens Cover (2 screws)
A: Xenon Lamp (2 clips, 1 connector)
SM
[A]
5-9
H515
5.3.4. Tx Motor
[A]
H515R505.wmf
First, remove the scanner lower unit (refer to section 5.3.2), then remove the motor.
A: Tx Motor (2 screws, 1 connector)
5.3.5. Mirrors
[B]
[A]
[D]
[C]
[E]
H515R017.wmf
First, remove the scanner lower unit (refer to section 5.3.2), then turn it over.
D: Lower Scanner Unit Cover A: 1st Mirror (2 clips)
E: Bracket (1 tapping screw) B: 2nd Mirror (2 clips)
C: 3rd Mirror (2 clips)
H515
5-10
SM
5.3.6. Stamper
[B]
[A]
[D]
[C]
H515R018.wmf
SM
5-11
REPLACEMENT
& ADJUSTMENT
First, remove the scanner lower unit (refer to section 5.3.2).

A: Stamper
D: Lower Scanner Unit Cover
B: Bracket A (2 tapping screws with grounding wire)
C: Bracket B (1 tapping screw)
H515
5.4. LASER PRINTING COMPONENTS

5.4.1. Laser Unit
First, remove the clip [A] and disconnect harnesses [B], [C], and [D], then remove the Laser Unit [E].
[B]
[A]
[C]
[E]
[D]
H515R619.wmf
E: Laser Unit (1 clip, 3 connectors, 4 positioning pins)
H515
5-12
SM
5.4.2. Laser Diode Unit and Hexagonal Mirror Motor

[A]
[C]
[B]
H515R620.wmf
A: Laser Unit Cover

B: Laser Diode (LD) Unit (2 tapping screws)
C: Hexagonal Mirror Motor (3 tapping screws)
Laser beams can cause permanent eye damage. Do not open the
laser unit or look along the laser beam path while the main power is
on.
SM
5-13
H515
REPLACEMENT
& ADJUSTMENT
+WARNING
5.5. DEVELOPMENT
5.5.1. Development Unit
[D]
[B, C]
[A]
H515R621.wmf
Release the clips [B] and [C] and remove the main motor cover [D], then remove the
development unit [A].
A: Development Unit (2 clips, 1 connector)
[B]
[B ]
[A]
[A ]
[F]
[D]
[E]
[C]
H515R655.wmf
Note for reassembly

1. Place the pins [A] and [B] under the hooks [A ] and [B ].
2. Insert the pins [C] and [D] into the openings in the base, then push [E] and [F]
down to lock the development unit onto the base.
H515
5-14
SM
5.5.2. Transfer Roller

[A]
H515R622.wmf
A: Transfer Roller (1 gear, 2 spacers)
First, remove the zener diode [A], then remove the main motor assembly [B].
Note: Once the main motor assembly is removed, the gears and the shafts
will come off the unit easily.
[A]
[B]
H515R623.wmf
A: Zener Diode (1 screw)

B: Main Motor Assembly (2 tapping screws, 1 connector, 1 spring)
SM
5-15
H515
REPLACEMENT
& ADJUSTMENT
5.5.3. Main Motor and Gears
5.5.4. Toner End Sensor
[A]
H515R507.wmf
A: Toner End Sensor (1 connector)
H515
5-16
SM
5.5.5. Replacing the Development Unit

After every 60,000 prints, the following parts have to be replaced.
[A]
[E]
[F]
[D]
[C]
[B]
H515R646.wmf
A: Development Unit
E, F: Bushings
D: Development Roller Gear
C: Pin
B: Development Roller (Rubber)
Development unit [A]

Development roller [B] (A development roller comes with the parts [C]
through [F]. Check for the assembly part number of [B] through [F] in
the parts catalog.)
Transfer roller (refer to section 5.5.2)
Zener diode (refer to section 5.5.3)
The transfer roller unit, main motor and gears, development roller [B], and
the parts labelled [C] to [F] in the above illustration are not included with a
new development unit [A].
To install a new development unit, perform the following:
1. Install a new development roller as shown in the above illustration.
2. Install a new transfer roller, a new zener diode, a main motor, and gears
as described in sections 5.5.2 and 5.5.3.
Continued on the next page
SM
5-17
H515
REPLACEMENT
& ADJUSTMENT
3. Check the electrical resistance of the following.

Charge bias terminals/Zener diode
Toner application roller bias terminals
H515R656.wmf
A: Bias terminal to the CTM

B: Bias terminal from the power pack
C, D: Zener diode terminals
[A]
[C] [D]
Criteria
A - B: 0
C - D: The resistance varies depending
on the voltage applied between the terminals.
[B]
Development roller bias terminals

H515R657.wmf
A:
B:
C:
D:
[A]
Bias terminal from the power pack

Toner application roller shaft
Toner metering blade
Bias brush
Criteria
A - B: Less than 1 k
A - C: Less than 1 k
A - D: Less than 1 k
[C]
[D]
[B]
Transfer roller bias terminals

H515R658.wmf
A: Bias terminal from the power pack

B: Development roller shaft
[A]
Criteria
[B]
H515R659.wmf
A: Bias terminal from the power pack

B: Transfer roller shaft
[A]
Criteria
Note:
Check the resistance while pushing
the roller shaft down onto the roller
holder.
[B]
H515
5-18
SM
4. Install the new development unit into the machine.

5. Install the drum and CTM, and ensure that the following points are
connected to the frame ground.
Drum shaft
Main motor bracket
Antistatic brush on the transfer roller unit
Initial Toner Supply
After installing a new development unit, perform the following:
1. Set bit 3 of RAM address 4805C8 to 1. (Refer to section 4.5)
2. Turn off the machine and wait for 10 seconds.
4. The machine will supply new toner to the development unit.
REPLACEMENT
& ADJUSTMENT
Bit 3 will be automatically reset to zero at the end of the procedure, which will
take about 90 seconds.
SM
5-19
H515
5.6. FUSING
5.6.1. Thermistor
[A]
[B]
H515R624.wmf
B: Thermistor (1 tapping screw, 1 connector)

A: Thermistor Cover (6 hooks)
5.6.2. Fusing Unit

Preparation - Right hand side
First, open the fusing exit cover, then remove the sensor assembly [A],
bracket [B], and gear [C].
[C]
[B]
[A]
[D]
H515R625.wmf
B: Bracket (1 screw)
C: Gear
A: Feed-out Sensor/Exit Cover Switch Assembly (2 tapping screws, 2 connectors)
+CAUTION
During re-assembly, be sure that the fusing exit cover [D] is open
before inserting the sensor assembly [A].
H515
5-20
SM
Preparation - Left hand side

First, remove the ground wire [A], harness cover [B] and cover [C], 1 connector.
Note: Put back the bracket [D] after removing the ground wire [A].
Fusing Unit Removal
[A]
[B]
[D]
[E]
[F]
[C]
H515R626.wmf
REPLACEMENT
& ADJUSTMENT
D: Ground Wire (1 screw)

B: Harness Cover A (1 tapping screw)
C: Harness Cover B (1 tapping screw)
A: Fusing Left Cover (1 tapping screw)
E: Fusing Unit Fulcrum (1 tapping screw)
F: Thermistor Harness
[A]
H515R627.wmf
A: Fusing Unit (3 screws, 1 connector)
SM
5-21
H515
5.6.3. Hot Roller Strippers

Remove the cleaning felt if it is still in the unit, then remove the strippers.
[A]
[B]
H515R628.wmf
A: Cleaning Felt
B: Hot Roller Strippers (1 spring each)
+CAUTION
Be careful not to lose the springs.
5.6.4. Fusing Lamp
[A]
H515R629.wmf
115V Models
A: Fusing Lamp (2 screws)

[A]
H515R652.wmf
+CAUTION
Be careful not to touch the glass surface.
H515
5-22
SM
5.6.5. Hot Roller
[C]
[E]
[B]
[A]
REPLACEMENT
& ADJUSTMENT
[D]
H515R630.wmf
First, remove the tapping screw [A], then remove the tapping screws [B] and
[C]. The fusing upper and lower units come apart after the ground plate [D] is
released from the upper unit [E].
+CAUTION
Do not bend the ground plate too much.
SM
5-23
H515
Remove the bracket [A], then remove the hot roller [B].
[B]
[A]
[C]
H515R631.wmf
115V Models
A: Bracket (3 screws)
B: Hot Roller
C: Fusing Lamp Connector (1 screw)
[B]
[C]
[A]
H515R653.wmf
220V Models
B: Hot Roller
H515
5-24
SM
5.6.6. Pressure Roller

[A]
[C]
[B]
H515R632.wmf
B: Bracket (1 tapping screw)
C: Pressure Roller
REPLACEMENT
& ADJUSTMENT
5.6.7. Thermostat and Thermofuse
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
H515R654.wmf
A: Thermostat (2 screws)
B: Thermofuse (2 screws) - 220V models only (Not in U.S. models)
C,D: Terminal Plates for the Thermofuse - 220V models only (Not in U.S. models)
SM
5-25
H515
5.7. PAPER FEED

5.7.1. Paper Feed Motor and Clutch Box
[A]
[B]
H515R634.wmf
A: Paper Feed Motor (2 screws)

B: Paper Feed Clutch Box (1 clip, 2 screws)
5.7.2. Paper End Sensor

First, remove the bracket [A], then remove the sensor [B].
[B]
[A]
H515R635.wmf
A: Bracket (1 screw)
B: Paper End Sensor
H515
5-26
SM
5.7.3. Paper Feed Rollers, Paper Size Sensor, By-pass Feed Sensor,
and Relay Connector
[B]
[C]
[A]
Paper feed rollers [A]: Turn the roller shaft as shown in the diagram until
the screw heads can be seen from the front. Then remove the rollers.
The relay connector to the optional 100 sheet cassette [C] should be
installed as shown in the diagram (the triangle mark must be at the left hand
side of the connector.
By-pass feed sensor: See below.
h515r022.wmf
SM
5-27
H515
REPLACEMENT
& ADJUSTMENT
H515R636.wmf
A: Feed rollers (1 screw each)

B: Paper size sensor (2 hooks, 1 connector)
C: Relay connector to the optional 100 sheet cassette (1 screw, 1 connector)
5.7.4. Registration Roller and Bypass Feed Sensor Actuator
[F]
[H]
[A]
[B]
[C]
[G]
[E]
[D]
H515R637.wmf
F: Bracket (2 tapping screws)

H: Bypass Feed Sensor Actuator
G: Guide Plate (5 hooks)
A: Paper Guide A (4 hooks)
B: Paper Guide B (4 hooks)
C,D: Springs
E: Registration Roller (1 E-ring, 1 gear)
Registration Roller
Remove the guides ([A], [B]) and springs ([C], [D]) first, then remove the
roller [E].
Bypass Feed Sensor Actuator
Remove the bracket [F] and the guide plate [G], then remove the actuator
[H].
H515
5-28
SM
5.8. PCBs
5.8.1. PSU
[A]
H515R026.wmf
REPLACEMENT
& ADJUSTMENT
A: Heat Sink (4 screws)
[B]
H515R027.wmf
B: PSU (4 screws, 2 connectors)
SM
5-29
H515
5.8.2. NCU, MFDU, and MFCE

[A]
[B]
[C]
H515R639.wmf
A: NCU (3 screws)
B: MFDU (2 screws)
C: MFCE (2 screws)
If the machine has a Function Upgrade Card or a Fax On Demand Card installed, the SRAM data in the defective MFCE can be copied to the new
MFCE. Otherwise, all the data stored in the card will be initialized the first
time that the power is switched on after replacement.
In such a case, perform the following procedure.
1. Ensure that System Switch 16 - bit 0 is "1", and the battery switch of the
card is ON, before removing the IC card from the MFCE. Then, turn the
machine off.
2. Disconnect the optional IC cards.
3. Replace the old MFCE with the new MFCE (ensure that the battery
switch in the new MFCE is on).
Do not turn on the machine at this point.
4. Connect the Flash/SRAM Copy Tool into the lower slot of the new MFCE,
then connect the old MFCE to the Copy Tool (refer to section 4.1.22).
6. Transfer the SRAM data from the old MFCE using service function
12 (refer to section 4.1.22).
7. At the complettion of the data transfer, turn the machine off and
disconnect the tool.
8. Re-insert the optional IC card(s).
9. Turn the machine on and check if the IC cards can be used as before.
Harness Connections from the MFDU
H515
5-30
SM
5.8.3. Power Pack

Fan Motor
Main Motor
Quenching Lamp
Mechanical Counter
Interlock Switch
(+24V)
CN12
CN11
CN15
Paper Feed Motor

Polygonal
Mirror Motor
CN14
Stamper
Ozone Fan
Speaker
Tx Motor
CN17
CN74
PSU
100 Sheet Cassette
(Optional)
CN18
Lamp
Stabilizer
Power Pack
CN21
CN70
CN20
CN71
CN76
CN23
PD1
CN75
CN13
OPU
CN4
Not Used
Paper Size Sensor,

Thermistor
CN26
CN25
SBU
LDDR
CN7
Sensors
-Paper Exit
-Fusing Exit Cover
Lazer
Synchronized
Detector
CN5
PFU
(Optional)
Not Used
Sensors
-Registration
-Bypass Feed
-Paper End
-Toner End
CN3
CN78
NCU
FCE
CN1
CN10
Interlock
Switch
(+5V)
CN73
Printer I/F
(Optional)
Not used
CN72
Microphone
(Optional)
CN77
Not Used
HDD
(Optional)
REPLACEMENT
& ADJUSTMENT
H515R502.wmf
Do not touch the dials on

the power pack during
replacement.
[A]
H515R640.wmf
A: Power Pack (1 tapping screw, 1 connector)
SM
5-31
H515
5.9. OTHERS
5.9.1. Ozone Filter and Fan Motor
[D]
[C]
[A]
[B]
H515R641.wmf
A,B: Ozone Filter Holder (2 screws)

C: Ozone Filter
D: Fan Motor (1 connector)
5.9.2. Speaker
[A]
H515R050.wmf
A: Speaker (2 screws)
H515
5-32
SM
5.10. 100 SHEET PAPER CASSETTE (OPTIONAL)

5.10.1. Relay Connector and Gear Cover
H515R642.wmf
[A]
C: Gear Cover (1 screw)
A: Harness Cover (2 screws)
B: Relay Connector (2 clips)
[B]
[C]
5.10.2. Paper End Sensor and Drive Components
A: Sensor Stay (1 hook)

B: Sensor Cover (2 hooks)
C: Paper End Sensor (3 hooks)
E: Paper Feed Clutch (1 clip)
F: Feed Rollers (2 bushings, 1
clip)
[B]
[C]
[E]
[F]
[D]
Paper End Sensor

First, remove the stay [A] and the cover [B], then remove the sensor [C].
Paper Feed Clutch and Rollers
First, remove the gears [D], then remove the clutch [E] and rollers [F].
SM
5-33
H515
REPLACEMENT
& ADJUSTMENT
H515R643.wmf
[A]
5.10.3. Paper Size Sensor

[A]
[B]
[D]
[C]
H515R644.wmf
A: Paper Guide
B: Bottom Plate (2 springs)
C: Paper Size Dial (1 clip, 1 spring)
D: Paper Size Sensor (2 hooks)
H515
5-34
SM
Rev.11/16/98

5.11.1. Replacement
Remove the rear cover, then remove the NCU [A], the rear bracket [B], and
the SBU [C].
Note: After the SBU is replaced, perform the following adjustment procedure.
[C]
[B]
[A]
H515R509.wmf
A: NCU (3 screws)
B: Rear Bracket (3 screws)
C: SBU (2 screws)
REPLACEMENT
& ADJUSTMENT

Scan line adjustment chart: P/N H5159300
200 dot-per-inch test pattern: P/N H0829020
Test lead: P/N H5159301
SBU adjustment knobs: P/N H0129300
5.11.3. Preparation
1. Set the oscilloscope scale to 0.2 V/unit (vertical) and 0.5 ms/unit
(horizontal).
2. Connect the test lead to H515-CN 6 or to H551-CN8 on the MFCE.

3. Connect the oscilloscope probe to pin 2 (blue wire) and the ground to pin
4 (black wire)
4. Clean the white pressure plate with a soft cloth and alcohol.
5. Light the xenon lamp (see section 4.1.15)
SM
5-35
H515
5.11.4. Adjustment
1. White Level
[A]
[B]
H515R552.wmf
H515R043.wmf
A 1.26 V
B 0.46 V
(A-B)/A 0.3
Fit the adjustment knobs [A] through the SBU slots as shown.
Loosen the SBU securing screws [B].
Remove any test charts that are on the exposure glass.
Ensure that the complete white level waveform can be seen on the oscilloscope.
Adjust the waveforms until A and B in the oscilloscope display meet
the requirements.
Carefully tighten the SBU securing screws.
The waveform may have irregular patches if the lens, mirror, exposure
glass, white pressure plate, or CCD is dirty.
The xenon lamp may be wearing out if the waveform level is lower at the
ends than in the middle.
The CCD may be defective if the waveform has sharp peaks or dropouts.
H515
5-36
SM
2. Focusing (MTF)
[A]
[B]
[C]
[A]
H515R044.wmf
H515R553.wmf
Place the 200 dpi test pattern on the exposure glass.

Remove the lens cover [A] (2 screws).
Loosen the lens securing screw [B].
Focus the lens [C] untill B in the oscilloscope display is maximized (see
the diagram on the upper right)
Tighten the lens securing screw.
3. Reduction
Place the 200 dpi test pattern on the exposure glass.
REPLACEMENT
& ADJUSTMENT
[A]
[B]
[A]
H515R045.wmf
H515R554.wmf
Loosen the lens block securing the screws [A].

Focus the lens block [B] until the signal has 8 or fewer crosspoints (see
the diagram on the right.
Tighten the lens block securing screws.
Note: Alternately tighten each screw a little at a time.
SM
5-37
H515
4. Scan Line
[A]
H515R047.wmf
[B]
H515R043.wmf
H515
H515R555.wmf
Place the scan line test chart [A] on the exposure glass as shown.
Loosen the SBU securing screws [B].
Adjust the waveform with the adjusting knobs until it appears as shown
in the diagram on the right.
5-38
SM
5. Scan Start Position
H515R046.wmf
SM
Place the scan line test chart on the exposure glass as shown on the
previous page.
Connect the oscilloscope to the test leads as follows:
Channel 1 to VIDEO (pin 2 - blue wire), channel 2 to VADJ (pin 1 - red
wire), and connect the ground to pin 4 (black wire)
Set the oscilloscope scales as follows:
Vertical - CH 1: 0.2 V/unit, CH 2: 2 V/unit; Horizontal - 20 s/unit.
Adjust the waveform until it appears as shown in the right-hand diagram. Do this by gently tapping the SBU as shown in the left-hand diagram.
The peak of the VIDEO signal must be within 4 bits of the peak VADJ
signal.
Reset the oscilloscope to the original settings and repeat procedure 4
(Scan Line) on the previous page. It may be necessary to recheck procedures 4 and 5 until the scan line is perfectly positioned.
Tighten the SBU securing screws.
5-39
H515
REPLACEMENT
& ADJUSTMENT
H515R556.wmf
5.12. IMAGE ADJUSTMENT

5.12.1. Overview
This section will explain how to adjust various scanning and printing parameters. Among these are the margin parameters as shown in the diagram
below, which are named in accordance with the chart below the diagram.
W2
L3
L2
L1
W1
H515R650.wmf
Parameters
Description
W1
W2
L1
L2
L3
Left margin
Print/Scan width
Top margin
Print/Scan length
Bottom margin
Fax - Tx
Not adjustable
Not adjustable
Scanner
Not adjustable
Scanner
Adjustable by
Fax - Rx
Printer
Not adjustable
Printer
Not adjustable
Not adjustable
Copying
Printer
Not adjustable
Scanner/Printer
Not adjustable
Scanner
+CAUTION
The factory settings may not be the same as the Initial settings
described in the following procedures. RAM reset level 0 will reset all
the scan and print margin parameters to the Initial settings.
H515
5-40
SM
5.12.2. Scanner Parameters

1. Contrast
Normal
Lighten
Darken
Text Area
Text Mode
Bit Switch
Initial Setting
Scanner 02
0E(H)
Scanner 03
10(H)
Scanner 04
0C(H)
Halftone Mode
Bit Switch
Initial Setting
Scanner 05
09(H)
Scanner 06
0D(H)
Scanner 07
02(H)
Scanner 08
08(H)
2. Margins
Parameter
W1, W2
RAM
Address
Formula
Unit
Initial
Setting
Not adjustable
L1
L2
L3
SM
48061C(H)
This parameter will change the number of tx

motor steps after the scan line sensor is
activated.
To increase the margin by x mm:
New setting = Current setting + 15.4x
To decrease the margin by x mm:
New setting = Current setting - 15.4x
Initial setting of L1: 2 mm
Not adjustable (Original length - L1 - L3)
This parameter will change the number of tx
motor steps after the scan line sensor is
deactivated.
New setting = Current setting - 15.4x
New setting = Current setting + 15.4x
5-41
480620(H)
(standard)
9A(H)
1
mm [154(D)]
15.4
79(H)
[121(D)]
1
93(H)
480622(H)
mm
[147(D)
(detail)
15.4
480624(H)
(fine)
AF(H)
[175(D)]
H515
REPLACEMENT
& ADJUSTMENT
H515R651.wmf
5.12.3. Printer Parameters

1. Margins (Main Scan Direction)
Parameter
RAM
Address
Formula
Unit
Initial
Setting
H515R648.wmf
Standard
cassette:
4804F5(H)
1st paper
feed unit:
4804F6(H)
2nd paper
feed unit: 0.5 mm 0A(H)
4804F7(H)
W1
100 sheet
cassette:
4804FA(H)
1. Fax and Copy Mode

New setting = Current setting + x/0.5
New setting = Current setting - x/0.5
Initial setting of W1: 2 mm
W2
H515
Bypass
feed:
4804FB(H)
Not adjustable
5-42
SM
2. Margins (Sub Scan Direction)

Parameter
RAM
Address
Formula
Unit
Initial
Setting
H515R651.wmf
L2
L3
0.34
mm
0D(H)
2nd paper
feed unit:
4804EC(H)
Standard and 100 sheet cassette:

00(H)
1st paper
feed unit:
4804EB(H)
L1
0.68
mm
0.34
mm
0D(H)
100 sheet
cassette:
4804EF(H)
0.68
mm
05(H)
Bypass
feeder:
4804F0(H)
0.34
mm
00(H)
REPLACEMENT
& ADJUSTMENT
Standard
cassette:
4804EA(H)
Other:
Not adjustable
This is only adjustable in bypass feed mode.
480586(H)
0.34
mm
4A(H)
Example: To increase the margin by 5 mm.

5/0.34 14.7 15(D) = F(H)
New setting = 3B - F = 2C(H)
SM
5-43
H515
TROUBLESHOOTING
6. TROUBLESHOOTING
6.1. COPY QUALITY TROUBLESHOOTING
If there is a copy quality problem that cannot be solved easily, try using the
following troubleshooting procedures, while referring to the point-to-point
diagram. The procedures may not be exhaustive, but they may help you to
find the problem.
First, distinguish whether the problem is caused by the remote terminal or by
your machine. If the problem is caused by your machine, distinguish whether
it is due to a scanner problem or a printer problem.
Make a copy
Is the print image

OK?
Print a test pattern
NG
or a report
OK
OK
Check the symptom again
Is the print image

OK?
NG
Check the remote

terminal
OK
NG
TROUBLESHOOTING
Is the image
received by fax
OK?
Check the printer
Check the scanner

H515t614.wmf
SM
6-1
H515
6.1.1. Blank Copies

Possible Cause (Printer):
Poor drum sensitivity.
Laser optic components are out of position.
The proper bias voltages are not applied to the toner application roller
and/or the development roller.
The proper current is not applied to the transfer roller.
Action:
1. Print a test pattern or a report, and open the cover in the middle of
printing.
2. Check if there is toner adhered to the drum surface.
If yes, do the following. If not, go to step 3.
Check if the transfer roller is installed correctly.
Check if the development unit is installed correctly.
Check if the resistance between the transfer bias terminal on the development unit and the transfer roller shaft is less than 10 kOhm, while
pushing the roller shaft down to the roller holder. Refer to page 5-18.
If the resistance is OK, check the connections behind the power pack
and the power pack itself.
3. Check if there is toner on the surface of the development roller.
If yes, do the following. If no, go to step 4.
Check if all the laser optic components are properly positioned.
Try replacing the drum.
4. Check if the toner cartridge is empty. If yes, do the following. If no, go to
step 5.
Check or replace the toner end sensor.
5. Do the following.
Check that the development unit is correctly installed.
Check if the resistance between the development roller bias terminal on
the development unit and the development roller shaft, the toner metering
plate, and the bias brush are less than 1 kOhm. Refer to page 5-18.
Check if the resistance between the toner application roller bias terminal on the development unit and the toner application roller shaft is less
than 1 kOhm. Refer to page 5-18.
If all the resistances are OK, check the connections behind the power
pack and the power pack itself.
H515
6-2
SM
6.1.2. Black Copies

Possible Cause (Scanner)
The scanner lamp, lamp stabilizer, or SBU is not connected or defective.
Action:
1. Check if the scanner lamp is connected properly.
2. Check if the scanner lamp or lamp stabilizer is not defective. If one or
both of them is (are) found defective, replace both items.
3. Check if the SBU is connected properly, or it is not defective.
4. Check if the SBU is defective.
Possible Cause (Printer)
The charge is not properly applied.
Action:
1. Check if all the charge bias terminals on the development unit and the
CTM, and the charge wire are properly connected.
If yes, go to step 2.
If no, fix the connections.
2. Check if the zener diode is not shorted.
If the zener diode is shorted, replace the zener diode.
If no, go to step 3.
TROUBLESHOOTING
3. Check the connections behind the power pack.
SM
6-3
H515
6.1.3. Dirty Background
H515t607.wmf
H515t612.wmf

Scanner shading correction error or wrong threshold.
Action:
1. Clean the shading plate.
2. Adjust the scanner contrast threshold settings.
The charge is not properly applied.
The hot roller is dirty.
Action:
1. Try replacing the drum.
2. Check if the hot roller surface is dirty.
If yes, clean the roller or replace the cleaning pad.
3. Check if all the charge bias terminals on the development unit and the
CTM, and the charge wire are properly connected.
If yes, check or replace the power pack.
If no, fix the connections.
H515
6-4
SM
6.1.4. Uneven Image Density
H515t608.wmf
H515t612.wmf

Dirty exposure glass or mirrors
SBU position is not aligned to the scan line properly.
Action
Clean the scanner exposure glass or mirrors.
Adjust the SBU position (refer to section 5.11 for details).
Action:
1. Print a solid black test pattern, and open the cover in the middle of
printing.
2. Check if the toner is evenly distributed on the development roller.
If no, check the toner metering blade, and the toner supply mechanism
in the toner hopper. If yes, go to step 3.
If the image is lighter in the center of the image, toner may be low. Replace the CTM and supply more toner.
3. Check if the toner is evenly distributed on the drum.
If no, check the drum sensitivity, the laser optic components, and the
quenching lamp on the CTM.
If yes, check if there is any dirt on the transfer roller surface.
SM
6-5
H515
TROUBLESHOOTING

Dirty laser optic components.
The toner metering blade is deformed, or incorrectly positioned.
Uneven toner supply in the development toner hopper.
Quenching lamp defect.
6.1.5. Vertical Black Lines
H515t603.wmf
H515t612.wmf

Dirt or dust on the exposure glass or mirrors.
Defective CCD element(s) on the SBU.
Dirty shading plate.
Action:
1. Clean the exposure glass, the mirrors, or the shading plate.
2. Replace the SBU.
Damaged cleaning blade.
Dirty hot roller stripper(s).
Action:
1. Replace the CTM.
2. Clean the hot roller strippers.
H515
6-6
SM
6.1.6. Horizontal Black Lines
H515t610.wmf
H515t611.wmf

The drum surface is scratched or damaged.
Replace corona leak failure.
Action:
1. Check that the surface of the drum is not damaged.
Replace the drum if it is damaged.
TROUBLESHOOTING
2. If the problem still remains, do the following.

Clean the charge wire.
Replace the CTM.
SM
6-7
H515
6.1.7. Vertical White Lines
H515t606.wmf
H515t612.wmf

The laser optic components are dirty.
The hot roller stripper scraped the toner off from the print paper.
Action:
Clean the laser optic components.
Check the hot roller stripper mechanism. Clean the strippers and replace them if they are damaged.
H515
6-8
SM
6.1.8. Horizontal White Lines
H515t609.wmf
H515t611.wmf

The surface of the development roller is damaged or deformed.
The development bias is not stable.
Transfer current is not stable.
Action:
1. Print a test pattern, and open the cover in the middle of printing.
3. Check if horizontal white lines (where toner is not adhered) appear on

the development roller surface.
If yes, check if the development roller surface is not deformed. If it is
OK, check or replace the power pack.
If no, check for damage on the drum surface.
SM
6-9
H515
TROUBLESHOOTING
2. Check if horizontal white lines (where toner is not adhered) appear on

the drum surface.
If no, check the transfer roller surface and the transfer bias terminals
connections. If they are OK, check or replace the power pack.
6.1.9. Black Dots/Spots
H515t602.wmf

Dust on the exposure glass.
Action:
Clean the exposure glass.
Try disabling MTF.
The drum surface is damaged (the interval X = approx. 94.2 mm).
Toner on the hot roller (the interval X = approx. 63 mm).
Action:
Replace the drum.
Clean the hot roller surface.
H515
6-10
SM
6.1.10. White Spots in Black Image Areas
H515t601.wmf

The drum surface is damaged (this is likely if the dots appear at 94.2
mm intervals).
The development roller surface is damaged (this is likely if the dots appear at 62.8 mm intervals).
The toner application roller surface is damaged (this is likely if the dots
appear at about 16.75 mm intervals).
TROUBLESHOOTING
Action:
Replace the drum.
Clean the surface of the development roller or replace the roller if it is
damaged.
Replace the development unit.
SM
6-11
H515
6.1.11. Faint Copies *
H515t604.wmf
H515t612.wmf
Possible Causes (Scanner)

Dirty shading plate and/or exposure glass
Incorrect scan threshold setting
Defective scanner lamp or SBU
Action:
Clean shading plate.
Adjust the scan threshold settings.
Replace the scanner lamp or the SBU.
Possible Causes (Printer)
Dirty laser optic components.
Incorrect development/ transfer bias
Defective quenching lamp
Low toner
Low fusing temperature
H515
6-12
SM
Action:
1. Check whether the toner saving feature has not been selected with the
user parameters. (If it has been selected, there is no problem.)
2. Print a test pattern, and open the cover in the middle of printing.
3. Check if the toner on the paper at the entrance of the fusing unit looks
faint.
If yes, check or replace the fusing lamp, thermistor, and PSU.
4. Check if the toner on the drum looks faint.
If no, check the contacts between the transfer bias terminals and power
pack.
TROUBLESHOOTING
5. Check if the toner on the development roller looks faint.

If yes, check all the contacts between the development and toner application rollers bias terminals.
If no, try replacing the CTM and drum.
SM
6-13
H515
6.1.12. Vertical Black Band
H515t605
H515t612

Dirty charge corona wire.
The toner metering blade is deformed, damaged, or incorrectly positioned.
Action:
Clean the charge corona wire. The wire cleaner is on the CTM.
Replace the CTM.
Check the toner metering blade and replace if damaged.
H515
6-14
SM
6.1.13. Unfused Copies

The thermistor is defective.
The fusing pressure roller spring mechanism is defective.
The wrong type of toner is being used.
A non-recommended type of paper is being used.
Action:
1. Check if the correct type of paper and toner are being used.
If no, use recommended types of paper and toner.
2. Try replacing the fusing lamp and the roller.
6.1.14. Ghost Image
The cleaning blade is deformed or incorrectly positioned.
Dirty hot roller
TROUBLESHOOTING
Action:
Clean the cleaning blade.
Replace the CTM.
Clean the hot roller surface and/or replace the cleaning pad.
Replace the drum.
SM
6-15
H515
6.1.15. Toner on the Back of the Printer Paper

Dirty transfer roller
Dirty fusing pressure roller
Action:
1. Check if the transfer roller is dirty with toner.
If yes, clean the roller surface.
1) Take the roller off the machine.
2) Gently tap the roller shaft to remove the toner.
3) Turn the roller against a clean sheet of paper to let the toner transfer
onto the paper.
2. Check if the fusing pressure roller is dirty with toner or not.

If yes, clean the fusing pressure roller.
If no, check for any other dirty rollers and clean them.
H515
6-16
SM
6.1.16. Misaligned Output (Data shifted to the right or left)

Incorrect setting of the document guide.
Action:
Align each side of the document to the document guides.
The laser optics are misaligned.
Improper print margin setting (main scan direction).
Action:
Adjust the main scan print margin. (Refer to Section 5-12.)
Check that the laser optics are aligned correctly.
6.1.17. Misaligned Output (Image shifted vertically)/Reduced Image
Possible Cause:
Improper print margin (sub scan direction).
Dirty registration roller.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Action:
Adjust the sub scan print margin. (Refer to Section 5-12.)
Clean the registration roller.
SM
6-17
H515
6.2. MECHANICAL PROBLEMS

6.2.1. ADF/Scanner
1. Non Feed
Possible Cause:
An incorrect type or size of document is used.
The operation panel is not properly closed.
The pick-up and feed rollers are dirty or worn out.
The mechanical clutch mechanism for document pick-up is defective.
Incorrect positioning of the separation pad, or the pad is missing.
Inappropriate separation pressure setting.
The Tx motor is defective.
Action:
1. Check that a correct type of document is being used.
2. Check that the operation panel is securely closed.
Clean the pick-up and feed rollers with a soft cloth and water, and replace them if they are damaged.
Check the spring mechanism of the pick-up roller and replace it if it is
damaged.
Adjust the separation pressure to the appropriate setting.
Check the connection between the MFDU (CN17) and the Tx motor.
Replace the Tx motor.
H515
6-18
SM
2. Jam
Possible Cause:
The document is too long.
The scanner rollers (pick-up, feed, R1, and R2 rollers) are dirty.
Obstruction in the document paper path.
The scan line sensor is defective.
Defective tx motor
Action:
1. Check that a correct type of document is being used, and that the
document length is within the maximum setting.
2. Check for obstructions in the paper path.
TROUBLESHOOTING

Clean the rollers with a soft cloth and water, or replace if damaged.
Check that the scan line sensor is working correctly.
Replace the Tx motor.
SM
6-19
H515
3. Skew
Possible Cause:
The document guide are not properly set.
The operation panel is not properly closed.
The scanner rollers (pick-up, feed, R1, and R2 rollers) are dirty.
Obstruction in the document paper path.
The separation pad is out of position.
Action:
1. Check that a correct type of document is being used.
2. Check that the operation panel is securely closed and also check that
the document guide are properly set.
Check that the separation pad is properly set. Replace if damaged.
Clean the rollers with a soft cloth and water, and replace if damaged.
4. Multi-feed
Action:
Adjust the separation pressure to the proper setting.
Clean or replace the separation pad.
H515
6-20
SM
6.2.2. Printer
1. Non-feed
Possible Cause:
The paper cassette end fence are not properly set.
The paper lift mechaninsm (slide lock) are not working properly.
Malfunction in the paper feed clutch.
The paper feed roller(s) is not properly set.
The paper feed motor is defective.
The registration sensor is defective.
Action:
1. Check that a correct type of paper is being used.
2. Check that the paper cassette end fence is correctly set and check the
paper lift mechanism (slide lock and the springs).
3. Check that the feed clutch for the cassette that was used is working
properly.
4. Check that the paper feed roller(s) were properly installed. Clean or
replace if necessary.
5. Check the registration roller and its mechanism. Clean or replace if
necessary.

Check the connections between the MFDU (CN74) and the paper feed
motor.
Replace the paper feed motor.
SM
6-21
H515
TROUBLESHOOTING
6. Check that the registration sensor is working correctly.
2. Paper Jam - Inside the Printer

Possible Cause:
The paper end fence and/or the paper guides in the cassette are not
properly set.
The registraton roller is dirty.
Obstruction in the paper path.
The main motor is defective.
Action:
1. Check if a correct type of paper is being used, and check that the paper
end fence and the paper guides are correctly set.
3. Check the registration roller and its mechanism. Clean or replace, if
necessary.
4. Check that the registration sensor is working properly.
Check the connections between the MFDU (CN15) and the main motor.
Replace the main motor.
Check the MFDU output of power and drive signals to the main motor
(CN15-1, 3). If signals are not output, replace the MFDU or MFCE.
Check the fusing unit drive mechanism. Check that all the gears are
properly installed.
H515
6-22
SM
3. Jam - Fusing Exit

Possible Cause:
Malfunction in the fusing drive mechanism.
The paper feed out sensor is defective.
Malfunction in the hot roller stripper(s) mechanism.
Malfunction in the pressure mechanism in the fusing unit.
Action:
1. Check if a correct type of paper is being used.
3. Check that the registration sensor is working correctly.
4. Check all the gears in the fusing drive mechanism.
5. Check that the paper feed out sensor is working correctly.
TROUBLESHOOTING
6. Check the hot roller strippers and the pressure mechanism in the fusing
unit.
SM
6-23
H515
4. Skew
Possible Cause:
Incorrect positioning of the paper guides in the paper cassette.
The corner separators are out of position.
The paper feed rollers are worn out or damaged.
Malfunction in the registration mechanism.
Action:
1. Check if a correct type of paper is being used.
2. Check that the paper guides and the corner separators in the paper
cassette are correctly set.
3. Check that the paper feed rollers are correctly installed and clean or
replace them if necessary.
5. Check the registration mechanism and clean or replace the rollers if
necessary.
H515
6-24
SM
5. Multi-feed
Possible Cause:
Incorrect positioning of the paper guides and/or end fence in the paper
cassette.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Action:
Check if a correct type of paper is being used.
Check that the paper guides and the end fence are correctly set.
SM
6-25
H515
6.3. SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS

If the Call Service indicator is lit, any of the following conditions has occurred.
Symptom
Error Code Sub-code
Charge leak current detected while the charge
9-17
11
corona unit was activated.
Charge leak current detected while the charge
9-17
12
corona unit was not activated.
Laser diode failure
9-20
21
Fusing unit failure (fusing lamp at high
9-22
01
temperature during printing)
Fusing unit failure (fusing lamp not at printing
9-22
02
temperature after warm-up)
9-22
03
temperature in power saver mode)
9-22
04
Fusing unit failure (fusing lamp at low temperature
9-22
05
in power saver mode)
Fusing unit failure (fusing lamp at low temperature
9-22
07
during printing)
Fusing unit failure (fusing lamp at an extremely
9-22
08
high temperature)
Fusing unit failure (thermistor error)
9-22
09
Hexagonal mirror motor startup error
9-23
31
Hexagonal mirror motor error while printing
9-23
32
Main motor startup error
9-24
41
Main motor error while printing
9-24
42
SC-code
1-11
1-12
2-21
0-01
0-02
0-03
0-04
0-05
0-07
0-08
0-09
3-31
3-32
4-41
4-42
To determine which problem has occurred, either:

See the Auto Service Call report that was sent to the service station by
the machine. This report will list a sub-code, as well as the error message; the sub-code may help you locate the problem.
Or, check the sub-code stored at RAM addresses 4805AF(H) and
4805B1(H).
Check the error code history using service function 03.
Try to clear the service call condition (for failures which are not related
to the fusing unit): switch the power off, wait 10 seconds, then switch
back on.
An SC-code is displayed on the LCD panel when the error occurs.
If the problem remains, work through the appropriate troubleshooting
procedure, from the following pages.
After each troubleshooting attempt, reset the machine and try to operate it. If
the machine still does not work, continue troubleshooting.
H515
6-26
SM
Symptom: Charger Leak (Error Code 9-17)

This error will occur in either of the following conditions:
If MFDU CN21-8 stayed low for 3 seconds or more while the charge corona is on (subcode 11)
If MFDU CN21-8 stayed low for 3 seconds or more while the charge corona is off (subcode 12)
Check
Action if Yes
Action if No
1. Clean the charge corona wire and unit. Check if the charge wire is cut off, replace the
CTM if it is broken.
2. If the sub-code is 11, do the following. If the sub-code is 12, go to step 5.
3. Are all of the charge bias
Go to step 4.
Secure the connections
terminals connected ?
and/or replace the CTM or
development unit.
4. Replace the power pack.
Replace the MFDU or
Does the problem still
MFCE.
remain?
5. If the sub-code is 12, do the following.
6. Does CN21-3 stay low
Replace the MFDU or
Go to step 7.
while in standby mode ?
MFCE.
7. Does CN21-8 stay low
Replace the power pack.
while in standby mode ?
TROUBLESHOOTING
Symptom: LD Failure (Error Code 9-20)

This error occurs in the following condition:
The laser synchronization signal was not detected within 10 ms of the start of printing
(sub-code 21)
Check
Action if Yes
Action if No
Check that all the laser optic components are aligned correctly and clean them if
necessary.
Check that the optical fibre is properly set.
Check the connection between the MFDU (CN26) and the LDDR.
Check that the polygonal mirror motor and LDDR are correctly positioned.
If the problem still remains, replace the LDDR, MFDU or MFCE.
SM
6-27
H515
Symptom: Fusing Unit Failure (Error Code 9-22)

This error occurs in any of the following conditions:
During printing: If the fusing lamp stays above 190 C for more than 60 seconds (subcode 01)
Before start printing: If the fusing lamp takes more than 40 seconds to reach 165 C
(sub-code 02)
Power saver mode (fusing lamp OFF selected): If the fusing lamp takes more than 20
minutes to fall back to 100 C. (sub-code 03)
Power saver mode (fusing lamp Standby selected): If the fusing lamp takes more than
20 minutes to fall back to 100 C. (sub-code 04)
Power saver mode (fusing lamp Standby selected): If the fusing lamp stays below 80
C for more than 18 seconds (sub-code 05)
During printing: If the fusing lamp stays below 140 C for more than 1second (subcode 07)
At any time: If the fusing lamp temperature reaches 250 C (sub-code 08)
At power on: If the thermistor is defective (disconnection) (sub-code 09)
Check
Action if Yes
Action if No
Before checking anything, do the following.
Reset the RAM address 4805AF(H) to 00(H), then switch the power off, wait for a few seconds, then switch back on. If the problem remains, check the following points.
Sub-code 01, 03, 04:
1. Replace the fusing lamp, thermistor, PSU, MFDU and/or MFCE.
Sub-code 02, 05, 07:
1. Check if the fusing lamp, thermostat, and/or the thermofuse is(are) open or not.
- If yes, replace the defective component(s).
- If no, go to step 2.
2. Check if ac power is supplied to the lamp from the PSU or not.
- If yes, go to step 3.
- If no, replace the PSU.
3. Check if MFDU CN12-1 and/or MFDU CN12-2 stays low during printing.
- If yes, replace the MFDU, or MFCE.
- If no, check the connection from the PSU to the lamp.
Sub-code 08:
1. Check for any defects in the machine, and replace the defective parts.
If any damage could not be found, go to step 2.
2. Check if the thermistor is shorted or not.
- If yes, replace the thermistor.
- If no, try replacing the MFDU and/or MFCE
Sub-code 09:
1. Check the connection between the MFDU (CN25) and the thermistor.
H515
6-28
SM
Symptom: Polygonal Mirror Motor Failure (Error Code 9-23)

This will error occur in either of the following conditions:
If MFDU CN14-4 does not go low within 10 seconds of the polygonal mirror motor being switched on (sub-code 31)
If MFDU CN14-4 goes back to high for 3 seconds or more during polygonal mirror motor operation (sub-code 32)
Check
Action if Yes
Action if No
1. Check the connection between the MFDU (CN14) and the polygonal mirror motor.
2. Check that +24VM from
Replace the polygonal
Replace the MFDU.
the MFDU (CN14-1) is
mirror motor.
If the problem still remains,
replace the MFCE.
supplied to the polygonal
mirror motor.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Symptom: Main Motor Failure (Error Code 9-24)

This error occurs in either of the following conditions:
If MFDU CN15-4 does not go low within 10 seconds of the main motor being switched
on (sub-code 41)
If MFDU CN15-4 goes back to high for 3 seconds or more during main motor operation
(sub-code 42)
Check
Action if Yes
Action if No
1. Check that the main motor drive mechanism is not obstructed.
2. Check that all the main motor drive gears are correctly installed.
3. Replace the main motor.
Replace the MFDU.
Does the problem still re- If the problem still occurs,
main?
replace the MFCE.
SM
6-29
H515
6.4. ERROR CODES

If an error code occurs, retry the communication. If the same problem
occurs, try to fix the problem as suggested below. Note that error codes
4-00, 01, 02, and 10 only appear in the error code display and on the service
report.
Code
0-00
Meaning
DIS/NSF not detected
within 40 seconds of
Start being pressed
0-01
DCN received
unexpectedly
0-03
Incompatible modem at
the other end
CFR or FTT not received
after modem training
0-04
0-05
Unsuccessful after
modem training at 2400
bps
0-06
The other terminal did

not reply to DCS
H515
Suggested Cause/Action
Check the line connection.
Check the NCU - MFDU connectors.
The machine at the other end may be incompatible.
Replace the NCU or MFCE.
Check for DIS/NSF with an oscilloscope.
If the rx signal is weak, there may be a bad line.
The other party is out of paper or has a jammed
printer.
The other party pressed Stop during communication.
The other terminal is incompatible.
Try changing the tx level and/or cable equalizer
settings.
Replace the MFCE or NCU.
The other terminal may be faulty; try sending to
another machine.
If the rx signal is weak or defective, there may be a
bad line.
Cross reference
Tx level - NCU Parameter 01 (PSTN), RAM 807FB7
(PABX)
Cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN), G3 Switch
08 (PABX)
Dedicated Tx parameters - Section 4-4
Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable equalizer.
Check for line problems.
Cross reference
See error code 0-04.
Check the MFDU - NCU connectors.
Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable equalizer
settings.
The other end may be defective or incompatible; try
sending to another machine.
Cross reference
6-30
SM
Meaning
No post-message
response from the other
end after a page was
sent
0-08
The other end sent RTN

or PIN after receiving a
page, because there
were too many errors
0-14
Non-standard post
message response code
received
0-15
The other end does not

have the confidential or
transfer function
CFR or FTT not detected
after modem training in
confidential or transfer
mode
0-16
0-17
SM
Communication was
interrupted by pressing
the Stop key.
The other end may have jammed or run out of paper.
The other end user may have disconnected the call.
Check for a bad line.
The other end may be defective; try sending to
another machine.
The other end may have jammed, or run out of paper
or memory space.
settings.
The other end may have a defective
modem/NCU/MFDU; try sending to another machine.
Check for line problems and noise.
Cross reference
Tx level - NCU Parameter 01 (PSTN), RAM 4804B4
(PABX)
Cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN), G3 Switch
08 (PABX)
Dedicated Tx parameters - Section 4-4
Incompatible or defective remote terminal; try
Noisy line: resend.
settings.
Cross reference
The other terminal does not have the confidential rx
or transfer function, or the other terminals memory is
full.
settings.
The other end may have disconnected, or it may be
defective; try calling another machine.
If the rx signal level is too low, there may be a line
problem.
Cross reference
If the Stop key was not pressed and this error keeps
occurring, replace the operation panel or OPU.
6-31
H515
TROUBLESHOOTING
Code
0-07
Code
0-20
Meaning
Facsimile data not
received within
6 seconds of retraining
0-21
EOL signal (end-of-line)

from the other end not
received within 5
seconds of the previous
EOL signal
0-22
The signal from the other

end was interrupted for
more than the
acceptable modem
carrier drop time (default:
0.2 s)
0-23
Too many errors during

reception
0-24
Printer failure occurred

while the memory was
full during non-ECM
reception; negative
response returned
The other terminal did
not reply to NSS(A) in AI
short protocol mode
0-30
H515
Try calling another fax machine.
Try adjusting the reconstruction time for the first line
and/or rx cable equalizer setting.
Cross reference
Reconstruction time - G3 Switch 0A, bit 6
Rx cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN), G3
Switch 08 (PABX)
Check the connections between the MFDU, NCU, &
line.
Check for line noise or other line problems.
The remote machine may be defective or may have
disconnected.
Cross reference
Maximum interval between EOLs and ECM frames G3 Bit Switch 0A, bit 4
Defective remote terminal.
Try adjusting the acceptable modem carrier drop
time.
Cross reference
Acceptable modem carrier drop time - G3 Switch 0A,
bits 0 and 1
Replace the NCU, MFDU or MFCE.
Try asking the other end to adjust their tx level.
Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer setting and/or rx
error criteria.
Cross reference
Switch 08 (PABX)
Rx error criteria - Communication Switch 02, bits 0
and 1
There is no memory space available, or substitute
reception is disabled.
Try asking the user to add optional extra memory.

settings.
The other terminal may not be compatible.
Cross reference
Dedicated tx parameters - Section 4-4
6-32
SM
1-00
Meaning
Polarity changed during
communication
Document jam
1-01
Document length
exceeded the maximum
1-10
Paper at the scan line

when the power was
turned on.
1-17
Document jam in the

feed-out area
1-20
Paper did not reach the

fusing exit at the end of
printing
1-21
Paper present at the

fusing exit after printing
1-30
Paper ran out during

printing
Paper ran out after
printing
The cover was opened
or the cassette was
pulled out during printing
The modem cannot enter
tx mode
Only one V.21
connection flag was
received
Modem clock irregularity
Abnormal
coding/decoding (cpu not
ready)
The machine reset itself
G4 interface board reset
Disconnection during
ISDN G3 communication
Disconnection during
1-34
1-71
2-10
2-11
2-12
2-20
2-50
3-00
3-10
3-11
SM
Retry communication.
Incorrectly inserted document or unsuitable
document type.
Check the ADF drive components and sensors.
Cross reference
ADF mechanical problems - Section 6-2-1
Try changing the maximum acceptable document
length.
Divide the document into smaller pieces.
Cross reference
Max. document length - Scanner switch 00, bits 2
and 3
Remove the paper.
Check the scan line sensor.
Cross reference
Clear any debris from the sensor actuator.
Cross reference
Remove the paper.
Check the printer drive components and sensors.
Cross reference
Printer mechanical problems - Section 6-2-2
Remove the paper.
Cross reference
Add paper in the cassette.
Close the cover or re-insert the cassette.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Code
0-52
Replace the MFCE.

Replace the MFCE.
Replace the MFCE.

Replace the MFCE.
If this is frequent, replace the MFCE.

Replace the G4 interface board or MFCE.
Check the other terminal and the ISDN line.
The other terminal may dialed a wrong number.
6-33
H515
Code
3-20
3-21
3-30
4-00
Meaning
A SAC signal was
received during ISDN G4
communication
A CSA was sent during
ISDN G4
communication, because
the Stop key was
pressed
Mismatched
specifications (rx
capability)
One page took longer
than 8 minutes to
transmit
4-01
Line current was cut
4-02
The other end cut the

received page as it was
longer than the
maximum limit.
Communication failed
because of ID Code
mismatch (Closed
Network) or Tel. No./CSI
mismatch (Protection
against Wrong
Connections)
Start mark not detected
at the top of the OMR
sheet
4-10
4-80
4-81
4-82
4-83
4-84
4-85
4-89
H515
OMR sheet placed in the

ADF the wrong way
Skew detection mark not
detected
Skew was detected
before scanning the
OMR data field
Guide mark not detected
while scanning an OMR
sheet
Skew was detected
while scanning the OMR
data field
End mark not detected
at the bottom of the
OMR sheet
The operator at the other terminal may have
interrupted the communication.
The local operator has interrupted the
communication.
Check the receive capabilities requested from the

other terminal.
Try the communication at a lower resolution, or
without halftone.
Change the MFCE.
Check the line connector.
Check the connection between MFDU and NCU.
Replace the MFDU or the NCU.
Split the page into smaller pieces, or ask the other
end to change their maximum receive length setting,
then resend.
Get the ID Codes the same and/or the CSIs
programmed correctly, then resend.
The machine at the other end may be defective.
Check the ADF/scanner mechanisms.

Check if a photocopy of the sheet was used.
Check if a cut-off portion of the sheet was used.
Check if the document guide was not adjusted
correctly.
Check if the sheet was dirty.
Check if any adhesive tapes on the sheet.
Place the sheet in the correct way.
Same as 4-80.
Check the ADF mechanisms.
Same as 4-80.
Same as 4-83
Same as 4-80.
6-34
SM
5-00
5-10
5-20
5-21
5-22
5-23
5-24
5-25
5-30
6-01
6-02
6-03
6-04
Meaning
Reduction rate in the
main scan direction not
acceptable while
scanning an OMR sheet
Data reconstruction not
possible
DCR timer expired
Storage impossible
because of a lack of
memory
Memory overflow
Mode table overflow
after the second page of
a scanned document
Print data error when
printing a substitute rx or
confidential rx message
Memory overflow after
the second page of a
scanned document
SAF file access error
Mode table for the first
page to be printed was
not effective
G3 ECM - no V.21 signal
was received
G3 ECM - EOR was
received
G3 ECM - non-standard
V.21 code received
G3 ECM - RTC not
detected
6-05
G3 ECM - facsimile data

frame not received within
18 seconds of CFR, but
there was no line fail
6-06
G3 ECM coding/decoding error

G3 ECM - PIP/PIN
received in reply to
PPS.NULL
G3 ECM - ERR received
6-08
6-09
SM
Check if a reduced photocopy was used.
Adjust the scanner correctly (refer to section 5.11).
Replace the MFCE.

Replace the MFCE.
Temporary memory shortage.
Test the SAF memory.
Replace the MFCE or optional IC card.
Wait for the messages which are currently in the
memory to be sent or delete some files from memory.
Ask the other end to resend the message.
Replace the MFCE or IC memory card.
Try using a lower resolution setting.
memory to be sent or delete some files from memory.
Replace the MFCE, the IC memory card, or the hard
disk.
Replace the MFCE, the IC memory card, the function
upgrade card, or the hard disk.
Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer.
Replace the MFCE, MFDU or NCU.
The other terminal may be defective.

Check connections from the NCU to the MFDU.
Check for a bad line or defective remote terminal.
Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer
Cross reference
Switch 08 (PABX)
Defective MFDU.
The other end pressed Stop during communication.
Check for a noisy line.
Adjust the tx levels of the communicating machines.
See code 6-05.
6-35
H515
TROUBLESHOOTING
Code
4-90
Rev. 6/97
Code
6-10
6-11
6-21
6-39
9-07
Meaning
G3 ECM - error frames
still received at the other
end after all
communication attempts
at 2400 bps
G3 ECM - printing
impossible because of a
missing first line in the
MMR coding
V.21 flag detected during
high speed modem
communication
V.21 signal not stopped
within 6 seconds
Paper non-feed or jam
at the cassette entrance
9-08
Paper jam inside the

development area
9-09
Paper jam in the fusing

exit area
9-10
9-12
Toner end detected

Cover open detected
during printing
Charge corona unit
failure
9-17
9-20
Laser diode failure
9-22
Fusing lamp failure
9-23
Hexagonal mirror motor

failure
9-24
Main motor failure
9-30
9-31
9-32
9-40
Hard Disk Drive Error

Disk Controller Error
Disk Memory Error
CRC error while
receiveing a frame
Command 3rd try failed
DCN received
unexpectedly
Unexpected frame
received
Response time over
Frame transmission error
9-41
9-42
9-43
9-44
9-45
H515
Check for line noise.
Adjust the tx level (use NCU parameter 01 or the
dedicated tx parameter for that address).
Check for problems in the printer mechanism.
The other terminal may be defective or incompatible.
Replace the MFCE.

If the problem persists, replace the MFDU.
Cross reference
Paper non-feed - Section 6-2-2
Jam at the cassette entrance - Section 6-2-2
Cross reference
Paper jam - Section 6-2-2
Cross reference
Paper jam - Section 6-2-2
Replace the CTM.
Close the cover, or check the cover sensors.
Cross reference
Charge corona failure - Section 6-3
Cross reference
LD failure - Section 6-3
Cross reference
Fusing lamp failure - Section 6-3
Cross reference
Mirror motor failure - Section 6-3
Cross reference
Main motor failure - Section 6-3
Check and adjust the host PCs RS232C port

settings.
Check if a proper cable is used and connected
securely.
Check if the application is working correctly.
If the problem persists, replace the MFCE.
Note: The optional RS232C interface may not be
available in some countries.
6-36
SM
Code
9-50
9-51
9-52
9-53
9-80
Meaning
inside the upper paper
feed unit
Check if the recommended types of paper is used.
Check if the paper guides are aligned to the paper
correctly.
Check the paper feed mechanism in the unit.
Jam at the paper exit of
Check if any blockage in the paper feed path.
the upper paper feed unit. Check the paper feed mechanisms inside the unit.
Check if the sensor is defective.
Check if the recommended types of paper is used.
inside the lower paper
feed unit
correctly.
Jam at the paper exit
from the lower paper
Check the paper feed mechanisms inside the unit.
feed unit.
Bypass feed - paper non- Check the registration roller and sensor.
Cross reference
feed or jam at the
entrance
9-81
Bypass feed - paper

length exceeds the
maximum limit (600 mm)
Check the paper feed mechanism and sensors.

Cross reference
9-82
Optional 100 sheet

cassette - paper nonfeed or jam at the
cassette entrance
Optional 100 sheet
cassette - paper length
exceeds the maximum
limit (600 mm)

Cross reference
Cross reference
TROUBLESHOOTING
9-83
SM
6-37
H515
6.5. ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS

6.5.1. Defective Sensor Table *
Sensor
Document sensor
closed
open
Scan line sensor
closed
open
B4-width sensor *
A3-width sensor *
Interlock switches
Registration sensor
Fusing exit sensor
Bypass feed sensor
Toner end sensor
Paper size sensor - Standard cassette
open
open
closed
open
closed
open
open
open
open
closed
Paper end sensor - Standard casclosed

sette
open
Paper size sensor - 100 sheet
cassette
Paper end sensor - 100 sheet
cassette
closed
open
closed
open
Paper size sensor - Paper feed
unit
Paper end sensor - Paper feed
unit
open
closed
closed
open
Relay sensor - Paper feed unit
closed
open
Jam release cover switch - Paper

feed unit type S
H515
closed
open
Symptoms if Defective
"CLEAR ORIGINAL" or "DIAL FAX NO" is
displayed at power-up.
"SET DOCUMENT" is still displayed after a
document is placed in the feeder.
"CLEAR ORIGINAL" is displayed at powerup.
"CLEAR ORIGINAL" is displayed soon after
the start of copying.
The machine cannot scan B4 width.
The machine cannot scan A3 width.
There is no alarm on opening the cover, and
"CLOSE COVER" is not displayed.
"CLOSE COVER" is displayed at power-up.
"CLEAR COPY" is displayed at power-up.
"CLEAR COPY" is displayed soon after the
start of copying.
Bypass feed cannot be used.
Toner end is not indicated.
"ADD PAPER" is displayed at power-up.
Page separation may be done even if the
original is the same size as the copy paper.
The Add Paper indicator lights even if paper
is remaining.
The Add Paper indicator does not light when
the paper has run out.
The Add Paper indicator on the lower
cassettes operation panel lights even if
paper is remaining.
The Add Paper indicator on the lower
cassettes operation panel does not light
when the paper has run out.
The Add Paper indicator lights even if paper
is remaining.
The Add Paper indicator does not light when
the paper has run out.
"CLEAR COPY" is displayed at power-up.
"CLEAR COPY" is displayed soon after the
start of copying.
Cover open is not detected.
CLOSE COVER is displayed.
6-38
SM
6.5.2. Fuses
The only service-replaceable fuses are the following.
Fuse
TROUBLESHOOTING
PSU - F1/ F2
MFDU - F1
Symptoms if Defective
No power to the machine
No power to the drive components and
lamps.
SM
6-39
H515
ISDN OPTION TYPE 140
SERVICE MANUAL

Install the hardware as described in secion 3.3.2. Then program the following
items.
1.1.1. User Level Programming
The following items can be programmed with user function 61. Ensure that
the items are programmed correctly.
Item
ISDN
G4
G3
PSTN
G3
Own analog number

Own ISDN-G4 number
Polling ID
Confidential ID
Memory lock ID

Own ISDN-G3 number
Remote ID

RTI
TTI
G4_TID (Terminal ID)
4
4
CSI
4
IG3_CSI (ISDN G3 CSI)
SM
1-1
Remarks
Used for transfer operations in
PSTN G3 communication
ISDN G4 communication.
ISDN G3 communicaiton.
Used for secured polling, transfer
operations, and closed network.
Used for confidential reception.
Optional SAF memory required.
Used for memory lock. Optional
SAF memory required.
Used for fax on demand operations
or transfer request using DTMF
tones. Optional SAF memory or
Fax On Demand kit required.
Used to identify the terminal in G3
NSF/NSS communications.
Printed on each transmitted page in
G3 communicaitons.
communications.
DIS/DCS communications over
PSTN.
communications over an ISDN.
H515 ISDN Option Type 140
ISDN Type 140
1. INSTALLATION
1.1.2. Service Level Programming

Item
System Switches
Function No.
01 - 0
Communication Switches
01 - 4
G4 internal switches
17 - 01
G4 parameter switches
17 - 02
ISDN international prefix

G4 subscriber number - 1
Program the international access code.

When not using MSN* service:
Program the ISDN subscriber number
here. If an another terminal is on the same
bus from the DSU, identify the terminals
using a sub-address.
When using MSN* service:
Program the dedicated ISDN number for
the terminal as the 1st ISDN subscriber
number. If the customer wishes the
machine to answer the calls to a different
number, program it as the 2nd subscriber
number.
17 - 03
17 - 04
G4 subscriber number - 2
17 - 05
ISDN G3 subscriber
number - 1
ISDN G3 subscriber
number - 2
Remarks
System Switch 0A
- Network used for G3 transmission
- Network used for G4-to-G3 fallback
- G4-to-G3 fallback On/Off
Change the country code, and reset the
machine first. Then change any of the
locally required settings and/or the
following.
Internal Switches 17, 18, 1A, 1B and 1C
- G4 to G3 automatic fallback parameters
Parameter Switch 01, bits 4 to 6
- Codec attenuation level
When not using MSN* service:

Program the ISDN subscriber number
here. If an another terminal is on the same
bus from the DSU, identify the terminals
using a sub-address.
When using MSN* service:
Program the dedicated ISDN number for
the terminal as the 1st ISDN subscriber
number. If the customer wishes the
machine to answer the calls to a different
number, program it as the 2nd subscriber
number.
17 - 06
17 - 07
G4 subaddress
Program a subaddress to identify the

terminal, if two or more terminals answer
the call to the subscriber number for G4 fax.
Program a subaddress to identify the
terminal, if two or more terminals answer
the call to the subscriber number for G3 fax.
17 - 08
ISDN G3 subaddress
17 - 09
* MSN = Multiple Subscriber Number; This is also referred to as Direct Dialing In in some
countries
1-2
SM
1.2. SWITCH SETTINGS

The following tables show the default settings of the Internal Switches and
the Parameter Switches for each country setting.
1.2.1. Internal Switches
Switch No.
USA
00
Country code
11(H)
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
0A
0B
0C
0D
0E
0F
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
1A
1B
1C
1D
1E
1F
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
10(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
01(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
01(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
SM
Europe
Asia
European
Asian
country
country
code setting code setting
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
10(H)
10(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
1-3
Germany
(1TR6)
France
(CNET)
01(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
20(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
02(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
10(H)
01(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
01(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
??(H)
00(H)
??(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
02(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
ISDN Type 140
After changing any setting, turn the machine off, wait for 5 or more seconds,
then turn it back on, so that the new settings take effect.
1.2.2. Parameter Switches

Switch No.
USA
Europe
Asia
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
0A
0B
0C
0D
0E
0F
00(H)
30(H)
01(H)
00(H)
07(H)
02(H)
00(H)
0B(H)
07(H)
00(H)
01(H)
0B(H)
01(H)
00(H)
B2(H)
00(H)
00(H)
21(H)
00(H)
00(H)
07(H)
02(H)
00(H)
0B(H)
07(H)
00(H)
01(H)
0B(H)
01(H)
00(H)
B2(H)
00(H)
00(H)
21(H)
00(H)
00(H)
07(H)
02(H)
00(H)
0B(H)
07(H)
00(H)
01(H)
0B(H)
01(H)
00(H)
B2(H)
00(H)
1-4
Germany
(1TR6)
00(H)
30(H)
00(H)
00(H)
07(H)
06(H)
01(H)
0B(H)
07(H)
00(H)
01(H)
07(H)
01(H)
00(H)
B2(H)
00(H)
France
(CNET)
00(H)
30(H)
00(H)
00(H)
07(H)
02(H)
00(H)
0B(H)
07(H)
00(H)
01(H)
0B(H)
01(H)
00(H)
B2(H)
00(H)
SM

To enter G4 service mode, press the following sequence of keys:
then immediately .
SERVICE SET
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE
G4
01G4_ISW
03ISDN_IP
Then press .
NO: _ OR NO
02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR
NO: _ OR NO
02G4_PSW
04G4_SN1
After completing a G4 service mode operation, you must reset the machine
by switching it off, waiting for more a few minutes, then switching back on.
There is no need to do this for any of the G3 service modes.
2.1.1. G4 Internal Switch Programming (Function 01)
1. After entering G4 service mode,

press .
G4_ISW
DEFAULT : 00000000
SWITCH00: 00000000
Bit 7 is displayed at the left, and bit 0 at the right. The default settings are
shown on the top line, and the current settings on the bottom.
2. Increment bit switch:
Example:
Display bit switch 3: x 3
G4_ISW
DEFAULT : 00000000
SWITCH03: 00000000

Example: To change the value of
bit 7, press .
SM
G4_ISW
DEFAULT : 00000000
SWITCH03: 10000000
2-1
ISDN Type 140
4. Either:
Finish -
2.1.2. G4 Parameter Switch Programming (Function 02)

press .
G4_PSW
DEFAULT : 00000000
SWITCH00: 00000000
Bit 7 is displayed at the left, and bit 0 at the right. The default settings
are shown on the top line, and the current settings on the bottom.
2. Increment bit switch:
Example:
Display bit switch 3: x 3
G4_PSW
DEFAULT : 00000000
SWITCH03: 00000000

Example: To change the value of
bit 7, press .
G4_PSW
DEFAULT : 00000000
SWITCH03: 10000000
4. Either:
Finish -
2-2
SM

press .
ISDN_IP
_
2. Input the ISDN International Prefix (ISDN-IP).

Example:
2.1.4. Storing the First G4 Subscriber Number (Function 04)
Program the Second Subscriber Number when you have two units connected to the same line. Program the number of the other unit as the Second
Subscriber Number. When a call comes in, if the other unit is busy, your machine will answer the call. Also, note the following:
When calling, the first subscriber number will be added to the Setup signal as the Calling ID.
When receiving, the Called ID will be compared with the first and second subscriber numbers.
press .
G4_SN1
_
2. Input the number in the following format.

Area Code Pause (-) Local Subscriber Number
Then press .
2.1.5. Storing the Second G4 Subscriber Number (Function 05)

press .
G4_SN2
_
2. Input the number as explained in the previous section.

Then press .
SM
2-3
ISDN Type 140
2.1.3. Storing the ISDN International Access Code (Function 03)
2.1.6. Storing the First ISDN G3 Subscriber Number (Function 06)

The function of this is similar to the G4 Subscriber Number, except that it operates for G3 communications on the IDSN.
IG3_SN1
press .
_
2. Input the number in the following format.

Area Code Pause (-) Local Subscriber Number
Then press .
2.1.7. Storing the Second ISDN G3 Subscriber Number (Function 07)

press .
IG3_SN2
_
2. Input the number as explained in the previous section.

Then press .
2.1.8. Storing the G4 Subaddress (Function 08)

press .
G4_SA
_
2. Input the subaddress. Then press .

2.1.9. Storing the ISDN G3 Subaddress (Function 09)

press .
IG3_SA
_
2. Input the subaddress. Then press .
2-4
SM
Use this function to print the D-ch. Layer 1 dump list. Refer to the Appendix A
for more details.
press .
G4 MEMORY DUMP
ADD. 0000 00H - ADD.
FFH
2. Input the range of addresses that you wish to print.

Example: Addresses 03B000 to 03B1FF:
Input % % .
2.1.11. Printing a G4 Protocol Dump List (Function 11)
1. After entering G4 service mode, set parameter switch E bit 1 to 1 (use

G4 function 02). Then make a test communication.
2. From the G4 service mode menu,
press .
G4_DMP2
0 D+Bch1
PRESS
START
3. Either:
Print a protocol dump list for the B and D channels:
Print a protocol dump list for the D channel:
Print a protocol dump list for the B channel link layer:

Print a protocol dump list for the D channel link layer:
4. Reset parameter switch E bit 1 to "0" after you have finished.
SM
2-5
ISDN Type 140
2.1.10. Printing a G4 Memory Dump (Function 10)
2.1.12. Printing the G4 System Parameter List (Function 12)

press .

PRESS START
2.
2.1.13. Modem/DTMF Tone Tests (Function 13)
This is only for use during PTT approval tests.
2-6
SM
WARNING
cause the machine to malfunction or to operate in a manner that is not
accepted by local regulations. Such bits are for use only in other areas,
such as Japan.
Note: After changing any of the switches below, turn off the machine, wait for
5 seconds or more, and turn it back on, so that the new settings take effect.
2.2.1. G4 Internal Switches
Bit Switch 00
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
Country code
0
to
7
Bit 4
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
2
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Country
France
Germany (1TR6 mode)
UK
Italy
Austria
Belgium
Denmark
Finland
Ireland
Norway
Sweden
Switzerland
Portugal
Netherlands
Spain
Israel
USA
Asia
Japan
Hong Kong
South Africa
Australia
New Zealand
Singapore
Malaysia
Note: In Germany, use the UK setting for the EuroISDN lines.
Bit switches 01 and 02 are not used.
SM
2-7
ISDN Type 140
2.2. BIT SWITCHES
Bit Switch 03
FUNCTION
1
to
7
COMMENTS

data in one protocol dump list
dumping

This bit is only effective for the dump list #2 (D +
Bch1).
Not used
Do not change the factory settings.
Bit Switch 04
FUNCTION
0
to
4
5
6
COMMENTS
Not used
RCBCTR
0: Not valid 1: Valid
This bit is used in Germany; set it to 1 for German PTT

approval tests.
1: RCBCTR counts consecutive R:RNR signals. If the
counter reaches the value of N2, the link is disconnected.
Not used
7
Bit Switch 05
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
Not used
Do not change the factory setting.
Logical channel
number (LCN)
0: Not controlled
1: Fixed at 01
This bit is normally 0. However, some networks may require

a fixed LCN. In such cases, this bit should be 1, and you
may have to set a different value for the LCN using G4
Parameter Switch A.
Protocol ID check
0: Yes 1: No
The Protocol ID is in the CR packet.
Not used
3
to
7
2-8
SM
Bit Switch 06
COMMENTS
Inclusion of the DTE

address in the S:CR
packet
0: No 1: Yes
When the CR packet format matches ISO8208 protocol,

some networks may require this bit to be set at 1.
This bit is only effective if bit 0 of G4 Parameter switch 6 is
at 0.
Calling and called

DTE addresses
0: Not used 1: Used
This is only for packet networks. The CR packet should

contain the rx sides DTE address, but does not have to
include the tx sides; it can include it as an option.
Not used
2
to
7
Bit switch 07 and 08 are not used.

Bit Switch 09
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
Not used
New session within

the same call
0: Not accepted
1: Accepted
0: If a new R:CSS is received, the machine sends back

S:RSSN.
1: If a new R:CSS is received, the machine sends back
S:RSSP. Set this bit to 1 for German PTT approval tests.
Not used
2
to
7
Bit switches 0A to 0F are not used.

Bit Switch 10 (Dch. Layer 1)
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
Connection detector
In most countries (including Europe), this should be

disabled.
Layer 1 T3 timer
Bit 2 1 Time
0 0
5 seconds
0 1 29 seconds
1 0 10 seconds
1 1 Not used
This should be kept at 5 seconds (both bits at 0) for

normal operation. However, you may have to change this
during PTT approval tests.
Layer 1 T4 timer
0: Not used 1: Used
Set this bit to 1 for French PTT approval tests.
Not used
INFO1 signal resend

0: Resend
1: No resend
0: Some DSUs may not reply to the INFO1 signal with

INFO2, if there is noise in the INFO1 signal accidentally.
Try changing this bit to 0, to resend INFO1 before the
machine displays CHECK INTERFACE.
Loop back 4 mode

This is normally kept at 0. However, set it to 1 for British

PTT approval tests.
1
2
5
6
SM
2-9
ISDN Type 140
FUNCTION
Bit Switch 11 (Dch. Layer 2)

FUNCTION
0
COMMENTS
Type of TEI used

0: Dynamic TEI
1: Static TEI
This is normally fixed at 0. However, some networks such

as the Northern Telecom ISDN may require this bit to be set
at 1 (see below). In this case, you may have to change the
values of bits 2 to 7.
Static TEI value
Not used
This is used in the USA with the DMS100 (Northern

Telecom ISDN) exchanger.
Store the lowest bit of the TEI at bit 7 and the highest bit of
the TEI at bit 2.
Example: If the static TEI is 011000, set bits 3 and 4 to 1
and bits 2, 5, 6, and 7 to 0.
2
to
7
Bit switch 12 is not used. Do not change any of the factory settings.
Bit Switch 13: D channel layer 3 (Attachment IE in S: SETUP)
FUNCTION
0
COMMENTS
Not used
Attachment of calling
ID
0: No 1: Yes
Normally, this bit should be at 0, because most networks

add the calling ID to the SETUP signal to the receiver.
However, some networks may require the machine to add
this ID. Only in this case should this bit be at 1.
Attachment of the
Lower Layer
Capabilities
0: No 1: Yes
This bit determines whether Lower Layer Capabilities are

informed in the [SETUP] signal or not.
Keep this bit at 0 in most cases.
Attachment of the
Higher Layer
Capabilities
0: Yes 1: No
This bit determines whether Higher Layer Capabilities are

informed in the [SETUP] signal or not.
Keep this bit at 0 in most cases.
Not used
1
2
5
to
7
2-10
SM
Bit Switch 14: D channel layer 3 (Selection IE in S: SETUP)

COMMENTS
ISDN G3 information
transfer capability
0: 3.1 kHz audio
1: Speech
In tx mode, this determines the information transfer

capability informed in the [SETUP] message.
In rx mode, this determines the information transfer
capability that the machine can use to receive a call.
Refer to Appendix C for more details.
Set this bit to 1 if the ISDN does not support 3.1 kHz
audio. This bit is only used in the USA and the UK.
Not used
Channel selection in
[SETUP] in tx mode
Bit 4 3 Setting
0 0 Any channel
0 1 B1 channel
1 0 B2 channel
1 1 Not used
Any channel: When this is informed to the exchanger,

the exchanger will select either B1 or B2.
Called ID mapping
0: Called party number
1: Keypad facility
0: Called ID is mapped to the called party number.

1: Called ID is mapped to the keypad facility.
On the 5ESS network (USA), set it to 1.
Numbering plan for the

called party number
0: Unknown
1: E.164
E.164: This may be used in Sweden if an AXE10

exchanger is fitted with old software, and in Australia.
Unknown: This is the normal setting.
Subaddress coding type

0: IA5 (NSAP)
1: BCD (ISO8348)
This is normally kept at 0. However, some networks

require this bit to be at 1.
3
4
Bit Switch 15: D channel layer 3 (Judgement R: MSG)

FUNCTION
1
to
4
COMMENTS
Action when receiving

[SETUP] signal containing
no called subaddress, if the
subaddress was
programmed in the dialed
number
0: A reply is sent
1: No reply is sent
This bit depends on user requirements. If it is at 1,

communication will be halted if the other terminal has
not input the subaddress.
Refer to Appendix C for more details.
Not used
Do not change the factory settings
Global call reference

0: Ignored
1: Global call number is
used
Global call reference means call reference value = 0.

This bit determines how to deal with such an incoming
call if received from the network.
Keep this bit at 1 in France and Germany (1TR6), also
in countries where the global call reference is used.
Not used
SM
2-11
ISDN Type 140
FUNCTION
Bit Switch 16: D channel layer 3 (Approval)

FUNCTION
Answer delay time

Bit 1 0 Setting
0 0 No delay
0 1 1.0 seconds delayed
(1TR6)
1 0 0.5 seconds delayed
(CNET)
1 1 Not used
In Germany (1TR6) and France (CNET), a time

delay to answer a call is required.
In other countries, use this switch as follows:
If the machine is connected to the same bus from
the DSU as a model K200 is connected, the
machine receives most of the calls because the
response time to a call is faster than the K200.
If the customer wants the K200 to receive most of
the calls, adjust the response time using these bits.
If the customer does not want one machine to
receive most of the calls, use subaddresses to
identify each terminal.
Action when receiving

[SETUP] signal containing
user-specific callrd party
subaddress
0: Ignores the call
1: Receives the call
Normally, the 3rd octet of called party subaddress

information in the [SETUP] signal is set to NSAP.
However, some networks may add user-specific
subaddress to the [SETUP] signal (UK), and the
result of this is that the machine wont answer the
call if a subaddress is specified.
So, change this bit to 1 to let the machine receive
the call if the machine is connected to such a
network.
Not used
Indicated bearer capabilities

0: 56 kbps 1: 64 kbps
COMMENTS
1: 64 kbps calling is indicated in the Bearer

Capabilities, but communication is at 56 k. Use this
bit if the machine is connected to a network which
does not accept a 56 kbps data transfer rate as a
bearer capability.
Not used
6
7
Bit Switch 17: CPS Code Used for G4 to G3 Fallback - 1

FUNCTION
0
to
6
COMMENTS
Condition for fallback from G4 to G3

Bits 0 to 6 of bit switch 17 contain a CPS code, and bits 0 to 6 of bit switch 18
contain another CPS code. If a CPS code is received which is the same as either of
these, communication will fall back from ISDN G4 mode to ISDN G3 mode.
The CPS codes must be the same as those specified in table 4-13 of CCITT
recommendation Q.931.
Examples: Bit
6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 0 0 0 0 0 1 CPS code 65
1 0 1 1 0 0 0 CPS code 88
For the codes in bits 0 to 6 of bit switches 17 and 18 to be recognized, bit 7 of bit
switch 17 must be 1. Also, bit 0 of the Communication Switch 07 must be at 0, or
Fallback from G4 to G3 will be disabled.
2-12
SM
COMMENTS
This bit determines whether fallback from G4 to G3 occurs on receipt of one of the
CPS codes programmed in bit switch 17 or 18, or on receipt of a certain standard
code.
0: Fallback occurs on receipt of any of the following CPS codes:
UK (EuroISDN mode) - #3, #18, #57, #58, # 63, # 65, #79, #88, and #127
Germany (1TR6 mode) - #3, #31, #53, #58, #62, #89, and #90
France - #3, #65, #88, and #113
Others - #3, #65, and #88
1: Fallback from G4 to G3 occurs on receipt any of above CPS codes or one of the
CPS codes programmed in bit switch 17, 18, 1A, 1B, or 1C

FUNCTION
0
to
6
SM
COMMENTS

See the explanation for bits 0 to 6 of bit switch 17
This bit helps to choose the CPS code set for G4 to G3 fallback.
0: Fallback occurs on receipt of the CPS code set which is specified by the country
code setting.
1: Fallback occurs on receipt of the UK CPS code set (#3, #18, #57, #58, # 63, # 65,
#79, #88, and #127) even if another counry code is programmed.
2-13
ISDN Type 140
FUNCTION
Bit Switch 19
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
Permanence of the link

0: Set/released each
LAPD call
1: Permanent
Keep this at 1 in the USA. In other areas, this bit is normally

0, depending on network requirements.
Channel used in ISDN

L2 (64k) mode
0: B1 1: B2
When making an IDSN L2 back-to-back test, you can select

either the B1 or B2 channel with this bit switch.
Not used
2
to
7
Bit Switch 1A: CPS Code Used for G4 to G3 Fallback - 3

FUNCTION
COMMENTS
0
to
6

Not used.
Bit Switch 1B: CPS Code Used for G4 to G3 Fallback - 4

FUNCTION
COMMENTS
0
to
6

Not used.
Bit Switch 1C: CPS Code Used for G4 to G3 Fallback - 5

FUNCTION
COMMENTS
0
to
6

Not used.
Bit switches 1D to 1F are not used. Do not change any of the factory settings.
2-14
SM
Parameter Switch 00
FUNCTION
0
1
2
3
to
7
COMMENTS
Network type
Bit 2 1 0 Type
x 0 0 Circuit
switched ISDN
Other settings:
Not used
Do not change the default setting.
Not used
Do not change the default settings.
Parameter Switch 01
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
Voice coding
0: law
1: A law
0: This setting is used in Japan, Taiwan, and the USA.

1: This setting is used in Europe and Asia.
Action when [SETUP]

signal without HLC is
received
0: Respond to the call
1: Not respond to the
call
If there are several TEs on the same bus and the machine
responds to calls for another TE, the call may be without
HLC information.
Identify the type of calling terminal and change this bit to 1
if the caller is not a fax machine.
Not used
4
5
6
SM
Signal attenuation level for G3 fax signals received from ISDN line.
If an analog signal comes over an digital line, the signal level after decoding by the
TE is theorically the same as the level at the entrance to the digital line. However,
this sometimes causes the received signal level to be too high at the received end. In
this case, adjust the decoded signals attenuation level using these switches.
The values in the Codec column below show the attenuation level at the G4
interface board. The values in the Modem column show the actual attenuation level
at the modem, because the signal is attenuated again on the MFCE by -6dB.
Bit 6
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
5
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
Not used
4
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Codec
-4.5dB
-2.5dB
-0.5dB
+1.5dB
+3.5dB
+5.5dB
+7.5dB
+9.5dB
Modem (Actual attenuation level)

-10.5dB
-8.5dB
-6.5dB
-4.5dB (default setting)
-2.5dB
-0.5dB
+1.5dB
+3.5dB
2-15
ISDN Type 140
2.2.2. G4 Parameter Switches
Parameter Switch 02
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
Data rate (kbps)

Bit 1 0 Setting
0 0 64 kbps
0 1 56 kbps
Other settings: Not used
Not used

Transmission mode
Bit 5 4 Mode
0 0 CS
Not used
0
1
2
3
4
7
Parameter Switch 03
FUNCTION
0
1
to
7
COMMENTS
Link modulus
0: 8 1: 128
This setting determines whether protocol frame numbering

is done using 3 bits (0 to 7 then start again at 0) or 7 bits (0
to 127 then start again at 0). Set this bit switch to match the
networks specifications.
Not used
Parameter Switch 04 is not used. Do not change any of the default settings.
Parameter Switch 05
FUNCTION
0
1
2
3
4
to
7
COMMENTS
Link timer (D-channel

layer 2 T1 timer)
Bit 3 2 1 0 Value
0 0 0 0 0s
0 0 0 1 1s
0 0 1 0 2s
and so on until
1 0 1 0 10 s
The link timer is the maximum allowable time between

sending a protocol frame and receiving a response frame
from the remote terminal.
Not used
Parameter Switch 06
FUNCTION
0
Layer 3 protocol
0: ISO8208
1: T.70NULL
COMMENTS
Set this bit to match the type of layer 3 signalling used by
the ISDN.
The dedicated parameters have the same setting for
specific destinations.
2-16
SM
Parameter Switch 06
1
COMMENTS
Not used
Packet modulus
0: 8 1: 128
Do not change the default setting, unless the machine is

experiencing compatibility problems.
Not used
2
3
6
7
Parameter Switch 07
FUNCTION
0
1
2
3
4
to
7
COMMENTS
Packet size
Bit 3 2 1 0 Value
0 1 1 1 128
1 0 0 0 256
1 0 0 1 512
1 0 1 0 1024
1 0 1 1 2048
This value is sent in the CR packet. This value must match

the value stored in the other terminal, or communication will
stop (CI will be returned). If the other end returns CI, check
the value of the packet window size with the other party.
Note that this value must be the same as the value
programmed for the transport block size (G4 Parameter
Switch B, bits 0 to 3).
Normally, do not change the default setting.
Not used
Parameter Switch 08
FUNCTION
0
1
Packet window size

Bit 3 2 1 0 Value
0 0 0 1 1
0 0 1 0 2
and so on until
1 1 1 1 15
SM
This is the maximum number of unacknowledged packets

that the machine can send out before having to pause and
wait for an acknowledgement from the other end.
This should be kept at 7 normally.
If the packet modulus (G4 Parameter Switch 6, bit 4) is 8,
the packet window size cannot be more than 7. However, if
the packet modulus is 128, the window size can be up to
15. Also, if the layer 3 protocol setting (G4 Parameter
Switch 6, bit 0) is at IS8208, the packet window size cannot
be more than 7.
4
to
7
COMMENTS
Not used
2-17
ISDN Type 140
FUNCTION
Parameter Switch 09
FUNCTION
0
1
2
3
4
to
7
COMMENTS
LCGN
Bit 3 2 1 0 Value
0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 1 1
0 0 1 0 2
and so on until
1 1 1 1 15
Keep the value of the LCGN at 0.
Not used
Parameter Switch 0A
FUNCTION
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
LCN
Bit 7
0
0
0
COMMENTS
Keep at the value of the LCN at 1.
6
0
0
0
5 4 3 2 1 0 Value
0 0 0 0 0 1
1
0 0 0 0 1 0
2
0 0 0 0 1 1
3
and so on until
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 255
Parameter Switch 0B
FUNCTION
0
1
2
3
4
to
7
COMMENTS
Transport block size

Bit 3 2 1 0 Value
0 1 1 1 128
1 0 0 0 256
1 0 0 1 512
1 0 1 0 1024
1 0 1 1 2048
This value must match the value set in the other terminal.
Note that this value must be the same as the value
programmed for the packet size (G4 Parameter Switch 7,
bits 0 to 3). Also, the transport block size is limited by the
amount of memory in the remote terminal.
Not used
Parameter Switch 0C is not used. Do not change any of the default settings.
2-18
SM
Parameter Switch 0D
0
1
2
to
7
COMMENTS
Back-to-back test mode

Bit 1 0 Setting
0 0 Off
0 1 Not used
1 0 ISDN L2 test mode (TE mode)
1 1 ISDN L2 test mode (NT mode)
When doing a back-to-back test or doing

a demonstration without a line simulator,
use these bits to set up one of the
machines in TE mode, and the other in
NT mode. After the test, return both bits
to 0.
See "Back-to-back Testing" in the
Troubleshooting section for full details.
Not used
Parameter Switch E
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
Troubleshooing mode real time status codes

display
0: Off 1: On
If this is switched on, the status codes will be displayed in

the lower two lines of the LCD. These codes are explained
in the Troubleshooting section (G4CCU Status Codes).
Change this bit back to 0 after testing.
Saving frames to the

protocol dump list
0: Off 1: On
Keep this bit at 1 normally.
Not used
2
to
7
SM
2-19
ISDN Type 140
FUNCTION
2.3. DEDICATED TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS *

The following G4 communication parameter bytes have been added for each
Quick Dial and Speed Dial. For how to program Dedicated Transmission Parameters, refer to the Service Manual for the base machine.
Switches 01 to 04 are for use with Group 3 communication and are explained in the Service Manual for the base machine. Switch 08 is not used.
Switch 05
FUNCTION
0
1
2
3
Data rate Bit 3 2 1 0 Setting

0 0 0 0 64 kbps
0 0 0 1 56 kbps
1 1 1 1 As in Parameter Switch 2, bits 0 and 1
Not used
5
6
7
Switch 06
FUNCTION
0
1
2
3
Link modulus
Bit 3 2 1 0 Setting
0 0 0 0 Modulo 8
0 0 0 1 Modulo 128
1 1 1 1 As in Parameter Switch 3, bit 0
Not used
5
6
7
Switch 07
FUNCTION
0
1
2
3
Layer 3 protocol Bit 3 2 1 0 Setting

0 0 0 0 IS.8208
0 0 0 1 T.70 NULL
4
5
6
7
Packet modulus Bit 7 6 5 4 Setting

0 0 0 0 Modulo 8
0 0 0 1 Modulo 128
2-20
SM
3.1. ERROR CODES

The tables on the following pages show the error codes that will be printed
on the Service Monitor Report. See the Service Manual for the base machine for instructions on how to print this report.
The meaning of the numbers in the Action column is as follows.
1. Check Layer 1 signalling with a protocol analyzer to determine the cause
of the problem. This may require assistance from a G4 specialist.
2. Repeat the communication. If the problem does not repeat itself, the
problem was a temporary one caused by the user connecting the machine to another interface. However, if the problem remains, there is a
network problem.
3. There is a network problem.
4. There is a network problem. Do the following:
Check the error bit rate of the network. If it is high, contact the network
and ask them to improve the line.
Check the network speed (is it 56 or 64 kbps), and make sure that the
bit switch setting is correct. You may also use the dedicated transmission parameters if this problem only occurs when dialing certain numbers.
Check that the user dialed the correct number.
5. There is a network problem, or a problem in the machine at the other end.
6. There is a problem in the machine at the other end; ask a technician to
check it.
7. The machine at the other end is not a Group 4 fax terminal.
8. The machine is not compatible with the machine at the other end. A compatibility test is needed.
Error codes related with the errors detected by the FCU are listed in the Service Manual of the main body.
SM
3-1
ISDN Type 140
3. TROUBLESHOOTING
3.1.1. D-channel Layer Management

Code
7-00
7-01
7-02
7-03
Probable Cause
Link reset
Link set-up failed because of time-out.
Link release failed because of time-out.
Link set-up parameter error
Action
2
2
2
2
3.1.2. D-channel, Layer 1

Code
7-10
7-11
7-12
Probable Cause
T3 timeout (layer 1 activation error)
No connection on the S0 interface
Deactivated
Action
1
1
1
3.1.3. D-channel Link Layer

Code
7-20
7-21
7-22
7-23
7-24
7-25
7-26
7-27
7-28
7-29
7-30
7-31
7-32
7-33
7-34
7-35
7-36
Probable Cause
At the start of link set-up, the machine received an unsolicited S
(F=1).
At the start of link set-up, the machine received an unsolicited DM
(F=1).
At TEI release, the machine received an unsolicited UA (F=1).
At the start of link set-up, the machine received an unsolicited DM
(F=0).
At TEI release, the machine received an unsolicited UA (F=0).
SABME received at the start of network link set-up
N200 retransmission error for SABME
N200 retransmission error for DISC
N200 retransmission error for situation enquiry (RR)
N(R) sequence number error
N(S) sequence number error
FRMR received
Non-standard frame received
Abnormal frame length
N201 error; information field N in the I frame exceeded N201
T201 timeout; timeout while waiting for checking
T202 timeout; timeout while waiting for ID assignment
3-2
Action
2
2
2
2
2
No error
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
SM
Code
7-40
7-41
7-42
7-43
7-44
7-45
7-46
7-47
7-48
7-49
7-51
Probable Cause
Insufficient mandatory information elements
Abnormal LI for a mandatory information element
T301 timeout; timeout while waiting for R:CONN
T303 timeout; timeout while waiting for R:CALL-PROC etc.
T304 timeout; timeout while waiting for R:CALL-PROC etc.
T305 timeout; timeout while waiting for R:REL
T308 timeout; timeout while waiting for R:REL-COMP
T310 timeout; timeout while waiting for R:ALERT etc.
T313 timeout; timeout while waiting for R:CONN-ACK
Internal error
Release call reference during communication
Action
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.1.5. B-channel Link Layer

Code
7-60
7-61
7-62
7-63
7-64
7-65
7-66
7-67
7-68
7-69
7-70
7-71
7-72
7-73
7-74
7-75
SM
Probable Cause
T3 timeout; timeout while waiting for flag
T3 timeout; timeout while waiting for SABM during an incoming call
T1 timeout x N2; timeout while waiting for UA after sending SABM
T1 timeout x N2; timeout while waiting for a response to a transmitted
S frame (P=1)
T1 timeout x N2; timeout while waiting for SABM or DISC after
sending FRMR
T1 timeout x N2; timeout while waiting for a response to DISC
RNR x N2 (other end busy, RCB counter error)
Invalid (Ad) frame received
Invalid short frame received
Link reset error
FRMR received
Non-standard (Cn) frame received
An S or U frame having an information field was received
A frame longer than the maximum N1 length was received
An S or I frame having an N(R) error was received
CRC error
3-3
Action
4
4
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
3
ISDN Type 140
3.1.4. D-channel Network Layer
3.1.6. B-channel Network Layer

Code
7-80
7-81
7-82
7-83
7-84
7-85
7-86
7-87
7-88
7-89
7-90
7-91
7-92
7-93
7-94
7-95
7-96
Probable Cause
A packet having an abnormal GFI was received
A packet was received that had a logical channel number different
from the logical channel being used for the communication
A packet containing a format error was received
A packet containing an LI error was received
A CN packet was received that had a PID different from 02
Unsupported packet type received
Abnormal or unsupported facility received
P(s) sequence number error
P(r) sequence number error
A reset using S:RQ or R:RI occurred
A restart using S:RQ or R:SI occurred
Call set-up error; in reply to S:CR, R:CI was received to indicate
rejection of the call
T20 timeout; timeout while waiting for an SF packet
T21 timeout; timeout while waiting for a CC packet
T22 timeout; timeout while waiting for an RF packet
T23 timeout; timeout while waiting for a CF packet
T10 timeout; timeout while waiting for the first frame
Action
6
6
6
7
7
7
7
6
6
6
6
7
6
6
6
6
6
3.1.7. Transport Layer

Code
8-00
8-01
8-02
8-05
8-06
8-07
8-08
8-10
8-11
8-12
8-13
8-14
8-15
8-20
8-21
8-22
8-23
8-26
8-27
8-28
Probable Cause
Invalid block received
TCC block received
TBR block received
TCR block; block format error
TCR block; block size parameter LI error
TCR block; extended addressing LI error
TCR block; block size length error
TCA block; block format error
TCA block; Tx origin reference data in TCR disagreed with the
address reference data in TCA
TCA block; octet 7 did not equal 0
TCA block; extended addressing LI error
TCA block; block size exceeded that set by TCR
TCA block; block size parameter LI error
TDT block; block format error
TDT block; octet 3 did not equal either 00 or 80(H)
TDT block; the end indicator was "Continue" even though there was
no field data
TDT block; an end block with no field data was received after an end
indicator of "End"
Timeout during state 0.2
3-4
Action
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
SM
Code
8-30
8-31
8-32
8-34
8-35
8-36
8-37
8-38
8-39
8-40
8-41
8-42
8-43
8-44
8-45
8-47
8-48
8-50
8-51
8-52
8-53
8-54
8-55
8-56
8-57
Probable Cause
Invalid frame received
RSSN received
CSA received
Calling terminal identification error in CSS
Date and time error in CSS
Window size error in CSS
Service identification error in CSS
Session user data error in CSS
CSS rejected (new session rejected)
Called terminal identification error in RSSP
Date and time error in RSSP
Date and time in RSSP was not the same as that in CSS
Window size error in RSSP
Service identification error in RSSP
Session user data error in RSSP
Message synchronization error inside the CCU
Document task busy
Ti timeout; non-communication surveillance timer (T.62)
T2 timeout; timeout while waiting for a response (T.62)
T3 timeout; CSA timer timeout (T.62)
G4 board load timer timeout; calling side waited too long for a new
session
G4 board load timer timeout; calling side waited too long for transport
probability
G4 board load timer timeout; called side waited too long for S:RSSP
G4 board load timer timeout; document transmission surveillance
timer timeout
G4 board load timer timeout; timeout while waiting for a user abort
request after a provider fail
Action
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
3.1.9. Document Layer

Code
8-60
8-61
8-62
8-63
8-64
8-65
8-66
8-70
8-71
8-72
8-73
8-74
8-75
8-76
SM
Probable Cause
T.62 coding format error (LI error)
A mandatory PI was absent, or the LI for a mandatory PI was 0
Calling/called terminal identification LI was different from that
specified by F.184 (LI = 24)
The LI for session user data exceeded the maximum value (512)
The LI for CDUI was not 0
Checkpoint and document reference numbers LI error, or they were
not in T.61 (ASCII) coding
The checkpoint reference number differed from the expected value
RDGR received
A non-standard PDU was received while in calling mode
A non-standard PDU was received while in called mode
Abnormal PDU received while in calling state ds1
15 consecutive CDCL signals received
Session window size control error (size not equal to 0)
Internal error
3-5
Action
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
ISDN Type 140
3.1.8. Session Layer
3.1.10. Presentation Layer

Code
8-80
8-81
8-82
8-83
8-84
8-85
8-86
8-87
8-88
8-89
8-90
8-91
8-92
8-93
8-94
8-95
8-96
8-97
Probable Cause
X.209 coding error in session user data (LI error)
PV error in session user data
PI error in session user data
The capabilities in the session user data of CDS/CDC were not the
same as those in RDCLP
X.209 coding error in the DP (LI error)
X.209 coding error in the SLD (document descriptor/page descriptor)
(LI error)
SLD object type absent
PI error in the SLD (document descriptor/page descriptor)
The capabilities in the SLD (document descriptor/page descriptor)
are duplicated or are not the same as those in RDCLP
No document descriptor at the start of the document
No page descriptor at the start of the page
Page descriptor PV error
X.209 coding error in the TU (LI error)
The TU was absent
PV error in the TU
TI error
X.209 coding nest level > 8, or an LI form error
CDPB/CDE received while TU/TI not yet completed, or an
unexpected PDU was received while analyzing an SLD
3-6
Action
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
SM
The display of G4CCU status codes is affected by the Real Time Display
On/off setting (G4 Parameter Switch E, bit 0).
If Real Time Display is off (the bit is 0; this is the default setting), there
is no indication on the operation panel.
If Real Time Display is on (the bit is 1), the codes are fully displayed on
the operation panel.
The codes are defined in the following pages.
3.2.1. Layer 1 (Physical Layer)
Code (H)
10
01
02
03
04
05
06
11
12
13
14
Status
Ready
S: [SETUP]
R: [CALL_PROC]
R: [CONN]
S: [CONN_ACK]
R: [SETUP ACK]
R: [ALERT]
R: [SETUP]
S: [CALL_PROC]
S: [CONN]
R: [CONN_ACK]
Code (H)
E0
E1
E3
E4
E5
F0
F1
F2
F3
Status
R: [DISC]
S: [REL]
R: [REL_COMP]
R: [STAT]
R: [STAT_ENQ]
S: [DISC]
R: [REL]
S: [REL_COMP]
S: [STAT]
Code (H)
D0
D1
Status
S: DISC, or R: DISC
S: DM, or R: DM
3.2.2. Layer 2 (Link Layer)

Code (H)
20
21
22
28
SM
Status
S: SABM, or R: SABM
S: UA, or R: UA
S: FRMR, or R: FRMR
S: SABME, or R: SABME
3-7
ISDN Type 140
3.2. G4CCU STATUS CODES *
3.2.3. Network Layer (Layer 3)

Code (H)
30
31
38
39
32
3A
3B
C0
C1
C8
C9
Status
Code (H)
C2
C3
CA
CB
C4
C5
CC
CD
C6
C7
CE
S: SQ
R: SF
R: SI
S: SF
S: RQ
R: RF
R: RI
S: RF
R: IT
R: IF
R: DIAG
Code (H)
42
43
S: CR
R: CC
R: CN
S: CA
S: GF
R: GQ
R: GF
S: CQ
R: CF
R: CI
S: CF
Status
Status
S: TBR, or R: TBR
S: TCC or R: TCC
3.2.4. Transport Layer (Layer 4)

Code (H)
40
41
Status
S: TCR, or R: TCR
S: TCA, or R: TCA
3.2.5. Session Layer, Session Control Layer (Layer 5)

Code (H)
50
51
52
53
54
Status
S: CSS, or R: CSS
S: RSSP, or R: RSSP
S: RSSN, or R: RSSN
S: CSCC, or R: CSCC
S: RSCCP, or R: RSCCP
Code (H)
56
A0
A1
A2
A3
Status
S: RSUI, or R: RSUI
S: CSA, or R: CSA
S: RSAP, or R: RSAP
S: CSE, or R: CSE
S: RSEP, or R: RSEP
3.2.6. Session Layer, Document Control Layer (Layer 5)

Code (H)
60
61
62
63
64
65
70
Status
S: CDCL, or R: CDCL
S: RDCLP, or R: RDCLP
S: CDS, or R: CDS
S: CDC, or R: CDC
S: CDPB, or R: CDPB
S: RDPBP, or R: RDPBP
S: CDUI, or R: CDUI (Data
phase - layer 6 and facsimile
data)
Code (H)
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
3-8
Status
S: CDE, or R: CDE
S: RDEP, or R: RDEP
S: CDD, or R: CDD
S: RDDP, or R: RDDP
S: CDR, or R: CDR
S: RDRP, or R: RDRP
S: RDGR, or R: RDGR
S: RDPBN, or R: RDPBN
SM
There are six LEDs on the G4 Interface board, as shown below.
LED 1
LED 5
LED 3
LED 2
LED 6
LED 4
These LEDs give the following information about the status of the machine.
O = ON, -- = OFF
Initial Settings
Power-up/Reset
--
--
O
--
O
--
--
--
---
O
--
--
--
---
---
--
---
---
---
---
-O
---
---
-O
---
---
--
---
---
Initial setting request from FCU
Initial setting confirmation to FCU

Communication
Layer 1 activated
Layer 2 set
O
B channel connected (ISDN G4)
O
B channel connected (ISDN G3)
O
B channel released
Layer 2 released
Layer 1 deactivated
--The following will be displayed if bit 1 of G4 parameter switch E is at 1.
B channel: send I frame (A blinks at this time if bit 1 of
G4 parameter switch E is at 1)
O
O
---
---
-O
A
--
B channel: receive I frame (B blinks at this time if bit 1 of

G4 parameter switch E is at 1)
O
B
O
---
Note: At the start and end of communication, both A and B will blink.
SM
3-9
ISDN Type 140
3.3. LEDs *
3.4. BACK-TO-BACK TEST *

To perforom a back-to-back test, you need:
Two machines (both of them must have CiG4 board)
Cross rosette
The procedure is as follows.
1. Switch off the machines
2. Connect two machines back-to-back using the cross rosette as follows.
8
Machine B
Machine A
Cross Rosette
Both resistors
must be between
50 and 100 .
h143t501.gem
3. Make the following bit switch adjustments:

In the machine acting in NT mode, set bits 0 and 1 of G4 parameter
switch 0D to 1.
In the machine acting in TE mode, set bit 0 of G4 parameter switch 0D
to 0 and bit 1 to 1.
4. Reset the machine by switching it off, waiting a few seconds, then switching back on.
5. Place a document in one of the machines, dial a number, then press
Start.
6. After you have finished the test, set bits 0 and 1 of G4 parameter switch
0D back to 0. then reset the machine.
Note: The following cannot be tested using this procedure:
P to M
3-10
SM
ISDN Type 140
A. D-Channel Layer 1 Dump List

A.1. How to Print the Dump List
Use this function to print the D-ch. Layer 1 dump list.
press .
2. Input the addresses 03B000 to 03B1FF:
Input % % .
List Sample
Refer to How to Read the Dump List later in this chapter.
* * * G4 CCU MEMORY DUMP LIST (SEP. 25.1995

0
4.05PM) * * *
C
03B000
00 00 00 F2
10 1E 00 F3
01 1C 64 F4
10 12 00 F5
03B010
11 22 00 F6
10 36 00 F7
02 00 08 F7
20 A6 08 F7
03B020
03 81 00 F7
07 34 60 F7
10 32 00 F7
02 00 03 F7
03B030
20 29 03 F7
02 00 18 F7
20 A9 04 F7
20 AB 0B F7
03B040
02 00 04 F7
20 AB 0C F7
02 00 04 F7
02 00 08 F7
03B050
20 A9 04 F7
20 AB 0E F7
02 00 04 F7
02 00 08 F7
03B060
20 A9 04 F7
20 00 03 F7
20 29 03 F7
10 02 7C F3
03B070
10 3E 40 F3
10 1E 00 F3
FF FF FF FF
00 00 FF FF
03B080
FF FF 00 00
00 00 FF FF
FF FF 00 00
00 00 FF FF
03B090
FF FF 00 00
00 00 FF FF
H143X501.wmf
SM
A-1
A.2. How to Read the Dump List

A.2.1. Data Format
The machine logs the details of layer 1 communication whenever a event
has taken place. The event can be either a request from the machine, a request from the DSU, a transmission of a signal, or a reception of a signal.
Each log consists of 4 bytes. The first byte indicates the type of event, the
second and the third bytes for optional data, which depends on the type of
event, and the fourth byte indicates the layer 1 status. The following table explains all types of data formats.
1st byte
00(H): TE mode
initialization request
01(H): Layer 1
activation request
10(H): Layer 1
status has changed
02(H): Frame
transmission request
2nd byte
00(H)
3rd byte
00(H)
4th byte
Layer 1 status
See note 1
See note 2
00(H)
TE mode
F1(H): F1 status
F2(H): F2 status
F3(H): F3 status
F4(H): F4 status
F5(H): F5 status
F6(H): F6 status
F7(H): F7 status
F8(H): F8 status
20(H): Frame
reception indication
See note 3
03(H): TEI
assignment request
04(H): Layer 1
de-activation request
05(H): Loop back
mode request
06(H): NT mode
initialization request
EE(H):
Communication
error
Assigned TEI value
Number of
transmitted data
bytes
(Max. 255 bytes)
Number of received
data bytes
(Max. 255 bytes)
00(H)
See note 4
See note 2
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
00(H)
See note 5
00(H)
NT mode
C1(H): G1 status
C2(H): G2 status
C3(H): G3 status
C4(H): G4 status
Refer to the Layer
1 Activation/
Deactivation
Procedure later in
this chaper.
The data FF FF FF FF indicates the end of the data.
A-2
SM
1. Status Register Value

Data (Hex)
1E or 1C
02 or 00
0E or 0C
1A or 18
12 or 10
22 or 20
32 or 30
36 or 34
3E or 3C
Description
Deactivated or standby
INFO0 signal received
Not connected
Error status
Non-synchronized signal received
INFO2 signal received
Priority high
Priority low
Terminated
2. Command Register Value

Data (Hex)
00
40
44
60
64
7C
Description
No command requested
Standby request
Reset request
Priority change requset (High priority)
Priority change request (Low priority)
Termination request
3. Received Frame Status Register

Bit 7 - Not used
Bit 6 - 0: Normal, 1: Received data overflow
Bit 5 - 0: Normal, 1: CRC error
Bit 4 - 0: Normal, 1: Received frame aborted
4. Interrupt Status Register

Bit 7 - 0: Normal, 1: Frame received
Bit 6 - 0: Normal, 1: Receive buffer full
Bit 5 - Not used
Bit 4 - 0: Normal, 1: Transmission buffer full
Bit 3 - Not used
Bit 2 - 0: Normal, 1: Layer 1 status has changed
Bit 1 - Not used
Bit 0 - 0: Normal, 1: Communication error
5. Communication Error Status Register

Bit 7 - 0: Normal, 1: Frame resend
Bit 6 - 0: Normal, 1: Transmission underrun
Bit 5 - Not used
Bit 4 - 0: Normal, 1: Transmission pool overflow
SM
A-3
ISDN Type 140
Notes
A.2.2. Reading the Sample Dump List

Line #1
TE mode initialization request
Layer 1 status changed to F3
03B000
00 00 00 F2
10 1E 00 F3
01 1C 64 F4
10 12 00 F5
Layer 1 activation request

Non-synchronized signal received,
and the status changed to F5
H143X502.wmf
Line #2
INFO2 signal received,
and the status changed to F6
Priority class low indication, and
the status changed to F7
03B010
10 22 00 F6
10 36 00 F7
02 00 08 F7
20 A6 08 F7
8 bytes data frame transmission

request for TEI assignament
8 bytes of data frame received for
TEI assignment
H143X503.wmf
Line #3
TEI "81" assigned

Priority change request from low
to high
03B020
03 81 00 F7
07 34 60 F7
10 32 00 F7
02 00 03 F7
Priority changed to high

S: SABME
H143X504.wmf
A-4
SM
R: UA
S: SETUP
03B030
20 29 03 F7
02 00 18 F7
20 A9 04 F7
20 AB 0B F7
R: RR
R: CALL_PROC
H143X505.wmf
Line #5
S: RR
R: CONN
03B040
02 00 04 F7
20 AB 0C F7
02 00 04 F7
02 00 08 F7
S: RR
S: DISC
H143X506.wmf
Line #6
R: RR
R: REL
03B050
20 A9 04 F7
20 AB 0E F7
02 00 04 F7
02 00 08 F7
S: RR
S: REL_COMP
H143X507.wmf
SM
A-5
ISDN Type 140
Line #4
Line #7
R: RR
S: disc
03B060
20 A9 04 F7
20 00 03 F7
20 29 03 F7
10 02 7C F3
R: UA
INFO0 received for termination
H143X508.wmf
Line #8
Terminated
Deactivated
03B070
10 3E 40 F3
10 1E 00 F3
FF FF FF FF
00 00 FF FF
Data End
H143X509.wmf
A-6
SM
The ITU-T I.430 recommendation (the basic user-network interface - Layer 1

specification) specifies layer 1 activation/deactivation procedures.
Before understanding the procedures, the status and INFO signals should be
noted.
TE (Terminal Equipment) Status
Status
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
Description
TE is turned off.
TE is turned on, but no signal is exchanged.
TE is stopped. No signal is exchanged between TE and NT.
TE is waiting for the response to INFO1 signal from NT.
TE is checking if the signal from the NT is INFO2 or INFO4.
TE is waiting for signals from NT after receiving INFO2 signal.
TE and NT are in synchronized condition.
TE has failed to synchronize to NT, and waiting for the stop request from
NT
F8
NT (Network Termination) Status

Status
G1
G2
G3
G4
Description
NT is stopped.
NT is sending INFO2 signal.
TE and NT are in synchronized condition.
NT is terminating itself.
INFO Signals
INFO0
INFO2
INFO4
SM
NT to TE Direction
No signal
(11111111...)
Activation signal in
synchronized condition
(B=0, D=0, E=0, A=0)
Synchronized frame
INFO0
INFO1
INFO3
A-7
TE to NT direction
No signal
(11111111...)
Activation signal in
non-synchronized condition
(+0-0111111+0-0)
Synchronized frame
ISDN Type 140
A.2.3. Layer 1 Status
1. Activation Procedure from the TE

In idle F3 status, the TE send the
INFO1 signal to the NT and changes to
F4 status. The NT then changes to
G2 status and sends INFO2 signal to
the TE.
The TE changes to F5 status and
stops sending signals to synchronize itself to the signal from the NT.
After the TE has synchronized to the
signal, it sends INFO3 signal to the NT
and changes to the F6 status.
The NT then changes to G3 status
and sends INFO4 signal back to the
TE to inform that a physical link has
been established.
The timers T1, T2 and T3 are used to
reset the TE or NT if a correct response has not received before the
timers expire.
NT
TE
F3
G1
F4
INFO1
F5
INFO2
INFO0
F6
INFO3
G2
T1
INFO4
G3
INFO0
INFO0
T3
G4
F7
T2
G1
INFO0
G1
INFO0
F3
H143X510.wmf
2. Activation Procesure from the NT

The procedure starts from the NT by
sending INFO2 signal to the TE.
NT
TE
F3
After the TE has synchronized to the

signal, it sends INFO3 signal to the NT
and changes to the F6 status.
The NT then changes to G3 status
and sends INFO4 signal back to the
TE to inform that a physical link has
been established.
The timers T1 and T2 are used to reset
the NT if a correct response has not received before the timers expire.
F6
G1
INFO2
INFO3
G2
INFO4
G3
INFO0
INFO0
T1
G4
F7
G1
INFO0
T2
G1
H143X511.wmf
A-8
SM
The termination procedure starts from synchronized status (F7status for the
TE and G3 status for the NT).
NT
TE
To terminate the physical connection,
the NT just stops sending signals and
F7
G3
changes to G1 status. (The INFO0
signal means no signal is sent from
G4
INFO0
the NT.) Then, the TE also stops sendINFO0
T2
ing signals and changes to F3 status.
F3
G1
G1
H143X512.wmf
SM
A-9
ISDN Type 140
3. Termination Procedure from the NT
B.1. Initial Programming Items Comparison List

Note: The model CGO is only for the US and Taiwan markets.
Item
Country code
Own analog number
Area code prefix
Own ISDN-G4 number
Own ISDN-G3 number
Next transfer station
G4 internal switches
G4 parameter switches
Data network international prefix
ISDN international prefix
G4 subscriber number 1
G4 subscriber number 2
IG3 subscriber number 1
IG3 subscriber number 2
Internal Access Unit 1
Internal Access Unit 2
G4 subaddress
IG3 subaddress
G4 terminal ID
IG3 CSI
G4 dump 1 (RAM dump)
G4 dump 2 (Protocol dump)
G4 parameter list
Service level password
CFO
U: F-61
U: F-61
U: F-61
U: F-61
U: F-61
U: F-61
S: F-18-01
S: F-18-02
S: F-18-03
S: F-18-04
S: F-18-05
S: F-18-06
S: F-18-07
S: F-18-08
S: F-18-09
S: F-18-10
S: F-18-11
S: F-18-12
S: F-18-13
S: F-18-14
S: F-18-15
S: F-18-16
S: F-18-17
1991
LHO/CGO
U: F-61
U: F-61
U: F-61
U: F-61
U: F-61
U: F-61
S: F-18-01
S: F-18-02
S: F-18-03
S: F-18-04
S: F-18-05
S: F-18-06
S: F-18-07
S: F-18-08
S: F-18-09
S: F-18-10
S: F-18-11
S: F-18-12
S: F-18-13
S: F-18-14
S: F-18-15
S: F-18-16
S: F-18-17
1991
FX4
U: F-61
U: F-61
U: F-61
S: F-17-01
S: F-17-02
S: F-17-03
S: F-17-04
S: F-17-05
S: F-17-06
S: F-17-07
S: F-17-08
S: F-17-09
U: F-61
U: F-61
S: F-17-10
S: F-17-11
S: F-17-12
1995
U: User level function (Function - 60 - 2222)

S: Service level function (Function - 60 - 1991 or 1995)
SM
B-1
ISDN Type 140
B. G4 Parameter Locations
B.2. Switch Locations Comparison List

Note: The model CGO is only for the US and Taiwan markets.
1. Communication Parameter Display
Model
CFO
LHO/CGO
FX4
Switch Location
Bit switch 00, bit 7
Bit switch 00, bit 7
System switch 00, bit 5
Setting
0: Off, 1: On
0: Off, 1: On
0: Off, 1: On
2. Default Communication Mode

Model
CFO
LHO/CGO
FX4
Switch Location
000153(H), bit 2
080053(H), bit 2
System switch 0A, bit 0
Setting
0: G3, 1: G4
0: G3, 1: G4
0: G3, 1: G4
3. Network Used for G3 Transmission

Model
CFO
LHO/CGO
FX4
Switch Location
000153(H), bit 3
080053(H), bit 3
Setting
0: PSTN, 1: ISDN
0: PSTN, 1: ISDN
0: PSTN, 1: ISDN
4. Network Used for G3 transmission in G4-to-G3 Fallback

Model
CFO
LHO/CGO
FX4
Switch Location
000153(H), bit 3
080053(H), bit 3
Setting
0: PSTN, 1: ISDN
0: PSTN, 1: ISDN
0: PSTN, 1: ISDN
5. Automatic G4-to-G3 Fallback

Model
CFO
LHO/CGO
FX4
Switch Location
00015C(H), bit 0
08005C(H), bit 0
Communication switch 07, bit 0
B-2
Setting
SM
Model
CFO
LHO/CGO
FX4
Switch Location
00015C(H), bit 1
08005C(H), bit 1
Function not available
Setting
7. Cable Equalizer for ISDN Transmission

Model
CFO
Switch Location
Bit switch 08, bits 6 and 7
LHO/CGO
FX4
G3 switch 09, bits 0 and 1
Bit 7
0
0
1
1
Setting
Bit 6
Setting
0
None
1
Low
0
Medium
1
High
Bit 1
0
0
1
1
Bit 0
0
1
0
1
Bit 7
0
0
1
1
Setting
Bit 6
Setting
0
None
1
Low
0
Medium
1
High
Bit 3
0
0
1
1
Bit 2
0
1
0
1
Setting
None
Low
Medium
High
8. Cable Equalizer for ISDN Reception

Model
CFO
Switch Location
Bit switch 0A, bits 6 and 7
LHO/CGO
FX4
SM
G3 switch 09, bits 2 and 3
B-3
Setting
None
Low
Medium
High
ISDN Type 140
6. Specified Two Step Transfer
BC: Bearer Capability

HLC: Higher Layer Compatibility
SA: Subaddress
Tx
Terminal
BC
Digital
Digital
Setup
Called No./ Response
HLC
Called SA
G4 Not included G4 reception
G4 reception
G4
Included
No response
G4 reception
G4 Fax
Digital
N/A
Not included
No response
G4 reception
Digital
3.1k
3.1k
N/A
Included
No response
G2/G3 Not included G3 reception

G3 reception
G2/G3
Included
No response
G3 reception
G3 Fax
3.1k
N/A
Not included
No response
G3 reception
3.1k
SM
N/A
Included
No response
C-1
Condition
If called no. and called

subaddress match the G4
subscriber no.
subaddress do not match the G4
subscriber no.
If G4 Parameter Switch 01, bit 1
= 0.
= 1.
subaddress match the G4
subscriber no.
subaddress do not match the G4
subscriber no.
subaddress match the IG3
subscriber no.
subaddress do not match the IG3
subscriber no.
= 0.
= 1.
subscriber no.
subscriber no.
ISDN Type 140
C. Conditions for Receiving a Call
Tx
Terminal
Setup
BC
HLC
Called SA
Speech G2/G3 Not included G3 reception
G3 reception
Speech G2/G3
Included
No response
No response
G3 reception
G3 Fax
Speech
N/A
Not included
No response
No response
G3 reception
Speech
N/A
Speech
Speech
TEL
TEL
Included
No response
Not included No response

Included No response
No response
G3 reception
Speech
N/A
Not included
No response
Telephone
No response
G3 reception
Speech
N/A
Included
No response
C-2
Condition

subscriber no.
subscriber no.
If G4 Internal Switch 14, bit 0 = 0,
and G4 Parameter Switch 01, bit
1 = 0.
1=0
1 = 1.
1 = 1.
subscriber no.
subscriber no.

1 = 0.
1=0
1 = 1.
1 = 1.
subscriber no.
subscriber no.
SM
BC
3.1k
3.1k
3.1k
Setup
HLC
Called SA
TEL Not included No response
TEL
Included No response
G3 reception
N/A
Not included
No response
Telephone
G3 reception
3.1k
SM
N/A
Included
No response
C-3
Condition

= 0.
= 1.
subscriber no.
subscriber no.
ISDN Type 140
Tx
Terminal
PRINTER INTERFACE
TYPE 100
SERVICE MANUAL
Trademark Notices
Epson and Epson ESC/P are registered trademarks of Seiko Epson Corporation.
Epson LQ-2500, Epson FX-800/1000, Epson FX-86e/286e, Epson GL, Epson LQ, Epson
FX, Epson LQ-1050/850, Epson LQ-500, Epson LQ-1500, EpsonFX-85, Epson FX-80, Epson GL Identity Card, Epson Roman T, and Epson Sans Serif U are are registered trademarks of Epson America Inc.
Action Laser and SelecType are trademarks and EPSON Connection is a service mark of Epson America, Inc.
EpsonScript and EPSON Talk are trademarks of Epson America Inc.
IBM and IBM PC are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation.
HP Laser Jet, HP Laser Jet+, HP Laser Jet 500, HP Laser Jet series II, HP Laser Jet IIP, HP
Laser Jet series III, HP Laser Jet IIIP, HP Laser Jet IIISi are trademarks, and HewlettPackard and PCL are registered trademarks of Hewlett-Packard Company.
LocalTalk, TrueType, AppleTalk, Macintosh, and LaserWriter are trademarks of Apple
Computer, Inc.
Centronics is a trademark of Centronics Data Computer Corporation.
PostScript is a trademark of Adobe Systems Inc.
ITC Zapf Dingbats, ITC Avant Garde, ITC Bookman, ITC Zapf Chancery are registered trademark of International Typeface Corporation.
Bookman and Cantury Schoolbook are registered trademarks of Kingsley-ATF Type
Corporation.
Bitstream is a registered trademark of Bitstream Inc.
Speedo and FaceLift are trademarks of Bitstream Inc.
CG Times is a product of AGFA Compugraphic, a division of AGFA Corporation.
Univers, Times, Helvetica Narrow and Palatino are U.S. registered trademarks of Linotype
AG and its subsidiaries.
Phoenix, PhoenixPage, and Phoenix MultiGray are registered trademarks of Phoenix Technologies Ltd.
MS-DOS and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
1.1. CONTROLLER SPECIFICATIONS
Item
Emulation
Resident Fonts
Paper Size
Note: All the acceptable sizes
must be in portrait orientation.
Host Interface
300 x 300 dpi

1.0 MB (Standard)
Upgradable to 2, 3, or 5 MB
Standard:
HP LaserJet 4L TM emulation (LJ4L mode)
ESC/P 24-pin printer emulation (LQ mode)
ESC/P 9-pin printer emulation (LX mode)
HP GL/2 TM emulation (EPSON GL/2 mode)
Optional:
PostScript TM Level 2
21 scalable fonts and 3 bitmap fonts
(Refer to the Operators Manual for additional
information.)
A4
A5
B5
LT (Letter)
HLT (Half letter)
LGL (Legal)
GLT (Government letter)
GLG (Government legal)
EXE (Executive)
F4
MON (Monarch)
C10 (Commercial 10)
DL
C5
IB5 (International B5)
C6
Standard:
Bi-Centronics TM parallel interface x 1
Optional:
LocalTalk TM Interface x 1
Printer
Interface Type
100
Resolution
RAM Capacity
Specifications

Item
Resolution
Print Speed (Engine Speed)
Warm-up Time
Paper Size
SM
Specifications
300 x 300 dpi
Up to 10 ppm (Letter or A4)
20 seconds or less at normal temperature
The available paper sizes are not the same as those
available with the controller. The selected paper size
depends on the machines hardware specifications.
Refer to the Operators Manual for additional
information.
1-1
PIF100
1.3. BLOCK DIAGRAM AND DATA PATH

The printer interface unit consists of a controller board and an interface board (PIF-L).
FDU
FCE
PSTN
NCU
Modem
Fax
Printer Interface
Controller
Page
Memory
Firmware
PIF-L
CPU
C PU
Font or PostScript
Cartridge
(Optional)
(Optional)
C PU
LocalTalk I/F
Bi-Centronics I/F
ADDRESS/DATA BUS
Page
Memory
Laser Unit
Video/Command Interface
PC-AT
Compatible
Macintosh
H144V501.wmf
The Printer Interface Unit consists of two (2) logic boards called the
Controller Board and the Interface Board (identified in the Service Manual as
the PIF-L Board).
The Controller Board contains a CPU chip, ROM for the firmware, Page
Memory, an optional Font or Postscript Interface Connector and two (2) Host
Interface Connectors ( a standard Bi-Centronic or an optional Local Talk).
Refer to the Controller Board Specifications for additional information.
The PIF-L Board also contains a CPU chip which is used to emulate the
commands from the Controller Board and to modify the displayed message
in the display panel of the FAX machine. For example, if the FAX machine
can not use Legal size paper, the CPU chip on the PIF-L board will modify
the displayed message in the FAX machine to eliminate the displayed
selection of the Legal size paper. If the option of the legal size paper is not
displayed, the operator can not choose the legal size paper.
Data Path
The Controllers CPU chip will interpret the print data from the host computer
and will write an imaginary page of data in the Page Memory on the
Controller Board. After a page of print data has been stored in the Page
Memory, the Controller CPU chip will transfer the page of print data to the
CPU chip in the FAX machine will then pass the data directly to the Laser
Unit for printing.
PIF100
1-2
SM
The interface between the CPU chips on the Controller board and the FAX
machine is known as "Video Interface". The function of the Video Interface is
to specify the handshaking procedure and the timing of the data transfer.
Dual Access
If a FAX message is received while the machine is busy printing data from
the computer, the FAX message will be received and the data will be
temporary stored in the SAF memory of the FAX machine. At the completion
of the computer print task, the machine will print the received FAX message
that was stored in the SAF Memory.
If the computer attempts to initiate a print task while the FAX machine is busy
receiving a FAX message or printing a report, the print data from the
computer will be received and stored in the Page Memory on the Controller
Board. At the completion of the FAX machine task, the machine will switch
the printer resources of the Controller board to the computer printing task. If
the print data exceeds the Controllers memory size, the print data will be
spooled in the computer (if the computers operating system or the
Application Program contains the Print Spooler Function).
The term "Spooler" is an acronym for Simultaneous Print Operation On Line.
Print Spooler is a computer software program that, when the printer is busy,
will intercept the print data that is on the way to the printer and will redirect it
to a disk or memory. When the printer is no longer busy, the print data will
then be sent to the printer. An advantage of the Print Spooler feature is that
by diverting the entire print job to disk or memory and then coordinating it
with the printer, frees the user from waiting until the print task is completed
before moving to another task.

The required +24 volts and the +5 volts are supplied to the Printer Interface
from the FAX machine. The PIF-L board will then generate a different +5
volts for the CPU chips located on the PIF-L and Controller boards.
SM
1-3
PIF100
Printer
Interface Type
100
Since the printer resources are shared, the FAX machine was designed to
perform multiple tasks.

2.1. CONTROLLER
2.1.1. Bi-Centronics TM Interface
Signal
Pin
Return
Pin
Signal
Direction
19
STROBE
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
DATA1
DATA2
DATA3
DATA4
DATA5
DATA6
DATA7
DATA8
The STROBE pulse for reading data.

The pulse width of the signal must be at
least 0.5 s at the receiving terminal.
The signals represent the parallel data
bits 1 to 8. Each signal is at the HIGH
level when the data is a logical 1 and
LOW when it is a logical 0.
IN
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
IN
IN
IN
IN
IN
IN
IN
IN
10
28
ACKNLG
29
BUSY
OUT
12
30
PE
OUT
13
SLCT
OUT
14
AUTO
IN
15
16
17
18
19~30
NC
GND
CHASSIS
GND
NC
GND
31
INIT
About a 10 s pulse width. A LOW

signal indicates that data has been
received and the printer is ready to
accept more data.
A HIGH signal indicates that the printer
cannot receive data. The signal will go
HIGH in the following cases:
1. During printing
2. When off line
3. During a printer-error state
A HIGH signal indicates that the printer is
out of paper.
Available only for bidirectional use.
A LOW signal enables an automatic line
feed upon receiving a CR signal. This
signal is only detected when the machine
has just been turned on, or when the
printer interface is initialized.
In ESC/P mode, this signal effects a CR
operation in accordance with the
SelecType TM setting.
In HP TM mode, this signal will be ignored.
Not used
Logic ground level
Chassis ground, which is connected to
the signal ground.
Not used
Twisted-pair return signal ground level.
When this signal goes LOW, the printer
controller will ignore the STROBE signal.
OUT
11
IN
SM
Description
2-1
PIF100
Printer
Interface Type
100
The parallel interface connector pin assignments and a description of the

interface signals are shown in the table below.
Signal
Pin
Return
Pin
Signal
Direction
32
ERROR
GND
NC
+5V
SLCTIN
This signal will go LOW when the printer

is:
1. Out of paper
2. In an error state
3. Off line
Same as for Pins 19~30
Not used
Pulled up to +5V through a 1K resistor.
OUT
33
34
35
36
Description
IN
Note: All interface conditions are based on TTL levels. Both the rise and
fall times of each signal must be less than 0.2 microseconds.
The "Direction" column refers to the direction of signal flow as

viewed from the printer interface.
Return denotes the twisted-pair return to be connected at signal

ground level.
For the interface wiring, use a twisted-pair cable for each signal
and to complete the connection on the return side.
PIF100
Data transfer is carried out by observing the ACKNLG or BUSY

signal.
(Data transfer to the printer interface can only be carried out after
the receipt of the ACKNLG signal or when the level of the BUSY
signal is LOW.)
The pulse width of the ACKNLG signal will vary.
2-2
SM
To enable bidirectional parallel interface communications between the printer

and computer, set the connector pin assignments as follows:
Printer Interface
Computer
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
17
Chassis GND
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Printer
Interface Type
100
1
2
17
1825
31
32
36
16, 1930, 33 connected to GND

H144d501.wmf
2.1.2. LocalTalk
TM
Interface (Optional)
Specifications
Compatibility
Baud rate
Topology
Signaling standard
Signal encoding
Frame format
Node identification
Cabling
SM
Phase 1 and phase 2

230.4 kbps
Parallel bus, low-resistance transformer isolated, floating
ground.
EIA standard RS422, balanced voltage
FMO (bi-phase) space
SDLC (Synchronous Data Link Control)
AppleTalk TM logical address is self-configuring; no user
action required.
AppleTalk TM 8-pin mini DIN
2-3
PIF100
2.2. PIF
Controller
PIF-L
FDU/FCE
on the
Fax Machine
5LSYNC
5VSYNC
5PRRDY
IC4
SWINT
5PIFRESET
PPRDY
RESET
1INTPR
CONNECT
LCD/KEY DATA
SERIAL CLOCK
CPU
SERIAL CLOCK
CTBSY
COMMAND
SERIAL DATA
STSBSY
STATUS
SERIAL DATA
LIGHT
DARK
NORMAL
VIDEO SIGNAL
Print Density Adjustment

Circuit
5LGATE
VIDEO SIGNAL
5PRINT
5CPRDY
Printer Interface Unit
FAX
H144D502.wmf
The CPU on the PIF-L board acts as a interpreter (emulator) between the
printer controller board and the FAX machine.
The controller board will send various command signals to the FAX machine
through the CPU on the PIF-L board requesting hardware status (e.g.,
cassette paper size, jam, toner end) and for specifying a cassette for
printing. The FAX machine will respond to each command signal with a
status signal.
The CPU on the PIF-L board emulates the commands for FAX machines
hardware specifications (e.g, some models can have only one cassette).
PIF100
2-4
SM
2.2.2. Key/Display Emulation
Because the capabilities of the controller and the FAX machine are not the
same (for example, Monarch paper is available with the controller, but not
with the FAX machine), the PIF-L board will emulate the user key operations
for the controller board and the display message to the FAX machine, so that
the user cannot select settings that the FAX machine is not capable of
performing.
2.2.3. Print Density Control
The controller controls the print density adjustment using the Level 2 menu.
Depending on the density setting sent from the controller board, the PIF-L
board will adjust the pulse width of each pixel.
2.2.4. Printer Interface Reset
Controller
CPU
+5V
PIF-L
CN5-1,2
+5V
+5V
+5V
FDU
DC/DC
Converter
+24V
5PIFRESET
FCE
CN1-20
CPU
CN1-2
+5V
CPU
RESET
Reset Circuit
H144D504.wmf
If the FAX machines CPU chip activates the 5PIFRESET signal, the reset
circuit on the PIF-L board will reset its CPU, and the DC/DC converter on the
will shut down the +5V supply to the Controller board.
The procedure for totally resetting the printer interface is described in
Section 4.
SM
2-5
PIF100
Printer
Interface Type
100
When the operator is using the printer function of the FAX machine, the FAX
machines keys and LCD panel are connected to the printer controller board.
through the CPU on the PIF-L board.
2.3. VIDEO INTERFACE

2.3.1. Overview
The video interface specifies the print timing between the printer interface
and the FAX machine.
T1
LSYNC
T4
VIDEO
T3
T2
L2
VSYNC
VIDEO
L1
L3
W1
W2
W3
H144D503.wmf
PIF100
2-6
SM
T5
T1
LSYNC
T6
VIDEO
H144D506.wmf
The LSYNC signal will go low for T1 time before the printer interface sends
each line of print data. Then, the printer interface will send the video data
(T2) after the falling edge of LSYNC was detected.
Parameter
T1
T2
T5
T6
Setting
2.36 s
9.44 s
1.253 ms
295 ns
The left margin (W1) and the right margin (W2) are set at 4 mm.
The VSYNC signal will go low for T3 time before the printer interface sends
each page of print data. Then, the printer interface will send the video data
(T4) after the falling edge of VSYNC was detected.
Parameter
T3
T4
Setting
22.55 ms
varies with paper length
The top margin (L1) and the bottom margin (L2) are set at 4 mm.
SM
2-7
PIF100
Printer
Interface Type
100
T2
3. INSTALLATION
Before installing the printer interface unit and its options, perform the
following:
1. Print out all the messages stored in the memory.
2. Print out the list of user-programmed items and the system parameter list.
3. Turn off the main switch and disconnect the power plug.
3.1. PRINTER INTERFACE UNIT

3.1.1. Models FAX2700L, FAX2400L, & FAX3700L
[A]
1. Remove the rear cover [A] (2 screws),

and two small covers [B] (1 screw)
and [C].
[B]
2. Re-install the rear cover [A] on the
machine (1 screw at the lower left
corner), and install two brackets [D]
(2 screws) and [E] (2 screws - one
screw secures the rear cover as well,
and a ground wire [F]).
[C]
H144i520.wmf
3. Connect the harness [G] to the FDU [D]

through the lower window in the rear
cover, hook the Printer Interface Unit
[H] onto the brackets [D] and [E].
Secure the unit [H] (3 screws).
4. Connect a parallel printer cable to the
Printer Interface Unit.
5. Plug in the machine and turn on the
main switch.
6. Confirm that the On Line indicator on
the operation panel is lit. If not, check
the harness connection from the
Printer Interface Unit to the FDU.
[F]
[E]
H144i521.wmf
[H]
[G]
H144i522.wmf
SM
3-1
PIF100
Printer
Interface Type
100
CAUTION
3.1.2. Model: FAX4700L

1. Remove the rear cover [A] (2 screws), and two small covers [B]
(1 screw) and [C].
2. Attach the grounding wire [D]
(1 screw) to the machine and
re-install the rear cover [A] (1 screw
at the lower left corner).
[A]
3. Install two brackets [E] (2 screws)

and [F] (2 screws - one screw
secures the rear cover as well).
[D]
4. Remove the hooks [G] (1 screw

[B]
each) from the unit and install the
hooks. [H] (1 screw each). The
hooks are included, but screws are
not. Use the screws that originally [E]
secured the hooks [G].
5. Connect the harness [I] to the FDU
through the lower window in the
rear cover and secure the
grounding wire [J] to the Printer
Interface Unit [K]. Then, hook the
Printer Interface Unit onto the
brackets [H].
[C]
H144i510.wmf
[F]
H144i513.wmf
6. Secure the unit [K] (3 screws) to the

machine.
[H]
7. Connect a parallel printer cable to

the Printer Interface Unit.
main switch.
9. Confirm that the On Line indicator
on the operation panel is lit. If not,
[G]
check the harness connection from
the Printer Interface Unit to the FDU.
H144i511.wmf
[I]
[K]
[J]
H144i512.wmf
PIF100
3-2
SM
Fig.1
3.1.3. Operation Panel Decals
English
Reset
Initalize
Continue
Copy End
Continue
Feed
Level 1
Level 2
Feed
Reset
Initialize
Refer to the illustration in figure 1 to

identify each numbered decal.
Copy End
Exit
On Line
Models FAX2700L, FAX2400L &

FAX3700L
Level 1
Continue
Copy End
Level 2
Exit
On Line
Adhere the decal labels numbered 1 &

3 onto the operation panel as illustrated
Fig.2
in figure 2.
Feed
h144i550.wmf
1
Model FAX4700L:
Adhere the decal labels numbered 4 &
5 onto the operation panel as illustrated
in figure 3.
3
h144i551.wmf
Fig.3
h144i552.wmf
SM
3-3
PIF100
Printer
Interface Type
100
Reset
Initialize
3.2. SIMM MEMORY

Note: The SIMM memory upgrade is not included in the kit.
3.2.1. Type 100
1. Remove the cover [A] (2 screws).
2. Install a SIMM memory [B] to the
RAM SLOT (lower slot).
3. Re-install the cover [A] (2 screws).
4. Turn on the machine, and enter
printer mode. Refer to the
Operators Manual, Page 3.
h144i540.wmf
[A]
5. Print the status sheet. The

Installed Memory should have
increased to the new SIMM
memory capacity plus 1 Mbyte. If
the Installed Memory is still 1
Mbyte or an error is indicated
while in printer mode, ensure that
the SIMM was correctly installed.
Refer to the Operators Manual
page 4 .
h144i541.wmf
3.2.2. SIMM Requirements
[B]
1. Number of pins
2. Access speed
3. Capacity
4. Parity
PIF100
72
70 ns or faster
1, 2 or 4 MB
N/A
3-4
SM
3.3. OTHER OPTIONS (User Installable Items)

3.3.1. PostScript TM Cartridge
Install the cartridge [A] as shown in the diagram.
Printer
Interface Type
100
Note: A minimum of 2 MB of memory is required to use the PostScript TM

emulation.
3.3.2. LocalTalk TM Interface

1. Remove the cover [A] (2
screws).
2. Install the interface board [B] as
shown in the diagram (2
screws).
[A]
Notes: The optional PostScript

TM
cartridge is required
for printing from Macintosh TM computers.
A minimum of 2 MB of
memory is required to
use the LocalTalk TM interface and the PostScript TM emulation.
h144i543.wmf
[A]
[B]
h144i544.wmf
SM
3-5
PIF100
3.4. CONNECTING UP THE PRINTER INTERFACE UNIT

3.4.1. Parallel Interface
A Bi-Centronics TM parallel cable is required to connect the unit to a host PC.
Refer to section 2.1 for the interface specifications and cable pin
assignments.
Connect a LocalTalk TM cable from a Macintosh TM PC to the LocalTalk TM
port on the interface card.
Notes: The optional PostScript TM cartridge is required to print from a
Macintosh TM PC.
TM
2 MB or more of memory is required to use the LocalTalk
interTM
face and the PostScript
cartridge.
3.5. TESTING THE CONNECTIONS

3.5.1. Printer Interface to Fax Connection
1. Turn on the machine. All LEDs dedicated for the printer interface option
should light at power on.
2. Enter the printer function. Refer to the Operators Manual, page 3.
3. Print the status sheet from the SelecType SM Level 1 menu. If the status
sheet is not printed, check the harness connection between the printer
interface and the FAX machine. Refer to the Operators Manual, page 4.
4. Press the On Line key to exit SelecType SM mode.
PIF100
3-6
SM
3.5.2. DOS Based Computers

Important
To avoid any damage to the customers data files, it is not recommended
that the service technicians operate the customers computer,
The following procedures are explained for testing purpose only.
Printer
Interface Type
100

1. Ensure that the printer cable is properly connected.
2. Turn on the machine, then turn on the computer.
3. Ensure that the printer interface is on line.
4. After DOS is initialized, type the following at the C:\> prompt:
PRINT AUTOEXEC.BAT
The computer will display the following:
NAME OF LIST DEVICE (PRN);
Type the following:
LPT1
The autoexex.bat file will be printed from the fax machine.
If nothing is printed, ensure that the proper printer cable was used and
connected securely to both the computer and the printer interface. Refer to
the Operators Manual, page 6.
Printer drivers for DOS applications are not provided with the printer
interface unit, select one of the following printers in the order of preference
listed below.
EPL-5200+
EPL-3000
EPL-5200
EPL-9000
TM
HP LaserJet 4L
TM
HP LaserJet 4
TM
HP LaserJet IIISi
TM
HP LaserJet III/IIIP/IIID
If an emulation other than HP TM PCL5E is required, select EPSON GL/2 ,
LQ , or FX emulation mode. However, the emulation setting of the printer
interface should be changed from the default (HP LaserJet 4L TM), if one of
these is selected.
Since each application program differs in its setup procedure, there is no
standard method to select the printer driver. Refer to the application software
manual for the proper procedure to select the printer driver.
SM
3-7
PIF100
3. Printer Driver for Microsoft Windows

1. Insert the Windows driver disk in the A-drive (or B-drive).
2. Choose Run in the File menu of the Program Manager, then type the
following:
A:\INSTALL (OR B:\INSTALL)
3. Follow the instructions which appear on the computer screen.
4. After the driver installation is finished, set up the driver referring to the
Operators Manual, page 7.
Important
To avoid any damage to the customers data files, it is not recommended
that the service technicians operate the customers computer.
The following procedures are explained for testing purpose only.
1. Install the printer driver as explained in the Operators Manual of the PS
cartridge.
2. Ensure that the LocalTalk" TM is selected in the control panel.
3. Choose Printer I/F T100 as an active printer in the Chooser.
4. Open an document for a test print. Choose the paper size, orientation
(and options if necessary) in the PageSetup.
5. Choose Print from the file menu.
PIF100
3-8
SM

4.1. USER LEVEL FUNCTIONS
To access Level 1 menus, press the

Level 1 key (the third Quick dial key
from the bottom right).
Level 1
Level 2
On Line
To exit from the Level 1 menus,
press On Line (the last Quick dial
key).
Refer to the Operators Manual for details about the menus.
h144m501.wmf
4.1.2. Level 2 Menus

To access Level 2 menus, press the
Level 2 key (the second Quick dial
key from the bottom right).
To exit from the Level 2 menus,
Level 1
Level 2
On Line
press On Line (the last Quick dial
key).
Refer to the Operators Manual for details about the menus.
h144m502.wmf
4.1.3. Dump Mode

1. Ensure that the machine is not out of paper, and the machine is turned
off.
2. Turn on the machine, then immediately enter the printer mode. Refer to
the Operators Manual, page 3.
3. If RAM CHECK x.x MB is still displayed, hold down the Level 2 key
until READY P:DUMP is displayed. If the controller has finished RAM
check, turn off the machine and return to step 1.
4. Start the application on the host computer and print a document. All the
print data will be printed in hexadecimal.
5. Turn off the dump mode by either turning off the machine or by
INITIALIZE the printer controller. Refer to section 4.1.4.
SM
4-1
PIF100
Printer
Interface Type
100
4.1.1. Level 1 Menus
4.1.4. Controller Reset and Initialize

1. Enter the printer mode.
2. Hold down the left arrow key until the message RESET appears, or
keep holding down the key until the message INITIALIZE appears in
the display.
RESET - Resets the controller to the previously saved settings, cancels the print job now in progress, and clears all the received data in
the controllers memory.
INITIALIZE - Resets the controller to the power-on default settings.
The received data will be cleared.
4.1.5. Factory Reset
1. Ensure that the machine is not out of paper, and the machine is turned
off.
2. Turn on the machine, then immediately enter the printer mode. Refer to
the operators manual, page 3.
3. If the message RAM CHECK x.x MB is still displayed, hold down the
Left Arrow key until FACTORY RESET is displayed. All the controller
settings will be returned to the factory settings.
If the controller has finished the RAM check, turn off the machine and
return to step 1.

The controller and the PIF boards can be reset using the following
procedure, without turning off the machines main power.
1. Enter the printer function. (Refer to the Operators Manual, page 3)
2. Press the following keys simultaneously.
- All the arrow keys
- On Line
- Level 1
- Level 2
Level 1
Level 2
On Line
h144m503.wmf
PIF100
4-2
SM
4.2.2. Counter Reset

The controller board has its own print counter, which is independent from the
FAX machines print counter. The counter value can be checked by using the
Level 2 menu.
To reset this counter to zero, Perform the following procedure.
Printer
Interface Type
100
1. Reset the printer interface as described in section 4.1.5.

2. While the controller is checking memory, press the following keys
simutaneously.
- Right arrow
- Down arrow
- On Line
The Message STARTUP
ERROR will appear on the
display.
Level 1
Level 2
On Line
h144m504.wmf
3. Press the right arrow and down arrow keys simultaneously.
Level 1
Level 2
On Line
h144m505.wmf
4. Enter the Level 2 menu and
confirm that the counter has
been reset to zero. Refer to the Operators Mamual, page 17 and 18.
Note that this procedure does not reset the printer interface output counter
(PRN) of the fax machine. Reset this counter manually by rewriting the RAM
addresses for this counter. Refer to the service manual for the procedure.
SM
4-3
PIF100
4.3. BIT SWITCHES

The system bit switch 14 is dedicated to printer interface operations.
System Switch 14
No
FUNCTION
COMMENTS

printer mode (with an
unit)
05 to 64 (H) (5 to 100s) - This setting determines the

machines wait time between pages in printer mode.
A longer setting will force the fax machine to wait until
the end of printer interface output before printing an
incoming fax message.
A shorter setting will allow the fax machine to print an
specfied time to process a page of data from the host
computer, the FAX machine will release the printer
resources for fax output.
0
to
7
4.4. RAM ADDRESSES

Printer interface output counter (PRN)
Model
FAX2700L
FAX4700L
FAX3700L
FAX2400L
PIF100
Millions and ten

thousands digits
800166 (H)
4801D2 (H)
800166 (H)
800166 (H)
Thousands and
hundreds digits
800165 (H)
4801D1 (H)
800165 (H)
800165 (H)
4-4
Unit and tens digits

800164 (H)
4801D0 (H)
800164 (H)
800164 (H)
SM
5. TROUBLESHOOTING
Action if No
Go to step 2.
Fix the cable connection.
Symptom: SERVICE REQ. Exxxx is displayed while in printer mode.

Check
Action if Yes
Action if No
1. The FAX machine disThere is a hardware error
Reset the printer interface
inside the machine.
unit as explained in secton
play SERVICE CODE xFollow the troubleshooting
4.2.1, then go to step 2.
xx ?
procedure as described in
(Refer to the table below
the FAX machines service
for details.)
manual.
2. Is the SERVICE REQ.
Replace the controller
The problem has been
board.
solved.
code still displayed while
in printer mode ?
Error Code
E0003
E0004
E0006
E0009
E0014
Error Condition
Fusing unit error
Main motor error
Polygonal mirror motor error
Laser diode error
Comminication error between the controller and the FAX machine.
Symptom: SERVICE REQ. Cxxxx is displayed while in printer mode.

Check
Action if Yes
Action if No
1. Reset the printer interReplace the controller
board.
solved.
face unit as explained in
section 4.2.1.
Does the machine still
show a SERVICE REQ.
code ?
SM
5-1
PIF100
Printer
Interface Type
100
Symptom: The machine does not go into printer mode.

Check
Action if Yes
1. The On Line and Data
Replace the FAX machines
FCE or FDU board.
LEDs light at power up ?
2. Is the cable from the
Replace the cable.
printer interface connected to the FAX machines FDU correctly ?
Symptom: RAM ERROR is displayed while in printer mode.

Check
Action if Yes
Action if No
1. The error message apGo to step 2.
unit as explained in section
pear after installing an op4.2.1, then go to step 3.
tional SIMM memory ?
2. Is the SIMM memory inReplace the SIMM memory. Reinstall the SIMM memory.
stalled correctly ?
3. Does the message apReplace the controller
board or the SIMM memory. solved.
pear again while in
printer mode ?
Symptom: STARTUP ERROR is displayed while in printer mode.
Check
Action if Yes
Action if No
1. The error message apThe error message should
be STARTUP ERROR
unit as explained in section
pear after resetting the
>A4 (paper size).
4.2.1, then go to step 2.
printer interface ?
This is not a problem. Press
> (right arrow key) to go
back to standby mode.
2. Does the message apReplace the controller
board.
solved.
pear again while in the
printer mode ?
PIF100
5-2
SM
Symptom: Nothing is printed after the controller receives the data.

Check
Action if Yes
Action if No
1. The Check Display LED
Enter printer mode, and
Remove and reseat the
check the display.
cassette.
blink ?
Go to step 2.
2. PAPER SET AUTO xx
The paper size requested
Go to step 3.
does not match the paper
displayed ?
size in the cassette.
Replace the paper with the
size requested by the
machine, or press the right
arrow key (Feed) to print on
the current paper.
Tip: If AUTO CONT. is
enabled in the Level 2
menu, the data will be
printed on paper, even if the
paper size does not match
with the paper size of the
document to be printed.
3. Is MANUAL FEED disThe controller is set for the
bypass feed mode.
by one of the following
played ?
Press the right arrow key
methods, and print the
(Feed) to print each page.
document again.
Disable MANUAL FEED in
Try each method in the
the Level 2 menu, if bypass
order given.
feeder is not being used.
1. Remove and reseat the
cassette.
2. Press the left arrow key
until RESET is displayed.
3. Press the left arrow key
until INITIALIZE is
displayed.
4. Reset the printer
interface as explained in
section 4.2.1.
5. Turn off the machine and
turn it back on.
SM
5-3
PIF100
Printer
Interface Type
100
5.2. SETUP MISTAKES
Symptom: The printed image does not fit on the paper.

Check
Action if Yes
1. The paper size and orien- Adjust the paper position in
the cassette or in the
tation settings of the apbypass feed slot.
plication, printer driver,
If the problem remains,
and the printer controller
adjust the FAX machines
agree ?
print registration settings.
Action if No
Change any incorrect
settings as shown below.
Mobile Computing
Radio Tower
Telephone
Computer
Laptop computer
Modem
Public Switch
Printer Setting = Portrait
Printer Setting = Landscape
Radio Tower
Modem
Computer
Laptop computer
Modem
Radio Tower
Public Switch
Public Switch
Telephone
Telephone
Mobile
Computing
Computer
Mobile
Computing
Laptop computer
Printed Area
H144T501.wmf
Example: Print orientation error.
PIF100
5-4
SM
Action if Partial
The wrong symbol set is
selected.
Choose an appropriate
symbol set in the Level 1
menu.
Symptom: PostScript TM is not available even if an optional PostScript TM cartridge is

installed.
Check
Action if Yes
Action if No
1. Is OPT set to CARIf the cartridge is correctly
Change the OPT setting to
installed, replace the
CARTRIDGE.
TRIDGE in the Level 2
cartridge.
menu ?
5.3. PRINT QUALITY

Check if the Toner Save Mode is selected in the printer drivers setup, and/or
if Print Image Density is set at Dark or Light. Change any unsuitable settings
or refer to the Troubleshooting section in the FAX machines service manual.
SM
5-5
PIF100
Printer
Interface Type
100
Symptom: Printed data appears as strange characters.

Check
Action if All
1. All of the data appear as
The controllers emulation
setting does not match the
strange characters ?
Some of the symbols ap- printer driver.
Change the emulation
pear strange ?
setting or the printer driver
to match each other.
6. PARTS CATALOG
6.1. TYPE 100
1
2
100
Printer
Interface Type
100
6
100
3
100
100
7
100
10
100
100
9 100
100
100
13
100
100
12
10
11
14
15
100
13
14
100
100
17
18
20
100
19
16
100
100
101
21
100
100
100
26
100
25
24
23
100
22
H144A501.wmf
SM
6-1
PIF100
Parts List
Index
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
100
101
*
*
*
*
PIF100
Part No.
H1443625
H1443626
H1443420
H1443618
H1443623
H1443640
H1443619
H1443616
H1443620
H1443624
H1443610
H1443621
H0202318
H1443627
H1443611
11050321
H1443615
H1443612
H1443617
H1443622
H5155355
H1444429
H5156075
H5156060
16070841
H5155351
03530060Z
03530160Z
H1443438
H1444335
H1444336
H1444337
Description
Bracket - PIF - 4
Bracket - PIF - 3
Hook - H515
Cover - Right
Side Plate Right
Cover - SIMM Slot
Cover - Font Cartridge
Cover - Upper
Spring - Font Cartridge
Hook
Base - Frame
Guide - Font Cartridge
Rivet - NRP345
Insulating Sheet
Side Plate
Edge Saddle - EDS25L
Spring Plate
Side Plate - Left
Cover - Left
Cover - Optional I/F
Harness: PIF - Controller
Guide Rail
PCB - Controller - A1
PCB - PIF - L
Ferrite Core
Harness: FDU - PIF
Philips Pan Head Screw - M3 x 6
Philips Pan Head Screw - M3 x 16
Decal - Operation Panel
Operators Manual - English
Operators Manual - German
Operators Manual - French
6-2
SM
PRINTER INTERFACE
TYPE 200
SERVICE MANUAL
For the H515
Trademark Notices
Arial and Times New Roman are registered trademark of the Monotype Corporation plc.
Bitstream and Fontware are registered trademarks and Swiss, Dutch, and FaceLift are trademarks of Bitstream Inc.
CG is a registered trademark of Miles Inc.
CG Times, based on Times New Roman under license from the Monotype Corporation plc, is
a product of Miles, Inc.
IBM and IBM PC are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation.
HP Laser Jet, HP Laser Jet+, HP Laser Jet 500, HP Laser Jet series II, HP Laser Jet IIP, HP
Laser Jet series III, HP Laser Jet IIIP, HP Laser Jet IIISi are trademarks, and HewlettPackard and PCL are registered trademarks of Hewlett-Packard Company.
LocalTalk, TrueType, AppleTalk, Macintosh, and LaserWriter are trademarks of Apple
Computer, Inc.
MS-DOS and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
Centronics is a trademark of Centronics Data Computer Corporation.
PostScript is a trademark of Adobe Systems Inc.
Times and Univers are registered trademarks of Linotype AG and/or its subsidiaries.
General Notice: Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and
may be trademarks of their companies.
1.1. CONTROLLER SPECIFICATIONS
Resolution
RAM Capacity
Emulation
Resident Fonts
Paper Size
Note: All the acceptable sizes
must be in portrait orientation.
Host Interface
Specifications
300 x 300 dpi
1.0 MB (Standard)
Upgradable to 2, 4, 8, 16, or 32 MB
Standard:
HP LaserJet 4 emulation (LJ4 mode)
HP GL/2 emulation (EPSON GL/2 mode)
Optional:
PostScript Level 2
22 scalable fonts and 1 bitmap fonts
(Refer to the operators manual for more details.)
A4
A5
B5
LT (Letter)
HLT (Half letter)
LGL (Legal)
GLT (Government letter)
GLG (Government legal)
EXE (Executive)
F4
MON (Monarch)
C10 (Commercial 10)
DL
C5
IB5 (International B5)
C6
Standard:
Bi-Centronics parallel interface x 1
Optional:
LocalTalk Interface x 1

Item
Resolution
Print Speed (Engine Speed)
Warm-up Time
Paper Size
SM
Specifications
300 x 300 dpi
Up to 10 ppm (Letter or A4)
20 seconds or less at normal temperature
The available paper sizes are not the same as those
available with the controller. They depend on the
machines hardware specifications.
Refer to the operators manual for details.
1-1
H515 PIF200
Printer
Interface Type
200
Item
1.3. BLOCK DIAGRAM AND DATA PATH
FDU
FCE
PSTN
NCU
Modem
Fax
Printer Interface
Controller
Page
Memory
Firmware
PIF-L 2
CPU
C PU
Font or PostScript
Cartridge
(Optional)
(Optional)
C PU
LocalTalk I/F
Bi-Centronics I/F
ADDRESS/DATA BUS
Page
Memory
Laser Unit
Video/Command Interface
PC-AT
Compatible
Macintosh
H144V501.wmf
The Printer Interface Unit consists of two (2) logic boards called the
Controller Board and the Interface Board (identified in the Service Manual as
the PIF-L2 Board).
The Controller Board contains a CPU chip, ROM for the firmware, Page
Memory, an optional Font or Postscript Interface Connector and two (2) Host
Interface Connectors ( a standard Bi-Centronic or an optional Local Talk).
Refer to the Controller Board Specifications for additional information.
The PIF-L2 Board also contains a CPU chip which is used to emulate the
commands from the Controller Board and to modify the displayed message
in the display panel of the FAX machine. For example, if the FAX machine
can not use Legal size paper, the CPU chip on the PIF-L2 board will modify
the displayed message in the FAX machine to eliminate the displayed
selection of the Legal size paper. If the option of the legal size paper is not
displayed, the operator can not choose the legal size paper.
Data Path
The Controllers CPU chip will interpret the print data from the host computer
and will write an imaginary page of data in the Page Memory on the
Controller Board. After a page of print data has been stored in the Page
Memory, the Controller CPU chip will transfer the page of print data to the
CPU chip in the FAX machine will then pass the data directly to the Laser
Unit for printing.
H515 PIF200
1-2
SM
The interface between the CPU chips on the Controller board and the FAX
machine is known as "Video Interface". The function of the Video Interface is
to specify the handshaking procedure and the timing of the data transfer.
Dual Access
Since the printer resources are shared, the FAX machine was designed to
perform multiple tasks.
If the computer attempts to initiate a print task while the FAX machine is busy
receiving a FAX message or printing a report, the print data from the
computer will be received and stored in the Page Memory on the Controller
Board. At the completion of the FAX machine task, the machine will switch
the printer resources of the Controller board to the computer printing task. If
the print data exceeds the Controllers memory size, the print data will be
spooled in the computer (if the computers operating system or the
Application Program contains the Print Spooler Function).
The term "Spooler" is an acronym for Simultaneous Print Operation On Line.
Print Spooler is a computer software program that, when the printer is busy,
will intercept the print data that is on the way to the printer and will redirect it
to a disk or memory. When the printer is no longer busy, the print data will
then be sent to the printer. An advantage of the Print Spooler feature is that
by diverting the entire print job to disk or memory and then coordinating it
with the printer, frees the user from waiting until the print task is completed
before moving to another task.

The required +24 volts and the +5 volts are supplied to the Printer Interface
from the FAX machine. The PIF-L2 board will then generate a different +5
volts for the CPU chips located on the PIF-L2 and Controller boards.
SM
1-3
H515 PIF200
Printer
Interface Type
200
If a FAX message is received while the machine is busy printing data from
the computer, the FAX message will be received and the data will be
temporary stored in the SAF memory of the FAX machine. At the completion
of the computer print task, the machine will print the received FAX message
that was stored in the SAF Memory.

2.1. CONTROLLER
2.1.1. Bi-Centronics TM Interface
The parallel interface connector pin assignments and a description of the
interface signals are shown in the table below.
Return
Pin
Signal
Direction
19
STROBE
IN
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
DATA1
DATA2
DATA3
DATA4
DATA5
DATA6
DATA7
DATA8
IN
IN
IN
IN
IN
IN
IN
IN
10
28
ACKNLG
29
BUSY
30
PE
OUT
13
SLCT
OUT
14
AUTO
IN
15
16
17
18
19~30
NC
GND
CHASSIS
GND
NC
GND
31
INIT
About a 10 s pulse width. LOW

indicates that data has been received
and the printer is ready to accept more
data.
A HIGH signal indicates that the printer
cannot receive data. The signal goes
HIGH in the following cases:
1. During printing
2. When off line
3. During a printer-error state
A HIGH signal indicates that the printer is
out of paper.
A LOW signal enables automatic line
feed upon receiving a CR signal. This
signal is detected only when the
machine has just been turned on, or
when the printer interface is initialized.
Not used
Logic ground level
Chassis ground, which is connected to
the signal ground.
Not used
Twisted-pair return signal ground level.
When this signal goes LOW, the printer
controller ignores the STROBE signal.
OUT
12
The STROBE pulse for reading data.

The pulse width must be at least 0.5 s
at the receiving terminal.
These signals represent parallel data bits
1 to 8. Each signal is at the HIGH level
when the data is a logical 1 and LOW
when it is a logical 0.
OUT
11
IN
SM
Description
2-1
H515 PIF200
Printer
Interface Type
200
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
Return
Pin
Signal
Direction
32
ERROR
GND
NC
+5V
SLCTIN
This signal goes LOW when the printer

is:
1. Out of paper
2. In an error state
3. Off line
Same as for Pins 19~30
Not used
Pulled up to +5V through a 1K resistor.
OUT
33
34
35
36
Description
IN
Note: All interface conditions are based on TTL levels. Both the rise and
fall times of each signal must be less than 0.2 microseconds.
Data transfer must be carried out by observing the ACKNLG or
BUSY signal.
(Data transfer to this printer can be carried out only after receipt of
the ACKNLG signal or when the level of the BUSY signal is LOW.)
The "Direction" column refers to the direction of signal flow as
viewed from the printer.
Return denotes the twisted-pair return to be connected at signal
ground level.
For the interface wiring, be sure to use a twisted-pair cable for
each signal and to complete the connection on the return side.
The ACKNLG pulse width varies.
H515 PIF200
2-2
SM
To enable bidirectional parallel interface communications between the printer

and computer, set the connector pin assignments as follows:
2.1.2. LocalTalk TM Interface (Optional)
Printer Interface
Computer
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Chassis GND
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Printer
Interface Type
200
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
17
17
1825
31
32
36
16, 1930, 33 connected to GND

H144d501.wmf
Specifications
Compatibility
Baud rate
Topology
Signaling standard
Signal encoding
Frame format
Node identification
Cabling
SM
Phase 1 and phase 2

230.4 kbps
Parallel bus, low-resistance transformer isolated, floating
ground.
EIA standard RS422, balanced voltage
FMO (bi-phase) space
SDLC (Synchronous Data Link Control)
AppleTalk TM logical address is self-configuring; no user
action required.
AppleTalk TM 8-pin mini DIN
2-3
H515 PIF200
2.2. PIF
Controller
PIF-L2
FDU/FCE
on the
Fax Machine
5LSYNC
5VSYNC
5PRRDY
IC4
5PIFRESET
SWINT
PPRDY
RESET
1INTPR
LCD/KEY DATA
SERIAL CLOCK
CPU
CTBSY
COMMAND
SERIAL DATA
SETBSY
STATUS
SERIAL DATA
DARK
LIGHT
NORMAL
VIDEO SIGNAL
SERIAL CLOCK
Print Density Adjustment

Circuit
5LGATE
VIDEO SIGNAL
5PRINT
5CPRDY
FAX
H144D511.wmf
The CPU on the PIF-L2 works as a interpreter (emulator) between the printer
controller and the fax machine.
The controller will send various command signals to the FAX machine
through the CPU on the PIF-L2 for requesting hardware status (e.g.,
cassette paper size, jam, toner end) and for specifying a cassette for
printing. The FAX machine will respond to a command signal with a status
signal.
The CPU on the PIF-L2 emulates the commands for FAX machines
hardware specifications (e.g, some models can only have one cassette).
H515 PIF200
2-4
SM
2.2.2. Key/Display Emulation

While the operator is using the printer function from the FAX machine, the
FAX machines keys and LCD are connected to the printer controller board
through the CPU on the PIF-L2 board.
Because the capabilities of the controller and the FAX machine are not the
same (for example, Monarch paper is available with the controller, but not
with the FAX machine), the PIF-L2 will emulate the user key operations for
the controller board and the display messages to the FAX machine, so that
the operator cannot select settings that the FAX machine is not capable of
performing.
The controller board controls the print density adjustment using the Level 2
menu. Depending on the density setting sent from the controller board, the
PIF-L2 board will adjust the pulse width of each pixel.
Controller
CPU
+5V
PIF-L2
CN2-16, 18
+5V
+5V
+5V
FDU
DC/DC
Converter
+24V
5PIFRESET
FCE
CN1-20
CN1-2
CPU
+5V
CPU
RESET
Reset Circuit
H144D510.wmf
If the FAX machines CPU activates the 5PIFRESET signal, the reset circuit
on the PIF-L2 board will reset its CPU, and the DC/DC converter on the
PIF-L2 board will shut down the +5V supply to the Controller board.
The procedure for totally resetting the printer interface is described in section 4.
SM
2-5
H515 PIF200
Printer
Interface Type
200
2.2.3. Print Density Control
2.3. VIDEO INTERFACE

2.3.1. Overview
The video interface specified between the printer interface and the FAX
machine controls print timing.
T1
LSYNC
T4
VIDEO
T3
T2
L2
VSYNC
VIDEO
L1
L3
W1
W2
W3
H144D503.wmf
H515 PIF200
2-6
SM
T5
T1
LSYNC
T6
VIDEO
T2
The LSYNC signal goes low for T1 time before the printer interface sends
each line of print data. Then, the printer interface will send the video data
(T2) after the falling edge of LSYNC was detected.
Parameter
T1
T2
T5
T6
Setting
2.36 s
9.44 s
1.253 ms
295 ns
The left margin (W1) and the right margin (W3) are both 4 mm.
The VSYNC signal will go low for T3 time before the printer interface sends
each page of print data. Then, the printer interface will send the video data
(T4) after the falling edge of VSYNC was detected.
Parameter
T3
T4
Setting
22.55 ms
depends on paper length
The top margin (L1) and the bottom margin (L3) are both 4 mm.
SM
2-7
H515 PIF200
Printer
Interface Type
200
H144D506.wmf
2.3.4. LEDs
The LEDs on the control panel indicates the status within the PIF.
Please note that the On Line LED is always on when the PIF is installed.
u
Button
q
LED
(Red)
LEDs on the
Operation Panel
On Line LED
Data LED
r
LED
(Green)
LEDs on the Control Panel
Fast flashing of the green LED
Slow flashing of the green LED

Check Display
LED and
"Check Printer"
on the LCD
H515 PIF200
Lighting of the red LED

Fast flashing of the red LED
Slow flashing of the red LED
2-8
Condition
On Line LED is always on when the
PIF is installed.
Print data is being received to the
controller.
Data is being printed.
Print data has been received to the
controller.
Paper jam, cover open, no paper, or
no toner.
The manual feed mode is on.
Software error.
SM
3. INSTALLATION
CAUTION
Before installing the printer interface unit and its options, perform the
following:
1. Print out all the messages stored in the memory.
2. Print out the list of user-programmed items and the system parameter list.
3.1. PRINTER INTERFACE UNIT

Printer
Interface Type
200
Model: FAX4700L
[B]
1. Remove the cassette cover [A] from the

rear cover [B].
Note: The cassette cover is not installed
in some models.
[A]
H144i564.wmf
2. Remove the rear cover [B] (2 screws) and

[B]
two small covers [C] (1 screw) and [D].
[C]
H144i510.wmf
[D]
3. Install the rear cover [B] back on the

[F]
corner), and install two brackets [F]
(2 screws) and [G] (2 screws - one of
these screws also secures the rear cover).
[G]
H144i513.wmf
SM
3-1
H515 PIF200
4. Attach the brackets [H] and [I] onto

the bracket plate [J] (2 screws).
Note: For the brackets [H] and [I],
used the ones which have the letter
"B" stamped on them.
[J]
[I]
5. Attach the bracket plate [J] (4

screws) and the side bracket [L] (1
screw) to the Printer Interface Unit.
[H]
[L]
H144i568.wmf
[Letter "B"]
6. Remove the side covers [M] and [N].

[O]
7. Connect the harness [O] to the FDU

cover. Hook the Printer Interface
Unit onto the machine by the
brackets [G] and [H], then secure
the unit (3 screws).
8. Reinstall the side covers [M] and [N].
9. Connect a parallel printer cable to
the Printer Interface Unit.
H144i569.wmf
[P]

main switch.
11. Check if the On Line indicator on the
operation panel is lit. If not, check
the harness connection from the
Printer Interface Unit to the FDU.
12. Print a status sheet by pressing the
button [P] at the top of the printer
interface unit.
[M]
[N]
H144i570.wmf
[Mylar sheet]
13. Place the mylar as shown in the

diagram.
H144i580.wmf
H515 PIF200
3-2
SM
3.1.
3.2. OPTIONS
[B]
3.2.1. SIMM MEMORY

2. Install a SIMM memory [B] to the
RAM SLOT (lower slot).
3. Reinstall the cover [A] (4 screws).
[A]
H144i573.wmf
Printer
Interface Type
200
4. Turn on the machine, and print the

status sheet to verify that the
amount of memory shown on the
status sheet is correct.
SIMM RAM Requirements

1. Type
2. Number of pins
3. Access speed
4. Capacity
5. Parity
6. Dimensions
PC-AT
72
70 ns or faster
1, 2, 4, 8, 16 or 32 MB
Dont care
Size within 108 mm x 26 mm (4.25" x 1.02")
Thickness within 10 mm (0.4 ")
[B]
3.2.2. PostScript TM SIMM

2. Install a PostScript SIMM [B] to the
ROM SLOT (upper slot).
3. Reinstall the cover [A] (4 screws).
4. Turn on the machine, and print the
status sheet to verify that the
PostScript SIMM was correctly
installed.
SM
3-3
[A]
H144i573.wmf
H515 PIF200
3.2.3. LocalTalk TM /Serial Interface
[B]
[C]
[A]
H144i573.wmf
H144i573.wmf
1. Change the slide switches and jumper settings for the required type of
interface as shown in the diagram on the left. The default setting is
LocalTalk
Note: The Current Loop is a special type of serial interface, which
transfers binary data by closing and opening the current loop.
2. Remove the cover [A] (4 screws), and the rubber cap [B].
3. Install the interface board [C] as shown in the diagram (2 screws), then
reinstall the rear cover [A].
4. Turn on the machine, and print the status sheet to verify that the
interface board is correctly installed.
H515 PIF200
3-4
SM
3.3. CONNECTING UP THE PRINTER INTERFACE UNIT

3.3.1. Parallel Interface
A Bi-Centronics parallel cable is required to connect the unit to a host PC.
Refer to section 2.1 for the interface specifications and cable pin assignments.
Notes: The optional PostScript board is required to print from a Macintosh PC.
TM
2 MB or more of memory is required to use the LocalTalk
interface and the PostScript board.
3.4. TESTING THE CONNECTIONS

3.4.1. Printer Interface to Fax Connection
1. Turn on the machine. All LEDs dedicated for the printer interface option
should light at power on.
2. Print the status sheet by pressing the button on the control panel of the
printer interface. If the status sheet is not printed, check the harness
connection between the printer interface and the FAX machine.
SM
3-5
H515 PIF200
Printer
Interface Type
200
Connect a LocalTalk cable from a Macintosh PC to the LocalTalk port on the

interface board.
3.4.2. DOS Based Computers

Important
It is not recommended for service technicians to operate the customers
computer to avoid any damage to the customers data files.
The following procedures are explained only for testing purpose.
1. Ensure that the printer cable is properly connected.
2. Turn on the machine, then turn on the computer.
3. Ensure that the printer interface is on line.
4. After DOS has started, type the following at the C:\> prompt:
PRINT CONFIG.SYS
The computer displays the following:
NAME OF LIST DEVICE (PRN);
Then, type the following:
LPT1
The config.sys file will be printed from the FAX machine.
If nothing is printed, ensure that the proper printer cable is used and connected securely to both the computer and the printer interface.
Printer drivers for DOS applications do not come with the printer interface
unit, select one of the following printers in the order of preference listed below.
EPL-5500
EPL-3000
EPL-5200/5200+
HP LaserJet III/IIIP/IIID
HP LaserJet IIISi
HP Laser Jet 4L
EPL-5600
EPL-9000
HP LaserJet 4
If an emulation other than HP PCL5 is required, select EPSON GL/2 emulation mode. The emulation setting of the printer interface should be changed
from the default (HP LaserJet 4), if this is selected.
H515 PIF200
3-6
SM
3. Printer Driver for Microsoft Windows

1. Insert the Windows driver disk in the A-drive (or B-drive).
2. Choose Run in the File menu of the Program Manager, then type the
following:
A:\INSTALL (OR B:\INSTALL)
3. Follow the instructions which appear on the computer screen.
4. After the driver installation is finished, set up the driver referring to the
Operators Manual.
Important
It is not recommended for servise technicians to operate the customers
computer to avoid any damage to the customers data files.
The following procedures are explained only for testing purpose.
1. Install the printer driver as explained in PS option operators manual.
2. Ensure that the LocalTalk" is selected in the control panel.
3. Choose Printer I/F as an active printer in the Chooser.
4. Open an document for a test print. Choose a paper size, orientation (and
options if necessary) in the PageSetup.
5. Choose Print from the file menu.
SM
3-7
H515 PIF200
Printer
Interface Type
200

4.1. USER LEVEL FUNCTIONS
4.1.1. Controller Reset
Press and hold the button on the control panel for a few seconds until both
LEDs are flashing alternately on and off.
This will reset the controller to the previously
saved settings, cancel the print job now in
u
q
r
progress, and will clear all the received data in the
Button
LED
LED
controlers memory.
(Green)
Controll Panel
Press and hold the button on the control panel for about 8 seconds until both
LEDs are flashing together.
This will reset the controller to the power-on default settings. Any received
data will be cleared.

4.2.1. Dump Mode
To enter the PIF service mode, turn the main switch off, hold down the button
on the control panel, then turn the main switch back on. The flashing of the
LEDs on the control panel changes as follows.
Button
u
u
u
u
u
LED
(Red)
LED
(Green)
r
r
q
r
q
r
: Start up
: Pattern 0
: Pattern 1
: Pattern 2
: Pattern 3
1. Ensure that the paper is loaded and the machine is turned off.
2. Hold down the button on the control panel and turn the main switch back
on. Release the button when the LEDs flash at pattern 1.
3. Start the application on the host computer and print a document. All of
the print data will be printed in hexadecimal dump.
4. Turn off the dump mode by either turning off the machine or by initializing
the printer controler.
SM
4-1
H515 PIF200
Printer
Interface Type
200
(Red)
4.1.2. Controller Initialize
4.2.2. Factory Reset

on. Release the button when the LEDs flash at pattern 3. Press the button again within 2 seconds.

The controler and the PIF can be reset using the following procedure,
without turning off the machine.
1. Enter the printer function. (Refer to the operators manual for the function
number. This number is different for each model.)
2. Press the following keys at the same time.
- All the arrow keys
- The last Quick Dial Key
- The second Quick dial key form the bottom right
- The third Quick dial key from the bottom right
h144m510.wmf
4.2.4. Counter Reset

The controler has its own print counter, which is independent from the FAX
machines print counter. The counter value can be checked by printing out
the status sheet. (Described as the "PAGE COUNT" in the CONFIG column.)
To reset this counter to zero, perform the following.
on. Release the button when the LEDs flash at pattern 2. Press the button again within 2 seconds.
3. Print out the status sheet and confirm that the counter has been reset to
zero.
Note that this procedure does not reset the printer interface output counter
(PRN) of the FAX machine. Reset this counter manually by rewriting the
RAM addresses for this counter.
H515 PIF200
4-2
SM
4.3. BIT SWITCHES

This bit switch is dedicated to printer interface operations.
System Switch 14
FUNCTION
COMMENTS

printer mode (with an
unit)
05 to 64 (H) (5 to 100s) - This setting determines the

machines wait time between pages in printer mode.
A longer setting forces the FAX machine to wait until
the end of printer interface output before printing any
incoming FAX message.
A shorter setting allows the FAX machine to print
incoming FAX messages while printing from a
computer. If the controler takes more than the specfied
time to process a page of data from the host
computer, the FAX machine releases the printer
resources for FAX output.
0
to
7
4.4. RAM ADDRESSES

Printer interface output counter (PRN)
Model
H516
H521
H515
H526
H527
SM
Millions and ten

thousands digits
800166 (H)
800166 (H)
4801D2 (H)
800166 (H)
800166 (H)
Thousands and
hundreds digits
800165 (H)
800165 (H)
4801D1 (H)
800165 (H)
800165 (H)
4-3
Unit and tens digits

800164 (H)
800164 (H)
4801D0 (H)
800164 (H)
800164 (H)
H515 PIF200
Printer
Interface Type
200
No
5. TROUBLESHOOTING
Symptom: The machine does not go into the printer mode.
Action:
1. Check if the On Line and Data LEDs light at power up. If not, replace the
FAX machines FCE or FDU.
Symptom: The green LED and the red LED on the control panel repeatedly
flashes alternately and then simultaneously (an error indication).
Action:
1. There is a hardware error inside the machine. Follow the troubleshooting
procedure as described in the FAX machines service manual.
2. Reset the printer interface unit as explained in section 4.2. If the problem
still remains, replace the controller.
3. If the error indication appears after installing an optional SIMM memory
board, check if the SIMM board is correctly installed. If the problem still
remains, reinstall or replace the SIMM memory board.
5.2. SETUP MISTAKES

Symptom: Nothing is printed after the controller receives the data.
Action:
1. Check if the red LED on the PIF is blinking. If so, the controller is set for
bypass feed mode. Press the button on the control panel to print each
page. If not, pull out the cassette and put it back.
2. Check if the paper size requested matches the paper size in the cassette. Replace the paper with the correct size, or change the paper size
setting using the printer driver or the Remote Control Panel.
Refer to the printer interface operation manual for how to use the Remote Control Panel utilities.
SM
5-1
H515 PIF200
Printer
Interface Type
200
2. Check if the On Line LED is on. If not, check the connection between the
printer interface and the FAX machines FDU. If the problem still remains,
replace the cable.
3. Reset the printer interface by one of the following methods, and print the
document again.
Pull out the cassette and put it back.
Reset the controller as explained in section 4.1.
Reset the printer interface as explained in section 4.2.
Turn off the machine and turn it back on.
H515 PIF200
5-2
SM
Symptom: The printed image does not fit on the paper.

Check
Action if Yes
1. Does the paper size and
Adjust the paper position in
orientation settings of the the cassette or in the
application, printer driver, bypass feed slot.
If the problem remains,
and the printer controller
adjust the FAX machines
agree ?
print registration settings.
Printer
Interface Type
200
Action if No
Change any incorrect
settings as shown below.
Mobile Computing
Radio Tower
Telephone
Computer
Laptop computer
Modem
Public Switch
Printer Setting = Portrait
Printer Setting = Landscape
Radio Tower
Modem
Computer
Telephone
Telephone
Mobile
Computing
Computer
Mobile
Computing
Laptop computer
Modem
Radio Tower
Public Switch
Public Switch
Laptop computer
Printed Area
H144T501.wmf
Example: Print orientation error.
SM
5-3
H515 PIF200
Symptom: Printed data appears as strange characters.

Check
Action if All
1. Does all the data appear
The controllers emulation
setting does not match the
as strange characters ?
printer driver.
Do some of the symbols
Change the emulation
appear strange ?
setting or the printer driver
to match each other.
Action if Partial
The wrong symbol set is
selected.
Choose an appropriate
symbol set in the Level 1
menu.
5.3. PRINT QUALITY

Check if the Toner Save Mode is selected in the printer drivers setup, and/or
if Print Image Density is set at Dark or Light. Change any unsuitable settings
or refer to the Troubleshooting section in the FAX machines service manual.
H515 PIF200
5-4
SM
6. PARTS CATALOG
Printer
Interface Type
200
6.1. TYPE 200
H144A050.wmf
SM
6-1
H515 PIF200
Parts List(TYPE200)
Index
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
100
101
102
*
*
*
H515 PIF200
Part No.
H5156076
H5156077
H5156078
H1443332
H1443809
H1443811
H1443812
H1443820
H1443821
H1443826
H1443823
H1443311
H1443313
H1443325
H1443420
H1443624
H1443625
H1443626
H1443801
H1443802
H1443804
H1443807
H1443808
H1443810
H5155349
H5155350
H5155351
11050334
03130060Z
03530060Z
04523008Z
H1448600
H1448602
H1448605
Description
PCB - EPL-5500
PCB - PIF96
PCB - CONTROLLER
COVER - RS232C
COVER - TYPE B
COVER -HOOK
COVER - L/T
COVER - PIF2 - UPPER
COVER - PIF2 - FRONT
COVER - PIF2 - LEFT
COVER - PIF2 - REAR
BRACKET - UPPER
BRACKET - RIGHT
BRACKET - LEFT
HOOK - H515
HOOK
BRACKET - PIF-4
BRACKET - PIF-3
BASE FRAME
FRAME - FRONT
FRAME - REAR
BRACKET - PCB
BRACKET - HOOK
BRACKET - PIF
HARNESS - PIF96 - 5P
HARNESS - PIF96 - 20P
HARNESS : FDU - PIF(20P)
EDGE - 17
PAN HEAD SCREW - M3X6
SCREW - M3X6
BIND TAPPING SCREW - M3 x 8
OPERATORS MANUAL - ENGLISH
OPERATORS MANUAL - GERMAN
OPERATORS MANUAL - FRENCH
6-2
SM
RICOH RS232 PC-FAX EXPANDER TYPE 140

SERVICE MANUAL
This product is to be used with the RICOH FAX4700L. Users of this document should
be either service trained or certified by successfully completing a Ricoh Training
Program in English.
Standards Applied
EIA/TIA RS-232 (up to 19.2k bps internal speed)

EIA/TIA-SP2388A (Class 2)
Installation Method
Service Installation
Program is downloaded with SROM copy tool from EPROM board
Agency Approvals
FCC part 15, Class A (USA)

IC Class A (CANADA)
UL, cUL
Compatiblility
PC/AT Hardware:
OS:
FAX Applications:
Fax Applications for
Networks
Networks:
80486DX2-66MHz, 80586-150MHz
DOS 6.X, Windows 3.11, Windows 95
Cheyenne Bitware for Ricoh, MS-FAX Win95
WinFax PRO 4.0 (Win3.1), WinFax PRO 7.0 (Win95),
Cheyenne FAXserve for NetWare 3.0
WinFax PRO for Networks 4.0
Windows For Workgroups 3.11,
Software Bundling
PCFAX application : Cheyenne Bitware for Ricoh

TWAIN Driver : Ricoh CFM TWAIN
All copyrights, trademarks, and tradenames are the property of their respective owners.
RICOH RS232 PC-FAX EXPANDER TYPE 140

PARTS CHECKLIST
1.
Installation Guide
2.
Users Guide
3.
DIU PWA Assembly
4.
EPROM FCE F/L Type 140
5.
Grounding Strap
6.
Harness, Internal DIU-FCE
7.
Bracket
8.
Screws, M3 x 6, (5)
9.
Cheyenne Bitware for Ricoh, Diskette
10.
Cheyenne Bitware for Ricoh, Users Manual
11.
Ricoh CFM TWAIN, Diskette
12.
Ricoh CFM TWAIN Supplement (Users Guide)
Additional Requirements:
RS-232 Shielded Serial Cable, User Supplied
Flash/SRAM Copy Tool, Ricoh Part No. H5159100
Universal EPROM PCB, Ricoh Part No. H5159500
Loop Back Connector, Purchased Locally
RICOH RS232 PC-FAX EXPANDER TYPE 140 SERVICE MANUAL

1.
INTRODUCTION
The Ricoh RS232 PC-Fax Expander Type 140 is a service-installed fax option kit
that will add an RS-232 serial interface - the Digitial Interface Unit (DIU) - to the Ricoh
FAX4700L fax machine. With a shielded serial transmission cable provided by the
customer, the DIU is connected from the fax machine to a personal computer serial
communication port. When installed, it will allow the PC to use the fax machine to:
transmit and receive fax messages from the PC through the fax machine,
direct and through fax memory
scan documents from supporting applications using the TWAIN driver,
scan documents from the fax into the PC
use the fax machine to print PC file documents
The PCFE has been satisfactorily tested with some network applications.
The PC-Fax Expander is designed to work with the 300 dpi Printer Interface
option (PIF Type 100 and Type 200) for improved print quality.
The Type 140 option is one of the requirements for the Scan Autoroute option.
It will permit the connection to the network File Server. It is used with the NEST card
option.
The option kit includes:
a pre-programmed EPROM which is used to modify the System Flash ROM

in the fax machine,
a faxing application (Cheyenne Bitware for Ricoh) to be installed in the PC,
a TWAIN driver (Ricoh CFM TWAIN) to be installed in the PC.
Not included in the option are:
the RS-232 shielded serial cable that is used to connect the fax machine with
the PC,
a null modem adapter (the null function is built into the DIU),
a loop back connector,
OCR software.
FAX4700L Base Machine Changes
SM
An OMR sheet for programming the User Parameter Switch 14 will not be
available.
PC-FAX Expander Type 140
FAX Expander
Type 140
The options software will load a new User Parameter Switch (14) to the fax
machines parameter switches. It will add fax Function 17 to enable scanning from
the fax machine and fax Function 27 will be added specifically to delete PC faxing
memory files. It will not have OCR capability no OCR software has been provided.

2.
FUNCTIONS
2.1.
PC-FAX EXPANDER TYPE 140 FUNCTIONS
2.2.
PC-FAX EXPANDER TYPE 140 FEATURES
2.3.
Direct transmission and reception

Fax SAF memory transmission and reception
Local printout
PC-Fax Expander modem emulation
200 x 200 dpi with Super Smoothing
1 ppm
Local scanning
PC-Fax Expander modem emulation
200 x 200 dpi
1 ppm
Class 2 communication
G4 for PC (with ISDN G4 Type 140 option and memory tx selection)
Autoroute scanning (with NEST option
FAXING APPLICATION
The PC must have a faxing application. The Cheyenne Bitware for Ricoh diskette
and manual are included in the PC-Fax Expander kit.
NOTE : To avoid communication failures, Delrina WinFax PRO 7.0 requires the
change of the default communication port from TAPI to the same COM port selected for
the PCFAX EXPANDER. See section 8.2.
2.4.
TWAIN CAPABILITY
When the TWAIN driver is installed, scanning parameters such as contrast,

resolution and halftone can be set at the PC. Also, the PC will work with TWAIN
compatible scanners. The Ricoh CFM TWAIN diskette and manual are included in the
kit.
SM

3.
QUICK LOOK AT THE PC-FAX EXPANDER TYPE 140
Comparison
Basic Feature
Modem Class
Null Modem
Memory File Deletion
User Parameter Switch
Scanning Function
TWAIN
PC Protocol Dump
DIU Hardware Tests
3.1.
Type 100/130
Class 1, Class 2
Built into DIU
Function 24
Switch 14
Function 16
Compatible
Service 05
Service 15
FAX2500L, FAX2600L, FAX3500L

Class 2
Additional hardware requirement
Function 21
Switch 7
Function 17
No
No
Service 8
BASIC TRANSMISSION PROCEDURE
Check the settings.

DIRECT TRANSMISSION
FAX MEMORY TRANSMISSION
PC is on and running the faxing application, and modem is Class 2.
Fax machine is on.
FAX: User Parameter Switch 14 fax application selection.
Bit 5 is
0 : Cheyenne Bitware for Ricoh, MSFAX (Win3.1)
a
1 : WinFax 4.0 (Win3.1), WinFax 7.0 (Win95), WinFax PRO for Networks 4.0
Bit 6 is
0 : Off (Default)
1 : Cheyenne FAXserve for Netware 3.0
FAX: User Parameter Switch 14

Bit 0 : 0
Direct Transmission Bit 0 : 1
Memory Transmission
Bit 2 : 0
No TTI
Bit 2 : 1
TTI
1.
2.
3.
4.
PC: Prepare file or message for sending.

PC: Call up dialing (or sending)
PC: Enter recipients name. Select options.
PC: Dial recipients fax number
PC: Dial the full fax number (for G3 only), or use coded
dial numbers :
b
# (Quick Dial Number),
G3/G4
b
# * (Speed Dial Number),
G3/G4
b
# * * (Group Number)
G3/G4
5. PC: Click Start (Send).

a
Delrina WinFax PRO 7 users : Change COM port from TAPI to same COM port selected for the
PCFE. See section 8-2. b G4 requires ISDN G4 Interface Type 140 Option.
Quick Dial, Speed Dial, and Group Dial Prefixes

Fax numbers programmed at the fax machine as Quick Dial, Speed Dial, and Group
numbers can be dialed from the PC by prefixing the numbers with the symbols #. #*, #**.
For example :
TO DIAL FROM PC
QUICK DIAL 01
ENTER
#01
FOR
G3/G4
SPEED DIAL 0 1
#*01
G3/G4
GROUP 01 (stored in Quick Dial 02)
# * * 01 (or # 0 2)
G3/G4
SM
FAX Expander
Type 140
Type 140
Class 2
Built into DIU
Function 27
Switch 14
Function 17
Compatible
Service 05
Service 18

3.2. BASIC RECEPTION
Check the settings.

DIRECT RECEPTION
FAX MEMORY RECEPTION
PC is running the faxing machine and set for automatic answering.
PC modem is Class 2.
Fax machine is on.
FAX: User Parameter Switch 14 fax application selection.
Bit 5 is
0 : Cheyenne Bitware for Ricoh, MSFAX (Win95)
a
1 : Delrina WinFax 4.0 (Win3.1), Delrina WinFax 7.0 (Win95) , WinFax PRO for Networks 4.0
Bit 6
0 : Off (Default)
1 : Cheyenne FAXserve for Netware 3.0.
Bit 1 : 0
Direct Reception
Memory Reception
Print at FAX
Send to PC
Print at FAX and Send to PC
Delrina WinFax PRO 7 users : Change COM port from TAPI to same
COM port selected for the PCFE. See section 8-2.
3.3.

Bit 1 : 1
Bit 3 : 0 Bit 4 : 0
Bit 3 : 1 Bit 4 : 0
Bit 3 : 1 Bit 4 : 1
USING THE FAX MACHINES SCANNER
Check the settings.

a
PC is running the faxing application and set for automatic answering .
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
FAX: Place document in the machine.
PC modem is Class 2.
Fax machine is on.
FAX: Check for Contrast, Resolution (Standard or Detail). Halftone
FAX: Press Function key.
FAX: Type 1 7 at the ten-key pad.
FAX: Press Yes.
FAX: Press Start.
a
If TWAIN cant be loaded, turn off auto answer.
3.4.
USING THE FAX MACHINES PRINTER
Check the settings.
PC is running the faxing application and set for automatic answering.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
PC: Change the printer selection to faxing software option.

PC: Select the file to print.
PC: Select the print command and print options. Click OK.
Fax machine is on.
PC: Dialing or sending dialog box appears. Dial 0 0 0 0.

PC: Click Start (Send).
SM

4.
PC-FAX EXPANDER TYPE 140 DESCRIPTION
4.1.
USER PARAMETER SWITCH 14
The PCFE Type 140 is compatible with the Class 2 modem communication mode. Class
1 is not supported. BFT is not supported.
The DIU is connected directly to the fax machines data/address bus at CN5 on the
MFCE PWA. The signal flow through the system is controlled by a special PCFE Type 140 fax
bitswitch, User Parameter Switch 14. The fax machine switch can :
(1) route the PC fax data directly to and from the fax machines modem, bypassing the
usual PSTN data path through the MFCE. This is PCFE DIRECT transmission and reception
(Note : This is not fax immediate transmission.),
(2) or route the data to include the MFCE system control (DCR, DCMMR), SAF Memory
and ECM to and from the modem. This is PCFE MEMORY transmission and reception,
(3) suppress the fax machines TTI to avoid conflicting with the PC faxing applications
header,
(4) direct the output to specific locations,
(5) or select specific faxing applications (to overcome speed problems).
FUNCTION
DEFAULT
PCFE TRANSMISSION
0 : DIRECT TX
1 : MEMORY TX
PCFE RECEPTION
0 : DIRECT RX
1 : MEMORY RX
FAX TTI MEMORY TRANSMISSION (BIT 0 IS 1)

0 : NO FAX TTI
1 : FAX TTI
3
4
5
OUTPUT DESTINATION FOR MEMORY RECEPTION (BIT 1 IS 1)

a
PRINT AT FAX
SEND TO PC AND PRINT AT FAX
SEND TO PC
0
1
1
0
1
0
FAX APPLICATION SELECTION
0 : CHEYENNE BITWARE FOR RICOH; MSFAX (Win95)
b
1 : WINFAX PRO 4.0 (Win3.1), WINFAX PRO 7.0 (Win95) WinFax PRO For NETWORKS
4.0
0
0
0
FAX APPLICATION SELECTION

0 : OFF
1 : CHEYENNE FAXSERVE FOR NETWARE
DO NOT CHANGE THE FACTORY SETTING.
Substitute Reception
b
Delrina WinFax PRO 7 users : Change COM port from TAPI to COM port selected for the PCFE. See
section 8-2.
The Switch settings are changed with fax Function 63. FAX4700L Optical Mark
Reader (OMR) is not supported for User Parameter Switch 14.
SM
FAX Expander
Type 140
BIT

4.2.
DIRECT TRANSMISSION
Direct PCFE transmissions will bypass the fax machine DCR/DCMMR and other
fax resources. The fax machine will be used as an external faxmodem, exchanging
protocols with remote devices. The communications have the characterstics provided
by the PC faxing application. The operation is governed from the PC by the faxing
application.
Compression will be MH or MR, dpending on the faxing application; MMR
compression will not be available. ECM will be available only if the faxing software
provides it. The fax machines pre-programmed Quick Dial, Speed Dial, and Group
numbers cannot be used to dial when the fax machine is set for Direct Transmission.
ISDN G4 dialing is not available in Direct Transmission.
Direct transmissions are reported in the fax machine TCR as well as by the PC
faxing application.
FAX4700L WITH PC-FAX EXPANDER
Type 140
MEMORY
DCR/
DCMMR
DIU
(RS232 Port)
MODEM
DIU : The Digital Interface Unit, or RS232 Port

DCR : The Data Compression/Reconstruction Unit
DCMMR : Data Compression Modified Modified Read
SM

4.3.
DIRECT RECEPTION
Direct PCFE receptions use the fax machine as an external faxmodem to

exchange communication protocols. The data route will bypass the fax machine
processes such as DCR/DCMMR and ECM/SAF memory.
To receive the communication, the PC must be turned on, and the PC faxing
application must be running and set for Auto Receive. The fax machine will notify the
PC when it detects an incoming call. The PC will then have control of the reception.
If the PC is unable to receive, the fax data will be sent to the DCR as in a normal
G3 reception. The message will then be reconstructed and printed by the fax machine.
Direct receptions are reported in the fax machine TCR as well as by the PC
faxing application.

Type 140
MEMORY
SUB RX
PRINT
DCR/
DCMMR
FAX Expander
Type 140
OR
DIU
(RS232 Port)
MODEM

SM

4.4.
MEMORY TRANSMISSION
A PCFE memory transmission occurs in two stages.
(1) PC to FAX : The PC will send the image data in compressed form, MH or
MR, to the fax machine. The data is passed through the DCR where errors can be
detected and reported back to the PC for retransmission. The data will be routed to and
accumulated in SAF memory. This is reported in the TCR as a reception by the fax
machine.
(2) FAX to REMOTE : When all the information has been accumulated, the fax
machine will send it to the destination as a normal FAX4700L fax transmission.
Depending on the capabilities of the receiver, the data will be sent as MR, MH, or MMR
files and will be passed to either FIFO or ECM memory on its way to the modem. This
transaction is reported as a transmission in the fax machines TCR. The fax machine
can also generate a Communication Result Report or a Communication Failure Report
for PCFE memory transmissions.
Fax TTI is normally added to fax transmissions. Switch 14 allows the TTI to be
turned off to avoid conflicting with the faxing application header.
PCFE adds prefixes similar to the Transfer Request notations (Operators
Manual, page 59) so that Quick Dial, Speed Dial, and Group numbers programmed with
Functions 31, 32, and 33 can be used to dial from the PC :
#
#*
#**
Quick Dial
Speed Dial
Group number
ISDN G4 addresses can be dialed with Quick Dials, Speed Dials and Groups
stored in the fax with G4 destinations. ISDN G4 dialing requires the ISDN Interface
Type 140 option.
Type 140
MEMORY
DCR/
DCMMR
DIU
(RS232 Port)
MODEM

SM

SAF Memory Overflow
If the SAF reaches its memory capacity during transmission, the data
accumulated to that point will be sent to the destination as a file. An error report will be
issued by the fax machine.
Memory PC TX File Delete (Fax Function 27)
The PCFE option introduces fax Function 27 specifically to delete PCFE memory
transmission files. (Fax Function 21 deletes standard fax memory files.)
FAX Expander
Type 140
A file can be deleted while being sent as a memory transmission or during an

automatic redialing operation. The deletion will end the redialing. (The standard
FAX4700L redialing default of 4 times every 5 minutes remains unchanged.)
SM

4.5.
MEMORY RECEPTION
When set for memory reception, the fax machine governs the reception, sending
the demodulated data to SAF or to page memory. PCFE adds the ability to direct the
data to different output locations with User Parameter Switch 14.
to the fax machine printer

to the PCa
to the fax printer and the PCa
a
When the PC is selected as an output location, the PC must be on and running

the faxing application, which should be set for automatic receive or auto answer.
If the output location is the fax machine printer, the image data will follow the
reception path described in the Service Manual section 1.5.2. (including either FIFO or
ECM memory). The demodulated, decompressed data will be sent to page memory for
printing and the demodulated data will be stored in SAF for Substitute Reception, if
Substitute reception is on (User Parameter Switch 05-0).
If the PC is specified as an output location, the path is the same except that the
data stored in SAF will be recompressed with MH or MR technique before it is sent to
the PC. If the PC is unable to receive the data, it will be printed by the fax machine and
deleted from SAF (Substitute Reception).
The fax machine will attempt to resend the message to the PC according to
COMSW 10 and COMSW 12 settings for memory transmission redials. The default
settings are 5 attempts every 5 minutes (05H, 05H).
The PC may be unable to receive the incoming message because the PC has no
power, the faxing application is not activated, or the faxing application is not set to
receive faxes.
Type 140
MEMORY
PRINT
DCR/
DCMMR
DIU
(RS232 Port)
MODEM

SAF Memory Overflow

If SAF reaches its memory capacity while receiving a message, the data
accumulated to that point will be sent to the PC as a file. An error report will be issued
by the fax machine.
10
SM

4.6.
SCANNING (Fax Function 17)
PCFE adds fax Function 17 to the set of FAX4700L fax functions. With Function
17, the fax machine will scan a document and send it to the PC, where it will be
received by the faxing application.
Scanning from the fax machine is similar to sending an immediate fax message
from the fax to the PC, except that all basic transmission options (OPTIONSf) are
disabled during the scanner operation. For example, there will be no TTI. Also, the Fine
resolution mode is not available (the setting will default to Detail resolution). Resolution
is not adjustable during multi-page scanning. And, SAF memory will be bypassed.
Scanning will be identified in the TCR (Mode G3T*S, or G3T*D). See Transmit
File 002 in TCR, page 19. An error will terminate the process and generate an error
report.
For the PC, receiving the scanned image is the same as receiving a fax as
described in the faxing application manual.
Type 140
MEMORY
PRINT
DIU
(RS232 Port)
FAX Expander
Type 140
DCR/
DCMMR
MODEM

SM
11
Notes on Ricoh CFM TWAIN Scanning

The PCFE Type 140 option provides the customer with a TWAIN scanner driver,
RICOH CFM TWAIN. Scanning can be activated from a PC application supporting TWAIN,
for example, Cheyenne Bitware for Ricoh, or CFM ScanWork. The procedure is
described in documentation supplied with the software.
If the TWAIN driver cant be activated the faxing applications Auto Receive
should be turned off.
Basically, the document is set in the fax machine document feeder. The
application is opened, the source is selected from the scan feature, and R ICOH CFM
TWAIN is acquired. When the module is opened, the scan parameters, such as line or
halftone mode, page size format, resolution, brightness are set and scanning can be
performed. The details and limitations are described in the documentation.
The Scan Autoroute Option
When the NEST option is installed, Function 17 will allow dialing network clients
with the autoroute code (#...#). The fax machine must be set for immediate
transmission.
Press Memory key if indicator light is on.
IMMEDIATE TX
JUL.30.02:45PM
SET DOC. OR ENTER FAX NO.
MEMORY100%
Set the document in the document feeder.

Press Function 1 7 Yes
SCANNER MODE
DIAL AUTOROUTE CODE OR START
Dial Autoroute number with code

For example, # 1 2 3 4 # Yes
SCANNER MODE
PRESS START
#1234#
Press Start
TRANSMITTING
A4 -> A4
When finished, the display returns to the

default transmit mode.
MEMORY TRANS.
JUL.30.02:45PM
SET DOC. OR ENTER FAX NO.
MEMORY100%
12
SM

4.7.
PRINTING
The PC-Fax Expander can use the fax machine as a printer for the PC. Using
the special four-digit fax number, 0 0 0 0, as a destination number, the faxing
application can send a document to the PC-Fax Expander for printing.
The fax machine will receive the data from the PC and send it to the DCR to be
decompressed. It will then be sent to page memory for printing. The memory file will be
deleted when printing is completed.
Unless Substitute Reception is switched off (User Parameter Switch 05-0), the
data will also be routed to the SAF memory. If the fax machine is out of paper or a jam
occurs, the document will be stored in SAF memory and will be printed out after the
problem has been corrected.
Printing will be identified in the TCR (Mode G3R*S or G3R*D). See Receive File
003 in the TCR, page 19.

Type 140
(SUB RX)
PRINT
DCR
DIU
(RS232 Port)
MODEM

SM
13
FAX Expander
Type 140
MEMORY

4.8. DUAL ACCESS OPERATION MATRIX
Ref. : Operators Manual Ricoh FAX4700L , page 169.
When the PCFAX EXPANDER Type 140 option (PCFE) is installed, additions
are made to Dual Access table shown in the Fax4700L Operators Manual. This matrix
indicates which simultaneous operations may be possible.
JOB :
1
1
Store Original
2
Memory Printout '
3
Copy
4
Report Printout '
5
G3 Immediate Tx
6
G3 Memory Tx '
7 G3 Immediate Rx '
8
G3 Memory Rx '
9
Report Tx '
10 G4 Immediate Tx
11
G4 Memory Tx '
12 G4 Immediate Rx '
13
G4 Memory Rx '
14
PCFE Scan
15
PCFE Direct Tx '
16
PCFE Direct Rx '
17 PCFE Memory Tx '
18 PCFE Memory Rx '
19
PCFE Printout '
'
'
'
'
' ' '
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
' ' ' '

' '
' ' '
'
' '
' '
' ' '
' ' '

'
' '
'
'
'
' '
' '
'
' '
' '
' '
' '
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
' '
'
'
'
'
' ' '

' ' '
'
'
' ' '
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
14
SM

5.
SERVICE LEVEL FUNCTIONS

For PC-Fax Expander maintenance purposes,
5.1.
A PC Protocol Dump has been added to Service Function 05, the Group 3
Protocol Dump.
DIU Diagnostics, Service Function 18, are two tests added for the DIU
hardware.
PC-FAX EXPANDER PROTOCOL DUMP
SERVICE SET
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE
Press 0 5
PROTOCOL DUMP
0PSTN
1PC
NO. :__ OR NO
02PARA. LIST
04SVC MONITOR L
Press 1
START
PC PROTOCOL DUMP
Press Start
List is printing.
PC PROTOCOL DUMP
List has printed

START
PC PROTOCOL DUMP
Press Function when finished.
SM
15
FAX Expander
Type 140
Press Function 6 0 1 9 9 5 Yes

5.2.
PC-FAX EXPANDER DIU HARDWARE TESTS

PCFE adds service Function 18 for two hardware inspection tests:
an internal test,
an external test.
DIU Internal Test

An internal DIU LSI loop back test does not require additional hardware.
DIU
DCD
RI
MB89371A
TXD
RXD
RS232C
DRIVERS
RECEIVERS
RTS
TO
FCU
CTS
RS232C
DTR
INT
DSR
RI
TXCLK
RXCLK
DCD
LOOP BACK SIGNAL HERE
Press Function 6 0 1 9 9 5 Yes
SERVICE SET
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE
Press 1 8
DIU DIAGNOSTICS MODE

NO._
0.DIU
1.LOOP BACK
NO. :__ OR NO
02PARA. LIST
04SVC MONITOR L
DIU Test :
Press 0
TEST RUNNING WAIT

ABORT PRESS STOP
DIU test is OK
DIU TEST COMPLETED
DIU Test Error Messages :
16
SM

FCEDIU connection problem
DIU NOT FOUND
DIU board failure
DIU ERROR
Press Function or Stop

NO._
0.DIU
1.LOOP BACK
DIU External Test

A Loop Back connector is installed before selecting this test mode.
DIU
DCD
MB89371A
TXD
RXD
RS232C
DRIVERS
RECEIVERS
2
3
RTS
TO
FCU
CTS
INT
4
5
20
DTR
DSR
TXCLK
3
4
5
20
6
RI
RXCLK
DCD
22
RS232C
LOOP BACK
CONNECTOR
Loop Back Test :

NO._
0.DIU
1.LOOP BACK
Press 1
SM
TEST RUNNING WAIT

ABORT PRESS STOP
17
FAX Expander
Type 140
RI
Test is OK
L.B. TEST COMPLETED
Loop Back Test Error Messages :

FCEDIU connection problem
DIU NOT FOUND
DIU board failure
LOOP BACK ERROR
Press Function or Stop

NO._
0.DIU
1.LOOP BACK
18
SM

6.
PC-FAX EXPANDER REPORTS
6.1
TRANSMISSION CONFIRMATION REPORT TCR
PCFE transmissions and receptions are recorded on the TCR. They are
identified with two new symbols.
* : PC Fax Application
% : Direct PC TX or RX
PCFAX is the PC faxing applications CSI.
* * * TCR (JUL. 23. 1996
5:00PM) * * *
TTI
<RX>
DATE
JUN 10
TX
#
M
S
!S
TIME
9:00AM
10:21AM
1:00PM
3:05PM
4:57PM
5:10PM
ADDRESS
NEW YORK OFFICE
PCFAX
TOKYO OFFICE
PCFAX
NEW YORK OFFICE
NEW YORK OFFICE
MODE
G3TS
G3T*D
G4T*SM
G3T*S@M
G3T%S
G3T*SM
TIME
040
032
002
058
058
028
PAGE
P. 1
P. 1
P. 1
P. 1
P. 1
P. 1
RESULT PERS. NAME FILE

OK
001
OK
002
OK
004
OK
005
OK
007
E
008
TIME
11:30AM
12:58PM
3:03PM
4:30PM
5:08
ADDRESS
PCFAX
PCFAX
LONDON OFFICE
NEW YORK OFFICE
PCFAX
MODE
G3R*S
G4R*SM
G3RSM
G3R%S
G3R*SM
TIME
044
002
030
030
118
PAGE
P. 1
P. 1
P. 1
P. 1
P. 1
RESULT PERS. NAME FILE

OK
003
OK
004
OK
005
OK
006
OK
008
000005
:
:
:
:
XYZ COMPANY
BATCH
MEMORY
STANDARD
REMOTE TRANSFER
RX
C
L
D
B
:
:
:
:
CONFIDENTIAL
SEND LATER
DETAIL
FAX ON DEMAND
$
@
F
*
000004
:
:
:
:
TRANSFER
FORWARDING
FINE
PC
P
E
>
%
:
:
:
:
POLLING
ECM
REDUCTION
PC DIRECT
Transmit Files for July 23

File 1 (9:00AM)
File 2 (10:21AM)
File 4 (1:00PM)
File 5 (3:05PM)
File 7 (4:57PM)
File 8 (5:10PM)
G3 immediate transmission from fax to New York

Scanning in detail resolution to PCFunction 17 or CFM TWAIN
G4 memory transmission of Receive File 004 from PC to Tokyo
Receive File 005 forwarded from fax memory to PC
G3 direct transmission from PC to New York
G3 memory transmission of Receive File 008 failure
Receive Files for June 10

File 3 (11:30AM)
File 4 (12:58PM)
File 5 (3:03PM)
File 6 (4:30PM)
File 8 (5:08PM)
SM
Printing in standard resolutionDial 0000 from PC

G4 memory reception of Transmit File 004 from PC
G3 memory reception from London to be forwarded to PC
G3 direct reception from New York to PC
G3 memory reception from PC for New York
19
FAX Expander
Type 140
<TX>
DATE
JUL 23

6.2.
MEMORY TRANSMISSION COMMUNICATION REPORTS
PC MEMORY TX is a new mode name for PC-Fax Expander memory

transmissions appearing on the following reports.
Result Report
* * * COMMUNICATION RESULT REPORT ( JUL. 23. 1996
FILE
MODE
004
OPTION
PC MEMORY TX
1:01PM ) * * *
TTI
XYZ COMPANY
ADDRESS (GROUP)
RESULT
PAGE
TOKYO OFFICE
OK
REASON FOR ERRORS

1)HANG UP LINE FAIL
3)NO ANSWER
2)BUSY
4)NO FACSIMILE CONNECTION
Failure Report
* * * COMMUNICATION FAILURE REPORT ( JUL. 23. 1995 5:11PM ) * * *
TTI
XYZ COMPANY
FILE
MODE
008
OPTION
PC MEMORY TX
ADDRESS (GROUP)
RESULT
PAGE
NEW YORK OFFICE
E-2)2)2)2)2)
P. 1
REASON FOR ERRORS

1)HANG UP LINE FAIL
3)NO ANSWER
2)BUSY
4)NO FACSIMILE CONNECTION
20
SM

6.3.
USER PARAMETER LIST
PCFE Switch 14 appears below SW12 on the User Parameter List (Function 63).
* * * USER PARAMETER LIST ( JUL. 23. 1995
10:00AM ) * * *
TTI XYZ COMPANY
COUNTER
SCN
6.4
000005
ON
LIGHTEN
ON
* OFF
* NORMAL
* OFF
ON
ON
ON
* FAX
* OFF
* OFF
* OFF
PC
DARKEN
FAX+PC
SYSTEM PARAMETER LIST
The ROM version line is modified to show the software version for the PCFE,
and the PCFE is added to the Parameter list .
* * * SYSTEM PARAMETER LIST ( JUL. 23. 1995
SERIAL NO.
ROM VER.
F14-USA[PCFE]
ROM NO.
H5157210F 8579
R T I
T T I
C S I
PARAMETER
SCN THRESHOLD (L, M, H)
PCFAX EXPANDER
SM
IC
2AD4
96 06 11
5AA5
21
10:00AM ) * * *
TTI XYZ COMPANY
REV: A
VER: 1.04
FAX Expander
Type 140
000001
PRT
USER SWITCH
(SW12)
ECONOMY PRINTING MODE
PRINT DENSITY
COPY MODE
(SW14) PCFAX
MEMORY TX MODE
MEMORY RX MODE
PRINT TTI
RECEPTION MODE

7.
INSTALLATION
NOTE : Before installing this option read the warnings and cautions in sections
3.3 and 5 of the FAX4700L Service Manual.
This product is to be installed in a FAX4700L facsimile machine. The installation must
be done by qualified service personnel only, with the aid of the Service Manual (SM).
With a customer-provided double shielded serial cable, the RICOH RS232 PCFAX
EXPANDER Type 140 connects the fax machine to a PC that has a faxing application
installed.
Tools Required : Philips metric screwdriver set; FlashS/RAM copy tool, EPROM board.
Additional Part Required : Customer-provided RS232 shielded serial cable fitted with
either DB25-pin and DB25-socket connectors, or DB25-pin and DB-9 socket
connectors.
Procedure :
1. Turn off the fax machine and disconnect it from its power source.
2. Remove the Printer Interface unit if one is installed. Disconnect harness from
MFDU CN13. (SM section 3.3.6.)
3. Remove the rear cover. Remove the RS232 cover and replace it with DIU cover.
4. Remove the ISDN G4 Interface if one is installed. Disconnect harness from MFCE
CN4. (SM section 3.3.2.)
5. Detach and pull out the MFCE/MFDU subassembly, following the SM replacement
procedure. (SM section 5.8.2.)
6. Connect the FAX EXPANDER harness to MCFE CN5.
7. Mount the DIU bracket onto the chassis.
8. Fasten the DIU board onto the bracket.
9. Connect the FAX EXPANDER harness to DIU CN2.
10. Re-install the ISDN G4 Interface if one was removed.
11. Replace the rear cover, fitting it over the DIU RS232 connector.
12. Re-install the Printer Interface unit if one was removed.
13. Turn off the PC and disconnect it from its power source.
14. Connect the fax machine from the DIU port to the PC 25-pin or 9-pin COM port with
the serial cable.
CAUTION : Make sure all connections have been made before going on to the
next step. See Service Manual section 4.1.20. for Download procedure.
15. Insert the Copy Tool into the lower IC slot. Put EPROM 28648-001 into socket 1,
28648-002 into socket 2, etc., of the EPROM board. Turn Tool switch ON.Turn on
the power and download the software to the MFCE. (SM section 4.1.20.)
16. Reprogram the fax machine as necessary.
The MS-DOS diagnostics program should be run on the PC to check COM port
availability and IRQ status. See also CSG F.L. 84 and 86.
22
SM
FAX Expander
Type 140
RS232 Cover
SM
23

8.
INSTALLATION SUGGESTIONS
If the faxing application has a difficulty in locating the modem, check the fax
machine to ensure that it is on and ready : Turn it off, wait a few seconds, then turn it
back on. Run the MS-DOS diagnostics to review the COM ports and IRQs for possible
conflicts. Review the faxing applications manual for possible solutions.
8.1.
COMMUNICATION PORTS
The PCs serial ports are usually configured as COM1 and COM2. These are
assigned the Interrupt Request numbers (IRQs). IRQs are used to establish priorities
which will prevent conflicts from occurring when two devices want to use the same
resources at the same time.
To determine the availability of COM ports and their IRQs, Windows usersa can
the MS-DOS diagnostics program. Change the directory to the root and type msd :
C:\WIN> cd\
C:\>msd
When the diagnostics menu appears, choose COM Ports.... The next
screen will indicate if the COM ports (1 through 4) are enabled or available. Choose
IRQ to indicate the Interrupt Request status of each COM port. The COM ports must
not have the same IRQ. The PCs serial ports are usually configured with IRQ4 and
IRQ3. For example.
IRQ Status
IRQ
3
4
Address
Description
F000:EF6F
CE29:0096
COM2:
COM1:
Detected
COM4: COM2:
COM3 COM1: SERIAL MOUSE
Handled By
BIOS
BIOS
The installation of an internal modem may cause an IRQ conflict to occur

between two ports even if no device is using the second port. The second port may
have to be disabled to overcome this problem.
One solution is to remove the internal modem and re-enable the COM port for
PCFE use. Another solution is to install a third serial port.
MSDOS Version 5.0 and higher; Windows 95
24
SM

8.2.
FAXING APPLICATION NOTE
The PCFE Type 140 has been tested with the following Class 2 faxing
applications :
Cheyenne Bitware for Ricoh

MSFAX (Win95)
Delrina WinFax PRO 4.0 (Win3.1)
Delrina WinFax PRO 7.0 (Win95)
Delrina WinFax PRO for Networks 4.0
Cheyenne FAXserve for Netware 3.0
IMPORTANT NOTE FOR DELRINA WINFAX PRO 7.0 USERS : To avoid

communication failures, the applications default communication port should be the
same as the communication port selected for the PCFAX EXPANDER Type 140,
(COM2, COM3, or other).
1. Select Modem.
2. Select Properties.
3. Pull down the list of communication port settings and select the PCFAX
EXPANDER communication port : COM 2, COM 3, or other.
4. Close.
SM
25
FAX Expander
Type 140
The applications original default port is TAPI. To change it, pull down the
applications Setup menu.
APPENDIX A
Appendix A
PC-FAX EXPANDER
OVERVIEW
(includes NEST)
Components of the Ricoh PC-Fax Expander Overview
The Ricoh PC-Fax Expander (PCFE) Guide is a convenient compilation of the most
important information regarding the PCFE optionn. The information has been extracted from
various PCFE sources, including the PCFE Product Information Book and respective
software user manuals.
Topics covered include:
A brief introduction to the Ricoh PC-Fax Expander
An overview of Ricoh's strategic partners, Cheyenne Software and Novell
An easy-to-follow explanation of the software installation process
Hands-on exercises to show the PCFE in action
A brief introduction to NEST
And a glossary of key terms associated with the PCFE
26
SM
What is a Ricoh PC-Fax Expander?

Ricoh Fax With
RS232 PC-FAX
EXPANDER
PC With
Cheyenne
BitWare for Ricoh
It is the physical connection between a Ricoh facsimile machine and a personal computer,
linking the optional RS232 serial port on the fax to the RS232 port on the PC.
With appropriate software, it expands the functionality of both devices, providing the
following features:
PC-Faxing (send and receive)*
Printing
Scanning
Windows TWAIN Scanning
Unlimited autodialing capacity
Can integrate a standalone fax into a Local Area Network (LAN)
It is compatible with IBM PC AT (non PS/2) computers that employ either Microsoft
DOS or Microsoft Windows operating platforms.
Can be integrated into or onto a local area network (LAN) so that all network users
can share the PCFE.
There are two series of Ricoh PC-Fax Expanders available:
Type 80 Series
Includes only the Type 80 interface
Type 100 Series
Includes the Type 100, Type 130, Type 130E, Type 140, and Type 174 interfaces
*In addition to PC compatibility, the Type 100 Series can connect to a Macintosh computer for
single user applications via a serial cable.
SM
27
PC FAX Expander Type 140
FAX Expander
Type 140
RS232 LINE
Distinguishing Factors Between the

Type 80 Series & Type 100 Series
Feature
Type 80 Series
Type 100 Series
PC Fax
Yes
Yes
EIA Class 2 support
Yes
Yes
Scan with fax software
Yes
Yes
TWAIN Scanning
No
Yes
Includes Cheyenne BitWare

for Ricoh
Yes
Yes
Includes Windows
TWAIN driver &
scanning software
No
Yes
LAN connectivity
No
Yes
In addition to minor installation differences, the Type 80 Series does not include the
following features that come standard with the Type 100 Series:
TWAIN Scanning - An industry standard that allows users to scan a document with a
wide variety of compatible scanning software and hardware. TWAIN is an acronym for
Technology Without Any Important Name.
Windows TWAIN driver/Scanning software - Since the Type 80 does not support the
TWAIN standard, there is no reason to include the respective driver and software.
LAN Connectivity - The Type 100 can be integrated into a local area network, which is
fast becoming a popular means for businesses of many sizes to allow employees to share
different office devices, including printers, files, and fax functions. It is estimated that
85% of corporate PCs are on LANs.
28
SM
Benefits of a PCFE over a Modem

Feature
PC-Fax Expander
vs.
Modem
Yes
Yes
Error Correction
Mode (ECM)
Yes
No (Class 2)
Compression
MMR
MH only
Scan to PC
Yes
No
Send data files
No
Yes
Print fax messages
Yes
No
A RICOH PC-Fax Expander provides different solutions than a fax modem does.
An Error Correction Mode (ECM) that automatically corrects corrupted streams of data
before they are received. With this, the receiving unit will check the data for errors prior
to printing the document. If errors are found, it will request that the data be retransmitted.
This process continues until the data is sufficiently received.
The more effective Modified Modified Read compression method versus the more
archaic and less effective Modified Huffman method. Published findings indicate that
Modified Modified Read (MMR) can transmit a document approximately 25% faster than
Modified Huffman (MH) can.
The ability to Scan and "recognize" (also known as Optical Character Recognition)
fax messages and convert them into text documents that the PC can edit and
manipulate. Optional software is required.
Because the RICOH PC-Fax Expander is based on a fax machine with a laser printer
engine and printing capabilities, it can print out received faxes.
SM
29
FAX Expander
Type 140
TX/RX faxes
RICOH PC-FAX EXPANDER

Fax Machine Compatibility by Model
Type 80
Type 100
FAX5600L
MV715
FAX2400L
FAX2700L
FAX3700L
Type 130
Type 140
MV310
FAX4700L
Type 130E
Type 174
MV310E
MV74
Not all Ricoh fax machines use the same PC-Fax Expander.
While all of the operating functions of the Type 100 Series are identical, the design of each
specific model in the series may differ, as well as the way each are installed.
RICOH PC-Fax Expanders cannot work with fax machines other than Ricoh fax machines.
30
SM
RICOH PC-Fax Expander Software

Cheyenne BitWare for Ricoh
PC-Faxing
Fax Forwarding
Printing
TWAIN Scanning (from a PC)
Broadcasting
Who is Cheyenne Software?
FAX Expander
Type 140
A leading-edge developer of software solutions for problems associated with data and
network management.
It provides powerful, yet easy-to-use software with advanced features that answer the
needs of both stand-alone and LAN environments.
What is Cheyenne BitWare for RICOH fax software?

It is a single user-friendly Windows interface for a standalone PC that fully
integrates fax capabilities, supporting such features as PC-faxing, fax
forwarding, printing, and scanning.
BitWare was recently recognized by the American Facsimile Association as the top
performer in its extensive evaluation of fax/data/voice products. BitWare was cited for,
among other areas, ease of use, installation, documentation, and speed and reliability.
SM
31
Cheyenne FAXserve Software
Cheyenne FAXSERVE Software

Offers facsimile management service for Novell Netware LAN environments.
Provides customers with a cost-effective means of centralizing fax services on network
servers.
Network users can create, send, receive, and print faxes right from their desktop PCs.
Also, because it uses the existing network infrastructure, there are no costs for additional
hardware or telephone lines.
32
SM
Computer Installation Procedure
FAX Expander
Type 140
Cheyenne BitWare for RICOH Software
The following installation procedure is a generic listing. Later versions of the

software may slightly vary the procedure. The installation procedure is
provided as a reference only. It will allow you to further understand the
function and operation of the program. It is NOT provided for you to load
the program in the customers computer.
The PC Fax Expander is a User Installable Option It is the responsibility
of the users to install the software on thier PCs. It is NOT recommended
that the service technician install software on, or operate, the customers PC.
SM
33
Installing the Cheyenne BitWare for RICOH Software
Before you attempt to install the Cheyenne BitWare for Ricoh software, you first must make
sure that the computer on which the software will be loaded accommodates all the
requirements:
t 386, 486 or Pentium microprocessor

t Minimum 4 megabytes of random access memory (RAM)
t Windows 3.1 or later
t DOS 3.1 or higher (DOS 5.0 or higher is preferred)
t A hard disk drive with 5 megabytes of free disk space
t A mouse is optional
The PC-Fax Expander must be installed, and then the serial cable connected, prior to
installing the Cheyenne software. Also, the fax machine must be turned on. The customer
must obtain a "Straight Through Serial Cable" separately. The port on a PC is either 9-pin
or 25-pin. There are two cable configurations available:
DB25 male
DB25 male
DB9 female
DB25 female
For Apple/Macintosh applications, there are different cable configurations depending on the
model of the computer. Advise the customer to contact an Apple Computer reseller about
obtaining a straight through serial cable terminating in a DB25 connector.
Once you are sure that the computer is equipped with the above items, you can proceed to
install Cheyenne BitWare for Ricoh by inserting your BitWare diskette into either Drive A
or Drive B.
Then choose "Run" from Windows' Program Manager.
34
SM
Installing Cheyenne BitWare For Ricoh

OPENING MENUS
"Run"
After inserting the Cheyenne Bitware floppy disk into a floppy drive, click on "Run" from
the Windows Main menu.
In the Command Line text-entry box, type: A (or B): \SETUP
FAX Expander
Type 140
Click "OK" The "Install Dialogue Box" will appear.
"Destination Directory"
The Destination Directory will appear, telling you that it will automatically create a BitWare
directory on your hared drve (c:\).
(continued)
SM
35
"User Information"
The "User Information" box will ask you to enter the appropriate information. Please do so
and click "OK".
Copying Files (?)
"Group Name
Now the software is asking you to provide a group name for your BitWare software which
will appear in the Program Manager. Please type in whatever name you desire, or accept the
default name of Ricoh BitWare by Cheyenne.
Click "OK"
(continued)
36
SM
"Independent Program Icons"

The "Independent Program Icons" is a function that will automatically create icons for you
to drag and drop into a application for quick access.
Click "OK"
FAX Expander
Type 140
"Default Driver"
Now you are being asked if you want the Cheyenne BitWare Fax Driver, which is the
driver you will choose when transmitting a document, to be your default driver. If you
respond "Yes", then every time you want to print something you must manually change the
print driver to back your existing PC printer.
Choose either "Yes" or "No"
SM
37
Installing Cheyenne BitWare For Ricoh

FINAL MENUS
"Copying Macros"
The software will now ask if you want to create macros for a "Send fax" command to be
copied into various software packages. The benefit is that users can create "shortcuts" to
installed software packages, reducing the number of steps required to send a fax.
Select "Copy" or "Don't Copy"
"Modem Detection"
The software will now look for COM port 1 (or COM 1) to make sure it can detect a modem
connected to that port.
And the final installation box you will see is asking you to simply review the information that
the software will be using to run effectively. Please review the information for accuracy.
Click "OK"
38
SM
If the software was installed successfully, a message will appear telling you so. If it does, then
you are ready to begin using Cheyenne BitWare for Ricoh software. If it does not, then consider
the following troubleshooter areas:
Check that the fax machine is turned on.
Check the serial cable for a secure connection.
Try installing the software again.
If it was sold by a dealer, then the customer should call the dealer.
If it was sold through a direct sales representative, then have the customer call the service
hotline.
SM
39
FAX Expander
Type 140
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Sending A Fax with Cheyenne BitWare For Ricoh

The BitWare Tool Bar
When you are not in the application from which you want to fax a document, you can easily
fax directly from the Cheyenne BitWare Tool Bar. Of course, you must know the file name
you want to fax.
Each icon on the Tool Bar represents a different function, giving you quick access and the
flexibility of running only the function you need.
Each icon can be dragged and dropped into any Windows program group for convenience
purposes. For instance, you can drag and drop the Receive Log icon into the Startup group
in Windows. This way, the Receive Log will run every time you start Windows, allowing
you to see if you have received any faxes. You can also customize the desired means of
notification on either the fax machine or on the PC.
40
SM
Faxing From Within An Application

Print Menu
You can fax from any Windows application, such as Microsoft Word. When you have a
document opened which you want to fax . . .
FAX Expander
Type 140
Click "File". The File Menu will appear.

Then click "Print". The Print Menu will appear.
If you didn't install the BitWare Fax driver as the default driver during installation,
change the print driver in the Print Menu to BitWare fax driver.
Click "OK". The Dial fax box will appear.
Dial Fax Box

SM
41
Enter the recipient's name, the company name, and the fax number.
In that same Dial fax Box you can set any desired variables, including a cover page or
to dial an outside line if your telephone network requires you to.
Click "Start/Fax" when you are done.
The Transmission Status Box will appear. Here you can check to see at which baud
rate (speed) your document is being transmitted, the connection time, and the success or
failure of your transmission.
After your document has been successfully transmitted, the Response will indicate
"OK".
42
SM
Broadcasting a Document with Cheyenne Bitware

Bitware Phonebook
With Cheyenne BitWare, you can send a document to an unlimited number of destinations.
Begin sending a fax as you learned earlier. When the "Dial Fax" dialog box appears,
chose "Phone Book". The Phone Book dialog box appears.
Select the desired fax numbers.
When you are finished, choose "OK".
A text box will display all the selected fax numbers. If you want to remove one or more
of the fax numbers, use the "Remove Phone" button.
If you are transmitting to both local and long distance fax destinations, include the area
code in all numbers. When BitWare dials, it will automatically check the area code. If
it matches the one you entered previously, it will not dial the "1".
Click on "Start/Fax".
If you included a cover page, BitWare will automatically address each cover page
appropriately.
SM
43
FAX Expander
Type 140
Receiving a Fax With

Cheyenne BitWare for Ricoh
Receive Manager Window
When you want to set your computer to receive a fax, simply click the Receive Manager
icon in the BitWare Tool Bar, and . . .
the Receive Manager window will appear.
When you see "Waiting for a call" in the Operation field, your computer is ready to
receive a fax. Then it can be minimized to icon size.
44
SM
Receive Status Dialog Box

After the fax is received, the Receive Manager will notify you by displaying the
Receive Status dialog box.
To view your fax, simply click "View". The "View Fax" window will appear and
show you the fax it received.
If you want your computer to automatically load Receive Manager when you boot it up,
select "Automatically load the Receive Manager when Windows starts" in the Receive
Setup dialog box.
FAX Expander
Type 140
SM
45
Transmit & Receive Logs
The Cheyenne BitWare Transmit Log and Receive Log automatically maintain a detailed
record of each fax that was sent or received. The information they contain can be configured
by the user's preferences.
Transmit Log
The Transmit Log . . .
Indicates whether the transmission was successful

Shows the number of pages sent
Shows where it was sent to
Shows forwarded faxes
Allows the user to search and sort by any field
And automatically deletes listings after a specified time
46
SM
Receive Log
The Receive Log . . .
Indicates when each fax was received
The number of pages received
Where it was received from
Allows the user to search and sort by any field
And automatically deletes listings after a specified time
FAX Expander
Type 140
Both logs allow users to choose what information each will display and in what order.
SM
47
Scanning with the PCFE: Manual Scanning
If you want to get a hard copy document into your PC, the Ricoh PCFE can easily scan it in at
200 dpi resolution, using the scanner of the Ricoh fax machine with a PCFE to get the data
entered. This saves much time-consuming keyboarding and allows the hard copy information to
be manipulated before being forwarded.
What is a manual scan?
Although it falls under the category of scanning, the PC-Fax Expander is essentially
sending a fax directly into the Bitware software of the PC, where it can be saved as a
file, manipulated, or faxed.
Before performing a manual scan, you must make sure that you have the Cheyenne Bitware
for Ricoh software program opened and that the "Receive Manager" is activated. The
"Receive Manager", which can be left on permanently, allows for reception of a fax either in
the background (for uninterrupted fax reception while working on the PC) or in the
foreground. An icon at the bottom of the screen will inform you whether it is activated or
not.
To perform a manual scan, press Function 16 on the Ricoh fax machine.
Press "Yes" on the fax.
48
SM
Place the document in the ADF.

Press "Start" on the fax. The document will be scanned just like a document to being faxed.
When completed, click on "View" on the PC screen.
Click on "View fax".
Now, if you want to fax the document out (perhaps broadcast it to multiple sites), you can
create a custom cover page at this point. Or, you can elect to save the document as a file. If
it is a graphical image, you can save it either as a TIF file, PCX file, or Bitmap file. At this
point you can also reduce or enlarge the image.
FAX Expander
Type 140
SM
49
TWAIN Scanning
The TWAIN scanning driver enables you to scan from each Windows application that is
equipped with a TWAIN interface.
Here's how to perform TWAIN scanning:
Open Ricoh Bitware software.

Choose "View" and then "File".
Choose "Scan Page".
Click on "Scan". This activates the TWAIN driver.
Place the hard copy document face-down in the automatic document feeder of the Ricoh
fax machine.
At this point, from your PC, you must select either "Line art" or Halftone".
Click on "Scan" on the PC screen. The document will begin scanning into the fax. On the
PC screen, Bitware will measure the size of the document, in bytes, as it is being scanned.
After the scanning is completed, you can either save the document as a file, fax it, or edit
it.
Note: The Ricoh fax machine with the PCFE is a page scanner only, which means that you
can only scan a single page at a time even though the Ricoh fax is equipped with a multiplepage ADF.
50
SM
FAX Expander
Type 140
CFM TWAIN Scanning with Cheyenne Bitware
CFM TWAIN Scanning is similar to conventional TWAIN scanning though with limited
functionality. For instance, you can only save an image as a Bitmap file, while with TWAIN
scanning it can be saved in a number of different formats.
To perform a CFM TWAIN scan:
From your main window, choose Ricoh CFM TWAIN.

Choose CFM Scanwork.
Select "File" and then "Acquire". This will open the CFM TWAIN driver.
Place the hard copy document face-down in the automatic document feeder
of the Ricoh fax machine.
Click on "Scan" on the PC screen. The document will begin scanning into the fax.
After the scanning is completed, click "Okay".
CFM TWAIN scanning only allows you to save the image as a Bitmap file.
SM
51
Local Printing: Faxing to Yourself

See what happens when you fax from a PC to the number "0000"!
It's an alternate way to print without changing the printer driver!
Instead of changing the printer driver every time you want to print a document from a client
or PC, you can save yourself those extra steps by faxing the document from the PC to your
Ricoh fax machine equipped with a PCFE. Instead of faxing it out, though, the fax will print
it as if it were receiving an incoming fax.
Here's what you do:
While in an opened application, click "File".
From the File menu, click "Print". The Bitware driver will appear in the "Printer"
typeline.
Click "Okay".
When the Fax Send box appears, type the numbers "0000" in the fax number typeline.
Click "Send".
The document will be sent from the PC to the Ricoh fax machine.
52
SM
BitWare's On-Line Help Menu
Search command menu
Cheyenne BitWare's On-Line Help provides instant reference and instructions for commands
and dialog boxes. Here, however, there is a greater amount of useful information than in the
hard copy user's guide, and the on-line help can never be misplaced like the guide can. Also,
the on-line help is simply easier to use than the hard copy guide as it gets you to the needed
topics and answers faster.
There are various ways to use the help function:
For a description or explanation of a BitWare command, highlight the command
and press the F1 key. The respective information will be automatically displayed.
For description or explanation of a BitWare dialog box, open the box and press
the F1 key. The respective information will be automatically displayed.
To find a general topic quickly, use the Help menu's Table of Contents. To do this,
simply choose "Contents" from the Help menu in any BitWare Window. The On Line Help will be displayed, listing all of the major help topics.
Underline a topic and click on it or use the Tab key until the topic desired is
highlighted.
If you do not see the topic desired, use the Search button. The Search dialog box
will be displayed, listing subjects alphabetically.
SM
53
FAX Expander
Type 140
Cheyenne BitWare's On-Line Help
Novell Backbone
NEST (Novell Embedded System Technology)

Autoroute Option
Ricoh Fax
With NEST
CLIENT A
RS232
LINE
RS232
LINE
Ricoh Fax With

NEST & RS232
PC-FAX
EXPANDER
PC Using
Cheyenne
BitWare
With
NEST
Ricoh Fax With

RS232 PC-FAX
EXPANDER
File Server
With Cheyenne
FAX SERVE
NEST Autoroute
Software
CLIENT B
CLIENT C
What is NEST?
NEST is an acronym for Novell Embedded Systems Technology, which is a Novell
patent.
It is an alternative routing methodology that lets users route faxes directly to a recipient's
workstation, through a Novell 3.12 or 4.x server, running Cheyenne FaxServe. With this,
the receiving party is always assured of receiving the information.
It uses a numeric code (Nest Autoroute code), typically four digits. The customer enters
the code at the end of the telephone number (preceded and followed by the # ). It is
transmitted attached to the end of the transmitting machines TSI. Its purpose is similar
to that of a post office box number.
The NEST Autoroute code is given to the network during the handshake process. The
FaxServe software directs the information to the appropriate workstation on the LAN.
The benefits include minimizing the number of lost faxes, reducing the possibility of a
confidential fax being read by an unauthorized person(s), and the elimination of dedicated
telephone lines to be installed for direct routing of incoming documents.
54
SM
The RICOH PC-Fax Expander Software (Nest)
Cheyenne FAXSERVE with NEST
The Various Applications With Autoroute Technology
For the different means of sending information via Autoroute, there are specific
configurations:
Standalone PC - The customer, with a Ricoh fax machine and Cheyenne Bitware with
NEST, should be using the fax machine as an external modem. The fax does not have to
have NEST to send Autoroute faxes from the PC, just Bitware with NEST. However, if
the customer is going to fax from the fax machine and not from the PC, then the fax
machine must have the NEST option.
Peer-to-Peer LAN - There is no NEST Autoroute solution. However, by recommending
Cheyenne Bitshare to your customer and connecting a Ricoh fax machine with a PCFE
to a COM port (via an RS232 cable) on one of the client PCs, you would be providing
them with a solution. The fax is seen as an external modem which can then be shared by
all of the PCs on the Peer-to-Peer network to send out faxes. Any incoming faxes will be
received by the fax machine and printed out as a conventional fax.
In the future, Ricoh expects Bitshare to be upgraded to NEST for fax transmission,
allowing a fax machine to support NEST for walk-up use as well as from a PC.
Local Area Networks - With Cheyenne FAXserve with NEST, users will be able to
send and receive Autoroute messages. The LAN can send or receive via a modem or a
Ricoh fax machine with a PCFE, neither of which needs to have NEST. The telephone
number and subaddress are forwarded to the network by the modem or fax machine. The
decoding of the Autoroute address, which takes place during the fax handshake period, is
SM
55
FAX Expander
Type 140
Automatically and accurately routes incoming faxes to the appropriate recipients on a

network, whether the device is a PC, printer, copier, or a fax machine.
When FAXserve receives an incoming fax, it interprets the identification number and
routes the fax directly to the recipient's PC or other device according to the
preprogrammed ID number.
Its automatic routing of incoming documents minimizes the number of lost faxes and
reduces the possibility of a confidential fax being seen by unauthorized personnel.
performed by the LAN fax software. The software forwards the fax to the respective
client. The fax transmission takes place as if it were occurring between two fax
machines.
In a Netware LAN application, an autoroute fax can be forwarded to e-mail. Faxes
received can be viewed on the Bitware viewer or the e-mail viewer. This can be very
beneficial to customers who want only one user interface. The fax machine with a PCFE
can connect, via the RS232 cable, to a com port on the file server. This is a viable
solution for small offices with perhaps 20 to 30 people on the network where the file
server is in the immediate work area. In a corporate setting, the file server is generally
farther away. To connect multiple fax machines, a multiport serial board and fax server
are required. Because of the close proximity of the fax server, long serial cables running
throughout the work area are eliminated.
Scan Autoroute - With NEST incorporated into Ricoh's fax products, users can scan a
document into a fax machine and have it automatically routed to an address on a
network. Now users can send hard-copy documents via a fax machine and take
advantage of NEST autorouting features. This function can be supported by a stand-alone
configuration or in a LAN configuration.
56
SM
Novell Backbone
Transmitting with NEST

Ricoh Fax
With NEST
CLIENT A
RS232 LINE
RS232 LINE
Ricoh Fax With

NEST & RS232
PC-FAX
EXPANDER
PC Using
Cheyenne
BitWare
With NEST
Ricoh Fax With

RS232 PC-FAX
EXPANDER
File Server
With Cheyenne
F A X SERVE
NEST Autoroute
Software
CLIENT B
The procedure for transmitting a document using the NEST Autoroute option is very
similar to the conventional means of transmitting a document. Just follow these steps:
You must first know the respective passcode or subaddress (again, it's usually four
digits) of the intended recipient. Let's say the subaddress is 1234.
Whether you are faxing from within an application or not, the dialing procedure is the
same. You dial the intended recipient's fax number. Let's say it is 555-1515.
Then you dial a star (*), which is typically found on the lower left-hand corner of a
telephone keypad.
Now dial the subaddress. In this case, it is 1234.
Once again, dial the star (*), so that two stars frame the subaddress.
Now send your document by either pushing the "Start" key on the fax machine or by
clicking on "Send" on your PC.
Your document will now be faxed to the dialed fax number and then automatically onto
the assigned subaddress, being received directly into the recipient's PC, printer, or fax.
SM
57
FAX Expander
Type 140
CLIENT C
LAN Connectivity Without NEST

The Benefits of Shared Usage
Ricoh Fax
With NEST
Telephone
Company
CLIENT A
Novell Backbone
RS232 LINE
Ricoh Fax With

RS232 PC-FAX
EXPANDER
File Server
With Cheyenne
FAX SERVE
NEST Autoroute
Software
CLIENT B
CLIENT C
Multiple users can benefit from a RICOH PC-Fax Expander as it can be used as a shared
device within a Local Area Network (LAN). Here are some of those benefits:
Multiple users can fax directly from a PC and, utilizing the modem of the Ricoh fax
machine, out to the intended recipient. This eliminates the need for the user to leave
the desk and walk over to the fax machine, as well as eliminating the extra step of
printing the document in order to fax it via the automatic document feeder.
All users have access to an unlimited number of remote fax locations to transmit or
broadcast to, thanks to the memory storage capacity of their PCs. Included in this
storage are Quick Dial keys, Speed Dial keys, and Group Dial keys. This is in contrast
to the limited memory capacity typically found on most standalone fax machines.
Multiple users now have access to a departmental scanner for fast and convenient
input of hard-copy documents.
All users have access to a primary or secondary laser printer. This is beneficial
should any alternate standalone printer be out of service or busy printing a large job.
All users also have convenient access to a secondary plain-paper copier within their
department. This is beneficial should the primary copier be out of service or engaged
in a large copying job. Users can even make multiple copies if required, just as a
conventional copier would allow.
If a company was to purchase all of these office tools separately for each individual
on a LAN, the cost would be astronomical and the required office and desk space
would be overwhelming. With the RICOH PC-Fax Expander, though, all users should
share one multifunctional tool that would effectively serve their daily business needs.
In-Bound Routing With NEST
58
SM
123-4567#8888#
Novell Backbone
Telephone
Company
Ricoh Fax
With NEST
123-4567#8888#
123-4567#8888#
CLIENT A
8888
RS232 LINE
8888
RS232 LINE
Ricoh Fax With

NEST & RS232
PC-FAX
EXPANDER
PC Using
Cheyenne
BitWare
With NEST
Ricoh Fax With

RS232 PC-FAX
EXPANDER
File Server
With Cheyenne
FAX SERVE
NEST Autoroute
Software
CLIENT B
CLIENT C
All clients on the LAN must be assigned a four-digit passcode or subaddress by the
Program Administrator.
Any party sending a fax must be informed of this assigned passcode for the document
to be automatically routed on the receiving end.
In the PC Setup Dialog Box on the PC, select automatic answering, so that incoming
faxes will be received without operator assistance.
The benefits of receiving incoming documents directly to the appropriate recipient
include:
Keeping the received document from lying stray on a fax machine catch tray where it
is open for all eyes to see. This can prove detrimental in an environment where
sensitive information is communicated.
Should the fax machine itself run out of toner or paper, and the fax memory be filled
to capacity, there will always be sufficient memory in the PC to successfully receive
the document. This is especially true for environments where documents consisting
of high graphical content are communicated. With this, no important incoming
documents will ever be lost.
SM
59
FAX Expander
Type 140
In-Bound Routing with NEST Autoroute gets an incoming document directly to the
intended recipient. To receive documents routed to the appropriate recipient, the
following steps must be taken:
Novell Backbone
Autoroute Scanning with Cheyenne Bitware
CLIENT A
RS232 LINE
Ricoh Fax With

RS232 PC-FAX
EXPANDER
File Server
With Cheyenne
F A X SERVE
NEST Autoroute
Software
CLIENT B
CLIENT C
Autoroute Scanning is essentially the same as Manual Scanning except that the autoroute
capability allows the document being scanned to be sent directly to an assigned client on a local
area network via a four-digit address.
To perform an Autoroute Scan:
Press Function 16 on the Ricoh fax machine.

Press "Yes".
Enter the assigned four-digit autoroute code.
Click on "Scan" on the PC screen.
The client receives the document as a fax but now has annotation tools available.
60
SM
The Various Applications forSending Faxes

Application
Components Required
Without Autoroute:
To...
You need...
Fax from a fax to another fax
Fax machines
Fax from a PC to a fax
PC with Class 2 fax software, Ricoh fax with PCFE
FAX from a PC to a PC
TX1 =PC with BitWare, fax w/PCFE

RX2 =PC with BitWare, fax w/PCFE
Fax from a client on a LAN to a fax TX=LAN with LAN fax software
RX=fax machine
TX=LAN with LAN fax software
RX=PC with Class 2 fax software, Ricoh fax with PCFE
With Autoroute
To...
You need...
Autoroute Fax from a fax to a client TX=fax with NEST option

on a LAN
RX=LAN with LAN fax software that has NEST
Autoroute Fax from a client on a
LAN to another client on a LAN
TX=LAN with LAN fax software that has NEST

RX=LAN with LAN fax software that has NEST
Scanning:
To...
You need...
Autoroute scan to a client on a LAN Ricoh fax with PCFE and NEST option
LAN with LAN fax software that has NEST
Scan to a PC
Ricoh fax with PCFE

PC with Class 2 fax software
TWAIN scan to a PC
Ricoh fax with PCFE

PC with TWAIN-compliant software
1
2
TX=Transmit
RX=Receive
SM
61
FAX Expander
Type 140
Fax from a client on a LAN to a

standalone PC
Glossary of Terms
The following list will introduce you to some of the most common terms you will encounter
during the selling process and use of a RICOH PC-Fax Expander and its corresponding
Cheyenne BitWare for Ricoh software.
Application Software - A program or software group of programs used for a specific task, such
as word processing, accounting, desktop publishing, etc.
Background Operation - The ability to transmit or receive a fax form a PC while the user
continues -- without interruption -- working on the PC.
Binary File Transfer - The ability of two equally-equipped computer systems to transmit data
and image files in their original format rather than a series of digitized dots.
Emulation - A printer operational mode in which one type and brand of printer connected or
networked with a PC mimics the operation of another type and brand of printer. This allows it to
print data form an application compatible with the printer it is emulating.
Fax Server - A dedicated PC that provides other PCs on a network with fax capabilities. It is the
only PC directly connected to the department fax machine.
Inbound Routing - The process of relaying a fax received at a LAN fax server past the server to
the specific intended recipient's mailbox or output device (copier, printer, fax, etc.).
Modem - An abbreviation for MOdulator/DEModulator. A communication device which alters
data in digital form suitable for transmission over telephone lines. It then carries out the same
process in reverse when receiving data.
Multitasking - The ability to perform two or more functions simultaneously. For example, scan
an image into a PC while that same PC is printing a job.
NEST (Novell Embedded System Technology) - Novell's response to Microsoft's MS At-Work
operating system. It is an alternative routing method that lets users route faxes and other
information across telephone lines, local area networks and wide area networks directly to a
recipient's workstation environment.
Network Loadable Module (NLM) - Software that follows Novell guidelines to run as a service
on top of a Novell file server.
Sub-addressing - Intentional extra digits (usually four) added to the end of a fax number to
further direct information to a specific destination, such as a PC. Serves a similar function as a
Post Office box number.
62
SM
Optical Character Recognition (OCR) - A method of scanning a hard-copy document of text

into a PC for digital storage or editing.
Parallel Input - A method of sending the data to be printed from a PC to a printer into a
continuous stream of sets of 16 or more data bits.
Printer Driver - Software that translates the data generated by an application into the format
needed by the specific type and brand of printer connected to a network or PC.
RS232 (Serial Input) - A method of sending data to be printed in a continuous stream of data
bits. RS232 is a standard that defines the physical, electrical and control parameters for this type
of input.
FAX Expander
Type 140
Remote Retrieval - From a remote site (a PC or fax machine), fax recipients can
have access to received documents that are stored in individual fax mailboxes.
However, the received documents which the user is attempting to retrieve
must be received into memory at the original point
SM
63
APPENDIX B
Class 1 and Class 2 modem operation.
Class 1 and Class 2 are EIA (Electronics Industry Association) standards which specify
the condition of communications between PCs and facsimile machines.
How do they affect operation?
In this model, the practical difference is that Class 2 operation allows memory
transmission and reception, while Class 1 operation allows only direct transmission and
reception.
If the machine is set up for Class 1 communication, the customer will not be able to use
the fax machines SAF memory capabilities.
In receive mode, when Class 2 operation is selected, the customer can choose to:
print a received fax message,
store it in SAF (Store and Forward) memory, then print it or
store it in SAF memory then send it to the PC.
In transmit mode, when Class 2 operation is selected, memory transmission is
available.
For more details, see Memory Transmission, section 4.3 and Memory Reception,
section 4.4 in this manual.
Additional background information
The Class 1 and Class 2 interfaces are standards for PC-fax adapters. They define
which Group 3, T.30 protocol functions the PC-facsimile device is capable of
performing.
In Class 1 operation, the PC-fax adapter provides an interface between the PC and the
PSTN, allowing basic capabilities such as modem functions for sending fax data,
handshaking, tone generation and tone detection. In Class 1 operation, data is sent
through the fax machines modem, but cannot be stored in its SAF memory, so memory
transmit and receive features are not available.
In Class 2 operation, the fax expander hardware has more functionality. Additional
protocol signals are exchanged between the PC the fax adapter. This allows access to
the SAF memory in the fax machine.
64
SM

1.1. SPECIFICATIONS
Paper Capacity: 500 sheets
Acceptable Paper Sizes:
Model
Paper Size
Letter
Legal
Half Letter
A4
A5 sideways
F/F4
B4
B5
B5 sideways
US
Europe
Asia

Note: The machine will not accept a paper size indicated by a shaded box.
g
Paper Weight: 60.0~90.0 m2 [16~24 lb.]
PFU Type 140F
Dimensions (W x D x H): 427 x 549 x 153 mm [16.8 x 21.6 x 6.0 ins]

Weight: 7.5 kg [17 lbs]
SM
H515 PFU TYPE 140F
1
2
7
3
5
4
6
H110D001.wmf
Index
1
2
3
Name
Paper End Sensor
Relay Sensor
Paper Size Sensor (switches)
LEDs
4
5
6
Paper Feed Clutch

Paper Feed Motor
Interface Board
H515 PFU TYPE 140F
Description
Detects when the paper in the cassette has run
out.
Detects when the paper is at the exit point of
the paper feed unit.
Detects the paper size installed in the cassette.
The user must install the correct size actuator.
The LEDs indicate whether a paper end or a
jam condition has been detected in the paper
feed unit.
Clutch, transfers drive from the paper feed
motor to the paper feed roller.
Stepper motor, drives the paper feed
mechanisms in the unit.
The board interfaces the control signals and
sensor outputs between the host fax machine
and the paper feed mechanisms in the unit.
It also relays the signals between the host fax
machine and another paper feed unit (if
installed).
SM

2.1. PAPER PATH
[A]
[B]
The host fax machine has a paper entrance [A] at the bottom. Paper from
the optional paper feed unit(s) enters into the fax machines registration area
through the entrance.
If the machine has two optional paper feed units, paper from a lower paper
feed unit enters through the slot [B] to the host fax machine.
SM
H515 PFU TYPE 140F
PFU Type 140F
H110D002.wmf
2.2. PAPER SIZE DETECTION

The machine will detect paper size
by monitoring the output signals
from the three microswitches in the
paper size sensor [A].
[A]
The following table shows the combinations of the sensors output and
the paper size detected.
H110D003.wmf
L
Off
Off
Off
Off
On
On
On
On
Microswitch
C
Off
Off
On
On
Off
Off
On
On
R
Off
On
Off
On
Off
On
Off
On
US
Europe
Asia
Legal
Letter
F/F4
A4
A5 sideways
Note: The machine will not detect the presence of paper in the shaded conditions.
H515 PFU TYPE 140F
SM
2.3. PAPER END DETECTION

The paper end sensor actuator [A]
will drop through a slot in the bottom plate when the cassette has
run out of paper. The machine will
then detect a paper end condition.
[A]
H110D006.wmf
2.4. CASSETTE LOCK

When the cassette is installed in the paper feed unit, the lock pins ([A] and
[B]) enter the slots at each side of the cassette.
[D]
[C]
PFU Type 140F
[E]
[A]
[B]
H110D005.wmf
H110D004.wmf
The pin [C] on the base of the unit will release the bottom plate [D] from the
lock [E] when the cassette is installed in the unit.
SM
H515 PFU TYPE 140F
2.5. PAPER FEED
[C]
[B]
[E]
[A]
[D]
H110D007.wmf
The paper feed motor [A] drives the feed roller [B] and the relay roller [C].
The paper feed clutch [D] turns on when the unit feeds a sheet of paper from
the cassette. The paper feed clutch will transfer the motor drive to the feed
roller until the paper reaches the relay sensor [E].
If only one paper feed unit is installed:
The host machines paper feed motor will feed the paper into the printer
mechanism after the leading edge of the paper had passed the host machines registration sensor.
If two paper feed units are installed:
The feed motor in the upper paper feed unit will feed the paper to the fax
machines registration area after the leading edge of the paper had passed
the feed units relay sensor. The fax machines paper feed motor will then
feed the paper into the printer mechanism.
Jam Conditions
A jam condition is detected when any of the following conditions occurs:
1. The relay sensor does not activate 2 seconds after the paper feed clutch
was turned on [error code 9-50 or 9-52].
2. The registration sensor in the fax machine does not activate 2 seconds
after the relay sensor in the paper feed unit was activated [error code
9-51].
3. The relay sensor in the upper paper feed unit does not activate 2
seconds after the relay sensor in the lower paper feed unit was activated
(when two paper feed units are installed) [error code 9-53].
H515 PFU TYPE 140F
SM
2.6. INTERFACE BOARD
24V
+5V
(CN6-1) A
(CN1-6) Serial Data (Incoming)
(CN6-2) +24V
(CN6-3) AB
(CN1-7) Serial Clock
IC2
(CN6-4) B
(CN6-5) +24V
(CN1-9) Latch Signal
(CN6-6) BB
Paper Feed Motor

(CN1-8) Serial Data (Outgoing)
24V
(CN5-2) +24V
(CN5-2) Clutch On [
924V]
CL
(CN2-5)
Paper Feed Clutch
(CN2-7)
(CN2-6)
+5V
(CN4-1) +5V
(CN4-2,3,4) LED On [
(CN2-4)
(CN1-11)
INSL1
(CN1-12)
INSL0
95V]
LEDs
IC1
Cassette
ID
Creation
+5V
(CN3-5) +5V
(CN3-3) Paper Present [
95V]
(CN3-4) COM1
(CN2-2) OUTSL1
(CN3-2) Paper End [
(CN2-1) OUTSL0
Relay Sensor
95V]
Paper End Sensor
(CN3-1) COM1
+24V
(CN3-9) Paper Size 0 [
+5V
95V]
95V]
95V]
Paper Size Sensor
(CN3-7) COM1
H110D501.wmf
The host fax machine will control the paper feed unit(s) through a serial interface. The fax machine sends the control signals to the installed paper feed
units one by one. Each paper feed unit will then control its drive components
and/or responds with sensor status signals to the host fax machine.
Two logical signals (DEF0 and DEF1) are used to identify how many paper
feed stations the unit is assigned. The cassette ID creation circuit assign a
unique number to each paper feed unit as shown in the following table and
as illustrated on the next page.
1st optional PFU

2nd optional PFU
3rd optional PFU
4th optional PFU
INSL1
High
Low
Low
High
INSL0
High
Low
High
Low
DEF1
Low
Low
High
High
DEF0
Low
High
Low
High
Cassette ID
00
01
10
11
Up to four optional paper feed stations can be identified using these signals.
However, the number of optional paper feed stations which can be installed
is limited by the host fax machines specifications. As an example, FAX4700L
can only have up to two optional paper feed units.
SM
H515 PFU TYPE 140F
PFU Type 140F
IC1 on the interface board controls the drive components as directed by control signals received from the host fax machine. It will also monitor the
sensors in the unit and control the LEDs to notify the users of any errors. IC2
is the motor driver.
High
1st Paper Feed Unit
High
+5V
IC1
DEF0 = Low
DEF1 = Low
CN1-11
CN1-12
CN2-2
CN2-1
2nd Paper Feed Unit

+5V
IC1
Low
DEF0 = High
DEF1 = Low
CN1-11
CN1-12
CN2-2
CN2-1
Low
3rd Paper Feed Station

+5V
IC1
High
Low
DEF0 = Low
DEF1 = High
CN1-11
CN1-12
CN2-2
CN2-1
4th Paper Feed Station

+5V
IC1
Low
High
DEF0 = High
DEF1 = High
CN1-11
CN1-12
CN2-2
CN2-1
H110D502.wmf
H515 PFU TYPE 140F
SM
3. INSTALLATION
CAUTION
Perform the following before installing the optional unit:
2. Print out the lists of User-Programmed items and the System Parameter List.
1. Remove the connector cover [B].
Place the fax machine onto the
paper feed unit [A].
[C]
2. Secure the fax machine to the

paper feed unit with the bracket
[C] (2 screws). Connect the
harness [D] to the machine.
[B]
3. Install the harness cover [E] (1

screw), and re-install the
connector cover [B] (which was
removed in step 1).
[E]
[D]
h110i502.wmf
4. Remove the bottom plate holder

bracket [F] as shown.
[F]
5. Load paper into the paper feed

unit and turn the fax machine on.
Make a test print using the paper
feed unit.
h110i503.wmf
SM
H515 PFU TYPE 140F
PFU Type 140F
[A]

4.1. COVERS
[A]
[C]
[B]
H110R001.WMF
A: Left Side Cover (3 screws)

B: Right Front Cover (2 screws, 1 connector)
C: Right Side Cover (2 screws)
4.2. PCB AND PAPER FEED MOTOR

[A]
[D]
[B]
[C]
h110r002.wmf
A:
B:
C:
D:
Interface PCB (3 screws, 6 connectors)

Paper Feed Motor (2 screws, 1 connector)
Paper Motor Bracket (2 screws)
Gear
SM
10
H515 PFU TYPE 140F
4.3. PAPER FEED ROLLER ASSEMBLY/PAPER FEED CLUTCH
[A]
[D]
[B]
[C]
A:
B:
C:
D:
H110R003.WMF
Paper Feed Clutch (1 clip)

Gear (1 clip)
Paper Feed Roller (2 clips, 1 bushing)
Relay Roller (1 clips, 2 bushings)
PFU Type 140F
4.4. SENSORS
[A]
[B]
[C]
H110R004.wmf
A: Paper End Sensor (1 connector)

B: Relay Sensor (1 connector)
C: Paper Size Sensor (1 connector)
H515 PFU TYPE 140F
11
SM

1.1. SPECIFICATIONS
Paper Capacity: 500 sheets
Acceptable Paper Sizes:
Model
Paper Size
Letter
Legal
Half Letter
A4
A5 sideways
F/F4
B4
B5
B5 sideways
US
Europe
Asia

Note: The machine will not accept a paper size indicated by a shaded box.
g
Paper Weight: 60.0~90.0 m2 [16~24 lb.]

Dimensions: 540 x 427.3 x 157.7mm (W x D x H) [21.3 x 16.8 x 6.2 ins]
PFU Type 140S
Weight: 9kg [19.8lbs]
SM
H515 PFU TYPE 140S

Index
Name
Description
1
2
3
4
5
8
7
H110D008.wmf
Interface Board
1
2
3
4
5
6
Paper End Sensor

Paper Feed Motor
Paper Feed Clutch
Relay Sensor
Cover Switch
LEDs
7
8
Paper Size Sensor (switches)
H515 PFU TYPE 140S
The board interfaces the control signals and

sensor outputs between the host fax machine
and the paper feed mechanisms in the unit.
It also relays the signals between the host fax
machine and another paper feed unit (if
installed).
Detects when the paper in the cassette has run
out.
Stepper motor drives the paper feed
mechanisms in the unit.
Clutch, transfers drive from the paper feed
motor to the paper feed roller.
Detects when the paper is at the exit point of
the paper feed unit.
Detects whether the cover is open or closed.
The LEDs indicate whether a paper end or a
jam condition has been detected in the paper
feed unit.
Detects the paper size installed in the cassette.
The user must install the correct size actuator.
SM

2.1. PAPER PATH
[A]
[B]
H110D009.wmf
The host fax machine has a paper entrance [A] at the bottom. Paper from
the optional paper feed unit(s) enters into the fax machines registration area
through the entrance.
PFU Type 140S
If the machine has two optional paper feed units, paper from a lower paper
feed unit enters through the slot [B] to the host fax machine.
SM
H515 PFU TYPE 140S
2.2. PAPER SIZE DETECTION

The machine will detect the paper
size by monitoring the output signals from the three microswitches
in the paper size sensor [A].
[A]
The following table shows the combinations of the sensors output

and the paper size detected.
H110D010.wmf
L
Off
Off
Off
Off
On
On
On
On
Microswitch
C
Off
Off
On
On
Off
Off
On
On
R
Off
On
Off
On
Off
On
Off
On
US
Europe
Asia
Legal
Letter
F/F4
A4
A5 sideways
Note: The machine will not detect the presence of paper in the shaded conditions.
H515 PFU TYPE 140S
SM
2.3. PAPER END DETECTION

The paper end sensor actuator [A]
will drop through a slot in the bottom plate when the cassette has
run out of paper. The machine
then detect a paper end condition.
[A]
H110D013.wmf
2.4. CASSETTE LOCK

The rotary catch on the base of the unit [A] is used to lock the cassette to the
paper feed unit when the cassette is installed.
[C]
[A]
[B]
H110D012.wmf
H110D011.wmf
The guide block [B] on the base of the unit will release the bottom plate [C]
from the lock [D] when the cassette is installed in the unit.
SM
H515 PFU TYPE 140S
PFU Type 140S
[D]
2.5. JAM RELEASE
[A]
h110d014.wmf
The cover on the right side of the unit can be opened to remove a jammed
paper. The microswitch [A] detects when the cover is open. The LED will indicate to the user when the cover is open.
2.6. PAPER FEED
[C]
[B]
[A]
[D]
[E]
H110D007.wmf
The paper feed motor [A] drives the feed roller [B] and the relay roller [C].
The paper feed clutch [D] turns on when the unit feeds a sheet of paper from
the cassette. The paper feed clutch will transfer the motor drive to the feed
roller until the paper reaches the relay sensor [E].
H515 PFU TYPE 140S
SM
If only one paper feed unit is installed:

The host machines paper feed motor will feed the paper into the printer
mechanism after the leading edge of the paper had passed the host machines registration sensor.
If two paper feed units are installed:
The feed motor in the upper paper will feed unit will feed the paper to the fax
machines registration area after the leading edge of the paper had passed
the feed units relay sensor. The fax machines paper feed motor will then
feed the paper into the printer mechanism.
Jam Conditions
A jam condition is detected when any of the following conditions occurs:
1. The relay sensor does not activate 2 seconds after the paper feed
clutch was turned on [error code 9-50 or 9-52].
2. The registration sensor in the fax machine does not activate 2
seconds after the relay sensor in the paper feed unit was activated
[error code 9-51].
3. The relay sensor in the upper paper feed unit does not activate 2
seconds after the relay sensor in the lower paper feed unit was
activated (when two paper feed units are installed) [error code 9-53].
2.7. INTERFACE BOARD
24V
+5V
(CN6-1) A
(CN1-6) Serial Data (Incoming)
(CN6-2) +24V
(CN6-3) AB
(CN1-7) Serial Clock
IC2
(CN6-4) B
(CN6-5) +24V
(CN1-9) Latch Signal
(CN6-6) BB
Paper Feed Motor

(CN1-8) Serial Data (Outgoing)
24V
(CN5-2) +24V
(CN5-2) Clutch On [
924V]
CL
(CN2-5)
(CN2-7)
(CN2-6)
+5V
(CN4-1) +5V
(CN4-2,3,4) LED On [
(CN2-4)
(CN1-11)
INSL1
(CN1-12)
INSL0
95V]
LEDs
IC1
Cassette
ID
Creation
+5V
(CN3-5) +5V
(CN3-3) Paper Present [
95V]
(CN3-4) COM1
(CN2-2) OUTSL1
(CN3-2) Paper End [
(CN2-1) OUTSL0
(CN3-1) COM1
(CN3-11) Cover Open [
+24V
Relay Sensor
95V]
95V]
Paper End Sensor

Cover Sensor
(CN3-10) COM1
95V]
(CN3-8) Paper Size 1 [ 95V]
(CN3-6) Paper Size 2 [ 95V]
+5V
Paper Size Sensor
(CN3-7) COM1
H110D601.wmf
IC1 on the interface board controls the drive components as directed by control signals received from the host fax machine. It will also monitor the
sensors in the unit and control the LEDs to notify the users of any errors. IC2
is the motor driver.
SM
H515 PFU TYPE 140S
PFU Type 140S
Paper Feed Clutch
The host fax machine controls the paper feed unit(s) through a serial interface. The fax machine will send the control signals to the installed paper
feed units one by one. Each paper feed unit then control its drive components and/or responds with sensor status signals to the host fax machine.
Two logical signals (DEF0 and DEF1) are used to identify how many paper
feed stations the unit is assigned. The cassette ID creation circuit assigns a
unique number to each paper feed unit as shown in the following table and
as illustrated on the next page.
1st optional PFU

2nd optional PFU
3rd optional PFU
4th optional PFU
INSL1
High
Low
Low
High
INSL0
High
Low
High
Low
DEF1
Low
Low
High
High
DEF0
Low
High
Low
High
Cassette ID
00
01
10
11
Up to four optional paper feed stations can be identified using these signals.
However, the number of optional paper feed stations which can be installed
is limited by the host fax machines specifications. As an example, the
FAX4700L can only have up to two optional paper feed units.
H515 PFU TYPE 140S
SM
High
1st Paper Feed Unit
High
+5V
IC1
DEF0 = Low
DEF1 = Low
CN1-11
CN1-12
CN2-2
CN2-1
2nd Paper Feed Unit

+5V
IC1
Low
DEF0 = High
DEF1 = Low
CN1-11
CN1-12
CN2-2
CN2-1
Low
3rd Paper Feed Station

+5V
IC1
DEF0 = Low
DEF1 = High
CN1-11
CN1-12
CN2-2
CN2-1
PFU Type 140S
High
Low
4th Paper Feed Station

+5V
IC1
Low
High
DEF0 = High
DEF1 = High
CN1-11
CN1-12
CN2-2
CN2-1
H110D602.wmf
SM
H515 PFU TYPE 140S
3. INSTALLATION
CAUTION
Before installing an optional unit, perform the following:
2. Print out the lists of User-Programmed items and the System Parameter List.
1. Remove the connector cover [B]. Place the Fax machine onto the paper
feed unit.
2. Secure the fax machine to the
paper feed unit with the bracket
[C] (2 screws). Then connect the
harness [D] to the fax machine.
[C]
3. Install the harness cover [E] (1

screw), and reinstall the connector
cover [B] (which was removed in
step 1).
4. Load the paper into the paper
feed unit and turn on the fax
machine on. Make a test print
using the paper feed unit.
[B]
[E]
[A]
[D]
H110I501.WMF
PSU Type 140S
10
SM

4.1. COVERS
[B]
[A]
H110R005.WMF
A: Left Side Cover (3 screws)

B: Right Front Cover (2 screws, 1 connector)
4.2. PCB AND PAPER FEED MOTOR
[D]
[C]
A:
B:
C:
D:
SM
[B]
Interface PCB (3 screws, 6 connectors)

Paper Feed Motor (2 screws, 1 connector)
Paper Motor Bracket (2 screws)
Gear
11
h110r002.wmf
H515 PFU TYPE 140S
PFU Type 140S
[A]
4.3. PAPER FEED ROLLER ASSEMBLY AND PAPER FEED

CLUTCH
A: Paper Feed Clutch (1 clip)
B: Gear (1 clip)
[C]
[D]
[A]
[C]
[B]
H110R006.WMF
C: Paper Feed Roller (2 clips, 1 bushing)

D: Relay Roller (1 clip, 2 bushings)
4.4. SENSORS
[A]
[B]
[D]
[C]
A:
B:
C:
D:
H110R007.WMF
Paper End Sensor (1 connector)

Relay Sensor (1 connector)
Paper Size Sensor (1 connector)
Cover Open Sensor (1 connector)
H515 PFU TYPE 140S
12
SM
4.5. OTHERS
[B]
[A]
[D]
[D]
[C]
H110R008.WMF
A: Pressure Roller
B: Magnet Locks (2 screws each)
C: Spring Plates (1 screw each)
Note: When opening the front cover, carefully disconnect the Spring Hooks [D].
PFU Type 140S
During re-assembly, ensure that the spring hooks are installed as illustrated
above.
SM
13
H515 PFU TYPE 140S
H551
SERVICE MANUAL
OVERALL INFORMATION
SPECIFICATIONS
1.1 SPECIFICATIONS
Type
Desktop type transceiver
Circuit
PSTN, PABX, ISDN (optional)
Connection
Direct couple
Document Size
Length:
105 - 420 mm [4.1 - 16.5 ins]
Up to 1.2 m [47.2 ins], manually assisted
Up to 14 m [46 ft] after service adjustment
Width:
148 - 304 mm [5.8 - 12.0 ins]
Thickness:
0.05 to 0.2 mm [2 to 8 mils]
(equivalent to 50 - 80 g/m2)
Document Feed
Automatic feed, face down
ADF Capacity
50 sheets (using Letter size 20 lb paper or
A4 size 70 g/m2 paper)
25 sheets (using Legal/Double Letter size
20 lb paper or B4/A3 size 70 g/m2 paper)
Scanning Method
Flat bed, with CCD
Scan Width
219.5 mm [8.64 ins] 1% (A4/Letter)
260.1 mm [10.2 ins] 1% (B4)
308.9 mm [12.2 ins] 1% (A3/Double
Letter)
Scan Resolutions
Main scan: 200 dpi
Sub scan:
Standard - 100 lpi
Detail - 200 lpi
Fine - 400 lpi
Memory Capacity
ECM: 128 kbytes
SM
SAF:
Standard: 1.5 Mbytes: 126 pages
With 80 Mbyte HDD option: 1200 pages
With 80 Mbyte HDD plus Function
Upgrade Card: 3000 pages
Measured using ITU-T #1 test document
(Slerexe letter)
Compression
MH, MR, MMR, SSC (MMR only with ECM
and G4),
JBIG (G3 interface option required)
SAF storage for memory tx: MMR and raw
data
Protocol
Group 3 with ECM
Group 4 (ISDN G4 option required)
Modulation
V.34 (TCM), V.33/V.17(TCM), V.29 (QAM),
V.27ter (PHM), V.21 (FM)
Data Rate (bps)
G3:
33600/31200/28800/26400/24000/21600/
19200/16800/14400/12000/9600/7200/
4800/2400, Automatic fallback
G4 (option): 64 kbps/56 kbps
I/O Rate
With ECM: 0 ms/line
Without ECM: 2.5, 5, 10, 20, or 40 ms/line
Transmission Time
G3: 3 s at 28800 bps;
Measured with G3 ECM using memory for
an ITU-T #1 test document (Slerexe letter)
at standard resolution
G4 (option): 3 s at 64 kbps;
Measured with an ITU-T #1 test document
(Slerexe letter) at standard resolution
Printing System
Laser printing, plain paper, dry toner
1-1
H551
Overall
Information
SPECIFICATIONS
Paper Size and Capacity

Standard Cassette: 250 sheets
USA: Letter, Legal
100 Sheet Cassette (Optional): 100
sheets
USA: Letter, Legal
Asia: A4, A5 sideways, F, F4
Paper Feed Unit (Optional): 500 sheets
USA: Letter, Legal
Note: Up to two PFUs can be installed.
Weight
Approx. 19 kg [50.9 lbs]
Excluding CTM, handset, trays, and
optional units
Maximum Printing Width

208 mm [8.2 ins] (Letter)
202 mm [8.0 ins] (A4)
Print Resolutions
Fax and Copy Mode:
Main scan: 400 dpi
Sub scan: 400 dpi
Printer Mode: 300 x 300 dpi
Power Supply
USA:
115 20 Vac, 50 1 Hz
Europe/Asia: 187 - 276 Vac, 60 1 Hz
Power Consumption (Base Machine
Only)
Standby:
Minimum 2 W (see Note)
Normal 30 W
Transmitting: 60 W
Receiving: 220 W (Maximum: 900 W)
Copying: 300 W (Maximum: 950 W)
Note: 2W mode is not available if one of the
following options is installed.
- Printer interface unit
- G4
- RS232C interface
Operating Environment
Temperature: 17 - 28C [63 - 82F]
Humidity: 40 - 70 %Rh
Dimensions (W x D x H)
475 x 520 x 260 mm [18.7 x 20.5 x 10.2 ins]
Excluding handset, trays, and optional units
H551
1-2
SM
Rev.11/12/98
1.2 FEATURES
KEY:
B = With optional memory 80M (HDD)
only
C = With optional function upgrade
card only
D = With optional Fax On Demand kit
only
E = With optional 100 sheet cassette
only
H = With optional handset only (US
only)
I = With optional printer interface unit
only
Equipment
ADF
Book scan
Built-in handset
Cabinet
Counter
Cutter
Handset
Hard disk
Manual feed mechanism
(ADF)
Marker (Stamp)
Monitor speaker
(up to 2 units)
O
O
X
O

Automatic fallback
O
Automatic redialing
O
A or B
Dual Access
O
O

Action as a transfer
broadcaster
Auto Document
Batch Transmission (max 6
files)
Broadcasting
Chain Dialing
Fax on demand
Forwarding
O
X
X
O
X
G
X
H
B
X
O
O
E
D
F
I

Contrast
O
Halftone
O
(Basic & Error Diffusion)
SM
O
O
O
O
O
Overall
Information
MTF
Scanning Resolution Standard
Scanning Resolution Superfine
Smoothing to 400 x 400 dpi
when printing
1.2.1 FEATURES LIST
1-3
X
O
X
O
O
X
X
X
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
O
D
O
H551
FEATURES
Rev.11/12/98

Free Polling
Groups (7 groups)
Hold
ID Transmission
Immediate Redialing
Immediate transmission
Keystroke Programs
Length Reduction
Memory transmission
Multi-step Transfer
OMR
On Hook Dial
Ordering Toner
Page Count
Personal Codes
Polling Reception
Polling tx file lifetime in the
SAF
Quick Dial
Reception modes (Fax, Tel,
Auto)
Remote Transfer
Restricted Access
Secured Polling
Override
Secure Transmission
Send Later
Speed Dial
Telephone Directory
Transfer Request
Turnaround Polling
H551

Two-step Transfer
X
Two in one
O
Voice Request (immed. tx
X
only)
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
X
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
O
C
O
O
O

AI Short Protocol
Busy tone detection
Cable Equalizer
PSTN
ISDN
ECM
EFC
transmission
printing
Protection against wrong
conn.
Resolutions available for
reception
200 x 100 dpi
200 x 200 dpi
200 x 400 dpi
400 x 400 dpi
Resoln stepdown override
option
Short Preamble
Well log
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
X
O
X
O
O
O
O
O
J
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
X
X
X
O
Other User Features

Area code prefix
X
Service
Center mark
O
Checkered mark
O
O
O
Clock
O
Confidential ID
O
O
O
O
O
X
1-4
SM
Rev.11/12/98
FEATURES
SM
Other User Features

Wild Cards
Reports - Automatic
Error Report
Mode Change Report
TCR (Journal)
X
O
O
O
D
O
X
O
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
X
File List
O
Forwarding List
O
Group List
O
Hard Disk File List
B, C
Personal Code List
O
Program List
O
Quick Dial List
O
B
List
Speed Dial List
O
TCR
O
X
User Function List
O
User Parameter List
O

Back-to-back test
Book mode test
Buzzer test
Cable equalizer
1-5
X
O
O
X
O
O
H551
Overall
Information
Other User Features

Copy editing
X
(Erase Center/Margin)
Copy mode
O
O
Counters
O
O
Destination Check
X
O
File Retention Time
O
File Retransmission
O
Function Programs
O
B, C
ID Code
O
Label Insertion (From xxx)
O
Language Selection
O
Service
Memory Lock
A or B
Memory Lock ID
O
X
Multi Sort Document
O
Reception
Multicopy mode
O
O
Energy Saver (Night Timer
O
and standby mode)
O
O
RDS on/off
O
Reception Mode Switching
X
Timer
O
X
O
Remote ID
O
O
RTI, TTI, CSI
O
Secure ID
X
O
O
F
O
Telephone line type
O
Toner Saving Mode
O
TTI/CIL on/off
O
O
User Parameters
O
FEATURES
Cable equalizer
Comm. parameter display
Counter check
Country code
DTMF tone test
Echo countermeasure
Effective term of service calls
Error code display
Excessive jam alarm
File Transfer
Hard Disk Utilities
(Format etc.)
LCD contrast adjustment
Line error mark
Memory file printout (all files)
Modem test
NCU parameters
Operation panel test
Periodic service call
PM Call
Printer mechanism test
Printer test patterns
Programmable attenuation
Protocol dump list
RAM display/rewrite
RAM dump
RAM test
Ringer test
Scanner lamp test
Scanner mechanism test
Sensor initialization
Serial number
Service monitor report
Service station number
Software upload/download
SRAM data download
System parameter list
Technical data on the TCR
Thermal head parameters
User data transfer
H551
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
B
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
X
O
1-6
SM
The following table shows how the capability of each programmable item changes
after the optional function upgrade card is installed.
Item
Standard
Maximum number of memory files plus

polling rx files
Maximum number of memory files
Maximum number of destinations per file
Maximum number of destinations overall
Maximum number of pages overall
Number of Quick Dials
Number of Speed Dials
Number of Groups
Group
Maximum number of destinations dialed
from the ten-key pad overall
Maximum number of programs
200
With function
upgrade card
1000
200
200
500
1200
64
100
9
200
1000
1000
2000
3000
64
1000
30
200
100
1000
64
(programmed in 64
Quick Dial keys)
200
164
(programmed in 64
100 Speed Dial
codes)
200
300
2000
64
(programmed in 64
Quick Dial keys)
256
164
(programmed in 64
100 Speed Dial
codes)
1000
30
50
50
500

program
Maximum number of destinations used
for all programs
Maximum number of Auto Documents
Maximum number of communication

records for the TCR (Journal) stored in
the memory
Maximum number of addresses specified
for features such as Authorized
Reception and Specified Cassette
Selection
Maximum number of personal codes
SM
1-7
H551
Overall
Information
1.2.2 CAPABILITIES OF PROGRAMMABLE ITEMS
FEATURES
1.2.3 POSSIBLE COMBINATIONS OF OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT

The following table shows which items of optional equipment can be or cannot be
installed at the same time.
in the table indicates that the two items of optional equipment can be installed
at the same time.
X in the table indicates that the two items of optional equipment cannot be
installed at the same time.
IC Cards
Option/Equipment
A: Feature Expander 2M/4M
B: Feature Expander 80M (HDD)
C: Function Upgrade Card
D: Fax On Demand (FOD) Card
E: Flash/SRAM Data Copy Tool
(Service Tool)
IC Card
Slot
Upper
Slot
X
X
X
X
Lower
Slot
X
X
Other
A
A: Paper Feed Unit Type F
B: Paper Feed Unit Type S
C: 100 Sheet Cassette
D: Printer Interface
E: G4 Unit
F: G3 Unit
H551
B
X
X
X
1-8
SM
OVERALL MACHINE CONTROL
Fax On
Demand
Card
IC Card
(Type A)
Function
Upgrade
Card
Feature
Expander
2M
RS232C
Interface
IC Card
(Type B)
Lower Slot Upper Slot
Feature
Expander
4M
G4
Interface
HDD
Interface
80MB HDD
Bus Interface
Parallel Interface
Serial Interface
SG3 V.34
Interface
Dual
Port
DCR
MFCE
Overall
Information
1.3 OVERALL MACHINE CONTROL
DRAM
(2MB)
System ROM
Flash
ROM
(2MB)
DATA/ADDRESS BUS
Modem ROM
SRAM
(256kB)
VPP4F
LPC
Flash
ROM
(512kB)
SBU
MN195003
MFL
Modem
SCP
Hybrid IC
Printer
Interface
DTMF
Receiver
EXIO1
EXIO2
NCU
Speaker
Power
Saver CPU
Sensors
DC/DC
Converter
PSU
Clutches
Hexagonal Mirror
Motor
Main Motor
MFPD
Scanner Motor
Paper Feed Motor
Mechanical
Counter
Power Pack
CTM
Fan Motors
Mechanical
Components
100 Sheet
Cassette
Operation
Panel
SM
CG ROM
(512kB)
Microphone
(FOD)
MFDU
LDDR
Laser Synch.
Voice
A/D
Converter
PFUs
1-9
H551
OVERALL MACHINE CONTROL
The MFCE contains most of the logical components for overall system control, and
direct interfaces to the IC cards, an RS232C interface, a G4 interface (CiG4-SV)
and a optional G3 interface (SG3-V.34).
The MFDU has interfaces to the power supply, sensors, drive components, and
optional equipment.
The RS232C interface may not be available in some models.
There are two cpus in the machine: the main cpu (SCP) on the MFCE and the
energy saver cpu on the MFDU. In energy saver mode, the main CPU switches off
and the energy saver CPU takes over.
The 2 MB (16Mbit) flash ROM contains the system software, which can be updated
through an IC card slot or from the remote control center using RDS.
The CGROM (Character Generation ROM) contains all the character fonts used on
the display and in reports.
The Panasonic MN195003MFL modem is used for all the communications (V.34,
V.17, V.29, V.27ter., and V.21). The 512kB flash ROM contains the modem
program.
The 2 MB DRAM is used for the SAF memory, ECM buffer memory, work area,
and page memory. The SAF memory can be extended by 2, 4, or 80 MB with an IC
memory card or a hard disk.
The 256 kB SRAM contains the user and system parameters. This can be
upgraded by 512 kB with the function upgrade card. These SRAMs are battery
backed-up.
The SRAMs in the IC cards are battery backed up, in case the machine is turned
off or the machine goes into the 2-watt energy saver. However, the data in
these SRAMs are not guaranteed if the card is disconnected from the machine.
CAUTION
When ever the Fax On Demand card or Function Upgrade Card needs to be
removed for using the service tool, follow the instructions in section 3.3.9
to avoid any data loss.
H551
1-10
SM
DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
Rev. 11/98
SEP/SUB CODING
2.1 SEP/SUB CODING

OVERVIEW.
SEP (Selective Polling): This signal informs the other terminal of the polling ID to enable secured
(ID) polling.
PWD (Password): This signal informs the other terminal of the password to enable stored ID
override.
SUB (Sub-address): This signal informs the other terminal of the confidential ID to enable
confidential transmission.
SID (Sender ID): This signal informs the other terminal of the sender ID to enable confidential ID
override.
The ITU-T recommendation only clarifies the requirements for the transmitting terminal, and does
not specify the requirements for the receiving terminal. How the receiving terminal should treat
these signals depends on the manufacturer.
Note: Up to 20 digits or characters can be sent in a SEP, PWD,SUB or SID Frame.
SM
2-1
H551
Detailed
Descriptions
ITU-T introduced the following protocol signals in the T.30 recommendation in 1996. These signals
enable confidential transmission and secured polling between machines produced by different
manufacturers.
SEP/SUB CODING
2.1.1 SELECTIVE POLLING (SEP/PWD)

Tx
Rx
CED
NSF
DIS
SEP
NSC or DTC
NSS or DCS
TCF
CFR
H551D501.wmf
SEP Signal:
When the Rx terminal receives the SEP signal with the NSC or DTC signal, the Rx
terminal switches over to secured polling transmission using the SEP ID. The SEP
(Selective polling) signal must contain four digits as an ID.
The Rx terminal automatically disconnects the line when any of the following
conditions occurs (error code 0-15).
When the SEP ID is other than four digits.
When anything other than numbers is included in the ID.
The communication becomes free polling when the SEP ID programmed is 0000.
PWD Signal:
When the PWD (password) signal is transmitted together with the SEP signal, the
PWD programmed is used as an ID code for stored ID override.
However, PWD reception is disabled for this machine at the factory setting.
NOTE: The machine automatically disconnects the line when it receives a PWD
signal. To enable PWD reception, the communication bit switch 17 bit 2
must be switched on.
Cross reference: Section 4.2 Bit switches
Communication bit switch 17 bit 0: SEP signal reception.
Communication bit switch 17 bit 2: PWD/SID reception.
H551
2-2
SM
SEP/SUB CODING
2.1.2 SUB-ADDRESS (SUB/SID)

Tx
Rx
CED
Detailed
Descriptions
NSF
DIS
SUB
NSS or DCS
TCF
CFR
H551D502.wmf
SUB Signal:
The SUB (sub-address) signal transmitted from the Tx terminal contains a
confidential ID. A stored message can be printed using the SUB ID as confidential
ID override.
The SUB ID must contain four digits. The receiving terminal automatically
disconnects the line when any of the following conditions occurs (error code 0-15).
When the SUB ID is other than four digits.
When anything other than numbers is included in the ID.
When a confidential ID is not programmed in the Rx terminal and when the
transmitted SUB ID is 0000.
A stored message can be printed using the (normal) confidential ID stored in the
machine when the SUB ID sent from the transmitter is 0000.
SID Signal:
SID reception is disabled for this machine.
NOTE: This machine automatically disconnects the line when it receives a SID
signal. To enable SDI reception, communication bit switch 17 bit 2 must be
switched on.
Communication bit switch 17 bit 1: SUB signal reception.
Communication bit switch 17 bit 2: PWD/SID signal reception.
SM
2-3
H551
JBIG COMPRESSION
2.2 JBIG COMPRESSION

JBIG (Joint Bi-Level Image Coding Expert Group) is a working group which
consists of members of ITU-T and ISO. The JBIG compression method allows data
compression of approximately 1.2 to 1.3 times the MMR method in text mode, and
2 to 10 times in halftone mode.
JBIG compression is only available in the optional G3 unit.
JBIG compression is disabled when any of the following conditions occurs.
When JBIG compression is turned off by communication bit switch 00.
When ECM is turned off by communication bit switch 01.
When the receiving terminal does not have the JBIG feature.
When the receiving terminal does not have the ECM feature.
There are two modes for JBIG compression;
Standard mode: the transmitted data block consists of 128 lines.
Optional mode: the transmitted data block consists of one page (transmission
speed with this mode is faster).
This machine supports both modes for transmission and reception. Which mode to
use for communication is determined during handshaking.
Communication bit switch 00 bit 5: JBIG reception mode
0: Standard mode only
1: Standard mode and optional mode (default)
Communication bit switch 00 bit 6: Priority of JBIG mode used for transmission
0: Standard mode
1: Optional mode (default)
Data Compression
JBIG compressed data is called the Bi-level Image Entity (BIE).
The BIE consists of a header frame (BIH: Bi-level Image Header) and compressed
data frame (BID: Bi-level Image Data).
The BIH frame contains information such as main scan width (pixels), sub scan
length, and compression mode (standard/optional) used.
The BID frame contains the actual data.
BIE: Bi-level Image Entity
BIH
(Bi-Level Image
Header)
H551
BID
(Bi-Level Image Data)
Header
Image
Data
Page Data
2-4
H551D503.wmf
SM
MEMORY RECEPTION CONDITIONS
User parameter switch 05 bit 1 allows the user to select how to treat an incoming
message that is without RTI or CSI.
User parameter switch 05 bit 1:
Memory reception if no RTI or CSI received 0: Possible, 1: Impossible
If 0 is selected, the machine receives all message regardless of RTI and CSI.
When this is set to 1 (default setting), the following bit switch works in combination
with the user parameter setting.
System bit switch 11 bit 6:
Conditions for memory reception if no RTI or CSI is received.
0: Memory reception is available only when RTI or CSI is received.
1: Memory reception is always available unless there is a mechanical (printer)
error.
The default setting is set to 1.
The default setting means that if the printer is working, all messages will be
received, regardless of the user parameter setting. But the user can decide
whether or not to print messages that have no RTI or CSI. However, when there is
a mechanical error in the printer, the machine rejects such a message because no
trace of the sender will be stored in the machine.
This switch has been added from the LFO model.
SM
2-5
H551
Detailed
Descriptions
2.3 MEMORY RECEPTION CONDITIONS
SG3-V.34 BOARD
2.4 SG3-V.34 BOARD

DTMF
Receiver
CCP
Standard
NCU
Hybrid IC
MFCE
DPRAM
CPU
(RU8)
DMAC
JBIGIF
TONE
MN195003MFL
Modem
Flash ROM
(4MB)
Modem
DATA/ADDRESS BUS
Flash ROM
(4MB)
Program
DRAM
(4MB)
JBIG
M65761
SG3-V.34
H551D504.wmf
The SG3-V.34 board enables full dual G3 communication with the standard NCU.
The CCP (Communication Control Processor) contains a CPU, and it controls the
entire board.
1. CCP (Communication Control Processor)
CPU (RU8)
DPRAM (Dual Port RAM): Handshaking with the MFCE is done through this
block.
DMA controller
JBIG interface
2. ROM
512kB (4 Mbit) flash ROM for the system program
512kB (4 Mbit) flash ROM for the modem program
Both programs can be updated using the Flash/SRAM data copy board.
3. DRAM
512kB DRAM shared between the line buffer, ECM buffer, and working RAM.
4. Modem
A Panasonic MN195003MFL modem is used.
5. JBIG LSI
JBIG compression LSI
6. DTMF Receiver
H551
2-6
SM
INSTALLATION
INSTALLING THE MACHINE
3. INSTALLATION
3.1 INSTALLING THE MACHINE
Refer to the Operator's Manual for the installation environment and how to install
and set up the machine.
Refer to section 2.4.5. of the FX4 service manual for how to set up the NCU
hardware in each country.
3.2 INITIAL PROGRAMMING
Items to Program (User Administrator Level)

Clock
Initial programming items
On/off switches
Display/report language
Fusing power control during energy saver mode
(User parameter switch 05 - bit 6)
SM
3-1
Function No.
Function 08
Function 01
Function 01
Function 06
Function 06
Function 14
Function 13
Function 01
Function 06
Installation
Items to Program (Service Level)

Country code (NCU parameter 00)
Country code (System switch 0F)
Protocol requirements (G3 switch 0B)
PSTN access code (RAM address 4800DB)
PSTN access method (RAM address 4800CD)
Machine's serial number
Service station's fax number
PM call (System switch 01- bit 0)
Periodic service call (RAM address 480401)
Function No.
Function 91
Function 61
Function 62
Function 93
Function 63
H551
INSTALLING OPTIONAL UNITS
3.3 INSTALLING OPTIONAL UNITS
CAUTION
Do the following before installing an optional unit:

2. Print out the lists of user-programmed items and the system parameter list.
NOTE:
Refer to the Operators Manual for the user installable options.
For the Function Upgrade Card and Fax On Demand Card, be sure to read
section 3.3.9. after installation.
3.3.1 HARD DISK UNIT (80MB)

NOTE: If the optional G3 unit is also to be installed, install this option before
installing the G3 unit.
screws), left cover [B] (3 screws and
the connector cover), and the IC card
slot cover [C].
[B]
[A]
[C]
H130i501.WMF
2. Attach the bracket [D] to the hard

disk unit [E] (4 screws). Hook the
grounding plate [F] on the bracket
and secure the hard disk unit to the
machine (2 screws).
[F]
[E]
H551
3-2
[D]
H130i504.WMF
SM
FEATURE EXPANDER TYPE 140 80M III
Rev. 11/2000
3.3 FEATURE EXPANDER TYPE 140 80M III

This option can be installed in the following models:
- H551 series
ONLY QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL MAY DO THIS INSTALLATION.

!CAUTION
2. Print out the lists of user-programmed items and the System Parameter List.
3. Turn off the Main Switch, and disconnect the power plug.
NOTE:

For the Function Upgrade Card and Fax on Demand Card, be sure to read section
3.3.9, after installation.
Installation
1.
Remove the Rear Cover [A] (4 screws),

Left Cover [B] (3 screws and the
connector Cover), and the IC Card slot
Cover [C].
[B]
[A]
[C]
H130i501.WMF
2. Attach the bracket [D] to the Hard Disk

Unit [E] (4 screws). Hook the Grounding
Plate [F] on the bracket and secure the
Hard Disk Unit to the machine (2
screws).
[F]
[E]
SM
3-3
[D]
H551
Rev. 11/2000
[H]
3. Remove three screws to loosen the NCU
bracket [G]. (3 screws for Europe/Asia
models, 1 screw for USA model.)
NOTE: The Grounding Plate [H] is not
installed in the USA models.
4. Connect the HDD Harness [I] and the
Harness [J] to the Hard Disk Interface
Card [K].
[G]
[I]
[J]
5. Turn on the Battery switch [L] on the Hard

Disk Interface Card. Then insert the Hard
Disk Interface Card into the upper Card
Slot [M].
[K]
NOTE: Do not connect the 2-pin Harness [J] to the FDU at this time.
[P]
[G]
[O]
6. Lead the Harness containing the core with the

black marking [N] behind the NCU bracket [G].
Important:
This is to avoid the Hard Disk Data Bus from
interfering with the Hard Disk Drive Signal.
7. Connect the HDD harness to the Interface
Board [O], then connect the Interface
Board to the Hard Disk Unit [P].
[N]
[L]
8. Turn on the Main Switch and enter the Service Mode. Then do the following:
Set the System Bit Switch 05 bit 4 to 1, and System Bit Switch 00 bit 1 to 1, then
exit the Service Mode. The machine then does the RAM reset level 3.
Enter service function 16 and select 0 (INITIALIZE) to initialize the Hard Disk.
If OK is displayed, exit the Service Mode and turn off the Main Switch.
9. Connect the harness [J] (2 pins) from the Hard Disk Interface Card to CN73 on the
FDU.
10. Replace the screws, which were removed in step 3.
(3 screws for Europe/Asia models, 1 screw for USA model.)
H551
3-4
SM
Rev. 11/2000
11. Keep the Core [Q] and the Harness as shown and replace the Rear Cover and the Left
Cover.
Installation
[Q]
12. Turn on the Main Switch and enter the Service Mode.
Print the Memory Dump List (service function 06) for the following addresses and data.
70001E(H) - 50(H)
70001F(H) - 00(H)
700020(H) - FF(H)
700021(H) - FF(H)
700022(H) - 00(H)
700023(H) - 00(H)
700024(H) - 00(H)
700025(H) - 80(H)
If any of these addresses contain a value different from the above list, format the Hard
Disk
(service function 16).
CAUTION
The Hard Disk Interface Card contains a Lithium Battery. The danger of an
explosion exists if a Battery of this type is incorrectly replaced.
manufacturer. Discard used batteries in accordance with the manufacturers
instructions.
SM
3-5
H551
6. Reinstall the rear cover and the left cover.

Affix the ISDN decal [P] to the small cover
as shown. Connect the ISDN cable so that
the core is closer to the machine.
NOTE: Make sure that the grounding plate
does not come off when replacing
the rear cover.
[P]
H551i013.wmf
7. Plug in the machine and turn on the main

switch.
Set Communication Bit Switch 16 bit 2 to
1. Then turn the machine off and on to
enable the ISDN unit.
8. Input the initial settings with user function
61 and service function 17.
Please refer to the ISDN option service manual for details.
Make the following settings if necessary.
System bit switch 0A bit 1: Default communication mode.
Bit 1
0: G3
1: G4
System bit switch 0A bit 6: Line used for G3 transmission.
Bit 6
0: PSTN 1: ISDN
System bit switch 0A bit 7: Line used when the machine falls back to G3 from
G4
Bit 7
0: PSTN 1: ISDN
System bit switch 18 bits 0 and 1: Default communication line for
transmission
Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting
0
0 PSTN 1 or PSTN 2 (Default setting)
0
1 PSTN 1 (Standard G3 Unit)
1
0 PSTN 2 (Optional G3 Unit must be installed)
1
1 ISDN (Optional G4 Unit)
NOTE: Make sure that you input the following subscriber numbers when you
connect the machine under the US National ISDN network.
Subscriber number: G4 Subscriber No.1 (Main)/ G3 Subscriber No.1 (Main)
SPID Number: G4 Subscriber No.2 (Sub)/ G3 Subscriber No.2 (Sub)
H551
3-6
SM

Rev. 11/16/98
When the machine is initially used only with the PSTN, the line type programmed with phone
numbers in Quick Dials and the Speed Dials is stored as PSTN G3.
Later, if the line connection is changed so that G3 is to be used only with the ISDN, the
communication port for all stored Quick and Speed Dials must be changed to ISDN G3.
This feature allows the communication mode and port to be changed for all stored numbers at
once.
Procedure:
1) Change the data in the following RAM addresses.
4B5846(H) - Current line type setting.
4B5847(H) - Line type to be used after this procedure.
The default setting for the above addresses are FF(H).
2) Turn the main switch off and on.
Then, the machine checks all phone numbers stored in Quick Dials, Speed
Dials, AI Redial, and Forwarding Stations. If the communication mode and the
port setting for a number is the same as specified for the current setting in
the above address, the machine changes these to the new setting.
3) After this procedure, the data programmed automatically returns to FF(H).
Setting:
Bit 0 and 1: Communication mode
Bit
1 0 Setting
0 0 G3
0 1 G4
1 0 Not used
Bit 2 to 4: Communication port
Bit
4 3 2 Setting
0 0 0 PSTN1 (Standard G3)
0 0 1 PSTN2 (Optional G3 unit)
0 1 1 ISDN
1 0 0 Any available port
(This setting can be used only when an optional G3 or G4 unit is installed in
the machine.)
Example:
If you wish to change the port setting from PSTN G3 to ISDN G3,
change the data to 00(H) (0000 0000) in the address 4B5846(H)
change the data to 0C(H) (00001100) in the address 4B5847(H)
NOTE: Do not use this procedure if there are any files stored in the memory
awaiting transmission.
H551
3-6A
SM
3.3.3 G3 INTERFACE
1. Remove the rear cover [A] (4 screws), and
the left cover [B] (3 screws) and the PFU
connector cover. Then, remove the small
cover [C] from the rear cover as shown.
[B]
[C]
[D]
2. Remove the PIF brackets [D] and [E].
Bend the flat cable [F] as shown and
connect it to the FCE (CN4) and the G3
interface board [G].
NOTE: Make sure that the core [H] is
placed by the FCE as shown.
Make sure that the w marks
face each other at each end.
H143i501.WMF
[E]
[F]
[G]
[H]
H551i001.WMF
3. Attach the inner bracket [I] (3 screws)

and the grounding plate [J] (3 screws) as
shown.
[I]
[J]
H551i002.wmf
SM
3-7
H551
Installation
[A]
4. Secure the SG3 (V.34) board [K] (3

screws) and the optional NCU board [L]
(4 screws).
[K]
[L]
H551i003.wmf
5. Connect the harness [M] between the

SG3 (V.34) board and the optional NCU
board.
Also connect the G3 interface board [G]
to the SG3 (V.34) board.
[M]
NOTE: The core is not installed on the
harness [M] in the USA models.
[G]
H551i004.WMF
[D]
6. Install the PIF brackets [D] and [E] which
were removed in step 2.
Attach the grounding plate [N] to the
outer bracket [O]. Then attach the outer
bracket to the machine.
Align the grounding plate with the left
edge of the outer bracket.
[E]
[O]
[N]
H551
3-8
H551i005.WMF
SM
7. Set the phone line harness [P] in the

bracket [Q]. Then attach it to the small
cover [R] (1 tapping screw).
[R]
[P]
H551i006.wmf
[Q]
Installation
[S]
8. Install the small cover and connect the phone
line harness to the connector [S] as shown.
H551i007.wmf
9. Install the rear cover and the left cover. Affix

the Line 2 decal [T] on the small cover.
Make sure that the grounding plate does not
come off when replacing the rear cover.
[T]
H551i008.wmf
SM
3-9
H551
[U]
10. Wrap the phone line around the core [U] as

shown and connect it to the machine.
NOTE: Make sure that the core is placed near
the machine.

switch.
Set Communication Bit Switch 16 bit 1 to 1.
Then turn the machine off and on to enable the
optional G3 unit.
H551i504.WMF
12. Input the optional G3 CSI by user function 61.

Make the following settings if necessary.
Default communication line for transmission:
System Bit Switch 18 bit 0 and 1
Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting
0
0 PSTN 1 or PSTN 2 (Default setting)
0
1 PSTN 1 (Standard G3 Unit)
1
0 PSTN 2 (Optional G3 Unit)
1
1 ISDN (Optional G4 unit must be installed)
PSTN 2 (optional G3) access code (RAM address 4800D7).
PSTN 2 (optional G3) access method (RAM address 4800CD)
H551
3-10
SM
3.3.4 FAX ON DEMAND

NOTE: Perform the procedures in the section 3.3.9 after installation.
2. Remove the NCU cover (1 screw) and [C]

replace it with the cover for the Fax on
Demand feature [C], then connect the
harness [D] to CN73 on the FCE as shown.
[A]
[D]
[B]
Installation
1. Remove the rear cover [A] (4 screws), and

the IC card slot cover [B].
H132I501.WMF
3. Install the battery on the IC card and turn

on the battery switch.
4. Install the IC card [E] into the lower slot,
and put back the rear cover [A]. Then,
connect the microphone socket [F] to the
NCU cover as shown.
switch. Then perform the following.
Print the system parameter list and make
sure that "FOD" is listed as an option on
the list.
Check that the functions related to the
Fax on Demand feature can be
accessed.
(Please refer to the operator's manual.)
[E]
[F]
H132I502.WMF
CAUTION
The IC card contains a lithium battery. The danger of explosion exists if a
battery of this type is incorrectly replaced.
manufacturer. Discard used batteries in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions.
SM
3-11
H551
3.3.5 PAPER FEED UNIT (FRONT FLOW)

[C]
1. Put the machine on the paper feed

unit [A], and remove the connector
cover [B] (1 screw).
2. Secure the machine and the paper
feed unit with the bracket [C] (2
screws). Then connect the
harness [D] to the machine.
[B]
[E]
[D]
3. Install the harness cover [E]

(1 screw), and install the
connector cover [B] (which was
removed in step 1).
[A]
H110I502.WMF
4. Remove the bottom plate holder bracket

[F] as shown.
[F]
5. Load the paper and turn on the machine.

Make a test print using the paper feed
unit.
H110I503.WMF
H551
3-12
SM
3.3.6 PAPER FEED UNIT (SIDE FLOW)

1. Put the machine on the paper feed unit [A], and remove the connector cover [B]
(1 screw).
2. Secure the machine and the paper feed unit at the front side with the panel
screw [C], spacer [D], and the collar [E].
NOTE: This step is not required for the H515 models.
3. Secure the rear side with the bracket [F] (2 screws). Then connect the harness
[G] to the machine.
Installation
4. Install the harness cover [H] (1 screw), and install the connector cover [B]
(which was removed in step 1).
5. Load the paper and turn on the machine.
Make a test print using the paper feed unit.
[F]
[E]
[B]
[D]
[C]
[H]
[G]
SM
H110I501.WMF
3-13
H551
3.3.7 COUNTER
[C]
1. Remove the rear cover [A] and the small
cover.
[B]
2. Install the counter [B] as shown.

3. Connect the harness [C] to the FDU
interface harness, then install the rear
cover [A].
switch.
5. Make some copies and check whether the
counter works or not. If it doesn't, check
the harness connection from the counter to
the FDU.
[A]
H165I505.WMF
H551
3-14
SM
3.3.8 PRINTER UNIT

1. Remove the cassette cover from the
rear cover [A].
NOTE: The cassette cover is not
installed in the Europe models.
[A]
2. Remove the rear cover [A] (2 screws)

and two small covers [B] (1 screw) and
[C].
[C]
H144I510.WMF
Installation
[B]
3. Attach the grounding plate [D] to the

machine (2 screws).
[D]
H144i523.WMF
4. Install the rear cover back on the

corner), and install two brackets [E] (2
screws) and [F] (2 screws - one of
these screws also secures the rear
cover) as shown.
[E]
[F]
H144I513.WMF
SM
3-15
H551
5. Attach the brackets [G] and [H] onto the

bracket plate [I] (2 screws).
NOTE: For the brackets [G] and [H], used
the ones which have "B" marked.
[I]
6. Attach the bracket plate [I] (4 screws) and

the side bracket [J] (1 screw) to the Printer
Interface Unit.
7. Remove the side covers of the Printer
Interface Unit.
[J]
[H]
[G]
H144I565.WMF
8. Connect the harness [K] to the FDU

cover. Hook the Printer Interface Unit
onto the machine by the brackets [G] and
[H], then secure the unit (2 screws). Do
not tighten the screw at the side bracket
[J].
[K]
H144i566.wmf
[L]
9. Install the side covers [L] and [M].
[M]
H144I567.WMF
H551
3-16
SM
[P]
10. Place the spacers [N] on top of the Printer

Interface Unit and secure the top cover [O] with
two long screws [P] (M3 x 10 mm) and one short
screw [Q] (M3 x 6 mm).
[O]
[Q]
[N]
11. Attach a core at both ends of a parallel printer
cable, then connect it to the Printer Interface Unit.
[R]
H144i541.WMF
13. Print a status sheet by pressing the button [R] at

the top of the printer interface unit.
SM
3-17
H551
Installation
12. Plug in the machine and turn on the main switch.

Check if the On Line indicator on the operation
panel is lit. If not, check the harness connection
from the Printer Interface Unit to the FDU.
3.3.9 DATA PROTECTION

Important notice for the Function Upgrade Card and Fax On Demand Card:
The Function Upgrade Card holds data that has been programmed, and the Fax
On Demand card holds the voice messages that have been recorded.
CAUTION
The following procedure must be avoided because it erases all the data
stored in the card.
1. Turning off the machine with the card installed.
2. Disconnecting the card.
3. Turning on the machine without the card installed.
To prevent accidental data erasure, change the System Bit Switch 16 - bit 0 to 1
whenever a new card is installed.
When this bit switch is enabled, the machine will not start up unless one of the
following cards is detected at power up, so that the machine will not reinitialize
itself to a without-the-card configuration.
Function Upgrade Card
Fax On Demand Card
FCE Data Copy Tool (Service Tool)
H551
3-18
SM
SERVICE TABLES
SERVICE
TABLES
4. A. USER PARAMETERS
SM
4-A
FAX4800L
FAX4800L
4-B
SM
SERVICE
TABLES
SM
4-C
FAX4800L
FAX4800L
4-D
SM
SERVICE
TABLES
SM
4-E
FAX4800L
FAX4800L
4-F
SM
SERVICE
TABLES
SM
4-G
FAX4800L
FAX4800L
4-H
SM
SERVICE
TABLES
SM
4-I
FAX4800L

In this section, frequently used keys are referred to with the following symbols.
- Start key
- Stop key
- Function key
- Yes key
- No key
- Up arrow key
- Down arrow key
- Right arrow key
- Left arrow key
4.1.1 BIT SWITCH PROGRAMMING (FUNCTION 01)
1.
then immediately
SERVICE SET
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE
NO: _ OR NO
02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR
H515M501.WMF
2.
3. To see the system bit switches:
To see the scanner switches:
To see the printer (plotter) switches:
To see the G3 switches:
To see the communication switches:
Example: Press
H515M502.WMF
SYSTEM SWITCH
DEFAULT : 00000000
SWITCH00: 00000000
H515M503.WMF

Example: Display bit switch 3: x 3
SYSTEM SWITCH
DEFAULT : 00000000
SWITCH03: 00000000

press
SYSTEM SWITCH
DEFAULT : 00000000
SWITCH03: 10000000
6. Either:
Finish -
SM
4-1
H515M504.WMF
H515M505.WMF
H551
Service Tables
Enables Bit Switch Programming, to change the settings of the unit's electronic DIP
switches. Bit switch functions are listed on section 4.2 current and defualt settings
are listed on the system parameter list. (section 4.1.2)
4.1.2 GROUP 3 SYSTEM PARAMETER LIST (FUNCTION 02)

The printout provides the techician with a copy of the operator and service
programmedc setting of the machine. The listing includes the ID's settings, the
counters, NCU parameters and the default and current setting of the BIT Switches.
Refer to the sample printout.
1.
then immediately
SERVICE SET
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE
NO: _ OR NO
02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR
H515M501.WMF

PRESS START
2.
NO
3.
Refer to the following table for the meaning of each counter in the list.
Name
SCN
TX
PM
PCU
Meaning
Transmitted page
counter
PM counter
H515M506.WMF
Name
Meaning
Received page counter
PM Default
Default setting for the

PM service call interval
Copied page counter
PRT
RX

using the current master
drum
ADF
using the ADF
MAIN Cassette Paper feed counter
(Standard cassette)
Cassette 3
Paper feed counter
BY-PASS
Paper feed counter
(By-pass feeder)
COPY JAM
Paper jam counter (total)
PAPER JAM
Paper jam counter (Jams
at the registration area)
CST 2 JAM
Paper jam counter
OPEN CST
Paper jam counter
JAM
(100-sheet cassette)
PRN
from the PC printer
interface
PPC2
PPC4
H551
TO CANCEL
COPY
TONER
Cassette 2
OPEN
Cassette
DOC. JAM
EJECT JAM
MAIN CST
JAM
CST 3 JAM

using the current CTM
Paper feed counter
Paper feed counter
(100 sheet cassette)
Document jam counter
PPC1
Fusing exit jam counter

Paper jam counter
(Standard cassette)
Paper jam counter
Paper jam counter
(By-pass feeder)
PPC3
BY-PASS JAM
4-2
SM
A sample parameter list is given below.
SYSTEM PARAMETER LIST (Date and Time) *
* *
TTI
SERIAL NO. - Serial number programmed by function 14)

ROM VER.
[Version]
[Software release no.]
[Software release date]
ROM NO.
[Software part no.] [Check sum values (total) (boot) (main)]
R T I
T T I
C S I
CONFIDENTIAL ID
ID CODE
MEMORY LOCK ID
NUMBER
OWN NUMBER
SERVICE NUMBER
NCU PARAMETER
PARAMETER
SCAN THRESHOLD
2MB or 4MB
CASSETTE 2
Service Tables
COUNTER
- Optional memory card capacity installed

- Optional paper feed unit installed

(SWUSR) - User Parameter Settings

(SWSYS) - System Bit Switch Settings
(SWSCN) - Scanner Bit Switch Settings
(SWPLT) - Printer Bit Switch Settings
(SWCOM) - Communication Bit Switch Settings
(SWG3)
SM
- G3 Bit Switch Settings
4-3
H551
4.1.3 ERROR CODE DISPLAY (FUNCTION 03)

This function will allo9w the technician to displayh and scroll through the error
codes, if any, that had occurred in the machine. The displayed message will also
include the time and date that each error had occurred.
1. ,
then immediately
SERVICE SET
NO: _ OR
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE
NO
02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR
H515M501.WMF
2.
ERROR CODE
CODE=0-14
JAN
3. Either:
Scroll through the error codes - or
Finish -
3:15PM
H515M507.WMF
4.1.4 SERVICE MONITOR REPORT (FUNCTION 04)

This function will print a listing of the error codes, if any, that had occurred in the
machine. As in the displayed listing, the Service Monitor Report will include the
time and date that each error had occurred.
1.
then immediately
SERVICE SET
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE
NO: _ OR NO
02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR
H515M501.WMF
2.
SERVICE MONITOR REPORT

PRESS START
NO
3.
TO CANCEL
H515M508.WMF
4.1.5 GROUP 3 PROTOCOL DUMP (FUNCTION 05)

This function will print the contents of the protocol signals that were exchanged
during the last six communications.
1.
then immediately
SERVICE SET
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE
NO: _ OR NO
02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR
H515M501.WMF
2.
G3 PROTOCOL DUMP LIST

PRESS
3.
START
NO
TO CANCEL
H515M509.WMF
H551
4-4
SM
4.1.6 RAM DISPLAY/REWRITE (FUNCTION 06)

This function will allow the technician to display the RAM data in a selected address
location and if required, allow the data to be rewritten. The data is displayed in
hexadecimal format. The current value of each address is listed in the RAM dump printout.
The function of each address is described in sections 4-3 and 4-5.
1.
then immediately
SERVICE SET
NO: _ OR
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE
2.
H515M501.WMF
NO: _
RAM
0.MEMORY R/W
3.
NO
02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR
1.MEMORY DUMP
H515M510.WMF
MEMORY R/W
ADDRESS= 000000
DATA=2E
H515M512.WMF
MEMORY R/W
ADDRESS= 480020
DATA=00

5. If you wish to change the data, move the

cursor to the data field: press .
6. Type in the new data.
Example: 80, press
MEMORY
R/W
ADDRESS= 480020
DATA=
00
H515M513 WMF
7. Either:
View the previous address - press .
View the next address - press .
Finish -
MEMORY R/W
ADDRESS= 480020
DATA= 80
4.1.7 RAM DUMP (FUNCTION 06)

This function will print a listing of the current information that is stored in the selected
address location. The function of each address is described in sections 4-3 and 4-5. The
current listing of each settiong can be printed by performing the RAM Dump Procedure.
Note that the title of the report is called Memory Dump, not RAM Dump.
1.
then immediately .
SERVICE SET
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE
NO: _ OR NO
02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR
2.
H515M501.WMF
NO: _
RAM
3.
0.MEMORY R/W
1.MEMORY DUMP
H515M510.WMF
MEMORY DUMP
ADD. 0000 00H - ADD.
FFH
H515M515.WMF
SM
4-5
H551
Service Tables
4. Input the address that you wish to see.

Example: Address 480020
4. Enter the first four digits of the start and

end addresses.
Example: Start at 480000, end at
4801FF.
MEMORY DUMP
ADD. 480000H - ADD. 4800FFH
H515M516.WMF
5.
4.1.8 COUNTER DISPLAY/REWRITE (FUNCTION 07)

This function allows the technician to read and reset the counters. The current
totals of the counters are also losted on the system parameter list.
1.
then immediately
SERVICE SET
2.
COUNTER R/W
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE
0.COUNTER
2.CTM COUNTER
3. Either:
Check the transmitted, received, scanned
and printed page counters, and
the printer and scanner jam counters press
Check the PM counter - press
Check the CTM counter - press
Check the OPU counter - press
Example: Press
NO: _ OR
NO
02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR
NO: _
1.PM COUNTER
3.PCU COUNTER
H515M517 WMF
COUNTER
TX : 000000
RX : 000000
SCN: 000000
PRT: 000000
H515M518.WMF
4. To change the contents of a counter,

input the new value, then press .
5. To finish:
H551
4-6
SM
4.1.9 MODEM TEST (FUNCTION 08)

This test allows the technician to hear the audio tone of each of the modem
signals.
1.
then immediately
SERVICE SET
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE
NO: _ OR
NO
02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR
H515M501.WMF
NO: _
NCU
0.MODEM
1.DTMF
2.NCU PARA
2.
3.RINGER
H515M519.WMF
3.
MODEM TEST
NO.01=V21
300BPS
PRESS "START"

or .
H515M520.WMF
5. To start a test:
Service Tables

7. To finish:
4.1.10 DTMF TONE TEST (FUNCTION 08)

This test allows the technician to hear the audio tone of each key of the ten key
pad.
1.
then immediately
SERVICE SET
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE
NO: _ OR
NO
02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR
H515M501.WMF
NO: _
2.
NCU
3.
DTMF TEST
0.MODEM
2.NCU PARA
1.DTMF
3.RINGER
H515M519.WMF
NO.01=TONE [0]
PRESS "START"

or .
H515M521.WMF
5. To start a test:
7. To finish:
SM
4-7
H551
4.1.11 NCU PARAMETERS (FUNCTION 08)

This controls the Network Control Unit (NCU) automatic dialing parameters for
such as the auto-answering frequencies, length of the pause and the number of
rings before the machine will answer an incoming call. The current value of each
address is listed on the system parameter list.
1.
then immediately
SERVICE SET
NO: _ OR
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE
NO
02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR
H515M501.WMF
NO: _
NCU
0.MODEM
1.DTMF
2.NCU PARA
2.
3.RINGER
H515M519.WMF
3.
NCU PARAMETER SET

C.C =017
C.C =019
PRESS "YES/NO"

or . If you want to change a value,
enter the new value at the keypad,
then press .
H515M522.WMF
5. To finish : .
NOTE: Parameter CC is the Country Code, Parameter 01 is the Tx level.
Refer to section 4.3 for full details on NCU parameters.
4.1.12 MODEM DETECTION TEST (FUNCTION 08)

NOTE: This function can be used only when G3 bit switch 0B bit 5 (French PTT
requirements) is 1 in European models. It cannot be used in USA models.
1.
then immediately
SERVICE SET
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE
NO: _ OR
NO
02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR
H515M501.WMF
NO: _
NCU
0.MODEM
1.DTMF
2.NCU PARA
2.
3.RINGER
H515M519.WMF
3.
DETECT TEST
READY
NO.01=V29 9600BPS
PRESS START
H515M523.WMF
H551
4-8
SM

or .
5. To start a test:
7. To finish:
4.1.13 RINGER TEST (FUNCTION 08)

This test will output the audio tone of the ring signal.
1.
then immediately
SERVICE SET
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE
NO: _ OR
NO
02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR
H515M501.WMF
NO: _
1.DTMF
2.NCU PARA
3.RINGER
H515M519.WMF
3.
RINGER TEST
PRESS START
4. To start the test:
H515M524.WMF
5. To stop :
6. To finish:
4.1.14 OPERATION PANEL TEST (FUNCTION 09)

The operation panel test will light all of the segments in the display panel and all of
the LED indicators.
1.
then immediately
SERVICE SET
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE
NO: _ OR
NO
02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR
H515M501.WMF
2.
LED.LCD
PRESS START
3. To start the test, press .

The screen should turn black.
H515M525.WMF

5. To finish:
SM
4-9
H551
Service Tables
NCU
0.MODEM
2.
4.1.15 XENON LAMP TEST (FUNCTION 10)

This test will illuminate the xenon lamp in the scanning section.
1.
then immediately
SERVICE SET
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE
NO: _ OR
NO
02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR
H515M501.WMF
2.
SCANNER
0.Xe LAMP
3.
Xe LAMP
NO: _
1.ADF TEST
H515M526.WMF
PRESS START
4. To start the test, press
H515M527.WMF

6. To finish:
4.1.16 ADF TEST (FUNCTION 10)

The machine will perform the service mode automatic document feed (ADF) test
procedure. The test consists of feeding the documents that were inserted into the
ADF with out performing an actual FAX, or copy operation.
1.
then immediately
SERVICE SET
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE
NO: _ OR
NO
02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR
H515M501.WMF
2.
NO: _
SCANNER
0.Xe LAMP
1.ADF TEST
3.
H515M526.WMF
ADF TEST
PRESS START
4. Place a document in the feeder,

then press .
H515M528.WMF

6. Finish:
H551
4-10
SM
4.1.17 PRINTER TEST PATTERNS (FUNCTION 11)

The service test will allow the technician to test the operation of the printer section
on the machine by printing the test patterns that are stored in the RAM section of
the machine. The machine will print one copy of each selected test pattern.
NO: _ OR
SERVICE SET
1.
then immediately
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE
NO
02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR
H515M501.WMF
NO: _
PRINTER
2.
0.PATTERN
3.
1.AGING TEST
H515M529.WMF
ENTER CODE
PATTERN
CODE: _
4. Press a key from to .
TO CANCEL
NO
SCROLL
H515M530.WMF
CODE: 0
VERTICAL
PRESS START
6. To finish:
H515M531.WMF
4.1.18 SCANNER AND PRINTER MECHANISM TEST - FREE RUN

(FUNCTION 11)
The aging test will continuously cycle the machine. During the aging test, the
machine will light all of the operation panel indicators, the display panel, the xenon
lamp and the ADF unit will cycle. In addition, the machine will print a light gray
pattern on each sheet of paper. To terminate the aging test, depress the STOP
key.
1.
then immediately
SERVICE SET
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE
NO: _ OR
NO
02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR
H515M501.WMF
2.
NO: _
PRINTER
0.PATTERN
3.
1.AGING TEST
H515M529.WMF
MECH. TEST
PRESS START
4. To start the free run, press .

H515M532.WMF

6. To finish:
SM
4-11
H551
Service Tables
PATTERN
5. Press .
A test pattern is printed.
4.1.19 RAM TESTS (FUNCTION 12)

This function will allow the operator to record the serial number of the machine into
the RAM memory. The recorded serial number is used during the feature of placing
an auto service call. The entered serial number is listed on the System Parameter
List.
1.
then immediately
SERVICE SET
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE
NO: _ OR
NO
02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR
H515M501.WMF
2.
NO: _
RAM TEST
0.SRAM
2.COPY
3. Either:
Test the SRAM:
Press
Test the DRAM:
Press
If test is successful, the display shows
"OK!!".
If test is unsuccessful, the display shows
"ADDRESS=".
1.DRAM
H515M533.WMF
4. To finish:

H551
4-12
SM
4.1.20 SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD (FUNCTION 12)

Instead of replacing EPROMs to update the machine's software, use this
procedure to update the software in the machine's Flash ROM.
This procedure copies software from an external medium to the Flash ROM on the
machine's MFCE. The external medium for the new software can be an MFCE or
an EPROM board.
NOTE: Both H5159100 and A1939353 data copy tools can be used for this model.
Both H5159500 and A1939351 data copy boards can be used for this
model.
1. Turn off the machine.
2. Insert the data copy tool [A] into the lower IC card slot [B], then connect the
MFCE [C] or data copy board [D] with new software to the opposite side of the
tool.
If the machine has an optional Function Upgrade card or an optional Fax

On Demand card, follow the instructions in section 4.1.26.
[B]
[D]
[A]
[E] = ON
[C]
H515M551.CDR
NOTE: The switch [E] on the tool [A] must be at the ON position.
NOTE: The data copy board uses four 4Mbit EPROMs. Each EPROM must meet the
following specifications.
Size: 4 Mbits
Data width: 8 bits
Number of pins: 32 Access speed: Faster than 150 ns
Socket 4, ROM1, D7 - D0
NOTE: The assigned ROM sockets are the same for both H5159500 and A1939351
data copy boards.
SM
4-13
H551
Service Tables
CAUTION

4.
then immediately
SERVICE SET
NO: _ OR
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE
NO
02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR
H515M501.WMF
NO: _
RAM TEST
5.
0.SRAM
2.COPY
1.DRAM
H515M533.WMF
6.
NO: _
COPY
0.ROM COPY
2.MDM ROM
1.RAM COPY
H515M534.WMF
7.
COPY
FLASH ROM -> MACHINE
PRESS START
H515M535.WMF
8.
If the software download is successful, the display shows "OK".
If the software download fails, the display shows "NG".
9. To finish, press .
10. Turn off the machine, disconnect the tool, then turn the machine back on.
11. Print out the system parameter list and check the ROM version.
H551
4-14
SM
4.1.21 SOFTWARE UPLOAD (FUNCTION 12)

This procedure copies the software from the machine's built-in MFCE to an
external MFCE.
external MFCE [C] to the opposite side of the tool.
CAUTION
Service Tables

[D] = OFF
[B]
[A]
[C]
H515M552.CDR
NOTE: The switch [D] on the tool must be at the OFF position.
4.
then immediately
SERVICE SET
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE
NO: _ OR
NO
02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR
H515M501.WMF
5.
NO: _
RAM TEST
0.SRAM
2.COPY
1.DRAM
H515M533.WMF
SM
4-15
H551
6.
NO: _
COPY
0.ROM COPY
2.MDM ROM
1.RAM COPY
H515M534.WMF
7.
COPY
MACHINE
-> FLASH ROM

PRESS START
H515M536.WMF
8.
If the software is successfully uploaded,
the display shows "OK".
If the software upload fails, the display
shows "NG".
9. Finish :
10. Turn off the machine, disconnect the tool, then turn the machine on again.
H551
4-16
SM
4.1.22 SRAM DATA DOWNLOAD (FUNCTION 12)

This procedure copies all the data stored in the SRAM on an external MFCE to the
machine's MFCE. Use this after replacing a damaged MFCE to save any previous
settings that were programmed in the damaged MFCE.
damaged MFCE [C] to the opposite side of the tool.
CAUTION
Service Tables

[D] = OFF
[B]
[A]
[C]
H515M552.CDR
NOTE: The switch [D] on the tool must be at the OFF position.
4.
then immediately
SERVICE SET
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE
NO: _ OR
NO
02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR
H515M501.WMF
5.
NO: _
RAM TEST
0.SRAM
2.COPY
1.DRAM
H515M533.WMF
SM
4-17
H551
6.
NO: _
COPY
0.ROM COPY
2.MDM ROM
1.RAM COPY
H515M534.WMF
7.
COPY
RAM
-> MACHINE
PRESS START
8.
If the SRAM data is successfully
downloaded, the display shows "OK".
If the SRAM download fails, the dispaly
shows "NG".
H515M537.WMF
9. Finish :
10. Turn off the machine, disconnect the tool, then turn the machine back on.
H551
4-18
SM
4.1.23 MODEM SOFTWARE UPLOAD (FUNCTION 12)

This procedure copies the V.34 modem software from the data copy board to the
machine's MFCE.
data copy board [C] to the opposite side of the tool.
CAUTION
[B]
[A]
Service Tables

[C]
[D] = ON
H515M551.CDR
NOTE: Insert the EPROM (4 Mbits) with the V.34 software in the socket 6.
5.
then immediately
SERVICE SET
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE
NO: _ OR
NO
02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR
H515M501.WMF
6.
NO: _
RAM TEST
0.SRAM
2.COPY
1.DRAM
H515M533.WMF
SM
4-19
H551
7.
NO: _
COPY
0.ROM COPY
2.MDM ROM
1.RAM COPY
H515M534.WMF
8.
COPY
MACHINE
-> FLASH ROM

PRESS START
H515M536.WMF
10.
shows "NG".
11. Finish :
H551
4-20
SM
4.1.24 OPTIONAL G3 BOARD SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD

NOTE: The optional G3 board must be installed in order to do this procedure.
This procedure copies the V.34 program software of an optional G3 unit from the
data copy board to the machine's MFCE.
CAUTION
[B]
[A]
Service Tables

[C]
[D] = OFF
H515M551.CDR
NOTE: Insert the EPROM (4 Mbits) with the V.34 software in socket 6.
4.
then immediately
SERVICE SET
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE
NO: _ OR NO
02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR
H515M501.WMF
5.
RAM TEST
0.SRAM
2.COPY
NO: _
1.DRAM
H515M533.WMF
SM
4-21
H551
6.
NO: _
COPY
0.ROM COPY
2.MDM ROM
1.RAM COPY
H515M534.WMF
7.
COPY
MACHINE
8.
shows "NG".
-> FLASH ROM

PRESS START
H515M536.WMF
9. Finish :
H551
4-22
SM
4.1.25 OPTIONAL G3 BOARD MODEM SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD

NOTE: The optional G3 board must be installed in order to do this procedure.
This procedure copies the V.34 modem software of an optional G3 unit from the
data copy board to the machine's MFCE.
CAUTION
[B]
[A]
Service Tables

[C]
[D] = OFF
H515M551.CDR
NOTE: Insert the EPROM (4 Mbits) with the V.34 software in the socket 6.
4.
then immediately
SERVICE SET
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE
NO: _ OR NO
02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR
H515M501.WMF
5.
RAM TEST
0.SRAM
2.COPY
NO: _
1.DRAM
H515M533.WMF
SM
4-23
H551
6.
NO: _
COPY
0.ROM COPY
2.MDM ROM
1.RAM COPY
H515M534.WMF
7.
COPY
MACHINE
-> FLASH ROM

PRESS START
H515M536.WMF
8.
shows "NG".
9. Finish :
H551
4-24
SM
4.1.26 SAVING DATA PROGRAMMED IN IC CARDS

If the machine has an optional Function Upgrade Card or Fax On Demand Card,
the card has to be removed from the IC card slot before performing any of the
following procedures:
Downloading/uploading software
Replacing the MFCE
Replacing the MFDU or other components
Also in this case, System Switch 16 - bit 0 should have been set to 1 as explained
in section 3.3.9, to prevent the data inside the IC card from being initialized
accidentally.
So, do the following procedures to prevent data from being erased from the card.
NOTE: The data in the SAF memory card or hard disk will be erased if the card or
the hard disk interface is removed from the machine.
1. Make sure that System Switch 16 - bit 0 is set to 1, and that the battery switch
on the IC card is turned on.
2. Turn off the machine, and remove the IC card.
3. Connect the data copy tool and data copy board or MFCE, and do the required
procedure as explained in section 4.1.20 to 4.1.25.
4. After the downloading/uploading operation has been finished, turn off the
machine and disconnect the data copy tool.
5. Put back the IC card as it originally was, then turn on the machine.
6. Make sure that all the programmed data in the IC cards can still be used.
CAUTION
If the machine is turned on without the card being put back in the lower IC
card slot, the machine recognizes that the card has been removed and all
the data programmed in the card will not be accessable any more.
When replacing the MFCE

When replacing the a defective MFCE, the new MFCE installed in the machine
must have the same SRAM data as the defective MFCE had, before the IC card is
put back.
2. Turn off the machine, remove the IC card, and replace the MFCE.
Do not turn on the machine at this point.
SM
4-25
H551
Service Tables
When downloading/uploading software
3. Connect the data copy tool and the defective MFCE as explained in section
4.1.22, then turn on the machine.
4. Copy the SRAM data from the defective MFCE outside to the new MFCE
inside, as explained in section 4.1.22.
5. After the SRAM data has been copied successfully, turn off the machine and
disconnect the tool.
6. Put back the IC card in its original position, and turn on the machine.
NOTE: If the machine is accidentally turned on without the IC card at this point, go
back to step 3 again.
When replacing the MFDU or other components

When the MFCE must be removed to access or remove other components inside
the machine, follow the procedure below.
2. Turn off the machine, remove the IC card, and replace the required
components inside the machine.
4. After replacement has been completed, put back the MFCE and the IC card as
they originally were, then turn on the machine.
CAUTION
If the machine is turned on without the card being put back in the lower IC
card slot, the machine recognizes that the card has been removed and all
the data programmed in the card will not be accessable any more.
H551
4-26
SM
4.1.27 SERVICE STATION FAX NUMBER (FUNCTION 13)

1.
then immediately
SERVICE SET
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE
NO: _ OR
NO
02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR
H515M501.WMF
2.
S.S.NO.
ENTER FAX NUMBER
<G3>
TO CANCEL
NO
_
H515M538.WMF
3. Input the telephone number of the service

station that will receive Auto Service calls
from this machine.
S.S.NO.
<G3>
YES
OR
CLR
. NO
212-555-1234
To use a G4 number, press the G4 key.

To erase the telephone number: press
Service Tables

Cross Reference
Using a User Function Key as ISDN Subaddress Input
- Function 36, Code No = 10
4.1.28 SERIAL NUMBER (FUNCTION 14)

This function will allow the operator to record the serial number of the machine into
the RAM memory. The recorded serial number is used during the feature of placing
an auto service call. The entered serial number is listed on the System Parameter
List.
1.
then immediately
SERVICE SET
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE
NO: _ OR
NO
02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR
H515M501.WMF
SERIAL NO.
2.
_
H515M540.WMF
3. Enter the machine's serial number at the

keypad.
To correct a mistake:
SERIAL NO.
64997244292
H515M541.WMF
SM
4-27
H551
4.1.29 HARD DISK INITIALIZATION (FUNCTION 16)

NOTE: Do this procedure when installing the hard disk unit.
1.
then immediately
SERVICE SET
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE
NO: _ OR
NO
02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR
H515M501.WMF
NO: _
HD
2.
0.INITIAL
2.TEST
1.FORMAT
H515M543.WMF
3.
FILE INITIAL
PRESS START
H515M544.WMF
4.
If the initialization was completed without error, OK!! will be displayed.
H551
4-28
SM
4.1.30 HARD DISK FORMATTING (FUNCTION 16)

NOTE: This procedure is not necessary at hard disk installation.
1.
then immediately
SERVICE SET
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE
NO: _ OR
NO
02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR
H515M501.WMF
2.
NO: _
HD
0.INITIAL
2.TEST
1.FORMAT
H515M543.WMF
3.
HD FORMAT
PRESS START
H515M545.WMF
Service Tables
4.
Formatting the hard disk takes more than
30 minutes.
If the format was completed without error,
OK!! will be displayed.
If there was an error, NG!! will be
displayed.
4.1.31 HARD DISK TEST (FUNCTION 16)

1.
then immediately
SERVICE SET
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE
NO: _ OR
NO
02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR
H515M501.WMF
2.
NO: _
HD
0.INITIAL
2.TEST
1.FORMAT
H515M543.WMF
3.
HD TEST
PRESS START
4.
If the test was completed without error,
OK!! will be displayed.
If there was an error, NG!! will be
displayed.
SM
4-29
H515M546.WMF
H551
4.1.32 G4 PARAMETER PROGRAMMING (FUNCTION 17)

1.
then immediately
SERVICE SET
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE
NO: _ OR
NO
02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR
H515M501.WMF
2.
G4
01G4_ISW
03ISDN_IP
NO: _ OR
NO
02G4_PSW
04G4_SN1
H515M547.WMF
Refer to the service manual for the ISDN G4 option for further details of the G4
parameter programming procedures.
4.1.33 PRINTING CONFIDENTIAL FILES

If the customer forgot the confidential ID number, print the confidential messages
which has been received in the machine's memory using the following procedure.
1. .
2. Enter as confidential ID, then press . The machine will print all the
confidential messages in the memory.
H551
4-30
SM
BIT SWITCHES
4.2 BIT SWITCHES

WARNING
such as Japan.
NOTE: Default settings for bit switches are not listed in this manual. Refer to the
System Parameter List printed by the machine.
The switches that have been changed from the previous model (FX4) are shaded.
System Switch 00
No
FUNCTION
0 RAM Reset
1
Bit 1
0
0
1
1
Bit 0
0
1
0
1
Reset Level
No reset
Reset Level 2
Reset Level 3
Not used
COMMENTS
Reset Level 3: Erases all image data files stored
in the SAF memory and communication files (e.g.
polling rx file). This setting is recommended for
use when it is necessary to clear the SAF.
Always use this reset level after the software has
been updated by a remote diagnostics system.
(This reset is not necessary after local software
update.)
Reset Level 2: In addition to those items erased
by Reset Level 3, the following items are erased:
own telephone number, bit switches, RTI/TTI/CSI,
report data, programmed telephone numbers
(Quick/Speed/ Groups, service station, etc.), NCU
parameters, personal codes.
After erasing, the machine changes these two bits
back to 0 automatically.
No reset: Normal operation
Cross reference
RAM Reset Level 1 (Factory reset):
Change the data in RAM address 480005(H) to
FF(H), then turn the machine off and on. In
addition to those items erased by Reset Level 2,
the clock and scan/print registration settings are
erased.
Note
After a RAM reset level 1, initial toner supply will
automatically be done for 90 s.
SM
4-31
H551
Service Tables
4.2.1 SYSTEM SWITCHES
BIT SWITCHES
System Switch 00
No
FUNCTION
2 Technical data printout on
TCR (Journal)
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
COMMENTS
1: Instead of the personal code, the following data
are listed on the TCR for each analog G3
communication.
e.g. 32 V34 288 M 01 03 00 02
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)
1) First number: Symbol rate used
(for example, 32 means 3200 bps)
2) Second number: Used modem type
3) Third number: Final modem rate
(for example, 288 means 28.8 kbps)
4) Letter M or L:
An M indicates that is error rate, and an L
indicates Rx level. This is selected by the bit 3
setting below.
5-6) Fifth and sixth numbers: Line quality data.
If an error rate is selected (when M is indicated),
a larger number means more errors.
If Rx level is selected (when L is indicated), the
left hand figure is the high byte and the right hand
figure is the low byte.
7) Seventh number (rx mode only): Total number
of error lines that occurred during non-ECM
reception.
8) Eighth number (rx mode only): Total number of
burst error lines that occurred during non-ECM
reception.
The seventh and eighth numbers are fixed at 00
for transmission records and ECM reception
records.
How to calculate the rx level listed on the Journal
Example: 32 V34 288 L 01 A0 00 00
The four-digit hexadecimal value (N) after L indicates the rx level.
The high byte is given first, followed by the low byte. Divide the decimal value of N
by -16 to get the rx level.
H551
In the above example, the decimal value of N (= 01A0 [H]) is 416.

So, the actual rx level is 416/-16 = -26 dB
Line quality data output
This bit determines the data type to be printed on
method
the Journal when technical data printout is
0: Measure of error rate
enabled by bit 2 above.
(during image data
transmission only)
1: Rx level
Line error marks on received
If this bit is 1, a mark will be printed on the left
pages
edge of the page at any place where a line error
0: Disabled
occurred in the data. Such errors are caused by a
1: Enabled
noisy line, for example.
4-32
SM
BIT SWITCHES
System Switch 00
No
FUNCTION
5 G3/G4 Communication
parameter display
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Protocol dump list output
after each communication
0: Off 1: On

data in one protocol dump list
printout operation
dumping
Service Tables
COMMENTS
This is a fault-finding aid. The LCD shows the key
parameters (see the next 2 pages). This is
normally disabled because it cancels the CSI
display for the user.
Be sure to reset this bit to 0 after testing.
This is only used for communication
troubleshooting. It shows the content of the
transmitted facsimile protocol signals. Always
reset this bit to 0 after finishing testing.
SM
4-33
H551
BIT SWITCHES
Mode
Modem rate
DCS: ITU-T standard

336: 33,600 bps
312: 31,200 bps
288: 28,800 bps
264: 26,400 bps
240: 24,000 bps
216: 21,600 bps
192: 19,200 bps
Resolution
S: Standard (8 x 3.85 dots per mm)

D: Detail (8 x 7.7 dots per mm)
F: Fine (8 x 15.4 dots per mm)
22: Detail (200 x 200 dpi)
MR: MR compression
MH: MH compression
JBO: JBIG (optional) compression
JBB: JBIG (standard) compression
ECM: With ECM
SSC: Using SSC
EFC: Using EFC
NML: With no ECM, SSC, or EFC
0: 0 ms/line
25: 2.5 ms/line
5: 5 ms/line
10: 10 ms/line
20: 20 ms/line
40: 40 ms/line
Compression mode
Communication mode
Width and reduction
I/O rate
H551
4-34
NSS: Non-standard G3
168: 16,800 bps
144: 14400 bps
120: 12000 bps
96: 9600 bps
72: 7200 bps
48: 4800 bps
24: 2400 bps
SM
BIT SWITCHES
Compression mode
Resolution
Width and reduction
Transfer
Confidential
Other parameters

MR: MR compression
MH: MH compression
22: Detail (200 x 200 dpi)
24: Fine (200 x 400 dpi)
T: Transfer
- : Other
C: Confidential
- : Other
The following information is shown in 6-bit format. Bit 1 is the
first bit from the left, and bit 6 is at the right end.
Bit 1 - Smoothing
(Smoothing is disabled in halftone mode.)
Bit 2 - CIL printing
Bit 3 - 1: Not used
Bit 4 - mm/inch conversion 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 5 - Engine type
0: mm, 1: inch
Bit 6 - Resolution unit
0: mm, 1: inch
System Switch 01
No
FUNCTION
0 PM call
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
1-7 Not used
SM
COMMENTS
This bit switch determines whether the machine
will send an Auto Service Call to the service
station when it is time for PM.
4-35
H551
Service Tables
BIT SWITCHES
System Switch 02
No
FUNCTION
0 Memory file transfer
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
1-3
4
5
6
7
Not used
Automatic reset (during
communication)
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Not used
Memory read/write by RDS
Bit 7 6
Setting
0
0
Always disabled
0
1
User selectable
1
0
User selectable
1
1
Always enabled
System Switch 03
No
FUNCTION
0 Length of time that RDS is
to temporarily switched on when
7 bits 6 and 7 of System Switch
02 are set to "User
selectable"
H551
COMMENTS
1: All messages in the memory (including
confidential rx messages) are sent to the fax
number which is programmed as the service
station.
Always reset this bit to zero after transfer.
Cross reference
Service station number programming: Function 13
1: Machine automatically returns to the standby
mode when a communication of one page
exceeds a timer (default setting is 60 min).
This timer could be adjusted by the RAM settings
(RAM address 480378 and 480379).
When the optional G3 or G4 unit is installed, the
machine resets the optional G3 or G4 unit every
period of this timer (default setting is 15 min). This
timer could be adjusted by the RAM settings
(RAM address 48037A and 48037B).
When this timer expires during communication,
the machine resets the optional G3 or G4 unit
immediately after the communication is finished.
Cross reference
Service RAM Addresses, section 4.5.
(0,0): All RDS systems are always locked out.
(0,1), (1,0): Normally, RDS systems are locked
out, but the user can temporarily switch RDS on
to allow RDS operations to take place. RDS will
automatically be locked out again after a certain
time, which is stored in System Switch 03 (see
below). Note that if an RDS operation takes place,
RDS will not switch off until this time limit has
expired.
(1,1): At any time, an RDS system can access the
machine.
COMMENTS
This data is only valid if bits 6 and 7 of System
Switch 02 are set to "User selectable".
The default setting is 24 hours.
4-36
SM
BIT SWITCHES
SM
programming level
0: User level
1: Service level
Telephone line type
programming mode
0: User level
1: Service level
COMMENTS
Use these bit switches to adjust the contrast of
the LCD on the operation panel.
This bit must be set to 1 before changing any

dedicated transmission parameters.
0: The user does not need to press the Start key
when operating a keystroke program.
0: The machine asks the user to replace the drum

After the user replaces the drum, the machine
asks the user if the drum has been replaced or
not. If the user answers yes, the machine resets
the OPC counter to zero. The drum replacement
interval is programmed at addresses 4803D2 to
4803D5(H). Refer to section 4.5 for more details.
1: The machine will not ask the user to replace
the drum.
1: The CSI and Terminal ID can only be
programmed using a service function.
The Terminal ID can only be programmed if a
Group 4 option is installed.
1: Telephone line type selection (tone dial or
pulse dial) can only be programmed using a
service function.
4-37
H551
Service Tables
System Switch 04
No
FUNCTION
0 LCD contrast
Bit 2 1 0 Contrast
1
0 0 0 Brightest
0 0 1
1 1 0
1 1 1 Darkest
3 Dedicated transmission
parameter programming
4 Inclusion of the Start key in
Keystroke Programs
0: Not needed
1: Needed
5 Drum replacement level
0: User
1: Service
BIT SWITCHES
System Switch 05
No
FUNCTION
0-1 Not used
2 Display of both RTI and CSI
on the LCD
3 Not used
4 Hard disk option
0: Not installed
1: Installed
5-7 Not used
System Switch 06
No
FUNCTION
0 Use of the Stop key during
memory transmission
1-4
5
6
7
Not used
PC Fax Expander option
0: Not installed
1: Installed
Not used
On-screen function list
System Switch 07
No
FUNCTION
0 Date of monthly Fax On
to Demand report printout
7
H551
COMMENTS
1: An RTI will be displayed until phase B of the
protocol sequence, and a CSI will be displayed
after phase C.
Change this bit to 1 when installing the hard disk
option.
COMMENTS
1: Memory transmissions can be stopped by
pressing the Stop key. However, users might
accidentally cancel another person's memory
transmission in progress.
Change this bit to 1 when installing the PC Fax
Expander option.
If this feature is enabled, the most frequently used
function numbers will be displayed for quick
reference whenever the user presses the
Function key.
COMMENTS
00 - 31 (BCD).
[00 (BCD) - 1st day of the month (default setting)]
[01 - 31 (BCD) - Programmed day of the month]
This setting is only valid if bit 1 of User Parameter
04 is set to "1" (monthly FOD report printout
enabled).
4-38
SM
BIT SWITCHES
System Switch 09
No
FUNCTION
0 Addition of part of the image
data from confidential
transmissions on the
transmission result report
1 Inclusion of communications
on the Journal (TCR) when
no image data was
exchanged.
2
6
7
SM
Automatic error report

printout
Printing of the error code on
the error report
0: No 1: Yes
Listing of Confidential IDs on
the Personal Code List
Power failure report
Not used
Priority given to various types
of remote terminal ID when
printing reports
0: RTI > CSI > Dial label >
Tel. number
1: Dial label > Tel. number >
RTI > CSI
COMMENTS
00 (BCD) - 0 am (default setting)
01 (BCD) - 1 am
23 (BCD) - 11 pm
This setting is only valid if bit 1 of User Parameter
04 is set to "1" (monthly FOD report printout
enabled).
COMMENTS
If this feature is enabled, the top half of the first
page of confidential messages will be printed on
transmission result reports.
0: Communications which reached phase C

(message Tx/Rx) of the T.30 protocol are listed
on the Journal (TCR).
1: Communications which reached phase A (call
setup) of T.30 protocol are listed on the Journal.
This will include telephone calls.
0: Error reports will not be printed.
1: Error reports will be printed automatically after
failed communications.
1: Error codes are printed on the error reports.
1: Confidential IDs registered with Personal

Codes by the users will appear on the Personal
Code List.
1: A power failure report will be automatically
printed after the power is switched on if a fax
message disappeared from the memory when the
power was turned off last.
This bit determines which set of priorities the
machine uses when listing remote terminal names
on reports.
Dial Label: The name stored with the
Quick/Speed Dial number by the user.
4-39
H551
Service Tables
System Switch 08
No
FUNCTION
0 Time of monthly Fax On
to Demand report printout
7
BIT SWITCHES
System Switch 0A
No
FUNCTION
0 Not used
1 Default communication mode
0: G3
1: G4
2 Not used
3 Continuous polling reception
4 Dialing on the ten-key pad
when the external telephone
is off-hook
5
6
On hook dial
Line used for G3
transmission
0: PSTN 1: ISDN
Line used when the machine
falls back to G3 from G4 if
the other end is not a G4
machine
0: PSTN 1: ISDN
System Switch 0B
No
FUNCTION
0 Automatic reset timer
1 Bit 1 Bit 0 Timer setting
0
0
1 minute
0
1
3 minutes
1
0
5 minutes
1
1
No limit
2 Energy Saver mode timer
3 Bit 3 Bit 2 Time Limit
0
0
1 minute
0
1
3 minutes
1
0
5 minutes
1
1
No limit
4-7 Not used
H551
COMMENTS
Keep this bit at 0.
These bits determine the machine's standby
default communication mode if a G4 option has
been installed.
This feature allows a series of stations to be
polled in a continuous cycle.
0: Prevents dialing from the ten-key pad while the
external telephone is off-hook. Use this setting
when the external telephone is not by the
machine or a wireless telephone is connected as
an external telephone.
1: The user can dial on the machine's ten-key pad
when the handset is off-hook.
0: On hook dial is disabled.
If an ISDN kit has been installed, this bit
determines whether G3 transmissions go out over
the PSTN or the ISDN.
This bit switch has no effect if Communication
Switch 07 bit 0 is set to 0.
COMMENTS
(1, 1): Automatic reset is disabled.
(Other): The machine returns to the standby
mode when the timer expires after the last
operation.
(1, 1): Automatic Energy Saver mode is disabled.

(Other): The machine goes into an Energy Saver
mode when the timer expires after the last
operation.
4-40
SM
BIT SWITCHES
System Switch 0C - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)
System Switch 0D - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)
System Switch 0E - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)
00: France
01: Germany
02: UK
03: Italy
04: Austria
05: Belgium
06: Denmark
07: Finland
08: Ireland
09: Norway
0A: Sweden
0B: Swiss
0C: Portugal
0D: Holland
0E: Spain
0F: Israel
10: Canada
11: USA
12: Asia
13: Japan
14: Hong Kong
15: South Africa
16: Australia
17: New Zealand
18: Singapore
19: Malaysia
1A: China
1B: Taiwan
20: Turkey
21: Greece
System Switch 10
No
FUNCTION
0 Threshold memory level for
to parallel memory transmission
7
System Switch 11
No
FUNCTION
0 TTI printing position
0: Superimposed on the page
data
leading edge
1 CIL printing position
leading edge
1: Superimposed on the page
data
2 Label Insertion position
0: Left end 1: Right end
3-5
SM
Not used
COMMENTS
This country code determines the factory settings
of bit switches and RAM addresses. However, it
has no effect on the NCU parameter settings and
communication parameter RAM addresses.
Cross reference
NCU country code: Function 08, parameter C.C.
Service Tables
System Switch 0F
No
FUNCTION
0 Country code for functional
to settings (Hex)
7
COMMENTS
Threshold mount = N x 64 kbytes
N can be between 00 FF(H)
Default setting: 04(H) = 256 kbytes
COMMENTS
Change this bit to 1 if the TTI overprints
important (G3 transmissions).
Change this bit to 1 if the CIL overprints

important (G4 transmissions).
Change this bit to 1 if the inserted label overprints

important.
4-41
H551
BIT SWITCHES
Rev. 11/98
Conditions for memory

reception if no RTI or CSI is
received

transmission
0: Memory reception is available only when the

machine receives RTI or CSI.
1: Memory reception is always available unless
there is a printer (mechanical) error. If there is a
printer error, memory reception becomes
available only when the machine receives RTI or
CSI.
This function becomes effective in combination
with the user parameter switch 05 bit 1.
This bit determines whether parallel transmission
can be used with a G4 transmission or not.
.
System Switch 12
No
0
to
7
FUNCTION
Line (Group 4)
COMMENTS
This setting determines the print start position for
the TTI and CIL from the left edge of the paper. If
the TTI is moved too far to the right, it may
interfere with the file number which is on the top
right of the page. On an A4 page, if the CIL is
moved over by more than 60 mm, it may
overwrite the page number.
System Switch 13
No
0
1
3
4
5-7
H551
FUNCTION
Remaining memory threshold for
activating the hard disk filing
system
0
0
25%
0
1
50% (default)
1
0
75%
1
1
Not used
Not used
Files that can be stored in the hard
disk filing system
Bit 1 Bit 0 Files
0 0
All files
0 1
Received files only
1 0
Transmitted files only
1 1
Not used
COMMENTS
If the remaining hard disk space is below
the threshold value, the hard disk filing
system cannot be used. Adjust the
threshold value to meet the customer's
requirements.

The default setting is (0 0).
Change the settings to limit the files that
can be stored in the hard disk filing system.
Not used
4-42
SM
BIT SWITCHES
System Switch 14
No
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
0 Wait time between pages in
05 to 64 (H) (5 to 100s) - This setting determines
to printer mode (with an optional the machine's wait time between pages in printer
7 printer interface unit)
mode.
A longer setting forces the fax machine to wait
until the end of printer interface output before
printing any incoming fax message.
A shorter setting allows the fax machine to print
specified time to process a page of data from the
host computer, the fax machine releases the
printer resources for fax output.
Default setting: 0A(H) = 10 s
System Switch 16
No
FUNCTION
0 Function Upgrade Card or
Fax On Demand Card
0: Not installed
1: Installed
1-7
Not used.
System Switch 17
No
FUNCTION
0 Not used.
1 Dialing without inserting a
document in the ADF
1-7 Not used.
SM
COMMENTS
Change this bit to 1 after installing a Function
Upgrade Card or a Fax On Demand Card in the
machine's lower IC card slot.
0: When either a Function Upgrade Card or a Fax
On Demand Card is installed in the machine's
lower IC card slot before power-off, all the data in
these cards will be initialized if the machine does
not detect the card at the next power-on.
1: When either a Function Upgrade Card or a Fax
On Demand Card is installed in the machine's
lower IC card slot before power-off, the machine
will not start up unless the machine detects the IC
card or the data copy tool at the next power-on.
This prevents the data inside the card from being
initialized while replacing PCBs or downloading
software.
COMMENTS
0: Prevents dialing when a document is not
placed in the ADF.
4-43
H551
Service Tables
BIT SWITCHES
System Switch 18
No
FUNCTION
0 Default communication line for
1 transmission
Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting
0
0 PSTN 1 or PSTN 2
0
1 PSTN 1 (Standard G3)
1
0 PSTN 2 (Optional G3 unit)
1
1 ISDN (G4 unit required)
2-7 Not used
COMMENTS
These bits determine the machines
standby default transmission line if an
optional G3 or G4 unit has been
installed.

System Switch 1A - Not used (do not change the settings)
System Switch 1B - Not used (do not change the settings)
System Switch 1C - Not used (do not change the settings)
System Switch 1D - Not used (do not change the settings)
System Switch 1E - Not used (do not change the settings)
System Switch 1F - Not used (do not change the settings)
H551
4-44
SM
BIT SWITCHES
4.2.2 SCANNER SWITCHES
6-7
OR processing for immediate

tx and copying (Detail
resolution)
Not used
COMMENTS
Normally keep this bit at 1 to get a good halftone

quality.
If the user wants to send very long documents
such as well logs, select 14 m or a higher setting.
0: The machine scans the document in 3.85

line/mm steps. Each pair of lines is OR processed
before transmission or making copies. Toner may
be used up earlier if OR processing is enabled.
line/mm steps. Each pair of lines is OR processed
before transmission or making copies. Toner may
be used up earlier if OR processing is enabled.
Scanner Switch 02
No
FUNCTION
0 Contrast threshold with
to halftone disabled - Normal
7 setting
COMMENTS
The value can be between 00 to FF. For a darker
Default setting - 0E(H)
Scanner Switch 03
No
FUNCTION
to halftone disabled - Lighten
7 setting
COMMENTS
SM
4-45
H551
Service Tables
Scanner Switch 00
No
FUNCTION
0 MTF
1 Text/photo separation in
halftone mode
2 Maximum transmittable
3 document length
Bit 3 2 Setting
0 0 600 mm
0 1 1200 mm
1 0 14 m
1 1 Not used
4 OR processing for immediate
tx and copying (Standard
resolution)
BIT SWITCHES
Scanner Switch 04
No
FUNCTION
to halftone disabled - Darken
7 setting
COMMENTS
Default setting - 0C(H)
Scanner Switch 05
No
FUNCTION
to halftone enabled - Normal
7 setting
COMMENTS
Scanner Switch 06
No
FUNCTION
to halftone enabled - Lighten
7 setting
COMMENTS
Default setting - 0D(H)
Scanner Switch 07
No
FUNCTION
to halftone enabled - Darken
7 setting
COMMENTS
Scanner Switch 08
No
FUNCTION
0 Contrast threshold for text
to areas when halftone is
7 enabled
COMMENTS
The value can be between 00 to 0F.
This setting is ignored if Scanner Switch 00 bit 1
is at 0.
Default setting - 08H

Scanner Switch 0A - Not used (do not change the settings)
Scanner Switch 0B - Not used (do not change the settings)
Scanner Switch 0C - Not used (do not change the settings)
Scanner Switch 0D - Not used (do not change the settings)
Scanner Switch 0E - Not used (do not change the settings)
Scanner Switch 0F - Not used (do not change the settings)
H551
4-46
SM
BIT SWITCHES
4.2.3 PRINTER SWITCHES
Repetition of data when the

received page is longer than
the printer paper
2
3
Not used
Cleaning mode after bypass
feed
0: Disabled
1: After each page is fed from
the bypass feed slot
Not used
printing
4-6
7
COMMENTS
0: No marks are printed.
1: If a received page has to be printed out on two
sheets, an "x" inside a small box is printed at the
bottom right hand corner of the first sheet, and a
"2" inside a small box is printed at the top right
hand corner of the second sheet. This helps the
user to identify pages that have been split up.
0: The next page continues from where the
previous page left off.
1: The final few mm of the previous page are
printed at the top of the next page.
0: Cleaning mode is not done at all if bypass feed
is used.
1: Cleaning mode is done every time after a sheet
of paper is fed from the bypass feed slot.
0: Printing is always done in inch format.
1: If the other end has scanned the document in
mm format, the machine converts the data to inch
format before printing.

SM
4-47
H551
Service Tables
Printer Switch 00
No
FUNCTION
0 Page separation mark
BIT SWITCHES
Printer Switch 03
No
FUNCTION
0 Length reduction of received
data
1-3
4
to
7
COMMENTS
0: Incoming pages are printed without length
reduction.
Cross reference
Page separation threshold: Printer Sw. 03, bits 4
to 7.
1: Incoming pages are reduced in the length
direction when printing.
Cross reference
Reduction ratio: Printer Switches 04/05
Not used
Page separation threshold (with reduction disabled in switch 03-0 above)
If the incoming page is up to x mm longer than the copy paper, the excess portion
will not be printed. If the incoming page is more than x mm longer than the copy
paper, the excess portion will be printed on the next page.
The value of x is determined by these four bits.
Hex value of bits 4 to 7
0
1
and so on until
F
x (mm)
0
1
15
Cross reference
Length reduction On/Off: Printer Switch 03, Bit 0
H551
4-48
SM
BIT SWITCHES
Printer Switches 04 and 05
No
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
0 Reduction ratios used for different paper sizes (with reduction enabled in switch
to 03-0 above)
7
If reduction is enabled, the data will be reduced in the length direction before
printing. These switches determine the maximum reduction ratio for each paper
size.
Switch 04/05
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
US
Not used
Not used
LT lengthwise
Not used
Not used
LG lengthwise
Not used
Not used
Europe
A5 sideways
Not used
Not used
A4 lengthwise
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Asia
A5 sideways
Not used
Not used
A4 lengthwise
F/F4 lengthwise
Not used
Not used
Not used
COUNTER R / W
0. COUNTER
2. CTM COUNTER
Service Tables
The available paper sizes depend on the machine's country version.
NO: _
1. PM COUNTER
3. PCU COUNTER

Printer Switch 0A - Not used (do not change the settings)
Printer Switch 0B - Not used (do not change the settings)
Printer Switch 0C - Not used (do not change the settings)
Printer Switch 0D - Not used (do not change the settings)
Printer Switch 0E - Not used (do not change the settings)
Printer Switch 0F - Not used (do not change the settings)
SM
4-49
H551
BIT SWITCHES
4.2.4 COMMUNICATION SWITCHES

No
FUNCTION
0 Compression modes
1 available in receive mode
Bit 1 0 Modes
0 0 MH only
0 1 MH/MR
1 0 MH/MR/MMR
1 1 MH/MR/MMR/
JBIG
2 Compression modes
3 available in transmit mode
Bit 3 2 Modes
0 0 MH only
0 1 MH/MR
1 0 MH/MR/MMR
1 1 MH/MR/MMR/
JBIG
4 Not used
5 JBIG reception mode
0: Standard mode only
1: Standard and optional
mode (default)
6 Priority for JBIG mode used
for transmission
0: Standard mode
1: Optional mode (default)
7 Closed network (reception)
No
FUNCTION
0 ECM
0: Off 1: On
1 Not used
2 Wrong connection prevention
3 method
Bit 3 Bit 2 Setting
0
0
None
0
1
8 digit CSI
1
0
4 digit CSI
1
1
CSI/RTI
H551
COMMENTS
These bits determine the compression capabilities
to be declared in phase B (handshaking) of the
T.30 protocol.
These bits determine the compression capabilities

to be used in the transmission and to be declared
in phase B (handshaking) of the T.30 protocol.

If this bit is 0, JBIG optional mode is switched off
for reception.
This bit determines the priority for the

compression mode used for JBIG transmission.
1: Reception will not go ahead if the ID code of

the other terminal does not match the ID code of
this terminal. This function is only available in
NSF/NSS mode.
COMMENTS
If this bit is 0, ECM is switched off for all
communications.
(0,1) - The machine will not transmit if the last 8
digits of the received CSI do not match the last 8
digits of the dialed telephone number. This does
not work for manual dialing.
(1,0) - The same as above, except that only the
last 4 digits are compared.
(1,1) - The machine will not transmit if the other
end does not identify itself with an RTI or CSI.
(0,0) - Nothing is checked; transmission will
always go ahead.
4-50
SM
BIT SWITCHES
No
FUNCTION
0 Burst error threshold
0: Low 1: High
4-7
Acceptable total error line

ratio
0: 5% 1: 10%
Treatment of pages received
with errors during G3
reception
0: Deleted from memory
without printing
1: Printed
Hang-up decision when a
is received during G3
immediate transmission
0: No hang-up, 1: Hang-up
Not used
No
FUNCTION
0 Maximum number of page
to retransmissions in a G3
7 memory transmission
SM
COMMENTS
Set this bit to 1 if the user expects to receive
phone calls at the same number which the
machine is connected to.
The setting determined by these bits is informed
to the transmitting terminal in the pre-message
protocol exchange (in the DIS/NSF frames).
COMMENTS
If there are more consecutive error lines in the
received page than the threshold, the machine
will send a negative response.
The Low and High threshold values depend on
the sub-scan resolution, and are as follows.
Resolution
100 dpi
200 dpi
Low settings
3
6
High settings
6
12
If the error line ratio of a page exceeds the
acceptable ratio, RTN will be sent to the other
end.
0: Pages received with errors are not printed.
0: The next page will be sent even if RTN or PIN

is received.
1: The machine will send DCN and hang up if it
receives RTN or PIN.
This bit is ignored for memory transmissions or if
ECM is being used.
COMMENTS
00 - FF (Hex) times.
This setting is not used if ECM is switched on.
4-51
H551
Service Tables
No
FUNCTION
4 Operator call if no response
is received in reply to
NSF/DIS
5 Not used
6 Maximum printable page
length available
7 Bit 7 Bit 6 Setting
0
0
No limit
0
1
B4 and A4
1
0
A4
1
1
Not used
BIT SWITCHES
No
FUNCTION
0 Use of Economy
Transfer operation to End
Receivers
1 Use of Economy
Transfer operation to the
Next Transfer Stations
2 Use of Label Insertion for the
End Receivers in a Transfer
operation
3 Conditions required for
transmission
0: Always transmitted
1: Only transmitted if there
was an error
SM
Printout of the message

when acting as a Transfer
Station
COMMENTS
0: The transmission begins from the page where
transmission failed the previous time.
1: Transmission begins from the first page.

If this bit is at 1, the machine will not allow you to
dial 999 at the auto-dialer. This is a PTT
requirement in the UK and some other countries.
COMMENTS
These bits determine whether the machine uses
the Economy Transmission feature when it is
carrying out a Transfer operation as a Transfer
Station.
This bit determines whether the machine uses the

Label Insertion feature when it is carrying out a
Transfer operation as a Transfer Station.
0: When acting as a Transfer Station, the
machine will always send a Transfer Result
Report back to the Requesting Station after
completing the Transfer Request, even if there
were no problems.
1: The machine will only send back a Transfer
Result Report if there were errors during
communication so that one or more of the End
Receivers could not be contacted.
When the machine is acting as a Transfer Station,
this bit determines whether the machine prints the
fax message coming in from the Requesting
Terminal.
4-53
H551
Service Tables
No
FUNCTION
0 Point of resumption of
memory transmission upon
redialing
0: From the error page
1: From page 1
1-6 Not used
7 Emergency calls using 999
0: Enabled 1: Disabled
BIT SWITCHES
No
FUNCTION
5 Action when there is no fax
number in the programmed
Quick/Speed dials which
meets the requesting
terminal's own fax number.
0: Transfer is Disabled
1: Transfer is Enabled
6-7
Not used
Communication Switch 0C
No
FUNCTION
0 Number of digits compared to
to find the requester's fax
4 number from the
programmed Quick/Speed
Dials when acting as a
Transfer Station
5-7
H551
Not used
COMMENTS
machine compares the last N digits of the
requesting terminal's own fax number with all the
Quick/Speed dials programmed in the machine.
(N is the number programmed in communication
switch 0C.)
0: If there is no matching number programmed in
the machine, the machine rejects the transfer
request.
1: Even if there is no matching number
programmed in the machine, the machine accepts
the transfer request. The result report will be
printed at the transfer terminal, but will not be sent
back to the requesting terminal.
COMMENTS
00 - 1F (0 to 31 digits)
machine compares the own telephone number
sent from the Requesting Terminal with all
Quick/Speed Dials programmed in the machine,
starting from Quick Dial 01 to the end of the
Speed Dials.
This number determines how many digits from the
end of the telephone numbers the machine
compares.
If it is set to 00, the machine will send the report
to the first Quick/Speed Dial that the machine
compared. If Quick Dial 01 is programmed, the
machine will send the report to Quick 01. If Quick
Dial 01 through 04 are not programmed and
Quick Dial 05 is programmed, the machine will
send the report to Quick 05.
Default setting - 05(H) = 5 digits
4-54
SM
BIT SWITCHES
Communication Switch 0E
No
FUNCTION
0 Minimum interval between
to automatic dialing attempts
7
Communication Switch 0F
No
FUNCTION
0 Minimum number of times
to that a destination will dialed
7 when TRD is being used
No
FUNCTION
0 Memory transmission:
to Maximum number of dialing
7 attempts to the same
destination
No
FUNCTION
0 Immediate transmission:
to Maximum number of dialing
destination
No
FUNCTION
0 Memory transmission:
to Interval between dialing
destination
SM
COMMENTS
00 to FF (Hex), unit = 2 kbytes
(e.g., 0C(H) = 24 kbytes)
One page is about 24 kbytes.
If this setting is kept at 0, the machine will detect
ringing signals and go into receive mode even if
there is no memory space left. This will result in
communication failure.
COMMENTS
06 to FF (Hex), unit = 2 s
(e.g., 06(H) = 12 s)
This value is the minimum time that the machine
waits before it dials the next destination.
COMMENTS
01 - FF (Hex) times
Service Tables
Communication Switch 0D
No
FUNCTION
0 The amount of remaining
to memory below which ringing
7 detection (and therefore
reception into memory) is
disabled
COMMENTS
01 - FF (Hex) times
COMMENTS
01 - FF (Hex) times
COMMENTS
4-55
H551
BIT SWITCHES
No
FUNCTION
0 Immediate transmission:
to Interval between dialing
destination
No
FUNCTION
0 Inch-to-mm conversion
during transmission
0: Disabled (default)
1: Enabled
1 Inch/mm format informed to
the other terminal during
transmission
0: Always in inch format
1: Dependent on the other
terminal (default)
2-5
6
7
Not used
Available unit of resolution in
which fax messages are
received
Bit 7 Bit 6 Unit
0
0
mm
0
1
inch
1
0
mm and inch
(default)
1
1
Not used
No
FUNCTION
0 Available resolution for
to receiving fax messages
7 Bit 0 1: 200 x 100/8 x 3.85
Bit 1 1: 200 x 200/8 x 7.7
Other bits: Not used
H551
COMMENTS
COMMENTS
0: Transmitting is always done in inch format.
1: If the other end only has mm-based resolution
for printing, the machine converts the scanned
data to mm-format before transmission.
0: The machine always informs the other terminal
that the resolution is in inch format and transmits
with the inch format.
1: The machine informs the other terminal that the
resolution is in mm - format and transmits with the
inch format if the other end only has mm - based
resolution.
This setting is informed to the receiving terminal
in the pre-message protocol exchange (in the
DCS/NSS frames).
For the best performance, do not change the
factory settings.
COMMENTS
For the best performance, do not change the
factory settings.
4-56
SM
BIT SWITCHES
No
FUNCTION
0 SEP (selective polling)
reception
1 SUB (sub-address) reception
2 PWD (Password) / SID
(Sender ID) reception
3-7 Not used
COMMENTS
1: Change this bit to 1 when installing the optional
G3 unit.
1: Change this bit to 1 when installing the optional
G4 unit.
COMMENTS
0: Disables the selective polling signal reception.
0: Disables the SUB (sub-address) signal

reception.
0: The machine automatically disconnects the line
when the PWD or SID signal is received (default
setting).

Communication Switch 1A - Not used (do not change the settings)
Communication Switch 1B - Not used (do not change the settings)
Communication Switch 1C - Not used (do not change the settings)
Communication Switch 1D - Not used (do not change the settings)
Communication Switch 1E - Not used (do not change the settings)
Communication Switch 1F - Not used (do not change the settings)
SM
4-57
H551
Service Tables
No
FUNCTION
0 Not used
1 Optional G3 unit
0: Not installed
1: Installed
2 Optional G4 unit
0: Not installed
1: Installed
3-7 Not used
BIT SWITCHES
G3 Switch 02
No
FUNCTION
0 G3 protocol mode used
0: Standard and nonstandard
1: Standard only
G3 Switch 03
No
FUNCTION
0 DIS detection number
(Echo countermeasure)
0: 1
1: 2
1
2
6-7
SM
Not used
Use of V.8 protocol
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
ECM frame size
0: 256 bytes
1: 64 bytes
CTC transmission conditions
0: Ricoh mode (PPR x 1)
1: ITU-T mode (PPR x 4)
Modem rate used for the next
page after receiving a
0: No change
1: Fallback
Not used
COMMENTS
0: The machine will hang up if it receives the
same DIS frame twice.
1: Before sending DCS, the machine will wait for
the second DIS which is caused by echo on the
line.
0: V.8 protocol is disabled.
The machine communicates in accordance with
the T.30 protocol.
1: ECM reception is disabled, which enlarges the
SAF memory.
When using ECM, the machine will choose a
slower modem rate after receiving PPR once
(Ricoh mode) or four times (ITU-T mode).
ITU-T: New acronym for the CCITT.
1: The machine's tx modem rate will fall back
before sending the next page if a negative code is
received. This bit is ignored if ECM is being used.
4-59
H551
Service Tables
1-4
5
COMMENTS
Change this bit to 1 only when the other end can
only communicate with machines that send T.30standard frames only.
1: Disables NSF/NSS signals (these are used in
non-standard mode communication)
Not used
Use of modem rate history for 0: Communications using Quick/Speed Dials
transmission using
always start with the highest modem rate.
1: The machine refers to the modem rate history
Quick/Speed Dials
for communications with the same machine when
determining the most suitable rate for the current
communication.
AI short protocol
Refer to Appendix B in the Group 3 Facsimile
(transmission and reception)
Manual for details about AI Short Protocol.
Short preamble
Refer to Appendix B in the Group 3 Facsimile
Manual for details about Short Preamble.
BIT SWITCHES
G3 Switch 04
No
FUNCTION
0 Training error detection
to threshold
3
4-7
Not used
G3 Switch 05
No
FUNCTION
0 Initial Tx modem rate
to Bit 3 2 1 0 Setting (bps)
3
0 0 0 1 2.4 k
0 0 1 0 4.8 k
0 0 1 1 7.2 k
0 1 0 0 9.6 k
0 1 0 1 12 k
0 1 1 0 14.4 k
0 1 1 1 16.8 k
1 0 0 0 19.2 k
1 0 0 1 21.6 k
1 0 1 0 24.0 k
1 0 1 1 26.4 k
1 1 0 0 28.8 k
1 1 0 1 31.2 k
1 1 1 0 33.6 k
4 Initial modem type for 9.6 k or
to 7.2 kbps (transmission).
0
0
V.29
0
1
V.17
1
0
Not used
1
1
Not used
6-7 Not used
H551
COMMENTS
0 - F (Hex); 0 - 15 bits
If the number of error bits in the received TCF is
below this threshold, the machine informs the
sender that the training has succeeded.
COMMENTS
These bits set the initial starting modem rate for
transmission.
Use the dedicated transmission parameters if you
need to change this for specific receivers.
These bits set the initial modem type for 9.6 and
7.2 kbps, if the initial modem rate is set at these
speeds.
4-60
SM
BIT SWITCHES
G3 Switch 07
No
FUNCTION
0 PSTN cable equalizer
(Tx mode)
0
0
None
0
1
Low
1
0
Medium
1
1
High
COMMENTS
The setting of these bits is used to inform the
transmitting terminal of the available modem rate
for the machine in receive mode. Use a lower
setting if high speeds pose problems during
reception.
The setting of these bits is used to inform the

transmitting terminal of the available modem type
for the machine in receive mode.
COMMENTS
higher frequencies because of the length of wire
between the modem and the telephone
exchange.
specific receivers.
Also, try using the cable equalizer if one or more
of the following symptoms occurs.
Communication error
SM
4-61
H551
Service Tables
G3 Switch 06
No
FUNCTION
0 Initial Rx modem rate
to Bit 3 2 1 0 Setting (bps)
3
0 0 0 1 2.4 k
0 0 1 0 4.8 k
0 0 1 1 7.2 k
0 1 0 0 9.6 k
0 1 0 1 12 k
0 1 1 0 14.4 k
0 1 1 1 16.8 k
1 0 0 0 19.2 k
1 0 0 1 21.6 k
1 0 1 0 24.0 k
1 0 1 1 26.4 k
1 1 0 0 28.8 k
1 1 0 1 31.2 k
1 1 1 0 33.6 k
4 Modem types available for
to reception
7 Bit 7 6 5 4 Setting
0 0 0 1 V.27ter
0 0 1 0 V.27ter, V.29
0 0 1 1 V.27ter, V.29,
V.33
0 1 0 0 V.27ter, V.29,
V.33, V.17
0 1 0 1 V.27ter, V.29,
V.33, V.17,
V.34
Other settings Not used
BIT SWITCHES
2
3
6-7

(Rx mode)
Bit 3 Bit 2 Setting
0
0
None
0
1
Low
1
0
Medium
1
1
High
PSTN external equalizer for

V.27ter, V.29, V.33, V.17, V.8
(Rx mode)
PSTN external equalizer for
V.34
(Rx mode)
Not used

exchange.
0-20, 0-23, etc.
1: This bit enables the external (modem)
equalizer for reception. Enable this equalizer if
there is signal loss.
1: This bit enables the external (modem)
equalizer for reception. Enable this equalizer if
there is signal loss.
G3 Switch 08 - Not used (do not change the settings)
H551
4-62
SM
BIT SWITCHES
2
3
4-7

(rx mode)
Bit 3 Bit 2 Setting
0
0
None
0
1
Low
1
0
Medium
1
1
High
Not used
COMMENTS
exchange.
specific receivers.
Communication error
exchange.
0-20, 0-23, etc.
G3 Switch 0A
0
1
2-3
4
SM
FUNCTION
Maximum allowable carrier
drop during image data
reception
Bit 1 Bit 0 Value (ms)
0
0
200
0
1
400
1
0
800
1
1
Not used
Not used
Maximum allowable frame
interval during image data
reception.
0: 5 s
1: 13 s
Not used
COMMENTS
These bits set the acceptable modem carrier drop
time.
Try using a longer setting if error code 0-22 is
frequent.

This bit set the maximum intervals between each
EOL signal (end-of-line) or intervals between
each ECM frame from the other end.
Try using a longer setting if error code 0-21 is
frequent.
4-63
H551
Service Tables
G3 Switch 09
No
FUNCTION
0 ISDN cable equalizer
1 (tx mode)
Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting
0
0
None
0
1
Low
1
0
Medium
1
1
High
BIT SWITCHES
G3 Switch 0A
6
FUNCTION
Reconstruction time for the
first line in receive mode
0: 6 s
1: 12 s
Not used
G3 Switch 0B
No
FUNCTION
0 Protocol requirements:
Europe
1
2
4
5
6
7
Protocol requirements: Spain

Germany
France
PTT requirements: Germany
PTT requirements: France
Not used
G3 Switch 0C
No
FUNCTION
0 Pulse dialing method
0
0 Normal (P=N)
0
1 Oslo (P=10 - N)
1
0 Sweden (N+1)
1
1 Not used
2 Not used
to
7
H551
COMMENTS
When the sending terminal is controlled by a
computer, there may be a delay in receiving page
data after the local machine accepts set-up data
and sends CFR. This is outside the T.30
recommendation. But, if this delay occurs, set this
bit to 1 to give the sending machine more time to
send data.
Refer to error code 0-20.
ITU-T T.30 recommendation: The first line should
come within 5 s of CFR.
COMMENTS
The machine does not automatically reset these
bits for each country after a country code (System
Switch 0F) is programmed.
Change the required bits manually at installation.
COMMENTS
P = Number of pulses sent out, N = Number
dialed.
4-64
SM
BIT SWITCHES
Service Tables
G3 Switch 0D - Not used (do not change the settings)

G3 Switch 0E - Not used (do not change the settings)
G3 Switch 0F - Not used (do not change the settings)
SM
4-65
H551
NCU PARAMETERS
4.3 NCU PARAMETERS

The following tables give the RAM addresses and units of calculation of the
parameters that the machine uses for ringing signal detection and automatic
dialing. The factory settings for each country are also given. Most of these must be
changed by RAM read/write (Function 06), but some can be changed using NCU
Parameter programming (Function 08); if Function 08 can be used, this will be
indicated in the Remarks column. The RAM is programmed in hex code unless
(BCD) is included in the Unit column.
Address
Function
480600 Country code for NCU
parameters
Unit
Remarks
Use the Hex value to program the
country code directly into this address,
or use the decimal value to program it
using Function 08 (parameter 00)
Country
Decimal
Hex
France
00
00
Germany
01
01
UK
02
02
Italy
03
03
Austria
04
04
Belgium
05
05
Denmark
06
06
Finland
07
07
Ireland
08
08
Norway
09
09
Sweden
10
0A
Switzerland
11
0B
Portugal
12
0C
Holland
13
0D
Spain
14
0E
Israel
15
0F
USA
17
11
Asia
18
12
Hong Kong
20
14
South Africa
21
15
Australia
22
16
New Zealand
23
17
Singapore
24
18
Malaysia
25
19
20 ms
Line current is not detected
if 480401 contains FF.
480601
Line current detection time
480602
480603
480604
Line current wait time

Line current drop detect time
limit (high byte)
480605

limit (low byte)
H551
4-66
Hz (BCD)

disabled.
SM
NCU PARAMETERS
Address
Function
480606 PSTN dial tone frequency lower
limit (high byte)
480607
480608

limit (low byte)
PSTN dial tone detection time
Unit
Hz (BCD)
Remarks
disabled.
20 ms

machine pauses for the
pause time (address
48040D / 48040E)
480609
48060A
48060B
48060C
48060D
48060E
48060F
480610
480611
480612
480613
480614
480615
480616
480617
480618
480619
48061A
SM
PSTN dial tone reset time (LOW)

PSTN dial tone reset time (HIGH)
PSTN dial tone continuous tone
time
PSTN dial tone permissible drop
time
PSTN wait interval (LOW)
PSTN wait interval (HIGH)
PSTN ringback tone detection
time
PSTN ringback tone off detection
time
detected (LOW)
detected (HIGH)
limit (high byte)
limit (low byte)
limit (high byte)
limit (low byte)
limit (high byte)
limit (low byte)
limit (high byte)
20 ms

contains FF.
20 ms
20 ms
20 ms
Hz (BCD)

disabled.
Hz (BCD)

disabled.
Hz (BCD)

disabled.
Hz (BCD)

disabled.

limit (low byte)
4-67
H551
Service Tables
See Note 2 (Italy).
NCU PARAMETERS
Address
Function
48061B PABX dial tone detection time
48061C
48061D
48061E
48061F
480620
480621
480622
480623
480624
480625
480626
480627
480628
480629
48062A
48062B
48062C
48062D
48062E
48062F
480630
480631
480632
H551
Unit
20 ms
PABX dial tone reset time (LOW)

PABX dial tone reset time (HIGH)
PABX dial tone continuous tone
time
PABX dial tone permissible drop
time
PABX wait interval (HIGH)
PABX wait interval (LOW)
PABX ringback tone detection
time
PABX ringback tone off detection
time
detected (LOW)
detected (HIGH)
limit (high byte)
limit (low byte)
limit (high byte)
limit (low byte)
Busy tone continuous tone
detection time
4-68
Remarks
If 48041B contains FF, the
480421).
20 ms

contains FF.
20 ms
20 ms
20 ms
Hz (BCD)

disabled.
Hz (BCD)

disabled.
20 ms
SM
NCU PARAMETERS
480634
480635
480636
480637
480638

Bits 3 and 2 - Not used. Keep these bits at 0.
Bit 1 0
0 0 75%
0 1 50%
1 0 25%
1 1 12.5%
disabled.
disabled.
International dial tone detection
20 ms
time
pause time (48043D /
48043E).
See Note 2 (Belgium).
480639
48063A
48063B
48063C
48063D
48063E
48063F
480640
480641
SM

(LOW)
(HIGH)
International dial tone continuous
tone time
International dial tone permissible
drop time
(HIGH)
(LOW)
Country dial tone upper
frequency limit (HIGH)
Country dial tone upper
frequency limit (LOW)
limit (HIGH)
4-69
Hz (BCD)

disabled.

disabled.
H551
Service Tables
Address
Function
Unit
Remarks
480633 Busy tone signal state time tolerance for all ranges, and number of cycles
required for detection (a setting of 4 cycles means that ON-OFF-ON or OFFON-OFF must be detected twice).
NCU PARAMETERS
Address
Function
480642 Country dial tone lower frequency
limit (LOW)
480643 Country dial tone detection time
480644
Unit
20 ms

480449).
1 ms
See Notes 3 and 6.

1 ms
See Note 3. Function 08

(parameter 12).
(parameter 13).
See Notes 6. Function 08
(parameter 14).
48064B

(LOW)
(HIGH)
Country dial tone continuous tone
time
Country dial tone permissible
drop time
Country dial wait interval (LOW)
Country dial wait interval (HIGH)
Time between opening or closing
the DO relay and opening the
OHDI relay
Break time for pulse dialing
48064C
Make time for pulse dialing
1 ms
48064D
Time between final OHDI relay

closure and DO relay opening or
closing
Minimum pause between dialed
digits (pulse dial mode)
Time waited when a pause is
entered at the operation panel
DTMF tone on time
DTMF tone off time
Tone attenuation level of DTMF
signals while dialing
Tone attenuation value
difference between high
frequency tone and low
frequency tone in DTMF signals
PSTN: DTMF tone attenuation
level after dialing
ISDN: DTMF tone attenuation
level after dialing
Not used
Not used
Not used
Grounding time (ground start
mode)
1 ms
480645
480646
480647
480648
480649
48064A
48064E
48064F
480650
480651
480652
480653
480654
480655
480656
480657
480658
480659
H551
4-70
Remarks
20 ms

(parameter 15).
1 ms

See Note 5.
See Note 5.
-dBm x
0.5
-Nx0.5
(dB)
-dBm x
0.5
-dBm x
0.5
20 ms

See Note 5.
See Note 5
The Gs relay is closed for
this interval.
SM
NCU PARAMETERS
Unit
1 ms
48065B
BCD
48065C
48065D
48065E
48065F
480660
480661
480662
480663
480664
480665
480666
480667
to
480671
480672
480673
SM

(High)
(Low)
PSTN access pause time
20 ms
Remarks
The OHDI relay is open for
this interval.
For a code of 100:
48045B - F1
48045C - 00
This time is waited for each
pause input after the PSTN
access code. Up to 7 of
these can be input. If this
address contains FF[H], the
pause time stored in
address 48044F is used.
Bits 7 to 5 - Progress tone detection level

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5
dBm
0
0
0
-25.0
0
0
1
-35.0
0
1
0
-30.0
1
0
0
-40.0
1
1
0
-49.0
Bits 4 and 3 - Not used
Bit 2 - International dial tone detection method
1: Detect by cadence parameters (Belgium - See Note 3)
Bit 1 - Not used
Bit 0 - PSTN dial tone detection method
1: Detect by cadence parameters (Italy - See Note 3)
Bit 7 and 6 - Not used
Bit 5 1: Polarity detection enabled for rx (detection time = 500 ms)
Bit 4 1: Polarity detection enabled for tx (detection time = 500 ms)
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Intercity dial prefix (HIGH)
BCD
For a code of 0:
480465 - FF
480466 - F0
Intercity dial prefix (LOW)
BCD
Not used

4-71
1000/ N
(Hz).
02).
H551
Service Tables
Address
Function
48065A Break time (flash start mode)
NCU PARAMETERS
Address
Function
Unit
480674 Acceptable ringing signal
480675 Acceptable ringing signal
480676 Number or rings until a call is
1
detected
480677 Minimum required length of the
20 ms
first ring
480678 Minimum required length of the
20 ms
second and subsequent rings
480679 Ringing signal detection reset
20 ms
time (LOW)
48067A Ringing signal detection reset
time (HIGH)
48067B Not used
to
480680
20 ms
480681 Interval between dialing the last
digit and switching the Oh relay
over to the external telephone
when dialing from the operation
panel in handset mode.
480682 Bits 0 and 1 - Handset off-hook detection time
Bit 1
0
Setting
0
0
200 ms
0
1
800 ms
Other
Not used
Remarks
(parameter 07).
Bits 2 and 3 - Handset on-hook detection time

Bit 3
2
Setting
0
0
200 ms
0
1
800 ms
Other
Not used
480683
H551

Bit 4 - DTMF detection
0: Disabled
1: Enabled

If bit 4 is set to 0, Fax On
Demand and Transfer
operation using DTMF are
disabled.
4-72
SM
NCU PARAMETERS
4806A2
4806A3
4806A4
4806A5

CED detection time
4804A6

4806A7

4806A8
4806A9
4806AA

CNG detection time
4806AB
4806AC
CNG on time
CNG off time
SM
4-73
Remarks

disabled.
BCD (Hz)

disabled.
20 ms
20 ms
BCD (Hz)
BCD (Hz)

disabled.
20 ms
20 ms
20 ms
20 ms

disabled.

H551
Service Tables
Address
Function
Unit
480684 Bits 7 to 5 - DTMF On detection time
Bit 7
Bit 6 Bit 5
Setting
0
0
0
30 ms
0
0
1
40 ms
0
1
0
80 ms
0
1
1
140 ms
Bits 4 to 2 - DTMF Off detection time
0
0
0
30 ms
0
0
1
40 ms
0
1
0
80 ms
0
1
1
140 ms
Bits 1 and 0 - Not used.
480685 Not used
to
4806A0
4806A1 Acceptable CED detection
BCD (Hz)
NCU PARAMETERS
Address
Function
4806BE Not used
to
4806D9
4806DA T.30 T1 timer
Unit
Remarks
1s
Notes
1. If a setting is not required, store FF in the address.
If bit 0 or bit 2 is set to 1, the functions of the following RAM addresses are
changed.
duration (%), and number of cycles required for detection, coded as in address
480633.
48060B (if bit 0 = 1) or 48063B (if bit 2 = 1): on time, hex code (unit = 20 ms)
48060C (if bit 0 = 1) or 48063C(if bit 2 = 1): off time, hex code (unit = 20 ms)
3. Pulse dial parameters (addresses 48064A to 48064F) are the values for 10
pps. If 20 pps is used, the machine automatically compensates.
4. The first ring may not be detected until 1 to 2.5 wavelengths after the time
specified by this parameter.
5. The calculated level must be between 0 and 10.
Low frequency tone: - 0.5 x N480652/480654 + N480653) dBm
Note: N480652, for example, means the value stored in address 480652(H)
6. 480644A: Europe - Between Ds opening and Di opening, France - Between Ds
closing and Di opening
48064D: Europe - Between Ds closing and Di closing, France - Between Ds
opening and Di closing
SM
4-75
H551
Service Tables
2. Italy and Belgium only

Bit 1 Not used
DEDICATED TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS
4.4
Each Quick Dial Key and Speed Dial Code has four bytes of programmable
parameters allocated to it. If transmissions to a particular machine often experience
problems, store that terminal's fax number as a Quick Dial or Speed Dial, and
adjust the parameters allocated to that number.
The programming procedure will be explained first. Then, the four bytes will be
described.
4.4.1 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE

1. Set bit 3 of System Bit Switch 04 to 1.
2. Either use Function 31 (for a Quick Dial number) or Function 32 (for a Speed
Dial number)
Example: Change the Parameters in Quick Dial 10.
1.
4. Press Quick Dial key 10.
NOTE: When selecting Speed Dial 10 with Function 32, press at the ten
key at the ten key pad.
5. Press four times.
6. The settings for byte 0 are now displayed. Press a number from 0 to 7
corresponding to the bit that you wish to change.
Example: Change bit 7 to 1: Press 7
7. To scroll through the parameter bytes, either:
Select the next byte:
or
Select the previous byte:
until the correct byte is displayed. Then go back to step 6.

8. After the setting is changed, press .
9. To finish, press .
10. After finishing, reset bit 3 of System Bit Switch 04 to 0.
H551
4-76
SM
4.4.2 PARAMETERS
The initial settings of the following parameters are all FF(H) - all the parameters are
disabled.
Switch 01
FUNCTION AND COMMENTS
ITU-T T1 time (for PSTN G3 mode)
If the connection time to a particular terminal is longer than the NCU parameter setting ,
adjust this byte. The T1 time is the value stored in this byte (in hex code), multiplied by
1 second.
Range:
1 to 127 s (01h to 7Fh)
00h or FFh The local NCU parameter factory setting is used.
Do not program a value between 80h and FEh.
FUNCTION
0
to
4
5
to
7
Tx level
Bit 4 3
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
2
0
0
0
0
1
1 0 Setting
0 0
0
0 1
-1
1 0
-2
1 1
-3
0 0
-4
:
:
0 1 1 1 1
-15
1 1 1 11
Disabled
Cable equalizer
Bit 7 6 5 Setting
0 0 0 None
0 0 1 Low
0 1 0 Medium
0 1 1 High
1 1 1 Disabled
COMMENTS
If communication with a particular remote
terminal often contains errors, the signal level
may be inappropriate. Adjust the Tx level for
communications with that terminal until the results
are better.
When disabled, NCU parameter 01 setting is
used.
Note: Do not use settings other than listed on the
left.
between the modem and the telephone exchange
when calling the number stored in this
Quick/Speed Dial.
0-20, 0-23, etc.
left.
SM
4-77
H551
Service Tables
Switch 02

Switch 03
0
to
3
FUNCTION
Bit 3 2 1 0 Setting bps)
0 0 0 0 Not used
0 0 0 1
2,400
0 0 1 0
4,800
0 0 1 1
7,200
0 1 0 0
9,600
0 1 0 1
12,000
0 1 1 0
14,400
1 1 1 1
4
to
7
COMMENTS
If training with a particular remote terminal always
takes too long, the initial modem rate may be too
high. Reduce the initial Tx modem rate using
these bits.
left.
Disabled
Other settings:Not used

Not used
Switch 04
0
2
3
4
5
6
7
H551
FUNCTION
Inch-mm conversion before tx
Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting
0
0
Inch-mm
conversion
available
0
1
Inch only
1
0
Not used
1
1
Disabled
DIS/NSF detection method
Bit 3 Bit 2 Setting
0
0
First DIS or
NSF
0
1
Second DIS or
NSF
1
0
Not used
1
1
Disabled
Not used
Compression modes
available in transmit mode
0: MH only
1: All available compression
modes
ECM during transmission
Bit 7 Bit 6 Setting
0
0
Disabled
0
1
Enabled
1
0
Not used
1
1
Disabled
COMMENTS
The machine uses inch-based resolutions for
scanning. If inch only is selected, the printed
copy may be slightly distorted at the other end if
that machine uses mm-based resolutions.
(0, 1): Use this setting if echoes on the line are

interfering with the set-up protocol at the start of
transmission. The machine will then wait for the
second DIS or NSF before sending DCS or NSS.

This bit determines the capabilities that are
informed to the other terminal during
transmission.
For example, if ECM is switched on but is not

wanted when sending to a particular terminal, use
the setting of (0, 0).
4-78
SM

FUNCTION
COMMENTS
0 Data rate
When disabled, the setting of G4 parameter
to Bits 3 2 1 0 Setting
switch 2 (bits 0 and 1) setting is used.
3
0 0 0 0 64 kbps
0 0 0 1 56 kbps
1 1 1 1 Disabled
4 Not used
to
7
Service Tables

FUNCTION
COMMENTS
0 Link Modules
switch 3 (bit 0) setting is used.
3
0 0 0 0 Modulo 8
0 0 0 1 Modulo 128
1 1 1 1 Disabled
4 Not used
to
7

FUNCTION
COMMENTS
0 Layer 3 protocol
3
0 0 0 0 ISO 8208
0 0 0 1 T.70 NULL
1 1 1 1 Disabled
4 Packet modules
7
0 0 0 0 Modulo 9
0 0 0 1 Modulo 128
1 1 1 1 Disabled
Switch 08 - Not used
SM
4-79
H551
SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES

CAUTION
Do not change the settings which are marked as Not used or Read
only.
006003 to 00600B(H) - ROM part number and suffix (ASCII)
Example: The part number is H5517210A
006003(H) - 48(H)
006004(H) - 35(H)
006005(H) - 35(H)
006006(H) - 31(H)
006007(H) - 37(H)
006008(H) - 32(H)
006009(H) - 31(H)
00600A(H) - 30(H)
00600B(H) - 41(H)
480001 to 480004(H) - ROM version (Read only)
480001(H) - Revision number (BCD)
480002(H) - Year (BCD)
480003(H) - Month (BCD)
480004(H) - Day (BCD)
480005(H) - RAM Reset Level 1
Change the data at this address to FF(H), then switch the machine off and on to
reset all the system settings.
Caution: Before using this RAM, print the settings of all the system parameters
(System Parameter List) and RAM settings (RAM dump list) for scanner/printer
registration settings.
Note: Initial toner supply will be carried out automatically after the reset. This
should take about 90 seconds.
480006 to 480015(H) - Machine's serial number (16 digits - ASCII)
480018(H) - Total program checksum (low)
480019(H) - Total program checksum (high)
48001A(H) - Boot program checksum (low)
48001B(H) - Boot program checksum (high)
48001C(H) - Main program checksum (low)
48001D(H) - Main program checksum (high)
48001E(H) - RDS program update counter
480020 to 48003F(H) - System bit switches
480040 to 48004F(H) - Scanner bit switches
480050 to 48005F(H) - Printer bit switches
480060 to 48007F(H) - Communication bit switches
480080 to 48008F(H) - G3 bit switches
480090 to 48009F(H) - G3 bit switches for the optional G3 unit
H551
4-80
SM
4800C0(H) - User parameter switch 00 (SWUER_00)

Bit 0: Stamp home position
Bits 1 and 2: Scanning contrast home position
Bit 2 1 Setting
0 0 Normal
0 1 Lighten
1 0 Darken
Bit 3: Do not adjust
Bits 4 and 5: Scanning resolution home position
Bit 5 4 Setting
0 0 Standard
0 1 Detail
1 0 Fine
Bit 6: Transmission mode home position
0: Memory tx, 1: Immediate tx
Bit 7: Halftone home position
4800C2(H) - User parameter switch 02 (SWUSR_02)

Bit 0: Forwarding mark printing on forwarded messages
Bit 1: Center mark printing on received copies
Bit 2: Reception time printing
Bit 3: TSI included in transmitted messages
Bit 4: Checkered mark printing
Bit 5: CIL printing (G4)
Bit 6: TID printing (G4)
Bit 7: Not used
SM
4-81
H551
Service Tables

Bit 7: Settings return to home position after transmission
4800C3(H) - User parameter switch 03 (SWUSR_03: Automatic report

printout)
Bit 0: Transmission result report (memory transmissions)
0: Off, 1: On
Bit 1: Not used
Bit 2: Memory storage report
0: Off, 1: On
Bit 3: Polling reserve report (polling reception)
0: Off, 1: On
Bit 4: Polling result report (polling reception)
0: Off, 1: On
Bit 5: Transmission result report (immediate transmissions)
0: Off, 1: On
Bit 6: Polling clear report
0: Off, 1: On
Bit 7: Journal (TCR)
0: Off, 1: On
4800C4(H) - User parameter switch 04 (SWUSR04: Automatic report printout)
Bit 0: Automatic confidential reception report output
0: Off, 1: On
Bit 1: Fax On Demand report output
0: Off, 1: On
Bit 7: Inclusion of a sample image on reports
0: Off, 1: On
Bit 0: Substitute reception
0: Off, 1: On
Bit 1: Memory reception if no RTI or CSI received
0: Possible, 1: Impossible
Bits 4 and 5: Restricted Access
Bit 5 4 Setting
0 0 Disabled
0 1 Enabled at all times
1 0 Enabled during Night Timer periods only
1 1 Not used
Bit 6: Fusing lamp control during energy saver mode
0: Lamp off, 1: Standby temperature (80 C)
Bit 7: Not used
Bit 0: TTI/CIL printing
Bit 1: Not used
Bit 2: Closed network for transmission
Bit 3: Not used
Bit 4: Batch transmission (memory card required)
Bit 5: Partial image scanning during memory tx
H551
4-82
0: Off, 1: On
0: Off, 1: On
0: Off, 1: On
0: Off, 1: On
SM
0: Off, 1: On
0: Off, 1: On

Bit 0 and 1: Multi-copy reception (optional memory card required)
Bit 1 0 Setting
X 0 Disabled
0 1 Faxes from senders whose RTIs/CSIs are specified for this
feature are multicopied.
1 1 Faxes from senders whose RTIs/CSIs are not specified for this
feature are multicopied.
Bits 2 and 3: Authorized reception
Bit 3 2 Setting
X 0 Disabled
0 1 Only faxes from senders whose RTIs/CSIs are specified for
this feature are accepted.
1 1 Only faxes from senders whose RTIs/CSIs are not specified
for this feature are accepted.
Bits 4 and 5: Specified cassette selection
Bit 5 4 Setting
X 0 Disabled
feature are printed on paper from a specified cassette.
feature are printed on paper from a specified cassette.
Bits 6 and 7: Forwarding (optional memory card required)
Bit 1 0 Setting
X 0 Disabled
feature are forwarded.
feature are forwarded.
SM
4-83
H551
Service Tables

Bit 2: Parallel memory transmission
Bit 3: Reduction before transmission
Bits 6 and 7: Fax On Demand
Bit 7 6 Setting
0 0 Disabled
0 1 Enabled without password (Remote ID)
1 0 Enabled with password (Remote ID)
1 1 Not used

Bits 0 and 1: Memory lock (optional memory card required)
Bit 1 0 Setting
X 0 Disabled
feature are kept in the memory until a memory lock ID is
entered.
feature are kept in the memory until a memory lock ID is
entered.
Bits 2 and 3: Hard disk filing system
(optional hard disk and the function upgrade card required)
Bit 3 2 Setting
X 0 Disabled
0 1 Faxes from senders whose RTIs/CSIs are specified are for this
feature kept in the hard disk for filing.
feature are kept in the hard disk for filing.
4800CA(H) - User parameter switch 10 (SWUSR_0A)
Bit 0: Reverse order printing
Bit 1: 2 into 1
Bit 7: Halftone type
0: Error diffusion, 1: Dither
4800CB(H) - User parameter switch 11 (SWUSR_0B)
Bit 0: Transfer request using DTMF tone signals
0: Not accepted, 1: Accepted
Bit 1: Method of transmitting numbers after the "Tone" mark over an ISDN line
0: UUI, 1: Tone
Bit 6: Printout of messages received while acting as a forwarding station
0: Off, 1: On
Bit 7: Polling Standby duration
0: Once, 1: No limit
4800CC(H) - User parameter switch 12 (SWUSR_0C)
Bit 2: Toner saving mode
Bits 3 and 4: Printout image density (Fax mode)
Bit 4 3 Setting
0 0 Normal
0 1 Lighten
1 0 Darken
1 1 Not used
Bit 7: Copy operation
0: Possible, 1: Prohibited
H551
4-84
SM
4800CD(H) - PSTN access method (SWUSR_0D)

Bits 0 and 1: PSTN access method from behind a PABX (standard G3 unit)
Bit 1 0 Setting
0 0 PSTN
0 1 Loop start
1 0 Ground start
1 1 Flash start
Bits 2 and 3: PSTN access method from behind a PABX for the optional G3 unit
Bit 3 2 Setting
0 0 PSTN
0 1 Loop start
1 0 Ground start
1 1 Flash start
Service Tables
4800D7(H) - PSTN access number for loop start (Optional G3 unit)

(SWUSR_17)
Access number
Hex value to program (BCD)
0
F0
0
F0
00
00
99
99
4800D8(H) - User function 62 settings (SWUSR_18)
Bits 0 and 1: File retention time
Bit 1 0 Setting
0 0 Disabled
0 1 24 hours
1 0 Disabled
1 1 72 hours
4800D9(H) - User function 62 settings (SWUSR_19)
Bit 0: Night timer
Bit 4: RDS operation
0: Not acceptable
1: Acceptable for the limit specified by system switch
03
Bit 7: Daylight saving time 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
4800DA(H) - User function 62 settings (SWUSR_1A)
Bit 0: Not used
Bit 1: Dialing type (Standard G3 unit)
Bit 5: Dialing type (Optional G3 unit)
Bit 6 and 7: Not used
SM
4-85
H551
4800DB(H) - PSTN access number for loop start (Standard G3 unit)

(SWUSR_1B)
Access number
Hex value to program (BCD)
0
F0
0
F0
00
00
99
99
4800F0 to 4800FF(H) - G4 Parameter Switches
480100 to 48011FF(H) - G4 Internal Switches
480120 to 480133(H) - RTI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII) - See the following note.
480148 to 48015B(H) - CSI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII)
48015C to 48016F(H) - CSI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII) for the optional G3 unit
480170 to 480183(H) ISDN G3 CSI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII)
480184 to 4801A3(H) - TTI (Max.32 characters - ASCII) - See the following note.
4801C4(H) - Number of CSI characters (Hex)
4801C5(H) - Number of CSI characters (Hex) for the optional G3 unit
4801C6(H) - Number of CSI characters (Hex) for the ISDN G3 CSI
Note: If the number of characters are less than the maximum (20 for RTI, 32 for
TTI), add a stop code (FF[H]) after the last character.
4801C7 to 4801D5(H) - Service station's fax number (Service function 13)
See 48024C(H) for the type of network used for this
number.
4801E5 to 4801F3(H) - Own fax number (PSTN/ISDN G3) (User function 61)
4801F4 to 480202(H) - Own fax number (ISDN G4) (User function 61)
480203 to 48023E(H) - ISDN subscriber numbers (Read only)
480203 - 480211(H): ISDN G3 Subscriber Number (Main)
480212 - 480220(H): ISDN G3 Subscriber Number (Sub)
480221 - 48022F(H): ISDN G4 Subscriber Number (Main)
480230 48023E(H): ISDN G4 Subscriber Number (Sub)
480240(H) - ID code (low - Hex)
480241(H) - ID code (high - Hex)
480242(H) - Confidential ID (low - BCD)
480243(H) - Confidential ID (high - BCD)
480244(H) - Memory lock ID (low - Hex)
480245(H) - Memory lock ID (high - Hex)
480248(H) - Remote ID (low - BCD)
480249(H) - Remote ID (high - BCD)
H551
4-86
SM
48024C(H) - Network type used for the service station number

00(H) - G3 (PSTN)
01(H) - G4 (ISDN)
48026C to 480273(H) - Last power off time (Read only)
48026C(H) - 01(H) - 24-hour clock, 00(H) - 12-hour clock (AM), 02(H) - 12-hour
clock (PM)
48026D(H) - Year (BCD)
48026E(H) - Month (BCD)
48026F(H) - Day (BCD)
480270(H) - Hour
480271(H) - Minute
480272(H) - Second
480273(H) - 00: Monday, 01: Tuesday, 02: Wednesday, ....... , 06: Sunday
Service Tables
480280(H) ) - Optional equipment (Read only)

Bit 0: Memory card
Bit 1: Hard disk
Bit 2: Function upgrade card
Bit 3: Not used
Bit 4: 100 sheet cassette
Bit 0 Paper feed unit
Bit 1: 1st paper feed unit
Bit 2: 2nd paper feed unit
Bit 3: Not used:
Bit 4: Printer interface unit
Bit 5: Not used
Bit 6: ISDN G4 unit
Bit 7: Not used
Bit 0: Fax on demand
Bit 3: Optional G3 unit
480292 to 480294(H) - Tx counter
Address
480292(H)
480293(H)
480294(H)
High
Tens digit
Thousands digit
Low
Unit digit
Hundrets digit
Ten thousands digit
Note: The following counters have the same data format as above.
480296 to 480298(H) - Rx counter
48029A to 48029C(H) - Scan counter
SM
4-87
H551
48029E to 4802A0(H) - Print counter

4802A2 to 4802A4(H) - Printer interface output counter
4802B2 to 4802B4(H) - Paper feed counter (standard cassette)
4802B6 to 4802B8(H) - Paper feed counter (1st optional paper feed unit)
4802BA to 4802BC(H) - Paper feed counter (2nd optional paper feed unit)
4802BE to 4802C0(H) - Paper feed counter (optional 100 sheet cassette)
4802C2 to 4802C4(H) - Paper feed counter (bypass feed)
4802CA to 4802CC(H) - Scanner total jam counter
4802CE to 4802D0(H) - Printer total jam counter
4802D2 to 4802D4(H) - Paper jam counter (standard cassette)
4802D6 to 4802D8(H) - Paper jam counter (1st optional paper feed unit)
4802DA to 4802DC(H) - Paper jam counter (2nd optional paper feed unit)
4802DE to 4802E0(H) - Paper jam counter (optional 100 sheet cassette)
4802E2 to 4802E4(H) - Paper jam counter (bypass feed)
4802EA to 4802EC(H) - Fusing exit jam counter
4802EE to 4802F0(H) - Registration jam counter
4802F2 to 4802F4(H) - PM counter
4802F6 to 4802F8(H) - PM call interval (default 60,000)
4802FA to 4802FC(H) - Copy counter
4802FE to 480300(H) - OPC (drum) counter
480306 to 480308(H) - OPC (drum) replacement interval (default: 30,000 prints)
If bit 5 of system bit switch 04 is 0, the machine asks the user to replace the drum
at this interval.
48030A to 48030C(H) - CTM counter
H551
4-88
SM
480312 to 480321(H) - Excessive jam call parameters
DEC (1 - 255; 0 = Disabled)

CALL (3 - 15; 0 = Disabled)
CLR (Low)
(High)
Counters
JAM: Jam counter used to
place a service call
JAM counter decrement
clearing the JAM counter
Address (H)
ADF
Printer
48031A
48031E
48031B
48031F
48031C
480320
48031D
480321
Initial
Settings
10 (H)
06 (H)
30 (H)
00 (H)
Address (H)
ADF
Printer
480313
480317
Sys. Para.
List
X
Y
Sys. Para.
List
Z
480312
480316
480314 (Low)
480318 (Low)
480315 (High)
480319 (High)
Service Tables
Parameters
48033E to 480349(H) - G4 NSC code

48034A to 480361(H) - G4 terminal ID (ASCII - Max. 24 characters)
480362 to 480365(H) - ISDN IP
480366 to 480369(H) - ISDN G3 sub-address
48036A to 48036D(H) - ISDN G4 sub-address
48036E to 480372(H) - CiG4 board ROM information
48036E(H) - Suffix
48036F(H) - Version (BCD)
480370(H) - Year (BCD)
480371(H) - Month (BCD)
480372(H) - Day (BCD)
480373 to 480374(H) - Modem ROM version (standard)
480375 to 480376(H) - Optional G3 unit modem ROM version
480378 to 480379(H) - Reset timer during the communication
480378(H) - Low byte
480379(H) - High byte
The machine automatically returns to the standby mode when a page transmission
exceeds this timer.
When the setting is 0000 to 04FF: The timer is set to 1 hour.
When the setting is 0500 to FFFF: The timer is set to N x 500 ms
(10.7 min to 9.1 hours)
SM
4-89
H551
48037A to 48037B(H) - Reset timer for the optional G3 or G4 unit

48037A(H) - Low byte
48037B(H) - High byte
The machine resets the optional G3 or G4 unit to the standby mode every period of
this timer.
When the setting is 0000 to 04FF: The timer is set to 15 min.
When the setting is 0500 to FFFF: The timer is set to N x 500 ms
(10.7 min to 9.1 hours)
480387(H) - Number of copies for multi-sort document reception (User function 83)
480388(H) - Daylight saving time settings (User function 62)
480389 to 4803B2(H) - Night timer period (User function 72)
480389 to 48038B(H) - Setting #1 for Monday
48038C to 48038E(H) - Setting #2 for Monday
48038F to 480391(H) - Setting #1 for Tuesday
480392 to 480394(H) - Setting #2 for Tuesday
480395 to 480397(H) - Setting #1 for Wednesday
480398 to 48039A(H) - Setting #2 for Wednesday
48039B to 48039D(H) - Setting #1 for Thursday
48039E to 4803A0(H) - Setting #2 for Thursday
4803A1 to 4803A3(H) - Setting #1 for Friday
4803A4 to 4803A6(H) - Setting #2 for Friday
4803A7 to 4803A9(H) - Setting #1 for Saturday
4803AA to 4803AC(H) - Setting #2 for Saturday
4803AD to 4803AF(H) - Setting #1 for Sunday
4803B0 to 4803B2(H) - Setting #2 for Sunday
Program format
First byte - Hour (BCD)
Second byte - Minute (BCD)
Third byte - 00(H): Timer start time, 01(H): Timer end time
4803DB(H) - Time for economy transmission (hour in 24h clock format - BCD)
4803DC(H) - Time for economy transmission (minute - BCD)
4803DD to 4803E4(H) - Last RDS operation (Read only)
4803DD(H) - 01(H): 24-hour clock, 00(H): 12-hour clock (AM), 02(H): 12-hour
clock (PM)
4803DE(H) - Year (BCD)
4803DF1(H) - Month (BCD)
4803E0(H) - Day (BCD)
4803E1(H) - Hour
4803E2(H) - Minute
4803E3(H) - Second
4803E4(H) - 00: Monday, 01: Tuesday, 02: Wednesday, ....... , 06: Sunday
H551
4-90
SM
4803EC to 4803F3(H) - Last Fax On Demand report printout (Read only)

4803EC(H) - 01(H): 24-hour clock, 00(H): 12-hour clock (AM), 02(H): 12-hour
clock (PM)
4803ED(H) - Year (BCD)
4803EE(H) - Month (BCD)
4803EF(H) - Day (BCD)
4803F0(H) - Hour
4803F1(H) - Minute
4803F2(H) - Second
4803F3(H) - 00: Monday, 01: Tuesday, 02: Wednesday, ....... , 06: Sunday
4803F6 to 4803F7(H) - Length (mm) of the non-scanning area from the leading
edge for partial image scanning
4803F6(H) - Low byte (BCD)
4803F7(H) - High byte (BCD)
In the US, the user input value is in inch format. The machine converts this into mm
format and stores the converted value here.
Service Tables
4803F8 to 4803F9(H) - Length (mm) of the scanning area for partial image
scanning
4803F8(H) - Low byte (BCD)
4803F9(H) - High byte (BCD)
00 - 07(H)
4803FA(H) - Transmission monitor volume
00 - 07(H)
4803FB(H) - Reception monitor volume
00 - 07(H)
4803FC(H) - On-hook monitor volume
00 - 07(H)
4803FE(H) - Buzzer volume
00 - 07(H)
4803FF(H) - Key acknowledgement tone volume
480400(H) - NCU country code setting
480401 to 480405(H) - Periodic service call parameters
480401(H) - Call interval: 01 through 15 month(s) (BCD)
(00: Periodic service call disabled.)
480402(H) - Year: Last two digits of the year (BCD)
480403(H) - Month: 01 to 12 (BCD)
480404(H) - Day: 01 to 31 (BCD)
480405(H) - Hour: 00 to 23 (BCD)
48040B to 48040D(H) - Effective term of automatic service
48040B(H) - Year: Last two digits of the year (BCD)
48040C(H) - Month: 01 to 12 (BCD)
48040D(H) - Day: 01 to 31 (BCD)
480600 to 4806DA(H) - NCU parameters (Refer to section 4.3 for details)
SM
4-91
H551
480800(H) - Print top margin (standard cassette)

480801(H) - Print top margin (1st optional paper feed unit)
480802(H) - Print top margin (2nd optional paper feed unit)
480805(H) - Print top margin (optional 100 sheet cassette)
480806(H) - Print top margin (bypass feed)
48080B(H) - Print left margin (standard cassette)
48080C(H) - Print left margin (1st optional paper feed unit)
48080D(H) - Print top margin (2nd optional paper feed unit)
480810(H) - Print left margin (optional 100 sheet cassette)
480811(H) - Print left margin (bypass feed)
4808CD(H) - Print bottom margin (bypass feed)
NOTE: Please refer to section 5.12.3 of the FX4 service manual for how to
adjust above parameters.
4808C7(H) - Fusing unit failure details
03(H) - The fusing lamp temperature did not go down to 80 C while in standby
mode (when fusing lamp OFF was selected for energy saver mode)
mode (when fusing lamp Standby [80 C] was selected for energy saver mode)
05(H) - The fusing lamp temperature stayed below 80 C while in standby mode
(when fusing lamp Standby [80 C] was selected for energy saver mode)
07(H) - The fusing lamp temperature went below 140 C during printing
Note:
When a service call was caused by a fusing unit failure (codes 01 - 09):
After fixing the problem, reset the data at this address to 00(H), then restart the
machine to clear the service call. (Refer to address 4808C9(H) for other hardware
failures.)
4808C8(H) - Excessive jam alarm
Bit 3: Scanner excessive jam alarm
Bit 4: Printer excessive jam alarm
Either or both of these bits will change to 1 when an excessive jam alarm occurs.
Reset each bit to 0 when you have solved the problem. The machine will not be
able to detect excessive jams in future if you do not reset these bits.
H551
4-92
SM
4808C9(H) - Details of the service call (hardware error)

mode (when fusing lamp OFF was selected for energy saver mode)
mode (when fusing lamp Standby [80 C] was selected for energy saver mode)
05(H) - The fusing lamp temperature stayed below 80 C while in standby mode
(when fusing lamp Standby [80 C] was selected for energy saver mode)
07(H) - The fusing lamp temperature went below 140 C while printing
11(H) - Charge leak current was detected while the charge corona unit was
activated
12(H) - Charge leak current was detected while the charge corona unit was not
activated
21(H) - The laser synchronization signal was not detected during printing
31(H) - Polygonal mirror motor startup error
32(H) - Polygonal mirror motor error during printing
41(H) - Main motor startup error
42(H) - Main motor error during printing
When a service call was caused by a fusing lamp failure (codes 01 - 09):
The same code is stored at address 4808C7(H).
After fixing the problem, reset the data at address 4808C7(H) to 00(H), then restart
the machine to clear the service call.
When a service call was caused by another hardware failure (codes 11 - 42):
If the problem remains after restarting the machine (power off/on), fix the hardware
problem. The service call condition is cleared after power up.
4808CD(H) - Print bottom margin when bypass feeder is used.
4808E0(H) - Initial Toner Supply
Bit 3: Initial toner supply 0: Off, 1: On
Whenever the development unit is replaced, do the following procedure.
1. Make sure that the drum, CTM, and the new development unit are correctly
installed.
2. Turn on the machine and change this bit to 1.
4. Turn on the machine. The machine starts filling up the empty development unit
hopper with new toner. (This bit is reset to zero automatically.)
5. Make test copies or test patterns to check the print quality.
SM
4-93
H551
Service Tables
4B9C5E to 4BA365(H) - Latest 20 error communication records (Read only)

One error communication record consists of 90 bytes. The format is as follows:
1st byte - Header
Bit 0: Communication result
0: OK, 1: NG
Bit 1: Document jam
1: Occurred
Bit 2: Power down
1: Occurred
Bit 3: Not used
Bit 4: Technical data printout instead of personal codes 0: No, 1: Yes
Bit 5: Type of technical data
0: Rx level, 1: Measure of error rate
Bit 6: Error report
0: Not printed, 1: Printed
Bit 7: Data validity
0: Not valid, 1: Valid
2nd to 6th bytes - Date and time when the communication started
2nd byte - Year (BCD)
3rd byte - Month (BCD)
4th byte - Day (BCD)
5th byte - Hour (BCD)
6th byte - Minute (BCD)
Service Tables
7th and 8th bytes - Communication time

7th byte - Minutes (BCD)
8th byte - Seconds (BCD)
9th byte - Not used
10th and 11th bytes - Number of pages transmitted or received
9th byte - Low byte (Hex)
10th byte - High byte (Hex)
12th and 13th bytes - Personal code or number of total/burst error lines
If bit 4 of the 1st byte is 0: 12th byte - Personal code (low - BCD)
13th byte - Personal code (high - BCD)
If bit 4 of the 1st byte is 1: 12th byte - Number of total error lines (Hex)
13th byte - Number of burst error lines (Hex)
14th byte - File number (low - Hex)
15th byte - File number (high - Hex)
16th and 17th bytes - Rx level or measure of error rate
If bit 5 of the 1st byte is 0: 16th byte - Rx level (low - Hex)
17th byte - Rx level (high - Hex)
If bit 4 of the 1st byte is 1: 16th byte - Measure of error rate (low - Hex)
17th byte - Measure of error rate (high - Hex)
18th byte - Final modem rate
SM
4-95
H551
Bits 0 to 3: Final modem speed

Bit 3 2 1 0 Setting
0 0 0 1 2.4 k
0 0 1 0 4.8k
0 0 1 1 7.2k
0 1 0 0 9.6k
0 1 0 1 12.0k
0 1 1 0 14.4k
0 1 1 1 16.8k
1 0 0 0 19.2k
1 0 0 1 21.6k
1 0 1 0 24.0k
1 0 1 1 26.4k
1 1 0 0 28.8k
1 1 0 1 31.2
1 1 1 0 33.6k
Bits 4 to 7: Final modem type
Bit 7 6 5 4 Setting
0 0 0 1 V.27ter
0 0 1 0 V.27ter, V.29
0 0 1 1 Not used
0 1 0 0 V.27ter, V.29, V.17
0 1 0 1 V.27ter, V29, V.17, V.34
19th to 21st byte - Not used
22nd to 45th byte - Remote terminal's ID (RTI, TSI or CSI) (ASCII)
Bits 0 - 1: Resolution used
Bit 1 0 Setting
0 0 Standard
1 0 Detail
1 1 Fine
Bit 2: Communication Protocol
Bit 3: ECM
Bits 4 to 7: Communication mode used
Bit 7
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
H551
6
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
5
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
4
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
0: G3, 1: G4
0: Off, 1: On
Setting
Normal
Confidential
Polling
Transfer
Forwarding
Automatic Service Call
Transfer using DTMF/UUI
Fax On Demand
4-96
SM

Bit 0: Tx or Rx 0: Tx, 1: Rx
Bit 1: Reduction in Tx 0: Not reduced, 1: Reduced
Bit 2: Batch transmission
Bit 3: Send later transmission
Bit 4: Transmission from
0: ADF, 1: Memory
Bit 5: Not used
Bits 6 and 7: Network type used
48th byte - Not used
50th to 53rd byte - 1st error code and page number where the error occurred
49th byte - Page number where the error occurred (low - Hex)
50th byte - Page number where the error occurred (high - Hex)
51st byte - Error code (low - BCD)
52nd byte - Error code (high - BCD)
54th to 57th byte - 2nd error code and page number where the error occurred
58th to 61st byte - 3rd error code and page number where the error occurred
62nd to 65th byte - 4th error code and page number where the error occurred
70th to 73rd byte - 6th error code and page number where the error occurred
78th to 81st byte - 8th error code and page number where the error occurred
82nd to 85th byte - 9th error code and page number where the error occurred
70001E to 700025(H) - Hard disk information
If the data in these addresses do not match the following values after installing an
optional hard disk, format the hard disk and check these addresses again.
70001E(H) - 50(H)
70001F(H) - 00(H)
700020(H) - FF(H)
700021(H) - FF(H)
700022(H) - 00(H)
700023(H) - 00(H)
700024(H) - 00(H)
700025(H) - 80(H)
SM
4-97
H551
Service Tables
49th byte - Number of errors during communication (Hex)
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
SPECIAL TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS
5. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
5.1 SPECIAL TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS
Flash/SRAM data copy tool (P/N: A1939353/H5159100)

Flash/SRAM data copy board (P/N: A1939351/H5159500)
Scan line adjustment chart (P/N: H5159300)
200 dpi test chart (P/N: H0829020)
SBU adjustment knobs (P/N: H0129300)
5.2 PM TABLE
Scanner
Item
Exposure Glass
R1 and R2 Rollers
White Shading Plate
Mirrors
ADF Roller Assy
Separation Pad
30K
C (user)
C (user)
C (user)
90K
C (user)
C (user)
C (user)
R
R
60K
C (user)
C (user)
C (user)
C
R
R
30K
60K
90K
R
R
1 year
Notes
C (user) Soft cloth and water
C
C (user) P/N:H5151204
C (user) P/N: H5521355
Item
Paper Feed Roller
Registration Roller
Thermistor
Hot Roller
Pressure Roller
(Fusing)
Cleaning Pad
Development Unit
C (user)
R
R
R
R
1 year
C (user)
C (user)
R (user)
Replaced when a new CTM is installed.
R
Notes
P/N: H5525015
P/N: H5152181
P/N: H5162110
P/N: H5162111
A cleaning pad is
enclosed in the CTM.
P/N: H5159570
Transfer Roller is
included.
100 Sheet Cassette (Optional)

Item
Feed Roller
H551
10K
30K
60K
5-1
1 year
C (user)
Notes
SM
Preventive
Maintenance
Printer
PM TABLE
Paper Feed Unit (Optional)

Item
Relay Roller
Feed Roller
NOTE: C: Clean
H551
10K
C (user)
30K
C (user)
60K
C (user)
1 year
C (user)
C (user)
Notes
R: Replace
5-2
SM
REPLACEMENT AND ADUSTMENT
SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS
6. TROUBLESHOOTING
6.1 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS
If the Call Service indicator is lit, one of the following conditions has occurred.
Error Code
9-17
Sub-code
11
SC-code
1-11
9-17
12
1-12
9-20
9-22
21
01
2-21
0-01
9-22
02
0-02
9-22
03
0-03
9-22
04
0-04
9-22
05
0-05
9-22
07
0-07
9-22
08
0-08
9-22
9-23
9-23
9-24
9-24
09
31
32
41
42
0-09
3-31
3-32
4-41
4-42
To find out which problem has occurred, either:

See the Auto Service Call report that was sent to the service station by the
machine. This report lists a sub-code, as well as the error message; this subcode may help you find the problem.
Or, check the sub-code stored at RAM addresses 4808C7(H) and
4808C9(H).
Check the error code history using service function 03.
Try to clear the service call condition (for failures which are not related to the
fusing unit): switch the power off, wait 10 seconds, then switch back on.
An SC-code is displayed on the LCD panel when the error occurs.
SM
6-1
H551
Replacement
and
Adjustment
Symptom
Charge leak current detected while the
charge corona unit was activated.
Charge leak current detected while the
charge corona unit was not activated.
Laser diode failure
Fusing unit failure (fusing lamp not at
printing temperature after warm-up)
Fusing unit failure (fusing lamp at low
Fusing unit failure (fusing lamp at low
Fusing unit failure (fusing lamp at an
extremely high temperature)
Fusing unit failure (thermistor error)
Hexagonal mirror motor startup error
Hexagonal mirror motor error while printing
Main motor startup error
Main motor error while printing
ERROR CODES
6.2 ERROR CODES

If an error code occurs, retry the communication. If the same problem occurs, try to
fix the problem as suggested below. Note that error codes 4-00, 01, 02, and 10
only appear in the error code display and on the service report.
Code
0-00
Meaning
DIS/NSF not detected
within 40 s of Start being
pressed
0-01
DCN received
unexpectedly
0-03
Incompatible modem at the

other end
CFR or FTT not received
after modem training
0-04
0-05
Unsuccessful after modem

training at 2400 bps
0-06
The other terminal did not

reply to DCS
H551
The machine at the other end may be
incompatible.
Check for DIS/NSF with an oscilloscope.
If the rx signal is weak, there may be a bad line.
The other party is out of paper or has a jammed
printer.
The other party pressed Stop during
communication.
The other terminal is incompatible.
Try changing the tx level and/or cable equalizer
settings.
The other terminal may be faulty; try sending to
another machine.
If the rx signal is weak or defective, there may be
a bad line.
Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable equalizer.
Cross reference
settings.
The other end may be defective or incompatible;
try sending to another machine.
Cross reference
6-2
SM
Code
0-07
Meaning
No post-message
response from the other
end after a page was sent
0-08
The other end sent RTN or

PIN after receiving a page,
because there were too
many errors
0-14
Non-standard post
message response code
received
0-15
The other end does not

have the confidential,
transfer, or SEP/SUB/PWD
function
CFR or FTT not detected
after modem training in
confidential or transfer
mode
0-16
0-17
SM
Communication was
interrupted by pressing the
Stop key
The other end may have jammed or run out of
paper.
The other end user may have disconnected the
call.
The other end may be defective; try sending to
another machine.
The other end may have jammed, or run out of
paper or memory space.
settings.
The other end may have a defective
modem/NCU/MFDU; try sending to another
machine.
Check for line problems and noise.
Incompatible or defective remote terminal; try
Noisy line: resend.
settings.
Cross reference
The other terminal does not have the confidential
rx or transfer function, or the other terminal does
not have SEP/SUB/PWD function.
The other terminal's memory is full.
settings.
The other end may have disconnected, or it may
be defective; try calling another machine.
If the rx signal level is too low, there may be a line
problem.
Cross reference
If the Stop key was not pressed and this error
keeps occurring, replace the operation panel or
OPU.
6-3
H551
Replacement
and
Adjustment
ERROR CODES
ERROR CODES
Code
0-20
0-21
0-22
0-23
0-24
H551
Meaning
Facsimile data not received Check the line connection.
within 6 s of retraining
Try calling another fax machine.
Try adjusting the reconstruction time for the first
line and/or rx cable equalizer setting.
Cross reference
Reconstruction time - G3 Switch 0A, bit 6
Switch 08 (PABX)
Check the connections between the MFDU, NCU,
EOL signal (end-of-line)
& line.
from the other end not
received within 5 s of the
previous EOL signal
The remote machine may be defective or may
have disconnected.
Cross reference
Maximum interval between EOLs and ECM
frames - G3 Bit Switch 0A, bit 4
The signal from the other
end was interrupted for
more than the acceptable
modem carrier drop time
(default: 0.2 s)
Try adjusting the acceptable modem carrier drop
time.
Cross reference
Acceptable modem carrier drop time - G3 Switch
0A, bits 0 and 1
Too many errors during
reception
Replace the NCU, MFDU or MFCE.
Try asking the other end to adjust their tx level.
Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer setting and/or
rx error criteria.
Cross reference
Switch 08 (PABX)
Rx error criteria - Communication Switch 02, bits
0 and 1
There is no memory space available, or substitute
Printer failure occurred
reception is disabled.
while the memory was full
during non-ECM reception; Try asking the user to add optional extra memory.
negative response
returned
6-4
SM
ERROR CODES
Code
0-30
Meaning
The other terminal did not
reply to NSS(A) in AI short
protocol mode
0-52
Polarity changed during

communication
V.8 sequence (TX/RX) modulation mode was not
determined after CM/JM
exchange
V.8 sequence (TX)
fallback to T.30 protocol
after transmitting CI
V.8 sequence (RX)
fallback to T.30 protocol
after receiving CI
0-70
0-74
0-75
V.8 sequence (RX) - CJ

not detected and fallback
to T.30 protocol
0-79
The other terminal may be defective or

incompatible.
Adjust the TX level.
V.8 sequence (TX) - JM

not detected and fallback
to T.30 protocol
0-77

Check the connection between the NCU and the
FDU.
V.8 sequence (RX) - CI

detected while waiting for
V.21 signal
Replacement
and
Adjustment
0-76
settings.
The other terminal may not be compatible.
Cross reference
Dedicated tx parameters - Section 4-4
Retry communication.
SM
6-5
H551
ERROR CODES
0-80
0-81
0-82
0-83
0-84
0-85
0-86
0-87
0-88
1-00
V.34 communication - time

out during line probing
out during equalizer
training
out during control channel
start-up sequence (Phase
4)
out during phase D control
channel start-up sequence
V.34 communication - error
detected in the phase B
control channel
V.34 communication - error
detected in the phase D
control channel
V.34 communication - a
data rate which cannot be
determined from the
symbol rate is selected
V.34 communication modem status goes back
to control channel before
receiving RCP
V.34 ECM - PPR received
9 times (TX) or PPR
transmitted 9 times (RX)
Document jam
1-01
Document length
exceeded the maximum
1-10
Paper at the scan line

when the power was
turned on.
Document jam in the feedout area
1-17
1-20
H551
Paper did not reach the

fusing exit at the end of
printing

Check the connection between the NCU and the
FDU.
incompatible.
Adjust the TX level.
Incorrectly inserted document or unsuitable

document type.
Try changing the maximum acceptable document
length.
Divide the document into smaller pieces.
Cross reference
Max. document length - Scanner switch 00, bits 2
and 3
Remove the paper.
Check the scan line sensor.
Clear any debris from the sensor actuator.
Remove the paper.
6-6
SM
ERROR CODES
1-30
1-34
1-71
2-10
2-11
2-12
2-20
2-50
3-00
3-10
3-11
3-20
3-21
3-30
4-00
Paper present at the fusing

exit after printing
Paper ran out during
printing
Paper ran out after printing
The cover was opened or
the cassette was pulled out
during printing
The modem cannot enter
tx mode
Only one V.21 connection
flag was received
Modem clock irregularity
Abnormal coding/decoding
(cpu not ready)
The machine reset itself
G4 interface board reset
Disconnection during ISDN
G3 communication
Disconnection during ISDN
G4 communication
A SAC signal was received
during ISDN G4
communication
A CSA was sent during
ISDN G4 communication,
because the Stop key was
pressed
Mismatched specifications
(rx capability)
One page took longer than
8 minutes to transmit
4-01
Line current was cut
4-02
The other end cut the

received page as it was
longer than the maximum
limit.
Communication failed
because of ID Code
mismatch (Closed
Network) or Tel. No./CSI
mismatch (Protection
against Wrong
Connections)
4-10
SM
Remove the paper.

Close the cover or put back the cassette.
Replace the MFCE.

Change the MFCE.
Replace the MFCE.
Replace the MFCE.
If this is frequent, replace the MFCE.
Replace the G4 interface board or MFCE.
The other terminal may dialed a wrong number.
The operator at the other terminal may have
interrupted the communication.
The local operator has interrupted the
communication.
Check the receive capabilities requested from the

other terminal.
Try the communication at a lower resolution, or
without halftone.
Change the MFCE.
Check the line connector.
Check the connection between MFDU and NCU.
Replace the MFDU or the NCU.
Split the page into smaller pieces, or ask the other
end to change their maximum receive length
setting, then resend.
Get the ID Codes the same and/or the CSIs
programmed correctly, then resend.
The machine at the other end may be defective.
6-7
H551
Replacement
and
Adjustment
1-21
ERROR CODES
4-80
Start mark not detected at

the top of the OMR sheet
4-81
OMR sheet placed in the

ADF the wrong way
Skew detection mark not
detected
Skew was detected before
scanning the OMR data
field
4-82
4-83
4-84
4-85
4-89
4-90
5-00
5-10
5-20
5-21
5-22
5-23
5-24
Guide mark not detected

while scanning an OMR
sheet
Skew was detected while
scanning the OMR data
field
End mark not detected at
the bottom of the OMR
sheet
Reduction rate in the main
scan direction not
acceptable while scanning
an OMR sheet
Data reconstruction not
possible
DCR timer expired
Storage impossible
because of a lack of
memory
Memory overflow
Mode table overflow after
the second page of a
scanned document
Print data error when
printing a substitute rx or
confidential rx message
Memory overflow after the
second page of a scanned
document
5-25
SAF file access error
5-30
Mode table for the first

page to be printed was not
effective
H551
Check the ADF/scanner mechanisms.

Check if the document guide was not adjuted
correctly.
Check if the sheet was dirty.
Place the sheet in the correct way.
Same as 4-80.
Check the ADF mechanisms.
Same as 4-80.
Same as 4-83
Same as 4-80.
Check if a reduced photocopy was used.

Adjust the scanner correctly (refer to section
5.11).
Replace the MFCE.
Replace the MFCE.
Temporary memory shortage.
Replace the MFCE or optional IC card.
memory to be sent or delete some files from
memory.
Ask the other end to resend the message.
Replace the MFCE or IC memory card.
Try using a lower resolution setting.
memory to be sent or delete some files from
memory.
Replace the MFCE, the IC memory card, or the
hard disk.
Replace the MFCE, the IC memory card, the
function upgrade card, or the hard disk.
6-8
SM
ERROR CODES
6-02
6-03
6-04
G3 ECM - no V.21 signal

was received
G3 ECM - EOR was
received
G3 ECM - non-standard
V.21 code received
G3 ECM - RTC not
detected
6-05
G3 ECM - facsimile data

frame not received within
18 s of CFR, but there was
no line fail
6-06
G3 ECM - coding/decoding
error
G3 ECM - PIP/PIN
received in reply to
PPS.NULL
G3 ECM - ERR received
6-08
6-09
6-10
G3 ECM - error frames still

received at the other end
after all communication
attempts at 2400 bps
6-11
G3 ECM - printing
impossible because of a
missing first line in the
MMR coding
V.21 flag detected during
high speed modem
communication
V.21 signal not stopped
within 6 s
Paper non-feed or jam at
the cassette entrance
Paper jam inside the
development area
Paper jam in the fusing exit
area
Toner end detected
Cover open detected
during printing
6-21
6-39
9-07
9-08
9-09
9-10
9-12
SM
Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer.


Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer
Cross reference
Switch 08 (PABX)
Defective MFDU.
The other end pressed Stop during
communication.
Check for a noisy line.
Adjust the tx levels of the communicating
machines.
See code 6-05.
Adjust the tx level (use NCU parameter 01 or the
dedicated tx parameter for that address).
Check for problems in the printer mechanism.
Replacement
and
Adjustment
6-01

incompatible.
Replace the MFCE.
Replace the CTM.
Close the cover, or check the cover sensors.
6-9
H551
ERROR CODES
9-17
Charge corona unit failure
9-20
Laser diode failure
9-22
Fusing lamp failure
9-23
Hexagonal mirror motor

failure
Main motor failure
9-24
9-40
9-41
9-42
9-43
9-44
9-45
9-50
9-51
9-52
9-53
9-80
9-81
9-82
9-83
H551
CRC error while receiveing

a frame
Command 3rd try failed
DCN received
unexpectedly
Unexpected frame
received
Response time over
Frame transmission error
inside the upper paper
feed unit

Check and adjust the host PC's RS232C port
settings.
Check if a proper cable is used and connected
securely.
Check if the application is working correctly.
If the problem persists, replace the MFCE.
Note: The optional RS232C interface may not be

available in some countries.
Check if the recommended types of paper is
used.
correctly.
Jam at the paper exit of the Check if any blockage in the paper feed path.
upper paper feed unit.
Check if the recommended types of paper is
inside the lower paper feed used.
unit
correctly.
Jam at the paper exit from
the lower paper feed unit.
Bypass feed - paper nonCheck the registration roller and sensor.
feed or jam at the entrance
Bypass feed - paper length Check the paper feed mechanism and sensors.
exceeds the maximum limit
(600 mm)
Optional 100 sheet
cassette - paper non-feed
or jam at the cassette
entrance
Optional 100 sheet
cassette - paper length
exceeds the maximum limit
(600 mm)
6-10
SM
Rev. 11/98
Control Channel (Post Message SH)
Rev. 11/98
Rev. 07/2000
6.4 ROM HISTORY
6.4 ROM HISTORY
6.4.1
FIRMWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY

H551 FIRMWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY
Corrects the following :
Firmware
Level
H5517210 B
Production
Date
N/A
1. When only a name was registered in a Group it could

not be erased.
2. Memory Tx through PCFAX could not be done when
programmed in quick dial for use by PC in the H551
Correction of the following minor software problems:
H5517210 C
N/A
Description Of Modification
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
H551
RDS
Programmed telephone dials at Speed Dial no. 35 to
99 could not be cleared by RDS.
NCU parameters could not be initialized by Level 2
RAM clear mode.
G4 mode
Type of network (ex. CiG4) was not printed on the
service monitor report if an error occurred before
starting the transmission of the first image data.
G4 mode
Polling transmission was not successful when the ID
was not matched but OK was printed and the
symbol of the polling mode did not appear on the
TCR.
PCFE When PC memory reception was set and
over 64Kbyte data per page was received, the
received data could not be sent from the FR4 to the
PC. (with Win98 / Winphone)
PCFE
In the PC memory transmission mode, transmission
was not done if the number of dial digit is over 35.
(with WinFAXPRO8.0)
G4 mode
When the transfer request with department code
was done, name of the department was not sent
with the transmitted documents.
G4 mode
System was reset when the communication was
continued over one hour.
G4 mode
Own CIL clock information was printed on the
received pages when the year 2000 was set at the
transmission terminal.
6-16
SM

Firmware
Level
H5517210 D
Production
Date
Dec. 1999
Production
1. Quality improvement of the dial tone detection

2. For the new FCC Standard, Redial # 4 ! 1.
SM
6-17
H551
PARTS CATALOG
PARTS CATALOG
7. PARTS CATALOG
The following parts for the H551 are different from the H515.
Index
H551
H5158600
H5518600
Operation Manual - FR4 Ricoh
(Brand Kit)
H5518620
Operation Manual - FR4 Gestetner
(Brand Kit)
H5518630
3-
H515
Description
Remarks
Operation Manual FR4 Savin
(Brand Kit)
PCB - MFDU (FR4) - USA
5-4
H5156013
H5516011
5-5
5-6
H5155320
----
Motor Harness
H5155311
----
Motor Harness - TX
5-7
H5155310
----
Motor Harness - RX
5-8
H5165308
----
Driver Harness
5-9
5-10
H5165318
H5165302
H5515356
Harness - Power Pack
FDU CN21
H5515339
Harness - LDDR
FDU CN22
5-11
H5165322
----
5-13
H5153140
H5513140
Spacer - 8 mm
5-14
H5156282
H5516120
PCB MFCE (FR4) - USA
5-15/
13/1
H5152042
H5522042
Laser Plotter Unit
5-19
H5215309
H5215339
5-21
H5185400
H5515400
Harness - NCU
PCB - PSU - 115V
5-23
54886020
54886030
PCB - NCU - USA
5-24
H5153146
H5513120
PSU Cover
5-26/
13-4
H5155323
H5525310
Harness - Polygon Mirror Motor
FDU CN14
5-27
5-30
H5155314
H5515338
OPU Harness
FDU CN20
H5155085
H5515353
Harness - 100 Sheet Cassette
FDU CN71
5-31
H5165314
H5515316
Safety Switch Harness
7-12
H5154202
H5514204
Operation Panel Assy
7-27
H5154312
H5514312
Operation Panel Sheet - Ricoh
(Brand Kit)
H5514301
Operation Panel Sheet - Savin
(Brand Kit)
H5514303
Operation Panel Sheet - Nashua
(Brand Kit)
H5514304
Operation Panel Sheet - Gestetner
(Brand Kit)
7-32
13-5
SM
H5154252
----
H5155040
H5525040
Decal Case
Polygon Mirror Motor
7-1
H551
Parts Catalog
Relay Harness - Fusing Unit
PARTS CATALOG
13-7
H5152715
H5522715
Laser Diode Unit
21-
H5162100
----
Fusing Unit Assy
21-2
H5155015
H5525015
Thermistor - Fusing
23-8
H5153142
H5513142
23-10
H5153143
H5513143
PIF Bracket 1
PIF Bracket 2
23-12
H5153141
H5513141
27-2
H5163157
----
NCU Bracket
Bushing - 66
27-3
H5153122
H5513122
PSU Bracket
27-10
H5153374
H5153182
Holder - FDU
27-37
H5165301
----
27-38
H5155318
H5515341
PFU Harness
29-33
H5163583
H5513584
Decal - Bypass Feed
H5513189
Ground Plate - FCE
H5513190
FCE - Holder
H5514010
Quick Reference Guide Holder
H5515310
Harness - TX/RX Motor
FDU CN17
H5515311
Relay Harness - Fusing/Paper Size
FDU CN6
H5515312
Harness - Main Motor
FDU CN15
H5515314
Harness - Driver
FDU CN16
H5515315
Harness - Mech. Counter
FDU CN76
H5518690
Quick Reference Guide
H551
Harness - Paper Size
7-2
FDU CN75
SM
H132 INTERNET FAX OPTION FOR

H551
SERVICE MANUAL
OVERALL INFORMATION

1.1 SPECIFICATIONS
Type
LAN board option for FR4
Protocol
(supported by TCP/IP protocol)
Transmission:
IETF RFC821 SMTP procedure
Reception:
IETF RFC1725 POP3 procedure
Connectivity
Local area network
Ethernet 10base-T
Connection
10base-T direct connection
Resolutions
Main scan: 200 dpi
Sub scan: 400 dpi, 200 dpi, 100 dpi
NOTE: To use 400 dpi, a LAN bit
switch setting must be changed.
Transmission Time
9 s (through a LAN)
Condition: ITU-T #1 test document
(Slerexe letter)
MTF correction: OFF
TTI: None
Resolution: 200 x 100 dpi
Communication speed: 10 Mbps
Correspondent device: E-mail server
Line conditions: No terminal access
Document Size
The message is sent in Max.
A4/Letter width by default. To use in
B4, A3, Double Letter width, a LAN
bit switch setting must be changed.
Data rate
10 Mbps (10base-T)
Power Supply
USA: 115 Vac, 60 Hz
Europe/Asia: 187 ~ 276 Vac,
50/60 Hz
Power Consumption
(with LAN board installed)
Standby: 50 W
Transmit: 60 W
Receive: 300 W
Copy:
330 W
Remark
The machine must be set up as an a
e-mail client before installation. Any
client PCs which are connected to
the machine through a LAN must
also be e-mail clients, or some
features will not work
(e.g., Auto routing).
E-mail File Format

Single/multipart
MIME conversion
Image: DCX format
TIFF-F (MH) format
SM
1-1
H551
Overall
Information
H132
SPECIFICATIONS

1.1 SPECIFICATIONS
Protocol
Transmission:
Reception:
Type
LAN board option for H551
Connectivity
Local area network
Ethernet 10base-T
Connection
Resolutions
Main scan: 200 dpi
Transmission Time
9 s (through a LAN)
(Slerexe letter)
MTF correction: OFF
TTI: None
Document Size
Data rate
10 Mbps (10base-T)
Power Supply
USA: 115 Vac, 60 Hz
50/60 Hz
Power Consumption
Standby: 50 W
Transmit: 60 W
Receive: 300 W
Copy:
330 W
Remark
The machine must be set up as an
features will not work (e.g., Autorouting).
E-mail File Format

Single/multipart
MIME conversion
Image: DCX format
TIFF-F (MH) format
SM
1-1
H551
Overall
Information
H132
SPECIFICATIONS
Rev. 01/00
FEATURES
1.2 FEATURES
Communication Features
- E-mail Reception
Reverse order printing
TSI printing
- E-mail Transmission
broadcaster
Batch transmission
Broadcasting
Closed network
Confidential transmission
Direct fax number entry
Double sided document
transmission
ECM
Economy transmission
File transfer
Forwarding
Forwarding mark
Memory transmission
Multi-step transfer
OMR
Partial image transmission
Polling transmission
Send later
SUB/SID
Transfer request
Transmission deadline (TRD)

- E-mail Reception
Closed network
Center mark
Checkered mark
Group transfer station
Into one
Multi-copy reception
Manual reception
Memory lock
Night timer
Page separate reception
Polling reception

Reports - for e-mail

Error mail notification
Error report (mail)
Journal
Personal code list
Transfer result report
KEY: O = Used, X = Not Used,

H551
Others
LAN fax
200 dpi Printing
200 dpi Scanning
Auto routing
Internet fax
1-2

SM
NETWORKING
Overall
Information
H132
1.3 NETWORKING
1.3.1 OVERVIEW
Japan
G3 Fax
Machine
USA
011-1-212-555-3456#8888
name@abcd.com
PSTN
NIC Fax
Laser Printer
Router
Server
Ethernet
nicfax@abcd.
com
03-3123-4567
nicfax@abcd.com
NIC Fax
nicfax@abcd. com
Personal Code 8888 = name@abcd.com
name@abcd.com
Router
nicfax@xyz.co.jp
Laser Printer
Server
Ethernet
Internet
Paper
Paper
Paper
PC display
H132V551.WMF
This model, the F64G, is also known as the NIC fax.

The above drawing outlines some of the network operations that the F64G can
support.
The NIC Fax at nicfax@xyz.co.jp receives a G3 fax message from a G3 fax
machine inside Japan (dotted line in the diagram). The NIC Fax then relays it to
another NIC Fax in the USA. This NIC Fax then passes the message on to a PC
(name@abcd.com).
The NIC Fax in Japan can also send the message to the PC in the USA directly,
via the internet, by dialing its e-mail address (unbroken line in the diagram). The
message will be stored in the network server at the remote end, until the PC picks
it up.
The rest of this section outlines each of the network features individually.
SM
1-3
H551
NETWORKING
Rev. 01/00
Overall
Information
H132
1.3 NETWORKING
1.3.1 OVERVIEW
Japan
G3 Fax
Machine
USA
011-1-212-555-3456#8888
name@abcd.com
PSTN
NIC Fax
Laser Printer
Router
Server
Ethernet
nicfax@abcd.
com
03-3123-4567
nicfax@abcd.com
NIC Fax
nicfax@abcd. com
name@abcd.com
Router
nicfax@xyz.co.jp
Laser Printer
Server
Ethernet
Internet
Paper
Paper
This model, the H132, is also known as the NIC fax.
Paper
PC display
H132V551.WMF
The above drawing outlines some of the network operations that the H132 can
support.
(name@abcd.com).
it up.
SM
1-3
H551
NETWORKING
1 June, 1998
1.3.2 LAN FAX

PC Fax
Application
G3 Fax
Machine
name@abcd.com
G3 Fa
x Mess
a
ge
PSTN
Laser Printer
Server
G
Me 3 Fa
ssa x
ge
NIC Fax
P C to Fax Machine
NIC Fax
H132V552.WMF
Feature
The LAN fax feature allows a client PC to send a G3 fax message to the NIC fax
over the LAN. The NIC fax will then send the fax message to the destination, which
could be either a PSTN G3 fax or an e-mail address.
Operation
1. PC fax software and the IC COM Redirector utility must be installed in the client
PC in advance. IC COM Redirector must be running.
2. Quick dials, speed dials and group dials stored in the NIC fax can be used.
Advantages
1. A fax message can be sent by a client PC. The NIC Fax can be shared by all
PCs on the LAN as a G3 fax modem and PSTN line.
2. No paper is required at the transmitting side.
H551
1-4
SM
NETWORKING
Overall
Information
H132
1.3.3 200-DPI PRINTER

PC Fax
Application
PC to Paper
NIC Fax
Server
Laser Printer
H132V553.WMF
Feature
This provides a convenient but low-resolution LAN printer. The feature is also
known as Convenient Printing.
Operation
1. PC fax software and the IC COM Redirector utility must be installed in the client
PC in advance. IC COM Redirector must be running.
2. To print a file, the user dials 0000 with the PC fax application.
Advantages
1. Provides a convenient 200-dpi LAN printer.
2. Computer files can be printed out through a PC-based fax application.
SM
1-5
H551
NETWORKING
1 June, 1998
1.3.4 200-DPI SCANNER

name@abcd.com
Paper to PC
NIC Fax
name@abcd.com
Server
Laser Printer
H132V554.WMF
Features
1. This provides a convenient but low-resolution network scanner. The feature is
also known as Convenient Scanning.
2. The NIC fax sends the scanned image to the client PC as an image file
attached to an e-mail message.
Operation
The user scans the original at the NIC Fax (not at the PC), and sends it to the email address of the required PC.
Advantages
1. Provides a convenient 200-dpi network image scanner.
2. Images are stored as e-mail in the mail server for the client PC to pick up.
H551
1-6
SM
NETWORKING
G3 Fax
Machine
G3
Fax
Mes
sag
name2
@abcd.com
name1
@abcd.com
SUB Code:
8888
Overall
Information
H132
1.3.5 AUTOROUTING
PSTN
Laser Printer
G
Me 3 Fax
ssa
ge
NIC Fax
NIC Fax
Personal Code 8888 = name1@abcd.com

Personal Code 5555 = name2@abcd.com
SUB Code:
5555
Server
Fax Machine
to PC
H132V555.WMF
Feature
The NIC fax routes incoming fax messages to client PCs on the same network,
based on the code included in the SUB signal.
Operation
1. The sender specifies a sub ID when sending a fax message. This ID is
transmitted using the SUB protocol signal.
2. Personal codes are stored in the receiving NIC fax in advance, and associated
with e-mail addresses on the same LAN. If the code in the received SUB signal
is the same as one of the stored personal codes, the NIC fax routes the
incoming message to the address that is stored with that personal code.
Example: If a received message has a SUB code of 5555, it is forwarded to
name2@abcd.com
3. The client PC receives the fax as an e-mail message with an image file
attached.
Advantages
1. Fax messages are delivered directly to the mail server for the client PC to pick
up.
2. No paper is used.
SM
1-7
H551
NETWORKING
1 June, 1998
1.3.6 FORWARDING
G3 Fax
Machine
name1@abcd.com
name2@abcd.com
TSI: 1234
PSTN
Laser Printer
NIC Fax
Server
Forwarding by TSI: For 1234, send to name1@abcd.com

Forwarding by RTI: For FRED, send to name2@abcd.com
Fax Machine
to PC
RTI: FRED
G3 Fax
Machine
H132V556.WMF
Feature
The NIC fax routes incoming fax messages to client PCs on the same network,
based on the contents of the RTI or TSI. In this way, a message from a certain
sender can always be forwarded to a certain location.
Operation
1. The sender must have a TSI or RTI programmed.
2. RTIs and TSIs of expected senders are stored in the receiving NIC fax in
advance, and associated with e-mail addresses on the same LAN. If the
received RTI or TSI is the same as one of those stored, the NIC fax routes the
incoming message to the associated address.
Example: If a received message has an RTI of FRED, it is forwarded to
name2@abcd.com
3. The client PC receives the fax as an e-mail message with an image file
attached.
Advantages
1. No SUB code is required for forwarding (some machines cannot send SUB
codes).
2. Fax messages are delivered directly to the mail server for the client PC to pick
up.
H551
1-8
SM
NETWORKING
Overall
Information
H132
1.3.7 INTERNET FAX (PAPER TO PAPER)

USA
Ethernet
NIC Fax
fax1@abcd.com
NIC Fax
Laser Printer
Router
Server
To: fax1@abcd.com
Router
Laser Printer
Server
Internet
Ethernet
Japan
Feature
Sending and receiving fax messages through the Internet.
Operation
1. An e-mail address is specified when sending a fax message.
2. The fax message goes through the Internet to the receiver, and is printed.
NOTE: The time required to send a fax over the Internet depends on the traffic
conditions at the time of transmission. Also, the sending machine has no
way to know whether the message arrived intact at the other end.
Advantages
Cost-saving
SM
1-9
H551
NETWORKING
1 June, 1998
1.3.8 INTERNET FAX (PAPER TO PC)

USA
name@abcd.com
Ethernet
NIC Fax
Laser Printer
Router
NIC Fax
Server
fax1@abcd.com
To: name@abcd.com
Router
Server
Laser Printer
Ethernet
Internet
Japan
H132V558.WMF
Feature
Sending fax messages directly to a client PC through the Internet.
Operation
1. An e-mail address is specified when sending a fax message.
2. An e-mail message is sent to the client PC with the fax message attached.
Advantages
1. Cost-saving.
H551
1-10
SM
NETWORKING
Overall
Information
H132
1.3.9 TRANSFER REQUEST THROUGH THE INTERNET

USA
G3 Fax Machine
206-936-1234
Ethernet
PSTN
To: Quick Dial 01 stored in

fax1@abcd.com
NIC Fax
NIC Fax
(Transfer Station)
Router
Laser Printer
Server
fax1@abcd.com
Quick dial #01= 206-936-1234
Router
Laser Printer
Server
Internet
Ethernet
Japan
H132V559.WMF
Feature
A fax message can be transferred over the Internet and then forwarded to a G3
facsimile, using the NIC fax as a transfer station.
Operation
1. The sender specifies the end receivers using the quick dials, speed dials, and
group dials that are stored in the transfer station.
2. The fax message is sent to the transfer station over the Internet and the LAN at
the remote location. Then it is transferred to the destination over the local
PSTN.
Advantages
Cost savings for long-distance communications.
SM
1-11
H551
DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
INTERNET MAIL COMMUNICATION

2.1 INTERNET MAIL COMMUNICATION
Detailed
Descriptions
H132
2.1.1 MAIL TRANSMISSION

Sending Terminal
SMTP
Server
NIC Fax
E-mail
Router
LAN
Internet
POP
Server
NIC Fax
E-mail
Router
LAN
H132D551.WMF
Procedure
Scanned documents are sent as electronic mail (e-mail).
All messages are sent using memory transmission. When a backup mail address
(Bcc address) has been stored with the NIC Fax user settings, the machine also
sends all the messages to the Bcc address.
All e-mail transmissions are controlled using Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP)
procedures. There must be an SMTP server on the same LAN as the sending
machine, or the machine will not be able to send e-mail (it is not necessary to set
up an SMTP account).
Data Formats
The scanned data is converted into a DCX or TIFF-F formatted file (only MH
compression can be used). The file format depends on a user setting.
The fields of the e-mail and their contents are as follows:
Field
From
Reply-To
To
Bcc
X-Mailer
Subject
Content-Type
Content-Transfer-Encoding
SM
Content
Mail address of the sender
Mail address to be replied
Mail address of the destination
Backup mail address
ICFAX Version 1.0 (ICFAX is a Ricoh mail utility - IC
means Image Communication)
Fax message no. xxxx (file number) from the TSI (see the
notes below this table)
Multipart/mixed
Attached files: image/tiff, application/octet-stream
Base 64
2-1
H551

Field
Message Body
Content
MIME-converted DCX or TIFF-F (MIME standards specify
how files are attached to e-mail messages)
NOTE: 1) The message no. will exist in the subject field if no TSI or RTI is
registered.
2) The label of the personal code and RTI will appear at the end of the
subject field, if the personal code is entered.
3) The file number can be checked on the TCR/Journal.
Errors
An error report will be generated if an error occurs during the communication
between the machine and the SMTP server. However, it is possible that the sender
will not receive notice of errors that occurred between the SMTP server and the
receiving terminal.
The interval between attempts to resend mail to the same destination when an
SMTP error occurs is the same as for G3 fax transmission.
NOTE: The interval programmed with LAN switch 0A determines the minimum
required interval between mail transmissions when there are no errors.
For what happens when an error occurs when the machine is receiving, refer to the
Mail Reception section.
Results
The transmission result is listed on the TCR/Journal. The file list for e-mail
transmissions is created in the same way as for G3 memory transmissions. The
TTI for the mail message includes the word Mail at the head of the information in
the TTI column.
Selectable Options
1. With the default settings, the scan resolution can be either standard or detail.
Inch-mm conversion before tx depends on the machine setting. Detail
resolution will be used if Fine resolution, unless Fine resolution is enabled with
LAN bit switch 07.
2. The requirements for originals (document size, scan width, and memory
capacity) are the same as for G3 fax memory tx.
3. The default compression is TIFF-F format.
4. The following options are available when sending a fax by e-mail:
Personal code
Send later
TTI
Economy transmission
Partial image area scanning
Transmission deadline
Destination check
Store double sided
H551
2-2
SM
When optional features which are not available for e-mailing are selected, the
machine will work as follows.
Example: Using personal code with confidential ID in a broadcasting operation
However, if the e-mail addresses are input first, then the personal code, then the
G3 addresses, the mail will be sent to all addresses. However, personal code with
confidential ID will only be used for the G3 transmissions in the broadcast.
Cross reference:
LAN bit switch 01 - Various e-mail transmission settings
LAN bit switch 07 - Acceptable paper widths for sending
LAN bit switch 0A - Minimum interval between e-mail transmissions
SM
2-3
H551
Detailed
Descriptions
H132
If the personal code is selected first, e-mail addresses cannot be input, because
the e-mail key is disabled.
2.1.2 MAIL RECEPTION

SMTP
Server
NIC Fax
E-mail
Router
LAN
Receiving
Terminal
Internet
POP
Server
NIC Fax
E-mail
Router
LAN
H132D562.WMF
Procedure
There must be a POP (Post Office Protocol) server on the same LAN as the NIC
fax, or it cannot receive e-mail, and an account must be set up for the fax machine.
The machine calls the POP server at a regular interval to check if any e-mail has
come in (three minutes is the default interval; the interval can be adjusted from 1
minute to 60 minutes in one-minute steps).
If the POP server is holding several e-mails for the NIC fax, the machine picks up
the e-mails one at a time.
E-mail reception is done in accordance with Post Office Protocol version 3.0
(POP3) procedures.
Errors during reception

Errors during POP3 procedures
When an error of this type occurs, the machine stops receiving and the message
stays in the server. After a certain interval, the machine calls the server and starts
to receive, starting with the interrupted message. If there is an incompletely
received message in the machines memory, it will be erased.
Abnormal files
When an error of this type occurs, the machine stops receiving and commands the
server to erase the message. Then the machine prints an error report out and
sends information about the error by e-mail to the senders address (in the From
or Reply-to field of the message). If there is an incompletely received message in
the machines memory, it will be erased.
The machine prints an error message when it fails to send a message after a
certain number of attempts.
H551
2-4
SM
Abnormal files are as follows:
Header
Content-Type
Charset
Supported Types
Multipart/mixed, text/plain, message/rfc822 Image/tiff,
application/octet-stream
US-ASCII, ISO-2022-JP, Others are determined to be
US-ASCII.
Base 64, 7-bit, 8-bit
2. MIME decoding error

3. The machine cannot recognize the file format as DCX or TIFF-F.
4. The resolution, document size, or compressed type cannot be accepted.
Remaining SAF capacity error

The machine calls the server but does not receive e-mail if the remaining SAF
capacity is less than a certain value (the value depends on LAN Switch 08). The email will be received when the SAF capacity increases (for example, after
substitute reception files have been printed).
Also, if the capacity of the SAF memory goes down to zero during reception, the
machine acts in the same way as when receiving an abnormal file (refer to
Abnormal files).
Paper Size
1. The maximum paper width for a received message depends on the paper size
in the machine (max. B4). An error will occur if the received message is larger
than B4 width. The procedure is the same as when receiving an abnormal file.
2. When the machine receives a B4 document but there is only A4 and B5 paper
in the machine, the machine reduces the data automatically and prints it on A4
paper.
Printing
1. The machine detects whether it has received a DCX or a TIFF-F format image,
then prints it.
2. Text in either US-ASCII or ISO-2022-JP format can be printed. When a line of
text is longer than the paper width, the excess data will be deleted.
Multi-part
When a multi-part e-mail message contains several text parts and binary files, the
message will be divided with boundaries. Then, each part will be printed
separately. If the machine cannot determine where the boundary is, it will generate
an error report and print, then send error information e-mail back to the sender.
Cross reference:
LAN bit switch 02 - Various e-mail reception settings
SM
2-5
H551
Detailed
Descriptions
H132
1. The e-mail has an unsupported MIME header.

Supported types of MIME header
2.1.3 MAIL BROADCASTING (E-MAIL AND G3 FAX ARE

COMBINED)
G3 Transmissions
(PSTN)
NIC Fax
E-mail
transmission
E-mail Transmissions
(LAN/Internet)
SMTP
Server
LAN
H132D552.WMF
The machine can send the same message to several destinations in one operation.
Some destinations can be G3 fax and some can be e-mail. For the G3 fax
transmissions, each address has to be dialed separately. However, all the e-mail
addresses can be sent with the message to the SMTP server in one transmission.
The SMTP server then sends the message to each destination.
The following example for broadcasting to three e-mail destinations and two G3 fax
destinations shows how G3 fax messages are each sent individually, but the e-mail
destinations are all sent to the server at the same time.
Order of inputting the addresses at the operation panel
G3 fax (1) - mail (1) - G3 fax (2) - mail (2) - mail (3)
Order of transmission
G3 fax (1) - mail (1), (2), (3) - G3 fax (2)
The SMTP server cannot broadcast the message if a feature included individual
information for each terminal in the transmitted data (such as label insertion). If this
type of feature was used, the machine sends the e-mails to the server one by one.
With the default settings, up to 200 destinations (including both e-mail and G3 fax)
can be dialed for one broadcast. The maximum number of e-mail destinations in a
broadcast depends on the mail servers limits.
Cross Reference:
Bit 2 and Bits 5 to 7 of LAN bit switch 01 - Various e-mail transmission settings
Broadcasting will not work if batch transmission is disabled with user switch 06.
H551
2-6
SM
2.1.4 TRANSFER REQUEST

Operation at the Transfer Requester
Request by Mail
R: Router
SMTP
Server
NIC Fax
E-mail
Transfer
Station
LAN
POP
Server
Individual G3
Transmissions
(PSTN)
NIC Fax
E-mail
E-mail End
Receivers
Detailed
Descriptions
H132
Transfer
Requester
LAN
R
SMTP
Server
E-mail
(several destinations,
one transmission)
Individual E-mail
Transmissions
G3 End Receivers
E-mail (one transmission

for each destination)
H132D553.WMF
The requesting terminal dials the transfer station, and requests it to transfer the
message to end receivers stored as quick dials, speed dials, and group dials in the
transfer station. A quick dial number is indicated by a # and two digits, a speed
dial is indicated by #, *, and two or three digits, and a group dial is indicated by
# and ** and two digits.
The machine can request transfer to a maximum of 30 destinations for each
transfer station. The destinations can be a mixture of e-mail and G3 fax addresses.
The transfer request goes to the SMTP server as an e-mail message. The
quick/speed/group dials (and the ID code) are included in the mail body field of the
e-mail as text. The message arrives at the POP server of the transfer station.
The transfer station sends the message to the end receivers (see Operation at the
Transfer Station for details).
The transfer station sends back a transfer result report. The original may be
attached to the transfer result report, depending on the G3 settings of the fax
machine. For transmissions to e-mail end receivers, the transfer result report only
indicates whether the message was successfully transmitted from the transfer
station to its SMTP server.
When making a transfer request, the machine can send the same message to
more than one transfer station (each transfer station may transfer the message to a
maximum of 30 destinations). All addresses dialed by the requesting terminal must
be transfer stations.
SM
2-7
H551
The fields of the e-mail and their contents are as follows:

Field
Content
E-mail address of the requesting terminal
Destination address (transfer stations address)
Backup mail address
ICFAX version 1.0
Fax Message No. xxxx (file number) from theTSI
From
To
Bcc
X-Mailer
Subject
Content-Type
Multipart/mixed
Text/Plain (for a text part), image/tiff or
application/octet-stream (for attached files)
Mail body (text part)
Message body
Base 64
RELAY-ID-: xxxx (xxxx: 4 digits for an ID code)
RELAY: #01#*01#**01.
MIME-converted TIFF-F or DCX
Request by G3 Fax
G3 End Receivers
G3 Transmission (Transfer Request)

NIC FAX
Requesting
Terminal
E-mail End
Receivers
PSTN
G3 Transmission (Report)
SMTP
Server
NIC FAX
Transfer
Station
E-mail
LAN
H132D554.WMF
The procedures are the same as for a normal G3 fax machine.

The requesting terminal dials the transfer station, and requests it to transfer the
message to end receivers stored as quick dials, speed dials, and group dials in the
transfer station.
Using NSF, the machine sends an ID code and the machines own telephone
number. Up to 30 end receivers can be requested.
End receiver destinations can also be selected using tonal signals, in the same
way as for other recent fax models. E-mail address can also be selected in this
way, as end receivers and as the destination for receiving the transfer result report.
The receiving NIC fax machine receives the transfer request on the PSTN
connection. It then handles the transfer request in the same way as explained in
Request by Mail.
H551
2-8
SM
Operation at the Transfer Station

Request by Mail
Transfer
Requester
R: Router
E-mail
R
Transfer
Station
LAN
POP
Server
NIC Fax
E-mail
E-mail End
Receivers
Individual G3
Transmissions
(PSTN)
Detailed
Descriptions
H132
SMTP
Server
NIC Fax
LAN
SMTP
Server
E-mail
(several destinations,
one transmission)
Individual E-mail
Transmissions
G3 End Receivers
E-mail (one transmission

for each destination)
H132D555.WMF
The NIC fax polls the POP server at regular intervals, as mentioned in a previous
section. If a transfer request has come in, it receives the e-mail from the server,
then sends the message to the end receivers by G3 fax or e-mail, depending on
the type of end receiver address.
The NIC fax sends each G3 fax as an individual transmission. However, for the email, the NIC fax sends the message to the SMTP server once, and the server
broadcasts the message to the e-mail end receivers one at a time.
The transfer station sends back a transfer result report to the address in the From
field of the received e-mail. If an administrator's address is registered, the result
report is also sent to that address. The original may be attached to the transfer
result report, depending on the G3 settings of the fax machine.
For transmission to e-mail end receivers, the transfer result report only indicates
whether the message was successfully transmitted from the transfer station to its
SMTP server (the transfer station does not know what happens to the messages
on the way to the end receivers).
If a communication error occurs between the machine and SMTP server during
result report transmission, the machine prints the result report.
Cross reference:
LAN bit switch 03 - Transfer station settings
SM
2-9
H551
Request by Fax
G3 End Receivers
G3 Transmission (Transfer Request)

G3 FAX
Requesting
Terminal
E-mail End
Receivers
PSTN
G3 Transmission (Report)
SMTP
Server
NIC FAX
Transfer
Station
E-mail
LAN
H132D556.WMF
When the machine receives a transfer request by G3 fax, it sends the message to
the various e-mail and G3 end receivers in the same way as for a request by mail.
The machine sends back the transfer result report to the requesting terminals
telephone number, which it specified in the NSF signal. The machine prints the
result report if it cannot be sent.
The NIC Fax can accept end receiver destinations and transfer result report
destinations that were sent from the requester as DTMF tones. This applies for email or PSTN G3 addresses.
H551
2-10
SM
Transfer Result Reports for Multi-step Transfer
The bottom part of the drawing shows details of the route from Transfer Station A
back to the requesting machine.
e-mail
Requesting Terminal
(NIC Fax)
e-mail
Transfer Station A
(NIC Fax)
Transfer Station B
(NIC Fax)
e-mail
Transfer Station C
(NIC Fax)
Requesting Terminal
SMTP
Server
NIC FAX
e-mail
LAN
POP
Server
POP
Server
NIC FAX
Transfer
Station A
LAN
SMTP
Server
H132D557.WMF
The procedure is as follows.

1. The requesting terminal requests transfer station A to transfer a message.
2. Transfer station A passes the request on to transfer station B.
3. Transfer station A sends a transfer result report back to the requesting
machine.
4. Transfer station B passes the request on to transfer station C.
5. Transfer station B sends a transfer result report back to transfer station A.
6. The broadcasting station (transfer station C) sends the message to its SMTP
server (e-mails) and to the G3 destinations.
7. Transfer station C sends a transfer result report to transfer station B (for e-mail
end receivers, it only indicates whether the message was successfully passed
on to transfer station Cs SMTP server).
NOTE: The requesting machines own telephone number is not included in a
transfer request message by e-mail, so the transfer station at the end of
the chain cannot send a report back directly to the requesting machine.
The requesting terminal only receives a report of how the communication
went between transfer stations A and B.
SM
2-11
H551
Detailed
Descriptions
H132
If All Links are by Mail

After it has passed on the transfer request to the next transfer station, each transfer
station sends a transfer result report back to the previous transfer station in the
chain by e-mail.
If Some Links are G3 Fax

This example shows that even if there is only one e-mail link in the chain, the
transfer result report from the final transfer station cannot get back to the
requesting terminal.
(The bottom part of the drawing shows details of the route from Transfer Station A
back to the requesting machine.)
Requesting Machine
(G3 Fax)
PSTN
Transfer Station A
(NIC Fax)
e-mail
Transfer Station B
(NIC Fax)
PSTN
Transfer Station C
(NIC Fax)
Requesting Machine
PSTN
G3 Fax
Transfer result
report (G3 tx)
SMTP
Server
NIC Fax
Transfer
Station A
LAN
H132D558.WMF
The procedure is exactly the same as for a request by e-mail, as described on the
previous page.
However, if there are two or more consecutive PSTN links in the chain, the transfer
station at the end of the PSTN chain will be able to send a transfer result report
back to the machine at the start of the PSTN chain.
For example, if only the link between transfer stations B and C is e-mail, transfer
station B will be able to send a report all the way back to the requesting terminal.
H551
2-12
SM
Example of a Transfer Request and Result Report
NIC Fax 1
PSTN
Error mail
E-mail Server 1
(SMTP/POP)
Router
[B]
LAN
[A]
Detailed
Descriptions
H132
G3 FAX 1
Japan
Internet
[D] Transfer result e-mail
Error mail
[C]
Europe
LAN
G3 Fax 2
NIC Fax 2
PSTN
Router
E-mail Server 2
(SMTP/POP)
H132D559.WMF
The steps of the transfer request are as follows:

1. G3 Fax 1 sends a transfer request to NIC Fax 1 by G3 fax (
in the diagram).
in the diagram).
E-mail Server 1 sends e-mail to E-mail server 2 ( in the diagram).
E-mail server 2 sends e-mail to NIC Fax 2 ( in the diagram).
2. NIC Fax 1 sends e-mail to E-mail Server 1 (

3.
4.
NOTE: Steps 2 to 4 assume that NIC Fax 1 sends the transfer request to NIC Fax
2 by e-mail, and not G3 fax.
5.
NIC Fax 2 sends a G3 fax message to G3 Fax 2 (
in the diagram).
The steps for sending the transfer result report and any mail reporting errors is as
follows:
1. NIC Fax 1 sends a transfer result report [A] to G3 Fax 1 after
in the diagram.
2. When an error occurs at , e-mail server 1 sends e-mail reporting an error [B]
to NIC Fax 1. Error mail is also sent to the administrator if the address has
been registered in NIC Fax 1.
3. When an error occurs at , e-mail server 2 sends e-mail reporting an error [C]
to NIC Fax 1. Error mail [C] is also sent to the administrator if the address has
been registered in NIC Fax 1.
4. NIC Fax 2 send a transfer result report [D] to NIC Fax 1 through e-mail server 1
and e-mail server 2 after transferring the message to the end receivers (after
in the diagram).
SM
2-13
H551
2.1.5 AUTOROUTING
G3 Transmission with SUB code
G3 Fax
PSTN
SMTP
Server
NIC Fax
Forwarding by
e-mail
LAN
H132D560.WMF
When a G3 fax message is received with a SUB code (four digits), the machine
compares the SUB code with the personal codes stored in the machine with e-mail
addresses. If there is a match, the machine routes the message to that e-mail
address by e-mail.
A communication failure report will be printed if a transmission error occurs
between the machine and the SMTP server.
Conditions
1. E-mail addresses for autorouting must be registered in the machine with
personal codes. (One e-mail address can be stored with each personal code.)
2. Confidential reception does not work if a SUB code is received.
3. The RTI or CSI of the forwarding machine is indicated in the subject field of the
forwarded e-mail. The format is Fax Message N.xxxx from RTI (or CSI).
Cross Reference:
LAN bit switch 04 - Autoroute
H551
2-14
SM
- Example G3 Transmission
[A]
G3 Fax
PSTN
SMTP
Server
Detailed
Descriptions
H132
SUB code: 1111
NIC FAX
Personal Code 1111:
a b c @ ricoh.com
e-mail
LAN
Client
PC
E-mail address:
a b c @ ricoh.com
H132D561.WMF
1. The sending terminal sends a fax message [A] with a SUB code 1111 to the
NIC Fax.
2. The NIC Fax finds the same code among the personal codes, makes an e-mail
out of the message, then sends the e-mail to the address registered with the
personal code.
SM
2-15
H551
LAN FAX TRANSMISSION
2.2 LAN FAX TRANSMISSION

PC fax application
installed
Client
PC
G3 Transmission
Request to
send fax
NIC Fax
PSTN
LAN
e-mail
SMTP
Server
With the LAN Fax feature, a client PC on the same network can send a G3 fax to
the NIC Fax using the LAN and ask it to send the fax by G3 or by e-mail. PC fax
software must be installed on the PC.
The client PC can not receive G3 fax messages through the NIC Fax.
1. Required hardware and software - the Com Redirector utility can only work with
the following (Com Redirector is a Ricoh utility; it is explained later in this
section)
1) Hardware
IBM PC/AT compatible, running Windows 95
2) Acceptable fax software
Windows 95 standard fax application (MS-FAX)
Bitware 3.25.05 (Cheyenne)
Bitware 3.30f (Cheyenne)
Win Fax Pro 4.0&7.0 (Delrina)
Sopwith 1.1(4)
WinFax 4.04 (BVRP)
2. Operation
1) Com Redirector must be installed in the client PC.
2) Quick dials, speed dials, and group dials registered in the NIC Fax and
numbers stored in the PC fax application can be used as destinations.
3) E-mail addresses in the quick dials, speed dials, and group dials can be
used.
4) When the PC fax application dials 0000, the NIC Fax prints the message
instead of transmitting it (this is the 200-dpi printing feature, also known as
Convenient Printing).
5) Communication failure reports and TCRs/Journals printed by the machine
cannot be delivered to a PC.
6) The range of client PCs that can use the NIC Fax can be controlled by
programming the Access Control and Access Mask parameters. These are
user and service adjustments. If 0.0.0.0 is stored as the Access Control
setting, any PC can use the NIC Fax for a LAN Fax operation.
7) Two PCs can connect to the machine at the same time. The third PC will
receive a busy signal from the machine.
H551
2-16
SM
LAN FAX TRANSMISSION
1) Install IC Fax Port using the Windows 95 hardware wizard.

2) Connect IC Fax Port to a COM port using the modem properties settings. An
appropriate COM port is selected automatically.
Cross Reference:
LAN bit switch 06 - LAN Fax settings
LAN bit switch 09 - LAN Fax settings
SM
2-17
H551
Detailed
Descriptions
H132
3. Com Redirector
The fax message made by the PC fax application is sent to a COM port in the
PC and routed to the NIC Fax over the LAN by the Com Redirector utility. The
user must do the following to install Com Redirector in a Windows 95 system.
IC FAX APPLICATION UTILITIES
2.3 IC FAX APPLICATION UTILITIES

The IC Fax Application is bundled with the machine. It includes the following
utilities: IC Fax Monitor, Com Redirector and IC Viewer.
Com Redirector was discussed in the LAN Fax Transmission section. The others
are explained below.

With this utility, the status of the machine can be monitored at a client PC, and
some user data can be programmed.
Status items that can be monitored
Whether the machine is connected to a LAN or not
Whether one of the machines covers is open
Whether paper has run out
Whether toner has run out
Confirmation of a Tx and rx.
TCR/Journal
Files in a memory
LAN parameters
User data that can be programmed
Quick dials
Speed dials
Group dials
Personal codes
Addresses for memory forwarding
The utility has a user mode and an administrator mode. A password is needed to
enter administrator mode. User mode can be used to view the data, but to program
the data and back it up to a PC, administrator mode must be used.
2.3.2 IC VIEWER
The fax message file attached to an e-mail message is in either TIFF-F or DCX
format. It can be opened, edited, and saved with the viewer software.
H551
2-18
SM
IMAGE DATA PATH
2.4 IMAGE DATA PATH

2.4.1 TIFF-F FORMAT
NIC
FCE
[D]
QPCR30
Memory
[C]
QPCR30
TIFF-F [A]
Compression
and
Decompression
Module
DCR
Buffer
Line
Buffer
SAF
Software
[B]
Detailed
Descriptions
H132
Reception
[E]
MH
BITMAP
MMR
H132D564.WMF
The software module [A] receives TIFF-F data from the memory [B] on the NIC
board. After decompression, the directory information for the data (resolution, file
size) and image data are transfered to the DCR buffer [C] in blocks. The data is
then MH compressed.
The MH compressed image data in the DCR buffer is decompressed to bitmap
data in the QPCR30 [D] and transfered to the line buffer [E]. The data is MMR
compressed in the QPCR30 then stored in the SAF.
SM
2-19
H551
IMAGE DATA PATH
Transmission
NIC
FCE
QPCR30
QPCR30
DCR
Buffer
Line
Buffer
SAF
Software
Memory
TIFF-F
Compression
and
Decompression
Module
MH
BITMAP
MMR
H132D565.WMF
Data from the SAF data is decompressed into bitmap data in the QPCR30 and
stored in the line buffer. Then, it is MH compressed in the QPCR30 and transfered
to the DCR buffer.
The software module makes a TIFF-F formatted file with directory information from
the image data, then transfers this file to the memory on the NIC board.
NOTE: The TIFF (Tagged Image File Format) was developed by Aldus and
Microsoft as an extensible common file format for the exchange of image
files.
In order to increase the portability of TIFF files, various classes of TIFF
files have been defined in order to clarify the requirements of readers and
writers to ensure compatibility.
Class F TIFF files are used for the exchange of fax images and are a
subset of Class B (bi-level or black & white) TIFF images.
MH, MR, and MMR compressions can be used to make a TIFF-F file. This
machine uses MH compression.
H551
2-20
SM
IMAGE DATA PATH
2.4.2 DCX FORMAT

Reception
FCE
QPCR30
[A]
DCX
Compression
and
Decompression
Module
Memory
Line
Buffer
SAF
Software
[B]
[C]
BITMAP
MMR
[D]
H132D566.WMF
The software module [A] receives DCX data from the memory [B] on the NIC
board. The DCX file is divided into PCX images (one PCX image for each page).
The data is decompressed into bitmap data, then transferred to the line buffer [C].
The data is MMR compressed in the QPCR30, and stored in the SAF [D].
Transmission
NIC
FCE
QPCR30
Line
Buffer
SAF
Software
Memory
DCX
Compression
and
Decompression
Module
BITMAP
MMR
H132D567.WMF
Data from the SAF is decompressed into bitmap format in the QPCR30, and stored
in the line buffer. The software module makes PCX and DCX data and headers
and transfers these to the memory on the NIC board.
NOTE: The DCX format was developed by Microsoft. It is an enhancement to the
PCX format which allows multi-page images.
SM
2-21
H551
Detailed
Descriptions
H132
NIC
NIC BOARD
2.5 NIC BOARD

Data Bus CD (0-15)
CPU
MC68340PV16
16.777MHz
EPROM
4 Mbits
Address Bus AD (0-20)
DD (0-15)
DRAM
XA (2-15)
FCE
D (0-7)
MA (0-9)
Data Bus CD (0-15)
ASIC
Gate Array
MBCG24243
Address Bus SA (0-19)
XA (2-17)
FCE
I/F
XD (16-31)
SA (1-3)
PROM
32 words x 8
bits
PRDB (0-7)
LAN Controller
Am79C960
LAN I/F
Connector
LAN
H132D503.WMF
The NIC controls protocols for communication with a LAN and for handshaking with
the FCE. The NIC also converts data to a MIME format for e-mail.
CPU (MC68340) : 32-bit CPU to control the NIC board.
DRAM : 16-Mbit DRAM for main memory.
EPROM : 4-Mbit EPROM for the software.
LAN Controller (Am79C960) : LAN interface
H551
2-22
SM
NIC BOARD
- Signal Table -
SM
Signal
+24 V
+24 V
/MRD
/MWRL
D1
D3
D5
D7
A0
A2
A4
A6
A8
A10
A13
/G4CS
/INTG4
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
/RESET
N.C
N.C
Remarks
+24 V
+24 V
Read
Write
Data Bus
Address Bus
Chip Select
Interrupt
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
RESET
Not connected
Not connected
2-23
Pin Address
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
B16
B17
B18
B19
B20
B21
B22
B23
B24
B25
Signal
COM1
COM1
NC
D0
D2
D4
D8
COM1
A1
A3
A5
A7
A9
A12
A14
N.C
COM1
/DPWAT
N.C
N.C
COM1
N.C
A11
COM1
N.C
Remarks
GND
GND
Not connected
Data Bus
GND
Address Bus
Not connected
GND
Wait
Not connected
Not connected
GND
Not connected
Address 11
GND
Not connected
H551
Detailed
Descriptions
H132
Pin Address
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
A18
A19
A20
A21
A22
A23
A24
A25
INSTALLATION
Rev. 9/21/98
3. INSTALLATION
3.1 INSTALLING THE NIC FAX BOARD
Before installing the NIC FAX Board:
1. Obtain a copy of the completed "Configuration Sheet for H132-41
Internet Fax" Form from the User's Network Administrator because the
User's LAN information must be programmed into the machine. Refer to
the sample form on page Appendix C-1.
3. Print out the lists of user-programmed items and the system parameter
list.
3.1.1 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

1. Remove the rear cover [A] (4 screws),
and the left cover [B] (3 screws and the
PFU connector cover. Then remove the
small cover [C] from the rear cover as
shown.
[A]
[B]
[C]
H143I501.WMF
[D]
2. Remove the PIF brackets [D] and [E].
Bend the flat cable [F] as shown and
connect it to the FCE (CN4) and the
interface board [G].
NOTE: Make sure that the core [H] is
placed by the FCE as shown.
Make sure that the w marks
face each other at each end.
[E]
[F]
[G]
[H]
H551I009.WMF
SM
3-1
H551
Installation
H132
CAUTION
INSTALLING THE NIC FAX BOARD
3. Attach the inner bracket [I] (3 screws) and

the grounding plate [J] (3 screws) as
shown.
[I]
[J]
H551I505.WMF
4. Connect the LAN board [K] to the interface

board [G]. Then, secure the LAN board to
the machine with 2 screws and the
support holder [L] (1 tapping screw).
[K]
[G]
[L]
H551I011.WMF
[D]
5. Re-install the PIF brackets [D] and [E]
which were removed in step 2.
Attach the ground plate [M] to the outer
bracket [N]. Then attach the outer bracket
to the machine (5 screws).
NOTE: Align the ground plate with the left
edge of the outer bracket.
[E]
[N]
[M
H551I005.WMF
H551
3-2
SM
6. Re-install the rear cover and the left

cover.
NOTE: Make sure that the grounding
plate does not come off when
replacing the rear cover.
H551I510.WMF
8. Download the new software to the
machine.
(Refer to the H551 service manual,
page 4-13 for details.)
Mount the EPROMs packaged with the optional unit with part numbers in
ascending order from sockets 1 to 4.
NOTE: Print out the RAM dump for the following addresses before
downloading the new software. Refer to the H551 service manual, page 4-5.
480800 (H) to 480806 (H): Print top margin
48080B (H) to 480811 (H): Print left margin
This is because the machine will automatically perform the RAM reset level 1
immediately after downloading the new software.
9. Reprogram the following items.
Clock
Print top margin and print left margin in the above RAM addresses
10. Attach the core to the LAN cable as
shown and connect the LAN cable to
the machine.
11. Perform the initial settings with service

function 20. Refer to section 3.2 Initial
Settings.
SM
3-3
H551
Installation
H132
7. Attach three decals as shown.
Rev. 01/00

cover.
NOTE: Print out the RAM dump for

the following addresses before downloading the new software. Refer to
the H551 service manual, page 4-5.
480800 (H) to 480806 (H): Print top
H551I510.WMF
margin 48080B (H) to 480811 (H):
Print left margin. This is because the
machine will automatically perform
the RAM reset level 1 immediately after downloading the new software.
8. Download the new software to the machine. (Refer to the H551 service manual,
page 4-13 for details.) Mount the EPROMs packaged with the optional unit with
part numbers in ascending order from sockets 1 to 4.
NOTE: RDS (Remote Diagnostics System) can be used to read the H551s
programmed dial data and write it back to the machine after the RAM reset level 1
occurs. RDS must be enabled locally at the H551 by using the On/Off Switches
(Function 62) or by changing System Switch 02 bit 7 to 1. RDS cannot be used to
read system data (counters, bit switches, RTI, TTI, CSI, etc.) and write back to the
H551.

Clock
the machine.

Settings.
SM
3-3
H551
Installation
H132
INITIAL SETTINGS
3.2 INITIAL SETTINGS

3.2.1 PROGRAMMING ITEMS
NOTE: NOTE: Make sure that the following items are registered in the mail server
before installation. The information listed below must be obtained from the
User's Network Administrator.
IP address
Host name
Mail account and the password
Items to Program
IP address
Subnet mask
Default gateway
Access control
Access mask
SMTP server
POP server
Host name
Mail address
Domain name
Login name
Login password
Administrator mail address
Backup mail address
Programmable Functions
User Function 61/Service Function 20
Service Function 20/IC Fax Monitor
Remarks
Voluntary
Voluntary
Voluntary
Voluntary
Voluntary
Voluntary
NOTE: NOTE: When the machine is installed as a standalone fax because the
mail server is not ready, program the only the following items.
IP address: 127. 0. 0. 1
POP Server: NULL (nothing to input)
H551
3-4
SM
INITIAL SETTINGS
Rev. 01/00

NOTE: Make sure that the following items are registered in the mail server before
installation. The information listed below must be obtained from the User's
Network Administrator.
IP address
Host name
Items to Program
IP address
Subnet mask
Default gateway
Access control
Access mask
SMTP server
POP server
Host name
Mail address
Domain name

Login name
Login password
Backup mail address

Remarks
Optional
Optional
Optional
* See Note 2
Optional
* See Note 2
Optional
Optional
NOTE: 1. If the machine is installed as a standalone fax, or if the mail server is not
ready, program only the following items.
IP address: 127. 0. 0. 1
NOTE: 2. Depending on the Mail Server, these items may be mandatory. If
mandatory, the host name and domain name must be spelled correctly.
H551
3-4
SM
INITIAL SETTINGS
3.2.2 INITIAL PROGRAMMING

To enter the LAN initial program mode, press the following sequence of keys.
then immediately
NO: _ OR NO
02PARA.LIST
04SVC MONITOR
SERVICE SET
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE
H132I501.WMF
.
NO: _
LAN TEST
0.LAN SWITCH
2.LOOP BACK
Press
1.LINK
3.LAN
H132I502.WMF
.
IP Address
YES
TO SET
NO
TO CANCEL
PREVIOUS
NEXT
H132I503.WMF
Storing the IP (Internet Protocol)

address
IP Address
1. After entering the LAN initial program

mode, press .
YES
TO END
.
H132I504.WMF
2. Input the IP address.

If the address is less than 3 digits,
press
to scroll to the next column.
Press Clear to delete one digit.
Press
to delete all digits.
3.

222
222

Then .
Press to exit the service mode. Storing the Subnet Mask
IP Address
222
YES TO END
. 222
H132I505.WMF
Storing the Subnet Mask

mode, scroll through the program
items
with
or

SUBNET MASK
YES
NO
TO SET
TO CANCEL
PREVIOUS
NEXT
H132I506.WMF
SM
3-5
H551
Installation
H132
Then press
INITIAL SETTINGS
2. Press
.
SUBNET MASK
YES
TO END
.
H132i507.wmf
3. Input the subnet mask.

press
to scroll to the next
column.
Then press .
SUBNET MASK
YES
255 .
255 .
255 .
TO END
0
H132I508.WMF
Storing the Default Gateway

items with
or .

2. Press
DEFAULT GATEWAY
YES TO SET
NO TO CANCEL
PREVIOUS
NEXT
H132I509.WMF
.
DEFAULT GATEWAY
TO END
YES
.
H132I510.WMF
3. Input the default gateway.

press
Then press .
DEFAULT GATEWAY
YES
222 .
222 .
222 .
TO END
222
H132I511.WMF
Storing the Access Control

items with
or .

2. Press
ACCESS CONTROL
YES
TO SET
TO CANCEL
NO
PREVIOUS
NEXT
H132I512.WMF
.
ACCESS CONTROL
YES
TO END
.
H132I513.WMF
H551
3-6
SM
INITIAL SETTINGS
3. Input the access control.

press
Then press .
ACCESS CONTROL
YES
222 .
222 .
0 .
TO END
0
H132I514.WMF
Storing the Access Mask

items with
or .

PREVIOUS
NEXT
H132I515.WMF
.
ACCESS MASK
YES
TO END
.
H132I516.WMF
3. Input the access mask.

press
Then press .
ACCESS MASK
YES
222 .
222 .
0 .
TO END
0
H132I517.WMF
Storing the SMTP(Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) Server

items with
or .

2. Press
SMTP SERVER
YES TO SET
TO CANCEL
NO
PREVIOUS
NEXT
H132I518.WMF
.
SMTP SERVER
YES
TO END
.
H132I519.WMF
3. Input the SMTP server.

press
Then press .
SMTP SERVER
YES
222 .
222 .
0 .
TO END
0
H132I520.WMF
SM
3-7
H551
Installation
H132
2. Press
ACCESS MASK
TO SET
YES
TO CANCEL
NO
INITIAL SETTINGS
Storing the POP (Post Office Protocol) Server

items with
or .

2. Press
POP SERVER
TO SET
YES
TO CANCEL
NO
PREVIOUS
NEXT
H132I521.WMF
.
POP SERVER
YES
TO END
.
H132I522.WMF
3. Input the POP server.

press
Then press .
POP SERVER
YES
222 .
222 .
0 .
TO END
0
H132I523.WMF
Storing the Host Name

items with
or .

HOST NAME
YES
TO SET
TO CANCEL
NO
PREVIOUS
NEXT
H132I524.WMF
2. Press
.
HOST NAME
H132I525.WMF
3. Input the host name. Then press
.
HOST NAME
NIC FAX
H132I526.WMF
Storing the Mail Address

items with
or .

Mail ADDRESS
TO SET
YES
TO CANCEL
NO
PREVIOUS
NEXT
H132I527.WMF
H551
3-8
SM
INITIAL SETTINGS
2. Press
.
Mail ADDRESS
H132I528.WMF
3. Input the mail address. Then press

.
Mail ADDRESS
nicfax@ricoh.co.jp
H132I529.WMF

items with
or .

DOMAIN NAME
YES TO SET
TO CANCEL
NO
PREVIOUS
NEXT
H132I530.WMF
2. Press
.
DOMAIN NAME
H132I531.WMF
3. Input the domain name. Then press

.
DOMAIN NAME
ricoh.co.jp
H132I532.WMF
Storing the Login Name

items with
or .

LOGIN NAME
TO SET
YES
TO CANCEL
NO
PREVIOUS
NEXT
H132I533.WMF
2. Press
.
LOGIN NAME
H132I534.WMF
SM
3-9
H551
Installation
H132
Storing the Domain Name
INITIAL SETTINGS
3. Input the login name. Then press
.
LOGIN NAME
NICFAX
H132I535.WMF
Storing the Login Password

items with
or .

LOGIN PASSWORD
TO SET
YES
NO
TO CANCEL
PREVIOUS
NEXT
H132I536.WMF
2. Press
.
LOGIN PASSWORD
H132I537.WMF
3. Input the login password. Then press

.
LOGIN PASSWORD
password
H132I538.WMF
Storing the Administrator Mail Address

items with
or .

ADMIN.Mail ADDRESS
YES TO SET
TO CANCEL
NO
PREVIOUS
NEXT
H132I539.WMF
2. Press
.
ADMIN.Mail ADDRESS
H132I540.WMF
3. Input the administrator mail address.

Then press .
ADMIN.Mail ADDRESS
admin@ricoh.co.jp
H132I541.WMF
H551
3-10
SM
INITIAL SETTINGS
Storing the Backup Mail Address

items with
or .

BACKUP Mail ADDRESS

TO SET
PREVIOUS
YES
TO CANCEL
NEXT
NO
H132I542.WMF
2. Press
.
BACKUP Mail ADDRESS
3. Input the backup mail address.

Then press .
Installation
H132
H132I543.WMF
BACKUP Mail ADDRESS

backup@ricoh.co.jp
H132I544.WMF
SM
3-11
H551
INITIAL CHECK
3.3 INITIAL CHECK

Perform the following procedures for the initial check after installation.
3.3.1 CHECKING THE LEDS

Check that the orange (LED1) and the green (LED2) LEDs light when the LAN
cable is connected after the machine is turned on.
If either (or both) LEDs do not light, the following conditions may be causing a
problem.
The orange LED does not light:
The LAN board may be defective or it may not be connected to the interface
board.
The green LED does not light:
The LAN cable may not be connected to a HUB.
The LAN cable may be defective.
The LAN board may be defective or if may not be connected to the interface
board.
3.3.2 LINK CHECK

The Link Check checks the link pulse communication between the machine (LAN
board) and the HUB. If the link pulse is correctly received from the HUB, the
machine displays OK.

1. Enter the LAN service mode.

then
immediately
Then press
.
NO: _
1.LINK CHECK
3.LAN PARA.
LAN TEST
0.LAN SWITCH
2.LOOP BACK

H132I502.WMF
2. Press
.
LAN LINK CHECK

PRESS "START"
H132I545.WMF
3. Press
.
LAN LINK CHECK

OK!!
H132I546.WMF
If NG is displayed, follow the troubleshooting procedures in section 5.
H551
3-12
SM
INITIAL CHECK
3.3.3 LOOP BACK TEST

This mode checks the internal status of the LAN board.

1. Enter the LAN service mode.

then
immediately
Then press
.
LAN TEST
0.LAN SWITCH
2.LOOP BACK

NO:
1.LINK CHECK
3.LAN PARA.
H132I502.WMF
.
3. Press
.
LAN LOOP BACK

PRESS "START"
H132I547.WMF
LAN LOOP BACK

RESULT CODE = 0000
H132I548.WMF
If the result shows any codes other than 0000, follow the troubleshooting
procedures in section 5.
If the results of all the tests are successful, test the communication with the server
by sending mail from the machine back to the machines own address.
SM
3-13
H551
Installation
H132
2. Press
SERVICE TABLES


In this section, frequently used keys are referred to with the following symbols.
- Start key
- Stop key
- Function key
- Yes key
- No key
- Up arrow key
- Down arrow key
- Right arrow key
- Left arrow key
4.1.1 LAN BIT SWITCH PROGRAMMING (FUNCTION 20)
then

SERVICE SET
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE
immediately
2.
NO: _ OR NO
02PARA. LIST
04SVC MONITOR
H132M501.WMF

NO: _
LAN TEST
0.LAN SWITCH
3.
1.LINK CHECK
2.LOOP BACK
3.LAN PARA.
H132M502.WMF
LAN SWITCH
DEFAULT : 00000000
SWITCH00: 00000000
H132M503.WMF


Example: Display bit switch 3:
LAN SWITCH
x3
DEFAULT : 00000001
SWITCH03: 00000001
H132M504.WMF

press
6. Either:
Finish -
LAN SWITCH
DEFAULT : 00000001
SWITCH03: 10000001
H132M505.WMF

SM
4-1
H551
Service
Tables
H132
1.
4.1.2 LINK CHECK (FUNCTION 20)

This test checks the connection from terminal to HUB.
1.
2.
then
immediately
SERVICE SET
NO: _ OR
01BIT SW.
02PARA. LIST
03ERROR CODE
04SVC MONITOR
NO
H132M501.WMF

NO: _
LAN TEST
0.LAN SWITCH
1.LINK CHECK
2.LOOP BACK
3.LAN PARA.
H132M502.WMF
3.
LAN LINK CHECK

PRESS "START"
H132M506.WMF
4. To start a test:
OK!!.
If test is unsuccessful, the display
shows NG!!. :
Check the cable connection.
Replace the cable.
H551
4-2
LAN LINK CHECK

"NG"
H132M507.WMF
SM
4.1.3 LOOP BACK TEST (FUNCTION 20)

This test checks the connection of the FCE and the Network Interface Card (NIC).
2.
3.
then
immediately
SERVICE SET
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE
H132M501.WMF

LAN TEST
0.LAN SWITCH
2.LOOP BACK
NO: _
1.LINK CHECK
3.LAN PARA.
H132M502.WMF
LAN LOOP BACK

PRESS "START"
H132M508.WMF
4. To start a test:
RESULT CODE= 0000.
If test is unsuccessful, the display
shows RESULT CODE= XXXX
(excluding 0000).
Reinstall the NIC.
Replace the NIC or FCE.
SM
NO: _ OR NO
02PARA. LIST
04SVC MONITOR
4-3
LAN LOOP BACK

TEST RUNNING WAIT
H132M509.WMF
H551
Service
Tables
H132
1.
4.1.4 LAN PARAMETERS (FUNCTION 20)

1.
2.
then
immediately
NO: _ OR NO
02PARA. LIST
04SVC MONITOR
SERVICE SET
01BIT SW.
03ERROR CODE
H132M501.WMF

NO: _
LAN TEST
0.LAN SWITCH
2.LOOP BACK
3.
1.LINK CHECK
3.LAN PARA.
H132M502.WMF
IP ADDRESS
YES

or .
To change a value, enter the new value
at the keypad, then press
TO SET
NO
TO CANCEL
PREVIOUS
NEXT
H132M510.WMF
IP ADDRESS
YES
TO END
.
H132M511.WMF
Ask the LAN administrator for the LAN parameters below.

Items to program
IP ADDRESS
SUBNET MASK
DEFAULT GATEWAY
ACCESS CONTROL
ACCESS MASK
SMTP SERVER
POP SERVER
HOST NAME
E-mail ADDRRESS
DOMAIN NAME
LOGIN NAME
LOGIN PASSWORD
ADMIN. E-mail ADDRESS
BACKUP E-mail ADDRESS
5. To finish :
H551
Comments
IP address: xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
Subnet mask: xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
Default gateway: xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
Restriction on communication for LAN FAX:
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
Restriction on communication of LAN FAX:
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
SMTP server IP address: xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
POP server IP address: xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
Host name of this terminal.
E-mail address of this terminal: xxx@xxx.xxx
Domain name
Login name of this terminal.
Login password
Administrators e-mail address: xxx@xxx.xxx
E-mail address to backup for sending: all e-mails
.
4-4
SM
LAN SWITCHES
4.2 LAN SWITCHES
WARNING
Do not adjust a LAN switch that is described as "Not used," as this may
such as Japan.
NOTE: Default settings for bit switches are not listed in this manual. Refer to the
System Parameter List print out.
Not Used (Do not change the factory settings.)
LAN Switch 01 E-mail Transmission

No
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
Tx e-mail file format
Use the DCX setting when sending to an
internet fax model that does not use TIFF-F
0: DCX
0 1: TIFF-F
(these will be earlier models, introduced before
standardization). It is also possible to change
this setting with the IC Fax Monitor utility.
Compression modes for
This bit is effective only when TIFF-F is selected
TIFF-F
as the tx e-mail file format (LAN switch 01, bit 0).
RTC is added to the end of the image data when
1 0: TIFF-F(MH) standard mode
bit 1 is set to 1. A few non-standard models
1: T.4-MH mode
may require this bit to be at 1 for successful
communication.
Inclusion on the Journal of the This bit is effective only when user parameter
number of e-mail addresses in switch 06, bit 0 is set to 1.
2 a broadcast
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
3-4 Not used
Do not change these settings.
Maximum number of broadcast The maximum number of broadcast destinations
destinations
also depends on the SMTP server.
Bit 7 6 5 Setting
0 0 0
200
0 0 1
150
5-7
0 1 0
100
0 1 1
50
1 0 0
30
1 0 1
10
1 1 0
5
1 1 1
0 (Disabled)
SM
4-5
H551
Service
Tables
H132
LAN Switch 00
LAN SWITCHES
LAN Switch 02 E-mail Reception
No
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
Text e-mail header
The header appears as follows:
************** E-mail INFORMATION *************
0: Disabled
0 1: Printed
From: xxxxx
Subject: xxxxxxxxxxx
****************************************************
Action when printing a fax
Note that the text part of the error report e-mail
image file attached to an error is always printed out completely, regardless of
the setting of this bit.
1 report e-mail
0: Print the first page only
1: Print all pages
2-7 Not used
LAN Switch 03 Transfer Request
No
FUNCTION
Printout of the message when
the machine is acting as a
0 transfer station
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
transmission
1 0: Always transmitted
1: Only transmitted if an error
occurs
Action taken if there is a syntax
error in one or more of the
destination addresses
2
0: Transfers to correct
destinations
1: All destinations aborted
Polling ID required for transfer
0: Polling ID required
3
1: Polling ID not required
4-7
Not used
COMMENTS
1: After broadcasting, the machine prints out the
file.
1: The machine will only send back a Transfer

result report if there were errors during
communication.
1: When a programmed end receiver destination

is not a valid e-mail address or otherwise
incorrect, the machine will not transfer to any
destinations.
0: If polling ID does not match the other

terminal, the machine will not execute the
transfer.
1: The machine will not check the polling ID.
LAN Switch 04 Autorouting and Forwarding

No
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
Treatment of file with incorrect 1: If the machine receives a routing ID that is not
routing ID when a routing
programmed, the machine rejects the
reception.
request is received
0
0: Received and printed
1: Rejected
H551
4-6
SM
LAN SWITCHES
LAN Switch 05 Utility Software

No
FUNCTION
Programmed data editing and
deleting by utility software
0: Disabled
0 1: Enabled
1-7
Not used
COMMENTS
If this bit is changed, the machine must be
turned off and on to make the new setting
effective.
0: The PC utilities cannot be used to change the
programmed data
1: Programmed data can be changed, but only
from the administrator mode.
LAN Switch 06 LAN Fax Transmission

No
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
1: The machine uses the own telephone
CSI transmission (LAN Fax)
number programmed in the PC fax
0 0: Programmed CSI
application.
1: Dial ATD number
0: If a printer error/busy condition occurs, the
Treatment of files if there is a
machine stores the data in SAF. After
printer error (PC printing)
recovery, the machine prints the data.
1 0: Store the file in the in SAF
1: Send an error/busy signal to
the PC
Treatment of files with errors
An error during PC fax communication indicates
(LAN Fax)
a SAF memory overflow or PC-fax disconnection
during communication.
2 0: Send good data (before
errors)
1: Delete the file
SM
4-7
H551
Service
Tables
H132
LAN Switch 04 Autorouting and Forwarding

No
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
1: When a SMTP server error occurs during
Treatment of file when a
communication error occurs
routing, the machine deletes the file after
printing it. It then sends an error notification
1 during routing
by e-mail.
0: Printed and then cleared
1: Cleared
Treatment of file with incorrect 1: When the destination programmed with the
personal code is blank, not a valid e-mail
routing destination
2
address, or otherwise incorrect, the routing
0: Printed
machine rejects the reception.
1: Rejected
Which RTI/CSI is passed on to This determines which RTI/CSI appears in the
subject of the received e-mail at the destination
the receiving PC in the e-mail
subject during autorouting and PC.
forwarding.
3
0: Received in the e-mail from
the sender
1: Stored in the receiving
machine
4-7 Not used
LAN SWITCHES
LAN Switch 06 LAN Fax Transmission
No
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
Treatment of files with errors
An error during PC fax printing indicates a SAF
(PC printing)
memory overflow or PC-fax disconnection during
3
0: Print file without error pages printing.
1: Delete the file
1: User parameter switch 06 bit 0 must also be
Batch transmission
enabled to perform this function
4 0: Disabled
1: Enabled
5-7 Not used
LAN Switch 07
No
FUNCTION
Attached file width (Tx)
Bit 1 0 Setting
0 0 A3, B4, A4, LT, DLT
0-1
0 1 B4, A4, LT
1 0 A4, LT
1 1 Not used
Transmission attached file
resolution
Bit 1 0 Setting
0 0 200 x 400, 200 x 200,
2-3
200 x 100
0 1 200 x 200, 200 x 200
1 0 200 x 200
1 1 Not used
4-7 Not used
COMMENTS
If the document is larger than this setting, the
machine automatically reduces it.
If the user selects a higher resolution than

enabled with this setting, the machine
automatically converts the file to the highest
resolution that is currently enabled.
LAN Switch 08
No
FUNCTION
Amount of remaining memory
0-7 below which e-mail reception
from the server is disabled
COMMENTS
00 to FF (Hex), unit 2 kbytes
(e.g., 0C (H) = 24 kbytes)
LAN Switch 09
No
FUNCTION
Amount of remaining memory
0-7 below which LAN fax
communication is disabled
COMMENTS
00 to FF (Hex), unit 2 kbytes
(e.g., 0C (H) = 24 kbytes)
LAN Switch 0A
No
FUNCTION
Minimum interval between
0-3 accessing the server for
sending
H551
COMMENTS
01 to 0F (Hex), unit 2 s
This is the minimum interval between
transmissions.
4-8
SM
LAN SWITCHES
LAN Switch 0B
No
FUNCTION
Acceptance of 8-bit text data
(e-mail) without generating an
error report
0
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
Command time out for LAN

Fax transmission
0: 30 second
1: 60 second
LAST command sending to the
POP server
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
Decipherment of e-mail
described as Quoted-Printable
0: One-byte codes
1: Two-byte codes
3
4-7
Not used
COMMENTS
01 ~ 15 (Hex) times
Interval between accessing server attempts
while re-sending.
COMMENTS
0: Japanese text is 8-bit. If this is received by a
non-Japanese system, it will appear as
garbage, but no error will be generated.
1: When the machine receives 8-bit text data,
rejects the data and replies with an error email notification.
If the AT command is not received from the PC
application within this duration, the machine
times out.
The LAST command is sent to the POP server
by the machine during POP procedures. The
reply from the server informs the machine which
e-mail to start receiving from.
If POP server responds abnormally, set the bit to
1. The machine will always receive from the first
e-mail on the list in the server. This will be
necessary if the POP server still contains old email that cannot be deleted.
This bit is only effective if the encoding type is
Quoted-Printable.
When this bit is set to 0, the e-mail is deciphered
as one-byte codes (suitable for some European
non-ASCII characters). When this bit is set to 1,
it is deciphered as Shift-JIS code (for Japanese
text). If Japanese text is received with this bit at
0, it will be deciphered as one-byte code and will
appear to be a string of non-ASCII European
characters.
LAN Switch 0C - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)
LAN Switch 0D - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)
LAN Switch 0E - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)
LAN Switch 0F - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)
SM
4-9
H551
Service
Tables
H132
LAN Switch 0A
No
FUNCTION
E-mail transmission: Maximum
4-7 number of sending attempts to
the same destination
LAN SWITCHES
The followings are used by the model in common with FR4.

System Switch 00 bit 4 - Line error marks on received pages.
System Switch 00 bit 5 - Communication parameter display.
System Switch 06 bit 0 - Use of the Stop key during memory transmission
System Switch 06 bit 4 - Use of the Stop key during memory transmission (Guidance
appears)
System Switch 11 bit 0 - TTI printing position
System Switch 11 bit 2 - Label insertion position
System Switch 12 bit 7-0 - TTI printing position in the main scan direction
Communication Switch 0B bit 0 - Use of Economy transmission during a transfer
operation to end receivers.
Communication Switch 0B bit 1 - Use of Economy transmission during a transfer
Uoperation to the next transfer station.
Communication Switch 0B bit 2 - Use of Label insertion for the end receivers in a
transfer operation.
User Parameter Switch 0E bit 2 - TTI printing during PC-fax memory transmission.
H551
4-10
SM
Rev. 01/00

!CAUTION
Do not change these settings which are marked as Not used or Read
only.
480005 (H) - RAM Reset Level 1 (Common use with H551)
Change the data at this address to FF (H), then switch the machine off and on to
4800A0 to 4800AF (H) - LAN Switches
480286 to 480288 (H) - E-mail Tx counter
Address
480286
480287
480288
High
Tens digit
Thousands digit
Low
Unit digit
Hundreds digit
Ten thousands digit
NOTE: The following counters have the same data format as above.
Service
Tables
H132
48028A to 48028C (H) - E-mail Rx counter

48028E to 480290 (H) - LAN FAX counter
4BFC01 to 4BFC07 (H) - NIC ROM version (Read only)
4BFC28 to 4BFC47 (H) - Password for administrator mode (max. 31 characters ASCII)
NOTE: If the number of characters are less than the maximum, add a stop code
(00 (H)) after the last character.
4BFC4C to 4BFC4F (H) - IP address
e.g. 133.139.24.3
4BFC4C (H)
4BFC4D (H)
4BFC4E (H)
4BFC4F (H)
1st address: 133

2nd address: 139
3rd address: 24
4th address:
3
85 (H)
8B (H)
18 (H)
03 (H)
4BFC50 to 4BFC53 (H) - Subnet mask information
4BFC58 to 4BFC5B (H) - Default gateway address
4BFC5C to 4BFC5F (H) - Restriction on communication of LAN FAX
(Access control)
4BFC60 to 4BFC63 (H) - Restriction on communication of LAN FAX
(Access mask)
4BFC64 to 4BFC67 (H) - SMTP server IP address
4BFC68 to 4BFC6B (H) - POP server IP address
SM
4-11
H551
4BFC6C to 4BFCAB (H) - Host name (max. 63 characters - ASCII)

4BFCAC to 4BFCEB (H) - Own domain name (max. 63 characters - ASCII)
4BFCEC to 4BFD2B (H) - POP server login name (max. 63 characters - ASCII)
4BFD2C to 4BFD4B (H) - POP server password (max. 31 characters - ASCII)
4BFD4C to 4BFDCB (H) - Own e-mail address (max. 127 characters - ASCII)
4BFDCC to 4BFE4B (H) - Administrators e-mail address
(max. 127 characters - ASCII)
4BFE4C to 4BFECB (H) - Back up e-mail address
4BFECC to 4BFECF (H) - Interval between automatic login to the POP server to
receive incoming mail (min. 0A [H] = 10 s)
e.g. 60 min. = 3,600 sec. = 0E10 (H) sec.
4BFECC (H)
4BFECD (H)
4BFECE (H)
4BFECF (H)
00 (H)
00 (H)
0E (H)
10 (H)
4BFED4 to 4BFEE7 (H) - CSI during LAN Fax Transmission

(max. 20 characters - ASCII)
4BFEEE to 4BFEEF (H) - DIS information during LAN Fax Transmission
(Read only)
4BFEE8: Resolution
0: 200 x 100 dpi 1: 200 x 200 dpi
4BFEE9: Modem rate
0: 2.4 kbps
1: 4.8 kbps
2: 7.2 kbps
3: 9.6 kbps
4: 12.0 kbps
5: 14.4 kbps
4BFEEA: Document width 0: A4
1: B4
4BFEEB: Document length 0: A4
1: B4
2: No limit
4BFEEC: Compression
0: MH (Do not change these settings.)
4BFEED: ECM
0: Disable (Do not change these settings.)
4BFEEE: BFT
0: Disable (Do not change these settings.)
4BFEEF: I/O rate (200 x 100 dpi/200 x 200 dpi)
0: 0/0 ms.
1: 5/5 ms.
2: 10/5 ms.
3: 10/10 ms.
4: 20/10 ms.
5: 20/20 ms.
6: 40/20 ms.
7: 40/40 ms.
4BFEF6 to 4BFEF7 (H) - Difference from Greenwich Mean Time
4BFEF6: Low - Hex
4BFEF7: High - Hex
Examples
USA: -5 hours = -300 min. x -1 = 300 = 012C (H)
4BFEF6: 2C
4BFEF7: 01
Japan: +9 hours = 540 min. x -1 = -540 = FDE4 (H)
4BFEF6: E4
4BFEF7: FD
H551
4-12
SM
TROUBLESHOOTING
ERROR CODES FOR LAN COMMUNICATION
5. TROUBLESHOOTING
5.1 ERROR CODES FOR LAN COMMUNICATION
If an error code occurs, retry the communication. If the same problem occurs, try to
solve the problem as suggested below.
NOTE: The errors which are marked with a * in the column to the left of the error
code will appear with NETWORK ERROR (ERROR CODE) on the LCD.
Meaning
Explanation
The NIC is reset

No response is received
because of a timeout during handshaking
10-00 during handshaking. between NIC and FCE
after a certain interval,
so the NIC is reset.
The user pressed
Processing is
interrupted because the
10-01 the Stop key.
user pressed Stop.
Transmission test
Transmission error
10-02 failed during the LAN occurred during the
testing procedures. loop-back test.
Reception test failed Reception error
10-03 during the LAN
occurred during the
testing procedures. loop-back test.
The NIC is not
The NIC is not ready
ready.
after reset. The orange
LED on the NIC board
10-04
does not light.
The NIC was reset

When an abnormal
because of a request procedure occurs, the
from the NIC.
NIC sends a reset
10-05
request to the FCE, then
the FCE commands the
NIC to reset.
An abnormal
The NIC was reset as a
command caused
failsafe, because the
hand-shaking between
10-06 the NIC to reset.
the NIC and the FCE
was incorrect.
Transmission was
The NIC was reset
interrupted because during the scanning of
an original.
10-07 the NIC was reset
during tx data
formatting.
SM
5-1
Suggested
Cause/Action
Error is
informed
from
FCE software procedure

error or abnormal e-mail
data.
The NIC board may be

defective.
The NIC board may be
defective.
The NIC board and/or
ROM on the NIC board
may not be connected
completely. Re-install
them. If that doesnt
work, replace the NIC
board.
NIC and/or FCE
software may be
working incorrectly.
FCE
FCE software may be

The NIC was reset by

an error occurring in a
job elsewhere.
H551
Trouble
shooting
H132
Code
Code
Meaning
A file with an
unsupported format
was received.
10-10
DCX encoding error

10-11
DCX decoding error

10-12
TIFF-F encoding
error
10-13
TIFF-F decoding
error
Explanation
Suggested
Cause/Action
A decoding error during The received file was

reception. The machine not compressed using
checks only the
DCX or TIFF-F.
descriptions in the
header of the e-mail, not
the actual data in the email.
FCE hardware may be
An encoding error
defective and/or FCE
occurred while the
scanned file was being software may be
converted using DCX
during transmission.
The received e-mail had Incorrect DCX data
a correct header, but an and/or FCE may be
error occurred while the defective and/or FCE
DCX file was being
software may be
decoded.
FCE hardware may be
An encoding error
occurred while the
scanned file was being software may be
converted using TIFF-F working incorrectly.
during transmission.
The received e-mail had
a correct header, but an
error occurred while the
TIFF-F file was being
decoded.
Incorrect TIFF-F data

and/or FCE may be
software may be
E-mail reception was

interrupted because
the machine could
not store the return
10-15 address.
The machine cannot

create a temporary file
to store the from
address, because the
maximum number of
temporary files have
been already created.
The machine
interrupted data
reception from a PC
during LAN fax
10-16
transmission,
because the address
of the destination
could not be stored.
Document size and
resolution of the
10-17
received e-mail was
over the limit.
The machine cannot

create a temporary file
to store the from
address, because the
maximum number of
temporary files have
been already created.
The e-mail will be

received again after a
regular interval when
there are fewer
temporary files. If some
temporary files are
deleted manually, it will
be possible to create
new ones.
The PC will receive a
busy signal and the PC
fax application will send
the data again. If some
temporary files are
deleted manually, it will
be possible to create
new ones.
Document size and
resolution of the
received e-mail was
over the limit.
10-14
H551
Error is
informed
from
Document size and

resolution of the
received e-mail was
over the limit.
5-2
FCE
SM
10-20
10-21
10-22
10-23
Meaning
The machine
rejected an incoming
e-mail for
autorouting, because
the ID code in the
incoming e-mail did
not match a personal
code registered in
the machine.
The machine
e-mail for
autorouting, because
an incorrect address
was registered with
the personal code.
The machine
e-mail for transfer
request, because the
ID code in the
incoming e-mail did
not match the ID
code registered in
the machine.
The machine
e-mail for transfer
request, because it
specified a
Quick/Speed Dial
that contains an
incorrect address.
NIC EPROM error
SM
10-31
10-32
10-33
NIC serial module

error
NIC timer module

error
Suggested
Cause/Action
Incorrect ID code.
Incorrect address
Correct the address, or

change the setting of
LAN bit switch 04 bit 2.
Incorrect ID code.
Ask the sender to

correct the ID code, or
Incorrectly formatted
address stored in the
Quick/Speed Dials.
Correct the addresses

stored in the Quick
Dials, or change setting
of LAN bit switch 03 bit
2.
Checksum error.
The EPROM on the NIC

board may be defective.
Replace the NIC board
and/or EPROM if this
error keeps appearing.
The DRAM on the NIC
if the error keeps
appearing.
if the error keeps
appearing.
Error is
informed
from
Ask the sender to

correct the ID code, or
10-30
NIC memory error

*
Explanation
The result of the

checked memory value
was incorrect
FCE
Trouble
shooting
H132
Code
NIC
The hardware for the

serial module in the
CPU on the NIC board
may be defective.
The hardware for the
timer module in the CPU if the error keeps
on the NIC board may
appearing.
be defective.
5-3
H551
Code
H551
Meaning
Explanation
Error on the interrupt The hardware for the

line connecting NIC interrupt line between
10-34
to FCE
the NIC board and the
FCE may be defective.
Network controller
Network controller
10-35 error
hardware error on the
NIC board
IP address not
The machine checks if
stored in the
the IP address is stored
10-40
machine
when the NIC board is
reset.
IP address conflict
The machines IP
address conflicts with
another machine's. The
machine check for IP
10-41
address conflict using
ARP procedures when
the machine is turned
on.
Abnormal TCP/IP
Error during the internal
socket procedure
checking procedure of
10-42
the NIC software runs
when the machine is
turned on
Timeout during hand Error while the machine
checks the handshaking
shaking
between NIC board and
10-43
FCE when the machine
is turned on
Sequence error
Error while the machine
during handshaking checks the handshaking
between NIC board and
10-44
FCE when the machine
is turned on
Connection with the The PC was turned off
PC through a LAN
or there was too much
was interrupted
traffic on the LAN.
10-50
while receiving data
from the PC (LAN
fax transmission).
AT command
An AT command
sequence error
sequence error occurred
during LAN fax
during data reception
transmission.
from the PC fax
10-51
software. The NIC
received unexpected AT
commands or no AT
command.
Unsupported AT
The NIC received
commands were
unsupported AT
received.
commands from the PC
10-52
fax software.
5-4
Suggested
Cause/Action
Error is
informed
from

if the error keeps
appearing.
if the error keeps
appearing.
Store the IP address of
the machine.
Change the IP address.

NIC ROM may be
defective, or the NIC
software is working
incorrectly.
NIC ROM may be
software is working
incorrectly.
NIC ROM may be
software is working
incorrectly.
Check the power switch
of the PC and reduce
the traffic on the LAN.
NIC
Unsupported PC fax
software or the NIC
Use supported PC fax
software or change the
NIC board.
Unsupported PC fax
software or the NIC
Use supported PC fax
software or change the
NIC board.
SM
Code
Meaning
Explanation
Suggested
Cause/Action
Error is
informed
from
Command time-out
occurred while
receiving data from
PC fax software.
10-54
10-60
10-61
10-62
10-63
10-64
10-65
10-66
SM
5-5
NIC
Trouble
shooting
H132
10-53
The NIC did not receive The PC fax software

AT commands from the does not work correctly.
PC at the correct time.
Delete the software and
reinstall it if the error
keeps appearing.
Otherwise, COM
Redirector does not
work correctly. Delete
and reinstall COM
Redirector if the error
keeps appearing.
Command for
The user interrupted PC Caused by the user
interrupted request
fax software procedures
was received
during LAN fax
transmission.
POP server IP
The IP address of the
Register the IP address.
address not
POP server is not
registered in the
registered
machine.
POP server cannot The machine cannot
Make sure that the IP
find the POP server on address of the POP
be found
the LAN.
server is correct and
check the traffic on the
LAN.
Logging into POP
The machine finds POP Delete the user name
server is disabled.
server, but logging in is and password of the
disabled.
POP server in the
machine, then input it
again. Otherwise, call
administrator of the
POP server.
Disconnection from The machine received a Check the traffic on the
POP server.
message from POP
LAN. Otherwise, call the
server that it will
disconnect the
POP server to check if
communication.
the server is turned off.
MIME decoding error Error during MIME
Abnormal MIME data.
decoding on the NIC
board during reception. if the error occurs during
reception from several
senders.
E-mail with
The machine decides
The machine received
unsupported type of whether the e-mail is a an e-mail with a header
type other than
header was received supported type or an
unsupported type by the text/plain and base
header of the e-mail.
64.
Received e-mail
Sender must send eThis is indicated the
format error
mail under regulation.
received e-mail is not
standard. There is no
boundary between parts
of the e-mail.
H551
Code
Meaning
The machine did not

receive a response
10-67
from the POP server
at the expected time.
No IP address
stored for the SMTP
10-70
server
SMTP server cannot
be found
10-73
No e-mail address is
10-74 stored.
10-75
The e-mail address

is too long.
No destination
address was entered
for transmission.
10-76
Incorrect destination
address
10-77
H551
Explanation
Suggested
Cause/Action
The POP procedures

The POP server is not
were interrupted by the working properly. Call
server during reception. the administrator of the
server.
The IP address of the
Enter the IP address in
SMTP server is not
the machine.
registered in the
machine.
The machine cannot
Check the IP address of
find the SMTP server on the SMTP server and
the LAN.
check the traffic on the
LAN.
The e-mail address of
Enter the e-mail address
the machine is not
in the machine.
stored in the machine.
The length can be up to Delete the address and
127 bytes.
enter it again.
A temporary file is
Enter the address again.
created to store the
destination address for
transmission. The
machine checked the
size of the file and the
result was zero bytes.
The destination address Enter the address again.
does not exist in the
server. The server
determines whether the
account of the
destination is inside or
outside the server by
the domain name of the
e-mail address. The
server informs the
machine during the POP
procedures when there
is no account in the
server even though the
domain name indicates
the account should be
on the server. When it is
clear that the account is
not on the server
because of the domain
name, the server has no
way to know if the
address is correct.
5-6
Error is
informed
from
NIC
SM
Meaning
Too many
destinations
10-78
Explanation
The server informs the
machine during SMTP
procedures when the
number of destinations
in a broadcast is over
the limit of the server.
SMTP server hard

disk full
The SMTP server

informs the machine
10-79
during the SMTP
procedures that the
server hard disk is full.
SMTP server
The SMTP server tells
shutdown
the machine during the
10-80
SMTP procedures that it
is shut down during
communication.
SMTP server busy
The SMTP server
informs the machine
during the SMTP
procedures that it
10-81
cannot handle the data
because of a problem,
such as a locked mail
spooler.
SMTP server turned When the server is
off
turned off, the machine
is informed by TCP/IP
10-82
procedures that
connection between the
machine and the server
is interrupted.
Report format error One line in the text data
was too long when the
10-83
machine created text email for an error report.
The machine did not The machine sent
receive a response commands to the SMTP
from the SMTP
server during
server at the correct transmission, but the
10-84
time
server did not answer at
the correct time
Unexpected
response from the
SMTP server.
10-85
SM
Suggested
Cause/Action
Error is
informed
from
Divide the broadcast

into two or more
operations. Use LAN
switch 01 to change the
maximum number of
broadcast destinations
to match the servers
limits.
Call the administrator of
the server.

the server.

the server.
Check whether the LAN

is congested or if a
cable has been
disconnected, or call the
server.
NIC
Trouble
shooting
H132
Code
Abnormal software
procedure
Abnormal SMTP server

procedures. Check
whether the LAN is
congested or whether a
cable has been
server.
The SMTP server sent a Abnormal SMTP server
response to machine
procedures. Check
which had an
whether the LAN is
unexpected value.
congested or whether a
cable has been
server.
5-7
H551
Code
Meaning
Explanation
Suggested
Cause/Action
No encoded line in
10-90 the e-mail during
transmission.
Number of encoded
lines does not match
10-91 the number of
scanned lines in the
transmission.
H551
An error occurred while The FCE software is not

encoding scanned data. working properly.
Value of encoded
off-set does not
10-92 match the scanned
lines in the
transmission.
Non-standard data in
10-93 the e-mail.

Error is
informed
from

The received e-mail

contains non-standard
image data.
5-8
FCE
Abnormal e-mail data.

Inform this to the
sender.
SM
LAN TEST FUNCTION
5.2
LAN TEST FUNCTION
5.2.1 LINK CHECK

A machine and a hub send and receive link pulses to each other to check the
connections to the LAN at regular intervals. The machine lights the green LED on
the NIC board when the pulses are received successfully.
When the link check is performed, the machine checks for a link pulse. The
machine indicates OK on the display when the link pulse is received successfully.
Check the LEDs both on the NIC board and on the hub to see if the connection
through the LAN cable is active. This is because the link check uses receiving data.
NOTE: While the machine is on, the orange LED on the NIC board is lit if it has
been initialized successfully.
When the loop back test is performed, the FCE sends test data to the NIC board.
The data is sent back to the FCE using the loop-back function of the NIC. The FCE
checks if the test data is the same as the data returned from the NIC. When they
are the same, the FCE indicates RESULT = 0000 on the display, which means
that the NIC board test was successful.
NOTE: The machine does not send test data out of the machine on the LAN during
the loop back test. The result is indicated even if the LAN cable is not
connected to the NIC board.
When the NIC board is defective, one of the error codes in the following table will
appear. In this case, re-install the NIC board and/or cable, or change them if the
loop back test is still not successful.
- LOOP-BACK TEST RESULT CODES Code
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
SM
Meaning
The test finished without errors.
Defective IC network controller on
the NIC board
Test data did not meet
regulations.
Data collision error
Buffer overflow while receiving
data
Memory error
Memory error
Received data did not reach the
buffer at the correct time
5-9
Code
0008
0009
000A
000B
000C
000D
000E
000F
Meaning
Data delay error
Carrier loss
Data is not processed at the
correct time
No data received
Data frame error
Data overflow
CRC error
Receiving data buffer error
H551
Trouble
shooting
H132
5.2.2 LOOP BACK
TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES
5.3 TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES

5.3.1 OVERVIEW
To resolve problems, a basic understanding of networking is required.
NIC FAX Overview
G3 FAX
NIC FAX
Mail Server
PSTN

NIC FAX
Client PC
Mail Server
Internet

Client PC
H132T511.WMF
The drawing shows the route used for the various features used by this machine.
LAN fax tx:
Internet fax (paper to paper): 200-dpi printer:
Internet fax (paper to PC):
200-dpi scanner: IC Fax Monitor:
- On PC only
Autorouting:
IC Viewer:
- Forwarding:

H551

5-10
SM
5.3.2 TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES

Use the following procedures to determine whether the machine or another part of
the network is causing the problem.

4. Check that PC can

connect with the
machine
5. LAN settings in the
machine
SM
Use the ping

command on the PC to
contact the machine.
Check the LAN
parameters
Check if there is an IP
address conflict with
other PCs.
5-11
Remarks
Is the modem set up in

Windows 95 control
panel set up the same
way as described in the
operation manual?
Are the printer
properties in Windows
95 control panel created
by the fax application
software set up as in the
operation manual?
Refer to the operation
manual for the
application.
Is the IP address
registered in the TCP/IP
properties in the
Windows 95 network
setup correct? Check
the IP address with the
network.
At the MS-DOS prompt,
type ping then the IP
address of the machine,
then press Enter.
Use LAN parameters
in service function 20.
If there is an IP address
conflict, inform the
administrator.
H551
Trouble
shooting
H132
Communication
Item
Action
Route
General LAN
1. Connection with the Check that the LAN
cable is connected to
LAN
the machine.
Check that the LEDs on
the NIC board and the
hub are lit.
2. LAN activity
Check that other
devices connected to
the LAN can
communicate through
the LAN.
G3
Refer to G3 fax
communication troubleshooting
Between NIC
1. Com Redirector
Check the modem
settings in Windows 95
Fax and PC
Check the port setting in
Windows 95
Make sure that the IP
address registered in
the machine is the same
as the address stored in
Com Redirector.
Is the target NIC fax
running?
Check the transmission
2. Application fax
software
port setting.
Check whether a PSTN
access number is
required.
3. Network settings on Check the Windows 95
the PC
network settings on the
PC.
Communication
Item
Route
Between PC
1. E-mail application
and e-mail
software
server
2. Network settings on
the PC
3. E-mail account on
the server
4. E-mail server
Between
machine and email server
1. LAN settings in the

machine
2. E-mail account on
the server
H551
Action
Remarks
Use the application to

Inform the LAN
check if transmission
and reception are
problem so that it can
possible with
be dealt with.
destinations other than
the NIC fax machine.
When an error message
appears in the
application, solve it first.
Check the PCs
Is the IP address
Windows 95 network
registered in the TCP/IP
settings.
properties in the
Windows 95 network
setup correct? Check
the IP address with the
network.
Make sure that the PC Ask the administrator to
can log into the e-mail
check.
server.
Check that the account
and password stored in
the server are the same
as in the machine.
Make sure that the client Ask administrator to
devices which have an
check.
account in the server
Send test e-mail with
can send/receive e-mail. the machines own
number as the
destination. The
machine receives
returned e-mail when
the communication is
performed successfully.
Check the LAN
Use LAN parameters
parameters
in service function 20.
Check if there is an IP
If there is an IP address
address conflict with
conflict, inform the
other PCs.
administrator.
Make sure that the
Ask the administrator to
machine can log into the check.
e-mail server.
as in the machine.
5-12
SM
Action
Remarks
Make sure that the client Ask the administrator to

check.
number as the
destination. The
machine receives
Between e-mail 1. E-mail account on
Make sure that the PC Ask the administrator to
server and
the Server
can log into the e-mail
check.
internet
server.
as in the machine.
Make sure that the client Ask the administrator to
2. E-mail server
check.
number as the
destination. The
machine receives
Make sure that the e3. Destination e-mail
address
mail address is actually
used.
Check that the e-mail
address contains no
incorrect characters
such as spaces.
4. Router settings
Use the ping
Ask the administrator of
command to contact the the server to check.
router.
Check that other
devices connected to
the router can sent data
over the router.
5. Error message by e- Check whether e-mail
Inform the administrator
mail from the
can be sent to another
of the LAN.
network of the
address on the same
destination.
network, using the
application e-mail
software.
Check the error e-mail
message.
SM
5-13
H551
Trouble
shooting
H132
Communication
Item
Route
Between
3. E-mail server
machine and email server
SYMPTOMS FOR TROUBLESHOOTING
5.4 SYMPTOMS FOR TROUBLESHOOTING

Internet fax machines, LAN fax transmission, and the PC utilities use procedures
which are not the same as the fax machines we are familiar with. The following can
help solve problems in the field.
5.4.1 INTERNET FAX

Decoding error during reception (1)
- Possible Cause When the machine receives e-mail with attached files that are not in TIFF-F or
DCX format, a decoding error occurs because the machine cannot decode the
files. The error occurs even if a text file is attached.
- Explanation/Action ITU-T and IETF require a TIFF-F formatted file to be attached for an internet fax
message. The sender should send the e-mail again, with a TIFF-F formatted file
attached.
Decoding error during reception (2)
- Possible Cause The received e-mail has an attached file that has an unsupported resolution or
page size. Messages of up to A4 width and up to 200 x 200 dpi resolution can be
received.
- Explanation/Action ITU-T and IETF specify a maximum size of A4 width for an attached file. The
sender should resend the e-mail, with an A4 size file attached. The paper size is
not negotiated during Internet fax handshaking.
H551
5-14
SM
The machine can send e-mail even though the host name and domain name
are not stored in the machines LAN parameters
- Possible Cause During transmission to the SMTP server, the host name and domain name stored
in the machine are used in the argument of the SMTP HELO command.
However, the SMTP server can receive the "HELO" command without the
argument, so the machine does not check whether the host name and domain
name are stored.
- Explanation/Action At installation, the host name and the domain name are not required if they are
unknown at the time. If incorrect names are stored, the SMTP server does not
accept the HELO command and the machine cannot send e-mail to the SMTP
server. Then, the machine fails to resend the correct number of times and prints
an e-mail transmission error report.
An error occurs in the first part of the e-mail transmission procedure
- Explanation/Action When an e-mail address is sent to the SMTP server without a domain name (the
address is blank is after the @ symbol), the server searches for the same user
name in the local server. The server fails to find the user name then the
transmission is rejected in accordance with SMTP procedures. This is done in the
first part of the e-mail transmission SMTP procedure.
NOTE: The following describes what happens if the domain name of the
destination is correct but the user name of the destination is incorrect.
1) When an e-mail with a domain name which is different from the local
domain name is sent, the SMTP server accepts the transmission and
forwards the e-mail to the next SMTP server even if the user name of
the e-mail address is incorrect. The local SMTP server cannot check
user names in a remote server.
2) After that, the destination SMTP server checks the user name to see if
that user has an account with the server. If there is no account, the
server creates an e-mail error report and sends it to the sender, and this
report is printed by the machine.
SM
5-15
H551
Trouble
shooting
H132
- Possible Cause There is no domain name in the destination e-mail address (e.g., 123 is used
instead of an e-mail address).
LAN parameters are not listed on the system parameter list after the NIC
board is replaced
- Possible Cause Poor electrical contact between NIC board and machine
- Explanation/Action When the machine does not recognize the NIC board, the NIC board does not
initialized and LAN parameters are not listed. The NIC board should be installed
again.
A communication error is indicated on the operation panel because the email server is down
- Possible Cause The machine attempts to receive e-mail from the POP server by POP procedures
at a regular interval. When the machine cannot contact the server, a POP error
occurs in the machine. A POP error also occurs if the LAN cable is pulled out of
the machine or if the network is down.
When there is a POP error, a communication error is indicated on the display and
the communication error LED is lit.
- Explanation/Action The machine recovers from a POP error when either the next POP procedure or
the next SMTP procedure with the server is performed successfully. The user
does not have to press the Stop key.
When a number of e-mail addresses separated with commas are stored for
transmission, a transmission error occurs. (eg. aaa@bbb.com,
ccc@ddd.com, ddd@eee.com)
- Possible Cause An SMTP error occurs in the above case.

- Explanation/Action When storing more than one e-mail address, the user must press the Yes key
after storing each address.
H551
5-16
SM

The user forgot the password for going into administrator mode
- Possible Cause The administrator password is stored in the machine, not in the PC. The
password is not reset if the user re-installs the utility. The administrator password
can changed with the utility, but the current password is needed.
- Explanation/Action A new password can be stored as follows.
Use rifmaint as the administrator password for the utility.
Change the password using rifmaint as the current password.
Rifmaint is always available even after a new password is stored.
Error after the user restores backed-up data
- Possible Cause Data must be backed up before resetting the RAM.

- Explanation/Action Restore backed-up data with IC Fax Monitor after the RAM in the machine has
been reset.
SM
5-17
Trouble
shooting
H132
NOTE: 1) The following data can be backed up in the PC.

Quick dials
Speed dials
Group dials
Personal codes
Address for memory forwarding
2) The following data cannot be backed up in the PC.
Administrator password
RTI/CSI/TTI
Own G3 telephone number
Polling ID
Bit switch settings
LAN parameters
Administrator e-mail address
H551
When an administrator logs into the machine, some functions cannot be

done at the operation panel and BUSY! PC COMMUNICATING appears on
the display.
- Possible Cause When IC Fax Monitor is being used in administrator mode, user functions 21 to
25, 31 to 36, 41 to 46,and the functions that require a password of 2222 cannot
be used at the operation panel. This is to prevent stored data in the machine from
being changed simultaneously at the PC and the fax machine.
NOTE: If any of the above functions is being used at the machine, the
administrator password cannot be used to log into the machine with IC
Fax Monitor.
- Explanation/Action Use the above functions after logging out of administrator mode.
5.4.3 COM REDIRECTOR

A Windows 95 error occurs when Com Redirector is reinstalled.
- Possible Cause When Com Redirector is uninstalled while it is still running, some files are not
removed from the PC. The error occurs because the files are not overwritten
during reinstallation.
- Explanation/Action The following are required to reinstall.
Shut down Windows 95.
Start Windows 95 again.
Stop running Com Redirector and all applications.
Uninstall Com Redirector
Reinstall Com Redirector.
The PC cannot send a message to the machine using LAN fax transmission.
- Possible Cause Two PCs can send a message to the machine at once. The third PC receives a
busy signal from the machine and cannot send the message. Another cause may
be that the PC was rejected as a result of the stored access control/access mask.
- Explanation/Action The user at the third PC must resend the message after the first or second PC
has finished.
H551
5-18
SM
The Windows 95 COM port cannot be used after Com Redirector and fax
application software were both installed.
- Possible Cause The fax application software does not supported COM 5 or higher because the
application is a 16-bit application.
- Explanation/Action When Com Redirector is installed, it automatically looks for an available COM
port starting from COM3, then uses this port. Com Redirector offers this COM port
to the fax application. When Com Redirector offers COM5 or higher, because the
lower ports are already taken, a 16-bit fax application cannot use it.
Remove the application software that uses COM 3 or COM 4, then release the
COM ports. Then install the 16-bit fax application again.
Trouble
shooting
H132
NOTE: 32-bit fax applications can use COM 5 or higher. Microsoft Fax, the
standard Windows 95 fax application, is a 32-bit application.
SM
5-19
H551
APPENDIX A
LAN CONFIGURATIONS
1. LAN BASICS
1.1 LAN CONFIGURATIONS
1.1.1 OVERVIEW
A LAN (Local Area Network) links computers within an installation such as a
building or factory. It consists of communications hardware such as interface
boards and cables, and software for the computers that are to be connected.
1.1.2 BASIC TYPES

The following three configurations are available for linking computers. The different
wiring configurations are often referred to as topologies
With all three topologies, signals sent from one computer go to all other computers.
An address is included at the start of the data so that it is ignored by all computers
except the destination.
Bus Configuration
One central cable is installed, with computers connected to it in branch fashion. All
data is sent via the central cable.
Network Topology
Appendix A
H132
a) Bus Connection
Star Configuration
b) Star Connection
A central hub is used, with computers

connected around it. All data is sent
from the central hub.
H132X502.WMF
SM
APPENDIX A-1
H551
LAN CONFIGURATIONS
Ring Configuration
Computers are connected in a ring.
c) Ring Connection
H132X503.WMF
Because the data sent by one computer reaches all the others, only one computer
may send data at any one time, or there will be a collision of data on the circuit. If
one computer continues sending data, it will occupy the LAN to the exclusion of all
others. To prevent this problem, data is limited to a length of a few kbytes. These
small units of data are referred to as packets or 'frames'.
1.1.3 AVOIDING DATA COLLISION

Collisions occur when data is sent from a number of computers simultaneously.
Two methods are employed to prevent this.
(a) The computers detect whether there is any data on the LAN, and only send
when the LAN is free. There are several ways to do this. A typical method is
CSMA/CD, which is used with Ethernet applications.
CSMA/CD (Carrier Sensing Multiple Access/Carrier Detection)
A method by which multiple computers have access to the transmission route
(referred to as multiple access). The computers monitor the transmission route
for data (carrier sensing), and send data if none is currently being sent. If a data
collision is detected, the data is resent after a randomly determined wait time.
(b) Token passing, in which collision of data is avoided before the event. Tokens
ensure that the data only goes to the intended computer.
The various connection configurations and ways of avoiding data collision have
resulted in a number of different types of LANs. The different types are
incompatible when directly connected to each other, thus requiring the use of relay
devices.
H551
APPENDIX A-2
SM
LAN CONFIGURATIONS
Main LAN Types and Their Characteristics

Type
Cable
Transmission
connection
speed
configuration
Cables
10Base-5
Bus
10 Mbits/s
Thick coaxial
Ethernet 10Base-2
Bus
10 Mbits/s
Thin coaxial
10Base-T
Star
10 Mbits/s
Twisted-pair
Token ring
Star
4 Mbits/s or
16 Mbits/s
Twisted-pair
FDDI
Ring and star
100 Mbits/s
Optical fiber,
twisted-pair
Local Talk
Daisy chain
230 kbits/s
Twisted-pair
Access
control
(collision
avoidance)
Remarks
The original
Ethernet
configuration
A simplified
CSMA/CD version of
10Base-5
Currently the
CSMA/CD main type in
use
IBM standard
Token passing
LAN
Token
Used primarily
appending for trunk lines
Fitted as
Proprietary standard to
Macintosh PCs
CSMA/CD
Appendix A
H132
* The NIC fax uses 10Base-T.
SM
APPENDIX A-3
H551
ETHERNET
1.2 ETHERNET
1.2.1 OVERVIEW
Ethernet is currently the commonly-used LAN. It was originally developed by DEC,
Intel, and Xerox. The original Ethernet standard incorporated what is now known
as the 10Base-5 specialized Ethernet coaxial cable.
The IEEE802.2 standard was based on the Ethernet standard. Specifications for
hardware components such as cables, were revised.
IEEE802.3 was then developed for use with media other than 10Base-5. 10Base2, 10Base-F, and the most widely used 10Base-T, were subsequently developed.
In contrast to the Ethernet standard data transfer speed of 10 Mbps, IEEE802.3
allows data transfer at speeds between 1 and 20 Mbps.
1.2.2 ETHERNET FRAME STRUCTURE

Ethernet frames consist of the addresses of the source and destination computers,
an identifier for the type of protocol used, the data, and finally the FCS (which is
used to check whether or not the data has been correctly sent and received).
Compare the Ethernet frame type and the IEEE802.3 frame type in the following
diagram.
Ethernet frame
Data (46 ~ 1,500 octets)

Frame Type (2 octets)
Source Address (6 octets)
FCS (4 octets)
Destination Address (6 octets)
IEEE802.3 frame
LLC Frame
(Data, 46 ~ 1,500 octets)
LLC Data Length (2 octets)
Source Address (6 octets)
FCS (4 octets)
Destination Address (6 octets)

H132X551.WMF
H551
APPENDIX A-4
SM
ETHERNET
FCS (Frame Check Sequence):

A CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) is employed to check whether or not the
received data is correct. The receiving device (receiving node) reconstitutes
the FCS from the received data. If it does not match the sent FCS, that frame
is discarded as corrupted.
Identifier:
Indicates the type of data that follows. The identifier is referenced by the
receiving node to determine the type of protocol used to send the data.
Octet:
A unit employed to indicate network data size. 1 octet is 8 bits (1 byte).
The term is used to make a clear division into 8-bit units from a continuous
stream of 1s and 0s with no inherent division into bytes.
LLC (Logical Link Control):
The name of the data frame defined in IEEE802.3.
Node
A computer or printer connected to the network.
1.2.3 MAC ADDRESSES

To allow each node in the network to communicate with others, it must have a
unique identifier. In the Ethernet standard, a 48-bit address known as the MAC
(Media Access Control) address is assigned to each computer. Each data frame
contains the MAC addresses of the source and destination computers.
The MAC address is a fixed physical address that is set on the network card. It is
six bytes in length for the Ethernet standard. The first three bytes are a header
code which is controlled and allocated by the IEEE, and the last three bytes are a
code independently controlled with each header (to prevent duplication). This
ensures that the physical address of each Ethernet card is unique.
Appendix A
H132
Under the Ethernet standard, frames are sent and received using these addresses
(see Ethernet Frame Structure).
SM
APPENDIX A-5
H551
LAN HARDWARE
1.3 LAN HARDWARE

1.3.1 OVERVIEW
The basic LAN configuration consists of four hardware items.
Interface boards - also known as LAN boards or Network Interface Cards
(NICs):
Convert digital data into electrical signals, prevent data collision, and transmit
data on cables
Cables:
Primarily unshielded twisted-pair (UTP) and optical fiber cables
Hubs:
Distribute signals
Relay devices:
Connect LANs for the transmission of data to remote locations
LAN devices are regulated by IEEE (Institute of Electrical and Electronic
Engineers) standards.
In addition to hardware, the following types of software are also needed.
Transmission protocol software that can transmit data via a variety of relay
devices
Applications (database, e-mail), to provide the data in a format usable by
the operator
1.3.2 RELAY DEVICES

Relay devices are required to expand LANs. These devices do the following.
Extending the Connection Distance

LANs allow high-speed transmission of data, achieved by sending high frequency
signals over the cables. High frequency signals are considerably attenuated when
transmitted over the cables, and signal waveforms are easily distorted, resulting in
difficulties when transmitting over long distances (the maximum distance for
transmission using twisted-pair cables to connect the hub and terminals with
10Base-T is 100m).
When expanding a LAN, relay devices are used to amplify the attenuated signals.
Distorted signals are first converted back to digital format and regenerated to
remove the distortion.
To cover even more remote locations, telecommunications companies provide
dedicated lines, PSTN lines, and ISDN lines for connection to remote LANs.
H551
APPENDIX A-6
SM
LAN HARDWARE
Connection between Networks of Different Standards

As the types of cable used, and the signal and data format differ between different
LAN systems, such systems cannot be connected directly. When a LAN system
has to be connected to a different system, a relay device that can convert between
the two systems is employed.
Conversion between different LAN systems involves first converting the signals
back to digital format, and resending them in a format appropriate for the
destination LAN.
Control of High-speed Transmission Routes

As the network grows, the number of connected computers increases, and so does
the volume of data transmitted. There is a limit to the amount of data that can be
transmitted on the network. When this is exceeded, the flow of data is impeded and
communications are no longer possible.
There are a number of ways to increase the speed of data transmission on a LAN.
A high-speed LAN may be used to prevent network congestion when the amount of
data to be transmitted is large. When connecting LANs of different transmission
speeds, relay devices are required that can convert between the two LAN types.
By-pass circuits may be installed when connecting LANs with relay devices. When
there is a complex web-like interconnection of networks, there are a number of
routes to the destination, so that busy parts of the network can be by-passed.
Filtering
There are also relay devices that can check the data on the network and remove all
except that which is necessary. This is referred to as 'filtering'.
As the number of users increases, the network is used for greater variety of
purposes, resulting in the entry of data through illegal access. Relay devices to limit
access and to maintain security become necessary.
SM
APPENDIX A-7
H551
Appendix A
H132
Controls which pass only specific protocols (used for the transmission of data and
voice between terminals on networks such as TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, AppleTalk) are
used to alleviate congestion in the relay circuits.
TYPES OF RELAY DEVICES AND GATEWAYS
1.4 TYPES OF RELAY DEVICES AND GATEWAYS

Relay devices may be of various types - repeaters, bridges, switches, routers depending upon their purpose and principles of operation.
Types of Relay Devices and their Functions
Function
Cable extension
Connection with remote sites
Connection with different LAN types
Avoiding congestion
Restricting access
Repeater

Bridge

Switch

Router

1.4.1 REPEATERS
A repeater amplifies signals. It is normally connected to a number of LANs, and
amplifies signals from one LAN (one segment) and outputs it to another LAN
(another segment).
It is considerably cheaper than a bridge or router, and does not require special
setup. After power is switched on, the repeater connects to the two networks.
As distortion occurs when signals are amplified, the number of repeaters is limited
to two with Ethernet.
Repeaters have no ability to store data, and are unable to prevent collisions when
sending signals. Therefore, they have no effect on relieving congestion in a
network.
Signal
Becomes
weaker
LAN
LAN
Repeater
Amplifies the signal
H132X504.WMF
H551
APPENDIX A-8
SM
1.4.2 BRIDGES
In the same way as a repeater, a bridge converts received electrical signals back to
digital format, and then regenerates the original electrical signals for transmission,
thus preventing signal distortion.
Bridges can also filter out unnecessary data, and can act to alleviate congestion on
the network. The bridge records the source MAC address in the header of the
arriving data packets. In this way, the bridge builds up a picture of the location of
each node (PC and printer).
In the example shown below, data sent from A to B also reaches the bridge. The
bridge automatically records this data and remembers that A is located in the lefthand segment. When data is subsequently sent from B to A the bridge does not
relay it to the right-hand segment. This process is referred to as filtering.
The bridge does not require special setup. After power is switched on, the bridge
connects to the two networks.
A B
A B
Signals to node B are not

transferred to the right-hand side.
Bridge
AC
A C
Right Side
C
Signals to node C are transferred

to the right-hand side.
H132X505.WMF
SM
APPENDIX A-9
H551
Appendix A
H132
Left Side
A
B
1.4.3 SWITCHES
Switches have the same filtering function as bridges, however they also support
simultaneous connection of multiple LANs, and allow parallel relaying.
Relay processing time is reduced in comparison to bridges, and operation is
therefore faster.
Switch
H132X506.WMF
H551
APPENDIX A-10
SM
1.4.4 ROUTERS
A router checks the destination information in the headers of the data packets on
the network and determines which LAN it has to be sent to. The router contains a
table which records the destinations.
Data going to LAN segment A is transferred to the upper route.
Data going to LAN segments B or E is transferred to the left-hand route.
Data going to LAN segments C or D is transferred to the right-hand route
A
B
C
D
E
A
Router
Up
Left
Right
Right
Left
C
Router
Router
D
Router
E
In contrast to repeaters and bridges, simply switching power on and connecting to

the networks does not make ready the router for operation. Software appropriate
for the communications protocol must first be installed, the network configuration
checked, and the setup completed.
While filtering with bridges is implemented primarily by the checking of addresses,
filtering with a router is implemented by the communications protocol.
Depending upon the application protocol, the router may be set to pass e-mail
data, but not to transfer files.
Routers support considerably more sophisticated functions than bridges. For
example, they may be set up to allow high priority data to be passed more quickly
(priority control). Different LAN types have different formats for the destinations.
The router makes sure that the destination is in the correct format for the next
network.
When there are multiple routes to the destination, bridges and switches cannot be
employed to reduce congestion since the data is sent via all routes. Routers, on
the other hand, employ a number of routes set beforehand in accordance with the
amount of data to distribute the load throughout the network (while bridges divide
SM
APPENDIX A-11
H551
Appendix A
H132
H132X507.WMF
up the network with MAC addresses, routers achieve this, in the case of a TCP/IP
protocol, by analyzing IP addresses and sub-nets).
The router is a device central to the configuration of the network, and as such
router functions are implemented in software in PC LAN servers and UNIX
machines.
In the NIC fax, the device setting the IP address as the default gateway is in
practice a default router. When data is sent from the network belonging to
the local machine to other networks, the device at the exit from the network
is referred to as the default router.
1.4.5 GATEWAYS
While repeaters, bridges, and routers are available as dedicated hardware for
network use, gateways are available as server and client software packages. They
analyze all network communications protocols, and convert data, thus allowing
connection of different networks. The Netware Gateway Service supplied with the
WindowsNT Server is an example of this software.
H551
APPENDIX A-12
SM
NETWORK PROTOCOLS
1.5 NETWORK PROTOCOLS

1.5.1 OVERVIEW
Network protocols are standard procedures for transmitting data over a network.
There are different protocols for different stages of the communication.
1.5.2 DATA TRANSMISSION

Data is sent using the following procedures.
(1) Finding the destination
(2) Determining the route to the destination
(3) Sending the data
A number of protocols must be used in combination in order to execute each
procedure. The TCP/IP protocol used with the Internet, the Netware IPX/SPX
protocol, and the Macintosh AppleTalk protocol, are combinations of protocols
designed to achieve various specific procedures.
Protocols used for steps (1), (2), and (3) listed above are referred to as (1) the
name service protocol, (2) the routing protocol, and (3) the transfer protocol
respectively.
The roles of the protocols
Target PC
Network
Appendix A
H132
Transfer protocol
Name Server
Directory Server
Router
Routing protocol
Name service protocol

Sending PC
H132X508.WMF
SM
APPENDIX A-13
H551
NETWORK PROTOCOLS
1.5.3 NAME SERVICE PROTOCOL

A computer name is normally assigned to the computer. However, for the purposes
of transmitting data, the name is converted to an address indicating its location on
the network. The name service protocol provides lists of all names when the
destination computer name is unknown.
The address is an identifier used in distinguishing between terminals and nodes on
the network. The most common addresses are IP addresses and MAC addresses.
An IP address consists of a network address (to identify the network to which the
terminal belongs) and a host address (to identify the terminal within the same
network), both of which are set by the user.
A MAC address is registered in the memory of the network interface board by the
manufacturer. Each MAC address is unique (no two are alike throughout the
world).
1.5.4 ROUTING PROTOCOL

The routing protocol is used in determining the route used to transmit the data. A
preset network route may be necessary, or it may be determined automatically by
communication between routers.
If relay devices are to be added or moved, it is convenient to have a method of
automatically determining new routes. The routing protocol provides this ability.
1.5.5 TRANSFER PROTOCOL

The transfer protocol is used in the transmission of data. It first checks for errors in
the received data, and resends it if an error is detected. It also controls the rate at
which data is transmitted, by communication between the source and destination.
In addition to these basic protocols, there are also various other protocols which
provide for notification of network congestion, notification of errors, and so on.
H551
APPENDIX A-14
SM
NETWORK PROTOCOLS
Protocols Used with Different LAN Types

Name Service
Protocol
Routing
Protocol
Protocols used with

the Internet (TCP/IP)
DNS
RIP
OSPF
Protocols used with

Netware (IPX/SPX)
Protocols used with
Macintosh (AppleTalk)
SAP
NDS
NBP
ZIP
RTMP
NLSP: NetWare Link State Protocol

IPX: Internetwork Packet Exchange
SPX: Sequenced Packet Exchange
NBP: Name Binding Protocol
ZIP: Zone Information Protocol
RTMP: Routing Table Maintenance Protocol
DDP: Datagram Delivery Protocol
ASP: AppleTalk Session Protocol
Appendix A
H132
DNS: Domain Name Service

RIP: Routing Information Protocol
OSPF: Open Shortest Path First
IP: Internet Protocol
TCP: Transmission Control Protocol
UDP: User Datagram Protocol
SAP: Service Advertisement Protocol
NDS: NetWare Directory Service
RIP
NLSP
Transfer
Protocol
IP
TCP
UDP
IPX
SPX
DDP
ASP
SM
APPENDIX A-15
H551
TCP/IP
1.6 TCP/IP
1.6.1 OVERVIEW
TCP/IP is the standard Internet protocol, and is supported as a standard by
Windows 95. It allocates 32-bit network addresses (IP addresses) to the nodes. As
the addressing system does not depend upon physical media, TCP/IP provides for
considerable flexibility in selection of routes.
The use of TCP/IP is not limited to Ethernet, but allows use of a variety of physical
media.
TCP/IP is a combination of the TCP protocol and IP protocol.
1.6.2 COMMUNICATIONS WITH IP PROTOCOL

The IP protocol divides data into packets. When the destinations may be on
several different LANs, the router selects the appropriate route for each packet
before it is sent. This process is repeated until all data arrives at the destination
network.
1.6.3 IP ADDRESS
Communications with IP protocol requires that network devices such as PCs and
routers using TCP/IP be assigned a 32-bit IP address as a means of identification.
When used in a single closed network, the IP addresses (referred to as private
addresses in this case) may be used freely. However, when connected to the
Internet, global addresses which are unique throughout the world must be used.
Global addresses are managed by the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority
(IANA), and are assigned upon receipt of an IP address.
1.6.4 IP ADDRESS FORMAT

IP addresses are 32 bits in length, and are normally converted to decimal notation
in four 8-bit blocks as shown below.
Example of IP Address Notation
133. 139. 212. 11
Host portion (16 bits)
Network portion (16 bits)
The IP address consists of host and network blocks as shown above. The network
block represents a logical collection of hosts (a network), and the host block
specifies a unique host within the network.
In the example above, a maximum of 65,534 (the maximum number of
combinations of 16 bits) hosts may be allocated to that particular network block.
H551
APPENDIX A-16
SM
TCP/IP
As TCP/IP involves the routing of packets using the address in this network block,
the network block must be unique (no two can be alike throughout the world). On
the other hand, the address within the host block is up to the user.
1.6.5 SUBNET AND SUBNET MASKS

Subnet masks divide the host block into sub-nets. In the example above, there are
65,534 possible host addresses, and it is difficult to manage all with one network.
The host address block is therefore subdivided into the upper and lower 8 bits, with
the upper 8 bits handled as a logical group address. In this way, the IP addresses
assigned to a company for its networks can be divided up into sub-nets of about
250 hosts for ease of management (each department of the company can be
allocated a different logical group number, for example).
Example: Sub-net
133. 139. 212. 11
1 ~ 254 ... 254 hosts
Logical group
Host block (8-bit)
The final part of the IP address (the host block) cannot be 0 or 255.
The dividing is done using a parameter known as the subnet mask. The subnet
mask blocks off addresses, only permitting certain addresses to be used in a
subnet.
A logical AND operation is done using the subnet mask to find the range of allowed
sub-net addresses.
The following diagram shows how the AND operation can be used to limit the size
of the subnet to a few IP addresses.
SM
APPENDIX A-17
H551
Appendix A
H132
If your computer has the IP address 210.145.159.11, and the subnet mask is
255.255.255.0, the server can recognize that machines with an IP address of
210.145.159.* are on the same LAN, so messages are sent to it directly. Any IP
address with a different value at the start has to be accessed through a router.
TCP/IP
IP address and Subnet mask

IP Address (4 octets)
1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1
210
145
159
11
Subnet mask
28 bits
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0
255
255
255
240
Logical Network Address

14 hosts are available
The address "0000" and "1111" cannot be used
H132X552.WMF
1.6.6 TCP AND UDP

While data is formatted into packets and sent to the desired node on the Internet
using IP, communications applications (eg e-mail) do not control data transmission
in packets.
The host requires a procedure for passing IP packets to the desired application.
This requirement is satisfied with TCP (Transmission Control Protocol) and UDP
(User Datagram Protocol).
H551
APPENDIX A-18
SM
APPENDIX B
PRINCIPLES
1. E-MAIL BASICS
1.1 PRINCIPLES
1.1.1 OVERVIEW
Electronic mail (E-mail) is a system by which messages in the form of digital data
are sent and received between computers. A variety of types of electronic mail are
available - Internet e-mail, Microsoft Mail as used with the exchange client under
Windows95, and Lotus Notes Mail.
E-mail works as follows.
Messages are stored at some location.
Users generally have equal privileges, and are able to both send and
receive messages.
A telephone system requires that users are able talk to each other simultaneously.
In the case of e-mail, the user first receives the message, and may then read it at
any time, and send a reply if necessary.
1.1.2 SENDING AND RECEIVING

E-mail generally supports the following functions.
A UA (User Agent) for creating e-mail and displaying received mail.
An MTA (Message Transfer Agent) to handle transfer of messages.
The mail created by the sending UA is sent from the sending MTA to the receiving
MTA, and displayed by the receiving UA.
User Agent
Message Transfer Agent
Message Transfer Agent
User Agent
The simplest e-mail system is one in which messages are stored at a location
accessible by all users. Each user has his/her own mailbox, and the sender puts
messages in the recipients mailbox. The recipient checks his/her mailbox to
receive mail.
The mailboxes are normally at one location, often referred to as a post office, and
the process of sending e-mail approximates that of sending mail at the post office.
When the post office is accessible from all computers connected to the network,
the system constitutes an e-mail system.
SM
APPENDIX B-1
H551
Appendix B
H132
H132X553.WMF
PRINCIPLES
1 June, 1998
Microsoft Mail as used in Windows95, and Lotus Cc: Mail employ this system, as
does the UNIX local mail system (i.e., not connected to the Internet, etc.).
1.1.3 E-MAIL NETWORKS

As the number of users increases, and geographically distant users are connected
to the network, multiple post offices must be established, and users are no longer
able to use the same post office for sending and receiving mail. A system which
connects post offices for the purpose of exchanging mail (a transfer system) then
becomes necessary.
In this case, the destination of mail is checked at the post office, separated into the
various destination post offices, and passed it to the transfer system. The transfer
system then communicates with the transfer systems of other post offices, and
transfers the mail to the appropriate post offices. Mail sent from other post offices is
sorted into the appropriate mailboxes at the receiving post office.
The above is a general description of an e-mail system. These functions are
implemented with the exchange server software packages for Microsoft Mail and
CC: Mail using optional gateway software.
The fundamental principles of Internet mail are the same, and are implemented in
the UNIX SendMail program under UNIX.
H551
APPENDIX B-2
SM
PRINCIPLES
The following diagram shows what happens when somebody sends mail from a PC
to a receiver with an account in the same post office and to a receiver with an
account in another post office.
Machines A and B both have accounts in mail server 1. Machine C has an account
in mail server 2.
When machine A sends the message, it goes to the local mail server using SMTP
protocol. SMTP is based on TCP/IP. The post office transfers the message to
receiver Bs mail box. Receiver B picks the mail up from there, using POP
procedures (POP is also based on TCP/IP).
To get to receiver C, the server sends the mail to mail server 2, using SMTP
procedures. Mail server 2 puts the incoming mail into receiver Cs mail box.
Receiver C picks it up using POP procedures.
Some more detail on SMTP and POP follow later in this section.
Receiver C
Client mail software
POP
Procedures
SMTP
Procedures
SMTP
Procedures
Sender A
POP
Procedures
Mail server 2
Mail server 1
Appendix B
H132
Receiver B
H132X509.WMF
SM
APPENDIX B-3
H551
INTERNET MAIL
1 June, 1998
1.2 INTERNET MAIL

1.2.1 OVERVIEW
Internet e-mail (hereafter referred to as Internet mail) is a system for creating text
messages in accordance with a set of standards, the messages then being sent to
destinations using SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol).
SMTP is a protocol for sending and receiving mail as defined in RFC821. It was
originally developed for sending and receiving mail between servers. However it is
currently used for sending mail from client environments using POP (Post Office
Protocol discussed in a separate section).
1.2.2 CHARACTER CODES

Messages consist of a header and the main text, both being subject to restrictions
on usable character codes.
Specifications for data exchanged on the Internet are determined within the
organization of the Internet, and do not necessarily conform to ISO (International
Standards Organization) requirements. However, these organizations have codified
these specifications to the extent that they are now the default standards
organizations.
For example, the main text of a message created Japanese using JIS character
codes must satisfy a particular set of requirements for transmission on the Internet.
However, if it is to be sent on a network within a particular company, the unique
requirements of that system may mean that the JIS codes are not always used.
1.2.3 MESSAGE ADDRESS NOTATION

The UA attaches the required header to the main text and sends it to the MTA. The
MTA then adds to or changes the header as required to ensure that the message
transfer route is recorded, and that the addresses of the destination and sender are
correct.
Internet mail employs an 'address' to specify the message destination. The address
format is generally as follows.
user name @ domain name
The mailbox name is generally employed as the user name.
The MTA uses the domain name to check the destination IP address with the
DNS, and then sends the mail using SMTP.
DNS (Domain Name System) is a service which enables the IP address to be
obtained from the host name under the TCP/IP network environment.
H551
APPENDIX B-4
SM
Rev. 01/00
INTERNET MAIL

The IP address allows destinations within the Internet to be identified. This IP
address is, however, a string of numbers not easily remembered by the user. To
resolve this problem, a corresponding name is added so that the user need only
specify the name in order to identify the destination.
DNS was developed for this purpose. Internet domain names are distributed
among organizations in a hierarchical manner, with lower order domains being
managed by the higher order domain. All organizations participating in the Internet
have a domain name. The domain name first identifies countries, and is
subsequently further divided in a tree structure to identify organizations.
The name server (DNS server) located in each domain holds the information about
the domains and hosts under its management. When the client communicates
using a host name or domain name, an inquiry is made to the DNS to obtain the
destination IP address. Note that this domain name structure is independent of the
physical structure of the network. The items in brackets below are examples of
domain and mail addresses.
Appendix B
H132
H132X510..PCX
SM
APPENDIX B-5
H551
INTERNET MAIL
1 June, 1998
1.2.5 TRANSFER OF INCOMING MAIL

In some cases, incoming mail may be transferred to another server using SMTP
and then stored on another mail server.
The UA used by the user receiving this mail detects its arrival by some method
(e.g., by monitoring the contents of the directory designated to contain mail) and
informs the user of this fact.
The UA then extracts the mail in accordance with instructions from the user and
displays it.
The mail stored on the server is transferred to the user's PC using POP.
POP (Post Office Protocol) is a protocol used in reading the content of the mail
spooler using TCP/IP protocol. It is specified in RFC1725 (see a later
section for more details).
E-mail transration
n a m e @ aaa. ccc. ddd
user name
DNS

MTA
domain name

SMTP
DNS
MTA
SMTP

MTA
H132X554.WMF
The mail address consists of a host name (mailbox name) and domain name. Mail
is distributed by first finding the IP address of the destination with the DNS, and
then transferring the message using SMTP.
1. The mail destination within the relevant domain is checked using the domain
portion of the mail address.
2. The MTA then connects to the destination mail server using the mail address
thus obtained.
3. The mail is transferred to the destination MTA using SMTP.
4. Depending upon the size of the organization, the message may be further
transferred to an internal MTA (not visible from outside the domain).
H551
APPENDIX B-6
SM
INTERNET MAIL
1.2.6 VERIFYING INCOMING MAIL

Arrival of mail at the intended destination on the Internet is not guaranteed. In the
worst case, it may disappear at some unknown location. Furthermore, it is
impossible to verify whether sent mail has been read or not.
Mail sent on the Internet passes through multiple servers and networks, and
computers used within the Internet are of a variety of architectures. The network
therefore contains a wide variety of hardware environments, in addition to the wide
variety of software employed for mail transfer.
Appendix B
H132
While there are no problems in most cases, it is obvious that arrival of mail cannot
be completely guaranteed within this complex environment.
SM
APPENDIX B-7
H551
Rev. 01/00
MESSAGE HEADERS
1.3 MESSAGE HEADERS

1.3.1 REQUESTS FOR COMMENTS
The basic protocols used for transmission of messages on the Internet are defined
in RFC822. RFC822 primarily defines the header information for e-mail, with the
details of the main text of the message being defined in MIME (RFC2045 - 2047).
NOTE: 1) An RFC (Request For Comments) is a document formally released by
the Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF). The IETF has released a
wide variety of RFCs on technical matters (e.g., network protocols)
related to the Internet environment.
2) MIME (Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions) is a protocol which
removed such restrictions as the number of characters per line, and the
maximum size of an e-mail transmission. It also made possible the
transmission of non-character data (e.g., programs and bitmaps).
1.3.2 HEADER FORMAT

The header of an e-mail message consists of a header and the main text. A blank
line is inserted between this header and the main text (the blank line is not included
in the header).
The header is defined as a collection of fields, with the field format as follows.
field name : content
An example of the To field, indicating the destination, is as follows.
To:XXX@ricoh.com
Header Example:
Received: from H132.shinyoko.ricoh.co.jp ([133.139.167.30]) by bb.shinyoko.ricoh.co.jp

(4.1/2.8Wb-91Jan07)
id AA15193; Sun, 15 Feb 98 14:53:50 JST
Return-Path: <H132@shinyoko.ricoh.co.jp>
Message-Id: <9802150553.AA15193@bb.shinyoko.ricoh.co.jp>
Date: 15 Feb 1998 14:54:06 +0900
X-Mailer: ICFAX Version 1.0
Mime-Version: 1.0
Content-Type: multipart/mixed; boundary = --ICFAX_60670AE6CB--
To: hanako@shinyoko.ricoh.co.jp
From: H132@shinyoko.ricoh.co.jp
Subject: Fax Message NO.0003 from +81454771786
(RICOH SERVICE)
H551
APPENDIX B-8
SM
MESSAGE HEADERS
1.3.3 HEADER TYPES

While a number of header fields are possible, the following three must be present.
Date
From
To
Message Header Table (fields defined in RFC822)
Field name
Date
Date
Person
submitting
mail
From
Sender
Reply-To
Address
To
Cc
Bcc
Reference
Message-Id
In-Reply-To
References
Keywords
Other
Subject
Comments
Encrypted
ReturnPath
Route
Received
Meaning
Date that the mail was
created
Person submitting mail
Description
Date and time in specified format
Syntax: <address>
Mail address (including comments)
Syntax: <address>
Person sending mail

Syntax: <address>
Destination when a
reply is sent
Syntax: <address>
Mail destination
Syntax: <address>
Destination of carbon
copy
Syntax: <address>
Destination addressees Mail address (including comments)
not covered by To and Syntax: <address>
CC
Message ID
Message identification
Source of reply
Message ID of original mail
Referenced mail
Message ID of referenced mail
Keywords for search
Any character string
purposes
Mail title (summary)
Mail comment
Encryption algorithm
Defined word (defined in separate
specification
RFC)
Route for return of mail Mail address
Transfer record added
by MTA
Fields defined by user
User defined
Describes transfer destination,

transfer source, and protocol etc
with From, By, With, etc
Field names beginning with X-.
May be any character string,
definition is up to the user.
* Other fields are available defined by separate RFCs (e.g., MIME).
SM
APPENDIX B-9
H551
Appendix B
H132
Field
MESSAGE HEADERS
Rev. 01/00
1.3.4 FIELDS FOR SENDING E-MAIL

From Field
The From field indicates the person sending the mail. The difference between the
From and Sender fields is that between the person creating the message and the
person actually sending the message. These two fields are used when the two
differ. When the From field is omitted, the Sender field is added automatically.
When a error occurs, a error notification is sent to the destination in the Sender
field. When the Sender field has been omitted, the notification is sent to the
destination in the From field.
Fields containing mail addresses may also include real names as a comment (the
same applies to the Person Sending Mail and Addressee fields). In both cases
below , IC FAX is handled as a comment, and H132@ricoh.com is recognized as
the address.
Example 1 From: IC FAX <H132@ricoh.com>
Example 2 From: H132@ricoh.com (IC FAX)
Multiple mail addresses may be delineated by commas, and both address formats
may be used together.
Reply-To Field
Reply-To clearly specifies the address to which the reply is to be sent. As this field
may be omitted, it is possible that mail may be sent with this field blank. In such
cases, the mail is returned to the address in the From field.
When both the From and Reply-To fields are used, the latter has priority.
The Return-Path field appears to have a similar function at first glance,. However it
is not for return of mail, but is automatically added by the transfer system to specify
the person submitting the mail, and is used to investigate the mail route when an
error occurs.
1.3.5 ADDRESSEE FIELDS

To Field
The To field specifies the addressee for the mail. As with the From field, multiple
mail addresses may be delineated with commas. The To field differs from the Cc
field in that only the name of the person sending the message is specified.
Cc Field
Mail is sent to the addresses in the Cc (carbon copy) field in the same way as to
the address in the To field. The difference only with the To field is whether the
name is in the To field or the Cc field of the received mail.
H551
APPENDIX B-10
SM
MESSAGE HEADERS
Bcc Field
Bcc means Blind Carbon Copy. The Bcc field is deleted in mail sent to the
addressees in the To and Cc fields. It is most commonly used when the address of
the person sending the mail (the user in the From field) is to be entered in order to
leave a copy of the sent mail.
As some mail software saves a copy of the sent mail, it may not be possible to
specify the Bcc field in some cases.
Exceptions
The addressee fields do not always contain the addressees name when mail is
received. This is because since the actual addressee for the mail is specified by
the MTA, when an alias is used to create a virtual addressee (in a local system, for
example), the virtual address remains in the To field. This also occurs in cases
such as mailing lists in which mail is sent to all on the mailing list.
NOTE: 1) An alias is a group address. Mail sent to the group address is sent to all
members in the group.
2) A mailing list is a form of electronic conference using e-mail. E-mail sent
to a mailing list is transferred to each member of the list. As such, it
provides the same service as available with a PC-based centralized
host-type bulletin board system in a distributed network environment.
1.3.6 DATE
The Date field indicates the date on which the mail was created (not the date it was
sent). The date is in the following format.
Day, date month year hour: minute: second zone
Zone indicates the local time used in the system in which the mail was created, and
is expressed as GMT+/-hhmm.
1.3.7 MISCELLANEOUS
The Received field is used by the MTA sending the mail, to record the status of the
mail. This field shows the route over which the mail was sent, and the computers
which handled it prior to delivery.
In addition to information showing when and where the mail originated, and where
it was sent to, some systems add further information (e.g., host IP address,
software version) as a comment.
Message-Id Field
Internet mail adds an internationally unique message ID. This ID is created
automatically, and is normally a combination of the time the message was sent and
the name of the mail server.
SM
APPENDIX B-11
H551
Appendix B
H132
Received Field
SMTP
1 June, 1998
1.4 SMTP
1.4.1 OVERVIEW
SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) is used as the protocol for communication
between Internet mail MTAs. It is defined in RFC821, which covers 8-bit data
communications and message size negotiation, etc. SMTP is expanded upon in
RFC1651 and RFC1653 as ESMTP.
SMTP uses text-based commands and responses between the client and server. In
practice, it is a protocol used under TCP/IP, and data is therefore sent and
received under TCP. Retry processing with communications errors is therefore
handled at the TCP/IP level, and SMTP therefore needs only to handle sending
and receiving of data, and command errors.
1.4.2 SMTP COMMANDS

SMTP commands are sent, and responses received, between the client and server
when sending Internet mail. This communication involves sending of the domain
name, sender's name, destination name, and main text etc to the server, and user
verification.
Receiver C
POP
Procedures
SMTP
Procedures
SMTP
Procedures
Sender A
POP
Procedures
Mail server 2
Mail server 1
Receiver B
H132X509.WMF
H551
APPENDIX B-12
SM
POP
1.5 POP
1.5.1 OVERVIEW
E-mail on the Internet was originally transferred between hosts using SMTP, with
the computer receiving the mail being operated all day long under the control of
SMTP.
In practice, the use of dial-up IP connections to connect to the mail server via
telephone lines, and the fact that the power supply may be switched off when the
user returns home in the case of PC clients, means that mail cannot be transferred
until the user connects to the server.
POP (Post Office Protocol) servers are used in such cases, i.e., when the
connection is not permanently established.
1.5.2 POP SERVER CONFIGURATION

The POP server is a computer which receives user mail using SMTP. The mail for
the user includes a setting to ensure that it is directed to the POP server.
Following connection to the Internet, the user receives e-mail directed to the server
with POP procedures.
Appendix B
H132
As with SMTP, POP is text-based, and as such sends command lines and receives
responses, as well as sending instructions for user identification by clients,
transmission of passwords, acquisition of mail, and deletion of mail on the server.
SM
APPENDIX B-13
H551
MIME
1 June, 1998
1.6 MIME
1.6.1 OVERVIEW
Audio messages and image files cannot be sent without further processing, if mail
is restricted solely to characters.
MIME (Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions) is a specification for the inclusion of
various types of data in e-mail, and currently supported by almost all e-mail
software for attachment of files.
MIME is defined in RFCs 2045 - 2049.
1.6.2 MIME FUNCTIONS

MIME supports the following functions.
Inclusion of multiple objects in e-mail. other than text, each able to be
handled at the receiving end.
Binary encoding.
Insertion of non-ASCII code characters (eg names in Japanese) in the
header.
As MIME is a set of conventions which dictate how the main text of the message is
to be handled, it employs a character string, referred to as the MIME header, to
specify the content and method of encoding used, and to identify whether or not
MIME is used in the mail.
1.6.3 MIME HEADER

Messages using MIME contain a header field as follows.
MIME-Version: 1.0
The use or not of this field determines whether or not the main text of the message
follows the MIME conventions. Currently, only Version 1.0 of MIME exists.
MIME Header
Header
MIME-Version
Content-Type
Format
MIME-Version: 1.0
Content-Type:
Type/Subtype [;parameter]
Content-Transfer- Encoding method used when sending
Content-Transfer-Encoding:
Encoding
data
Encodingtype
Content-ID
A unique data ID. Uses the message ID. Content-ID: Message ID
ContentData description
Content-Description:
Description
This is MIME Data
ContentMIME header for future expansion
H551
Meaning
Indicates that the message uses MIME
Message data type
APPENDIX B-14
SM
MIME
[Content-Type] is added to the header to indicate that a message is in MIME

format. The [Content-Transfer-Encoding] header is also added as necessary to
indicate how the data has been encoded. As some types of data do not require
encoding, the [Content-Transfer-Encoding] header is not always required.
The [Content-Description] header is used when including comments. The content
of this header is interpreted as comments referring to the content of the message,
and has no effect on operation of the software.
1.6.4 DATA TYPES SUPPORTED WITH MIME

The following data types may be specified in the [Content-Type] header.
Information consisting of characters. The ISO-2022-JP character
Text:
code set is used in Japan, while US-ASCII is used for ASCII
codes.
Still images such as GIF and JPEG data.
Image:
Audio information.
Audio:
Digital animation such as animation and MPEG.
Video:
Application: Various application files and standard data formats.
Multipart: Main text which includes multiple objects. A MIME header is also
added within the message to record other messages. Use of this
data type allows sound, animation, and messages to be included
in the same e-mail message.
Message: Text message information.
1.6.5 MULTIPART
A data type which allows inclusion of multiple data items (objects). It allows for the
inclusion of text and attached files in messages, and is the most commonly used
type.
Multipart supports the following sub-types to indicate the relationship between the
individual parts.
The message consists of multiple independent parts.
Mixed:
Alternative: The message consists of multiple parts of the same content, but
in different format.
The message consists of multiple parts which are reproduced
Parallel:
and displayed simultaneously.
A collection of RFC822-format messages in digest format.
Digest:
SM
APPENDIX B-15
H551
Appendix B
H132
Multipart indicates the inclusion of multiple parts (data) in the main text, while the
Contents-Type header indicates how the individual parts are handled.
MIME
1 June, 1998
Example: Received Multipart Mail Header

Received: from f64g.shinyoko.ricoh.co.jp ([133.139.167.30]) by bb.shinyoko.ricoh.co.jp
(4.1/2.8Wb-91Jan07)
id AA15193; Sun, 15 Feb 98 14:53:50 JST
Return-Path: <f64g@shinyoko.ricoh.co.jp>
Date: 15 Feb 1998 14:54:06 +0900
Mime-Version: 1.0
To: taro@shinyoko.ricoh.co.
From: f64g@shinyoko.ricoh.co.jp
Mail header

(RICOH SERVICE)
text message here
----ICFAX_60670AE6CB-Content-Type: image/tiff; name = FAX.TIF
Content-Transfer-Encoding: base64
Part header
Content-Discription: FAX.TIF
SUkqAAgAAAARAP4ABAABAAAAAgAAAAABBAABAAAAwAYAAAEBBAABAAAAggQ
AAAIBAwABAAAAAQAAAAMBAwABAAAAAwAAAAYBAwABAAAAAAAAAAoBAwAB
AAAAAgAAABEBBAABAAAA6gAAABUBAwABAAAAAQAAABYBBAABAAAAggQAABc
BBAABAAAA7FwAABoBBQABAAAA2gAAABsBBQABAAAA4gAAACQBBAABAAAABAA
AACgBAwABAAAAAgAAACkBAwACAAAAAAABADEBAgAEAAAAICAgIAAAAADIAAA
AAQAAAGQAAAABAAAAAICWUG1JAYCWUG1JAYA6XQlVNAqxa5L5Sa8AgEktODg4I
WwuCCGOPMJQpVUFgSUU0risFhyDBBMRXPRSM0czZRVlJhLoRid2yafCjODgCNYmUC
HEpR8AgEmxOC7H5ThDwcdZLzHXqpfk9bOjWQGAslkBgLJZAYCyWQGAslkBgLJZAYC
yWQGAslkBgLJZAYCyWQGAslkBgLJZAYCyWQGAslkBgLJZAYCyWQGAslkBgLJZAYC
yWQGAslkBgLJZAYCyWQGAslkBgLJZAYCyWQGAslkBgLJZAYCyWQGAslkBgLJZAYC
yWQGAslkBgLJZAYCyWQGAslkBAA==
----ICFAX_60670AE6CB----
A Multipart message contains multiple parts, with the strings which delineate these
parts being specified with the boundary parameter.
Each part is delineated with
--boundary_string
and the final part is indicated with
--boundary_string--
H551
APPENDIX B-16
SM
MIME
1.6.6 BINARY DATA ENCODING

The binary data must be encoded as character strings in order to insert a binary file
into a text message. In Internet mail, non-ASCII data such as single-byte Katakana
in Japanese is not sent correctly.
This encoding method is indicated in the [Content-Transfer-Encoding] field in the
MIME header. The following encoding methods may be specified in the [ContentTransfer-Encoding] field.
7-bit code (8th not used)
7-bit:
Full 8 bits used
8-bit:
Binary data
Binary:
Encoding of binary data in base64 notation
Base64:
Quoted Printable: Encoding of character subject binary data
Of the above, only 7-bit, Quoted Printable, and Base64 are normally used with email. Other encoding methods cannot be used unless they are supported over the
network.
1.6.7 BASE 64
Base 64 is commonly supported in e-mail application software for the transmission
of binary data.
Appendix B
H132
This method of encoding takes each six bits of the original binary data and
converts it to numbers between 0 and 63, each of these numbers being assigned
to one of 64 characters (26 upper case characters of the alphabet, 26 lower case
characters of the alphabet, the numbers 0~9, and the + and / symbols).
SM
APPENDIX B-17
H551
APPENDIX C
Rev. 01/00
Date:________________
Configuration Sheet for H132-41 Internet Fax

Customer Information:
Company Name : __________________________________________________________
Address : ________________________________________________________________
System Administrator Name : ______________________________
Phone: ________________________________
Fax: _______________________________
Required Network Environment

(These are the Network/PC requirements for the installation of the H551 Internet Fax. Please make sure you have all of the following.)
1. Local Area Network:
! Ethernet ! 10 Base-T ! TCP/IP Network OS : _______________________
2. Internet e-mail Server: ! SMTP Server ! POP3 Server

! Windows 95 Client running on the LAN
3. PC(Client) :
The number of Users : ______________
Please note that Dial-up Connection and DHCP(Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) is not supported.
Network Information
Prior to installation, please assign an IP address, email address along with a Login Name and Login Password for the
H551 Internet Fax. In order to configure the machine during installation, please make sure you make the following
information available.
Internet Mail Settings

SMTP Server
__ __ __ . __ __ __ . __ __ __ . __ __ __
SMTP SERVER IP address
POP3 Server
__ __ __ . __ __ __ . __ __ __ . __ __ __
POP3 SERVER IP address
Host Name *
______________________________________
Host Name assigned to Internet Fax
e-mail Address
______________________________________
e-mail address for the Internet Fax
Domain Name *
______________________________________
Domain Name for Internet fax
Login Name
______________________________________
Login Name for Internet Fax
Login Password
______________________________________
Login Password for the Internet Fax
Note: Depending on the mail server, the host name and domain name may be mandatory. The names must be
spelled correctly.
APPENDIX C
H132
e-mail address: ___________________
H551
APPENDIX C-1
SM
TCP/IP Settings
IP Address
__ __ __ . __ __ __ . __ __ __ . __ __ __
IP address to be assigned for the Internet Fax
Subnet Mask
__ __ __ . __ __ __ . __ __ __ . __ __ __
Subnet Mask IP address
Default Gateway
__ __ __ . __ __ __ . __ __ __ . __ __ __
Gateway IP address
Access Control*
__ __ __ . __ __ __ . __ __ __ . __ __ __
This can be omitted.
Access Mask*
__ __ __ . __ __ __ . __ __ __ . __ __ __
Note: Access Control and Access Mask can be used to specify client PCs that can access to PC-Faxing function
by TCP/IP. *Leave these settings at 0.0.0.0 if you dont need to use it. (Refer to the NIC Card operator manual
Page. 43 for details.)
Other Settings
Admin. Mail Address* ______________________________________
Backup Mail Address* ______________________________________
Note: * Refer to the NIC Card operator manual Page. 44 for details.
Detail Information on your Internet e-mail server

Please provide the following information below for better technical assistance:
Network OS:
U Windows NT U NetWare U UNIX U OS/2 U VINES U Other (
Network OS Version Number : ____________________

Internet Service Provider (ISP) name : _________________________________________________
SMTP Server
POP3 Server
Brand (i.e. Compaq, Dell, etc)
___________________________ ___________________________
Model Number
___________________________ ___________________________
E-mail Server Software
___________________________ ___________________________
Software Version number
___________________________ ___________________________
Connection Method to ISP
V Dedicated Line
V Other (
U Dedicated Line
U Other (
Is there Size Limitation set on the e-mail server? If so, what is the limitation size?
U Yes U No
SM
__________ MB
APPENDIX C-2
U Yes U No
__________ MB
H551
TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETINS
TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN

BULLETIN NUMBER:
H132 001
01/06/2000
APPLICABLE MODEL:
GESTETNER INTERNET FAX OPTION for 9878
RICOH - INTERNET FAX OPTION for FAX4800L
SAVIN - INTERNET FAX OPTION for 3695
PARTS CATALOG CORRECTIONS
GENERAL:
The following parts corrections are being issued for all H132 Parts Section. Please update your Parts
Catalogs with the following information.
PART NUMBER
H1326010
H1323188
H5516020
OLD DESCRIPTION
PCB IFAXF64G
Guide F64G
PCB OPIF64G
NEW DESCRIPTION
PCB IFAXH132
Guide H132
PCB OPIH132
QTY
1
1
1
REFERENCE
PAGE ITEM
3
4
3
7
3
9
CONTROL NO. 176FAX
PARTS
Note: This copy is intended as a master original

for reproduction of additional bulletins.
SUBJECT:

BULLETIN NUMBER:
H132 - 002
01/06/2000
APPLICABLE MODEL:
GESTETNER INTERNET FAX OPTION for 9878
RICOH - INTERNET FAX OPTION for FAX4800L
SAVIN - INTERNET FAX OPTION for 3695
SERVICE MANUAL - INSERT
GENERAL:
The Service Manual pages listed below must be replaced with the pages supplied. Each bulletin
package contains 1 set of replacement pages.
PAGES:
SERVICE
MANUAL

SUBJECT:
The revised areas have been highlighted by an arrow .
1-1
1-3
3-3
3-4
4-11
B-5
B-8
B-10
C-1
Updated Information (Specifications)

Updated Information (Networking)
Updated Information (Installing NIC FAX Board)
Updated Information (Initial Settings)
Updated Information (Service RAM Addresses)
Updated Information (DNS and Domains)
Updated Information (Message Headers)
Updated Information (Fields for Sending E-Mail)
Updated Information (Configuration Sheet)
CONTROL NO. 176FAX

1.1 SPECIFICATIONS
Protocol
Transmission:
Reception:
Type
LAN board option for H551
Connectivity
Local area network
Ethernet 10base-T
Connection
Resolutions
Main scan: 200 dpi
Transmission Time
9 s (through a LAN)
(Slerexe letter)
MTF correction: OFF
TTI: None
Document Size
Data rate
10 Mbps (10base-T)
Power Supply
USA: 115 Vac, 60 Hz
50/60 Hz
Power Consumption
Standby: 50 W
Transmit: 60 W
Receive: 300 W
Copy:
330 W
Remark
The machine must be set up as an
features will not work (e.g., Autorouting).
E-mail File Format

Single/multipart
MIME conversion
Image: DCX format
TIFF-F (MH) format
SM
1-1
H551
Overall
Information
H132
SPECIFICATIONS
Rev. 01/00
NETWORKING
Rev. 01/00
Overall
Information
H132
1.3 NETWORKING
1.3.1 OVERVIEW
Japan
G3 Fax
Machine
USA
011-1-212-555-3456#8888
name@abcd.com
PSTN
NIC Fax
Laser Printer
Router
Server
Ethernet
nicfax@abcd.
com
03-3123-4567
nicfax@abcd.com
NIC Fax
nicfax@abcd. com
name@abcd.com
Router
nicfax@xyz.co.jp
Laser Printer
Server
Ethernet
Internet
Paper
Paper
This model, the H132, is also known as the NIC fax.
Paper
PC display
H132V551.WMF
The above drawing outlines some of the network operations that the H132 can
support.
(name@abcd.com).
it up.
SM
1-3
H551
Rev. 01/00

cover.
NOTE: Print out the RAM dump for

the following addresses before downloading the new software. Refer to
the H551 service manual, page 4-5.
480800 (H) to 480806 (H): Print top
H551I510.WMF
margin 48080B (H) to 480811 (H):
Print left margin. This is because the
machine will automatically perform
the RAM reset level 1 immediately after downloading the new software.
8. Download the new software to the machine. (Refer to the H551 service manual,
page 4-13 for details.) Mount the EPROMs packaged with the optional unit with
part numbers in ascending order from sockets 1 to 4.
NOTE: RDS (Remote Diagnostics System) can be used to read the H551s
programmed dial data and write it back to the machine after the RAM reset level 1
occurs. RDS must be enabled locally at the H551 by using the On/Off Switches
(Function 62) or by changing System Switch 02 bit 7 to 1. RDS cannot be used to
read system data (counters, bit switches, RTI, TTI, CSI, etc.) and write back to the
H551.

Clock
the machine.

Settings.
SM
3-3
H551
Installation
H132
INITIAL SETTINGS
Rev. 01/00

NOTE: Make sure that the following items are registered in the mail server before
installation. The information listed below must be obtained from the User's
Network Administrator.
IP address
Host name
Items to Program
IP address
Subnet mask
Default gateway
Access control
Access mask
SMTP server
POP server
Host name
Mail address
Domain name

Login name
Login password
Backup mail address

Remarks
Optional
Optional
Optional
* See Note 2
Optional
* See Note 2
Optional
Optional
NOTE: 1. If the machine is installed as a standalone fax, or if the mail server is not
ready, program only the following items.
IP address: 127. 0. 0. 1
NOTE: 2. Depending on the Mail Server, these items may be mandatory. If
mandatory, the host name and domain name must be spelled correctly.
H551
3-4
SM
Rev. 01/00

!CAUTION
Do not change these settings which are marked as Not used or Read
only.
480005 (H) - RAM Reset Level 1 (Common use with H551)
Change the data at this address to FF (H), then switch the machine off and on to
4800A0 to 4800AF (H) - LAN Switches
480286 to 480288 (H) - E-mail Tx counter
Address
480286
480287
480288
High
Tens digit
Thousands digit
Low
Unit digit
Hundreds digit
Ten thousands digit
Service
Tables
H132
48028A to 48028C (H) - E-mail Rx counter

48028E to 480290 (H) - LAN FAX counter
4BFC01 to 4BFC07 (H) - NIC ROM version (Read only)
4BFC28 to 4BFC47 (H) - Password for administrator mode (max. 31 characters ASCII)
NOTE: If the number of characters are less than the maximum, add a stop code
(00 (H)) after the last character.
4BFC4C to 4BFC4F (H) - IP address
e.g. 133.139.24.3
4BFC4C (H)
4BFC4D (H)
4BFC4E (H)
4BFC4F (H)
1st address: 133

2nd address: 139
3rd address: 24
4th address:
3
85 (H)
8B (H)
18 (H)
03 (H)
4BFC50 to 4BFC53 (H) - Subnet mask information
4BFC58 to 4BFC5B (H) - Default gateway address
4BFC5C to 4BFC5F (H) - Restriction on communication of LAN FAX
(Access control)
4BFC60 to 4BFC63 (H) - Restriction on communication of LAN FAX
(Access mask)
4BFC64 to 4BFC67 (H) - SMTP server IP address
4BFC68 to 4BFC6B (H) - POP server IP address
SM
4-11
H551
Ver. 01/00
INTERNET MAIL

The IP address allows destinations within the Internet to be identified. This IP
address is, however, a string of numbers not easily remembered by the user. To
resolve this problem, a corresponding name is added so that the user need only
specify the name in order to identify the destination.
DNS was developed for this purpose. Internet domain names are distributed
among organizations in a hierarchical manner, with lower order domains being
managed by the higher order domain. All organizations participating in the Internet
have a domain name. The domain name first identifies countries, and is
subsequently further divided in a tree structure to identify organizations.
The name server (DNS server) located in each domain holds the information about
the domains and hosts under its management. When the client communicates
using a host name or domain name, an inquiry is made to the DNS to obtain the
destination IP address. Note that this domain name structure is independent of the
physical structure of the network. The items in brackets below are examples of
domain and mail addresses.
Appendix B
H132
H132X510..PCX
SM
APPENDIX B-5
H551
Rev. 01/00
MESSAGE HEADERS
1.3 MESSAGE HEADERS

1.3.1 REQUESTS FOR COMMENTS
The basic protocols used for transmission of messages on the Internet are defined
in RFC822. RFC822 primarily defines the header information for e-mail, with the
details of the main text of the message being defined in MIME (RFC2045 - 2047).
NOTE: 1) An RFC (Request For Comments) is a document formally released by
the Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF). The IETF has released a
wide variety of RFCs on technical matters (e.g., network protocols)
related to the Internet environment.
2) MIME (Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions) is a protocol which
removed such restrictions as the number of characters per line, and the
maximum size of an e-mail transmission. It also made possible the
transmission of non-character data (e.g., programs and bitmaps).
1.3.2 HEADER FORMAT

The header of an e-mail message consists of a header and the main text. A blank
line is inserted between this header and the main text (the blank line is not included
in the header).
The header is defined as a collection of fields, with the field format as follows.
field name : content
An example of the To field, indicating the destination, is as follows.
To:XXX@ricoh.com
Header Example:
Received: from H132.shinyoko.ricoh.co.jp ([133.139.167.30]) by bb.shinyoko.ricoh.co.jp

(4.1/2.8Wb-91Jan07)
id AA15193; Sun, 15 Feb 98 14:53:50 JST
Return-Path: <H132@shinyoko.ricoh.co.jp>
Date: 15 Feb 1998 14:54:06 +0900
Mime-Version: 1.0
To: hanako@shinyoko.ricoh.co.jp
From: H132@shinyoko.ricoh.co.jp
(RICOH SERVICE)
H551
APPENDIX B-8
SM
MESSAGE HEADERS
Rev. 01/00
1.3.4 FIELDS FOR SENDING E-MAIL

From Field
The From field indicates the person sending the mail. The difference between the
From and Sender fields is that between the person creating the message and the
person actually sending the message. These two fields are used when the two
differ. When the From field is omitted, the Sender field is added automatically.
When a error occurs, a error notification is sent to the destination in the Sender
field. When the Sender field has been omitted, the notification is sent to the
destination in the From field.
Fields containing mail addresses may also include real names as a comment (the
same applies to the Person Sending Mail and Addressee fields). In both cases
below , IC FAX is handled as a comment, and H132@ricoh.com is recognized as
the address.
Example 1 From: IC FAX <H132@ricoh.com>
Example 2 From: H132@ricoh.com (IC FAX)
Multiple mail addresses may be delineated by commas, and both address formats
may be used together.
Reply-To Field
Reply-To clearly specifies the address to which the reply is to be sent. As this field
may be omitted, it is possible that mail may be sent with this field blank. In such
cases, the mail is returned to the address in the From field.
When both the From and Reply-To fields are used, the latter has priority.
The Return-Path field appears to have a similar function at first glance,. However it
is not for return of mail, but is automatically added by the transfer system to specify
the person submitting the mail, and is used to investigate the mail route when an
error occurs.
1.3.5 ADDRESSEE FIELDS

To Field
The To field specifies the addressee for the mail. As with the From field, multiple
mail addresses may be delineated with commas. The To field differs from the Cc
field in that only the name of the person sending the message is specified.
Cc Field
Mail is sent to the addresses in the Cc (carbon copy) field in the same way as to
the address in the To field. The difference only with the To field is whether the
name is in the To field or the Cc field of the received mail.
H551
APPENDIX B-10
SM
Rev. 01/00
Date:________________
Configuration Sheet for H132-41 Internet Fax

Customer Information:
Company Name : __________________________________________________________
Address : ________________________________________________________________
System Administrator Name : ______________________________
Phone: ________________________________
Fax: _______________________________
Required Network Environment

(These are the Network/PC requirements for the installation of the H551 Internet Fax. Please make sure you have all of the following.)
1. Local Area Network:
! Ethernet ! 10 Base-T ! TCP/IP Network OS : _______________________
2. Internet e-mail Server: ! SMTP Server ! POP3 Server

! Windows 95 Client running on the LAN
3. PC(Client) :
The number of Users : ______________
Please note that Dial-up Connection and DHCP(Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) is not supported.
Network Information
Prior to installation, please assign an IP address, email address along with a Login Name and Login Password for the
H551 Internet Fax. In order to configure the machine during installation, please make sure you make the following
information available.
Internet Mail Settings

SMTP Server
__ __ __ . __ __ __ . __ __ __ . __ __ __
SMTP SERVER IP address
POP3 Server
__ __ __ . __ __ __ . __ __ __ . __ __ __
POP3 SERVER IP address
Host Name *
______________________________________
Host Name assigned to Internet Fax
e-mail Address
______________________________________
e-mail address for the Internet Fax
Domain Name *
______________________________________
Domain Name for Internet fax
Login Name
______________________________________
Login Name for Internet Fax
Login Password
______________________________________
Login Password for the Internet Fax
Note: Depending on the mail server, the host name and domain name may be mandatory. The names must be
spelled correctly.
APPENDIX C
H132
e-mail address: ___________________
H551
APPENDIX C-1
SM
H132
PARTS CATALOG
This section instructs you as to the numbers and names of parts on this machine
PARTS LIST (H132)
F64G.WMF
H132
Parts Location and List
PART LIST (H132)

Index
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
H132
Part No.
H1323183
H1324561
H1324570
H1433335
H1326010
H1435300
H5153186
H1323188
H1328650
H1328600
H5516020
Rev. 1/6/00
Qty Per
Assembly
Shield Panel - Option
1
Sheet - Operation Panel (US)
1
Sheet - Operation Panel (EU)
1
Earth Clip
1
PCB IFAXH132
1
Flat Cable - OPIF G4
1
Ground Plate - G4
1
Guide H132
1
Operation Manual - Viewer - ENG (US)
1
Operation Manual (US)
1
PCB OPIH132
1
Index
Qty Per
Part No.
Description
No.
Assembly
101 09513006B Philips Screw With Flat Washer - M3x6
102 04523008Z Bind Tapping Screw - M3x8
103 16070576 Sleeve Core (US)
16070627 Ferrite Core (EU)
Description
Parts Location and List
TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETINS
CUSTOMER SERVICE GROUP
BULLETIN NUMBER: FAX4700L-001
DATE
APPLICABLE MODEL: FAX4700L
GENERAL:
PROCEDURE:
t COPY QUALITY
Up to two (3) Optional Cassettes can be installed on the FAX4700L. The Printer Driver
does not allow for three cassettes at the same time in the printer mode. Therefore, before
printing, the cassette you would like to use should be chosen as the optional cassette in
the user program mode. Select the cassette in accordance with the following procedure.
TRANSMIT / RECEIVE
1. Press Function 6 0 2 2 2 2 6 and 2.
3. Press the
Key until your choice is selected.
t MECHANICAL
2. Press the w Key until "CASSETTE FOR PRINTER SELECT" is displayed.

"OPEN CST CST1 CST2" are displayed in this screen, if three (3) cassettes are
installed.
Note: This copy intended as master of original

SUBJECT: PRINTER DRIVER
4. Press the YES Key to confirm your choice.

t ELECTRICAL
t
FSM
Cassette 2
Option Type 140F or S
PAPER FEED
Cassette 1
Option Type 140F or S
Side Cassette
Option Type 100
s
PARTS
t
OTHER

03/25/96
APPLICABLE MODEL: FAX4700L w/ PAPER FEED UNIT TYPE 140F
t
TRANSMIT / RECEIVE
t COPY QUALITY

SUBJECT: MULTI-FEED, PAPER SKEW OR

BROKEN /DISLODGED PAPER FEED
ROLLER
SYMPTOM NO. 1:
Multi-feed or paper skew with the Optional Paper Feed Unit Type 140F.
NOTE: This symtom will not occure with the PFU 140S
SYMPTOM NO. 2:
s MECHANICAL
At installation, when the Paper Feed Unit is removed from the box, you may notice that
the Snap Ring and/or Bushing (0805 3385) may have detach from the Paper Feed Roller
during shipping. In some cases, the Paper Feed Roller is broken on the left side where
the Snap Ring (H006 2383) attaches. This symptom has only occurred during shipping
and should not occur under normal operating conditions.
t ELECTRICAL
s
PAPER FEED
E-Ring and Bushing

Loose or Dislodged
Broken Area
CAUSE FOR SYMPTOM NO. 1:
FSM
The paper releases from the corner separators when the PFU cassette is forcefully
closed.
s
In an effort to quickly remedy Symptom No. 1, a modification was put into production. The
modification corrected symptom 1 but is causing symptom 2 during shipping.
PARTS
CAUSE FOR SYMPTOM NO. 2:
t
OTHER
Continued...
Technical Service Bulletin FAX4700L-002

Page 2 of 7
PRODUCTION COUNTERMEASURE
FOR SYMPTOM NO. 1 and 2:
The Paper Feed Unit Type 140F has been modified so the Paper Feed Unit Cassette
cannot be forcefully closed. Also, the paper is now lifted in two small stages rather than
one large stage. Refer to the Field Countermeasure for full details of the modification.
NOTE: Step 14 of the Modification Procedure has been added to correct Symptom No. 2.
Refer to the Units affected below for the machines that may exhibit Symptom No.
2 , as some machines were shipped with the original Production
Countermeasure (No step 14).
UNITS AFFECTED:
Paper Feed Unit Type 140Fs manufactured between serial numbers M5451200150 and
M5460100000 had the original modification kit installed during production. These
machines should not exhibit symptom 1 but may exhibit Symptom No. 2 during shipping.
Paper Feed Unit Type 140Fs manufactured between serial number M5451200000 and
M5451200150 and after M5460100000 will have the updated modification kit installed
during production. These machines should not exhibit either Symptom 1 or 2.
FIELD COUNTERMEASURE FOR SYMPTOM 1:

A Paper Feed Unit modification kit is available. The Kit consist of several parts that must
be installed by utilizing the procedure on the following pages of this bulletin.
PART NUMBER
H515 9600
DESCRIPTION
Paper Feed Unit Modification Kit
Based on machine shipment records, one (1) Modification Kit will automatically be sent for
every two (2) Paper Feed Units your dealership has purchased. Additional kits will be
supplied upon request.
Ricoh will exchange Paper Feed Units that have not been installed, are new in box and
are within the Units Affected. Contact your local Ricoh Region Operations Group for
exchange instructions.
FIELD COUNTERMEASURE FOR SYMPTOM 2:

Replace the broken Paper Feed Roller. Utilize the existing E-Ring and bushing. This
symptom has only occurred during shipping and should not occur under normal operating
conditions.
If the Paper Feed Roller is not broken but the E-Ring and/or Bushing has come off,
reattach them.
A Paper Feed Roller can be acquired at no charge by completing the form on the last
page of this bulletin.
Continued...
Technical Service Bulletin FAX4700L-002

Page 3 of 7
PAPER FEED UNIT TYPE 140F MODIFICATION

PROCEDURE
UNIT TYPE 140F MODIFICATION (KIT P/N H515 9600)
Kit Contents
NO.
DESCRIPTION
QTY.
Spring - Corner Separator
Link Assy Rear
Link Assy- Front
Cassette Rack
Bottom Guide
Bottom Stopper
Lock Release Guide
Spacer
Guard Plate
10 Guide Plate - Cassette
11 Oil Damper Bracket
12 Oil Damper
13 Philips Screw with Flat Washer - M3x6
14 E-Ring -JRE4
15 Film - Bottom
NOTE: This procedure requires attaching parts which utilize peel and stick tape. Ensure
all surfaces are clean prior to attaching the tape.
STEP 1
Remove the Cassette from the Paper Feed Unit and turn the Cassette over.
Paper Cassette
Rear Link Assembly

B
A
STEP 2
Assemble and install the Rear Link
Assembly to the bottom of the
Cassette.
Push
Fit
Push
Fit
a. Attach the Spring on the Rear Link

Assembly as illustrated. Side (B) of the
spring should be formed so that it cannot
come off. Side (A) of the spring should
stay as is.
b. Remove the peel and stick tape from the
back of the Rear Link Assembly and attach
it to the Cassette as illustrated.
Paper Cassette Bottom
Continued...
Technical Service Bulletin No. FAX4700L-002

Page 4 of 7
Front Link
Assembly
STEP 3
Remove the peel and stick tape from the
Front Link Assembly and attach it to the
Cassette as illustrated.
Push
Fit
Fit
Push
STEP 4
Remove the peel and stick tape from
the Cassette Rack and attach it to the
right side of the Cassette as illustrated
Cassette
Rack
Cassette
Bottom
Guide
STEP 5
Remove the peel and stick tape from
the Bottom Guide and attach it to the
front left edge of the Cassette Bottom
Plate as illustrated.
Cassette
Bottom Plate
On Line
Fit Edge Of
The Hole
Cassette
Bottom Plate
Push
STEP 6
Remove and discard the (2) two Side
Plate Covers from the Right Side Plate
in the Paper Feed Unit.
Side Plate Covers
Right Side Plate
STEP 7
Remove the peel and stick tape
from the Bottom Stopper and
attach it to the front left side of
the Paper Feed Unit as
illustrated.
Left
Side
Push and Fit

Right
Side
Bottom Stopper
Continued...

Page 5 of 7
Lock Release
Guide
STEP 8
Remove and discard the Lock Release
Guide from the Base of the Paper Feed
Unit. Install the new style Lock Release
Guide utilizing the same mounting screws.
Tapping
Screw
Front
Base
Screw
STEP 9
Attach the spacer to the Bottom Plate.
a. Carefully peel the front side of the
mylar off the Bottom Plate in the
Paper Feed Unit as illustrated.
b. Remove the peel and stick tape
from the Spacer and attach it
Bottom Plate as illustrated.
Spacer
Center
Center
Mylar
Base
c. Reattach the Mylar.

Peel Off
Spacer
Mylar
STEP 10
Guard Plate and attach it to the Right Side
Plate in the Paper Feed Unit as illustrated.
Guard Plate
Push and Hit
STEP 11
Guide Plate and attach it to the Right Side
Plate in the Paper Feed Unit as illustrated.
Guide Plate
STEP 12
Remove the Right Side Cover from the
Paper Feed Unit. Remove the peel and
stick tape from the Oil Damper Bracket
and attach it to the Right Side Plate as
illustrated.
Push
Fit
Right Side Plate
Oil Damper
Bracket
Continued...

Page 6 of 7
STEP 13
Attach the Oil Damper to the Paper Feed Unit.
a. Insert the Cassette into the Paper Feed Unit leaving approximately 12 inches
sticking out.
b. Loosely attach the Oil Damper onto the Oil Damper Bracket by utilizing the two
supplied screws.
c. Line up the teeth of the Cassette Rack with the Oil Damper gear teeth then tighten
the screws.
d. Open and close the Cassette several times and check the movement of the
Cassette.
Cassette Rack
Oil Damper
Bracket
Oil Damper
Oil Damper
Bracket
Screws
STEP 14
Replace the Paper Feed Roller E-Ring with (2) new type E-Rings.
Check operation and make adjustments if necessary.
OLD
E-RING
NEW
E-RING X 2
X2
Continued...
Tech Service Bulletin No. FAX4700L-002

Page 7 of 7
SUBJECT: PFU140F PAPER FEED ROLLER

Fax this entire page in "DETAIL" mode ATTN: Technical Services - Facsimile
FAX Number:
(201) - 244-2634
Each serial number given will represent a request for one Paper Feed Roller.
PFU140 F - Serial Number (s)

1
2
3
4
5
All serial number information will be verified before shipment is made. Your PFU140F
must be within the Units Affected to receive these parts at no charge.
RETURN SHIPPING LABEL - PLEASE TYPE OR PRINT CLEARLY.

FROM: Ricoh Technical Services, 155 Passaic Avenue, Fairfield, NJ 07004
NAME:
ADDRESS:
CITY:
STATE:
ATTENTION:
ZIP CODE:
PHONE # :
DEALER ACCOUNT NUMBER:
This exchange procedure is

valid now through Aug. 31, 1996
04/24/96
t
TRANSMIT / RECEIVE
GENERAL:
This information should be incorporated into all existing Ricoh FAX4700L Parts Catalog
documentation.
UPDATE NO. 1 -
To reduce electrical noise, a Filter was added to the Upper PFU

Harness.
t COPY QUALITY

SUBJECT: PARTS CATALOG UPDATES
t MECHANICAL
OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO.

H515 5333
H516 5332
DESCRIPTION
QTY INT PAGE
INDEX
PFU 140S Harness - Upper
1-5
23
PFU 140F Harness - Upper
1-5
t ELECTRICAL
REFERENCE
19
t
All PFU Type 140 F and S units manufactured after serial numbers M5451000000
and M551000000 respectively will have the filter added to the Upper PFU Harness during
production.
PAPER FEED
UNITS AFFECTED:
t
FSM
s
PARTS
INTERCHANGEABILITY CHART:
3/S
NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD

machines. OLD parts can be used in OLD
and NEW machines.
NEW parts can be used in OLD and NEW
OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW
machines. OLD parts CAN NOT be used in
3 machines. NEW parts CAN NOT be used in
NEW machines.
OLD machines.
Must be installed as a set on units manufactured prior to the S/N cut-in. On units manufactured
after the S/N cut-in or previously modified, use the new part numbers individually.
Continued...
OTHER
OLD and NEW parts can be used in both

OLD and NEW machines.

Page 2 of 2
UPDATE NO. 2 -
Correct the Part Catalog as follows:
Correct the following Part Numbers.
INCORRECT
PART NO.
REFERENCE
CORRECT
PART NO.
DESCRIPTION
PAGE
INDEX
H516 5012
H515 5324
Ground Wire - Image Sensor
1-11
21
H515 3376
H516 3380
Film Stay
1-25
28
Delete the following parts from the Parts Catalog.
PART NO.
REFERENCE
DESCRIPTION
PAGE
INDEX
H516 3407
Cassette Base - A4/LT
1-29
H521 3151
Sponge - Base - Upper Left
1-25
Correct the following description.
INCORRECT DESCRIPTION
REFERENCE
CORRECT DESCRIPTION
PAGE
INDEX
Cassette
Cassette Base - LT
1-29
Safety Switch JFA1I-AA20
Interlock Switch - Fail
1-23
109
UPDATE NO. 3 -
To meet safety standards, Contact Glass Holders have been added.
Left Contact Glass

Holder
Right Contact Glass

Holder
Added
Added
REFERENCE
PART NUMBER
DESCRIPTION
QTY PAGE
INDEX
H515 1090
Holder - Contact Glass - Left
1-11
46*
H515 1091
Holder - Contact Glass - Right
1-11
47*
* DENOTES NEW ITEM
UNITS AFFECTED:
All FAX4700L machines manufactured after serial number M0451200000 will have the
Left and Right Contact Glass Holders installed during production.
04/24/96
t
TRANSMIT / RECEIVE
GENERAL:
To reduce ozone emissions and improve Tx and copy quality, Sponges have been added
to and removed from the Main Frame and ADF as illustrated on page 2 of this bulletin.
REFERENCE
DESCRIPTION
QTY PAGE
INDEX
0-1
1-25
40*
H515 3193
Sponge - Duct - Middle
0-1
1-25
41*
H515 3195
Sponge - Duct - Rear - Right
0-1
1-25
42*
H515 3198
Sponge - Duct - Upper - Left
0-1
1-25
43*
H515 3170
Sponge - ADF - Rear
0-1
1-9
29*
H515 3171
Sponge - ADF - Rear 2
0-1
1-9
30*
H515 3172
Sponge - ADF - Right
0-1
1-9
31*
H515 3173
Sponge - ADF - 2
0-1
1-9
32*
H515 3174
Sponge - Lock
0-1
1-9
33*
H515 3175
Sponge - ADF - Rear - Front
0-1
1-9
34*
H515 3176
Sponge - Fan
0-1
1-23
29*
H516 3150
Sponge - 3
1-0
1-25
37
H516 3152
Sponge - 5
1-0
1-25
39
* DENOTES NEW ITEM
t ELECTRICAL
Sponge - Duct - Upper
t MECHANICAL
H515 3192
s COPY QUALITY

SUBJECT: COPY QUALITY
PAPER FEED
UNITS AFFECTED:
t
FSM
Sponges added to and removed from the Main Frame and ADF during production.
s
PARTS
t
OTHER
Continued...

Page 2 of 2
ADF
Lock Sponge (H515 3174)
ADF Sponge-Right (H515 3172)
ADF Sponge-2 (H515 3173)
ADF Sponge-Rear Front

(H515 3175)
ADF Sponge-Rear (H515 3170)
ADF Sponge-Rear 2 (H515 3171)
Duct Sponge-Upper
(H515 3192)
Development Unit Spacer
(H515 3116)
Duct Sponge-Rear-Right
(H515 3195)
Duct Sponge-Upper Left

(H515 3198)
Duct Sponge-Middle
(H5153193)
Fan Sponge
(H515 3176)
Cooling Fan
(H516 5041)
04/24/96
GENERAL:
NOTE: A Cleaning Tool for the Scanner Mirror is not available at this time.
PART NUMBER
DESCRIPTION
1st, 2nd and 3rd Mirror Cleaning Procedure:

1. Attach the felt pad to the Cleaning Tool.
2. (For the 1st Mirror and 2nd Mirror) - Remove the Exposure Glass and clean the 1st
and 2nd Mirror as illustrated in below.
UP
R1
Cleaning Tool
for the 1st Mirror
t
PAPER FEED
1st Mirror
Cleaning Tool
for the 3rd Mirror
Felt Pad
UP R2
FSM
Cleaning Tool
for the 2nd Mirror
3rd Mirror
Felt Pad
t ELECTRICAL
3. (For the 3rd Mirror) - Remove the Lens Cover and the Shading Pate and clean the
3rd Mirror as illustrated below.
t MECHANICAL
Cleaning Tool - R1: 1st Mirror

Cleaning Tool - R2: 2nd Mirror
Cleaning Tool - R3: 3rd Mirror
Felt for the Cleaning Tool
H515 9350
s COPY QUALITY
Cleaning Tools for the First, Second and Third Mirror are now available. Follow the
procedure below when utilizing the tools. The tools can be acquired through normal NSPC
channels.
TRANSMIT / RECEIVE

SUBJECT: MIRROR CLEANING TOOLS
PARTS
2nd Mirror
OTHER
Felt Pad
05/20/96
APPLICABLE MODEL: FAX4700L w/ ISDN Interface Type 140
t
TRANSMIT / RECEIVE
SYMPTOM:
The Board Bracket Screw is too long and comes in contact with the IC Card Guide and
possibly the IC Card.
Tapping Screw
t ELECTRICAL
Board Bracket
t MECHANICAL
IC Card Guide
t COPY QUALITY

SUBJECT: ISDN INTERFACE INSTALLATION

PRECAUTION
CAUSE:
FSM
ISDN Interface Type 140 Kits shipped with a Green Mark on the Carton have the shorter
screw packaged with the Kit.
Do not use the screw that is packaged with the Kit. Use a short screw (Tapping Screw M3x6 P/N 08025205).
PAPER FEED
FIELD COUNTERMEASURE:
The thickness of the Board Bracket is too thin.
The thickness of the Board Bracket has been increased.
PARTS
PRODUCTION COUNTERMEASURE:
t
OTHER
05/20/96
GENERAL:
PAGES:
4-32
Updated Information
t MECHANICAL
The revised areas have been highlighted by an arrow.
t COPY QUALITY
The Field Service Manual page(s) listed below must be replaced with the page(s)
supplied. Each bulletin package contains 1 sets of replacement page(s).
TRANSMIT / RECEIVE

SUBJECT: FIELD SERVICE MANUAL - INSERT
t ELECTRICAL
t
PAPER FEED
s
FSM
t
PARTS
t
OTHER
05/20/96
GENERAL:
documentation.
TRANSMIT / RECEIVE
t COPY QUALITY

t MECHANICAL
Mark
Blind
The part number for the Paper Tray has not changed and the old
and new style Paper Trays are interchangeable.
t ELECTRICAL
and
UPDATE NO. 1 - To improve paper size selection, a MarkPaperBlind have been
added to the Paper Cassette Type 100
Tray as illustrated.
t
PAPER FEED
UPDATE NO. 2 - Please correct your Parts Catalog as follows.
Seal 2
1-9
Side Fence Assembly
1-7
Side Fence Assembly
1-7
CORRECT
PART NO.
H516 1263
INDEX
PARTS
H515 1322
PAGE
INCORRECT
PART NO.
DESCRIPTION
PFU Type 140 F Section

H515 0101
H515 3611
FSM
REFERENCE
PFU Type 140 S Section

H515 0101
H515 3611
OTHER
05/20/96
GENERAL:
The FAX4700L FCE ROM has been upgraded to Rev "C". The upgrade will address the
following symptom.
Incorrect Page numbering when using the Auto Document Feature.
Page 1 will show 1/2

Page 2 will show 2/2
Page 3 will show 3/2.
All FAX4700L machines manufactured after serial number M0460200000 will have FCE
ROM Rev. "C" installed during production.
t ELECTRICAL
UNITS AFFECTED:
t MECHANICAL
When an Auto Document is attached to two (2) original pages, the page numbering will be
incorrect.
t COPY QUALITY
SYMPTOM:
TRANSMIT / RECEIVE

SUBJECT: FCE ROM UPGRADE
UPGRADING YOUR MACHINES FIRMWARE

t
PAPER FEED
As you should already know, replaceable ROMs are no longer used in the new family of
Ricoh Facsimile machines. To upgrade your machines firmware you must take advantage
of one of four new service tools (RDS, RRW, EPROM PCB, or a Like Model FCE). Refer
to Publications Bulletin PUB-069 for a full explanation of the FLASH ROM/SRAM Copy
Tool.
To upgrade your machines with firmware:
t
FSM
1. Acquire the new version firmware. Download the ROM data or RDS files via the
Ricoh Technical Services BBS (BBS No. 201-882-5243) or via RDS.
If you are unable to take advantage of the BBS or RDS, one master ROM can be
acquired by contacting the Facsimile Hotine.
s
PARTS
2. Once you have the ROM, ROM data or RDS Files, transfer the data to your
machines via one of the four above mentioned service tools.
t
OTHER
08/30/96
GENERAL:
documentation.
modified as illustrated. The modification will increase the strength

of the paper tray and prevent the spring from detaching if the tray
stopper is broken.
s COPY QUALITY
UPDATE NO. 1 - PAPER CASSETTE TYPE 100 - The Paper Tray has been
TRANSMIT / RECEIVE

[Paper Tray]
t MECHANICAL
Rounded
Stopper
Hole for Spring
Added
Old
Spring
t ELECTRICAL
Added
New
Spring

H515 3533
H516 3531
DESCRIPTION
Spring - Gear Arm
There is no part number change for the new stylePaper Tray Type 100
P/N H5163510. This modification has been implemented in May 1996.
QTY INT PAGE INDEX

1
1
31
3/S
13
PAPER FEED
REFERENCE
27
t
FSM
s
PARTS
0
Continued...
OTHER
3/S
NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD

machines. OLD parts can be used in OLD
and NEW machines.
NEW parts can be used in OLD and NEW
OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW
machines. OLD parts CAN NOT be used in
3 machines. NEW parts CAN NOT be used in
NEW machines.
OLD machines.
Must be installed as a set on units manufactured prior to the S/N cut-in. On units manufactured
after the S/N cut-in or previously modified, use the new part numbers individually.
OLD and NEW parts can be used in both

OLD and NEW machines.

Page 2 of 2
UPDATE NO. 2 - PFU 140F and S
- Make the following Parts Catalog Correction.
REFERENCE
INCORRECT
PART NO.
CORRECT
PART NO.
DESCRIPTION
PAGE
INDEX
H515 3790
H110 3851
Joint Bracket
140F
1-3
11
H515 3790
H110 3851
Joint Bracket
140S
1-3
22
UPDATE NO. 3 - The Development Unit has been modified to improve toner flow
and prevent vertical gray bands.
REFERENCE
H5162401
H5162408
DESCRIPTION
Development Unit - A4
QTY INT PAGE

1
1-15
INDEX
6
UNITS AFFECTED:
All FAX4700L machines manufactured after serial number M0460500000 respectively will
have the new style Development Unit installed during production.
10/08/96
TRANSMIT / RECEIVE

SUBJECT: ADF PAPER MISFEED

SYMPTOM:
The Rubber of the Separation Plate Assembly may dislodge.
CAUSE:
COPY QUALITY
Insufficient length of the Pressure Plate "Hook".
SOLUTION:
The Pressure Plate has been modified as illustrated.
Plastic Hook increased by 1.5mm
MECHANICAL
1.5mm
Side view of the Separation Plate Assembly
REFERENCE
H515 1205
H515 1355
DESCRIPTION
Separation Plate Assy
QTY
INT
PAGE
INDEX
1-7
PAPER FEED
Rubber
25
FSM
UNITS AFFECTED:
modified Separation Plate Assembly installed during production.
PARTS
OTHER
11/15/96
GENERAL:
PAGES:
3-13
New Information - Transportation Procedure
t MECHANICAL
The revised areas have been highlighted by an arrow.
t COPY QUALITY
The Field Service Manual page(s) listed below must be replaced with the page(s)
supplied. Each bulletin package contains 1 sets of replacement page(s).
TRANSMIT / RECEIVE

s ELECTRICAL
t
PAPER FEED
s
FSM
t
PARTS
t
OTHER
3.4 TRANSPORTATION
The FAX4700L and its optional components must be packaged according to the following
procedure. Failure to follow the instructions may result in damage to the machines or their
optional components.
If the FAX4700L and its optional components are being shipped, check each step as they
are performed and have the person responsible for the packaging sign-off at the end of
the procedure. Include one checked / signed sheet for each machine and each optional
component. If the unit is received back at Ricoh damaged due to packaging faults, your
dealership/district may be responsible for the full amount of the unit. Please understand
our position, as many units are received damaged and deemed unusable due to
packaging neglect.
MACHINE OPTION CONFIGURATION (Check all that apply):
FAX4700L
Handset Bracket
PC FAX Expander
Paper Feed Unit (s)
Hard Drive
Handset
Optional Cards
TRANSPORTATION PROCEDURE:
1. Turn "OFF" the machine power and then unplug the machine.
2. Remove the following components (if applicable):
Phone line
Copy Tray(s)
Power cord
Handset
Printer cable
Handset Bracket
Document Tray
Serial Cable
3. Remove the Paper Feed Unit.

4. Remove the CTM and place it on a protected surface as toner scatter may occur.
5. Vacuum all the toner from the Development Unit.
6. Do not reinstall the CTM. This component must be packaged separately.
7. Apply adhesive tape over the Development Unit openings as illustrated. This is to
prevent any possible toner spillage. To prevent from damaging the foam seals, use
tape with a light adhesive.
DRUM
Apply adhesive
tape over these
holes.
Toner may escape
from these holes.
Continued...
8. Secure the Copy / Document Trays.

9. Tape all covers shut with Strapping Tape.
10. Note any machine defects prior to shipment and/or list any comments at this time.
11. Pack the FAX4700L in its original box. Ensure the correct serial number is indicated
on the outside of the box.
NOTE: If the original box cannot be found, a box and packing material of original size and
weight should be acquired and used.
12. Individually pack all the accessories and CTM in their original box. Ensure the
correct serial numbers are indicated on the outside of the respective box.
NOTE: If the original box cannot be found, a box and packing material of original size and
weight should be acquired and used.
13. Ensure all the boxes are properly labeled (e.g. 1 of 2 - 2 of 2).
14. Number of pieces shipped (e.g. Base Unit, CTM,1 Accessory = 3).
Number of pieces:
15.
Technicians Name (Please Print):

Technicians signature:
Date:
11/15/96
SUBJECT: FUSING SEPARATION HOOK
GENERAL:
The following Parts Catalog correction should be incorporated into all existing FAX4700L
Parts Catalog documentation.
REFERENCE
PART NO.
H515 2148
DESCRIPTION
Left Lock Lever
PAGE INDEX
1-21
t MECHANICAL
INCORRECT
t COPY QUALITY

TRANSMIT / RECEIVE
t ELECTRICAL
CORRECT
CORRECT
PART NO.
H515 2181
CORRECT
DESCRIPTION
Separation Hook - Fusing
PAGE INDEX
1-21
PAPER FEED
REFERENCE
t
FSM
s
PARTS
t
OTHER
11/15/96
SUBJECT: HORIZONTAL WHITE BANDS

SYMPTOM:
Horizontal white bands (in even intervals) on the copied or received image. This can occur
on new out of box machines.
CAUSE:
Adhesive secures Gear (7) to the Drum. A small amount of the adhesive evaporates and
settles on the Drum Shaft. The adhesive on the Drum Shaft causes an incomplete charge
from the Drum to ground through the Shaft.
t MECHANICAL
FIELD COUNTERMEASURE:
s COPY QUALITY

TRANSMIT / RECEIVE
Clean the Drum Shaft by following the procedure below.
DRUM CLEANING PROCEDURE:

NOTE: Never touch the drum surface with bare hands.
s ELECTRICAL
1. Cover the drum with a piece of paper.

2. Remove E-Ring (1).
3. Remove Green Lever (2).
4. Remove E-Ring (3).
5. Remove Gear (4).
t
PAPER FEED
6. Pull the Drum Shaft completely out (5).

7. Clean the Shaft with alcohol and a soft cloth (6).
8. Re-assemble the drum and test machine.
NOTE: Ensure the shaft is completely cleaned as the adhesive does not come off easily.
(7)
(7)
(6)
(5)
FSM
(4)
(3)
t
PARTS
(6)
(2)
(1)
Pull the shaft completely out
OTHER
(5)
12/13/96

GENERAL:
documentation.
UPDATE NO. 1 - The Development Unit is now available as and assembly. The
individual parts of the Development Unit can still be acquired
separately.

H516 2408
H515 9570
DESCRIPTION
Development Unit Assy
QTY
PAGE
INDEX
1-15
t ELECTRICAL
REFERENCE
t MECHANICAL
The Rubber Roller Assembly will no longer be available as an

assembly. The individual parts of the Rubber Roller Assembly can
be acquired separately.
s COPY QUALITY

TRANSMIT / RECEIVE
PAPER FEED
seal and two spacers have been added.
UPDATE NO. 2 - To prevent the paper dust from dropping onto the scanner mirror, a
Scanner Base
Bottom View
t
FSM
DESCRIPTION
H515 1241
H515 1242
QTY
Seal - Scanner
H515 1241
Spacer - Scanner - Middle
H515 1242
Spacer - Scanner - Side
Seal and Spacers installed during production.
OTHER
UNITS AFFECTED:
H515 1239
PARTS
PART NUMBER
H515 1242
Scanner Seal
UNITS AFFECTED:
All FAX4700L machines manufactured after serial number
12/13/96
GENERAL:
SYMPTOM:
t COPY QUALITY
The FAX4700L FCE ROM has been upgraded to Rev "F". The upgrade will address the
following symptom.
TRANSMIT / RECEIVE

SUBJECT: FCE ROM UPGRADE
The number of pages were not printed correct when the documents were over
Misspelling in Power Failure Report (Failuer - Failure).
UNITS AFFECTED:
UPGRADING YOUR MACHINES FIRMWARE
FSM
2. Once you have the ROM, ROM data or RDS Files, transfer the data to your
machines via one of the four above mentioned service tools. SUBJECT:
1. Acquire the new version firmware. Download the ROM data or RDS files via the
Ricoh Technical Services BBS (BBS No. 201-882-5243) or via RDS.
PAPER FEED
To upgrade your machines with firmware:
As you should already know, replaceable ROMs are no longer used in the new family of
Ricoh Facsimile machines. To upgrade your machines firmware you must take advantage
of one of four new service tools (RDS, RRW, EPROM PCB, or a Like Model FCE). Refer
to Publications Bulletin PUB-069 for a full explanation of the FLASH ROM/SRAM Copy
Tool.
s ELECTRICAL
All FAX4700L machines manufactured after serial number M0461000000 will have FCE
ROM Rev. "F" installed during production.
t MECHANICAL
100 pages.
PARTS
t
OTHER
'97831)6#7)6:-')#+6394
8)',2-'%0#7)6:-')#&900)8-2
&900)8-2#291&)6U####*%<HKNN0#g#NEK
NFfFLfMK
%440-'%&0)#13()0U# *%<HKNN0
COPY QUALITY
GENERAL:
The following Parts Catalog Corrections are being issued for all FAX4700L Parts Catalogs. This information
should be incorporated into all existing Parts Catalog documentation.
Please delete the following items from the Parts Catalog.
MECHANICAL
18
ELECTRICAL

SUBJECT: SEAL-B & SEAL SHEET
Delete item #18 & #56

56
PAPER PATH
REFERENCE
PART NUMBER
DESCRIPTION
QTY
PAGE
ITEM
H5152535
Seal - B
10
1 - 15
18
SM
H5155396
Seal Sheet
10
1 - 15
56
PARTS
OTHER
NHfEHfMK
%440-'%&0)#13()0U# *%<HKNN0
FAX4700L WITH PC FAX EXPANDER (PCFE) TYPE 140
SYMPTOM:
1. No Multiple transmission from a computer via the FAX4700L-PCFE.
This problem occurs only when the FAX4700-PCFE, Hard Drive and the Function Upgrade Card (or
Function Upgrade Card plus NEST) options are all installed.
2. FAX ON DEMAND does not function after installing the PCFE firmware. This problem occurs only
when using the FOD function prior to installing the PCFE. In this case, the FOD files stored before
PCFE installation will not be accessible after installing the PCFE firmware. This means that these
FOD files will not be able to be polled from a remote terminal.
2. This problem is caused by the difference in the file structure between the original FAX4700L firmware
and the PCFE firmware.
2. To prevent this problem from occurring, the previously stored FOD files should be deleted before the
PCFE firmware is installed. We strongly recommend a level-3 initialization
(System Switch 00, bit 1 = 1) be used to delete these FOD files before installing the PCFE firmware.
PAPER PATH
1. The firmware has been updated (Rev B, ver 2.00).
SOLUTION:
ELECTRICAL
1. Firmware.
CAUSE:
MECHANICAL
COPY QUALITY

SUBJECT:
TRANSMIT / RECEIVE
&900)8-2#291&)6U####*%<HKNN0#g#NEL
'97831)6#7)6:-')#+6394
8)',2-'%0#7)6:-')#&900)8-2
FAX4700L PCFE ROMs or RDS Files can be acquired via the Ricoh Technical Services BBS. Reference the
.TXT file attached to the downloaded ROM/RDS files for additional information.
FSM
ORDERING PROCEDURE:
BBS No. 201-882-5243 - Please refer to Service News and Information No. 147.
PARTS
If you are unable to take advantage of the BBS, contact the Facsimile Technical Services Hotline.
OTHER
&900)8-2#291&)6U####*%<HKNN0#g#NEM
NHfEHfMK
%440-'%&0)#13()0U# *%<HKNN0
AUTO SERVICE CALL 0-05
SYMPTOM:
1. Auto Service Call 0-05 (Fusing Unit Failure).
COPY QUALITY
2. Constant "Add Toner" condition.
CAUSE:
Evaporated Silicon Oil from the Fusing Unit Cleaning Pad may chemically react with the 24V contacts of the
interlock switch. This results in a black deposit forming on the switch contacts which interrupts the 24V
passing through the switch.
MECHANICAL

SUBJECT:
TRANSMIT/RECEIVE
'97831)6#7)6:-')#+6394
8)',2-'%0#7)6:-')#&900)8-2
If the above mentioned symptom(s) occur:
3. Ensure that the new style* Fusing Unit Cleaning Pad is installed.
* The type of Silicon Oil used on the Fusing Unit Cleaning Pad has been changed since September, 1995.
To reflect this change, the color of the Cleaning Pad has been changed from black to green.
PAPER PATH
2. Clear the Service Call indication by changing the data at RAM Address 80033C[H] from "05" to "00."
1. Replace the Interlock Switch (12042334).
ELECTRICAL
SOLUTION:
FSM
PARTS
OTHER
'97831)6#7)6:-')#+6394
8)',2-'%0#7)6:-')##&900)8-2
&900)8-2#291&)6U####*%<#HKNN0#g#NFN
NHfEHfMK
%440-'%&0)#13()0U# *%<#HKNN0
COPY QUALITY
GRAY VERTICAL BANDS ON PRINTED IMAGE
SYMPTOM:
Vertical gray bands appear on the printed image.
MECHANICAL
CAUSE:
Defective Development Unit as a result of random
manufacturing error. A Mylar Film located inside the
Development Unit may not be installed at the correct
position.
Received Copy
ELECTRICAL

SUBJECT:
Gray Vertical Band
1. Check for and remove any obstruction which may prevent the normal flow of toner between the CTM and
Development Unit. Example: CTM Seal not completely removed.
PAPER PATH
FIELD COUNTER MEASURE:
2. Replace the Development Unit.
EXCHANGE PROGRAM PROCEDURE:
SM
For Development Units that have failed prematurely.

1. Print the System Parameter List from the affected machine. The machines Serial Number and sample of
the gray vertical band must appear on the report.
2. Order a new Development Unit from RICOHs National Spare Parts Center.
PARTS
PART NUMBER
DESCRIPTION
H5159570
Development Unit Assembly - A4
OTHER
NOTE: National Spare Parts Center Phone No.
1-800-524-0199
Continued...
Technical Service Bulletin FAX 4700L - 20

Page 2 of 2
3. Fill out an Limited Warranty Claim Report in addition to the following information:
DEALER NAME:
DEALER ACCOUNT NO.:
MACHINE SERIAL NO.:
INSTALLATION DATE:
PROBLEM DATE (1st Occurred):
PRINT COUNTER:
Note:
Refer to the Dealer Service Policy Manual for information regarding the Limited Warranty
Claim Report.
4. Attach this page to the Limited Warranty Claim Report and System Parameter List.
5. Contact your Regional TSM, RPS, or ATS for consideration of exchange credit approval.
Note:
All required information and image samples must be complete and accurate or you may not be
credited for the new Development Unit.
Production Counter Measure:

The Mylar Film was modified to insure installation at the correct position on the Development Unit.
UNITS AFFECTED:
All FAX 4700L machines manufactured after Serial Numbers M0460600000 respectively will have modified
Development Units installed during production.
NOTE: THIS CREDIT PROGRAM IS VALID THROUGH 9/30/97 ON UNITS PRODUCED PRIOR TO
THE SERIAL NUMBER CUT IN STATED ABOVE.
NJfFFfMK
%440-'%&0)#13()0U# *%<HKNN0
The following error codes are missing from the Field Service Manual.
DESCRIPTION
9-30
Hard Disk Drive Error
9-31
Disk Controller Error
9-32
Disk Memory Error
MECHANICAL
ERROR CODE
COPY QUALITY
GENERAL:

TRANSMIT/RECEIVE
&900)8-2#291&)6U####*%<HKNN0#g#NFE
'97831)6#7)6:-')#+6394
8)',2-'%0#7)6:-')#&900)8-2
6-36
Additional Information
Addition of Error Codes 9-30, 9-31 & 9-32
PAPER PATH
The revised areas have been highlighted by an arrow
PAGES:
ELECTRICAL
The Field Service Manual page(s) listed below must be replaced with the page(s) supplied. Each bulletin
FSM
PARTS
OTHER
NJfFFfMK
%440-'%&0)#13()0U# *%<HKNN0
HARD DISK DRIVE CHANGE AND SOFTWARE UPDATE
The Hard Disk Drive has been changed. When installing the new style HDD, you must also install the new
style Spring Plate and Bracket. These parts are available as a kit (H1303010).
COPY QUALITY
GENERAL:
MECHANICAL

SUBJECT:
TRANSMIT/RECEIVE
&900)8-2#291&)6U####*%<HKNN0#g#NFF
'97831)6#7)6:-')#+6394
8)',2-'%0#7)6:-')#&900)8-2
Hard Disk Drive
ELECTRICAL
Spring Plate
PAPER PATH
Bracket
SOFTWARE:
ORDERING PROCEDURE:
PARTS
This new software has been applied from the May, 1997 production.
UNITS AFFECTED:
FSM
NOTE: The new HDD does not function with the older software. However, the old HDD does function with
the new software.
When installing the new style Hard Disk Drive, the software for the FAX4700L must be upgraded to version
H5157210G (or later).
The new style HDD can be acquired through normal NSPC channels. The updated software can be acquired
via the Ricoh Technical Services BBS. Reference the .TXT file attached to the downloaded ROM/RDS files
for additional information. BBS No. 201-882-5243 - Please refer to Service News and Information No. 147.
If you are unable to take advantage of the BBS, contact the Facsimile Technical Services Hotline.
OTHER
'97831)6#7)6:-')#+6394
8)',2-'%0#7)6:-')#&900)8-2
&900)8-2#291&)6U###*%<#HKNN0g#NFG
NMfEKfMK#
PART CATALOG CORRECTION

MECHANICAL
GENERAL:
REFERENCE
NEW PART NO.
Spacer - Stay-1
QTY
PAGE
ITEM
1-29
40
H5163476
DESCRIPTION
ELECTRICAL
The following Part Catalog Correction is being issued for all FAX 4700L Parts Catalogs. This information
should be incorporated into all existing FAX 4700L Parts Catalog documentation.

SUBJECT:
COPY QUALITY
%440-'%&0)#13()0U# *%<#HKNN0
PAPER PATH
0
1
PARTS
3/S
OLD and NEW parts can be used in both OLD and

NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines.
2
NEW machines.
OLD parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines.
NEW parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines.
OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines.
3
Must be installed as a set on units manufactured prior to the S/N cut-in. On units manufactured after the S/N cut-in or
previously modified, use the new part numbers individually.
SM
OTHER
'97831)6#7)6:-')#+6394
8)',2-'%0#7)6:-')#&900)8-2
&900)8-2#291&)6U###*%<HKNN0#g#FH
NMfEKfMK#
PART CATALOG CORRECTION

MECHANICAL
GENERAL:
REFERENCE
CORRECT
H5435701
H1435701
DESCRIPTION
ISDN Harness
QTY
INT
PAGE
ITEM
1-1
1-33
INCORRECT.
ELECTRICAL
The following Parts Corrections are being issued for all FAX4700L Parts Catalogs. This information should
be incorporated into all existing FAX4700L Parts Catalog documentation.

SUBJECT:
COPY QUALITY
%440-'%&0)#13()0U# *%<HKNN0
PAPER PATH
UNITS AFFECTED:
Serial Number ins not available at time of publication.
SM
0
1
3/S

2
NEW machines.
3
PARTS
OTHER
'97831)6#7)6:-')#+6394
8)',2-'%0#7)6:-')#&900)8-2
&900)8-2#291&)6U####*%<#HKNN0#g#NFI
NMfEKfMK
EXHAUST FAN
CAUSE:
PAPER PATH
Check the machines that are experiencing Vertical Black Bands to see if the Interlock Switche had been
replaced in the past. If so, please make sure that the Exhaust Fan has been installed correctly. The label on
the Exhaust Fan (shown below) should be facing outward.
After the Exhaust Fan has been installed, please confirm that the air is blowing out of the machine.
ELECTRICAL
SOLUTION:
To enable the replacement of the Interlock Switch (REF. PUB 85), the Exhaust Fan must first be removed.
There have been reports indicating that the Exhaust Fan was reinstalled facing in the opposite direction,
which led to a rise in the temperature inside the machine.This causes poor toner circulation and resultes in
Vertical Black Bands. If this problem is not rectified, Vertical Black Bands may reoccur even if the
Development Unit is replaced.
MECHANICAL

SUBJECT:
COPY QUALITY
%440-'%&0)#13()0U# *%<#HKNN0
SM
PARTS
OTHER
'97831)6#7)6:-')#+6394
&900)8-2#291&)6U
8)',2-'%0#7)6:-')#&900)8-2
*%<#HKNN0#g#NFJ
NEfGNfML
%440-'%&0)#13()0U *%<#HKNN0
COPY QUALITY
ISDN OPTION
GENERAL:
The following Parts Catalog Corrections is being issued for all Fax 4700L Parts Catalogs.
NEW PART NO.

H1435701
H0826034
DESCRIPTION
ISDN Harness
Fax Control Board 115V
QTY
1
1
OLD PART NO.

H5435701
H0826036
REFERENCE
PAGE ITEM
1 - 33
3
1 - 33
1
MECHANICAL

SUBJECT:
ELECTRICAL
PAPER PATH
SM
PARTS
OTHER
8)',2-'%0#7)6:-')#&900)8-2
&900)8-2#291&)6U
,IEIg#NNE
NHfFFfML
%440-'%&0)#13()0U
####+)78)82)6#h#2f%
####6-'3,#*%<#h#HKNN0
####7%:-2#h#2f%
SYMPTOM:
CAUSE:
An unwanted build up of toner in the middle of
the Development Unit causes the Toner
Metering Blade [A] to bend in an irregular
fashion. As the Metering Blade bends, toner
passes between the deformed blade and the
Toner Application Roller [B]. This toner is
pulled onto the Development Roller [C] and is
passed onto the Drum [D] causing gray vertical
bands on the documents.
[D]
[C]
[A]
[B]
Received
Gray Vertical
Continued
PARTS
GRAY VERTICAL BAND ON PRINTED IMAGE

SUBJECT:
The chart listed below shows the Last Bulletin

Number issued for the H515 series.
Bulletin Cross Reference
Ricoh Group Companies
Last Bulletin No.
Gestetner
N/A
Ricoh
026
Savin
N/A
Technical Service Bulletin H515 001

Page 2 of 3

1. Check for and remove any obstruction which may prevent the normal flow of toner between the Cleaning
Toner Magazine (CTM) and Development Unit. Example: CTM seal may not have been completely removed.
2. Replace old Development Unit with new modified Development Unit.
NOTE: The old style Development Unit (P/N H5159570) which was modified to correct this problem may
still fail in some high volume environments. Therefore, additional modifications have been
implemented, resulting in a new Development Unit (P/N H5159571).
OLD PART NO.

H5159570
NEW PART NO.

H5159571
DESCRIPTION
QTY
1
REFERENCE
PAGE ITEM
1-13
6
MODIFICATION:
1. The length of the toner entrance [E] has
been changed from 30mm to 18mm to prevent
too much toner from dropping into the
Development Unit.
[E]
2. The Toner Hopper Film has been modified to

push more toner back up into the CTM.
NOTE: You can distinguish the modified
Development Unit by the lot number
on the label. (See Figure 1)
(Back side of Casing)
Continued
Technical Service Bulletin H515 001

Page 3 of 3
CREDIT PROGRAM PROCEDURE:

For Development Units that have failed:
1. Print the System Parameter List from the affected machine. The machine's Serial Number and sample
of the gray vertical band must appear on the report.
2. Order a new Development Unit from RICOH's National Spare Parts Center.
Part Number
H5159571
Description
Development Unit Assembly A4
NOTE: National Spare Parts Center Phone No. 1-800-524-0199

3. Fill out a Limited Warranty Claim Report and submit the following information requested below:
NOTE: Refer to the Dealer Service Policy Manual for information regarding the Limited
Warranty Claim Report.
DEALER NAME:
MACHINE SERIAL NO.
INSTALLATION DATE:
PROBLEM DATE (First Occurred):
PRINT COUNTER:
5. Contact your Regional TSM, RPS, or ATS for exchange credit approval, be sure to have the
Limited Warranty Claim Report and the information requested above.
NOTE: All required information and image samples must be complete and accurate or
you may not be credited for the new Development Unit.
UNITS AFFECTED:
All facsimile machines manufactured after the Serial Number listed below will have the new style
Development Unit installed during production.
MODEL NAME
RICOH FAX 4700L
SERIAL NUMBER
M0480300001
NOTE: This Credit Program Is Being Extended Until Further Notice.
8)',2-'%0#7)6:-')#&900)8-2
&900)8-2#291&)6U
,IEIg#NNE#6)-779)#+
%440-'%&0)#13()0U
####+)78)82)6#h#MKJL
####6-'3,#*%<#h#HKNN0
####7%:-2#h#GJMN
GRAY VERTICAL BAND ON PRINTED IMAGE
SYMPTOM:
CAUSE:
An unwanted build up of toner in the middle of
the Development Unit causes the Toner
Metering Blade [A] to bend in an irregular
fashion. As the Metering Blade bends, toner
passes between the deformed blade and the
Toner Application Roller [B]. This toner is
pulled onto the Development Roller [C] and is
passed onto the Drum [D] causing gray vertical
bands on the documents.
[D]
[C]
[A]
[B]
Received
Gray Vertical
Continued
#'328630#23T#EHM
PARTS

Number issued for the H515 series.
Last Bulletin No.
Gestetner
005
Ricoh
026
Savin
F-089

SUBJECT:
NIfFEfML
Technical Service Bulletin H515 001 Reissue +

Page 2 of 4

1. Check for and remove any obstruction which may prevent the normal flow of toner between the Cleaning
Toner Magazine (CTM) and Development Unit. Example: CTM seal may not have been completely removed.
2. Replace old Development Unit with new modified Development Unit.
NOTE: The old style Development Unit (P/N H5159570) which was modified to correct this problem may
still fail in some high volume environments. Therefore, additional modifications have been
implemented, resulting in a new Development Unit (P/N H5159571).
OLD PART NO.

H5159570
NEW PART NO.

H5159571
DESCRIPTION
QTY
1
REFERENCE
PAGE ITEM
1-13
6
MODIFICATION:
1. The length of the toner entrance [E] has
been changed from 30mm to 18mm to prevent
too much toner from dropping into the
Development Unit.
[E]
2. The Toner Hopper Film has been modified to

push more toner back up into the CTM.
NOTE: You can distinguish the modified
Development Unit by the lot number
on the label. (See Figure 1)
(Back side of Casing)
Continued

Page 3 of 4
RICOH CORPORATION CREDIT PROGRAM PROCEDURE:

2. Order a new Development Unit from RICOH's National Spare Parts Center.
Part Number
H5159571
Description
NOTE: National Spare Parts Center Phone No. 1-800-524-0199

3. Fill out a Limited Warranty Claim Report and submit the following information requested below:
NOTE: Refer to the Dealer Service Policy Manual for information regarding the Limited
Warranty Claim Report.
DEALER NAME:
MACHINE SERIAL NO.
INSTALLATION DATE:
PRINT COUNTER:
5. Contact your Regional TSM, RPS, or ATS for exchange credit approval, be sure to have the
Limited Warranty Claim Report and the information requested above.
UNITS AFFECTED:
MODEL NAME
RICOH FAX 4700L
SERIAL NUMBER
M0480300001

Continued

Page 4 of 4
SAVIN CORPORATION CREDIT PROGRAM PROCEDURE:

2. Order a new Development Unit from the Savin Spare Parts Ordering Center.
Part Number
H5159571
Description
3. Completely fill out a Warranty Claim Report and submit the following information requested below:
DEALER NAME:
MACHINE SERIAL NO.
INSTALLATION DATE:
PRINT COUNTER:
4. Attach this page to the Warranty Claim Report and the System Parameter List.
5. Contact your Technical Support Representative for exchange credit approval; be sure to have the
Warranty Claim Report and the information requested above.
UNITS AFFECTED:
MODEL NAME
Gestetner 9768
Savin Fax 3690
SERIAL NUMBER
9188030001
1880300001

U
IEIhNNFNJfNJfML
U

h
MKJL
h
HKNN
h
GJMN
RACK GEARS
GENERAL:
T
PARTS

SUBJECT:

Number issued for the (product code) series.
Last Bulletin No.
Gestetner
N/A
Ricoh
001
Savin
137
The following Parts Corrections are being issued for all H515 Parts Catalogs
OLD PART NO.

H5151282
NEW PART NO.

H5151282
H5151349
DESCRIPTION
Rack Gear Document Guide
Rack Gear Document Guide - Right
Rack Gear Document Guide - Left
QTY.
1
1
REFERENCE
PAGE ITEM
1-9
13
1-9
13
1-9
13

U
IEIgNNG
U

h
MKJL
h
HKNN
h
GJMN
HARNESS - NCU

Number issued for the (product code) series.
Last Bulletin No.
Gestetner
XXX
Ricoh
002
Savin
137
Q
PARTS

SUBJECT:
NJfNJfML
GENERAL:
The following Part Correction is being issued for all H515 Parts Catalogs.
OLD PART NO.

H5215309
NEW PART NO.

H5165305
DESCRIPTION
Harness - NCU
QTY
1
REFERENCE
PAGE ITEM
1-5
19
8)',2-'%0#7)6:-')#&900)8-2
&900)8-2#291&)6U
,IEI#g#NNH
NJfFFfML
%440-'%&0)#13()0U
####+)78)82)6#h#*%<#MKJL
####6-'3,#h#*%<#HKNN0
####7%:-2#h#*%<#GJMN
FUSING UNIT
GENERAL:
The following parts have been registered as spare parts. The following Parts Corrections are being issued
for all H515 Parts Catalogs.
33
NEW PART NO.

H5162100
H5162101
DESCRIPTION
Fusing Unit 115V
Fusing Unit 220V
QTY
1
1
REFERENCE
PAGE
ITEM
4
33
4
33
CONTROL NO. 151
# PARTS

SUBJECT:
8)',2-'%0#7)6:-')#&900)8-2
&900)8-2#291&)6U
,IEI#g#NNI
NJfFFfML
%440-'%&0)#13()0U
####+)78)82)6#h#*%<#MKJL
####6-'3,#h#*%<#HKNN0
####7%:-2#h#*%<#GJMN
OPERATION PANEL
GENERAL:
PARTS

SUBJECT:
The following Parts Corrections are being issued for all H515 Parts Catalogs.
H515 Operation Panel (Parts Catalog Page 1-6)
PART NO.
H5154253
H5154253
H5154252
H5154233
DESCRIPTION
Ricoh /Case -LCD
Savin/Gestetner Case -LCD
Ricoh/Case-Quick Dial
Savin/Gestetner Case-Quick Dial
QTY
1
1
1
1
REFERENCE
PAGE ITEM
1-7
31
1-7
31
1-7
32
1-7
32
CONTROL NO. 151
8)',2-'%0#7)6:-')#&900)8-2
&900)8-2#291&)6U
,IEI#g#NNJ
NJfFFfML
%440-'%&0)#13()0U
####+)78)82)6#h#*%<#MKJL
####6-'3,#h#*%<#HKNN0
####7%:-2#h#*%<#GJMN
SEPARATION HOOK - FUSING
PARTS

SUBJECT:
GENERAL:
The following Parts Corrections are being issued for all H515 Parts Catalogs.
OLD PART NO.

H515 2148
NEW PART NO.

H5152181
DESCRIPTION
Separation Hook - Fusing
QTY
1-1
REFERENCE
PAGE ITEM
1 - 21
6
CONTROL NO. 151

UIEIfIIEgNNK
NLfGEfML
U

hf
h
HKNN
h
GJMN
AUTO SERVICE CALL 0-05
T
MECHANICAL
SYMPTOM:
1. Auto Service Call 0-05 (Fusing Unit Failure).
2. Constant "Add Toner" condition.
CAUSE:
Evaporated Silicon Oil from the Fusing Unit Cleaning Pad may chemically react with the 24V contacts of the
interlock switch. This results in a black deposit forming on the switch contacts, which interrupts the 24V
passing through the switch.
SOLUTION:
If the above mentioned symptom(s) occur:
1. Replace the Interlock Switch (H5219610).
.
2. Clear the Service Call indication by changing the data at RAM Address 4805AF[H] from "05" to
"00."
3. Ensure that the new style Fusing Unit Cleaning Pad (see note) is installed.
NOTE :The type of Silicon Oil used on the Fusing Unit Cleaning Pad was changed September,1995.
To reflect this change, the color of the Cleaning Pad has been changed from black to green.
CONTROL NO. 158

PARTS

SUBJECT:

U
IEIfIIEhNNL
NLfGEfML
U

hfMLKL
h
HKNNfHLNN
hGJMNfGJMI
GENERAL:
Explanation of the Fax On Demand option differences between the new model H551 and the H515 series.
The Fax On Demand option can be used in both the H551 and H515, however, the FOD connector is
different on each model.
To avoid any confusion during installation please be aware of the following.
The connector used in H551 is CN7 on the FCE.
The connector used in H515 is CN73 on the FDU.
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE:
1. Remove the rear cover [A] (4 screws), and the IC card slot cover [B].
2. Remove the NCU cover (1 screw) and replace it with the cover for the Fax on Demand
option [C].
Then, connect the harness [D] to CN7 on the FCE for the H551 model, or connect the
harness [D] to CN73 on the FDU for the H515 model.
3. Install the battery on the IC card and turn on the battery switch.
[D]
[C]
[A]
[B]
CONTROL NO. 158
ELECTRICAL

SUBJECT: FAX ON DEMAND INSTALLATION CAUTION

U

IEIfIIE h NNM

EFfNKfML

U
GJMNfGJLI

HKNNfHLNN
MKJLfMKKL

n
GENERAL:
The Service Manual page(s) listed below must be replaced with the pages(s) supplied. Each bulletin
PAGES:
1-3
1-4
1-5
2-1
3-6A
4-42
4-52
4-58
4-75
4-94
5-35
6-11
6-12
6-13
6-14
6-15
Updated Information
Updated Information
Updated Information
Updated Information
Updated Information
Updated Information
Updated Information
Updated Information
Updated Information
Updated Information
Updated Information (H515 page)
Updated Information
Updated Information
Updated Information
Updated Information
Updated Information
An arrow has highlighted the revised areas
CONTROL NO. 161
SERVICE
MANUAL
Note: This copy intended as master original

SUBJECT:
Rev.11/98

MTF
Scanning Resolution Standard
Scanning Resolution Superfine
Smoothing to 400 x 400 dpi
when printing
1.2.1 FEATURES LIST

KEY:
B = With optional memory 80M (HDD)
only
C = With optional function upgrade
card only
D = With optional Fax On Demand kit
only
E = With optional 100 sheet cassette
only
H = With optional handset only (US
only)
I = With optional printer interface unit
only

broadcaster
Auto Document
Batch Transmission (max 6
files)
Broadcasting
Chain Dialing
Fax on demand
Forwarding
O
X
X
O
X
G
X
H
B
X
O
O
E
D
F
I

Contrast
O
Halftone
O
(Basic & Error Diffusion)
SM
O
O
X
O

Automatic fallback
O
Automatic redialing
O
A or B
Dual Access
O
O
Equipment
ADF
Book scan
Built-in handset
Cabinet
Counter
Cutter
Handset
Hard disk
Manual feed mechanism
(ADF)
Marker (Stamp)
Monitor speaker
(up to 2 units)
O
O
O
O
O
Overall
Information
1.2 FEATURES
1-3
X
O
X
O
O
X
X
X
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
O
D
O
H551
FEATURES
Rev.11/98

Free Polling
Groups (7 groups)
Hold
ID Transmission
Immediate Redialing
Keystroke Programs
Length Reduction
Memory transmission
Multi-step Transfer
OMR
On Hook Dial
Ordering Toner
Page Count
Personal Codes
Polling Reception
Polling tx file lifetime in the
SAF
Quick Dial
Reception modes (Fax, Tel,
Auto)
Remote Transfer
Restricted Access
Secured Polling
Override
Secure Transmission
Send Later
Speed Dial
Telephone Directory
Transfer Request
Turnaround Polling
H551

Two-step Transfer
X
Two in one
O
Voice Request (immed. tx
X
only)
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
X
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
O
C
O
O
O

AI Short Protocol
Busy tone detection
Cable Equalizer
PSTN
ISDN
ECM
EFC
transmission
printing
Protection against wrong
conn.
Resolutions available for
reception
200 x 100 dpi
200 x 200 dpi
200 x 400 dpi
400 x 400 dpi
Resoln stepdown override
option
Short Preamble
Well log
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
X
O
X
O
O
O
O
O
J
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
X
X
X
O
Other User Features

Area code prefix
X
Service
Center mark
O
Checkered mark
O
O
O
Clock
O
Confidential ID
O
O
O
O
O
X
1-4
SM
Rev.11/98
FEATURES
SM
Other User Features

Wild Cards
Reports - Automatic
Error Report
Mode Change Report
TCR (Journal)
X
O
O
O
D
O
X
O
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
X
File List
O
Forwarding List
O
Group List
O
Hard Disk File List
B, C
Personal Code List
O
Program List
O
Quick Dial List
O
B
List
Speed Dial List
O
TCR
O
X
User Function List
O
User Parameter List
O

Back-to-back test
Book mode test
Buzzer test
Cable equalizer
1-5
X
O
O
X
O
O
H551
Overall
Information
Other User Features

Copy editing
X
(Erase Center/Margin)
Copy mode
O
O
Counters
O
O
Destination Check
X
O
File Retention Time
O
File Retransmission
O
Function Programs
O
B, C
ID Code
O
Label Insertion (From xxx)
O
Language Selection
O
Service
Memory Lock
A or B
Memory Lock ID
O
X
Multi Sort Document
O
Reception
Multicopy mode
O
O
Energy Saver (Night Timer
O
and standby mode)
O
O
RDS on/off
O
Reception Mode Switching
X
Timer
O
X
O
Remote ID
O
O
RTI, TTI, CSI
O
Secure ID
X
O
O
F
O
Telephone line type
O
Toner Saving Mode
O
TTI/CIL on/off
O
O
User Parameters
O
Rev. 11/98
When the machine is initially used only with the PSTN, the line type programmed with phone numbers in
Quick Dials and the Speed Dials is stored as PSTN G3.
Later, if the line connection is changed so that G3 is to be used only with the ISDN, the communication port
for all stored Quick and Speed Dials must be changed to ISDN G3.
This feature allows the communication mode and port to be changed for all stored numbers at once.
Procedure:
1) Change the data in the following RAM addresses.
4B5846(H) - Current line type setting.
4B5847(H) - Line type to be used after this procedure.
NOTE: The default setting for the above addresses are FF(H).
2) Turn the main switch off and on.
Then, the machine checks all phone numbers stored in Quick Dials, Speed Dials, AI Redial, and
Forwarding Stations. If the communication mode and the port setting for a number is the same as
specified for the current setting in the above address, the machine changes these to the new
setting.
3) After this procedure, the data programmed automatically returns to FF(H).
SETTING:
Bit 0 and 1: Communication mode

Bit
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
Setting
G3
G4
Not used
Bit 2 to 4: Communication port

Bit
4 3 2 Setting
0 0 0 PSTN1 (Standard G3)
0 0 1 PSTN2 (Optional G3 unit)
0 1 1 ISDN
1 0 0 Any available port
(This setting can be used only when an optional G3 or G4 unit is installed in the machine.)
Example:
If you wish to change the port setting from PSTN G3 to ISDN G3,
Change the data to 00(H) (0000 0000) in the address 4B5846(H)
Change the data to 0C(H) (00001100) in the address 4B5847(H)
NOTE: Do not use this procedure if there are any files stored in the memory awaiting transmission.
H551
3-6A
SM
BIT SWITCHES
Rev. 11/98
Conditions for memory

reception if no RTI or CSI is
received

transmission
0: Memory reception is available only when the

machine receives RTI or CSI.
1: Memory reception is always available unless
there is a printer (mechanical) error. If there is a
printer error, memory reception becomes
available only when the machine receives RTI or
CSI.
This function becomes effective in combination
with the user parameter switch 05 bit 1.
This bit determines whether parallel transmission
can be used with a G4 transmission or not.
.
System Switch 12
No
0
to
7
FUNCTION
Line (Group 4)
COMMENTS
This setting determines the print start position for
the TTI and CIL from the left edge of the paper. If
the TTI is moved too far to the right, it may
interfere with the file number which is on the top
right of the page. On an A4 page, if the CIL is
moved over by more than 60 mm, it may
overwrite the page number.
System Switch 13
No
0
1
3
4
5-7
H551
FUNCTION
Remaining memory threshold for
activating the hard disk filing
system
0
0
25%
0
1
50% (default)
1
0
75%
1
1
Not used
Not used
Files that can be stored in the hard
disk filing system
Bit 1 Bit 0 Files
0
0 All files
0
1 Received files only
1
0 Transmitted files only
1
1 Not used
COMMENTS
If the remaining hard disk space is below
the threshold value, the hard disk filing
system cannot be used. Adjust the
threshold value to meet the customers
requirements.

The default setting is (0 0).
Change the settings to limit the files that
can be stored in the hard disk filing system.
Not used
4-42
SM
BIT SWITCHES
4.2.5 G3 SWITCHES
Rev. 11/98
G3 Switch 00
No
FUNCTION
0 Monitor speaker during
1 communication (tx and rx)
Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting
0
0
Disabled
0
1
Up to Phase B
1
0
All the time
1
1
Not used
2 Monitor speaker during
memory transmission
3-6 Not used
7 Back to back test
COMMENTS
(0, 0): The monitor speaker is disabled all through
the communication.
(0, 1): The monitor speaker is on up to phase B in
the T.30 protocol.
(1, 0): Used for testing. The monitor speaker is on
all through the communication. Make sure that
you reset these bits after testing.
1: The monitor speaker is enabled during memory
transmission.
Set this bit to 1 when you wish to do a back to
back test.
115 V model: Be sure to connect jumpers JP5
and JP6 on the NCU before doing the test.
220 V model: Be sure to apply dc voltage
between wires L1 and L2 on the NCU.
Back-to-Back Connection:
The dc power supplies should be adjusted so that
the line current to the NCU are about 30mA.
G3 Switch 01
No
FUNCTION
0-3 Not used
4 DIS frame length
0: 6 bytes
1: 4 bytes
5
6
H551
Not Used
WRONG
CED/ANSam emission
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Not Used
COMMENTS
1: The 5th and 6th bytes in the DIS
frame will not be transmitted (set to 1
if there are communication problems
with PC-based faxes which cannot
receive the extended DIS frames).
CORRECT
COMMENTS
CED/ANSam emission Do not change this setting
0: Enabled (Default)
unless any communication
1: Disabled
problem is caused by the
CED/ANSam (V.34)
transmission.
4-58
SM
NCU PARAMETERS
Rev. 11/98
Do not change the

settings.
4806BE
Not used
4806C7
Protocol dump list format (standard NCU)

Bit 4: Protocol dump list format 0: Simplified list
1: Complete list
Not used
Do not change the
settings.
T.30 T1 timer
1s
Protocol dump list format (optional G3 unit)
Bit 4: Protocol dump list format 0: Simplified list
1: Complete list
4806D9
4806DA
4807C7
Notes
1.
If a setting is not required, store FF in the address.
2.
Italy and Belgium only

Bit 1 Not used
If bit 0 or bit 2 is set to 1, the functions of the following RAM addresses are
changed.
duration (%), and number of cycles required for detection, coded as in address
480633.
48060B (if bit 0 = 1) or 48063B (if bit 2 = 1): on time, hex code (unit = 20 ms)
48060C (if bit 0 = 1) or 48063C(if bit 2 = 1): off time, hex code (unit = 20 ms)
3.
Pulse dial parameters (addresses 48064A to 48064F) are the values for 10
pps. If 20 pps is used, the machine automatically compensates.
4.
The first ring may not be detected until 1 to 2.5 wavelengths after the time
specified by this parameter.
5.
The calculated level must be between 0 and 10.

Low frequency tone: - 0.5 x N480652/480654 + N480653) dBm
Note: N480652, for example, means the value stored in address 480652(H)
6. 480644A: Europe - Between Ds opening and Di opening, France - Between Ds

closing and Di opening
48064D: Europe - Between Ds closing and Di closing, France - Between Ds
opening and Di closing
4-75
4-75
SM
Rev. 11/98
480A10(H) - Scanning top margin adjustment

480A14(H) - Scanning bottom margin adjustment (Standard)
480A16(H) - Scanning bottom margin adjustment (Detail)
480A18(H) - Scanning bottom margin adjustment (Fine)
NOTE: Please refer to section 5.12.2 of the FX4 service manual for how to adjust above
parameters.
4A5EBA to 4A71F1(H) - Dedicated tx parameters for Quick Dial 01 - 64 and Speed Dial #00 #99.
Each set of dedicated tx parameters consists of 30 bytes, only the first 8 of which are used.
4A5EBA to 4A5ED7(H) - Dedicated tx parameters for Quick 01
4A5ED8 to 4A5EF5(H) - Dedicated tx parameters for Quick 02
4A5EF6 to 4A5F13(H) - Dedicated tx parameters for Quick 03
4A661C to 4A6639(H) - Dedicated tx parameters for Quick 64

4A663A to 4A6657(H) - Dedicated tx parameters for Speed #00
4A6658 to 4A6675(H) - Dedicated tx parameters for Speed #01
4A6676 to 4A6693(H) - Dedicated tx parameters for Speed #02
4A71D4 to 4A71F1(H) - Dedicated tx parameters for Speed #99

4B5846 to 4B5847(H) - Line type change
4B5846(H) - Current line type setting
4B5847(H) - Line type to be used after the procedure (Refer to page 3-6A).
4B6606 to 4B6785(H) - Latest 64 error codes (Read only)
One error record consists of 6 bytes of data.
First error record start address 4B6606(H)
Second error record start address 4B660C(H)
Third error record start address 4B6612(H)
:
:
:
64th error record start address 4B6780(H)
1st byte - Minute (BCD)
2nd byte - Hour (BCD)
3rd byte - Day (BCD)
4th byte - Month (BCD)
5th byte - Error code (low) [If the error code is 1-23, 23 is stored here.]
6th byte - Error code (high) [If the error code is 1-23, 01 is stored here.]
H551
4-94
SM
Rev.11/98

5.11.1. Replacement
Remove the rear cover, then remove the NCU [A], the rear bracket [B], and
the SBU [C].
Note: After the SBU is replaced, perform the following adjustment procedure.
[C]
[B]
[A]
H515R509.wmf
A: NCU (3 screws)
B: Rear Bracket (3 screws)
C: SBU (2 screws)
REPLACEMENT
& ADJUSTMENT

Scan line adjustment chart: P/N H5159300
200 dot-per-inch test pattern: P/N H0829020
Test lead: P/N H5159301
SBU adjustment knobs: P/N H0129300
5.11.3. Preparation
1. Set the oscilloscope scale to 0.2 V/unit (vertical) and 0.5 ms/unit
(horizontal).
2. Connect the test lead to H515-CN 6 or to H551-CN8 on the MFCE.

3. Connect the oscilloscope probe to pin 2 (blue wire) and the ground to pin
4 (black wire)
4. Clean the white pressure plate with a soft cloth and alcohol.
5. Light the xenon lamp (see section 4.1.15)
SM
5-35
H515
Control Channel (Post Message SH)
Rev. 11/98
8)',2-'%0#7)6:-')#&900)8-2
&900)8-2#291&)6U
,IEIf,IIE#h#NEN
NFfEKfMM
%440-'%&0)#13()0U
####+)78)82)6#h#MKJLfMLKL
####6-'3,#h#*%<HKNN0fHLNN0
####7%:-2#h#GJMNfGJMI
HARD DISK DRIVE (HDD)
GENERAL:
PARTS

SUBJECT:
The following Parts Corrections are being issued for all H515/H551 Parts Catalogs.
OLD PART NO.

H1303010
H5155356
H5155358
H5515364
H5157119
NEW PART NO.

H1303012
H5515370
A8537000
DESCRIPTION
HDD Kit
Harness HDD 44P
QTY
1-1
1-1
HDD
1-1
INT
1
1
REFERENCE
PAGE ITEM
35
3
35
3
35
The new HDD kit includes the new HDD and the new Harness.
When replacing an old HDD with a new HDD the new Harness H5515370 must be used.
0
1
3/S

2
NEW machines.
3
CONTROL NO. 163
8)',2-'%0#7)6:-')#&900)8-2
&900)8-2#291&)6U
,IEIf,IIE#h#NEE
NFfEKfMM
%440-'%&0)#13()0U
####+)78)82)6#h#MKJL
####6-'3,#h#*%<HKNN0
####7%:-2#h#GJMN
GENERAL:
The Service Manual page(s) listed below must be replaced with the pages(s) supplied. Each bulletin
package contains one set of replacement pages.
PAGES:
An arrow has highlighted the revised areas
4-29
Updated Information
CONTROL NO. 163
SERVICE
MANUAL
Note: This copy intended as master original

SUBJECT:
Rev.01/99
System Switch 04
No
COMMENTS
Master drum replacement

level
0:Service
1: User
0: The machine will ask the user to replace the drum

After the user replaces the drum, the machine will ask
the user if the drum has been replaced. If the user
answers yes, the machine will reset the OPC counter
to zero. The drum replacement interval is programmed
at addresses 480228 to 48022A(H). Refer to section
4.5 for more details.
1: The machine will not ask the user to replace the
drum.
programming level
0: User level
1: Service level
1: The CSI and Terminal ID can only be programmed

using a service function.
The Terminal ID can only be programmed if a Group 4
option is installed.
Telephone line type

programming mode
0: User level
1: Service level
1: Telephone line type selection (tone dial or pulse

dial) can only be programmed using a service function.
SERVICE
TABLES &
PROCEDURES
FUNCTION
SM
4-29
H515
8)',2-'%0#7)6:-')#&900)8-2
&900)8-2#291&)6U
,IEIf,IIE#g#NEF
NJfEIfMM
%440-'%&0)#13()0U
####+)78)82)6#h#MLKL
####6-'3,#h#*%<HLNN0
####7%:-2#h#GJMI
LD ERROR 2-21
SYMPTOM:
LD error (code 2-21) happens when the power is turned on during the installation.
CAUSE:
The connection between the fiber optics cable and the FDU Board may have loosened during transportation.
SOLUTION:
Reconnect the fiber optics cable to the FDU Board with the following procedure below.
1. Remove the backside cover (4 screws).
2. Locate a gray color cable over the FDU.
3. Pull it lightly. You can feel the condition of the connection.
If it is removed easily, the connection was not completely inserted.
4. Reinstall the connector completely and assemble the cover.
NOTE: You should feel a click when reinserting the connector if it is being set correctly.
CONTROL NO. 165
ELECTRICAL

SUBJECT:
8)',2-'%0#7)6:-')#&900)8-2
&900)8-2#291&)6U
,IEIf,IIE#g#NEG
NLfEGfMM
%440-'%&0)#13()0U
####+)78)82)6#h#MKJL
####6-'3,#h#*%<HKNN0
####7%:-2#h#GJMN
PCB - MFCE
GENERAL:
PARTS

SUBJECT:
The following parts corrections are being issued for all H515 Parts Catalogs.
OLD PART NO.

H5156282
NEW PART NO.

H5156292
DESCRIPTION
PCB - MFCE - US
QTY
1-1
INT
0
REFERENCE
PAGE ITEM
4
14
0
1
3/S

2
NEW machines.
3
CONTROL NO. 170

BULLETIN NUMBER:
H515/H551 - 014
03/06/2000
APPLICABLE MODEL:
GESTETNER 9878
RICOH FAX4800L
SAVIN 3695
GENERAL
INFORMATION

SUBJECT:
INTERNET FAX OPTION INSTALLATION
GENERAL:
When the Internet Fax Option is installed in the H551, the Firmware must be upgraded to support this option.
To upgrade the H551 Firmware, four (4) EPROMs that are shipped with the Internet Fax Option must be
used in conjunction with the EPROM Board (P/N: H515 9500) and Flash/SRAM Data Copy Tool
(P/N: H515 9100). Please refer to page 4-13 of the H551 Field Service Manual for information on
downloading software to the MFCE.
When the Internet Fax Option Flash ROM data is downloaded locally using Service Function 12, all
programmed data is erased, (i.e. quick dials, speed dials, RTI/TTI/CSI, etc). To prevent this from happening,
contact the Technical Support Division and request that the Internet Fax Option software to be downloaded
remotely using RDS (Remote Diagnosis System).
CONTROL NO 180FAX

BULLETIN NUMBER:
H515/H551 - 015
03/27/00
APPLICABLE MODEL:
GESTETNER 9878
RICOH FAX4800L
SAVIN 3695
SERVICE PARTS FOR G3 AND ISDN OPTIONS
PARTS

SUBJECT:
GENERAL:
This parts information is for the model H551 optional G3 unit and ISDN unit. The following items listed are
available as service parts.
G3 INTERFACE UNIT (H133)
Continued
CONTROL NO 181FAX
Tech Service Bulletin No. H551 015

Page 2 of 3
G3 INTERFACE UNIT (H133) continued
PART NO.
H1334011
16070576
DESCRIPTION
Harness - Connector
Bracket - Connector
Sleeve Core - SFC - 8
H5153183
Stay - G4
H1433335
Earth Clip
H5516022
PCB - OPIF - SG3
H1335300
H5235350
H1333184
Telehpone Cable (USA model only)

Decal - Line 2
8
9
54886032
PCB - NCU G3 Option - USA
10
54886052
PCB - NCU G3 Option - EUR/Asia
10
54886072
PCB - NCU G3 Option - FRA
10
H5153186
Ground Plate - G4
11
H1336030
PCB - SG3 V34 - USA
12
H1336032
PCB - SG3 V34 - EUR/FRA/Asia
13
H1333182
Stay SG3 V34

Harness - NCU 1 (15 pin) - USA
Harness - NCU 1 (15 pin) - EUR/FRA/Asia
Harness - NCU 2 (5 pin) (Not used in the USA model.)
Philips Screw with Flat Washer - M3 x 6
14
H5515319
H5215309
H5215339
H5515362
09513006B
PAGE
ITEM
1
2
3
15
101
NOTE: EUR:= Europe model, FRA =: French model
Continued
Tech Service Bulletin No. H551 015

Page 3 of 3
ISDN UNIT (H143)
PART NO.
DESCRIPTION
PAGE
ITEM
H1435701
ISDN Harness
H5153183
H1433335
Stay - G4
Earth Clip
2
3
H5516020
PCB - OPIF
H1435300
H5134102
Decal - ISDN
H5153149
Board Bracket
H0826034
H0826035
H5153186
G4 Board - USA
G4 Board - EUR/FRA/Asia
Ground Plate - G4
8
9
H5155014
Ground Harness
10
H1433333
Board Stay - G4
11
H5155203
12
04523012Z
Interface Board - G4
(Used only when installing this option in the FX4.)
Stay - G4 - 2
(Used only when installing this option to the FX4.)
Bind Tapping Screw - 3 x 12
101
09513006B
Philips Screw with Flat Washer - M3 x 6
102
H5153184
13

BULLETIN NUMBER:
H515/H551 - 016
04/17/2000
APPLICABLE MODEL:
GESTETNER 9878
RICOH FAX4800L
SAVIN 3695
HARD DISK OPTION PROBLEM
SYMPTOM:
MECHANICAL

SUBJECT:
Memory transmission is not possible. After the Hard Disk Drive Option is installed.
Memory transmission is possible if the Hard Disk (HDD) is removed.
CAUSE:
The control signals, which are positioned between the FCU and the HD, are affected by electromagnetic
noise from the Data Bus. Due to these conditions there are cases where the data in the HD cannot be
loaded correctly.
The data bus and signal lines should not be placed in parallel and if possible not close to each other.
SOLUTION:
Note: See the attached 3 pages for the new installation procedure
OLD PART NO.

H1303012
H5515370
NEW PART NO.

H1303014
H5515372
DESCRIPTION
HDD Kit
Harness HDD 44P
QTY
1
1
REFERENCE
PAGE ITEM
35
7
35
3
CONTROL NO. 182FAX
ELECTRICAL
Replace old style HDD Harness (P/N H55115370) with the new style Harness (P/N H5515372). The two types
of Harnesses can be differentiated by the following characteristics:
1. The old style Harness has 4 Ferrite cores
2. The new style Harness has 2 Ferrite cores.
INSTALLATION MANUAL
- H551 series
This installation must only be done by qualified service personnel.

NOTE: If the optional G3 unit (G3 Interface Unit Type 140) is also to be installed,
install this option before installing the G3 unit.
CAUTION
2. Print out the lists of user-programmed items and the system parameter list.
1. Remove the rear cover [A] (4 screws), left

cover [B] (3 screws and the connector
cover), and the IC card slot cover [C].
[B]
[A]
[C]
2. Attach the bracket [D] to the hard disk

unit [E] (4 screws). Hook the grounding
plate [F] on the bracket and secure the
hard disk unit to the machine (2 screws).
[F]
[E]
[D]
[H]
3. Remove three screws to loosen the NCU bracket
[G]. (3 screws for Europe/Asia models, 1 screw
for USA model.)
NOTE: The grounding plate [H] is not installed in
the USA models.
[G]
4. Connect the HDD harness [I] and the harness [J] to the
hard disk interface card [K].
[I]
[J]
[K]
5. Turn on the battery switch [L] on the

hard disk interface card. Then insert
the hard disk interface card into the
upper card slot [M].
NOTE: Do not connect the 2-pin
harness [J] to the FDU at this
time.
6. Lead the harness containing the core
with the black marking [N] behind the
NCU bracket [G].
[O]
[G]
[N]
[J]
[L]
[M]
Important:
This is to avoid the hard disk data bus from interfered by the hard disk drive signal.
7. Connect the HDD harness to the hard disk unit [O].
8. Turn on the main switch and enter the service mode. Then do the following:
Set system bit switch 05 bit 4 to "1", system bit switch 00 bit 1 to 1, then exit the
service mode. The machine then does the RAM reset level 3.
Enter service function 16 and select 0 (INITIALIZE) to initialize the hard disk.
If OK is displayed, exit the service mode and turn off the main switch.
9. Connect the harness [J] (2 pins) from the hard disk interface card to CN73 on the
FDU.
10. Replace the screws which were removed in step 3.

11. Keep the core [O] and the harness as shown
and put back the rear cover and the left cover.
[O]
12. Turn on the main switch and enter the service mode.
Print the memory dump list (service function 06) of the following addresses and
data.
70001E(H) - 50(H)
700022(H) - 00(H)
70001F(H) - 00(H)
700023(H) - 00(H)
700020(H) - FF(H)
700024(H) - 00(H)
700021(H) - FF(H)
700025(H) - 80(H)
If any of these addresses contain a different value, format the hard disk
End of Procedure
CAUTION
The hard disk interface card contains a lithium battery. The danger of explosion
exists if a battery of this type is incorrectly replaced.
manufacturer. Discard used batteries in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions.

BULLETIN NUMBER:
H515/H551
H515/H551 - 017
05/08/2000
05/03/2000
MODEL:
APPLICABLE MODEL:
GESTETNER - 9878
RICOH FAX4800L
SAVIN - 3695
GENERAL:
The Service Manual page(s) listed below must be replaced with the page(s) supplied.
Each bulletin package contains 1 set of replacement pages.
Upgrade:
1) For the new Flash ROM chips which will be installed in future production units. (The upgrade
schedule for the new chips is not yet determined.)
2) Data cannot be input from the ten-key and quick dial keypads while some other key is being
pushed. (Data from a key being pushed could be input while other keys were being pushed.)
3) The following condition is added for the stamp. No stamping when in PC scan mode.
4) Dial tone detection is not effective. (This function was effective according to the regulations of
the Netherlands.)
An arrow has highlighted the revised areas.
PAGES:
ii
6 - 17
6 - 18
Table of Contents
Updated Information (ROM History)
Updated Information (ROM History)
Control No. 184FAX

SERVICE
MANUAL

SUBJECT:
Rev.04/2000
4.1.12.
4.1.13.
4.1.14.
4.1.15.
4.1.16.
4.1.17.
4.1.18.
4.1.19.
4.1.20.
4.1.21.
4.1.22.
4.1.23.
4.1.24.
4.1.25.
4.1.26.
4.1.27.
4.1.28.
4.1.29.
4.1.30.
4.1.31.
4.1.32.
4.1.33.
4.2.
4.2.
4.2.2.
4..2.3.
4.2.4.
4.2.5.
4.3.
4.4.
4.4.1.
4.4.2.
4.5.
Modern Detection Test (Function08).....................................................4-8

Ringer Test (Function 08) .....................................................................4-9
Operation Panel Test (Function 09)
.................4-9
Xenon Lamp Test (Functio10).. .......................................................4-10
ADF Test (Function 10) ...................................................................4-10
Printer Test Pattern (Function 11)
4-11
Scanner and Printer Mechanism Test Free Run (Function 11).........4-11
Ram Test (Function 12)...................................................................4-12
Software Download (Function 12).. .................................................4-13
Software Upload (Function 12)........................................................4-15
SRAM Data Download (Function 12) .............................................. 4-17
Modem Software Upload (function 12)................................................4-19
Optional G3 Board Software Download ..............................................4-21
Optional G3 Board Modem Software Download .................................4-23
Saving Data Programmed in IC Cards................................................4-25
Service Station Fax Number (Function 13) .........................................4-27
Serial Number (Function 14) ...............................................................4-27
Hard Disk Initialization (Function 16) .............................. ..4-28
Hard Disk Formatting (Function16).. ...............................................4-29
Hard Disk Test (Functin16)..............................................................4-29
G4 Parameter Programming (Function17) ......................................4-30
Printing Confidential Files................................................................4-31
BIT SWITCHES.. .....................................4-31

System Switches .............................................................................4-31
Scanner Switches............................................................................4-45
Printer Switches ..............................................................................4-47
Communication Switches ................................................................4-50
G3 Switches ................................................................................4-58
NCU PARAMETERS.......................................................................4-66
DEDICATED TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS .............................4-76
Programming Procedure .................................................................4-76
Parameters......................................................................................4-77
SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES ........................................................4-80
5. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE ..........................................................5-1

5.1.
5.2.
Special Tools and Lubricants .............................................................5-1

PM Table ............................................................................................5-1
6. TROUBLESHOOTING..........................................................................6-1
6.1.
6.2.
6.3.
6.4.
SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS ..........................................................6-1

ERROR CODES.................................................................................6-2
Modem Status Codes in V.34 Protocol Dump ..................................6-12
ROM History.....................................................................................6-17
7. PARTS CATALOG....................................................7-1
H551
ii
SM
Rev. 04/2000
6.4 ROM HISTORY

Firmware
Level
Production
Date
H5517210B
1. When only a name was registered in a Group it

could not be erased.
2. Memory Tx through PCFAX could not be done when
programmed in quick dial for use by PC in the H551
H5517210C
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
SM
Correction of the following minor software problems:

RDS
Programmed telephone dials at Speed Dial no. 35 to
99 could not be cleared by RDS.
NCU parameters could not be initialized by Level 2
RAM clear mode.
G4 mode
Type of network (ex. CiG4) was not printed on the
service monitor report if an error occurred before
starting the transmission of the first image data.
G4 mode
Polling transmission was not successful when the ID
was not matched but OK was printed and the
symbol of the polling mode did not appear on the
TCR.
PCFE When PC memory reception was set and
over 64Kbyte data per page was received, the
received data could not be sent from the FR4 to the
PC. (with Win98 / Winphone)
PCFE
In the PC memory transmission mode, transmission
was not done if the number of dial digit is over 35.
(with WinFAXPRO8.0)
G4 mode
When the transfer request with department code
was done, name of the department was not sent
with the transmitted documents.
G4 mode
System was reset when the communication was
continued over one hour.
G4 mode
Own CIL clock information was printed on the
received pages when the year 2000 was set at the
transmission terminal.
6-17
H551
Rev. 04/2000

Firmware
Level
H5517210D
Production
Date
Dec. 1999
Production
1) Quality improvement of the dial tone detection

2) For the new FCC Standard, Redial # 4 1.
H551
6-18
SM

BULLETIN NUMBER:
H515/H551 - 018
09/29/2000
MODEL:
APPLICABLE MODEL:
GESTETNER 9768/9878
RICOH FAX4700L/4800L
SAVIN 3960/3695
HARD DRIVE & HARNESS
GENERAL:
!
PARTS

SUBJECT:
The following parts corrections are being issued for all H515 and H551 Parts Catalogs.
OLD PART NO.

NEW PART NO.
H1303012
H1303014
H5515370
H5515372
DENOTES NEW ITEM NUMBER
*
DESCRIPTION
HDD Kit
Harness HDD-44P
QTY
1
1
INT
0
0
REFERENCE
PAGE ITEM
35
7*
35
3
NOTE: Refer to TSB H515/H551 016 for additional information on the Hard Disk Drive.
CONTROL NO. 190FAX

BULLETIN NUMBER:
H515/H551 - 019
10/23/2000
MODEL:
APPLICABLE MODEL:
GESTETNER 9768/9878
SAVIN 3690/3695
POLYETHYLENE SHEET & NEEDLE ROLLER BEARING
GENERAL:
PARTS

SUBJECT:
The following parts corrections are being issued for all H515 and H551 Parts Catalog.
OLD PART NO.

H5151342
NEW PART NO.

H5511342
08053386
H5151348
DESCRIPTION
Antistatic Brush
Polyethylene Sheet
Bushing 8mm
Needle Roller Bearing 4x8x8
QTY
1-0
0-1
1-0
0-1
INT
-0
-1
REFERENCE
PAGE ITEM
7
33
7
33
10
110
10
110
0
1
3/S

2
NEW machines.
3
CONTROL NO. 191FAX

BULLETIN NUMBER:
H515/H551 - 020
12/11/2000
MODEL:
APPLICABLE MODEL:
GESTETNER 9768/9878
SAVIN 3690/3695
HD OPTION
GENERAL:
The following parts update is being issued for both H515/H551 Parts Catalogs and Service Manuals.
!
PARTS
HD Interface board
!
SERVICE
MANUAL

SUBJECT:
OLD PART NO.

H1303014
NEW PART NO.

H1303016
H5516060
DESCRIPTION
HDD Kit
HD-IF Board
QTY
1-1
0-1
INT
0
REFERENCE
PAGE ITEM
35
7
35
8*
Note: An * denotes a new Item.

Note: A small HD IF PCB has been added to the HDD Kit. See the attached Installation Manual page 3 of 4
item O (The board now comes packed with the HD Option).
UNITS AFFECTED:
All H515/551 units manufactured after the September production run will have the new style HD Option
installed during production.
0
1
3/S

2
NEW machines.
3
Continued
CONTROL NO. 191FAX
Tech Service Bulletin No. H515/H551 020

Page 2 of 2
GENERAL:
The Service Manual pages listed below must be replaced with the pages supplied. Each bulletin package
contains 1 set of replacement pages.
An arrow has highlighted the revised areas .
PAGES:
3-3, 3-4, 3-5
Updated Information (FEATURE EXPANDER TYPE 140 80M III)
Rev. 11/2000
3.3 FEATURE EXPANDER TYPE 140 80M III

- H551 series
ONLY QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL MAY DO THIS INSTALLATION.

!CAUTION
2. Print out the lists of user-programmed items and the System Parameter List.
3. Turn off the Main Switch, and disconnect the power plug.
NOTE:

For the Function Upgrade Card and Fax on Demand Card, be sure to read section
3.3.9, after installation.
Installation
1.
Remove the Rear Cover [A] (4 screws),

Left Cover [B] (3 screws and the
connector Cover), and the IC Card slot
Cover [C].
[B]
[A]
[C]
H130i501.WMF
2. Attach the bracket [D] to the Hard Disk

Unit [E] (4 screws). Hook the Grounding
Plate [F] on the bracket and secure the
Hard Disk Unit to the machine (2
screws).
[F]
[E]
SM
3-3
[D]
H551
Rev. 11/2000
[H]
3. Remove three screws to loosen the NCU
bracket [G]. (3 screws for Europe/Asia
models, 1 screw for USA model.)
NOTE: The Grounding Plate [H] is not
installed in the USA models.
4. Connect the HDD Harness [I] and the
Harness [J] to the Hard Disk Interface
Card [K].
[G]
[I]
[J]
5. Turn on the Battery switch [L] on the Hard

Disk Interface Card. Then insert the Hard
Disk Interface Card into the upper Card
Slot [M].
[K]
NOTE: Do not connect the 2-pin Harness [J] to the FDU at this time.
[P]
[G]
[O]
6. Lead the Harness containing the core with the

black marking [N] behind the NCU bracket [G].
Important:
This is to avoid the Hard Disk Data Bus from
interfering with the Hard Disk Drive Signal.
7. Connect the HDD harness to the Interface
Board [O], then connect the Interface
Board to the Hard Disk Unit [P].
[N]
[L]
8. Turn on the Main Switch and enter the Service Mode. Then do the following:
Set the System Bit Switch 05 bit 4 to 1, and System Bit Switch 00 bit 1 to 1, then
exit the Service Mode. The machine then does the RAM reset level 3.
Enter service function 16 and select 0 (INITIALIZE) to initialize the Hard Disk.
If OK is displayed, exit the Service Mode and turn off the Main Switch.
9. Connect the harness [J] (2 pins) from the Hard Disk Interface Card to CN73 on the
FDU.
10. Replace the screws, which were removed in step 3.
H551
3-4
SM
Rev. 11/2000
11. Keep the Core [Q] and the Harness as shown and replace the Rear Cover and the Left
Cover.
Installation
[Q]
12. Turn on the Main Switch and enter the Service Mode.
Print the Memory Dump List (service function 06) for the following addresses and data.
70001E(H) - 50(H)
70001F(H) - 00(H)
700020(H) - FF(H)
700021(H) - FF(H)
700022(H) - 00(H)
700023(H) - 00(H)
700024(H) - 00(H)
700025(H) - 80(H)
If any of these addresses contain a value different from the above list, format the Hard
Disk
CAUTION
The Hard Disk Interface Card contains a Lithium Battery. The danger of an
explosion exists if a Battery of this type is incorrectly replaced.
manufacturer. Discard used batteries in accordance with the manufacturers
instructions.
SM
3-5
H551

BULLETIN NUMBER:
H515/H551 - 021
12/11/2000
MODEL:
APPLICABLE MODEL:
GESTETNER 9768/9878
SAVIN 3690/3695
SCANNER
GENERAL:
!
PARTS

SUBJECT:
The following parts corrections are being issued for all H515 and H551 Parts Catalogs.
INCORRECT NO.
H5151062
CORRECT NO.
H5151080
DESCRIPTION
Bushing R1/R2 Roller
QTY
2-2
INT
1
REFERENCE
PAGE ITEM
11
14
CONTROL NO. 192FAX

U

IEIf IIE g NFF
NGfFLfFNNE

U
U
h MKJLfMLKL
h HKNNfHLNN
h GMJNfGJMI
SUB DEVELOPMENT UNIT
GENERAL:
EXCLUDES
ITEM # 58 & 32
NOTE
Item number 30 on page 17 of the parts catalog is also included with

the Sub Development Unit A4
OLD PART NO.

H5159810
NOTE
NEW PART NO.

H5159811
DESCRIPTION
Sub Development Unit A4
QTY
1-1
REFERENCE
PAGE ITEM
15
5
CONTROL NO.196FAX
PARTS
A new Sub Development Unit has been registered as a spare part. Please note the item number 32 & 58
are not included with the Sub unit. The following part addition is being issued for all H515/H551 Parts
Catalogs.

SUBJECT:

BULLETIN NUMBER:
H515/H551 - 022 REISSUE !
11/20/2001
MODEL:
APPLICABLE MODEL:
GESTETNER 9768/9878
SAVIN 3960/3695
GENERAL:
EXCLUDES
ITEM # 58 & 32
NOTE
Item number 30 on page 17 of the parts catalog is also included with

the Sub Development Unit A4
OLD PART NO.

H5159810
NEW PART NO.

H5159811
DESCRIPTION
QTY
1-1
REFERENCE
PAGE ITEM
15
5
CONTROL NO.200FAX
PARTS
A new Sub Development Unit has been registered as a spare part. Please note the item number 32 & 58
are not included with the Sub unit. The following part addition is being issued for all H515/H551 Parts
Catalogs.

SUBJECT:

U
IEIfIIEgNFF +
NHfFHfFNNF
U

hMKJLfMLKL
h
HKNNfHLNN
hGMJNfGJMI
GENERAL:
OLD PART NO.

H5159810
NOTE
NEW PART NO.

H5159811
DESCRIPTION
QTY
1-1
REFERENCE
PAGE ITEM
15
5
The sub development unit dose not come with the main motor assembly, rubber roller assembly, or
the transfer roller assembly. The part number for the complete development unit assembly is
H5159571.
CONTROL NO.203FAX
PARTS
A new sub development unit has been registered as a spare part. Please note the item number 32 & 58 are
not included with the sub unit. The following part addition is being issued for all H515/H551 Parts Catalogs.

SUBJECT:

U
IEIfIIEgNFF +
07/10/2002
U

hMKJLfMLKL
h
HKNNfHLNN
hGMJNfGJMI
GENERAL:
OLD PART NO.

H5159810
NOTE
NEW PART NO.

H5159811
DESCRIPTION
QTY
1-1
REFERENCE
PAGE ITEM
15
5
The sub development unit does not come with the main motor assembly, rubber roller assembly, or
the transfer roller assembly.
PARTS
A new sub development unit has been registered as a spare part. Please note the item number 32 & 58 are
not included with the sub unit. The following part addition is being issued for all H515/H551 Parts Catalogs.

SUBJECT:

BULLETIN NUMBER:
H515/H551 - 022 REISSUE
03/17/2003
APPLICABLE MODEL:
GESTETNER 9768/9878
SAVIN 3960/3695
GENERAL:
The sub development unit has been discontinued as a spare part. Please note that the complete
development unit assembly is available as a service part. The following parts catalog correction is being
issued for all H515/H551 Parts Catalogs.
OLD PART NO.

H5159811
NEW PART NO.

H5159571
DESCRIPTION
QTY
1-0
1
REFERENCE
PAGE ITEM
15
5
15
6
PARTS

SUBJECT:

BULLETIN NUMBER:
H515/H551 - 023
03/10/2003
APPLICABLE MODEL:
GESTETNER 9768/9878
SAVIN 3960/3695
GENERAL:
To improve reliability the toner end sensor has been changed.
The following parts update is being issued for all H515/H551 Parts Catalogs.
PARTS

SUBJECT: TONER END SENSOR
12
OLD PART NO.

H5155050
NEW PART NO.

H3125062
DESCRIPTION
Toner End Sensor
QTY
1
INT
1
REFERENCE
PAGE ITEM
25
12
0
1
3/S

2
NEW machines.
3
Copyright 2003 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved.

BULLETIN NUMBER:
H515/H551 - 024
09/18/2003
APPLICABLE MODEL:
GESTETNER 9878
LANIER NA
RICOH FAX 4800L
SAVIN 3695
SUBJECT: SC3 - 31
GENERAL:
SYMPTOM:
Polygon Mirror Motor error: SC 3-31.
CAUSE:
The edge of the Polygon Mirror Motor shaft can sometimes contact the Mylar, affixed to the underside of the
laser unit (H5522042), causing a reaction between the Mylars adhesive and the oil inside the shaft,
triggering SC3-31.
ACTION:
Production line:
The shape of the Mylar has been changed to ensure a gap between the Mylar and motor shaft. In addition,
the adhesive is not applied to the center of the Mylar (the area just below the shaft).
In the field:
Replace with the modified Polygon Mirror Motor, which includes the modified Mylar.
Page 1 of 2
PARTS
When installing for the first time, be sure to replace the new motor and Mylar together as a set.
The Polygon Mirror Motor itself has not been changed. The new P/N (H5529100) consists of the same motor
plus the new Mylar.
Tech Service Bulletin No. H515/H551024
The following parts updates are being issued for all H515/ H551Parts Catalogs.
OLD PART NO.

H5522042
H5525040
NOTE:
MODEL H551
NEW PART NO.
DESCRIPTION
H5522045
Laser Plotter Unit
H5529100
Polygon Mirror Motor
QTY
1
1
INT
3/S
3/S
REFERENCE
PAGE ITEM
1-13
1
1-13
5
Replace the new Motor and Mylar together as a set.
0
1
3/S

2
NEW machines.
3
Page 2 of 2

BULLETIN NUMBER:
H515/H551 025
02/24/2004
APPLICABLE MODEL:
GESTETNER 9768/9878
LANIER LF7560/LF7570
SAVIN 3960/3695
SUBJECT: LASER UNIT
GENERAL:
NOTE:
The following change is an additional measure to ensure that the SC3-31 (See TSB
H515/H551 024) does not occur, since contact between the Mylar and motor shaft is already
prevented in the older units by the gap between the two parts.
OLD PART NO.

H5152045
NEW PART NO.

H5152047
DESCRIPTION
Laser Unit
QTY
1
INT
1
REFERENCE
PAGE ITEM
13
1
UNITS AFFECTED:
The serial number cut-in information was not available at time of this publication.
0
1
3/S

2
NEW machines.
3
Page 1 of 1
PARTS
The adhesive material for the Mylar on the underside of the Laser Unit has been changed to further
ensure that the polygon mirror motor oil does not react with the adhesive. The following part update is
being issued for all H515/H551 Parts Catalogs.

4700L Service Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

4700L Service Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

H515/H551

RICOH GROUP COMPANIES

2000 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved.

H551 (FAX4800L) Addition

H132 Internet Fax Addition

1.3. COMPONENT LAYOUT . .

1.4. OVERALL MACHINE CONTROL

1.5. VIDEO DATA PATH . . . . . . . . . . .

1.6. POWER DISTRIBUTION . . . . . . .

DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS

1. Sub Scan Resolution Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

2.1.3. Video Processing . . . . . . . . .

2.1.6. Process with Halftone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12

3. Halftone process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12

3. Error Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18

5. Toner Saving Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19

2. Paper Lift Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29

2.2.13. Resolution Unit Selection for Printing

3. Periodic Service Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59

5. Effective Term of Service Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60

2.4. PCBs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-69

3. Modem (Rockwell R144EFXL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-69

10. Oscillators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70

3. EXIO1, EXIO2 (External I/O) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73

6. DC/DC Converters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73

8. Interlock Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73

3.3. INSTALLING OPTIONAL UNITS . . . . . . .

SERVICE TABLES AND PROCEDURES

2. When replacing the MFCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19

4.4. DEDICATED TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . 4-78

REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

5.2. ADF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

5.2.2. Separation Rubber Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

5.4. LASER PRINTING COMPONENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12

5.7. PAPER FEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.9. OTHERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32

5.10. 100 SHEET PAPER CASSETTE (OPTIONAL) .

5.11. SBU ADJUSTMENT

5.12. IMAGE ADJUSTMENT .

6.2. MECHANICAL PROBLEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18

6.2.2. Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21

6.3. SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS

6.4. ERROR CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30

ISDN TYPE 140

2.2. BIT SWITCHES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

3.2. G4CCU STATUS CODES * . . . . . . . . . . .

3.3. LEDs * . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9

A. D-Channel Layer 1 Dump List

2. Activation Procedure from the NT . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8

2. Default Communication Mode

3. Network Used for G3 Transmission

4. Network Used for G3 transmission in G4-to-G3 Fallback . . . B-2

PRINTER INTERFACE TYPE 100

1.3. BLOCK DIAGRAM AND DATA PATH . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

2.3. VIDEO INTERFACE . .

3.1. PRINTER INTERFACE UNIT . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2. SIMM MEMORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

3.3. OTHER OPTIONS (User Installable Items) . . . . . . . . . 3-5

3.4. CONNECTING UP THE PRINTER INTERFACE UNIT . . . . . 3-6

2. Printer Driver for DOS Applications . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

4. SERVICE TABLES AND PROCEDURES

4.2. SERVICE LEVEL FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

4.4. RAM ADDRESSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4